 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| REJ09B0276-0400 The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page. The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and additions. Details should always be checked by referring to the relevant text. 16 H8/3067 Group Hardware Manual Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer H8 Family/H8/300H Series H8/3067 H8/3066 H8/3065 H8/3067RF Rev. 4.00 Revision Date: Jan 26, 2006 Keep safety first in your circuit designs! 1. Renesas Technology Corp. puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage. Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap. Notes regarding these materials 1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corp. product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corp. or a third party. 2. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any thirdparty's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained in these materials. 3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp. without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein. The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors. Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp. by various means, including the Renesas Technology Corp. Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com). 4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein. 5. Renesas Technology Corp. semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use. 6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp. is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials. 7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination. Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the country of destination is prohibited. 8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. for further details on these materials or the products contained therein. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page ii of xxii Preface The H8/3067 Group is a series of high-performance single-chip microcontrollers that integrate system supporting functions together with an H8/300H CPU core. The H8/300H CPU has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. It can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space. The on-chip supporting functions include ROM, RAM, 16-bit timers, 8-bit timers, a programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), a watchdog timer (WDT), a serial communication interface (SCI), an A/D converter, a D/A converter, I/O ports, a DMA controller (DMAC), and other facilities. The three-channel SCI has been expanded to support the ISO/IEC7816-3 smart card interface. Functions have also been added to reduce power consumption in battery-powered applications: individual modules can be placed in standby, and the frequency of the system clock supplied to the chip can be divided down under software control. The address space is divided into eight areas. The data bus width and access cycle length can be selected independently in each area, simplifying the connection of different types of memory. Seven MCU operating modes (modes 1 to 7) are provided, offering a choice of data bus width and address space size. With these features, the H8/3067 Group offers easy implementation of compact, high-performance systems. In addition to its mask ROM versions, the H8/3067 Group has an F-ZTATTM* version with onchip flash memory that can be programmed on-board. This version enables users to respond quickly and flexibly to changing application specifications. This manual describes the H8/3067 Group hardware. For details of the instruction set, refer to the H8/300H Series Programming Manual. Note: * F-ZTATTM (Flexible ZTAT) is a registered trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page iii of xxii Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page iv of xxii Main Revisions in This Edition Item All Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Company name changed All references to Hitachi, Hitachi, Ltd., Hitachi Semiconductors, and other Hitachi brand names changed to Renesas Technology Corp. Designation for categories changed from "series" to "group" Designation changed H8/3067 Series H8/3067 Group Changes due to change in package codes FP-100A PRQP0100JE-B FP-100B PRQP0100KA-A TFP-100B PTQP0100KA-A 1.1 Overview Table 1.1 Features 1.4.2 Product Type Names and Markings 6.3.5 Address Output Method 7.2.2 I/O Address Registers (IOAR) -- 150 215 6 Table amended Product lineup: HD64F3067F, HD64F3067TE, HD64F3067FP deleted Deleted Title amended Description amended An IOAR functions as a source or destination address register depending on how the DMAC is activated: as a source address register if activation is by a receive-data-full interrupt from serial communication interface (SCI) channel 0 or by an A/D converter conversion-end interrupt, and as a destination address register otherwise. 231 Table amended Function Activated by SCI 0 Receive-Data-Full Interrupt or by A/D Converter Register Conversion-End Interrupt 7.4.2 I/O Mode Table 7.6 Register Functions in I/O Mode Other Activation Initial Setting Operation Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page v of xxii Item 7.4.3 Idle Mode Table 7.7 Register Functions in Idle Mode Page 234 Revision (See Manual for Details) Table amended Function Activated by SCI 0 Receive-Data-Full Interrupt or by A/D Converter Register Conversion-End Interrupt Other Activation Initial Setting Operation 7.4.4 Repeat Mode Table 7.8 Register Functions in Repeat Mode 237 Table amended Function Activated by SCI 0 Receive-Data-Full Interrupt or by A/D Converter Register Conversion-End Interrupt Other Activation Initial Setting Operation 18.4 On-Board Programming Modes Table 18.6 Setting On-Board Programming Modes 621 Table amended Mode Boot mode mode 5 mode 7 User program mode mode 5 mode 7 FWE 1 1* MD2 2 0* MD1 0 1 0 1 MD0 1 1 1 1 Notes 0 : VIL 1 : VIH 0*2 1 1 B.2 Functions ADRCR Appendix F Product Code Lineup 803 926 Note deleted Table amended Product Code: HD64F3067F, HD64F3067TE and HD64F3067FP deleted Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page vi of xxii Contents Section 1 Overview............................................................................................................. 1.1 1.2 1.3 Overview........................................................................................................................... Block Diagram .................................................................................................................. Pin Description.................................................................................................................. 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement .................................................................................................. 1.3.2 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 1.3.3 Pin Assignments in Each Mode ........................................................................... Notes on Flash Memory R Version Model ....................................................................... 1.4.1 Pin Arrangement .................................................................................................. 1.4.2 Differences in Flash Memory R Version ............................................................. 1 1 7 8 8 10 16 21 21 21 1.4 Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 23 2.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 2.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU ............................................................................ CPU Operating Modes ...................................................................................................... Address Space................................................................................................................... Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 2.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.4.2 General Registers ................................................................................................. 2.4.3 Control Registers ................................................................................................. 2.4.4 Initial CPU Register Values................................................................................. Data Formats..................................................................................................................... 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................ 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ......................................................................................... Instruction Set ................................................................................................................... 2.6.1 Instruction Set Overview ..................................................................................... 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes ..................................................................... 2.6.3 Tables of Instructions Classified by Function...................................................... 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats .................................................................................... 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit Manipulation Instructions.................................................... Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation ..................................................... 2.7.1 Addressing Modes ............................................................................................... 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation ............................................................................. Processing States............................................................................................................... 2.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.8.2 Program Execution State...................................................................................... 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State .................................................................................... 23 23 24 25 26 27 27 28 29 30 31 31 32 34 34 35 36 45 46 48 48 50 54 54 55 55 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page vii of xxii 2.9 2.8.4 Exception-Handling Sequences ........................................................................... 2.8.5 Bus-Released State............................................................................................... 2.8.6 Reset State............................................................................................................ 2.8.7 Power-Down State ............................................................................................... Basic Operational Timing ................................................................................................. 2.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory Access Timing........................................................................ 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing ...................................................... 2.9.4 Access to External Address Space ....................................................................... 57 58 58 59 60 60 60 61 62 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes .................................................................................. 63 3.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................... 3.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Mode Control Register (MDCR) ...................................................................................... System Control Register (SYSCR) ................................................................................... Operating Mode Descriptions ........................................................................................... 3.4.1 Mode 1 ................................................................................................................. 3.4.2 Mode 2 ................................................................................................................. 3.4.3 Mode 3 ................................................................................................................. 3.4.4 Mode 4 ................................................................................................................. 3.4.5 Mode 5 ................................................................................................................. 3.4.6 Mode 6 ................................................................................................................. 3.4.7 Mode 7 ................................................................................................................. Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................ Memory Map in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................ 3.6.1 Note on Reserved Areas....................................................................................... 63 63 64 65 66 68 68 68 68 69 69 69 69 70 71 71 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 Section 4 Exception Handling ......................................................................................... 79 4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority............................................................... 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation............................................................................. 4.1.3 Exception Vector Table ....................................................................................... Reset ................................................................................................................................. 4.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 4.2.2 Reset Sequence .................................................................................................... 4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................ Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... Trap Instruction................................................................................................................. Stack Status after Exception Handling.............................................................................. Notes on Stack Usage ....................................................................................................... 79 79 79 80 82 82 82 85 86 87 88 89 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page viii of xxii Section 5 Interrupt Controller .......................................................................................... 91 5.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 5.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 5.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 5.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 5.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 5.2.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A and B (IPRA, IPRB)............................................. 5.2.3 IRQ Status Register (ISR).................................................................................... 5.2.4 IRQ Enable Register (IER) .................................................................................. 5.2.5 IRQ Sense Control Register (ISCR) .................................................................... Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 5.3.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts................................................................................................. 5.3.3 Interrupt Vector Table.......................................................................................... Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................ 5.4.1 Interrupt Handling Process................................................................................... 5.4.2 Interrupt Sequence ............................................................................................... 5.4.3 Interrupt Response Time...................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 5.5.1 Contention between Interrupt and Interrupt-Disabling Instruction ...................... 5.5.2 Instructions that Inhibit Interrupts........................................................................ 5.5.3 Interrupts during EEPMOV Instruction Execution.............................................. 91 91 92 93 93 94 94 95 102 103 104 105 105 106 106 110 110 115 116 117 117 118 118 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 Section 6 Bus Controller ................................................................................................... 119 6.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 6.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 6.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 6.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 6.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 6.2.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)............................................................... 6.2.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) ............................................................. 6.2.3 Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL).............................................. 6.2.4 Bus Release Control Register (BRCR) ................................................................ 6.2.5 Bus Control Register (BCR) ................................................................................ 6.2.6 Chip Select Control Register (CSCR).................................................................. 6.2.7 DRAM Control Register A (DRCRA) ................................................................. 6.2.8 DRAM Control Register B (DRCRB) ................................................................. 6.2.9 Refresh Timer Control/Status Register (RTMCSR) ............................................ 119 119 121 122 123 124 124 125 125 130 132 134 135 137 140 6.2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page ix of xxii 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.2.10 Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT)........................................................................ 6.2.11 Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR) ......................................................... 6.2.12 Address Control Register (ADRCR) (Provided Only in Flash Memory R Version and Mask ROM Versions) ............ Operation .......................................................................................................................... 6.3.1 Area Division ....................................................................................................... 6.3.2 Bus Specifications................................................................................................ 6.3.3 Memory Interfaces ............................................................................................... 6.3.4 Chip Select Signals .............................................................................................. 6.3.5 Address Output Method....................................................................................... Basic Bus Interface ........................................................................................................... 6.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 6.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment............................................................................. 6.4.3 Valid Strobes........................................................................................................ 6.4.4 Memory Areas ..................................................................................................... 6.4.5 Basic Bus Control Signal Timing ........................................................................ 6.4.6 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ DRAM Interface ............................................................................................................... 6.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 6.5.2 DRAM Space and RAS Output Pin Settings ....................................................... 6.5.3 Address Multiplexing........................................................................................... 6.5.4 Data Bus............................................................................................................... 6.5.5 Pins Used for DRAM Interface............................................................................ 6.5.6 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 6.5.7 Precharge State Control ....................................................................................... 6.5.8 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ 6.5.9 Byte Access Control and CAS Output Pin........................................................... 6.5.10 Burst Operation.................................................................................................... 6.5.11 Refresh Control.................................................................................................... 6.5.12 Examples of Use .................................................................................................. 6.5.13 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................... Interval Timer ................................................................................................................... 6.6.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... Burst ROM Interface......................................................................................................... 6.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 6.8.2 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 6.8.3 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ Idle Cycle .......................................................................................................................... 6.9.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 6.9.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle ........................................................................................ 141 142 143 144 144 147 148 148 150 152 152 152 153 154 156 163 165 165 165 167 167 168 168 170 171 172 174 180 184 188 191 191 197 197 197 197 198 199 199 202 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page x of xxii 6.10 Bus Arbiter........................................................................................................................ 6.10.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 6.11 Register and Pin Input Timing .......................................................................................... 6.11.1 Register Write Timing ......................................................................................... 6.11.2 BREQ Pin Input Timing ...................................................................................... 203 203 206 206 207 Section 7 DMA Controller................................................................................................ 209 7.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 7.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 7.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 7.1.3 Functional Overview............................................................................................ 7.1.4 Input/Output Pins ................................................................................................. 7.1.5 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions (1) (Short Address Mode) .............................................................. 7.2.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR) ..................................................................... 7.2.2 I/O Address Registers (IOAR) ............................................................................. 7.2.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCR).......................................................... 7.2.4 Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR) ............................................................ Register Descriptions (2) (Full Address Mode) ................................................................ 7.3.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR) ..................................................................... 7.3.2 I/O Address Registers (IOAR) ............................................................................. 7.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCR).......................................................... 7.3.4 Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR) ............................................................ Operation .......................................................................................................................... 7.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 7.4.2 I/O Mode.............................................................................................................. 7.4.3 Idle Mode............................................................................................................. 7.4.4 Repeat Mode ........................................................................................................ 7.4.5 Normal Mode....................................................................................................... 7.4.6 Block Transfer Mode ........................................................................................... 7.4.7 DMAC Activation................................................................................................ 7.4.8 DMAC Bus Cycle ................................................................................................ 7.4.9 Multiple-Channel Operation ................................................................................ 7.4.10 External Bus Requests, DRAM Interface, and DMAC........................................ 7.4.11 NMI Interrupts and DMAC.................................................................................. 7.4.12 Aborting a DMAC Transfer................................................................................. 7.4.13 Exiting Full Address Mode.................................................................................. 7.4.14 DMAC States in Reset State, Standby Modes, and Sleep Mode ......................... Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 7.6.1 Note on Word Data Transfer................................................................................ 209 209 210 211 212 212 214 214 215 215 217 220 220 220 221 223 229 229 231 233 236 240 243 248 250 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 263 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xi of xxii 7.6.2 7.6.3 7.6.4 7.6.5 7.6.6 7.6.7 7.6.8 7.6.9 DMAC Self-Access ............................................................................................. Longword Access to Memory Address Registers ................................................ Note on Full Address Mode Setup ....................................................................... Note on Activating DMAC by Internal Interrupts ............................................... NMI Interrupts and Block Transfer Mode ........................................................... Memory and I/O Address Register Values .......................................................... Bus Cycle when Transfer is Aborted ................................................................... Transfer Requests by A/D Converter................................................................... 263 263 263 264 265 265 266 267 Section 8 I/O Ports .............................................................................................................. 269 8.1 8.2 Overview........................................................................................................................... Port 1................................................................................................................................. 8.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.2.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 8.3 Port 2................................................................................................................................. 8.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.3.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 8.4 Port 3................................................................................................................................. 8.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.4.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 8.5 Port 4................................................................................................................................. 8.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.5.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 8.6 Port 5................................................................................................................................. 8.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.6.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 8.7 Port 6................................................................................................................................. 8.7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.7.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 8.8 Port 7................................................................................................................................. 8.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.8.2 Register Description............................................................................................. 8.9 Port 8................................................................................................................................. 8.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.9.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 8.10 Port 9................................................................................................................................. 8.10.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.10.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 8.11 Port A................................................................................................................................ 8.11.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.11.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 269 272 272 273 275 275 276 279 279 279 281 281 282 285 285 286 289 289 290 293 293 294 295 295 296 301 301 302 306 306 308 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xii of xxii 8.12 Port B ................................................................................................................................ 317 8.12.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 317 8.12.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................... 319 Section 9 16-Bit Timer....................................................................................................... 327 9.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 9.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 9.1.2 Block Diagrams ................................................................................................... 9.1.3 Input/Output Pins ................................................................................................. 9.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 9.2.1 Timer Start Register (TSTR)................................................................................ 9.2.2 Timer Synchro Register (TSNC) ......................................................................... 9.2.3 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) ............................................................................ 9.2.4 Timer Interrupt Status Register A (TISRA)......................................................... 9.2.5 Timer Interrupt Status Register B (TISRB) ......................................................... 9.2.6 Timer Interrupt Status Register C (TISRC) ......................................................... 9.2.7 Timer Counters (TCNT) ...................................................................................... 9.2.8 General Registers (GRA, GRB)........................................................................... 9.2.9 Timer Control Registers (TCR) ........................................................................... 9.2.10 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) ..................................................................... 9.2.11 Timer Output Level Setting Register C (TOLR) ................................................. CPU Interface.................................................................................................................... 9.3.1 16-Bit Accessible Registers ................................................................................. 9.3.2 8-Bit Accessible Registers ................................................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... 9.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 9.4.2 Basic Functions.................................................................................................... 9.4.3 Synchronization ................................................................................................... 9.4.4 PWM Mode.......................................................................................................... 9.4.5 Phase Counting Mode .......................................................................................... 9.4.6 Setting Initial Value of 16-Bit Timer Output....................................................... Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 9.5.1 Setting of Status Flags ......................................................................................... 9.5.2 Timing of Clearing of Status Flags ...................................................................... 9.5.3 Interrupt Sources and DMA Controller Activation.............................................. Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 327 327 330 333 334 336 336 337 339 342 345 348 350 351 352 354 356 359 359 361 362 362 363 371 373 377 379 380 380 382 383 384 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 Section 10 8-Bit Timers..................................................................................................... 397 10.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 397 10.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 397 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xiii of xxii 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 10.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 10.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 10.2.1 Timer Counters (TCNT) ...................................................................................... 10.2.2 Time Constant Registers A (TCORA) ................................................................. 10.2.3 Time Constant Registers B (TCORB).................................................................. 10.2.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) ............................................................................. 10.2.5 Timer Control/Status Registers (TCSR) .............................................................. CPU Interface.................................................................................................................... 10.3.1 8-Bit Registers ..................................................................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... 10.4.1 TCNT Count Timing............................................................................................ 10.4.2 Compare Match Timing....................................................................................... 10.4.3 Input Capture Signal Timing ............................................................................... 10.4.4 Timing of Status Flag Setting .............................................................................. 10.4.5 Operation with Cascaded Connection.................................................................. 10.4.6 Input Capture Setting ........................................................................................... Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 10.5.1 Interrupt Sources.................................................................................................. 10.5.2 A/D Converter Activation.................................................................................... 8-Bit Timer Application Example..................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 10.7.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear........................................................ 10.7.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment ................................................ 10.7.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match ...................................... 10.7.4 Contention between TCOR Read and Input Capture ........................................... 10.7.5 Contention between Counter Clearing by Input Capture and Counter Increment......................................................................................... 10.7.6 Contention between TCOR Write and Input Capture .......................................... 10.7.7 Contention between TCNT Byte Write and Increment in 16-Bit Count Mode (Cascaded Connection) ........................................................................................ 10.7.8 Contention between Compare Matches A and B ................................................. 10.7.9 TCNT Operation at Internal Clock Source Switchover ....................................... 399 400 401 402 402 403 404 405 408 413 413 415 415 416 417 418 419 421 423 423 424 424 425 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 432 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC).................................. 435 11.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 11.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 11.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 11.1.3 TPC Pins .............................................................................................................. 11.1.4 Registers............................................................................................................... Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xiv of xxii 435 435 436 437 438 11.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 11.2.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) ........................................................... 11.2.2 Port A Data Register (PADR) .............................................................................. 11.2.3 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)............................................................ 11.2.4 Port B Data Register (PBDR) .............................................................................. 11.2.5 Next Data Register A (NDRA) ............................................................................ 11.2.6 Next Data Register B (NDRB)............................................................................. 11.2.7 Next Data Enable Register A (NDERA).............................................................. 11.2.8 Next Data Enable Register B (NDERB) .............................................................. 11.2.9 TPC Output Control Register (TPCR) ................................................................. 11.2.10 TPC Output Mode Register (TPMR) ................................................................... 11.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 11.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 11.3.2 Output Timing...................................................................................................... 11.3.3 Normal TPC Output............................................................................................. 11.3.4 Non-Overlapping TPC Output ............................................................................. 11.3.5 TPC Output Triggering by Input Capture ............................................................ 11.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 11.4.1 Operation of TPC Output Pins ............................................................................. 11.4.2 Note on Non-Overlapping Output........................................................................ 439 439 439 440 440 441 443 445 446 447 450 452 452 453 454 456 458 459 459 459 Section 12 Watchdog Timer............................................................................................. 461 12.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 12.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 12.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 12.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 12.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 12.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 12.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................ 12.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) ............................................................ 12.2.4 Notes on Register Access..................................................................................... 12.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 12.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation ................................................................................. 12.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ..................................................................................... 12.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) ......................................................... 12.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Reset Bit (WRST) .................................. 12.4 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 12.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 461 461 462 462 463 464 464 465 467 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xv of xxii Section 13 Serial Communication Interface ................................................................ 477 13.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 13.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 13.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 13.1.3 Input/Output Pins ................................................................................................. 13.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 13.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 13.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) .............................................................................. 13.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) .............................................................................. 13.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) ............................................................................. 13.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)............................................................................. 13.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)................................................................................ 13.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR).............................................................................. 13.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 13.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ...................................................................................... 13.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 13.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 13.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ....................................................................... 13.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication........................................................................... 13.3.4 Synchronous Operation........................................................................................ 13.4 SCI Interrupts.................................................................................................................... 13.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 13.5.1 Notes on Use of SCI ............................................................................................ 477 477 479 480 481 482 482 482 483 483 484 488 493 499 507 507 509 519 526 534 535 535 Section 14 Smart Card Interface ..................................................................................... 541 14.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 14.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 14.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 14.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 14.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 14.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 14.2.1 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR) .................................................................... 14.2.2 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 14.2.3 Serial Mode Register (SMR)................................................................................ 14.2.4 Serial Control Register (SCR).............................................................................. 14.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 14.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 14.3.2 Pin Connections ................................................................................................... 14.3.3 Data Format ......................................................................................................... 14.3.4 Register Settings .................................................................................................. 14.3.5 Clock.................................................................................................................... Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xvi of xxii 541 541 542 543 544 545 545 547 549 550 551 551 551 553 554 556 14.3.6 Transmitting and Receiving Data ........................................................................ 558 14.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 566 Section 15 A/D Converter................................................................................................. 569 15.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 15.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 15.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 15.1.3 Input Pins ............................................................................................................. 15.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 15.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 15.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD).............................................. 15.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................... 15.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................ 15.3 CPU Interface.................................................................................................................... 15.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 15.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) .................................................................................... 15.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)....................................................................................... 15.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time ......................................................... 15.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing............................................................................. 15.5 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 15.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 569 569 570 571 572 573 573 574 577 578 580 580 582 584 586 587 587 Section 16 D/A Converter................................................................................................. 593 16.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 16.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 16.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 16.1.3 Input/Output Pins ................................................................................................. 16.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 16.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 16.2.1 D/A Data Registers 0 and 1 (DADR0/1).............................................................. 16.2.2 D/A Control Register (DACR) ............................................................................ 16.2.3 D/A Standby Control Register (DASTCR).......................................................... 16.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 16.4 D/A Output Control .......................................................................................................... 593 593 594 594 595 596 596 596 598 599 600 Section 17 RAM .................................................................................................................. 601 17.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 17.1.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 17.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 17.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ................................................................................... 17.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 601 602 603 604 605 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xvii of xxii Section 18 ROM .................................................................................................................. 607 18.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 607 18.2 Overview of Flash Memory .............................................................................................. 608 18.2.1 Features................................................................................................................ 608 18.2.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 609 18.2.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 610 18.2.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 610 18.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 611 18.3.1 Flash Memory Control Register (FLMCR).......................................................... 611 18.3.2 Erase Block Register (EBR) ................................................................................ 615 18.3.3 RAM Control Register (RAMCR) ....................................................................... 617 18.3.4 Flash Memory Status Register ............................................................................. 619 18.4 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 621 18.4.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 624 18.4.2 User Program Mode............................................................................................. 629 18.5 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ............................................................................... 631 18.5.1 Program Mode ..................................................................................................... 632 18.5.2 Program-Verify Mode.......................................................................................... 633 18.5.3 Erase Mode .......................................................................................................... 635 18.5.4 Erase-Verify Mode .............................................................................................. 635 18.6 Flash Memory Protection.................................................................................................. 637 18.6.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 637 18.6.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 639 18.6.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... 639 18.6.4 NMI Input Disable Conditions............................................................................. 642 18.7 Flash Memory Emulation by RAM................................................................................... 643 18.8 Flash Memory PROM Mode............................................................................................. 645 18.8.1 PROM Mode Setting............................................................................................ 645 18.8.2 Memory Map ....................................................................................................... 645 18.8.3 PROM Mode Operation ....................................................................................... 645 18.8.4 Memory Read Mode ............................................................................................ 648 18.8.5 Auto-Program Mode ............................................................................................ 651 18.8.6 Auto-Erase Mode................................................................................................. 653 18.8.7 Status Read Mode ................................................................................................ 655 18.8.8 PROM Mode Transition Time ............................................................................. 656 18.8.9 Notes On Memory Programming......................................................................... 657 18.9 Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing................................................................ 658 18.10 Mask ROM Overview....................................................................................................... 663 18.10.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 663 18.11 Notes on Ordering Mask ROM Version Chip................................................................... 664 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xviii of xxii Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator .................................................................................. 19.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 19.1.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 19.2 Oscillator Circuit............................................................................................................... 19.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator........................................................................... 19.2.2 External Clock Input ............................................................................................ 19.3 Duty Adjustment Circuit................................................................................................... 19.4 Prescalers .......................................................................................................................... 19.5 Frequency Divider ............................................................................................................ 19.5.1 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 19.5.2 Division Control Register (DIVCR) .................................................................... 19.5.3 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................... 665 665 666 667 667 669 672 672 672 672 673 673 Section 20 Power-Down State ......................................................................................... 675 20.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 675 20.2 Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 677 20.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 677 20.2.2 Module Standby Control Register H (MSTCRH)................................................ 679 20.2.3 Module Standby Control Register L (MSTCRL)................................................. 680 20.3 Sleep Mode ....................................................................................................................... 683 20.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode..................................................................................... 683 20.3.2 Exit from Sleep Mode.......................................................................................... 683 20.4 Software Standby Mode.................................................................................................... 684 20.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode ................................................................. 684 20.4.2 Exit from Software Standby Mode ...................................................................... 684 20.4.3 Selection of Waiting Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode...................... 685 20.4.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode.................................................. 687 20.4.5 Note...................................................................................................................... 687 20.4.6 Cautions on Clearing the Software Standby Mode of F-ZTAT Version.............. 688 20.5 Hardware Standby Mode .................................................................................................. 689 20.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................ 689 20.5.2 Exit from Hardware Standby Mode ..................................................................... 689 20.5.3 Timing for Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................... 690 20.6 Module Standby Function ................................................................................................. 691 20.6.1 Module Standby Timing ...................................................................................... 691 20.6.2 Read/Write in Module Standby............................................................................ 691 20.6.3 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................... 691 20.7 System Clock Output Disabling Function......................................................................... 693 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics.............................................................................. 695 21.1 Electrical Characteristics of Mask ROM Version ............................................................. 695 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xix of xxii 21.1.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................ 21.1.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 21.1.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 21.1.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 21.1.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 21.2 Electrical Characteristics of Flash Memory and Flash Memory R Versions .................... 21.2.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................ 21.2.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 21.2.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 21.2.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 21.2.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 21.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics ............................................................................. 21.3 Operational Timing ........................................................................................................... 21.3.1 Clock Timing ....................................................................................................... 21.3.2 Control Signal Timing ......................................................................................... 21.3.3 Bus Timing .......................................................................................................... 21.3.4 DRAM Interface Bus Timing .............................................................................. 21.3.5 TPC and I/O Port Timing..................................................................................... 21.3.6 Timer Input/Output Timing ................................................................................. 21.3.7 SCI Input/Output Timing ..................................................................................... 21.3.8 DMAC Timing..................................................................................................... 695 696 706 714 716 717 717 718 725 732 734 735 737 737 738 739 745 748 749 750 751 Appendix A Instruction Set ............................................................................................. 753 A.1 A.2 A.3 Instruction List .................................................................................................................. 753 Operation Code Maps ....................................................................................................... 768 Number of States Required for Execution ........................................................................ 771 Appendix B B.1 B.2 Internal I/O Registers................................................................................ 780 Addresses .......................................................................................................................... 780 Functions........................................................................................................................... 791 Appendix C C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 C.6 C.7 C.8 C.9 I/O Port Block Diagrams ......................................................................... 879 879 880 881 882 883 884 891 892 897 Port 1 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... Port 2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... Port 3 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... Port 4 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... Port 5 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... Port 6 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Port 7 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Port 8 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Port 9 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xx of xxii C.10 Port A Block Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 903 C.11 Port B Block Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 906 Appendix D Pin States ...................................................................................................... 914 D.1 D.2 Port States in Each Mode .................................................................................................. 914 Pin States at Reset ............................................................................................................. 921 Appendix E Appendix F Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode.............................................................................................................. 925 Product Code Lineup ................................................................................ 926 Appendix G Package Dimensions ................................................................................. 928 Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications................. 931 H.1 H.2 Differences between H8/3067 and H8/3062 Group, H8/3048 Group, H8/3007 and H8/3006, and H8/3002 ................................................................................ 931 Comparison of Pin Functions of 100-Pin Package Products (PRQP0100KA-A, PTQP0100KA-A) .............................................................................. 934 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xxi of xxii Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page xxii of xxii Section 1 Overview Section 1 Overview 1.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group is a group of microcontrollers (MCUs) that integrate system supporting functions together with an H8/300H CPU core having an original Renesas architecture. The H8/300H CPU has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. It can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space. Its instruction set is upward-compatible at the object-code level with the H8/300 CPU, enabling easy porting of software from the H8/300 Series. The on-chip system supporting functions include ROM, RAM, a 16-bit timer, an 8-bit timer, a programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), a watchdog timer (WDT), a serial communication interface (SCI), an A/D converter, a D/A converter, I/O ports, a direct memory access controller (DMAC), and other facilities. The three members of the H8/3067 Group are the H8/3067, the H8/3066, and the H8/3065. The H8/3067 has 128 kbytes of ROM and 4 kbytes of RAM. The H8/3066 has 96 kbytes of ROM and 4 kbytes of RAM. The H8/3065 has 64 kbytes of ROM and 2 kbytes of RAM. Seven MCU operating modes offer a choice of bus width and address space size. The modes (modes 1 to 7) include two single-chip modes and five expanded modes. In addition to the mask ROM versions, the H8/3067 Group includes an F-ZTATTM* version with on-chip flash memory that can be programmed on-board. This version enables users to respond quickly and flexibly to changing application specifications, growing production volumes, and other conditions. Table 1.1 summarizes the features of the H8/3067 Group. Note: * F-ZTATTM (Flexible ZTAT) is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 1 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Table 1.1 Feature CPU Features Description Upward-compatible with the H8/300 CPU at the object-code level General-register machine * Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) Maximum clock rate: 20 MHz Add/subtract: 100 ns Multiply/divide: 700 ns High-speed operation * * * 16-Mbyte address space Instruction features * * * * * Memory * * * * * * Interrupt controller * * * 8/16/32-bit data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions Signed and unsigned multiply instructions (8 bits x 8 bits, 16 bits x 16 bits) Signed and unsigned divide instructions (16 bits / 8 bits, 32 bits / 16 bits) Bit accumulator function Bit manipulation instructions with register-indirect specification of bit positions ROM: 128 kbytes RAM: 4 kbytes ROM: 96 kbytes RAM: 4 kbytes ROM: 64 kbytes RAM: 2 kbytes Seven external interrupt pins: NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ5 36 internal interrupts Three selectable interrupt priority levels H8/3067 H8/3066 H8/3065 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 2 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Feature Bus controller Description * * * * * * * * * DMA controller (DMAC) * * * Address space can be partitioned into eight areas, with independent bus specifications in each area Chip select output available for areas 0 to 7 8-bit access or 16-bit access selectable for each area Two-state or three-state access selectable for each area Selection of two wait modes Number of program wait states selectable for each area Direct connection of burst ROM Direct connection of up to 8-Mbyte DRAM (or DRAM interface can be used as interval timer) Bus arbitration function Maximum four channels available Selection of I/O mode, idle mode, or repeat mode Can be activated by compare match/input capture A interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, conversion-end interrupts from the A/D converter, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from the SCI, or external requests Maximum two channels available Selection of normal mode or block transfer mode Can be activated by compare match/input capture A interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, conversion-end interrupts from the A/D converter, external requests, or auto-request Three 16-bit timer channels, capable of processing up to six pulse outputs or six pulse inputs 16-bit timer counter (channels 0 to 2) Two multiplexed output compare/input capture pins (channels 0 to 2) Operation can be synchronized (channels 0 to 2) PWM mode available (channels 0 to 2) Phase counting mode available (channel 2) DMAC can be activated by compare match/input capture A interrupts (channels 0 to 2) Short address mode Full address mode * * * 16-bit timer, 3 channels * * * * * * * Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 3 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Feature 8-bit timer, 4 channels Description * * * Programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) * * * * Watchdog timer (WDT), 1 channel Serial communication interface (SCI), 3 channels A/D converter * * * * * * * * * * * * * D/A converter * * * I/O ports * * 8-bit up-counter (external event count capability) Two time constant registers Two channels can be connected Maximum 16-bit pulse output, using 16-bit timer as time base Up to four 4-bit pulse output groups (or one 16-bit group, or two 8-bit groups) Non-overlap mode available Output data can be transferred by DMAC Reset signal can be generated by overflow Reset signal can be output externally (not in the F-ZTAT version) Usable as an interval timer Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode Full duplex: can transmit and receive simultaneously On-chip baud-rate generator Smart card interface functions added Resolution: 10 bits Eight channels, with selection of single or scan mode Variable analog conversion voltage range Sample-and-hold function A/D conversion can be started by an external trigger or 8-bit timer comparematch DMAC can be activated by an A/D conversion end interrupt Resolution: 8 bits Two channels D/A outputs can be sustained in software standby mode 70 input/output pins 9 input-only pins Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 4 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Feature Description Mode Address Space A ddress Pins A19 to A0 A19 to A0 A23 to A0 A23 to A0 A23 to A0 -- -- Initial Bus Width Max. Bus Width 8 bits 16 bits 8 bits 16 bits 8 bits -- -- 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits -- -- Operating modes Seven MCU operating modes Mode 1 1 Mbyte Mode 2 1 Mbyte Mode 3 16 Mbytes Mode 4 16 Mbytes Mode 5 16 Mbytes Mode 6 64 kbyte Mode 7 1 Mbyte * Power-down state * * * * * Other features * On-chip ROM is disabled in modes 1 to 4 Sleep mode Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Module standby function Programmable system clock frequency division On-chip clock pulse generator Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 5 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Feature Product lineup Description Product Type H8/3067 On-chip flash memory 5 VR Product Code HD64F3067RF HD64F3067RTE HD64F3067RFP 3 VR HD64F3067RVF HD64F3067RVTE HD64F3067RVFP On-chip mask ROM 5V HD6433067F HD6433067TE HD6433067FP 3V HD6433067VF HD6433067VTE HD6433067VFP H8/3066 On-chip mask ROM 5V HD6433066F HD6433066TE HD6433066FP 3V HD6433066VF HD6433066VTE HD6433066VFP H8/3065 On-chip mask ROM 5V HD6433065F HD6433065TE HD6433065FP 3V HD6433065VF HD6433065VTE HD6433065VFP Package 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 6 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview 1.2 Block Diagram Figure 1.1 shows an internal block diagram. P37 /D15 P36 /D14 P35 /D13 P34 /D12 P33 /D11 P32 /D10 P47 /D7 P46 /D6 P45 /D5 P44 /D4 P43 /D3 P42 /D2 P41 /D1 P40 /D0 P31 /D9 P30 /D8 VCC VCC VCC VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS Port 3 Address bus Port 4 P53 /A 19 Port 5 Port 2 Bus controller Port 1 Port 9 MD2 MD1 MD0 EXTAL XTAL STBY RES FWE*/RESO NMI /P67 LWR/P66 HWR/P65 RD/P64 AS/P63 BACK/P62 BREQ/P61 WAIT/P60 RAM CS0/P84 CS2/IRQ2/P82 CS3/IRQ1/P81 RFSH/IRQ0/P80 Port 8 Port 6 Clock pulse generator Data bus (upper) Data bus (lower) P52 /A 18 P51 /A 17 P50 /A 16 P27 /A 15 H8/300H CPU P26 /A 14 P25 /A 13 P24 /A 12 P23 /A 11 P22 /A 10 P21 /A 9 P20 /A 8 P17 /A 7 P16 /A 6 P15 /A 5 P14 /A 4 P13 /A 3 P12 /A 2 P11 /A 1 Watchdog timer (WDT) P10 /A 0 Interrupt controller DMA controller (DMAC) ROM (mask ROM or flash memory) ADTRG/CS1/IRQ3/P83 16-bit timer unit Serial communication interface (SCI) x 3 channels P95 /SCK 1 /IRQ 5 Programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) A/D converter D/A converter P94 /SCK 0 /IRQ 4 P93 /RxD1 P92 /RxD0 P91 /TxD 1 P90 /TxD 0 8-bit timer unit Port B RxD2/TP15/PB7 CS5/TMO2/TP10/PB2 CS6/DREQ0/TMIO1/TP9/PB1 CS7/TMO0/TP8/PB0 A20/TIOCB2/TP7/PA7 A21/TIOCA2/TP6/PA6 A22/TIOCB1/TP5/PA5 Port A A23/TIOCA1/TP4/PA4 TCLKD/TIOCB0/TP3/PA3 TCLKC/TIOCA0/TP2/PA2 TEND1/TCLKB/TP1/PA1 TEND0/TCLKA/TP0/PA0 AVCC AVSS VREF DA1/AN7/P77 DA0/AN6/P76 AN5/P75 Port 7 AN4/P74 AN3/P73 AN2/P72 AN1/P71 AN0/P70 TxD2/TP14/PB6 SCK2/LCAS/TP13/PB5 UCAS/TP12/PB4 Note: * Functions as RESO in the mask ROM versions, and as FWE in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. CS4/DREQ1/TMIO3/TP11/PB3 Figure 1.1 Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 7 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview 1.3 1.3.1 Pin Description Pin Arrangement The pin arrangement of the H8/3067 Group PRQP0100KA-A and PTQP0100KA-A packages is shown in figure 1.2, and that of the PRQP0100JE-B package in figure 1.3. P61 /BREQ P62 /BACK P60 /WAIT P65 /HWR P66 /LWR P53 /A 19 P52 /A 18 P51 /A 17 P50 /A 16 53 P27 /A 15 52 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 AVCC VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVSS P80/IRQ0/RFSH P81/IRQ1/CS3 P82/IRQ2/CS2 P83/IRQ3/CS1/ADTRG P84/CS0 VSS PA0/TP0/TCLKA/TEND0 PA1/TP1/TCLKB/TEND1 PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/TCLKC PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/TCLKD PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/A22 PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/A21 PA7/TP7/TIOCB2/A20 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 Top view (PRQP0100KA-A, PTQP0100KA-A) 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 P26 /A 14 P64 /RD P63 /AS EXTAL STBY P67/ XTAL RES MD2 MD1 MD0 VCC NMI VSS VSS A13/P25 A12/P24 A11/P23 A10/P22 A9/P21 A8/P20 VSS A7/P17 A6/P16 A5/P15 A4/P14 A3/P13 A2/P12 A1/P11 A0/P10 VCC D15/P37 D14/P36 D13/P35 D12/P34 D11/P33 D10/P32 D9/P31 D8/P30 D7/P47 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 D4 /P44 24 D5 /P45 TxD0 /P90 TxD1 /P91 RxD0 /P92 RxD1 /P93 IRQ4 /SCK0 /P94 IRQ5 /SCK1 /P95 D0 /P40 D1 /P41 D2 /P42 CS7/TMO0/TP8/PB0 CS6/DREQ0/TMIO1/TP9/PB1 CS5/TMO2/TP10/PB2 CS4/DREQ1/TMIO3/TP11/PB3 UCAS/TP12/PB4 SCK2/LCAS/TP13/PB5 TxD2/TP14/PB6 RxD2/TP15/PB7 FWE*/RESO VSS D3 /P43 VCC VSS Note: * Functions as RESO in the mask ROM versions, and as FWE in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement (PRQP0100KA-A or PTQP0100KA-A, Top View) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 8 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 D6 /P46 25 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Section 1 Overview P70/AN0 VREF AVCC MD2 MD1 MD0 P66/LWR P65/HWR P64/RD P63/AS VCC XTAL EXTAL VSS NMI RES STBY P67/ P62/BACK P61/BREQ P60/WAIT VSS P53/A19 P52/A18 P51/A17 P50/A16 P27/A15 P26/A14 P25/A13 P24/A12 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVSS P80/IRQ0/RFSH P81/IRQ1/CS3 P82/IRQ2/CS2 P83/IRQ3/CS1/ADTRG P84/CS0 VSS PA0/TP0/TCLKA/TEND0 PA1/TP1/TCLKB/TEND1 PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/TCLKC PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/TCLKD PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/A22 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 Top view (PRQP0100JE-B) 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 A11/P23 A10/P22 A9/P21 A8/P20 VSS A7/P17 A6/P16 A5/P15 A4/P14 A3/P13 A2/P12 A1/P11 A0/P10 VCC D15/P37 D14/P36 D13/P35 D12/P34 D11/P33 D10/P32 Note: * Functions as RESO in the mask ROM versions, and as FWE in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement (PRQP0100JE-B, Top View) A21/TIOCA2 /TP6 /PA6 A20/TIOCB2 /TP7 /PA7 V CC CS7 /TMO0 /TP8 /PB0 CS6 /DREQ 0 /TMIO1 /TP9 /PB1 CS 5 /TMO 2 /TP10 /PB2 CS 4 /DREQ 1 /TMIO 3 /TP11/PB3 UCAS/TP12 /PB4 SCK 2 /LCAS/TP13 /PB5 TxD 2 /TP14 /PB6 RxD 2 /TP15 /PB 7 FWE*/RESO VSS TxD0 /P90 TxD1 /P91 RxD0 /P9 2 RxD1 /P9 3 IRQ4 /SCK0 /P94 IRQ5 /SCK1 /P95 D0 /P4 0 D1 /P41 D2 /P42 D3 /P43 V SS D4 /P44 D5 /P4 5 D6 /P4 6 D7 /P4 7 D8 /P3 0 D9 /P3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 9 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview 1.3.2 Pin Functions Table 1.2 summarizes the pin functions. Table 1.2 Pin Functions Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP Symbol 0100KA-A 0100JE-B VCC 1, 35, 68 3, 37, 70 Type Power I/O Input Name and Function Power: For connection to the power supply. Connect all VCC pins to the system power supply. Ground: For connection to ground (0 V). Connect all VSS pins to the 0-V system power supply. For connection to a crystal resonator. For examples of crystal resonator and external clock input, see section 19, Clock Pulse Generator. For connection to a crystal resonator or input of an external clock signal. For examples of crystal resonator and external clock input, see section 19, Clock Pulse Generator. VSS 11, 22, 44, 13, 24, 46, Input 57, 65, 92 59, 67, 94 67 69 Input Clock XTAL EXTAL 66 68 Input 61 63 Output System clock: Supplies the system clock to external devices. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 10 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP Symbol 0100KA-A 0100JE-B 75 to 73 77 to 75 Type I/O Input Name and Function Mode 2 to mode 0: For setting the operating mode, as follows. Inputs at these pins must not be changed during operation. MD2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 MD1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 MD0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Operating Mode -- Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Operating MD2 to mode MD0 control System control RES RESO 63 10 65 12 Input Reset input: When driven low, this pin resets the chip Output Reset output (Mask ROM version): Outputs the reset signal generated by the watchdog timer to external devices Input Write enable signal (Flash memory and flash memory R versions): Flash memory write control signal Standby: When driven low, this pin forces a transition to hardware standby mode Bus request: Used by an external bus master to request the bus right FWE 10 12 STBY BREQ BACK 62 59 60 64 61 62 Input Input Output Bus request acknowledge: Indicates that the bus has been granted to an external bus master Input Input Nonmaskable interrupt: Requests a nonmaskable interrupt Interrupt request 5 to 0: Maskable interrupt request pins Interrupts NMI IRQ5 to IRQ0 64 17, 16, 90 to 87 66 19, 18, 92 to 89 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 11 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP Symbol 0100KA-A 0100JE-B A23 to A0 97 to 100, 56 to 45, 43 to 36 D15 to D0 34 to 23, 21 to 18 CS7 to CS0 AS RD HWR 2 to 5, 88 to 91 69 70 71 Type Address bus Data bus Bus control I/O Name and Function 99, 100, 1, Output Address bus: Outputs address signals 2, 58 to 47, 45 to 38 36 to 25, 23 to 20 4 to 7, 90 to 93 71 72 73 Input/ output Data bus: Bidirectional data bus Output Chip select: Select signals for areas 7 to 0 Output Address strobe: Goes low to indicate valid address output on the address bus Output Read: Goes low to indicate reading from the external address space Output High write: Goes low to indicate writing to the external address space; indicates valid data on the upper data bus (D15 to D8). Output Low write: Goes low to indicate writing to the external address space; indicates valid data on the lower data bus (D7 to D0). Input Wait: Requests insertion of wait states in bus cycles during access to the external address space Bus control LWR 72 74 WAIT 58 60 DRAM interface RFSH CS2 to CS5 RD HWR UCAS LWR LCAS 87 89 Output Refresh: Indicates a refresh cycle 89, 88, 5, 4 91, 90, 7, 6 Output Row address strobe RAS Row address RAS: strobe signal for DRAM 70 71 6 72 7 5, 3 94, 93 72 73 8 74 9 7, 5 96, 95 Output Write enable WE Write enable signal for WE: DRAM Output Upper column address strobe UCAS UCAS: Column address strobe signal for DRAM Output Lower column address strobe LCAS LCAS: Column address strobe signal for DRAM Input DMA request 1 and 0: DMAC activation requests DMA DREQ1, controller DREQ0 (DMAC) TEND , 1 TEND0 Output Transfer end 1 and 0: These signals indicate that the DMAC has ended a data transfer Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 12 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP 0100KA-A 0100JE-B I/O 96 to 93 98 to95 Input Type 16-bit timer Symbol TCLKD to TCLKA TIOCA2 to TIOCA0 TIOCB2 to TIOCB0 Name and Function Clock input D to A: External clock inputs 99, 97, 95 1, 99, 97 Input/ output Input/ output Input capture/output compare A2 to A0: GRA2 to GRA0 output compare or input capture, or PWM output Input capture/output compare B2 to B0: GRB2 to GRB0 output compare or input capture, or PWM output 100, 98, 96 2, 100, 98 8-bit timer TMO0, TMO2 TMIO1, TMIO3 TCLKD to TCLKA Program- TP15 to mable TP0 timing pattern controller (TPC) Serial communication interface (SCI) TxD2 to TxD0 RxD2 to RxD0 SCK2 to SCK0 A/D AN7 to converter AN0 ADTRG 2, 4 3, 5 4, 6 5, 7 Output Compare match output: Compare match output pins Input/ output Input Input capture input/compare match output: Input capture input or compare match output pins Counter external clock input: These pins input an external clock to the counters. 96 to 93 98 to 95 9 to 2, 100 11 to 4, 2, to 93 1, 100 to 95 Output TPC output 15 to 0: Pulse output 8, 13, 12 9, 15, 14 7, 17, 16 85 to 78 90 10, 15, 14 11, 17, 16 9, 19, 18 87 to 80 92 Output Transmit data (channels 0, 1, 2): SCI data output Input Input/ output Input Input Receive data (channels 0, 1, 2): SCI data input Serial clock (channels 0, 1, 2): SCI clock input/output Analog 7 to 0: Analog input pins A/D conversion external trigger input: External trigger input for starting A/D conversion D/A DA1, DA0 85, 84 converter 87, 86 Output Analog output: Analog output from the D/A converter Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 13 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP Symbol 0100KA-A 0100JE-B 76 78 Type I/O Input Name and Function Power supply pin for the A/D and D/A converters. Connect to the system power supply when not using the A/D and D/A converters. Ground pin for the A/D and D/A converters. Connect to system ground (0 V). Reference voltage input pin for the A/D and D/A converters. Connect to the system power supply when not using the A/D and D/A converters. Port 1: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR). Port 2: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 2 data direction register (P2DDR). Port 3: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 3 data direction register (P3DDR). Port 4: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 4 data direction register (P4DDR). Port 5: Four input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 5 data direction register (P5DDR). Port 6: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 6 data direction register (P6DDR). Port 7: Eight input pins Port 8: Five input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 8 data direction register (P8DDR). Port 9: Six input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port 9 data direction register (P9DDR). A/D and AVCC D/A converters AVSS VREF 86 77 88 79 Input Input I/O ports P17 to P10 P27 to P20 P37 to P30 P47 to P40 P53 to P50 P67 to P60 P77 to P70 P84 to P80 P95 to P90 43 to 36 45 to 38 Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input Input/ output Input/ output 52 to 45 54 to 47 34 to 27 36 to 29 26 to 23, 21 to 18 56 to 53 28 to 25, 23 to 20 58 to 55 61, 72 to 69, 60 to 58 85 to 78 91 to 87 63, 74 to 71, 62 to 60 87 to 80 93 to 89 17 to 12 19 to 14 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 14 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP 0100KA-A 0100JE-B 100 to 93 2, 1, 100 to 95 11 to 4 Type I/O ports Symbol PA7 to PA0 PB7 to PB0 I/O Input/ output Input/ output Name and Function Port A: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port A data direction register (PADDR). Port B: Eight input/output pins. The direction of each pin can be selected in the port B data direction register (PBDDR). 9 to 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 15 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview 1.3.3 Pin Assignments in Each Mode Table 1.3 lists the pin assignments in each mode. Table 1.3 Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP 0100KA-A 0100JE-B 1 2 3 4 Mode 1 vCC PB0/TP8/ TMO0/CS7 PB1/TP9/ TMIO1/ DREQ0/CS6 PB2/TP10/ TMO2/CS5 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/ DREQ1/CS4 PB4/TP12/ UCAS PB5/TP13/ LCAS/SCK2 PB6/TP14/ TxD2 PB7/TP15/ RxD2 RESO/ FWE*3 VSS P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/IRQ4/ SCK0 Mode 2 vCC PB0/TP8/ TMO0/CS7 PB1/TP9/ TMIO1/ DREQ0/CS6 PB2/TP10/ TMO2/CS5 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/ DREQ1/CS4 PB4/TP12/ UCAS PB5/TP13/ LCAS/SCK2 PB6/TP14/ TxD2 PB7/TP15/ RxD2 RESO/ FWE*3 VSS P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/IRQ4/ SCK0 Mode 3 vCC PB0/TP8/ TMO0/CS7 PB1/TP9/ TMIO1/ DREQ0/CS6 PB2/TP10/ TMO2/CS5 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/ DREQ1/CS4 PB4/TP12/ UCAS PB5/TP13/ LCAS/SCK2 PB6/TP14/ TxD2 PB7/TP15/ RxD2 RESO/ FWE*3 VSS P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/IRQ4/ SCK0 Mode 4 vCC PB0/TP8/ TMO0/CS7 PB1/TP9/ TMIO1/ DREQ0/CS6 PB2/TP10/ TMO2/CS5 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/ DREQ1/CS4 PB4/TP12/ UCAS PB5/TP13/ LCAS/SCK2 PB6/TP14/ TxD2 PB7/TP15/ RxD2 RESO/ FWE*3 VSS P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/IRQ4/ SCK0 Mode 5 vCC PB0/TP8/ TMO0/CS7 PB1/TP9/ TMIO1/ DREQ0/CS6 PB2/TP10/ TMO2/CS5 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/ DREQ1/CS4 PB4/TP12/ UCAS PB5/TP13/ LCAS/SCK2 PB6/TP14/ TxD2 PB7/TP15/ RxD2 RESO/ FWE*3 VSS P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/IRQ4/ SCK0 Mode 6 vCC PB0/TP8/ TMO0 PB1/TP9/ TMIO1/ DREQ0 PB2/TP10/ TMO2 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/ DREQ1 PB4/TP12 PB5/TP13/ SCK2 PB6/TP14/ TxD2 PB7/TP15/ RxD2 RESO/ FWE*3 VSS P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/IRQ4/ SCK0 Mode 7 vCC PB0/TP8/ TMO0 PB1/TP9/ TMIO1/ DREQ0 PB2/TP10/ TMO2 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/ DREQ1 PB4/TP12 PB5/TP13/ SCK2 PB6/TP14/ TxD2 PB7/TP15/ RxD2 RESO/ FWE*3 VSS P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/IRQ4/ SCK0 Pin Assignments in Each Mode (PRQP0100KA-A or PTQP0100KA-A, PRQP0100JE-B) Pin name 3 5 4 6 5 7 6 8 7 9 8 10 9 11 10 12 11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 16 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP 0100KA-A 0100JE-B 17 19 Mode 1 P95/IRQ5/ SCK1 P40/D0* 1 1 1 Pin name Mode 2 P95/IRQ5/ SCK1 P40/D0* 1 1 2 Mode 3 P95/IRQ5/ SCK1 P40/D0* 1 1 1 Mode 4 P95/IRQ5/ SCK1 P40/D0* 1 1 2 Mode 5 P95/IRQ5/ SCK1 P40/D0* 1 1 1 Mode 6 P95/IRQ5/ SCK1 P40 P41 P42 P43 VSS P44 P45 P46 P47 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 VCC P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 VSS P20 P21 Mode 7 P95/IRQ5/ SCK1 P40 P41 P42 P43 VSS P44 P45 P46 P47 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 VCC P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 VSS P20 P21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 P4 /D *1 P42/D2* P43/D3* VSS P44/D4*1 1 P4 /D * 5 5 1 P4 /D *2 P42/D2* P43/D3* VSS P44/D4*2 2 P4 /D * 5 5 2 P4 /D *1 P42/D2* P43/D3* VSS P44/D4*1 1 P4 /D * 5 5 1 P4 /D *2 P42/D2* P43/D3* VSS P44/D4*2 2 P4 /D * 5 5 2 P4 /D *1 P42/D2* P43/D3* VSS P44/D4*1 1 P4 /D * 5 5 1 1 2 1 2 1 P46/D6*1 1 P4 /D * 7 7 P46/D6*2 2 P4 /D * 7 7 P46/D6*1 1 P4 /D * 7 7 P46/D6*2 2 P4 /D * 7 7 P46/D6*1 1 P4 /D * 7 7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 VCC A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 VSS A8 A9 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 VCC A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 VSS A8 A9 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 VCC A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 VSS A8 A9 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 VCC A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 VSS A8 A9 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 VCC P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 VSS P20/A8 P21/A9 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 17 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP 0100KA-A 0100JE-B 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Mode 1 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 VSS P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC AS RD HWR LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVCC Mode 2 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 VSS P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC AS RD HWR LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVCC Mode 3 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 VSS P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC AS RD HWR LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVCC Mode 4 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 VSS P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC AS RD HWR LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVCC Mode 5 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 P27/A15 P50/A16 P51/A17 P52/A18 P53/A19 VSS P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK P67/ STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC AS RD HWR LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVCC Mode 6 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P50 P51 P52 P53 VSS P60 P61 P62 P67/ STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC P63 P64 P65 P66 MD0 MD1 MD2 AVCC Mode 7 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P50 P51 P52 P53 VSS P60 P61 P62 P67/ STBY RES NMI VSS EXTAL XTAL VCC P63 P64 P65 P66 MD0 MD1 MD2 AVCC Pin name Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 18 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP 0100KA-A 0100JE-B 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 Mode 1 VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVSS P80/IRQ0/ RFSH Mode 2 VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVSS P80/IRQ0/ RFSH Mode 3 VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVSS P80/IRQ0/ RFSH Mode 4 VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVSS P80/IRQ0/ RFSH Mode 5 VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVSS P80/IRQ0/ RFSH Mode 6 VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVSS P80/IRQ0 Mode 7 VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVSS P80/IRQ0 P81/IRQ1 P82/IRQ2 P83/IRQ3/ ADTRG P84 VSS PA0/TP0/ TCLKA/ TEND0 PA1/TP1/ TCLKB/ TEND1 PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1 Pin name 88 89 90 90 91 92 P81/IRQ1/CS3 P81/IRQ1/CS3 P81/IRQ1/CS3 P81/IRQ1/CS3 P81/IRQ1/CS3 P81/IRQ1 P82/IRQ2/CS2 P82/IRQ2/CS2 P82/IRQ2/CS2 P82/IRQ2/CS2 P82/IRQ2/CS2 P82/IRQ2 P83/IRQ3/ CS1/ADTRG P84/CS0 VSS PA0/TP0/ TCLKA/ TEND0 PA1/TP1/ TCLKB/ TEND1 PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1 P83/IRQ3/ CS1/ADTRG P84/CS0 VSS PA0/TP0/ TCLKA/ TEND0 PA1/TP1/ TCLKB/ TEND1 PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1 P83/IRQ3/ CS1/ADTRG P84/CS0 VSS PA0/TP0/ TCLKA/ TEND0 PA1/TP1 /TCLKB/ TEND1 PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/A22 P83/IRQ3/ CS1/ADTRG P84/CS0 VSS PA0/TP0/ TCLKA/ TEND0 PA1/TP1/ TCLKB/ TEND1 PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/A22 P83/IRQ3/ CS1/ADTRG P84/CS0 VSS PA0/TP0/ TCLKA/ TEND0 PA1/TP1/ TCLKB/ TEND1 PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/A22 P83/IRQ3/ ADTRG P84 VSS PA0/TP0/ TCLKA/ TEND0 PA1/TP1/ TCLKB/ TEND1 PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1 91 92 93 93 94 95 94 96 95 97 96 98 97 99 98 100 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 19 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. PRQP 0100KA-A PTQP PRQP 0100KA-A 0100JE-B 99 1 Mode 1 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2 Mode 2 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2 Mode 3 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/A21 A20 Mode 4 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/A21 A20 Mode 5 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/A21 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2/A20 Mode 6 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2 Mode 7 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2 Pin name 100 2 Notes: 1. In modes 1, 3, 5 the P40 to P47 functions of pins P40/D0 to P47/D7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 2. In modes 2 and 4 the D0 to D7 functions of pins P40/D0 to P47/D7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 3. Functions as RESO in the mask ROM versions, and as FWE in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 20 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview 1.4 Notes on Flash Memory R Version Model There are two models with on-chip flash memory in the H8/3067 Group: the flash memory version (HD64F3067) and the flash memory R version (HD64F3067R). Points to be noted when using the flash memory R version are given below. 1.4.1 Pin Arrangement The flash memory R version has the same pin arrangement as the flash memory version and mask ROM versions. 1.4.2 Differences in Flash Memory R Version Table 1.5 shows the differences between the flash memory version, flash memory R version, and mask ROM versions. Table 1.5 Differences between Flash Memory Version, Flash Memory R Version, and Mask ROM Versions Flash Memory Version HD64F3067 128 kB flash memory Compatible with previous H8/300H Series -- Corresponding address consists of reserved bits Flash Memory R Version HD64F3067R Mask ROM Versions HD6433067 HD6433066 HD6433065 128 kB 96 kB 64 kB mask ROM mask ROM mask ROM Choice of address update mode 1 (compatible with previous H8/300H Series) or address update mode 2 See the section on the bus controller for details. 7 -- 6 -- 5 -- 4 -- 3 -- 2 -- 1 -- 0 ADRCTL Item ROM Address output functions ADRCR register (H'FEE01E) See the section on the bus controller for the bit function. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 21 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 1 Overview Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 22 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Section 2 CPU 2.1 Overview The H8/300H CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 CPU. The H8/300H CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. 2.1.1 Features The H8/300H CPU has the following features. * Upward compatibility with H8/300 CPU Can execute H8/300 Series object programs * General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) * Sixty-two basic instructions 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions Multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions * Eight addressing modes Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @-ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] * 16-Mbyte linear address space Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 23 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU * High-speed operation All frequently-used instructions execute in two to four states Maximum clock frequency: 8 x 8-bit register-register multiply: 16 / 8-bit register-register divide: 32 / 16-bit register-register divide: * Two CPU operating modes Normal mode Advanced mode * Low-power mode Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction 2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU 20 MHz 700 ns 700 ns 1.1 s 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 100 ns 16 x 16-bit register-register multiply: 1.1 s In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8/300H has the following enhancements. * More general registers Eight 16-bit registers have been added. * Expanded address space Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU. * Enhanced addressing The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address space. * Enhanced instructions Data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions can operate on 32-bit data. Signed multiply/divide instructions and other instructions have been added. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 24 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.2 CPU Operating Modes The H8/300H CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports up to 16 Mbytes. Maximum 64 kbytes, program and data areas combined Normal mode CPU operating modes Maximum 16 Mbytes, program and data areas combined Advanced mode Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 25 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.3 Address Space Figure 2.2 shows a simple memory map for the H8/3067 Group. The H8/300H CPU can address a linear address space with a maximum size of 64 kbytes in normal mode, and 16 Mbytes in advanced mode. For further details see section 3.6, Memory Map in Each Operating Mode. The 1-Mbyte operating modes use 20-bit addressing. The upper 4 bits of effective addresses are ignored. H'0000 H'FFFF H'00000 H'000000 H'FFFFF H'FFFFFF a. 1-Mbyte mode Normal mode b. 16-Mbyte mode Advanced mode Figure 2.2 Memory Map Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 26 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.4 2.4.1 Register Configuration Overview The H8/300H CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.3. There are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. General Registers (ERn) 15 ER0 ER1 ER2 ER3 ER4 ER5 ER6 ER7 Control Registers (CR) 23 PC 76543210 CCR I UI H U N Z V C Legend SP: Stack pointer PC: Program counter CCR: Condition code register Interrupt mask bit I: User bit or interrupt mask bit UI: Half-carry flag H: User bit U: Negative flag N: Zero flag Z: Overflow flag V: Carry flag C: 0 E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 (SP) 07 R0H R1H R2H R3H R4H R5H R6H R7H 07 R0L R1L R2L R3L R4L R5L R6L R7L 0 Figure 2.3 CPU Registers Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 27 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.4.2 General Registers The H8/300H CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and can be used without distinction between data registers and address registers. When a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or as address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit registers. Figure 2.4 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. * Address registers * 32-bit registers * 16-bit registers E registers (extended registers) E0 to E7 * 8-bit registers ER registers ER0 to ER7 R registers R0 to R7 RH registers R0H to R7H RL registers R0L to R7L Figure 2.4 Usage of General Registers Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 28 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.5 shows the stack. Free area SP (ER7) Stack area Figure 2.5 Stack 2.4.3 Control Registers The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC) and the 8-bit condition code register (CCR). Program Counter (PC): This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0. Condition Code Register (CCR): This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including the interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. Bit 7--Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence. Bit 6--User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Bit 5--Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 29 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Bit 4--User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. Bit 3--Negative Flag (N): Stores the value of the most significant bit of data, regarded as the sign bit. Bit 2--Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. Bit 1--Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other times. Bit 0--Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry is generated by execution of an operation, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by: * Add instructions, to indicate a carry * Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow * Shift and rotate instructions The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions. Some instructions leave flag bits unchanged. Operations can be performed on CCR by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used by conditional branch (Bcc) instructions. For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see appendix A.1, Instruction List. For the I and UI bits, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. 2.4.4 Initial CPU Register Values In reset exception handling, PC is initialized to a value loaded from the vector table, and the I bit in CCR is set to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the initial value of the stack pointer (ER7) is also undefined. The stack pointer (ER7) must therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 30 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.5 Data Formats The H8/300H CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats Figures 2.6 and 2.7 show the data formats in general registers. General Register Data Type Data Format 7 0 Don't care 7 0 1-bit data RnH 76543210 1-bit data RnL 7 Don't care 43 0 76543210 4-bit BCD data RnH Upper digit Lower digit Don't care 7 43 0 4-bit BCD data RnL 7 Don't care 0 Upper digit Lower digit Byte data RnH MSB LSB 7 Don't care 0 LSB Byte data RnL Don't care MSB Legend RnH: General register RH RnL: General register RL Figure 2.6 General Register Data Formats Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 31 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Data Type General Register Data Format 15 0 LSB Word data Rn MSB 15 0 LSB 16 15 0 LSB Word data En MSB 31 Longword data ERn MSB Legend ERn: General register En: General register E Rn: General register R MSB: Most significant bit LSB: Least significant bit Figure 2.7 General Register Data Formats 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 2.8 shows the data formats on memory. The H8/300H CPU can access word data and longword data on memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 32 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Data Type Address Data Format 7 1-bit data Byte data Word data Address L Address L Address 2M Address 2M + 1 Address 2N Longword data Address 2N + 1 Address 2N + 2 Address 2N + 3 MSB 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB 7 MSB MSB LSB LSB Figure 2.8 Memory Data Formats When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 33 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.6 2.6.1 Instruction Set Instruction Set Overview The H8/300H CPU has 62 types of instructions, which are classified in table 2.1. Table 2.1 Function Data transfer Arithmetic operations Logic operations Shift operations Bit manipulation Branch System control Block data transfer Instruction Classification Instruction 1 1 2 2 MOV, PUSH* , POP* , MOVTPE* , MOVFPE* Types 3 ADD, SUB, ADDX, SUBX, INC, DEC, ADDS, SUBS, DAA, DAS, 18 MULXU, MULXS, DIVXU, DIVXS, CMP, NEG, EXTS, EXTU AND, OR, XOR, NOT SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR 4 8 BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, 14 BIXOR, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST 3 Bcc* , JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS 5 TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP EEPMOV 9 1 Total 62 types Notes: 1. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, Rn. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L Rn, @-SP. 2. Not available in the H8/3067 Group. 3. Bcc is a generic branching instruction. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 34 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes Table 2.2 indicates the instructions available in the H8/300H CPU. Table 2.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes Addressing Modes @ (d:16, ERn) BWL -- -- @ (d:24, ERn) BWL -- -- @ (d:8, PC) -- -- -- @ (d:16, PC) -- -- -- Function Data transfer Instruction MOV POP, PUSH MOVFPE, MOVTPE #xx BWL -- -- Rn BWL -- -- @ERn BWL -- -- @ERn+/ @-ERn BWL -- -- @ aa:8 B -- -- @ aa:16 BWL -- -- @ aa:24 BWL -- -- @@ aa:8 -- -- -- -- -- WL -- Arithmetic operations ADD, CMP SUB ADDX, SUBX ADDS, SUBS INC, DEC DAA, DAS MULXU, MULXS, DIVXU, DIVXS NEG EXTU, EXTS BWL WL B -- -- -- -- BWL BWL B L BWL B BW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BWL WL BWL BWL BWL B -- -- -- -- -- -- B B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- ! -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ! -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ! -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ! -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ! -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ! ! ! ! -- -- ! BW Logic operations AND, OR, XOR -- NOT -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- B -- -- Shift instructions Bit manipulation Branch Bcc, BSR JMP, JSR RTS System control TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC STC ANDC, ORC, XORC NOP Block data transfer Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 35 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.6.3 Tables of Instructions Classified by Function Tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The operation notation used in these tables is defined next. Operation Notation Rd Rs Rn ERn (EAd) (EAs) CCR N Z V C PC SP #IMM disp + - x / :3/:8/:16/:24 General register (destination)* General register (source)* General register* General register (32-bit register or address register) Destination operand Source operand Condition code register N (negative) flag of CCR Z (zero) flag of CCR V (overflow) flag of CCR C (carry) flag of CCR Program counter Stack pointer Immediate data Displacement Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division AND logical OR logical Exclusive OR logical Move NOT (logical complement) 3-, 8-, 16-, or 24-bit length Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit data or address registers (ER0 to ER7). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 36 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Table 2.3 Data Transfer Instructions Function (EAs) Rd, Rs (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. Instruction Size* MOV B/W/L MOVFPE MOVTPE POP B B W/L (EAs) Rd Cannot be used in this LSI. Rs (EAs) Cannot be used in this LSI. @SP+ Rn Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. Similarly, POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn. PUSH W/L Rn @-SP Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. Similarly, PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 37 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Table 2.4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (Immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction.) Instruction Size* ADD,SUB B/W/L ADDX, SUBX INC, DEC ADDS, SUBS DAA, DAS MULXU B Rd Rs C Rd, Rd #IMM C Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. B/W/L Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) L B Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd, Rd 4 Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. Rd decimal adjust Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data. B/W Rd x Rs Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. MULXS B/W Rd x Rs Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. DIVXU B/W Rd / Rs Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder DIVXS B/W Rd / Rs Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder, or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder CMP B/W/L Rd - Rs, Rd - #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR according to the result. NEG B/W/L 0 - Rd Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 38 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Instruction Size* EXTS W/L Function Rd (sign extension) Rd Extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data, by extending the sign bit. EXTU W/L Rd (zero extension) Rd Extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data, by padding with zeros. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Table 2.5 Logic Operation Instructions Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Instruction Size* AND B/W/L OR B/W/L Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. XOR B/W/L Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. NOT B/W/L Rd Rd Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general register contents. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 39 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Table 2.6 Shift Instructions Function Rd (shift) Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. B/W/L B/W/L B/W/L Rd (shift) Rd Performs a logical shift on general register contents. Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents. Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents, including the carry bit. Instruction Size* SHAL, SHAR SHLL, SHLR ROTL, ROTR ROTXL, ROTXR B/W/L Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 40 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions Function 1 ( Instruction Size* BSET B BCLR B 0 ( BNOT B ( BTST B ( BAND B C ( BIAND B C [ ( BOR B C ( BIOR B C [ ( BXOR B C ( Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 41 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Instruction Size* BIXOR B Function C [ ( Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 42 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Table 2.8 Branching Instructions Function Branches to a specified address if address specified condition is met. The branching conditions are listed below. Mnemonic BRA (BT) BRN (BF) BHI BLS Bcc (BHS) BCS (BLO) BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE Description Always (true) Never (false) High Low or same Carry set (low) Not equal Equal Overflow clear Overflow set Plus Minus Greater or equal Less than Greater than Less or equal Condition Always Never CZ=0 CZ=1 C=1 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 NV=0 NV=1 Z (N V) = 0 Z (N V) = 1 Instruction Size Bcc -- Carry clear (high or same) C = 0 JMP BSR JSR RTS -- -- -- -- Branches unconditionally to a specified address Branches to a subroutine at a specified address Branches to a subroutine at a specified address Returns from a subroutine Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 43 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Table 2.9 System Control Instructions Function Starts trap-instruction exception handling Returns from an exception-handling routine Causes a transition to the power-down state (EAs) CCR Moves the source operand contents to the condition code register. The condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer from memory, data is read by word access. Instruction Size* TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC -- -- -- B/W STC B/W CCR (EAd) Transfers the CCR contents to a destination location. The condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer to memory, data is written by word access. ANDC ORC XORC NOP B B B -- CCR #IMM CCR Logically ANDs the condition code register with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR Logically ORs the condition code register with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR Logically exclusive-ORs the condition code register with immediate data. PC + 2 PC Only increments the program counter. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 44 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Table 2.10 Block Transfer Instruction Instruction EEPMOV.B Size -- Function if R4L 0 then repeat @ER5+ @ER6+, R4L - 1 R4L until R4L = 0 else next; if R4 0 then repeat @ER5+ @ER6+, R4 - 1 R4 until R4 = 0 else next; Block transfer instruction. This instruction transfers the number of data bytes specified by R4L or R4, starting from the address indicated by ER5, to the location starting at the address indicated by ER6. At the end of the transfer, the next instruction is executed. EEPMOV.W -- 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats The H8/300H instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (OP field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition field (cc). Operation Field: Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first 4 bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. Register Field: Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field. Effective Address Extension: Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. A 24-bit address or displacement is treated as 32-bit data in which the first 8 bits are 0 (H'00). Condition Field: Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions. Figure 2.9 shows examples of instruction formats. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 45 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Operation field only op Operation field and register fields op rn rm ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc. NOP, RTS, etc. Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op EA (disp) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA (disp) BRA d:8 rn rm MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm Figure 2.9 Instruction Formats 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit Manipulation Instructions The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read a byte of data, modify a bit in the byte, then write the byte back. Care is required when these instructions are used to access registers with write-only bits, or to access ports. Step 1 2 3 Read Modify Write Description Read one data byte at the specified address Modify one bit in the data byte Write the modified data byte back to the specified address Example 1: BCLR is executed to clear bit 0 in the port 4 data direction register (P4DDR) under the following conditions. P47, P46: Input pins P45 - P40: Output pins The intended purpose of this BCLR instruction is to switch P40 from output to input. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 46 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Before Execution of BCLR Instruction P47 Input/output DDR Input 0 P46 Input 0 P45 Output 1 P44 Output 1 P43 Output 1 P42 Output 1 P41 Output 1 P40 Output 1 Execution of BCLR Instruction BCLR #0, @P4DDR ;Clear bit 0 in data direction register After Execution of BCLR Instruction P47 Input/output DDR Output 1 P46 Output 1 P45 Output 1 P44 Output 1 P43 Output 1 P42 Output 1 P41 Output 1 P40 Input 0 Explanation: To execute the BCLR instruction, the CPU begins by reading P4DDR. Since P4DDR is a write-only register, it is read as H'FF, even though its true value is H'3F. Next the CPU clears bit 0 of the read data, changing the value to H'FE. Finally, the CPU writes this value (H'FE) back to P4DDR to complete the BCLR instruction. As a result, P40DDR is cleared to 0, making P40 an input pin. In addition, P47DDR and P46DDR are set to 1, making P47 and P46 output pins. The BCLR instruction can be used to clear flags in the on-chip registers to 0. In an interrupthandling routine, for example, if it is known that the flag is set to 1, it is not necessary to read the flag ahead of time. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 47 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.7 2.7.1 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation Addressing Modes The H8/300H CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except programcounter relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute (@aa:8) addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. Table 2.11 Addressing Modes No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Addressing Mode Register direct Register indirect Register indirect with displacement Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement Absolute address Immediate Program-counter relative Memory indirect Symbol Rn @ERn @(d:16, ERn)/@(d:24, ERn) @ERn+ @-ERn @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24 #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 @(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC) @@aa:8 1 Register Direct--Rn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. 2 Register Indirect--@ERn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn), the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of the operand. 3 Register Indirect with Displacement--@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn): A 16-bit or 24-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is added to the contents of an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the lower 24 bits of the sum specify the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 48 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement--@ERn+ or @-ERn: * Register indirect with post-increment--@ERn+ The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents (32 bits) and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register value should be even. * Register indirect with pre-decrement--@-ERn The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the lower 24 bits of the result become the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the resulting register value should be even. 5 Absolute Address--@aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24: The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), or 24 bits long (@aa:24). For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 8 bits are a sign extension. A 24-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. Table 2.12 indicates the accessible address ranges. Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges Absolute Address 8 bits (@aa:8) 16 bits (@aa:16) 1-Mbyte Modes H'FFF00 to H'FFFFF (1048320 to 1048575) H'00000 to H'07FFF, H'F8000 to H'FFFFF (0 to 32767, 1015808 to 1048575) H'00000 to H'FFFFF (0 to 1048575) 16-Mbyte Modes H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF (16776960 to 16777215) H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF (0 to 32767, 16744448 to 16777215) H'000000 to H'FFFFFF (0 to 16777215) 24 bits (@aa:24) 6 Immediate--#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: The instruction code contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. The instruction codes of the ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. The instruction codes of some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction code contains 2-bit immediate data specifying a vector address. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 49 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 7 Program-Counter Relative--@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC): This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is signextended to 24 bits and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a 24-bit branch address. The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes (-63 to +64 words) or -32766 to +32768 bytes (-16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number. 8 Memory Indirect--@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address. The memory operand is accessed by longword access. The first byte of the memory operand is ignored, generating a 24-bit branch address. See figure 2.10. The upper bits of the 8-bit absolute address are assumed to be 0 (H'0000), so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'000000 to H'0000FF). Note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector area. For further details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Specified by @aa:8 Reserved Branch address Figure 2.10 Memory-Indirect Branch Address Specification When a word-size or longword-size memory operand is specified, or when a branch address is specified, if the specified memory address is odd, the least significant bit is regarded as 0. The accessed data or instruction code therefore begins at the preceding address. See section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats. 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation Table 2.13 explains how an effective address is calculated in each addressing mode. In the 1-Mbyte operating modes the upper 4 bits of the calculated address are ignored in order to generate a 20-bit effective address. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 50 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation Effective Address Calculation Operand is general register contents 31 23 General register contents op 31 General register contents 0 23 0 r 0 0 Effective Address No. Addressing Mode and Instruction Format 1 op rm rn Register indirect (Rn) 2 Register indirect (@ERn) 3 Register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ERn)/@(d:24, ERn) op Sign extension r disp 4 31 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement 0 General register contents 23 0 Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+ op r 31 1, 2, or 4 0 General register contents 23 1, 2, or 4 1 for a byte operand, 2 for a word operand, 4 for a longword operand 0 Register indirect with pre-decrement @ERn Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 51 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 op r Section 2 CPU No. 23 H'FFFF Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation Effective Address 87 Section 2 CPU 5 abs 23 abs 23 16 15 Absolute address @aa:8 0 op Sign extension 0 @aa:16 op Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 52 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 0 abs Operand is immediate data IMM 23 PC contents 0 23 Sign extension @aa:24 op 6 Immediate #xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 op 7 Program-counter relative @(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC) 0 disp op disp No. Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Effective Address Calculation Effective Address 8 Memory indirect @@aa:8 Normal mode abs 23 H'0000 15 0 Memory contents abs 23 16 15 H'00 0 87 0 op Advanced mode abs 23 H'0000 31 Memory contents 87 abs 0 23 0 0 op Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 53 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Legend r, rm, rn: op: disp: IMM: abs: Register field Operation field Displacement Immediate data Absolute address Section 2 CPU Section 2 CPU 2.8 2.8.1 Processing States Overview The H8/300H CPU has five processing states: the program execution state, exception-handling state, power-down state, reset state, and bus-released state. The power-down state includes sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. Figure 2.11 classifies the processing states. Figure 2.13 indicates the state transitions. Processing states Program execution state The CPU executes program instructions in sequence Exception-handling state A transient state in which the CPU executes a hardware sequence (saving PC and CCR, fetching a vector, etc.) in response to a reset, interrupt, or other exception Bus-released state The external bus has been released in response to a bus request signal from a bus master other than the CPU Reset state The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules are initialized and halted Power-down state The CPU is halted to conserve power Sleep mode Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Figure 2.11 Processing States Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 54 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.8.2 Program Execution State In this state the CPU executes program instructions in normal sequence. 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal program flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a starting address from the exception vector table and branches to that address. In interrupt and trap exception handling the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and saves the program counter and condition code register. Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority: Exception handling is performed for resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2.14 indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. Table 2.14 Exception Handling Types and Priority Priority High Type of Exception Detection Timing Reset Interrupt Synchronized with clock End of instruction execution or end of exception handling* Start of Exception Handling Exception handling starts immediately when RES changes from low to high When an interrupt is requested, exception handling starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence Trap instruction Low When TRAPA instruction Exception handling starts when a trap is executed (TRAPA) instruction is executed Note: * Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling. Figure 2.12 classifies the exception sources. For further details about exception sources, vector numbers, and vector addresses, see section 4, Exception Handling, and section 5, Interrupt Controller. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 55 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU Reset External interrupts Exception sources Interrupt Internal interrupts (from on-chip supporting modules) Trap instruction Figure 2.12 Classification of Exception Sources Bus request End of bus release Program execution state End of bus release Bus request Exception handling source Bus-released state End of exception handling Exception-handling state SLEEP instruction with SSBY = 0 Sleep mode Interrupt source NMI, IRQ 0 , IRQ 1, or IRQ 2 interrupt SLEEP instruction with SSBY = 1 Software standby mode RES = "High" STBY="High", RES ="Low" Reset state*1 Hardware standby mode*2 Power-down state Notes: 1. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. 2. From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low. Figure 2.13 State Transitions Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 56 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.8.4 Exception-Handling Sequences Reset Exception Handling: Reset exception handling has the highest priority. The reset state is entered when the RES signal goes low. Reset exception handling starts after that, when RES changes from low to high. When reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start address from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled during the reset exception-handling sequence and immediately after it ends. Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling: When these exception-handling sequences begin, the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and pushes the program counter and condition code register on the stack. Next, if the UE bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1, the CPU sets the I bit in the condition code register to 1. If the UE bit is cleared to 0, the CPU sets both the I bit and the UI bit in the condition code register to 1. Then the CPU fetches a start address from the exception vector table and execution branches to that address. Figure 2.14 shows the stack after the exception-handling sequence. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 57 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP (ER7) Stack area SP (ER7) SP+1 SP+2 SP+3 SP+4 CCR PC Even address Before exception handling starts Legend CCR: Condition code register SP: Stack pointer Pushed on stack After exception handling ends Notes: 1. PC is the address of the first instruction executed after the return from the exception-handling routine. 2. Registers must be saved and restored by word access or longword access, starting at an even address. Figure 2.14 Stack Structure after Exception Handling 2.8.5 Bus-Released State In this state the bus is released to a bus master other than the CPU, in response to a bus request. The bus masters other than the CPU are the DMA controller, the DRAM interface, and an external bus master. While the bus is released, the CPU halts except for internal operations. Interrupt requests are not accepted. For details see section 6.11, Bus Arbiter. 2.8.6 Reset State When the RES input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. The I bit in the condition code register is set to 1 by a reset. All interrupts are masked in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high. The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details see section 12, Watchdog Timer. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 58 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.8.7 Power-Down State In the power-down state the CPU stops operating to conserve power. There are three modes: sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. Sleep Mode: A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit is cleared to 0 in the system control register (SYSCR). CPU operations stop immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction, but the contents of CPU registers are retained. Software Standby Mode: A transition to software standby mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit is set to 1 in SYSCR. The CPU and clock halt and all on-chip supporting modules stop operating. The on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied the contents of CPU registers and on-chip RAM are retained. The I/O ports also remain in their existing states. Hardware Standby Mode: A transition to hardware standby mode is made when the STBY input goes low. As in software standby mode, the CPU and all clocks halt and the on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM contents are retained. For further information see section 20, Power-Down State. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 59 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.9 2.9.1 Basic Operational Timing Overview The H8/300H CPU operates according to the system clock (). The interval from one rise of the system clock to the next rise is referred to as a "state." A memory cycle or bus cycle consists of two or three states. The CPU uses different methods to access on-chip memory, the on-chip supporting modules, and the external address space. Access to the external address space can be controlled by the bus controller. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory Access Timing On-chip memory is accessed in two states. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word access. Figure 2.15 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 2.16 indicates the pin states. Bus cycle T1 state Internal address bus Internal read signal Internal data bus (read access) Internal write signal Internal data bus (write access) Write data Read data Address T2 state Figure 2.15 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 60 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU T1 Address bus Address T2 AS , RD, HWR , LWR High High impedance D15 to D0 Figure 2.16 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in three states. The data bus is 8 or 16 bits wide, depending on the internal I/O register being accessed. Figure 2.17 shows the on-chip supporting module access timing. Figure 2.18 indicates the pin states. Bus cycle T1 state Address bus Internal read signal Internal data bus Address T2 state T3 state Read access Read data Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Figure 2.17 Access Cycle for On-Chip Supporting Modules Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 61 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 2 CPU T1 Address bus AS , RD, HWR , LWR T2 T3 Address High High impedance D15 to D0 Figure 2.18 Pin States during Access to On-Chip Supporting Modules 2.9.4 Access to External Address Space The external address space is divided into eight areas (areas 0 to 7). Bus-controller settings determine whether each area is accessed via an 8-bit or 16-bit bus, and whether it is accessed in two or three states. For details see section 6, Bus Controller. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 62 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1 3.1.1 Overview Operating Mode Selection The H8/3067 Group has seven operating modes (modes 1 to 7) that are selected by the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) as indicated in table 3.1. The input at these pins determines the size of the address space and the initial bus mode. Table 3.1 Operating Mode Selection Description Mode Pins Operating Mode MD2 MD1 MD0 -- Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Address Space -- Expanded mode Expanded mode Expanded mode Expanded mode Expanded mode Single-chip normal mode Single-chip advanced mode Initial Bus On-Chip 1 Mode* ROM -- 8 bits 16 bits 8 bits 16 bits 8 bits -- -- -- Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled On-Chip RAM -- Enabled* 2 Enabled* 2 Enabled* 2 Enabled* 2 Enabled* Enabled Enabled 2 Notes: 1. In modes 1 to 5, an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus can be selected on a per-area basis by settings made in the area bus width control register (ABWCR). For details see section 6, Bus Controller. 2. If the RAME bit in SYSCR is cleared to 0, these addresses become external addresses. For the address space size there are three choices: 64 kbytes, 1 Mbyte, or 16 Mbytes. The external data bus is either 8 or 16 bits wide depending on ABWCR settings. If 8-bit access is selected for all areas, 8-bit bus mode is used. For details see section 6, Bus Controller. Modes 1 to 4 are externally expanded modes that enable access to external memory and peripheral devices and disable access to the on-chip ROM. Modes 1 and 2 support a maximum address space of 1 Mbyte. Modes 3 and 4 support a maximum address space of 16 Mbytes. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 63 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 5 is an externally expanded mode that enables access to external memory and peripheral devices and also enables access to the on-chip ROM. Mode 5 supports a maximum address space of 16 Mbytes. Modes 6 and 7 are single-chip modes that operate using the on-chip ROM, RAM, and registers, and makes all I/O ports available. Mode 6 supports a maximum address space of 64 kbytes. Mode 7 supports a maximum address space of 1 Mbyte. The H8/3067 Group can be used only in modes 1 to 7. The inputs at the mode pins must select one of these seven modes. The inputs at the mode pins must not be changed during operation. 3.1.2 Register Configuration The H8/3067 Group has a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0), and a system control register (SYSCR). Table 3.2 summarizes these registers. Table 3.2 Address* H'EE011 H'EE012 Registers Name Mode control register System control register Abbreviation MDCR SYSCR R/W R R/W Initial Value Undetermined H'09 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 64 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.2 Mode Control Register (MDCR) MDCR is an 8-bit read-only register that indicates the current operating mode of the H8/3067 Group. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 0 4 0 Reserved bits 3 0 2 MDS2 * R 1 MDS1 * R 0 MDS0 * R Reserved bits Mode select 2 to 0 Bits indicating the current operating mode Note: * Determined by pins MD 2 to MD0 . Bits 7 and 6--Reserved: These bits can not be modified and are always read as 1. Bits 5 to 3--Reserved: These bits can not be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 2 to 0--Mode Select 2 to 0 (MDS2 to MDS0): These bits indicate the logic levels at pins MD2 to MD0 (the current operating mode). MDS2 to MDS0 correspond to MD2 to MD0. MDS2 to MDS0 are read-only bits. The mode pin (MD2 to MD0) levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 65 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.3 System Control Register (SYSCR) SYSCR is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of the H8/3067 Group. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 SSOE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM enable Enables or disables on-chip RAM Software standby output port enable Selects the output state of the address bus and bus control signals in software standby mode NMI edge select Selects the valid edge of the NMI input User bit enable Selects whether to use the UI bit in CCR as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit Standby timer select 2 to 0 These bits select the waiting time at recovery from software standby mode Software standby Enables transition to software standby mode Bit 7--Software Standby (SSBY): Enables transition to software standby mode. (For further information about software standby mode see section 20, Power-Down State.) When software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1. To clear this bit, write 0. Bit 7 SSBY 0 1 Description SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 66 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bits 6 to 4--Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the length of time the CPU and on-chip supporting modules wait for the internal clock oscillator to settle when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt. When using a crystal oscillator, set these bits so that the waiting time will be at least 7 ms at the system clock rate. For further information about waiting time selection, see section 20.4.3, Selection of Waiting Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode. Bit 6 STS2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 5 STS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 4 STS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description Waiting time = 8,192 states Waiting time = 16,384 states Waiting time = 32,768 states Waiting time = 65,536 states Waiting time = 131,072 states Waiting time = 262,144 states Waiting time = 1,024 states Illegal setting (Initial value) Bit 3--User Bit Enable (UE): Selects whether to use the UI bit in the condition code register as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit. Bit 3 UE 0 1 Description UI bit in CCR is used as an interrupt mask bit UI bit in CCR is used as a user bit (Initial value) Bit 2--NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the valid edge of the NMI input. Bit 2 NMIEG 0 1 Description An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 67 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 1--Software Standby Output Port Enable (SSOE): Specifies whether the address bus and bus control signals (CS0 to CS7, AS, RD, HWR, LWR, UCAS, LCAS, and RFSH) are kept as outputs or fixed high, or placed in the high-impedance state in software standby mode. Bit 1 SSOE 0 1 Description In software standby mode, the address bus and bus control signals are all highimpedance (Initial value) In software standby mode, the address bus retains its output state and bus control signals are fixed high Bit 0--RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized by the rising edge of the RES signal. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME 0 1 Description On-chip RAM is disabled On-chip RAM is enabled (Initial value) 3.4 3.4.1 Operating Mode Descriptions Mode 1 Ports 1, 2, and 5 function as address pins A19 to A0, permitting access to a maximum 1-Mbyte address space. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. If at least one area is designated for 16-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to 16 bits. 3.4.2 Mode 2 Ports 1, 2, and 5 function as address pins A19 to A0, permitting access to a maximum 1-Mbyte address space. The initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. If all areas are designated for 8-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to 8 bits. 3.4.3 Mode 3 Ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port A function as address pins A23 to A0, permitting access to a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. If at least one area is designated for 16-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 68 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 16 bits. A23 to A21 are valid when 0 is written in bits 7 to 5 of the bus release control register (BRCR). (In this mode A20 is always used for address output.) 3.4.4 Mode 4 Ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port A function as address pins A23 to A0, permitting access to a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. The initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. If all areas are designated for 8-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to 8 bits. A23 to A21 are valid when 0 is written in bits 7 to 5 of BRCR. (In this mode A20 is always used for address output.) 3.4.5 Mode 5 Ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port A can function as address pins A23 to A0, permitting access to a maximum 16-Mbyte address space, but following a reset they are input ports. To use ports 1, 2, and 5 as an address bus, the corresponding bits in their data direction registers (P1DDR, P2DDR, and P5DDR) must be set to 1. For A23 to A20 output, write 0 in bits 7 to 4 of BRCR. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. If at least one area is designated for 16bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to 16 bits. 3.4.6 Mode 6 This mode operates using the on-chip ROM, RAM, and registers. All I/O ports are available. Mode 6 supports a maximum address space of 64 kbytes. 3.4.7 Mode 7 This mode operates using the on-chip ROM, RAM, and registers. All I/O ports are available. Mode 7 supports a 1-Mbyte address space. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 69 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.5 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode The pin functions of ports 1 to 5 and port A vary depending on the operating mode. Table 3.3 indicates their functions in each operating mode. Table 3.3 Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port A Pin Functions in Each Mode Mode 2 A7 to A0 A15 to A8 D15 to D8 D7 to D0*1 A19 to A16 PA7 to PA4 Mode 3 A7 to A0 A15 to A8 D15 to D8 P47 to P40*1 A19 to A16 PA6 to PA4, A20*3 Mode 4 A7 to A0 A15 to A8 D15 to D8 D7 to D0*1 A19 to A16 PA6 to PA4, A20*3 Mode 5 P17 to P10* P27 to P20* D15 to D8 P47 to P40*1 P53 to P50* 2 2 Mode 1 A7 to A0 A15 to A8 D15 to D8 P47 to P40*1 A19 to A16 PA7 to PA4 Mode 6 P17 to P10 P27 to P20 P37 to P30 P47 to P40 P53 to P50 PA7 to PA4 Mode 7 P17 to P10 P27 to P20 P37 to P30 P47 to P40 P53 to P50 PA7 to PA4 2 PA7 to PA4*4 Notes: 1. Initial state. The bus mode can be switched by settings in ABWCR. These pins function as P47 to P40 in 8-bit bus mode, and as D7 to D0 in 16-bit bus mode. 2. Initial state. These pins become address output pins when the corresponding bits in the data direction registers (P1DDR, P2DDR, P5DDR) are set to 1. 3. Initial state. A20 is always an address output pin. PA6 to PA4 are switched over to A23 to A21 output by writing 0 in bits 7 to 5 of BRCR. 4. Initial state. PA7 to PA4 are switched over to A23 to A20 output by writing 0 in bits 7 to 4 of BRCR. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 70 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.6 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Figure 3.1 to 3.3 show a memory maps of the H8/3067, H8/3066, and H8/3065. The address space is divided into eight areas. The initial bus mode differs between modes 1 and 2, and also between modes 3 and 4. The address locations of the on-chip RAM and on-chip registers differ between the 64-kbyte mode (mode 6), the 1-Mbyte modes (modes 1, 2, and 7), and the 16-Mbyte modes (modes 3, 4, and 5). The address range specifiable by the CPU in the 8- and 16-bit absolute addressing modes (@aa:8 and @aa:16) also differs. 3.6.1 Note on Reserved Areas The H8/3067 Group memory map includes reserved areas to which read/write access is prohibited. Note that normal operation is not guaranteed if the following reserved areas are accessed. (1) The reserved area in the internal I/O register space The H8/3067 Group internal I/O register space includes a reserved area to which access is prohibited. For details see Appendix B, Internal I/O Registers. (2) Other reserved areas In mode 5 in the H8/3066 and H8/3065, there is a reserved area in area 0 as shown in figures 3.2 and 3.3. In modes 1 to 5 in the H8/3065, there is a reserved area in area 7 as shown in figure 3.3. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 71 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Modes 1 and 2 (1-Mbyte expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) Modes 3 and 4 (16-Mbyte expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) Vector area Memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses H'000FF H'0000FF H'07FFF H'007FFF H'1FFFF H'20000 H'3FFFF H'40000 H'5FFFF H'60000 External address space H'7FFFF H'80000 H'9FFFF H'A0000 H'BFFFF H'C0000 H'DFFFF H'E0000 H'EE000 H'EE0FF H'F8000 H'FEF1F H'FEF20 H'FFF00 H'FFF1F H'FFF20 H'FFFE9 H'FFFEA H'FFFFF On-chip I/O registers (2) External address space On-chip I/O registers (1) External address space Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Area 6 Area 7 H'7FFFFF H'800000 H'9FFFFF H'A00000 H'5FFFFF H'600000 External address space H'3FFFFF H'400000 H'1FFFFF H'200000 Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 On-chip RAM* 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses H'BFFFFF H'C00000 Area 6 H'DFFFFF H'E00000 H'FEE000 H'FEE0FF H'FF8000 H'FFEF1F H'FFEF20 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF1F H'FFFF20 H'FFFFE9 H'FFFFEA H'FFFFFF External address space Area 7 On-chip I/O registers (1) On-chip I/O registers (2) External address space Note: * External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM. Figure 3.1 H8/3067 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 72 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 8-bit absolute addresses On-chip RAM* 16-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses Vector area Memory-indirect branch addresses H'00000 H'000000 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 5 (16-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Memory-indirect branch addresses Mode 6 (single-chip normal mode) Mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) H'00000 H'000FF On-chip ROM H'07FFF H'1FFFF Memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses H'0000FF On-chip ROM H'007FFF H'01FFFF H'020000 H'1FFFFF H'200000 H'3FFFFF H'400000 H'5FFFFF H'600000 External address space H'7FFFFF H'800000 H'9FFFFF H'A00000 H'BFFFFF H'C00000 H'DFFFFF H'E00000 H'FEE000 H'FEE0FF H'FF8000 External address space H'00FF On-chip ROM Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Area 6 Area 7 H'DFFF H'E000 On-chip I/O registers (1) H'E0FF H'EF20 On-chip RAM H'FF00 H'FF1F H'FF20 H'FFE9 On-chip I/O registers (2) 8-bit absolute addresses H'EE000 H'EE0FF H'F8000 On-chip I/O registers (1) H'FFFF On-chip RAM H'FFF00 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses H'FFEF1F H'FFEF20 On-chip RAM* H'FFFF00 H'FFFF1F H'FFFF20 H'FFFFE9 H'FFFFEA On-chip I/O registers (2) External address space H'FFF1F H'FFF20 H'FFFE9 On-chip I/O registers(2) H'FFFFF H'FFFFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM. Figure 3.1 H8/3067 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (2) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 73 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 8-bit absolute addresses H'FEF20 16-bit absolute addresses On-chip I/O registers (1) 16-bit absolute addresses Vector area Vector area Vector area Memory-indirect branch addresses H'000000 H'0000 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Modes 1 and 2 (1-Mbyte expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) Modes 3 and 4 (16-Mbyte expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) Vector area Memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses H'000FF H'0000FF H'07FFF H'007FFF H'1FFFF H'20000 H'3FFFF H'40000 H'5FFFF H'60000 External address space H'7FFFF H'80000 H'9FFFF H'A0000 H'BFFFF H'C0000 H'DFFFF H'E0000 H'EE000 H'EE0FF H'F8000 H'FEF1F H'FEF20 H'FFF00 H'FFF1F H'FFF20 H'FFFE9 H'FFFEA H'FFFFF On-chip I/O registers (2) External address space On-chip I/O registers (1) External address space Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Area 6 Area 7 H'7FFFFF H'800000 H'9FFFFF H'A00000 H'5FFFFF H'600000 External address space H'3FFFFF H'400000 H'1FFFFF H'200000 Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 On-chip RAM* 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses H'BFFFFF H'C00000 Area 6 H'DFFFFF H'E00000 H'FEE000 H'FEE0FF H'FF8000 H'FFEF1F H'FFEF20 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF1F H'FFFF20 H'FFFFE9 H'FFFFEA H'FFFFFF External address space Area 7 On-chip I/O registers (1) On-chip I/O registers (2) External address space Note: * External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM. Figure 3.2 H8/3066 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 74 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 8-bit absolute addresses On-chip RAM* 16-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses Vector area Memory-indirect branch addresses H'00000 H'000000 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 5 (16-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Memory-indirect branch addresses Mode 6 (single-chip normal mode) Mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) H'00000 H'000FF On-chip ROM H'07FFF H'17FFF Memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses H'0000FF On-chip ROM H'007FFF H'017FFF H'018000 H'01FFFF H'020000 H'00FF On-chip ROM Reserved*1 Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 H'DFFF H'E000 On-chip I/O registers (1) H'E0FF Area 4 Area 5 Area 6 Area 7 H'FF00 H'FF1F H'FF20 H'FFE9 H'FFFF On-chip RAM 8-bit absolute addresses H'1FFFFF H'200000 H'3FFFFF H'400000 H'5FFFFF H'600000 External address space H'7FFFFF H'800000 H'9FFFFF H'A00000 H'BFFFFF H'C00000 H'DFFFFF H'E00000 H'FEE000 H'FEE0FF External address space H'FF8000 Area 3 H'EF20 H'EE000 H'EE0FF H'F8000 On-chip I/O registers (2) On-chip I/O registers (1) On-chip RAM H'FFF00 H'FFF1F H'FFF20 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses H'FFEF1F H'FFEF20 On-chip RAM*2 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF1F H'FFFF20 H'FFFFE9 H'FFFFEA On-chip I/O registers (2) External address space On-chip I/O registers(2) H'FFFE9 H'FFFFF H'FFFFFF Notes: 1. Do not access the reserved area. 2. External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM. Figure 3.2 H8/3066 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (2) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 75 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 8-bit absolute addresses On-chip I/O registers (1) H'FEF20 16-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses Vector area Vector area Vector area Memory-indirect branch addresses H'000000 H'0000 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Modes 1 and 2 (1-Mbyte expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) Memory-indirect branch addresses Modes 3 and 4 (16-Mbyte expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) Vector area Memory-indirect branch addresses H'00000 16-bit absolute addresses H'000FF H'0000FF H'07FFF H'007FFF H'1FFFF H'20000 H'3FFFF H'40000 H'5FFFF H'60000 External address space H'7FFFF H'80000 H'9FFFF H'A0000 H'BFFFF H'C0000 H'DFFFF H'E0000 H'EE000 H'EE0FF H'F8000 H'FEF1F H'FEF20 H'FF71F H'FF720 H'FFF00 H'FFF1F H'FFF20 H'FFFE9 H'FFFEA H'FFFFF On-chip I/O registers (1) External address space Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Area 6 Area 7 H'7FFFFF H'800000 H'9FFFFF H'A00000 H'5FFFFF H'600000 External address space H'3FFFFF H'400000 H'1FFFFF H'200000 Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 16-bit absolute addresses Reserved*1 8-bit absolute addresses H'BFFFFF H'C00000 Area 6 H'DFFFFF H'E00000 H'FEE000 H'FEE0FF H'FF8000 H'FFEF1F H'FFEF20 H'FFF71F H'FFF720 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF1F H'FFFF20 H'FFFFE9 H'FFFFEA External address space On-chip RAM*2 On-chip I/O registers (2) External address space Area 7 On-chip I/O registers (1) Reserved*1 16-bit absolute addresses 8-bit absolute addresses On-chip RAM*2 On-chip I/O registers (2) External address space H'FFFFFF Notes: 1. Do not access the reserved area. 2. External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM. Figure 3.3 H8/3065 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 76 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 16-bit absolute addresses Vector area H'000000 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 5 (16-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Memory-indirect branch addresses Mode 6 (single-chip normal mode) Mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) H'00000 H'000FF On-chip ROM H'07FFF H'0FFFF Memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses H'0000FF On-chip ROM H'007FFF H'00FFFF H'010000 1 H'01FFFF Reserved* H'020000 H'1FFFFF H'200000 H'3FFFFF H'400000 H'5FFFFF H'600000 External address space H'7FFFFF H'800000 H'9FFFFF H'A00000 H'BFFFFF H'C00000 H'DFFFFF H'E00000 H'FEE000 H'FEE0FF H'FF8000 H'FFEF1F H'FFEF20 H'FFF71F H'FFF720 H'FFFF00 H'FFFF1F H'FFFF20 H'FFFFE9 H'FFFFEA On-chip I/O registers (1) External address space H'00FF On-chip ROM H'DFFF H'E000 Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Area 6 Area 7 H'FF00 H'FF1F H'FF20 H'FFE9 H'FFFF On-chip I/O registers (2) H'F720 On-chip RAM 8-bit absolute addresses On-chip I/O registers (1) H'E0FF H'EE000 H'EE0FF H'F8000 On-chip I/O registers (1) On-chip RAM H'FFF00 H'FFF1F H'FFF20 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses Reserved* 1 On-chip I/O registers(2) H'FFFE9 On-chip RAM*2 On-chip I/O registers (2) External address space H'FFFFF H'FFFFFF Notes: 1. Do not access the reserved area. 2. External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM. Figure 3.3 H8/3065 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (2) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 77 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 8-bit absolute addresses H'FF720 16-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses Vector area Vector area Vector area Memory-indirect branch addresses H'000000 H'0000 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 78 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1 4.1.1 Overview Exception Handling Types and Priority As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in priority order. Trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority Start of Exception Handling Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin Interrupt requests are handled when execution of the current instruction or handling of the current exception is completed Priority Exception Type High Reset Interrupt Low Trap instruction (TRAPA) Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA) 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows. 1. The program counter (PC) and condition code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack. 2. The CCR interrupt mask bit is set to 1. 3. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution starts from that address. For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 79 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1.3 Exception Vector Table The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4.1. Different vectors are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. * Reset External interrupts: NMI, IRQ 0 to IRQ5 Exception sources * Interrupts * Trap instruction Internal interrupts: 36 interrupts from on-chip supporting modules Figure 4.1 Exception Sources Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 80 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling Table 4.2 Exception Vector Table Vector Address*1 Exception Source Reset Reserved for system use Vector Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Advanced Mode H'0000 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'000B H'000C to H'000F H'0010 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'001B H'001C to H'001F H'0020 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'002B H'002C to H'002F H'0030 to H'0033 H'0034 to H'0037 H'0038 to H'003B H'003C to H'003F H'0040 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0047 H'0048 to H'004B H'004C to H'004F H'0050 to H'0053 to H'00FC to H'00FF Normal Mode H'0000 to H'0001 H'0002 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0005 H'0006 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'0009 H'000A to H'000B H'000C to H'000D H'000E to H'000F H'0010 to H'0011 H'0012 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0015 H'0016 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'0019 H'001A to H'001B H'001C to H'001D H'001E to H'001F H'0020 to H'0021 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0025 H'0026 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'0029 to H'007E to H'007F External interrupt (NMI) Trap instruction (4 sources) 7 8 9 10 11 External interrupt IRQ0 External interrupt IRQ1 External interrupt IRQ2 External interrupt IRQ3 External interrupt IRQ4 External interrupt IRQ5 Reserved for system use 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Internal interrupts*2 20 to 63 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. For the internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, Interrupt Vector Table. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 81 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.2 4.2.1 Reset Overview A reset is the highest-priority exception. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and the chip enters the reset state. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules. Reset exception handling begins when the RES pin changes from low to high. The chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details see section 12, Watchdog Timer. 4.2.2 Reset Sequence The chip enters the reset state when the RES pin goes low. To ensure that the chip is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 10 system clock () cycles. When the flash memory and flash memory R versions are used, the RES pin must be held low for at least 20 system clock cycles. See appendix D.2, Pin States at Reset, for the states of the pins in the reset state. When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset exception handling as follows. * The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, and the I bit is set to 1 in CCR. * The contents of the reset vector address (H'0000 to H'0003 in advanced mode, H'0000 to H'0001 in normal mode) are read, and program execution starts from the address indicated in the vector address. Figure 4.2 shows the reset sequence in modes 1 and 3. Figure 4.3 shows the reset sequence in modes 2 and 4. Figure 4.4 shows the reset sequence in mode 6. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 82 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Vector fetch Internal processing Prefetch of first program instruction RES Address bus (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) RD HWR , LWR (2) (4) High (6) (8) (10) Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Modes 1 and 3) Address of reset vector: (1) = H'000000, (3) = H'000001, (5) = H'000002, (7) = H'000003 Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) Start address First instruction of program D15 to D8 (1), (3), (5), (7) (2), (4), (6), (8) (9) (10) Section 4 Exception Handling Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 83 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Note: After a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle. Section 4 Exception Handling Internal processing Vector fetch Prefetch of first program instruction RES Address bus (1) (3) (5) RD HWR , LWR D15 to D0 High (2) (4) (6) (1), (3) (2), (4) (5) (6) Address of reset vector: (1) = H'000000, (3) = H'000002 Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) Start address First instruction of program Note: After a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle. Figure 4.3 Reset Sequence (Modes 2 and 4) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 84 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling Prefetch of first program instruction Vector fetch Internal processing RES Internal address bus Internal read signal Internal write signal Internal data bus (16 bits wide) (1) (2) (2) (3) (1) Address of reset vector (H'0000) (2) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (3) First instruction of program Figure 4.4 Reset Sequence (Mode 6) 4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. The first instruction of the program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends. This instruction should initialize the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx:32, SP). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 85 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.3 Interrupts Interrupt exception handling can be requested by seven external sources (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ5), and 36 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 4.5 classifies the interrupt sources and indicates the number of interrupts of each type. The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts are the watchdog timer (WDT), DRAM interface, 16-bit timer, 8-bit timer, DMA controller (DMAC), serial communication interface (SCI), and A/D converter. Each interrupt source has a separate vector address. NMI is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted*. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller can assign interrupts other than NMI to two priority levels, and arbitrate between simultaneous interrupts. Interrupt priorities are assigned in interrupt priority registers A and B (IPRA and IPRB) in the interrupt controller. Note: * In the flash memory and flash memory R versions, NMI input is sometimes disabled. For details see 18.6.4, NMI Input Disable Conditions. For details on interrupts see section 5, Interrupt Controller. NMI (1) IRQ 0 to IRQ 5 (6) WDT*1 (1) DRAM interface*2 (1) 16-bit timer (9) 8-bit timer (8) DMAC (4) SCI (12) A/D converter (1) External interrupts Interrupts Internal interrupts Notes: Numbers in parentheses are the number of interrupt sources. 1. When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at every counter overflow. 2. When the DRAM interface is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at compare match. Figure 4.5 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 86 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.4 Trap Instruction Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. If the UE bit is set to 1 in the system control register (SYSCR), the exception handling sequence sets the I bit to 1 in CCR. If the UE bit is 0, the I and UI bits are both set to 1. The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, which is specified in the instruction code. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 87 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling Figure 4.6 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP (ER7) Stack area SP (ER7) SP+1 SP+2 SP+3 SP+4 CCR CCR * PC H PC L Even address Before exception handling Pushed on stack a. Normal mode After exception handling SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP (ER7) Stack area SP (ER7) SP+1 SP+2 SP+3 SP+4 CCR PC E PC H PC L Even address Before exception handling Pushed on stack b. Advanced mode Legend PCE: Bits 23 to 16 of program counter (PC) PCH: Bits 15 to 8 of program counter (PC) PCL: Bits 7 to 0 of program counter (PC) CCR: Condition code register SP: Stack pointer After exception handling Notes: * Ignored at return. 1. PC indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after return. 2. Registers must be saved in word or longword size at even addresses. Figure 4.6 Stack after Completion of Exception Handling Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 88 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.6 Notes on Stack Usage When accessing word data or longword data, the H8/3067 Group regards the lowest address bit as 0. The stack should always be accessed by word access or longword access, and the value of the stack pointer (SP, ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers: PUSH.W Rn PUSH.L ERn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP) (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP) Use the following instructions to restore registers: POP.W Rn POP.L ERn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn) (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn) Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.7 shows an example of what happens when the SP value is odd. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 89 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling CCR SP PC SP R1L H'FFFEFA H'FFFEFB PC H'FFFEFC H'FFFEFD H'FFFEFF SP TRAPA instruction executed MOV. B R1L, @-ER7 SP set to H'FFFEFF Legend CCR: Condition code register PC: Program counter R1L: General register R1L SP: Stack pointer Data saved above SP CCR contents lost Note: The diagram illustrates modes 3 and 4. Figure 4.7 Operation when SP Value is Odd Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 90 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1 5.1.1 Overview Features The interrupt controller has the following features: * Interrupt priority registers (IPRs) for setting interrupt priorities Interrupts other than NMI can be assigned to two priority levels on a module-by-module basis in interrupt priority registers A and B (IPRA and IPRB). * Three-level masking by the I and UI bits in the CPU condition code register (CCR) * Seven external interrupt pins NMI has the highest priority and is always accepted*; either the rising or falling edge can be selected. For each of IRQ0 to IRQ5, sensing of the falling edge or level sensing can be selected independently. Note: * In the flash memory and flash memory R versions, NMI input is sometimes disabled. For details see 18.6.4, NMI Input Disable Conditions. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 91 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 5.1 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller. CPU ISCR NMI input IRQ input OVF TME . . . . . . . TEI TEIE IRQ input section ISR Priority decision logic IER IPRA, IPRB Interrupt request Vector number . . . I Interrupt controller UE SYSCR Legend ISCR: IER: ISR: IPRA: IPRB: SYSCR: IRQ sense control register IRQ enable register IRQ status register Interrupt priority register A Interrupt priority register B System control register UI CCR Figure 5.1 Interrupt Controller Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 92 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 5.1 lists the interrupt pins. Table 5.1 Name Nonmaskable interrupt External interrupt request 5 to 0 Interrupt Pins Abbreviation I/O NMI IRQ5 to IRQ0 Function Input Nonmaskable interrupt*, rising edge or falling edge selectable Input Maskable interrupts, falling edge or level sensing selectable Note: * In the flash memory and flash memory R versions, NMI input is sometimes disabled. For details see 18.6.4, NMI Input Disable Conditions. 5.1.4 Register Configuration Table 5.2 lists the registers of the interrupt controller. Table 5.2 Address* H'EE012 H'EE014 H'EE015 H'EE016 H'EE018 H'EE019 1 Interrupt Controller Registers Name System control register IRQ sense control register IRQ enable register IRQ status register Interrupt priority register A Interrupt priority register B Abbreviation SYSCR ISCR IER ISR IPRA IPRB R/W R/W R/W R/W 2 R/(W)* R/W R/W Initial Value H'09 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 Notes: 1. Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 93 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2 5.2.1 Register Descriptions System Control Register (SYSCR) SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls software standby mode, selects the action of the UI bit in CCR, selects the NMI edge, and enables or disables the on-chip RAM. Only bits 3 and 2 are described here. For the other bits, see section 3.3, System Control Register (SYSCR). SYSCR is initialized to H'09 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 SSOE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM enable Software standby output port enable Standby timer select 2 to 0 Software standby NMI edge select Selects the NMI input edge User bit enable Selects whether to use the UI bit in CCR as a user bit or interrupt mask bit Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 94 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Bit 3--User Bit Enable (UE): Selects whether to use the UI bit in CCR as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit. Bit 3 UE 0 1 Description UI bit in CCR is used as interrupt mask bit UI bit in CCR is used as user bit (Initial value) Bit 2--NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the NMI input edge. Bit 2 NMIEG 0 1 Description Interrupt is requested at falling edge of NMI input Interrupt is requested at rising edge of NMI input (Initial value) 5.2.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A and B (IPRA, IPRB) IPRA and IPRB are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control interrupt priority. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 95 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Priority Register A (IPRA): IPRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which interrupt priority levels can be set. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 IPRA7 0 R/W 6 IPRA6 0 R/W 5 IPRA5 0 R/W 4 IPRA4 0 R/W 3 IPRA3 0 R/W 2 IPRA2 0 R/W 1 IPRA1 0 R/W 0 IPRA0 0 R/W Priority level A0 Selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 2 interrupt requests Priority level A1 Selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 1 interrupt requests Priority level A2 Selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 0 interrupt requests Priority level A3 Selects the priority level of WDT, DRAM interface, and A/D converter interrupt requests Priority level A4 Selects the priority level of IRQ4 and IRQ 5 interrupt requests Priority level A5 Selects the priority level of IRQ 2 and IRQ 3 interrupt requests Priority level A6 Selects the priority level of IRQ1 interrupt requests Priority level A7 Selects the priority level of IRQ 0 interrupt requests IPRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 96 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Bit 7--Priority Level A7 (IPRA7): Selects the priority level of IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bit 7 IPRA7 0 1 Description IRQ0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) IRQ0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 6--Priority Level A6 (IPRA6): Selects the priority level of IRQ1 interrupt requests. Bit 6 IPRA6 0 1 Description IRQ1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) IRQ1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 5--Priority Level A5 (IPRA5): Selects the priority level of IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupt requests. Bit 5 IPRA5 0 1 Description IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 4--Priority Level A4 (IPRA4): Selects the priority level of IRQ4 and IRQ5 interrupt requests. Bit 4 IPRA4 0 1 Description IRQ4 and IRQ5 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) IRQ4 and IRQ5 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 97 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Bit 3--Priority Level A3 (IPRA3): Selects the priority level of WDT, DRAM interface, and A/D converter interrupt requests. Bit 3 IPRA3 0 1 Description WDT, DRAM interface, and A/D converter interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value) WDT, DRAM interface, and A/D converter interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) Bit 2--Priority Level A2 (IPRA2): Selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 0 interrupt requests. Bit 2 IPRA2 0 1 Description 16-bit timer channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value) 16-bit timer channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) Bit 1--Priority Level A1 (IPRA1): Selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 1 interrupt requests. Bit 1 IPRA1 0 1 Description 16-bit timer channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value) 16-bit timer channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) Bit 0--Priority Level A0 (IPRA0): Selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 2 interrupt requests. Bit 0 IPRA0 0 1 Description 16-bit timer channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value) 16-bit timer channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 98 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Priority Register B (IPRB): IPRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which interrupt priority levels can be set. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 IPRB7 0 R/W 6 IPRB6 0 R/W 5 IPRB5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 IPRB3 0 R/W 2 IPRB2 0 R/W 1 IPRB1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Reserved bit Priority level B1 Selects the priority level of SCI channel 2 interrupt requests Priority level B2 Selects the priority level of SCI channel 1 interrupt requests Priority level B3 Selects the priority level of SCI channel 0 interrupt requests Reserved bit Priority level B5 Selects the priority level of DMAC interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) Priority level B6 Selects the priority level of 8-bit timer channel 2, 3 interrupt requests Priority level B7 Selects the priority level of 8-bit timer channel 0, 1 interrupt requests IPRB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 99 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Bit 7--Priority Level B7 (IPRB7): Selects the priority level of 8-bit timer channel 0, 1 interrupt requests. Bit 7 IPRB7 0 1 Description 8-bit timer channel 0, 1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority)(Initial value) 8-bit timer channel 0, 1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) Bit 6--Priority Level B6 (IPRB6): Selects the priority level of 8-bit timer channel 2, 3 interrupt requests. Bit 6 IPRB6 0 1 Description 8-bit timer channel 2, 3 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority)(Initial value) 8-bit timer channel 2, 3 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) Bit 5--Priority Level B5 (IPRB5): Selects the priority level of DMAC interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1). Bit 5 IPRB5 0 1 Description DMAC interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value) DMAC interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) have priority level 1 (high priority) Bit 4--Reserved: This bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority. Bit 3--Priority Level B3 (IPRB3): Selects the priority level of SCI channel 0 interrupt requests. Bit 3 IPRB3 0 1 Description SCI0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) SCI0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 100 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Bit 2--Priority Level B2 (IPRB2): Selects the priority level of SCI channel 1 interrupt requests. Bit 2 IPRB2 0 1 Description SCI1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) SCI1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 1--Priority Level B1 (IPRB1): Selects the priority level of SCI channel 2 interrupt requests. Bit 1 IPRB1 0 1 Description SCI channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) SCI channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) (Initial value) Bit 0--Reserved: This bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 101 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.3 IRQ Status Register (ISR) ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt requests. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 6 0 5 IRQ5F 0 R/(W)* 4 IRQ4F 0 R/(W)* 3 IRQ3F 0 R/(W)* 2 IRQ2F 0 R/(W)* 1 IRQ1F 0 R/(W)* 0 IRQ0F 0 R/(W)* Reserved bits IRQ 5 to IRQ0 flags These bits indicate IRQ 5 to IRQ 0 interrupt request status Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. ISR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 and 6--Reserved: These bits can not be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 5 to 0--IRQ5 to IRQ0 Flags (IRQ5F to IRQ0F): These bits indicate the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bits 5 to 0 IRQ5F to IRQ0F Description 0 [Clearing conditions] (Initial value) 0 is written in IRQnF after reading the IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1. IRQnSC = 0, IRQn input is high, and interrupt exception handling is carried out. IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn interrupt exception handling is carried out. [Setting conditions] IRQnSC = 0 and IRQn input is low. IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn input changes from high to low. 1 Note: n = 5 to 0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 102 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.4 IRQ Enable Register (IER) IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 IRQ5E 0 R/W 4 IRQ4E 0 R/W 3 IRQ3E 0 R/W 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W Reserved bits IRQ 5 to IRQ0 enable These bits enable or disable IRQ 5 to IRQ 0 interrupts IER is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 and 6--Reserved: These bits can be written and read, but they do not enable or disable interrupts. Bits 5 to 0--IRQ5 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ5E to IRQ0E): These bits enable or disable IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts. Bits 5 to 0 IRQ5E to IRQ0E Description 0 1 IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts are disabled IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts are enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 103 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.5 IRQ Sense Control Register (ISCR) ISCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects level sensing or falling-edge sensing of the inputs at pins IRQ5 to IRQ0. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W IRQ5SC IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC Reserved bits IRQ 5 to IRQ0 sense control These bits select level sensing or falling-edge sensing for IRQ 5 to IRQ 0 interrupts ISCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 and 6--Reserved: These bits can be written and read, but they do not select level or falling-edge sensing. Bits 5 to 0--IRQ5 to IRQ0 Sense Control (IRQ5SC to IRQ0SC): These bits select whether interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 are requested by level sensing of pins IRQ5 to IRQ0, or by falling-edge sensing. Bits 5 to 0 IRQ5SC to IRQ0SC Description 0 1 Interrupts are requested when IRQ5 to IRQ0 inputs are low Interrupts are requested by falling-edge input at IRQ5 to IRQ0 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 104 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3 Interrupt Sources The interrupt sources include external interrupts (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ5) and 36 internal interrupts. 5.3.1 External Interrupts There are seven external interrupts: NMI, and IRQ0 to IRQ5. Of these, NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ2 can be used to exit software standby mode. NMI: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted, regardless of the states of the I and UI bits in CCR*. The NMIEG bit in SYSCR selects whether an interrupt is requested by the rising or falling edge of the input at the NMI pin. NMI interrupt exception handling has vector number 7. Note: In the flash memory and flash memory R versions, NMI input is sometimes disabled. For details see 18.6.4, NMI Input Disable Conditions. IRQ0 to IRQ5 Interrupts: These interrupts are requested by input signals at pins IRQ0 to IRQ5. The IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupts have the following features. * ISCR settings can select whether an interrupt is requested by the low level of the input at pins IRQ0 to IRQ5, or by the falling edge. * IER settings can enable or disable the IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupts. Interrupt priority levels can be assigned by four bits in IPRA (IPRA7 to IPRA4). * The status of IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupt requests is indicated in ISR. The ISR flags can be cleared to 0 by software. Figure 5.2 shows a block diagram of interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5. IRQnSC IRQnF Edge/level sense circuit IRQn input S R Clear signal Note: n = 5 to 0 Q IRQn interrupt request IRQnE Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 105 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Figure 5.3 shows the timing of the setting of the interrupt flags (IRQnF). IRQn input pin IRQnF Note: n = 5 to 0 Figure 5.3 Timing of Setting of IRQnF Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5 have vector numbers 12 to 17. These interrupts are detected regardless of whether the corresponding pin is set for input or output. When using a pin for external interrupt input, clear its DDR bit to 0 and do not use the pin for chip select output, refresh output, SCI input/output, or A/D external trigger input. 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts Thirty-Six internal interrupts are requested from the on-chip supporting modules. * Each on-chip supporting module has status flags for indicating interrupt status, and enable bits for enabling or disabling interrupts. * Interrupt priority levels can be assigned in IPRA and IPRB. * 16-bit timer, SCI, and A/D converter interrupt requests can activate the DMAC, in which case no interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller, and the I and UI bits are disregarded. 5.3.3 Interrupt Vector Table Table 5.3 lists the interrupt sources, their vector addresses, and their default priority order. In the default priority order, smaller vector numbers have higher priority. The priority of interrupts other than NMI can be changed in IPRA and IPRB. The priority order after a reset is the default order shown in table 5.3. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 106 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.3 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Priority Vector Vector Address* Number Advanced Mode Normal Mode 7 12 13 14 15 16 17 Watchdog timer DRAM interface A/D 18 19 20 21 22 23 Interrupt Source NMI IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 Reserved WOVI (interval timer) CMI (compare match) Reserved ADI (A/D end) IMIA0 (compare match/ input capture A0) IMIB0 (compare match/ input capture B0) OVI0 (overflow 0) Reserved IMIA1 (compare match/ inputcapture A1) IMIB1 (compare match/ input capture B1) OVI1 (overflow 1) Reserved Origin External pins IPR Priority High H'001C to H'001F H'000E to H'000F H'0030 to H'0033 H'0034 to H0037 H'0018 to H'0019 IPRA7 H'001A to H'001B IPRA6 H'0038 to H'003B H'001C to H'001D IPRA5 H'003C to H'003F H'001E to H'001F H'0040 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0047 H'0020 to H'0021 H'0022 to H'0023 IPRA4 H'0048 to H'004B H'0024 to H'0025 H'004C to H'004F H'0026 to H'0027 H'0050 to H'0053 H'0054 to H'0057 H'0028 to H'0029 H'002A to H'002B IPRA3 H'0058 to H'005B H'002C to H'002D H'005C to H'005F H'002E to H'002F H'0060 to H'0063 H'0030 to H'0031 IPRA2 16-bit timer 24 channel 0 25 H'0064 to H'0067 H'0032 to H'0033 26 27 H'0068 to H'006B H'0034 to H'0035 H'006C to H'006F H'0036 to H'0037 H'0070 to H'0073 H'0038 to H'0039 IPRA1 16-bit timer 28 channel 1 29 H'0074 to H'0077 H'003A to H'003B 30 31 H'0078 to H'007B H'003C to H'003D H'007C to H'007F H'003E to H'003F Low Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 107 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Vector Vector Address* Number Advanced Mode Normal Mode H'0080 to H'0083 H'0040 to H'0041 Interrupt Source IMIA2 (compare match/ input capture A2) IMIB2 (compare match/ input capture B2) OVI2 (overflow 2) Reserved CMIA0 (compare match A0) CMIB0 (compare match B0) CMIA1/CMIB1 (compare match A1/B1) TOVI0/TOVI1 (overflow 0/1) CMIA2 (compare match A2) CMIB2 (compare match B2) CMIA3/CMIB3 (compare match A3/B3) TOVI2/TOVI3 (overflow 2/3) DEND0A DEND0B DEND1A DEND1B Reserved Origin IPR IPRA0 Priority High 16-bit timer 32 channel 2 33 H'0084 to H'0087 H'0042 to H'0043 34 35 H'0088 to H'008B H'0044 to H'0045 H'008C to H'008F H'0046 to H'0047 H'0090 to H'0093 H'0048 to H'0049 IPRB7 8-bit timer 36 channel 0/1 37 H'0094 to H'0097 H'004A to H'004B 38 H'0098 to H'009B H'004C to H'004D 39 8-bit timer 40 channel 2/3 41 H'009C to H'009F H'004E to H'004F H'00A0 to H'00A3 H'0050 to H'0051 IPRB6 H'00A4 to H'00A7 H'0052 to H'0053 42 H'00A8 to H'00AB H'0054 to H'0055 43 DMAC 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 H'00AC to H'00AF H'0056 to H'0057 H'00B0 to H'00B3 H'00B4 to H'00B7 H'00B8 to H'00BB H'00BC to H'00BF H'00C0 to H'00C3 H'00C4 to H'00C7 H'00C8 to H'00CB H'00CC to H'00CF H'0058 to H'0059 IPRB5 H'005A to H'005B H'005C to H'005D H'005E to H'005F H'0060 to H'0061 H'0062 to H'0063 H'0064 to H'0065 H'0066 to H'0067 Low Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 108 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Vector Vector Address* Number Advanced Mode Normal Mode 52 53 54 55 SCI channel 1 56 57 58 59 SCI channel 2 60 61 62 63 H'00D0 to H'00D3 H'0068 to H'0069 H'00D4 to H'00D7 H'006A to H'006B H'00D8 to H'00DB H'006C to H'006D H'00DC to H'00DF H'006E to H'006F H'00E0 to H'00E3 H'0070 to H'0071 H'00E4 to H'00E7 H'0072 to H'0073 H'00E8 to H'00EB H'0074 to H'0075 H'00EC to H'00EF H'0076 to H'0077 H'00F0 to H'00F3 H'0078 to H'0079 H'00F4 to H'00F7 H'007A to H'007B H'00F8 to H'00FB H'007C to H'007D H'00FC to H'00FF H'007E to H'007F Low IPRB1 IPRB2 Interrupt Source ERI0 (receive error 0) RXI0 (receive data full 0) TXI0 (transmit data empty 0) TEI0 (transmit end 0) ERI1 (receive error 1) RXI1 (receive data full 1) TXI1 (transmit data empty 1) TEI1 (transmit end 1) ERI2 (receive error 2) RXI2 (receive data full 2) TXI2 (transmit data empty 2) TEI2 (transmit end 2) Origin SCI channel 0 IPR IPRB3 Priority High Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 109 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.4 5.4.1 Interrupt Operation Interrupt Handling Process The H8/3067 Group handles interrupts differently depending on the setting of the UE bit. When UE = 1, interrupts are controlled by the I bit. When UE = 0, interrupts are controlled by the I and UI bits. Table 5.4 indicates how interrupts are handled for all setting combinations of the UE, I, and UI bits. NMI interrupts are always accepted except in the reset and hardware standby states*. IRQ interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules have their own enable bits. Interrupt requests are ignored when the enable bits are cleared to 0. Note: In the flash memory and flash memory R versions, NMI input is sometimes disabled. For details see 18.6.4, NMI Input Disable Conditions. Table 5.4 SYSCR UE 1 I 0 1 0 0 1 UE, I, and UI Bit Settings and Interrupt Handling CCR UI -- -- -- 0 1 Description All interrupts are accepted. Interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. No interrupts are accepted except NMI. All interrupts are accepted. Interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. NMI and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted. No interrupts are accepted except NMI. UE = 1: Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ5 and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules can all be masked by the I bit in the CPU's CCR. Interrupts are masked when the I bit is set to 1, and unmasked when the I bit is cleared to 0. Interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. Figure 5.4 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when UE = 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 110 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Program execution state No Interrupt requested? Yes Yes NMI No No Priority level 1? Yes No No Pending IRQ 0 Yes IRQ 0 No Yes IRQ 1 Yes IRQ 1 Yes No TEI2 Yes TEI2 Yes No I=0 Yes Save PC and CCR I 1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt service routine Figure 5.4 Process Up to Interrupt Acceptance when UE = 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 111 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller * If an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. * When the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highestpriority request, following the IPR interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests pending. If two or more interrupts with the same IPR setting are requested simultaneously, the interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5.3. * The interrupt controller checks the I bit. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt request is accepted. If the I bit is set to 1, only NMI is accepted; other interrupt requests are held pending. * When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. * In interrupt exception handling, PC and CCR are saved to the stack area. The PC value that is saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from the interrupt service routine. * Next the I bit is set to 1 in CCR, masking all interrupts except NMI. * The vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address. UE = 0: The I and UI bits in the CPU's CCR and the IPR bits enable three-level masking of IRQ0 to IRQ5 interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules. * Interrupt requests with priority level 0 are masked when the I bit is set to 1, and are unmasked when the I bit is cleared to 0. * Interrupt requests with priority level 1 are masked when the I and UI bits are both set to 1, and are unmasked when either the I bit or the UI bit is cleared to 0. For example, if the interrupt enable bits of all interrupt requests are set to 1, IPRA is set to H'20, and IPRB is set to H'00 (giving IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupt requests priority over other interrupts), interrupts are masked as follows: a. If I = 0, all interrupts are unmasked (priority order: NMI > IRQ2 > IRQ3 >IRQ0 ...). b. If I = 1 and UI = 0, only NMI, IRQ2, and IRQ3 are unmasked. c. If I = 1 and UI = 1, all interrupts are masked except NMI. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 112 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Figure 5.5 shows the transitions among the above states. I0 a. All interrupts are unmasked I 1, UI 0 b. Only NMI, IRQ 2 , and IRQ 3 are unmasked I0 Exception handling, or I 1, UI 1 UI 0 Exception handling, or UI 1 c. All interrupts are masked except NMI Figure 5.5 Interrupt Masking State Transitions (Example) Figure 5.6 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when UE = 0. * If an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. * When the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highestpriority request, following the IPR interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests pending. If two or more interrupts with the same IPR setting are requested simultaneously, the interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5.3. * The interrupt controller checks the I bit. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt request is accepted regardless of its IPR setting, and regardless of the UI bit. If the I bit is set to 1 and the UI bit is cleared to 0, only NMI and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted; interrupt requests with priority level 0 are held pending. If the I bit and UI bit are both set to 1, only NMI is accepted; all other interrupt requests are held pending. * When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. * In interrupt exception handling, PC and CCR are saved to the stack area. The PC value that is saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from the interrupt service routine. * The I and UI bits are set to 1 in CCR, masking all interrupts except NMI. * The vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 113 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Program execution state No Interrupt requested? Yes Yes NMI No No Priority level 1? Yes No No Pending IRQ 0 Yes IRQ 0 No Yes IRQ 1 Yes IRQ 1 Yes No TEI2 Yes TEI2 Yes No I=0 Yes No UI = 0 Yes I=0 Yes No Save PC and CCR I 1, UI 1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt service routine Figure 5.6 Process Up to Interrupt Acceptance when UE = 0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 114 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 5.4.2 Interrupt accepted Interrupt level decision and wait for end of instruction Instruction Internal prefetch processing Stack Vector fetch Prefetch of interrupt Internal service routine processing instruction Interrupt Sequence Interrupt request signal (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) Address bus RD High (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) HWR , LWR Figure 5.7 shows the interrupt sequence in mode 2 when the program code and stack are in an external memory area accessed in two states via a 16-bit bus. Figure 5.7 Interrupt Sequence D15 to D0 (1) Instruction prefetch address (not executed; return address, same as PC contents) (2), (4) Instruction code (not executed) Instruction prefetch address (not executed) (3) SP - 2 (5) SP - 4 (7) (6), (8) PC and CCR saved to stack (9), (11) Vector address (10), (12) Starting address of interrupt service routine (contents of vector address) (13) Starting address of interrupt service routine; (13) = (10), (12) (14) First instruction of interrupt service routine Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 115 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Note: Mode 2, with program code and stack in external memory area accessed in two states via 16-bit bus. Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.4.3 Interrupt Response Time Table 5.5 indicates the interrupt response time from the occurrence of an interrupt request until the first instruction of the interrupt service routine is executed. Table 5.5 Interrupt Response Time External Memory On-Chip Memory 1 2* 8-Bit Bus 2 States 1 2* 16-Bit Bus 3 States 1 2* No. 1 2 Item Interrupt priority decision Maximum number of states until end of current instruction Saving PC and CCR to stack Vector fetch Instruction prefetch* 3 Internal processing* 2 2 States 1 2* 3 States 2* 1 1 to 23 1 to 27 1 to 31* 4 1 to 23 1 to 25* 4 3 4 5 6 Total 4 4 4 4 19 to 41 8 8 8 4 31 to 57 12* 4 4 4 4 4 19 to 41 6* 4 12* 4 12* 4 6* 4 6* 4 4 43 to 73 4 25 to 49 Notes: 1. 1 state for internal interrupts. 2. Prefetch after the interrupt is accepted and prefetch of the first instruction in the interrupt service routine. 3. Internal processing after the interrupt is accepted and internal processing after vector fetch. 4. The number of states increases if wait states are inserted in external memory access. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 116 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.5 5.5.1 Usage Notes Contention between Interrupt and Interrupt-Disabling Instruction When an instruction clears an interrupt enable bit to 0 to disable the interrupt, the interrupt is not disabled until after execution of the instruction is completed. If an interrupt occurs while a BCLR, MOV, or other instruction is being executed to clear its interrupt enable bit to 0, at the instant when execution of the instruction ends the interrupt is still enabled, so its interrupt exception handling is carried out. If a higher-priority interrupt is also requested, however, interrupt exception handling for the higher-priority interrupt is carried out, and the lower-priority interrupt is ignored. This also applies to the clearing of an interrupt flag to 0. Figure 5.8 shows an example in which an IMIEA bit is cleared to 0 in the 16-bit timer's TISRA register. TISRA write cycle by CPU Internal address bus Internal write signal IMIEA IMIA exception handling TISRA address IMIA IMFA interrupt signal Figure 5.8 Contention between Interrupt and Interrupt-Disabling Instruction This type of contention will not occur if the interrupt is masked when the interrupt enable bit or flag is cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 117 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.5.2 Instructions that Inhibit Interrupts The LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions inhibit interrupts. When an interrupt occurs, after determining the interrupt priority, the interrupt controller requests a CPU interrupt. If the CPU is currently executing one of these interrupt-inhibiting instructions, however, when the instruction is completed the CPU always continues by executing the next instruction. 5.5.3 Interrupts during EEPMOV Instruction Execution The EEPMOV.B and EEPMOV.W instructions differ in their reaction to interrupt requests. When the EEPMOV.B instruction is executing a transfer, no interrupts are accepted until the transfer is completed, not even NMI. When the EEPMOV.W instruction is executing a transfer, interrupt requests other than NMI are not accepted until the transfer is completed. If NMI is requested, NMI exception handling starts at a transfer cycle boundary. The PC value saved on the stack is the address of the next instruction. Programs should be coded as follows to allow for NMI interrupts during EEPMOV.W execution: L1: EEPMOV.W MOV.W R4,R4 BNE L1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 118 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Section 6 Bus Controller 6.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group has an on-chip bus controller (BSC) that manages the external address space divided into eight areas. The bus specifications, such as bus width and number of access states, can be set independently for each area, enabling multiple memories to be connected easily. The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function that controls the operation of the internal bus masters-the CPU, DMA controller (DMAC), and DRAM interface and can release the bus to an external device. 6.1.1 Features The features of the bus controller are listed below. * Manages external address space in area units Manages the external space as eight areas (0 to 7) of 128 kbytes in 1M-byte modes, or 2 Mbytes in 16-Mbyte modes Bus specifications can be set independently for each area DRAM/burst ROM interfaces can be set * Basic bus interface Chip select (CS0 to CS7) can be output for areas 0 to 7 8-bit access or 16-bit access can be selected for each area Two-state access or three-state access can be selected for each area Program wait states can be inserted for each area Pin wait insertion capability is provided * DRAM interface DRAM interface can be set for areas 2 to 5 Row address/column address multiplexed output (8/9/10 bits) 2-CAS byte access mode Burst operation (fast page mode) TP cycle insertion to secure RAS precharging time Choice of CAS-before-RAS refreshing or self-refreshing * Burst ROM interface Burst ROM interface can be set for area 0 Selection of two- or three-state burst access Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 119 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller * Idle cycle insertion An idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external read cycle between different areas An idle cycle can be inserted when an external read cycle is immediately followed by an external write cycle * Bus arbitration function A built-in bus arbiter grants the bus right to the CPU, DMAC, DRAM interface, or an external bus master * Other features Refresh counter (refresh timer) can be used as interval timer Choice of two address update modes (in flash memory R version and mask ROM versions) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 120 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller. CS0 to CS7 ABWCR ASTCR BCR Internal address bus Area decoder CSCR Chip select control signals Internal signals Bus mode control signal Bus size control signal Access state control signal ADRCR Bus control circuit Internal data bus BACK BREQ Wait request signal WAIT Wait state controller WCRH WCRL Internal signals CPU bus request signal DMAC bus request signal DRAM interface bus request signal CPU bus acknowledge signal DMAC bus acknowledge signal DRAM interface bus acknowledge signal BRCR Bus arbiter DRAM interface DRAM control DRCRA DRCRB RTMCSR RTCNT Legend ABWCR ASTCR WCRH WCRL BRCR CSCR DRCRA DRCRB RTMCSR RTCNT RTCOR ADRCR* BCR : Bus width control register : Access state control register : Wait control register H : Wait control register L : Bus release control register : Chip select control register : DRAM control register A : DRAM control register B : Refresh timer control/status register : Refresh timer counter : Refresh time constant register : Address control register : Bus control register RTCOR Note: * This register is provided only in the flash memory R version and mask ROM versions. Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 121 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 6.1 summarizes the input/output pins of the bus controller. Table 6.1 Name Chip select 0 to 7 Address strobe Read High write Bus Controller Pins Abbreviation CS0 to CS7 AS RD HWR I/O Output Output Output Output Function Strobe signals selecting areas 0 to 7 Strobe signal indicating valid address output on the address bus Strobe signal indicating reading from the external address space Strobe signal indicating writing to the external address space, with valid data on the upper data bus (D15 to D8) Strobe signal indicating writing to the external address space, with valid data on the lower data bus (D7 to D0) Wait request signal for access to external three-state access areas Request signal for releasing the bus to an external device Acknowledge signal indicating release of the bus to an external device Low write LWR Output Wait Bus request Bus acknowledge WAIT BREQ BACK Input Input Output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 122 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.1.4 Register Configuration Table 6.2 summarizes the bus controller's registers. Table 6.2 Address* H'EE020 H'EE021 H'EE022 H'EE023 H'EE013 H'EE01F H'EE01E H'EE024 H'EE026 H'EE027 H'EE028 H'EE029 H'EE02A Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1 Bus Controller Registers Name Bus width control register Access state control register Wait control register H Wait control register L Bus release control register Chip select control register 4 Address control register* Bus control register DRAM control register A DRAM control register B Refresh timer control/status register Refresh timer counter Refresh time constant register Abbreviation ABWCR ASTCR WCRH WCRL BRCR CSCR ADRCR BCR DRCRA DRCRB RTMCSR RTCNT RTCOR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R(W)* R/W R/W 5 Initial Value 2 H'FF* H'FF H'FF H'FF 3 H'FE* H'0F H'FF H'C6 H'10 H'08 H'07 H'00 H'FF Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. In modes 2 and 4, the initial value is H'00. In modes 3 and 4, the initial value is H'EE. This register is provided only in the flash memory R version and mask ROM versions. For Bit 7, only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 123 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.2 6.2.1 Register Descriptions Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR) ABWCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects 8-bit or 16-bit access for each area. Bit 7 ABW7 Modes Initial value 1 1, 3, 5, 6, and 7 Read/Write R/W Modes Initial value 0 2 and 4 Read/Write R/W 6 ABW6 1 R/W 0 R/W 5 ABW5 1 R/W 0 R/W 4 ABW4 1 R/W 0 R/W 3 ABW3 1 R/W 0 R/W 2 ABW2 1 R/W 0 R/W 1 ABW1 1 R/W 0 R/W 0 ABW0 1 R/W 0 R/W When ABWCR contains H'FF (selecting 8-bit access for all areas), the chip operates in 8-bit bus mode: the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is valid, and port 4 is an input/output port. When at least one bit is cleared to 0 in ABWCR, the chip operates in 16-bit bus mode with a 16-bit data bus (D15 to D0). In modes 1, 3, 5, 6, and 7, ABWCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In modes 2 and 4, ABWCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0--Area 7 to 0 Bus Width Control (ABW7 to ABW0): These bits select 8-bit access or 16-bit access for the corresponding areas. Bits 7 to 0 ABW7 to ABW0 0 1 Description Areas 7 to 0 are 16-bit access areas Areas 7 to 0 are 8-bit access areas ABWCR specifies the data bus width of external memory areas. The data bus width of on-chip memory and registers is fixed, and does not depend on ABWCR settings. These settings are therefore meaningless in the single-chip modes (modes 6 and 7). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 124 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.2.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) ASTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether each area is accessed in two states or three states. Bit 7 AST7 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 6 AST6 1 R/W 5 AST5 1 R/W 4 AST4 1 R/W 3 AST3 1 R/W 2 AST2 1 R/W 1 AST1 1 R/W 0 AST0 1 R/W Bits selecting number of states for access to each area ASTCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0--Area 7 to 0 Access State Control (AST7 to AST0): These bits select whether the corresponding area is accessed in two or three states. Bits 7 to 0 AST7 to AST0 0 1 Description Areas 7 to 0 are accessed in two states Areas 7 to 0 are accessed in three states (Initial value) ASTCR specifies the number of states in which external areas are accessed. On-chip memory and registers are accessed in a fixed number of states that does not depend on ASTCR settings. These settings are therefore meaningless in the single-chip modes (modes 6 and 7). When the corresponding area is designated as DRAM space by bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRAM control register A (DRCRA), the number of access states does not depend on the AST bit setting. When an AST bit is cleared to 0, programmable wait insertion is not performed. 6.2.3 Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL) WCRH and WCRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the number of program wait states for each area. On-chip memory and registers are accessed in a fixed number of states that does not depend on WCRH/WCRL settings. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 125 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller WCRH and WCRL are initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby mode. WCRH Bit 7 W71 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 6 W70 1 R/W 5 W61 1 R/W 4 W60 1 R/W 3 W51 1 R/W 2 W50 1 R/W 1 W41 1 R/W 0 W40 1 R/W Bits 7 and 6--Area 7 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W71, W70): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 7 in external space is accessed while the AST7 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 7 W71 0 1 Bit 6 W70 0 1 0 1 Description Program wait not inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4--Area 6 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W61, W60): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 6 in external space is accessed while the AST6 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 5 W61 0 1 Bit 4 W60 0 1 0 1 Description Program wait not inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 126 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bits 3 and 2--Area 5 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W51, W50): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 5 in external space is accessed while the AST5 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 3 W51 0 1 Bit 2 W50 0 1 0 1 Description Program wait not inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Area 4 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W41, W40): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 4 in external space is accessed while the AST4 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 1 W41 0 1 Bit 0 W40 0 1 0 1 Description Program wait not inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 127 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller WCRL Bit 7 W31 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 6 W30 1 R/W 5 W21 1 R/W 4 W20 1 R/W 3 W11 1 R/W 2 W10 1 R/W 1 W01 1 R/W 0 W00 1 R/W Bits 7 and 6--Area 3 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W31, W30): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 3 in external space is accessed while the AST3 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 7 W31 0 1 Bit 6 W30 0 1 0 1 Description Program wait not inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4--Area 2 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W21, W20): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 2 in external space is accessed while the AST2 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 5 W21 0 1 Bit 4 W20 0 1 0 1 Description Program wait not inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 128 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bits 3 and 2--Area 1 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W11, W10): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 1 in external space is accessed while the AST1 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 3 W11 0 1 Bit 2 W10 0 1 0 1 Description Program wait not inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Area 0 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W01, W00): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 0 in external space is accessed while the AST0 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 1 W01 0 1 Bit 0 W00 0 1 0 1 Description Program wait not inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 129 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.2.4 Bus Release Control Register (BRCR) BRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables address output on bus lines A23 to A20 and enables or disables release of the bus to an external device. Bit Modes 1, 2, 6, and 7 Initial value 7 A23E 1 Read/Write -- 6 A22E 1 -- 1 R/W 1 R/W 5 A21E 1 -- 1 R/W 1 R/W 4 A20E 1 -- 0 -- 1 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 BRLE 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Modes Initial value 1 3 and 4 Read/Write R/W Mode 5 Initial value 1 Read/Write R/W Reserved bits Address 23 to 20 enable These bits enable PA7 to PA4 to be used for A23 to A20 address output Bus release enable Enables or disables release of the bus to an external device BRCR is initialized to H'FE in modes 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7, and to H'EE in modes 3 and 4, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7--Address 23 Enable (A23E): Enables PA4 to be used as the A23 address output pin. Writing 0 in this bit enables A23 output from PA4. In modes other than 3, 4, and 5, this bit cannot be modified and PA4 has its ordinary port functions. Bit 7 A23E 0 1 Description PA4 is the A23 address output pin PA4 is an input/output pin (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 130 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bit 6--Address 22 Enable (A22E): Enables PA5 to be used as the A22 address output pin. Writing 0 in this bit enables A22 output from PA5. In modes other than 3, 4, and 5, this bit cannot be modified and PA5 has its ordinary port functions. Bit 6 A22E 0 1 Description PA5 is the A22 address output pin PA5 is an input/output pin (Initial value) Bit 5--Address 21 Enable (A21E): Enables PA6 to be used as the A21 address output pin. Writing 0 in this bit enables A21 output from PA6. In modes other than 3, 4, and 5, this bit cannot be modified and PA6 has its ordinary port functions. Bit 5 A21E 0 1 Description PA6 is the A21 address output pin PA6 is an input/output pin (Initial value) Bit 4--Address 20 Enable (A20E): Enables PA7 to be used as the A20 address output pin. Writing 0 in this bit enables A20 output from PA7. This bit can only be modified in mode 5. Bit 4 A20E 0 1 Description PA7 is the A20 address output pin (Initial value when in mode 3 or 4) PA7 is an input/output pin (Initial value when in mode 1, 2, 5, 6 or 7) Bits 3 to 1--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 0--Bus Release Enable (BRLE): Enables or disables release of the bus to an external device. Bit 0 BRLE 0 1 Description The bus cannot be released to an external device BREQ and BACK can be used as input/output pins The bus can be released to an external device (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 131 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.2.5 Bit Bus Control Register (BCR) 7 ICIS1 6 ICIS0 1 R/W 5 BROME 0 R/W 4 BRSTS1 0 R/W 3 BRSTS0 0 R/W 2 -- 1 -- 1 RDEA 1 R/W 0 WAITE 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W BCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables idle cycle insertion, selects the area division unit, and enables or disables WAIT pin input. BCR is initialized to H'C6 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7--Idle Cycle Insertion 1 (ICIS1): Selects whether one idle cycle state is to be inserted between bus cycles in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas. Bit 7 ICIS1 0 1 Description No idle cycle inserted in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas Idle cycle inserted in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas (Initial value) Bit 6--Idle Cycle Insertion 0 (ICIS0): Selects whether one idle cycle state is to be inserted between bus cycles in case of consecutive external read and write cycles. Bit 6 ICIS0 0 1 Description No idle cycle inserted in case of consecutive external read and write cycles Idle cycle inserted in case of consecutive external read and write cycles (Initial value) Bit 5--Burst ROM Enable (BROME): Selects whether area 0 is a burst ROM interface area. Bit 5 BROME 0 1 Description Area 0 is a basic bus interface area Area 0 is a burst ROM interface area (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 132 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bit 4--Burst Cycle Select 1 (BRSTS1): Selects the number of burst cycle states for the burst ROM interface. Bit 4 BRSTS1 0 1 Description Burst access cycle comprises 2 states Burst access cycle comprises 3 states (Initial value) Bit 3--Burst Cycle Select 0 (BRSTS0): Selects the number of words that can be accessed in a burst ROM interface burst access. Bit 3 BRSTS0 0 1 Description Max. 4 words in burst access (burst access on match of address bits above A3)( Max. 8 words in burst access (burst access on match of address bits above A4) Bit 2--Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1. Bit 1--Area Division Unit Select (RDEA): Selects the memory map area division units. This bit is valid in modes 3, 4, and 5, and is invalid in modes 1, 2, 6, and 7. Bit 1 RDEA 0 Description Area divisions are as follows: Area 0: 2 MB Area 1: 2 MB Area 2: 8 MB Area 3: 2 MB 1 Areas 0 to 7 are the same size (2 MB) Area 4: 1.93 MB Area 5: 4 kB Area 6: 23.75 kB Area 7: 22 B (Initial value) Bit 0--WAIT Pin Enable (WAITE): Enables or disables wait insertion by means of the WAIT pin. Bit 0 WAITE 0 1 Description WAIT pin wait input is disabled, and the WAIT pin can be used as an input/output port (Initial value) WAIT pin wait input is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 133 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.2.6 Chip Select Control Register (CSCR) CSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables output of chip select signals (CS7 to CS4). If output of a chip select signal is enabled by a setting in this register, the corresponding pin functions as a chip select signal (CS7 to CS4) output regardless of any other settings. CSCR cannot be modified in single-chip mode. Bit 7 CS7E Initial value Read/Write : 0 R/W 6 CS6E 0 R/W 5 CS5E 0 R/W 4 CS4E 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Chip select 7 to 4 enable These bits enable or disable chip select signal output Reserved bits CSCR is initialized to H'0F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 4--Chip Select 7 to 4 Enable (CS7E to CS4E): These bits enable or disable output of the corresponding chip select signal. Bit n CSnE 0 1 Note: n = 7 to 4 Description Output of chip select signal CSn is disabled Output of chip select signal CSn is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 134 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bits 3 to 0--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 6.2.7 Bit DRAM Control Register A (DRCRA) 7 DRAS2 6 DRAS1 0 R/W 5 DRAS0 0 R/W 4 -- 1 -- 3 BE 0 R/W 2 RDM 0 R/W 1 SRFMD 0 R/W 0 RFSHE 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W DRCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the areas that have a DRAM interface function, and the access mode, and enables or disables self-refreshing and refresh pin output. DRCRA is initialized to H'10 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 5--DRAM Area Select (DRAS2 to DRAS0): These bits select which of areas 2 to 5 are to function as DRAM interface areas (DRAM space) in expanded mode, and at the same time select the RAS output pin corresponding to each DRAM space. Description Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 DRAS2 DRAS1 DRAS0 Area 5 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal DRAM space (CS5) Area 4 Normal Normal Normal Normal DRAM space (CS4) DRAM space (CS4) Area 3 Normal Normal DRAM space (CS3) DRAM space (CS3) DRAM space (CS3) Area 2 Normal DRAM space (CS2) DRAM space (CS2) DRAM space (CS2) DRAM space (CS2) DRAM space (CS2)* DRAM space (CS4)* DRAM space (CS2)* DRAM space (CS2)* Note: * A single CSn pin serves as a common RAS output pin for a number of areas. Unused CSn pins can be used as input/output ports. When any of bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 is set to 1 in expanded mode, it is not possible to write to DRCRB, RTMCSR, RTCNT, or RTCOR. However, 0 can be written to the CMF flag in RTMCSR to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 135 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller When an arbitrary value has been set in DRAS2 to DRAS0, a write of a different value other than 000 must not be performed. Bit 4--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 3--Burst Access Enable (BE): Enables or disables burst access to DRAM space. DRAM space burst access is performed in fast page mode. Bit 3 BE 0 1 Description Burst disabled (always full access) DRAM space access performed in fast page mode (Initial value) Bit 2--RAS Down Mode (RDM): Selects whether to wait for the next DRAM access with the RAS signal held low (RAS down mode), or to drive the RAS signal high again (RAS up mode), when burst access is enabled for DRAM space (BE = 1), and access to DRAM is interrupted. Caution is required when the HWR and LWR are used as the UCAS and LCAS output pins. For details, see RAS Down Mode and RAS Up Mode in section 6.5.10, Burst Operation. Bit 2 RDM 0 1 Description DRAM interface: RAS up mode selected DRAM interface: RAS down mode selected (Initial value) Bit 1--Self-Refresh Mode (SRFMD): Specifies DRAM self-refreshing in software standby mode. When any of areas 2 to 5 is designated as DRAM space, DRAM self-refreshing is possible when a transition is made to software standby mode after the SRFMD bit has been set to 1. The normal access state is restored when software standby mode is exited, regardless of the SRFMD setting. Bit 1 SRFMD 0 1 Description DRAM self-refreshing disabled in software standby mode DRAM self-refreshing enabled in software standby mode (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 136 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bit 0--Refresh Pin Enable (RFSHE): Enables or disables RFSH pin refresh signal output. If areas 2 to 5 are not designated as DRAM space, this bit should not be set to 1. Bit 0 RFSHE 0 1 Description RFSH pin refresh signal output disabled (RFSH pin can be used as input/output port) RFSH pin refresh signal output enabled (Initial value) 6.2.8 Bit DRAM Control Register B (DRCRB) 7 MXC1 6 MXC0 0 R/W 5 CSEL 0 R/W 4 RCYCE 0 R/W 3 -- 1 -- 2 TPC 0 R/W 1 RCW 0 R/W 0 RLW 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W DRCRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the number of address multiplex column address bits for the DRAM interface, the column address strobe output pin, enabling or disabling of refresh cycle insertion, the number of precharge cycles, enabling or disabling of wait state insertion between RAS and CAS, and enabling or disabling of wait state insertion in refresh cycles. DRCRB is initialized to H'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. The settings in this register are invalid when bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA are all 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 137 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bits 7 and 6--Multiplex Control 1 and 0 (MXC1, MXC0): These bits select the row address/column address multiplexing method used on the DRAM interface. In burst operation, the row address used for comparison is determined by the setting of these bits and the bus width of the relevant area set in ABWCR. Bit 7 MXC1 0 Bit 6 MXC0 0 Description Column address: 8 bits Compared address: Modes 1, 2 Modes 3, 4, 5 1 Column address: 9 bits Compared address: Modes 1, 2 Modes 3, 4, 5 1 0 Column address: 10 bits Compared address: Modes 1, 2 Modes 3, 4, 5 1 Illegal setting 8-bit access space 16-bit access space 8-bit access space 16-bit access space A19 to A10 A19 to A11 A23 to A10 A23 to A11 8-bit access space 16-bit access space 8-bit access space 16-bit access space A19 to A9 A19 to A10 A23 to A9 A23 to A10 8-bit access space 16-bit access space 8-bit access space 16-bit access space A19 to A8 A19 to A9 A23 to A8 A23 to A9 Bit 5--CAS Output Pin Select (CSEL): Selects the UCAS and LCAS output pins when areas 2 CAS to 5 are designated as DRAM space. Bit 5 CSEL 0 1 Description PB4 and PB5 selected as UCAS and LCAS output pins HWR and LWR selected as UCAS and LCAS output pins (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 138 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bit 4--Refresh Cycle Enable (RCYCE): Enables or disables CAS-before-RAS refresh cycle insertion. When none of areas 2 to 5 has been designated as DRAM space, refresh cycles are not inserted regardless of the setting of this bit. Bit 4 RCYCE 0 1 Description Refresh cycles disabled DRAM refresh cycles enabled (Initial value) Bit 3--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 2--TP Cycle Control (TPC): Selects whether a 1-state or two-state precharge cycle (TP) is to be used for DRAM read/write cycles and CAS-before-RAS refresh cycles. The setting of this bit does not affect the self-refresh function. Bit 2 TPC 0 1 Description 1-state precharge cycle inserted 2-state precharge cycle inserted (Initial value) Bit 1--RAS CAS Wait (RCW): Controls wait state (Trw) insertion between Tr and Tc1 in DRAM RAS-CAS RAS read/write cycles. The setting of this bit does not affect refresh cycles. Bit 1 RCW 0 1 Description Wait state (Trw) insertion disabled One wait state (Trw) inserted (Initial value) Bit 0--Refresh Cycle Wait Control (RLW): Controls wait state (TRW) insertion for CAS-beforeRAS refresh cycles. The setting of this bit does not affect DRAM read/write cycles. Bit 0 RLW 0 1 Description Wait state (TRW) insertion disabled One wait state (TRW) inserted (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 139 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.2.9 Bit Refresh Timer Control/Status Register (RTMCSR) 7 CMF 6 CMIE 0 R/W 5 CKS2 0 R/W 4 CKS1 0 R/W 3 CKS0 0 R/W 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Initial value Read/Write 0 R(W)* RTMCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the refresh timer counter clock. When the refresh timer is used as an interval timer, RTMCSR also enables or disables interrupt requests. Bits 7 and 6 of RTMCSR are initialized to 0 by a reset and in the standby modes. Bits 5 to 3 are initialized to 0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode; they are not initialized in software standby mode. Note: Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Bit 7--Compare Match Flag (CMF): Status flag that indicates a match between the values of RTCNT and RTCOR. Bit 7 CMF 0 Description Clearing conditions When the chip is reset and in standby mode Read CMF when CMF = 1, then write 0 in CMF Setting condition When RTCNT = RTCOR (Initial value) 1 Bit 6--Compare Match Interrupt Enable (CMIE): Enables or disables the CMI interrupt requested when the CMF flag is set to 1 in RTMCSR. The CMIE bit is always cleared to 0 when any of areas 2 to 5 is designated as DRAM space. Bit 6 CMIE 0 1 Description The CMI interrupt requested by CMF is disabled The CMI interrupt requested by CMF is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 140 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bits 5 to 3--Refresh Counter Clock Select (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select the clock to be input to RTCNT from among 7 clocks obtained by dividing the system clock (). When the input clock is selected with bits CKS2 to CKS0, RTCNT begins counting up. Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Description 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Count operation halted /2 used as counter clock /8 used as counter clock /32 used as counter clock /128 used as counter clock /512 used as counter clock /2048 used as counter clock /4096 used as counter clock (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 6.2.10 Bit Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W RTCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. RTCNT is incremented by an internal clock selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR. When RTCNT matches RTCOR (compare match), the CMF flag in RTMCSR is set to 1 and RTCNT is cleared to H'00. If the RCYCE bit in DRCRB is set to 1 at this time, a refresh cycle is started. Also, if the CMIE bit in RTMCSR is set to 1, a compare match interrupt (CMI) is generated. RTCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 141 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.2.11 Bit Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W RTCOR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that determines the interval at which RTCNT is cleared. RTCOR and RTCNT are constantly compared. When their values match, the CMF flag is set to 1 in RTMCSR, and RTCNT is simultaneously cleared to H'00. RTCOR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Note: Only byte access can be used on this register. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 142 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.2.12 Address Control Register (ADRCR) (Provided Only in Flash Memory R Version and Mask ROM Versions) ADRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects either address update mode 1 or address update mode 2 as the address output method. Bit : 7 -- Initial value : R/W : 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 ADRCTL 1 R/W Address control Selects address update mode 1 or address update mode 2 ADRCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 1--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. Bit 0--Address Control (ADRCTL): Selects the address output method. Bit 0 ADRCTL 0 1 Description Address update mode 2 is selected Address update mode 1 is selected (Initial value) This register is provided only in the flash memory R version and mask ROM versions; it is not present in the flash memory version (HD64F3067). If this space is accessed in the flash memory version (HD64F3067), a write access will be invalid and a read access will return H'FF. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 143 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.3 6.3.1 Operation Area Division The external address space is divided into areas 0 to 7. Each area has a size of 128 kbytes in the 1Mbyte modes, or 2-Mbytes in the 16-Mbyte modes. Figure 6.2 shows a general view of the memory map. H' 00000 Area 0 (128 kbytes) H' 1FFFF H' 20000 Area 1 (128 kbytes) H' 3FFFF H' 40000 Area 2 (128 kbytes) H' 5FFFF H' 60000 Area 3 (128 kbytes) H' 7FFFF H' 80000 Area 4 (128 kbytes) H' 9FFFF H' A0000 Area 5 (128 kbytes) H' BFFFF H' C0000 H' DFFFF H' E0000 Area 6 (128 kbytes) Area 7 (128 Mbytes) H' BFFFFF H' C00000 H' DFFFFF H' E00000 Area 6 (2 Mbytes) Area 7 (2 Mbytes) H' 9FFFFF H' A00000 Area 5 (2 Mbytes) H' 7FFFFF H' 800000 Area 4 (2 Mbytes) H' 5FFFFF H' 600000 Area 3 (2 Mbytes) H' 3FFFFF H' 400000 Area 2 (2 Mbytes) H' 1FFFFF H' 200000 Area 1 (2 Mbytes) H' 000000 Area 0 (2 Mbytes) H' FFFFF H' FFFFFF (a) 1-Mbyte modes (modes 1, and 2) (b) 16-Mbyte modes (modes 3, 4, and 5) Figure 6.2 Access Area Map for Each Operating Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 144 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) can be output for areas 0 to 7. The bus specifications for each area are selected in ABWCR, ASTCR, WCRH, and WCRL. In 16-Mbyte mode, the area division units can be selected with the RDEA bit in BCR. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 145 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Area 0 2 Mbytes H'1FFFFF H'200000 Area 1 2 Mbytes H'3FFFFF H'400000 Area 2 2 Mbytes H'5FFFFF H'600000 Area 3 2 Mbytes H'7FFFFF H'800000 Area 4 2 Mbytes H'9FFFFF H'A00000 Area 5 2 Mbytes H'BFFFFF H'C00000 Area 6 2 Mbytes H'DFFFFF H'E00000 Area 0 2 Mbytes Area 1 2 Mbytes Area 2 8 Mbytes Area 3 2 Mbytes Area 7 1.93 Mbytes Area 4 1.93 Mbytes H'FEE000 On-chip registers (1) H'FEE0FF H'FEE100 Reserved 39.75 kbytes H'FF7FFF H'FF8000 H'FF8FFF H'FF9000 Area 5 4 kbytes On-chip registers (1) H'FFEF1F H'FFEF20 On-chip RAM 4 kbytes On-chip RAM 4 kbytes* H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF1F H'FFFF20 On-chip registers (2) H'FFFFE9 H'FFFFEA H'FFFFFF Area 7 22 bytes (A) Memory map when RDEA = 1 Note: * Area 6 when the RAME bit is cleared. On-chip registers (2) Area 7 22 bytes (b) Memory map when RDEA = 0 Absolute address 8 bits Figure 6.3 Memory Map in 16-Mbyte Mode (H8/3067, H8/3066) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 146 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Absolute address 16 bits 2 Mbytes Area 7 67.5 kbytes Area 6 23.75 kbytes 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes H'000000 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.3.2 Bus Specifications The external space bus specifications consist of three elements: (1) bus width, (2) number of access states, and (3) number of program wait states. The bus width and number of access states for on-chip memory and registers are fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller. Bus Width: A bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with ABWCR. An area for which an 8-bit bus is selected functions as an 8-bit access space, and an area for which a 16-bit bus is selected functions as a16-bit access space. If all areas are designated for 8-bit access, 8-bit bus mode is set; if any area is designated for 16-bit access, 16-bit bus mode is set. Number of Access States: Two or three access states can be selected with ASTCR. An area for which two-state access is selected functions as a two-state access space, and an area for which three-state access is selected functions as a three-state access space. DRAM space is accessed in four states regardless of the ASTCR settings. When two-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled. Number of Program Wait States: When three-state access space is designated in ASTCR, the number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with WCRH and WCRL. From 0 to 3 program wait states can be selected. When ASTCR is cleared to 0 for DRAM space, a program wait (Tc1-Tc2 wait) is not inserted. Also, no program wait is inserted in burst ROM space burst cycles. Table 6.3 shows the bus specifications for each basic bus interface area. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 147 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Table 6.3 Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface) Bus Specifications (Basic Bus Interface) Bus Width 16 Access States 2 3 Program Wait States 0 0 1 2 3 8 2 3 0 0 1 2 3 ABWCR ASTCR WCRH/WCRL ABWn 0 ASTn 0 1 Wn1 -- 0 1 1 0 1 -- 0 1 Note: n = 7 to 0 Wn0 -- 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 0 1 6.3.3 Memory Interfaces The H8/3067 Group memory interfaces comprise a basic bus interface that allows direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on; a DRAM interface that allows direct connection of DRAM; and a burst ROM interface that allows direct connection of burst ROM. The interface can be selected independently for each area. An area for which the basic bus interface is designated functions as normal space, an area for which the DRAM interface is designated functions as DRAM space, and area 0 for which the burst ROM interface is designated functions as burst ROM space. 6.3.4 Chip Select Signals For each of areas 0 to 7, the H8/3067 Group can output a chip select signal (CS0 to CS7) that goes low when the corresponding area is selected in expanded mode. Figure 6.4 shows the output timing of a CSn signal. Output of CS0 to CS3: Output of CS0 to CS3 is enabled or disabled in the data direction register (DDR) of the corresponding port. In the expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled, a reset leaves pin CS0 in the output state and pins CS1 to CS3 in the input state. To output chip select signals CS1 to CS3, the corresponding DDR bits must be set to 1. In the expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled, a reset leaves pins CS0 to Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 148 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller CS3 in the input state. To output chip select signals CS0 to CS3, the corresponding DDR bits must be set to 1. For details, see section 8, I/O Ports. Output of CS4 to CS7: Output of CS4 to CS7 is enabled or disabled in the chip select control register (CSCR). A reset leaves pins CS4 to CS7 in the input state. To output chip select signals CS4 to CS7, the corresponding CSCR bits must be set to 1. For details, see section 8, I/O Ports. Address External address in area n CSn Figure 6.4 CS Signal Output Timing (n = 0 to 7) CSn When the on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, and on-chip registers are accessed, CS0 to CS7 remain high. The CSn signals are decoded from the address signals. They can be used as chip select signals for SRAM and other devices. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 149 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.3.5 Address Output Method The H8/3067 Group provides a choice of two address update methods: either the same method as in the previous H8/300H Series (address update mode 1), or a method in which address update is restricted to external space accesses or self-refresh cycles (address update mode 2). Figure 6.5 shows examples of address output in these two update modes. On-chip memory cycle External read cycle On-chip memory cycle External read cycle On-chip memory cycle Address update mode 1 Address update mode 2 RD Figure 6.5 Sample Address Output in Each Address Update Mode (Basic Bus Interface, 3-State Space) Address Update Mode 1: Address update mode 1 is compatible with the previous H8/300H Series. Addresses are always updated between bus cycles. Address Update Mode 2: In address update mode 2, address updating is performed only in external space accesses or self-refresh cycles. In this mode, the address can be retained between an external space read cycle and an instruction fetch cycle (on-chip memory) by placing the program in on-chip memory. Address update mode 2 is therefore useful when connecting a device that requires address hold time with respect to the rise of the RD strobe. Switching between address update modes 1 and 2 is performed by means of the ADRCTL bit in ADRCR. The initial value of ADRCR is the address update mode 1 setting, providing compatibility with the previous H8/300H Series. Cautions: The address output methods are designed so that the initial state with the bit selection method is compatible with the flash memory version (HD64F3067) (i.e. address update mode 1), and so there is basically no problem if this version is replaced with the flash memory R version or a mask ROM version. However, the following points should be noted. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 150 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller * ADRCR is allocated to address H'FEE01E. In the flash memory version, the corresponding address is empty space, but it is necessary to confirm that no accesses are made to H'FEE01E in the program. * When address update mode 2 is selected, the address in an internal space (on-chip memory or internal I/O) access cycle is not output externally. * In order to secure address holding with respect to the rise of RD, when address update mode 2 is used an external space read access must be completed within a single access cycle. For example, in a word access to 8-bit access space, the bus cycle is split into two as shown in figure 6.6., and so there is not a single access cycle. In this case, address holding is not guaranteed at the rise of RD between the first (even address) and second (odd address) access cycles (area inside the ellipse in the figure). External read cycle (8-bit space word access) On-chip memory cycle On-chip memory cycle Address update mode 2 RD Even address Odd address Figure 6.6 Example of Consecutive External Space Accesses in Address Update Mode 2 * When address update mode 2 is selected, in a DRAM space CAS-before-RAS (CBR) refresh cycle the previous address is retained (the area 2 start address is not output). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 151 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.4 6.4.1 Basic Bus Interface Overview The basic bus interface enables direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on. The bus specifications can be selected with ABWCR, ASTCR, WCRH, and WCRL (see table 6.3). 6.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the upper data bus (D15 to D8) or lower data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access area or 16-bit access area) and the data size. 8-Bit Access Areas: Figure 6.7 illustrates data alignment control for 8-bit access space. With 8-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is always used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word access is performed as two byte accesses, and a longword access, as four byte accesses. Upper data bus Lower data bus D15 D8 D7 D0 Byte size Word size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle 1st bus cycle Longword size 2nd bus cycle 3rd bus cycle 4th bus cycle Figure 6.7 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Area) 16-Bit Access Areas: Figure 6.8 illustrates data alignment control for 16-bit access areas. With 16-bit access areas, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) and lower data bus (D7 to D0) are used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word, and a longword access is executed as two word accesses. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 152 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller In byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is even or odd. The upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd address. Upper data bus Lower data bus D15 D8 D7 D0 Byte size Byte size * Even address * Odd address Word size Longword size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle Figure 6.8 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-Bit Access Area) 6.4.3 Valid Strobes Table 6.4 shows the data buses used, and the valid strobes, for the access spaces. In a read, the RD signal is valid for both the upper and the lower half of the data bus. In a write, the HWR signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the LWR signal for the lower half. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 153 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Table 6.4 Area 8-bit access area 16-bit access area Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes Access Size Read/Write Byte Read Write Byte Read Write Address -- -- Even Odd Even Odd Word Read Write -- -- HWR LWR RD HWR, LWR Valid Strobe RD HWR RD Valid Invalid Valid Undetermined data Valid Valid Upper Data Bus Lower Data Bus (D15 to D8) (D7 to D0) Valid Invalid Undetermined data Invalid Valid Undetermined data Valid Valid Valid Notes: 1. Undetermined data means that unpredictable data is output. 2. Invalid means that the bus is in the input state and the input is ignored. 6.4.4 Memory Areas The initial state of each area is basic bus interface, three-state access space. The initial bus width is selected according to the operating mode. The bus specifications described here cover basic items only, and the following sections should be referred to for further details: 6.4, Basic Bus Interface, 6.5, DRAM Interface, 6.8, Burst ROM Interface. Area 0: Area 0 includes on-chip ROM, and in ROM-disabled expansion mode, all of area 0 is external space. In ROM-enabled expansion mode, the space excluding on-chip ROM is external space. When area 0 external space is accessed, the CS0 signal can be output. Either basic bus interface or burst ROM interface can be selected for area 0. The size of area 0 is 128 kbytes in modes 1 and 2, and 2 Mbytes in modes 3, 4, and 5. Areas 1 and 6: In external expansion mode, areas 1 and 6 are entirely external space. When area 1 and 6 external space is accessed, the CS1 and CS6 pin signals respectively can be output. Only the basic bus interface can be used for areas 1 and 6. The size of areas 1 and 6 is 128 kbytes in modes 1 and 2, and 2 Mbytes in modes 3, 4, and 5. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 154 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Areas 2 to 5: In external expansion mode, areas 2 to 5 are entirely external space. When area 2 to 5 external space is accessed, signals CS2 to CS5 can be output. Basic bus interface or DRAM interface can be selected for areas 2 to 5. With the DRAM interface, signals CS2 to CS5 are used as RAS signals. The size of areas 2 to 5 is 128 kbytes in modes 1 and 2, and 2 Mbytes in modes 3, 4, and 5. Area 7: Area 7 includes the on-chip RAM and registers. In external expansion mode, the space excluding the on-chip RAM and registers is external space. The on-chip RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1; when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is disabled and the corresponding space becomes external space. When area 7 external space is accessed, the CS7 signal can be output. Only the basic bus interface can be used for the area 7 memory interface. The size of area 7 is 128 kbytes in modes 1 and 2, and 2 Mbytes in modes 3, 4, and 5. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 155 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.4.5 Basic Bus Control Signal Timing 8-Bit, Three-State-Access Areas Figure 6.9 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit, three-state-access area. The upper data bus (D15 to D8) is used in accesses to these areas. The LWR pin is always high. Wait states can be inserted. Bus cycle T1 Address bus CSn AS RD Read access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 HWR LWR Write access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid Undetermined data High Valid Invalid External address in area n T2 T3 Note: n = 7 to 0 Figure 6.9 Bus Control Signal Timing for 8-Bit, Three-State-Access Area Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 156 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 8-Bit, Two-State-Access Areas Figure 6.10 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit, two-state-access area. The upper data bus (D15 to D8) is used in accesses to these areas. The LWR pin is always high. Wait states cannot be inserted. Bus cycle T1 Address bus CSn AS RD Read access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 HWR LWR Write access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid Undetermined data High Valid Invalid External address in area n T2 Note: n = 7 to 0 Figure 6.10 Bus Control Signal Timing for 8-Bit, Two-State-Access Area Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 157 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 16-Bit, Three-State-Access Areas Figures 6.11 to 6.13 show the timing of bus control signals for a 16-bit, three-state-access area. In these areas, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is used in accesses to even addresses and the lower data bus (D7 to D0) in accesses to odd addresses. Wait states can be inserted. Bus cycle T1 Address bus CSn AS RD Read access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 HWR LWR Write access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid Undetermined data High Valid Invalid Even external address in area n T2 T3 Note: n = 7 to 0 Figure 6.11 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Three-State-Access Area (1) (Byte Access to Even Address) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 158 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bus cycle T1 Address bus CSn AS RD Read access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 HWR LWR Write access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Undetermined data Valid High Invalid Valid Odd external address in area n T2 T3 Note: n = 7 to 0 Figure 6.12 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Three-State-Access Area (2) (Byte Access to Odd Address) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 159 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bus cycle T1 Address bus CSn AS RD Read access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 HWR LWR Write access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid Valid Valid Valid External address in area n T2 T3 Note: n = 7 to 0 Figure 6.13 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Three-State-Access Area (3) (Word Access) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 160 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 16-Bit, Two-State-Access Areas: Figures 6.14 to 6.16 show the timing of bus control signals for a 16-bit, two-state-access area. In these areas, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is used in accesses to even addresses and the lower data bus (D7 to D0) in accesses to odd addresses. Wait states cannot be inserted. Bus cycle T1 Address bus CSn AS RD Read access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 HWR LWR Write access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid Undetermined data High Valid Invalid Even external address in area n T2 Note: n = 7 to 0 Figure 6.14 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Two-State-Access Area (1) (Byte Access to Even Address) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 161 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bus cycle T1 Address bus CSn AS RD Read access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 HWR LWR Write access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Undetermined data Valid High Invalid Valid Odd external address in area n T2 Note: n = 7 to 0 Figure 6.15 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Two-State-Access Area (2) (Byte Access to Odd Address) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 162 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bus cycle T1 Address bus CSn AS RD Read access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 HWR LWR Write access D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid Valid Valid Valid External address in area n T2 Note: n = 7 to 0 Figure 6.16 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Two-State-Access Area (3) (Word Access) 6.4.6 Wait Control When accessing external space, the H8/3067 Group can extend the bus cycle by inserting one or more wait states (Tw). There are two ways of inserting wait states: (1) program wait insertion and (2) pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin. Program Wait Insertion: From 0 to 3 wait states can be inserted automatically between the T2 state and T3 state on an individual area basis in three-state access space, according to the settings of WCRH and WCRL. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 163 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Pin Wait Insertion: Setting the WAITE bit in BCR to 1 enables wait insertion by means of the WAIT pin. When external space is accessed in this state, a program wait is first inserted. If the WAIT pin is low at the falling edge of in the last T2 or TW state, another TW state is inserted. If the WAIT pin is held low, TW states are inserted until it goes high. This is useful when inserting four or more TW states, or when changing the number of TW states for different external devices. The WAITE bit setting applies to all areas. Pin waits cannot be inserted in DRAM space. Figure 6.17 shows an example of the timing for insertion of one program wait state in 3-state space. Inserted by program wait Inserted by WAIT pin T2 Tw Tw Tw T3 T1 WAIT Address bus AS RD Read access Data bus Read data HWR, LWR Write access Data bus Note: Write data indicates the timing of WAIT pin sampling. Figure 6.17 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 164 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.5 6.5.1 DRAM Interface Overview The H8/3067 Group is provided with a DRAM interface with functions for DRAM control signal (RAS, UCAS, LCAS, WE) output, address multiplexing, and refreshing, that direct connection of DRAM. In the expanded modes, external address space areas 2 to 5 can be designated as DRAM space accessed via the DRAM interface. A data bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected for DRAM space by means of a setting in ABWCR. When a 16-bit data bus width is selected, CAS is used for byte access control. In the case of x 16-bit organization DRAM, therefore, the 2-CAS type can be connected. A fast page mode is supported in addition to the normal read and write access modes. 6.5.2 DRAM Space and RAS Output Pin Settings Designation of areas 2 to 5 as DRAM space, and selection of the RAS output pin for each area designated as DRAM space, is performed by setting bits in DRCRA. Table 6.5 shows the correspondence between the settings of bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 and the selected DRAM space and RAS output pin. When an arbitrary value has been set in DRAS2 to DRAS0, a write of a different value other than 000 must not be performed. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 165 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Table 6.5 Settings of Bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 and Corresponding DRAM Space (RAS RAS Output Pin) Area 4 Normal space Normal space Normal space Normal space DRAM space (CS4) DRAM space (CS4) Area 3 Normal space Normal space DRAM space (CS3) DRAM space (CS3) DRAM space (CS3) Area 2 Normal space DRAM space (CS2) DRAM space (CS2) DRAM space (CS2) DRAM space (CS2) DRAS2 DRAS1 DRAS0 Area 5 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Normal space Normal space Normal space Normal space Normal space DRAM space (CS5) DRAM space (CS2)* DRAM space (CS4)* DRAM space (CS2)* DRAM space (CS2)* Note: * A single CSn pin serves as a common RAS output pin for a number of areas. Unused CSn pins can be used as input/output ports. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 166 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.5.3 Address Multiplexing When DRAM space is accessed, the row address and column address are multiplexed. The address multiplexing method is selected with bits MXC1 and MXC0 in DRCRB according to the number of bits in the DRAM column address. Table 6.6 shows the correspondence between the settings of MXC1 and MXC0 and the address multiplexing method. Table 6.6 Settings of Bits MXC1 and MXC0 and Address Multiplexing Method Column Address DRCRB Address Pins A23 to A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 MXC1 MXC0 Bits Row 0 address 1 0 1 0 1 8 bits 9 bits 10 bits Illegal setting -- A23 to A13 A20* A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A23 to A13 A12 A20* A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A23 to A13 A12 A11 A20* A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 -- -------------------------- Column -- address -- A23 to A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 Note: * Row address bit A20 is not multiplexed in 1-Mbyte mode. 6.5.4 Data Bus If the bit in ABWCR corresponding to an area designated as DRAM space is set to 1, that area is designated as 8-bit DRAM space; if the bit is cleared to 0, the area is designated as 16-bit DRAM space. In 16-bit DRAM space, x 16-bit organization DRAM can be connected directly. In 8-bit DRAM space the upper half of the data bus, D15 to D8, is enabled, while in 16-bit DRAM space both the upper and lower halves of the data bus, D15 to D0, are enabled. Access sizes and data alignment are the same as for the basic bus interface: see section 6.4.2, Data Size and Data Alignment. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 167 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.5.5 Pins Used for DRAM Interface Table 6.7 shows the pins used for DRAM interfacing and their functions. Table 6.7 Pin PB4 PB5 HWR LWR CS2 CS3 CS4 CS5 RD P80 DRAM Interface Pins With DRAM Designated Name UCAS LCAS UCAS LCAS RAS2 RAS3 RAS4 RAS5 WE RFSH Upper column address strobe Lower column address strobe Upper column address strobe Lower column address strobe Row address strobe 2 Row address strobe 3 Row address strobe 4 Row address strobe 5 Write enable Refresh Address Data I/O Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output I/O Function Upper column address strobe for DRAM space access (when CSEL = 0 in DRCRB) Lower column address strobe for DRAM space access (when CSEL = 0 in DRCRB) Upper column address strobe for DRAM space access (when CSEL = 1 in DRCRB) Lower column address strobe for DRAM space access (when CSEL = 1 in DRCRB) Row address strobe for DRAM space access Row address strobe for DRAM space access Row address strobe for DRAM space access Row address strobe for DRAM space access Write enable for DRAM space write access* Goes low in refresh cycle Row address/column address multiplexed output Data input/output pins A12 to A0 A12 to A0 D15 to D0 D15 to D0 Note: * Fixed high in a read access. 6.5.6 Basic Timing Figure 6.18 shows the basic access timing for DRAM space. The basic DRAM access timing is four states: one precharge cycle (Tp) state, one row address output cycle (Tr) state, and two column address output cycle (Tc1, Tc2) states. Unlike the basic bus interface, the corresponding bits in ASTCR control only enabling or disabling of wait insertion between Tc1 and Tc2, and do not affect the number of access states. When the corresponding bit in ASTCR is cleared to 0, wait states cannot be inserted between Tc1 and Tc2 in the DRAM access cycle. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 168 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller If a DRAM read/write cycle is followed by an access cycle for an external area other than DRAM space when HWR and LWR are selected as the UCAS and LCAS output pins, an idle cycle (Ti) is inserted unconditionally immediately after the DRAM access cycle. See section 6.9, Idle Cycle, for details. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 A23 to A0 Row Column AS High level CSn (RAS) PB4 /PB5 (UCAS / LCAS) Read access RD(WE) High level D15 to D0 PB4 /PB5 (UCAS / LCAS) Write access RD(WE) D15 to D0 Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 6.18 Basic Access Timing (CSEL = 0 in DRCRB) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 169 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.5.7 Precharge State Control In the H8/3067 Group, provision is made for the DRAM RAS precharge time by always inserting one RAS precharge state (Tp) when DRAM space is accessed. This can be changed to two Tp states by setting the TPC bit to 1 in DRCRB. The optimum number of Tp cycles should be set according to the DRAM connected and the operating frequency of the H8/3067 Group chip. Figure 6.19 shows the timing when two Tp states are inserted. When the TCP bit is set to 1, two Tp states are also used for CAS-before-RAS refresh cycles. Tp1 Tp2 Tr Tc1 Tc2 A23 to A0 AS CSn (RAS) PB4 /PB5 (UCAS /LCAS) Read access RD(WE) Row Column High level High level D15 to D0 PB4 /PB5 (UCAS /LCAS) Write access RD(WE) D15 to D0 Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 6.19 Timing with Two Precharge States (CSEL = 0 in DRCRB) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 170 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.5.8 Wait Control In a DRAM access cycle, wait states can be inserted (1) between the Tr state and Tc1 state, and (2) between the Tc1 state and Tc2 state. Insertion of Trw Wait State between Tr and Tc1: One Trw state can be inserted between Tr and Tc1 by setting the RCW bit to 1 in DRCRB. Insertion of Tw Wait State(s) between Tc1 and Tc2: When the bit in ASTCR corresponding to an area designated as DRAM space is set to 1, from 0 to 3 wait states can be inserted between the Tc1 state and Tc2 state by means of settings in WCRH and WCRL. Figure 6.20 shows an example of the timing for wait state insertion. The settings of the RCW bit in DRCRB and of ASTCR, WCRH, and WCRL do not affect refresh cycles. Wait states cannot be inserted in a DRAM space access cycle by means of the WAIT pin. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 171 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Tp Row Column Tr Trw Tc1 Tw Tw Tc2 A23 to A0 AS CSn(RAS) High level Read access PB4/PB5 (UCAS /LCAS) RD(WE) D15 to D0 High level Read data PB4/PB5 (UCAS /LCAS) Write access RD(WE) D15 to D0 Note: n = 2 to 5 Write data Figure 6.20 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing (CSEL = 0) 6.5.9 Byte Access Control and CAS Output Pin When an access is made to DRAM space designated as a 16-bit-access area in ABWCR, column address strobes (UCAS and LCAS) corresponding to the upper and lower halves of the external data bus are output. In the case of x 16-bit organization DRAM, the 2-CAS type can be connected. Either PB4 and PB5, or HWR and LWR, can be used as the UCAS and LCAS output pins, the selection being made with the CSEL bit in DRCRB. Table 6.8 shows the CSEL bit settings and corresponding output pin selections. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 172 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller When an access is made to DRAM space designated as an 8-bit-access area in ABWCR, only UCAS is output. When the entire DRAM space is designated as 8-bit-access space and CSEL = 0, PB5 can be used as an input/output port. Note that RAS down mode cannot be used when a device other than DRAM is connected to external space and HWR and LWR are used as write strobes. In this case, also, an idle cycle (Ti) is always inserted when an external access to other than DRAM space occurs after a DRAM space access. For details, see section 6.9, Idle Cycle. Table 6.8 CSEL 0 1 CSEL Settings and UCAS and LCAS Output Pins UCAS PB4 HWR LCAS PB5 LWR Figure 6.21 shows the control timing. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 A23 to A0 Row Column CSn (RAS) PB4(UCAS) Byte control PB5(LCAS) RD(WE) Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 6.21 Control Timing (Upper-Byte Write Access When CSEL = 0) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 173 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.5.10 Burst Operation With DRAM, in addition to full access (normal access) in which data is accessed by outputting a row address for each access, a fast page mode is also provided which can be used when making a number of consecutive accesses to the same row address. This mode enables fast (burst) access of data by simply changing the column address after the row address has been output. Burst access can be selected by setting the BE bit to 1 in DRCRA. Burst Access (Fast Page Mode) Operation Timing: Figure 6.22 shows the operation timing for burst access. When there are consecutive access cycles for DRAM space, the column address and CAS signal output cycles (two states) continue as long as the row address is the same for consecutive access cycles. In burst access, too, the bus cycle can be extended by inserting wait states between Tc1 and Tc2. The wait state insertion method and timing are the same as for full access: see section 6.5.8, Wait Control, for details. The row address used for the comparison is determined by the bus width of the relevant area set in bits MXC1 and MXC0 in BRCRB, and in ABWCR. Table 6.9 shows the compared row addresses corresponding to the various settings of bits MXC1 and MXC0, and ABWCR. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 174 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Tp A23 to A0 AS CSn(RAS) PB4/PB5 (UCAS /LCAS) Read access RD(WE) D15 to D0 PB4/PB5 (UCAS/LCAS) Write access RD(WE) D15 to D0 Row Column 1 High level Column 2 Tr Tc1 Tc2 Tc1 Tc2 Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 6.22 Operation Timing in Fast Page Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 175 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Table 6.9 Correspondence between Settings of MXC1 and MXC0 Bits and ABWCR, and Row Address Compared in Burst Access DRCRB ABWCR ABWn 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- Bus Width 16 bits 8 bits 16 bits 8 bits 16 bits 8 bits -- 16 bits 8 bits 16 bits 8 bits 16 bits 8 bits -- Compared Row Address A19 to A9 A19 to A8 A19 to A10 A19 to A9 A19 to A11 A19 to A10 Illegal setting A23 to A9 A23 to A8 A23 to A10 A23 to A9 A23 to A11 A23 to A10 Illegal setting Operating Mode Modes 1 and 2 (1-Mbyte) MXC1 0 MXC0 0 Modes 3, 4, and 5 (16-Mbyte) 0 0 Note: n = 2 to 5 RAS Down Mode and RAS Up Mode: With DRAM provided with fast page mode, as long as accesses are to the same row address, burst operation can be continued without interruption even if accesses are not consecutive by holding the RAS signal low. * RAS Down Mode To select RAS down mode, set the BE and RDM bits to 1 in DRCRA. If access to DRAM space is interrupted and another space is accessed, the RAS signal is held low during the access to the other space, and burst access is performed if the row address of the next DRAM space access is the same as the row address of the previous DRAM space access. Figure 6.23 shows an example of the timing in RAS down mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 176 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller External space access Tc2 T1 T2 DRAM access Tp Tr Tc1 DRAM access Tc1 Tc2 A23 to A0 AS CSn (RAS) PB4/PB5 (UCAS/LCAS) D15 to D0 Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 6.23 Example of Operation Timing in RAS Down Mode (CSEL = 0) When RAS down mode is selected, the conditions for an asserted RASn signal to return to the high level are as shown below. The timing in these cases is shown in figure 6.24. When DRAM space with a different row address is accessed Immediately before a CAS-before-RAS refresh cycle When the BE bit or RDM bit is cleared to 0 in DRCRA Immediately before release of the external bus Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 177 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller DRAM access cycle RASn (a) Access to DRAM space with a different row address CBR refresh cycle RASn (b) CAS-before-RAS refresh cycle DRCRA write cycle RASn (c) BE bit or RDM bit cleared to 0 in DRCRA External bus released RASn (d) External bus released Note: n = 2 to 5 High-impedance Figure 6.24 RAS Negation Timing when RAS Down Mode is Selected RASn Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 178 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller When RAS down mode is selected, the CAS-before-RAS refresh function provided with this DRAM interface must always be used as the DRAM refreshing method. When a refresh operation is performed, the RAS signal goes high immediately beforehand. The refresh interval setting must be made so that the maximum DRAM RAS pulse width specification is observed. When the self-refresh function is used, the RDM bit must be cleared to 0, and RAS up mode selected, before executing a SLEEP instruction in order to enter software standby mode. Select RAS down mode again after exiting software standby mode. Note that RAS down mode cannot be used when HWR and LWR are selected for UCAS and LCAS, a device other than DRAM is connected to external space, and HWR and LWR are used as write strobes. * RAS Up Mode To select RAS up mode, clear the RDM bit to 0 in DRCRA. Each time access to DRAM space is interrupted and another space is accessed, the RAS signal returns to the high level. Burst operation is only performed if DRAM space is continuous. Figure 6.25 shows an example of the timing in RAS up mode. External space access T1 T2 DRAM access Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 DRAM access Tc1 Tc2 A23 to A0 AS CSn(RAS) PB4/PB5 (UCAS/LCAS) D15 to D0 Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 6.25 Example of Operation Timing in RAS Up Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 179 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.5.11 Refresh Control The H8/3067 Group is provided with a CAS-before-RAS (CBR) function and self-refresh function as DRAM refresh control functions. CAS-Before-RAS (CBR) Refreshing: To select CBR refreshing, set the RCYCE bit to 1 in DRCRB. With CBR refreshing, RTCNT counts up using the input clock selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR, and a refresh request is generated when the count matches the value set in RTCOR (compare match). At the same time, RTCNT is reset and starts counting up again from H'00. Refreshing is thus repeated at fixed intervals determined by RTCOR and bits CKS2 to CKS0. A refresh cycle is executed after this refresh request has been accepted and the DRAM interface has acquired the bus. Set a value in bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTCOR that will meet the refresh interval specification for the DRAM used. When RAS down mode is used, set the refresh interval so that the maximum RAS pulse width specification is met. RTCNT starts counting up when bits CKS2 to CKS0 are set. RTCNT and RTCOR settings should therefore be completed before setting bits CKS2 to CKS0. Also note that a repeat refresh request generated during a bus request, or a refresh request during refresh cycle execution, will be ignored. RTCNT operation is shown in figure 6.26, compare match timing in figure 6.27, and CBR refresh timing in figures 6.28 and 6.29. RTCNT RTCOR H'00 Refresh request Figure 6.26 RTCNT Operation Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 180 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller RTCNT N H'00 RTCOR N Refresh request signal and CMF bit setting signal Figure 6.27 Compare Match Timing TRp TR1 TR2 Address bus* Area 2 start address CSn(RAS) PB4/PB5 (UCAS/LCAS) RD(WE) High RFSH AS High level Note: * In address update mode 1, the area 2 start address is output. In address update mode 2, the address in the preceding bus cycle is retained. Figure 6.28 CBR Refresh Timing (CSEL = 0, TPC = 0, RLW = 0) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 181 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller The basic CBS refresh cycle timing comprises three states: one RAS precharge cycle (TRP) state, and two RAS output cycle (TR1, TR2) states. Either one or two states can be selected for the RAS precharge cycle. When the TPC bit is set to 1 in DRCRB, RAS signal output is delayed by one cycle. This does not affect the timing of UCAS and LCAS output. Use the RLW bit in DRCRB to adjust the RAS signal width. A single refresh wait state (TRW) can be inserted between the TR1 state and TR2 state by setting the RLW bit to 1. The RLW bit setting is valid only for CBR refresh cycles, and does not affect DRAM read/write cycles. The number of states in the CBR refresh cycle is not affected by the settings in ASTCR, WCRH, or WCRL, or by the state of the WAIT pin. Figure 6.29 shows the timing when the TPC bit and RLW bit are both set to 1. TRp1 TRP2 TR1 TRW TR2 Address bus* CSn(RAS) Area 2 start address PB4/PB5 (UCAS/LCAS) RD(WE) High RFSH AS High level Note: * In address update mode 1, the area 2 start address is output. In address update mode 2, the address in the preceding bus cycle is retained. Figure 6.29 CBR Refresh Timing (CSEL = 0, TPC = 1, RLW = 1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 182 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller DRAM must be refreshed immediately after powering on in order to stabilize its internal state. When using the H8/3067 Group CAS-before-RAS refresh function, therefore, a DRAM stabilization period should be provided by means of interrupts by another timer module, or by counting the number of times bit 7 (CMF) of RTMCSR is set, for instance, immediately after bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 have been set in DRCRA. Self-Refreshing: A self-refresh mode (battery backup mode) is provided for DRAM as a kind of standby mode. In this mode, refresh timing and refresh addresses are generated within the DRAM. The H8/3067 Group has a function that places the DRAM in self-refresh mode when the chip enters software standby mode. To use the self-refresh function, set the SRFMD bit to 1 in DRCRA. When a SLEEP instruction is subsequently executed in order to enter software standby mode, the CAS and RAS signals are output and the DRAM enters self-refresh mode, as shown in figure 6.30. When the chip exits software standby mode, CAS and RAS outputs go high. The following conditions must be observed when the self-refresh function is used: * When burst access is selected, RAS up mode must be selected before executing a SLEEP instruction in order to enter software standby mode. Therefore, if RAS down mode has been selected, the RDM bit in DRCRA must be cleared to 0 and RAS up mode selected before executing the SLEEP instruction. Select RAS down mode again after exiting software standby mode. * The instruction immediately following a SLEEP instruction must not be located in an area designated as DRAM space. The self-refresh function will not work properly unless the above conditions are observed. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 183 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Software standby mode Address bus CSn(RAS) High-impedance Oscillation stabilization time PB4(UCAS) PB5(LCAS) RD(WE) RFSH Figure 6.30 Self-Refresh Timing (CSEL = 0) Refresh Signal (RFSH A refresh signal (RFSH) that transmits a refresh cycle off-chip can be RFSH): RFSH output by setting the RFSHE bit to 1 in DRCRA. RFSH output timing is shown in figures 6.28, 6.29, and 6.30. 6.5.12 Examples of Use Examples of DRAM connection and program setup procedures are shown below. When the DRAM interface is used, check the DRAM device characteristics and choose the most appropriate method of use for that device. Connection Examples * Figure 6.31 shows typical interconnections when using two 2-CAS type 16-Mbit DRAMs using a x 16-bit organization, and the corresponding address map. The DRAMs used in this example are of the 10-bit row address x 10-bit column address type. Up to four DRAMs can be connected by designating areas 2 to 5 as DRAM space. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 184 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 2-CAS 16-Mbit DRAM 10-bit row address x 10-bit column address x16-bit organization RAS UCAS LCAS WE A9-A0 D15-D0 OE H8/3067 Group chip CS2 (RAS2) CS3 (RAS3) PB4(UCAS) PB5(LCAS) RD (WE) A10-A1 D15-D0 No.1 RAS UCAS LCAS WE No.2 A9-A0 D15-D0 OE (a) Interconnections (example) PB4 (UCAS) 15 87 PB5 (LCAS) 0 H'400000 Area 2 H'5FFFFE H'600000 Area 3 H'7FFFFE H'800000 Area 4 H'9FFFFE H'A00000 Area 5 H'BFFFFE (b) Address map Normal Normal DRAM (No.2) DRAM (No.1) CS2(RAS2) CS3(RAS3) CS4 CS5 Figure 6.31 Interconnections and Address Map for 2-CAS 16-Mbit DRAMs with x 16-Bit Organization Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 185 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller * Figure 6.32 shows typical interconnections when using two 16-Mbit DRAMs using a x 8-bit organization, and the corresponding address map. The DRAMs used in this example are of the 11-bit row address x 10-bit column address type. The CS2 pin is used as the common RAS output pin for areas 2 and 3. When the DRAM address space spans a number of contiguous areas, as in this example, the appropriate setting of bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 enables a single CS pin to be used as the common RAS output pin for a number of areas, and makes it possible to directly connect large-capacity DRAM with address space that spans a maximum of four areas. Any unused CS pins (in this example, the CS3 pin) can be used as input/output ports. 2-CAS 16-Mbit DRAM 11-bit row address x 10-bit column address x8-bit organization RAS CAS WE A10-A0 D7-D0 No.1 H8/3067 Group chip CS2 (RAS2) PB4 (UCAS) PB5 (LCAS) RD (WE) A21, A10-A1 D15-D8 D7-D0 OE RAS CAS WE No.2 A10-A0 D7-D0 OE (a) Interconnections (example) PB5 PB4 (UCAS) (LCAS) 15 87 0 H'400000 Area 2 H'5FFFFE H'600000 Area 3 H'7FFFFE H'800000 Area 4 H'9FFFFE H'A00000 Area 5 H'BFFFFE 16-Mbyte mode (b) Address map Normal Normal CS4 CS5 DRAM (No.1) DRAM (No.2) CS2(RAS2) Figure 6.32 Interconnections and Address Map for 16-Mbit DRAMs with x 8-Bit Organization Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 186 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller * Figure 6.33 shows typical interconnections when using two 4-Mbit DRAMs, and the corresponding address map. The DRAMs used in this example are of the 9-bit row address x 10-bit column address type. In this example, upper address decoding allows multiple DRAMs to be connected to a single area. The RFSH pin is used in this case, since both DRAMs must be refreshed simultaneously. However, note that RAS down mode cannot be used in this interconnection example. 2-CAS 4-Mbit DRAM 9-bit row address x 9-bit column address x16-bit organization RAS UCAS LCAS WE H8/3067 Group chip CS2 (RAS2) PB4 (UCAS) PB5 (LCAS) RD (WE) RFSH A19 A9-A1 D15-D0 No.1 A8-A0 D15-D0 OE RAS UCAS LCAS WE No.2 A8-A0 D15-D0 OE (a) Interconnections (example) PB4 (UCAS) 15 H'400000 DRAM (No.1) H'47FFFE H'480000 DRAM (No.2) Area 2 H'4FFFFE H'500000 Not used H'5FFFFE 16-Mbyte mode (b) Address map CS2 (RAS2) PB5 (LCAS) 87 0 Figure 6.33 Interconnections and Address Map for 2-CAS 4-Mbit DRAMs with x 16-Bit Organization Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 187 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Example of Program Setup Procedure: Figure 6.34 shows an example of the program setup procedure. Set ABWCR Set RTCOR Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR Set DRCRB Set DRCRA Wait for DRAM stabilization time DRAM can be accessed Figure 6.34 Example of Setup Procedure when Using DRAM Interface 6.5.13 Usage Notes Note the following points when using the DRAM refresh function. * Refresh cycles will not be executed when the external bus released state, software standby mode, or a bus cycle is extended by means of wait state insertion. Refreshing must therefore be performed by other means in these cases. * If a refresh request is generated internally while the external bus is released, the first request is retained and a single refresh cycle will be executed after the bus-released state is cleared. Figure 6.35 shows the bus cycle in this case. * When a bus cycle is extended by means of wait state insertion, the first request is retained in the same way as when the external bus has been released. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 188 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller * In the event of contention with a bus request from an external bus master when a transition is made to software standby mode, the BACK and strobe states may be indeterminate after the transition to software standby mode (see figure 6.36). When software standby mode is used, the BRLE bit should be cleared to 0 in BRCR before executing the SLEEP instruction. Similar contention in a transition to self-refresh mode may prevent dependable strobe waveform output. This can also be avoided by clearing the BRLW bit to 0 in BRCR. * Immediately after self-refreshing is cleared, external bus release is possible during a given period until the start of a CPU cycle. Attention must be paid to the RAS state to ensure that the specification for the RAS precharge time immediately after self-refreshing is met. External bus released Refresh cycle CPU cycle Refresh cycle RFSH Refresh request BACK Figure 6.35 Bus-Released State and Refresh Cycles Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 189 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Software standby mode BREQ BACK Address bus Strobe Figure 6.36 Bus-Released State and Software Standby Mode Oscillation stabilization CPU internal cycle time on exit from software (period in which external standby mode bus can be released) CPU cycle Address RAS CAS @SP Figure 6.37 Self-Refresh Clearing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 190 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.6 6.6.1 Interval Timer Operation When DRAM is not connected to the H8/3067 Group chip, the refresh timer can be used as an interval timer by clearing bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA to 0. After setting RTCOR, selection a clock source with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR, and set the CMIE bit to 1. Timing of Setting of Compare Match Flag and Clearing by Compare Match: The CMF flag in RTMCSR is set to 1 by a compare match output when the RTCOR and RTCNT values match. The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when RTCNT is updated from the matching value to a new value). Accordingly, when RTCNT and RTCOR match, the compare match signal is not generated until the next counter clock pulse. Figure 6.38 shows the timing. RTCNT N H'00 RTCOR N Compare match signal CMF flag Figure 6.38 Timing of CMF Flag Setting Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 191 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Operation in Power-Down State: The interval timer operates in sleep mode. It does not operate in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode, RTCNT and RTMCSR bits 7 and 6 are initialized, but RTMCSR bits 5 to 3 and RTCOR retain their settings prior to the transition to software standby mode. Contention between RTCNT Write and Counter Clear: If a counter clear signal occurs in the T3 state of an RTCNT write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. See Figure 6.39. T1 T2 T3 Address bus RTCNT address Internal write signal Counter clear signal RTCNT N H'00 Figure 6.39 Contention between RTCNT Write and Clear Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 192 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Contention between RTCNT Write and Increment: If an increment pulse occurs in the T3 state of an RTCNT write cycle, writing takes priority and RTCNT is not incremented. See Figure 6.40. T1 T2 T3 Address bus RTCNT address Internal write signal RTCNT input clock RTCNT N M Counter write data Figure 6.40 Contention between RTCNT Write and Increment Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 193 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Contention between RTCOR Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T3 state of an RTCOR write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited. See Figure 6.41. T1 T2 T3 Address bus RTCOR address Internal write signal RTCNT N N+1 RTCOR N M RTCOR write data Compare match signal Inhibited Figure 6.41 Contention between RTCOR Write and Compare Match RTCNT Operation at Internal Clock Source Switchover: Switching internal clock sources may cause RTCNT to increment, depending on the switchover timing. Table 6.10 shows the relation between the time of the switchover (by writing to bits CKS2 to CKS0) and the operation of RTCNT. The RTCNT input clock is generated from the internal clock source by detecting the falling edge of the internal clock. If a switchover is made from a high clock source to a low clock source, as in case No. 3 in table 6.10, the switchover will be regarded as a falling edge, an RTCNT clock pulse will be generated, and RTCNT will be incremented. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 194 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Table 6.10 Internal Clock Switchover and RTCNT Operation (1) No. CKS2 to CKS0 Write Timing "Low" "Low" switchover*1 RTCNT Operation 1 Old clock source New clock source RTCNT clock RTCNT N N+1 CKS bits rewritten 2 "Low" "High" switchover*2 Old clock source New clock source RTCNT clock RTCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bits rewritten Notes: 1. Including switchovers from a low clock source to the halted state, and from the halted state to a low clock source. 2. Including switchover from the halted state to a high clock source. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 195 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Table 6.10 Internal Clock Switchover and RTCNT Operation (2) No. CKS2 to CKS0 Write Timing "High" "Low" switchover*3 RTCNT Operation 3 Old clock source New clock source *4 RTCNT clock RTCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bits rewritten 4 "High" "High" switchover*4 Old clock source New clock source RTCNT clock RTCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bits rewritten Notes: 3. Including switchover from a high clock source to the halted state. 4. The switchover is regarded as a falling edge, causing RTCNT to increment. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 196 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.7 Interrupt Sources Compare match interrupts (CMI) can be generated when the refresh timer is used as an interval timer. Compare match interrupt requests are masked/unmasked with the CMIE bit in RTMCSR. 6.8 6.8.1 Burst ROM Interface Overview With the H8/3067 Group, external space area 0 can be designated as burst ROM space, and burst ROM space interfacing can be performed. The burst ROM space interface enables 16-bit organization ROM with burst access capability to be accessed at high speed. Area 0 is designated as burst ROM space by means of the BROME bit in BCR. Continuous burst access of a maximum or four or eight words can be performed on external space area 0. Two or three states can be selected for burst access. 6.8.2 Basic Timing The number of states in the initial cycle (full access) and a burst cycle of the burst ROM interface is determined by the setting of the AST0 bit in ASTCR. When the AST0 bit is set to 1, wait states can also be inserted in the initial cycle. Wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle. Burst access of up to four words is performed when the BRSTS0 bit is cleared to 0 in BCR, and burst access of up to eight words when the BRSTS0 bit is set to 1. The number of burst access states is two when the BRSTS1 bit is cleared to 0, and three when the BRSTS1 bit is set to 1. The basic access timing for burst ROM space is shown in figure 6.42. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 197 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Full access T1 T2 T3 T1 Burst access T2 T1 T2 Address bus Only lower address changes CS0 AS RD Data bus Read data Read data Read data Figure 6.42 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing 6.8.3 Wait Control As with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface. Wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 198 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.9 6.9.1 Idle Cycle Operation When the H8/3067 Group chip accesses external space, it can insert a 1-state idle cycle (TI) between bus cycles in the following cases: (1) when read accesses between different areas occur consecutively, (2) when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle, and (3) immediately after a DRAM space access. By inserting an idle cycle it is possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between ROM, which has a long output floating time, and high-speed memory, I/O interfaces, and so on. The ICIS1 and ICIS0 bits in BCR both have an initial value of 1, so that an idle cycle is inserted in the initial state. If there are no data collisions, the ICIS bits can be cleared. Consecutive Reads between Different Areas: If consecutive reads between different areas occur while the ICIS1 bit is set to 1 in BCR, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the second read cycle. Figure 6.43 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a read cycle from SRAM, each being located in a different area. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle B between the read data from ROM and that from SRAM. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. Bus cycle A Bus cycle B Address bus RD Data bus Long buffer-off time (a) Idle cycle not inserted Data collision (b) Idle cycle inserted T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 Address bus RD Data bus Bus cycle A Bus cycle B T1 T2 T3 Ti T1 T2 Figure 6.43 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (1) (ICIS1 = 1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 199 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Write after Read: If an external write occurs after an external read while the ICIS0 bit is set to 1 in BCR, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle. Figure 6.44 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle B between the read data from ROM and the CPU write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. Bus cycle A Bus cycle B Address bus RD HWR Data bus Long buffer-off time (a) Idle cycle not inserted Data collision (b) Idle cycle inserted T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 Address bus RD HWR Data bus Bus cycle A Bus cycle B T1 T2 T3 Ti T1 T2 Figure 6.44 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (2) (ICIS0 = 1) External Address Space Access Immediately after DRAM Space Access: If a DRAM space access is followed by a non-DRAM external access when HWR and LWR have been selected as the UCAS and LCAS output pins by means of the CSEL bit in DRCRB, a Ti cycle is inserted regardless of the settings of bits ICIS0 and ICIS1 in BCR. Figure 6.45 shows an example of the operation. This is done to prevent simultaneous changing of the HWR and LWR signals used as UCAS and LCAS in DRAM space and CSn for the space in the next cycle, and so avoid an erroneous write to the external device in the next cycle. A Ti cycle is not inserted when PB4 and PB5 have been selected as the UCAS and LCAS output pins. In the case of consecutive DRAM space access precharge cycles (Tp), the ICIS0 and ICIS1 bit settings are invalid. In the case of consecutive reads between different areas, for example, if the second access is a DRAM access, only a Tp cycle is inserted, and a Ti cycle is not. The timing in this case is shown in figure 6.46. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 200 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bus cycle A (DRAM access cycle) Bus cycle B Address bus HWR/LWR (UCAS/LCAS) CSn Simultaneous change of HWR/LWR and CSn Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 T1 T2 Address bus HWR/LWR (UCAS/LCAS) CSn Bus cycle A (DRAM access cycle) Bus cycle B Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Ti T1 T2 (a) Idle cycle not inserted (b) Idle cycle inserted Figure 6.45 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (3) (HWR LWR Used as UCAS LCAS HWR/LWR UCAS/LCAS LCAS) HWR External read T1 Address bus RD UCAS/LCAS Address bus T2 T3 DRAM space read Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Figure 6.46 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (4) (Consecutive Precharge Cycles) Usage Notes: When non-insertion of idle cycles is set, the rise (negation) of RD and the fall (assertion) of CSn may occur simultaneously. An example of the operation is shown in figure 6.47. If consecutive reads between different external areas occur while the ICIS1 bit is cleared to 0 in BCR, or if a write cycle to a different external area occurs after an external read while the ICIS0 bit is cleared to 0, the RD negation in the first read cycle and the CSn assertion in the following bus cycle will occur simultaneously. Therefore, depending on the output delay time of each signal, it is possible that the low-level output of RD in the preceding read cycle and the low-level output of CSn in the following bus cycle will overlap. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 201 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller A setting whereby idle cycle insertion is not performed can be made only when RD and CSn do not change simultaneously, or when it does not matter if they do. Bus cycle A Address bus RD CSn T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B T1 T2 Address bus RD CSn Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B Ti T1 T2 Simultaneous change of RD and CSn Possibility of mutual overlap (a) Idle cycle not inserted (b) Idle cycle inserted Figure 6.47 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (5) 6.9.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle Table 6.11 shows the pin states in an idle cycle. Table 6.11 Pin States in Idle Cycle Pins A23 to A0 D15 to D0 CSn UCAS, LCAS AS RD HWR LWR Pin State Next cycle address value High impedance High* High High High High High Note: * Remains low in DRAM space RAS down mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 202 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.10 Bus Arbiter The bus controller has a built-in bus arbiter that arbitrates between different bus masters. There are four bus masters: the CPU, DMA controller (DMAC), DRAM interface, and an external bus master. When a bus master has the bus right it can carry out read, write, or refresh access. Each bus master uses a bus request signal to request the bus right. At fixed times the bus arbiter determines priority and uses a bus acknowledge signal to grant the bus to a bus master, which can the operate using the bus. The bus arbiter checks whether the bus request signal from a bus master is active or inactive, and returns an acknowledge signal to the bus master. When two or more bus masters request the bus, the highest-priority bus master receives an acknowledge signal. The bus master that receives an acknowledge signal can continue to use the bus until the acknowledge signal is deactivated. The bus master priority order is: (High) External bus master > DRAM interface > DMAC > CPU (Low) The bus arbiter samples the bus request signals and determines priority at all times, but it does not always grant the bus immediately, even when it receives a bus request from a bus master with higher priority than the current bus master. Each bus master has certain times at which it can release the bus to a higher-priority bus master. 6.10.1 Operation CPU: The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master. If the DMAC, DRAM interface, or an external bus master requests the bus while the CPU has the bus right, the bus arbiter transfers the bus right to the bus master that requested it. The bus right is transferred at the following times: * The bus right is transferred at the boundary of a bus cycle. If word data is accessed by two consecutive byte accesses, however, the bus right is not transferred between the two byte accesses. * If another bus master requests the bus while the CPU is performing internal operations, such as executing a multiply or divide instruction, the bus right is transferred immediately. The CPU continues its internal operations. * If another bus master requests the bus while the CPU is in sleep mode, the bus right is transferred immediately. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 203 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller DMAC: When the DMAC receives an activation request, it requests the bus right from the bus arbiter. If the DMAC is bus master and the DRAM interface or an external bus master requests the bus, the bus arbiter transfers the bus right from the DMAC to the bus master that requested the bus. The bus right is transferred at the following times. The bus right is transferred when the DMAC finishes transferring one byte or one word. A DMAC transfer cycle consists of a read cycle and a write cycle. The bus right is not transferred between the read cycle and the write cycle. There is a priority order among the DMAC channels. For details see section 7.4.9, MultipleChannel Operation. DRAM Interface: The DRAM interface requests the bus right from the bus arbiter when a refresh cycle request is issued, and releases the bus at the end of the refresh cycle. For details see section 6.5, DRAM Interface. External Bus Master: When the BRLE bit is set to 1 in BRCR, the bus can be released to an external bus master. The external bus master has highest priority, and requests the bus right from the bus arbiter y driving the BREQ signal low. Once the external bus master acquires the bus, it keeps the bus until the BREQ signal goes high. While the bus is released to an external bus master, the H8/3067 Group chip holds the address bus, data bus, bus control signals (AS, RD, HWR, and LWR), and chip select signals (CSn: n = 7 to 0) in the high-impedance state, and holds the BACK pin in the low output state. The bus arbiter samples the BREQ pin at the rise of the system clock (). If BREQ is low, the bus is released to the external bus master at the appropriate opportunity. The BREQ signal should be held low until the BACK signal goes low. When the BREQ pin is high in two consecutive samples, the BACK pin is driven high to end the bus-release cycle. Figure 6.48 shows the timing when the bus right is requested by an external bus master during a read cycle in a two-state access area. There is a minimum interval of three states from when the BREQ signal goes low until the bus is released. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 204 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller CPU cycles T0 T1 T2 External bus released CPU cycles Address bus Data bus AS RD Address High-impedance High-impedance High-impedance High-impedance High High-impedance HWR, LWR BREQ BACK Minimum 3 cycles (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Figure 6.48 Example of External Bus Master Operation In the event of contention with a bus request from an external bus master when a transition is made to software standby mode, the BACK and strobe states may be indeterminate after the transition to software standby mode (see figure 6.36). When software standby mode is used, the BRLE bit should be cleared to 0 in BRCR before executing the SLEEP instruction. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 205 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.11 6.11.1 Register and Pin Input Timing Register Write Timing ABWCR, ASTCR, WCRH, and WCRL Write Timing: Data written to ABWCR, ASTCR, WCRH, and WCRL takes effect starting from the next bus cycle. Figure 6.49 shows the timing when an instruction fetched from area 0 changes area 0 from three-state access to two-state access. T1 Address bus 3-state access to area 0 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 ASTCR address 2-state access to area 0 Figure 6.49 ASTCR Write Timing DDR and CSCR Write Timing: Data written to DDR or CSCR for the port corresponding to the CSn pin to switch between CSn output and generic input takes effect starting from the T3 state of the DDR write cycle. Figure 6.50 shows the timing when the CS1 pin is changed from generic input to CS1 output. T1 Address bus CS1 High-impedance T2 T3 P8DDR address Figure 6.50 DDR Write Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 206 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller BRCR Write Timing: Data written to BRCR to switch between A23, A22, A21, or A20 output and generic input or output takes effect starting from the T3 state of the BRCR write cycle. Figure 6.51 shows the timing when a pin is changed from generic input to A23, A22, A21, or A20 output. T1 Address bus PA7 to PA4 (A23 to A20) BRCR address T2 T3 High-impedance Figure 6.51 BRCR Write Timing 6.11.2 BREQ Pin Input Timing After driving the BREQ pin low, hold it low until BACK goes low. If BREQ returns to the high level before BACK goes lows, the bus arbiter may operate incorrectly. To terminate the external-bus-released state, hold the BREQ signal high for at least three states. If BREQ is high for too short an interval, the bus arbiter may operate incorrectly. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 207 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 208 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Section 7 DMA Controller 7.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group has an on-chip DMA controller (DMAC) that can transfer data on up to four channels. When the DMA controller is not used, it can be independently halted to conserve power. For details see section 20.6, Module Standby Function. 7.1.1 Features DMAC features are listed below. * Selection of short address mode or full address mode Short address mode 8-bit source address and 24-bit destination address, or vice versa Maximum four channels available Selection of I/O mode, idle mode, or repeat mode Full address mode 24-bit source and destination addresses Maximum two channels available Selection of normal mode or block transfer mode * Directly addressable 16-Mbyte address space * Selection of byte or word transfer * Activation by internal interrupts, external requests, or auto-request (depending on transfer mode) 16-bit timer compare match/input capture interrupts (x3) Serial communication interface (SCI channel 0) transmit-data-empty/receive-data-full interrupts External requests Auto-request A/D converter conversion-end interrupt Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 209 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 7.1 shows a DMAC block diagram. Internal address bus Internal interrupts IMIA0 IMIA1 IMIA2 ADI TXI0 RXI0 DREQ0 DREQ1 TEND0 TEND1 Control logic Channel 0 Address buffer Arithmetic-logic unit MAR0A Channel 0A IOAR0A MAR0B Channel 0B IOAR0B ETCR0B MAR1A Channel 1A IOAR1A ETCR1A MAR1B Channel 1B IOAR1B ETCR1B DTCR0A Interrupt DEND0A DEND0B signals DEND1A DEND1B DTCR0B DTCR1A DTCR1B Channel 1 Data buffer Internal data bus Legend DTCR: Data transfer control register MAR: Memory address register IOAR: I/O address register ETCR: Execute transfer count register Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DMAC Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 210 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Module data bus ETCR0A Section 7 DMA Controller 7.1.3 Functional Overview Table 7.1 gives an overview of the DMAC functions. Table 7.1 DMAC Functional Overview Address Reg. Length Transfer Mode Short address mode I/O mode * Transfers one byte or one word per request * Increments or decrements the memory address by 1 or 2 * Executes 1 to 65,536 transfers Idle mode * Transfers one byte or one word per request * Holds the memory address fixed * Executes 1 to 65,536 transfers Repeat mode * Transfers one byte or one word per request * Increments or decrements the memory address by 1 or 2 * Executes a specified number (1 to 255) of transfers, then returns to the initial state and continues Normal mode * Auto-request Retains the transfer request internally Executes a specified number(1 to 65,536) of transfers continuously Selection of burst mode or cyclesteal mode * External request Transfers one byte or one word per request Executes 1 to 65,536 transfers Block transfer * Transfers one block of a specified size per request * Executes 1 to 65,536 transfers * Allows either the source or destination to be a fixed block area * Block size can be 1 to 255 bytes or words Activation * Source Destination 8 24 Compare match/input capture A interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2 Transmit-data-empty interrupt from SCI channel 0 Conversion-end interrupt 8 from A/D converter Receive-data-full interrupt from SCI channel 0 External request 24 * * * * 24 8 Full address mode * * Auto-request External request 24 24 * * * 24 Compare match/ input capture A interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2 External request Conversion-end interrupt from A/D converter 24 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 211 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.1.4 Input/Output Pins Table 7.2 lists the DMAC pins. Table 7.2 Channel 0 1 DMAC Pins Name DMA request 0 Transfer end 0 DMA request 1 Transfer end 1 Abbreviation DREQ0 TEND0 DREQ1 TEND1 Input/ Output Input Output Input Output Function External request for DMAC channel 0 Transfer end on DMAC channel 0 External request for DMAC channel 1 Transfer end on DMAC channel 1 Note: External requests cannot be made to channel A in short address mode. 7.1.5 Register Configuration Table 7.3 lists the DMAC registers. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 212 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Table 7.3 DMAC Registers Abbreviation R/W MAR0AR MAR0AE MAR0AH MAR0AL IOAR0A R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined H'00 Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined H'00 Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined H'00 Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined Undetermined H'00 Channel Address* Name 0 H'FFF20 H'FFF21 H'FFF22 H'FFF23 H'FFF26 H'FFF24 H'FFF25 H'FFF27 H'FFF28 H'FFF29 H'FFF2A H'FFF2B H'FFF2E H'FFF2C H'FFF2D H'FFF2F 1 H'FFF30 H'FFF31 H'FFF32 H'FFF33 H'FFF36 H'FFF34 H'FFF35 H'FFF37 H'FFF38 H'FFF39 H'FFF3A H'FFF3B H'FFF3E H'FFF3C H'FFF3D H'FFF3F Memory address register 0AR Memory address register 0AE Memory address register 0AH Memory address register 0AL I/O address register 0A Execute transfer count register 0AH ETCR0AH Execute transfer count register 0AL ETCR0AL Data transfer control register 0A Memory address register 0BR Memory address register 0BE Memory address register 0BH Memory address register 0BL I/O address register 0B DTCR0A MAR0BR MAR0BE MAR0BH MAR0BL IOAR0B Execute transfer count register 0BH ETCR0BH Execute transfer count register 0BL ETCR0BL Data transfer control register 0B Memory address register 1AR Memory address register 1AE Memory address register 1AH Memory address register 1AL I/O address register 1A DTCR0B MAR1AR MAR1AE MAR1AH MAR1AL IOAR1A Execute transfer count register 1AH ETCR1AH Execute transfer count register 1AL ETCR1AL Data transfer control register 1A Memory address register 1BR Memory address register 1BE Memory address register 1BH Memory address register 1BL I/O address register 1B DTCR1A MAR1BR MAR1BE MAR1BH MAR1BL IOAR1B Execute transfer count register 1BH ETCR1BH Execute transfer count register 1BL ETCR1BL Data transfer control register 1B DTCR1B Note: * The lower 20 bits of the address are indicated. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 213 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.2 Register Descriptions (1) (Short Address Mode) In short address mode, transfers can be carried out independently on channels A and B. Short address mode is selected by bits DTS2A and DTS1A in data transfer control register A (DTCRA) as indicated in table 7.4. Table 7.4 Selection of Short and Full Address Modes Bit 1 DTS1A 1 Description DMAC channel 0 operates as one channel in full address mode DMAC channels 0A and 0B operate as two independent channels in short address mode DMAC channel 1 operates as one channel in full address mode DMAC channels 1A and 1B operate as two independent channels in short address mode Bit 2 Channel DTS2A 0 1 Other than above 1 1 1 Other than above 7.2.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR) A memory address register (MAR) is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies a source or destination address. The transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. An MAR consists of four 8-bit registers designated MARR, MARE, MARH, and MARL. All bits of MARR are reserved; they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undetermined Read/Write -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MARR MARE MARH MARL Source or destination address An MAR functions as a source or destination address register depending on how the DMAC is activated: as a destination address register if activation is by a receive-data-full interrupt from serial communication interface (SCI) channel 0 or by an A/D converter conversion-end interrupt, and as a source address register otherwise. The MAR value is incremented or decremented each time one byte or word is transferred, automatically updating the source or destination memory address. For details, see section 7.3.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 214 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller The MARs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 7.2.2 I/O Address Registers (IOAR) An I/O address register (IOAR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies a source or destination address. The IOAR value is the lower 8 bits of the address. The upper 16 address bits are all 1 (H'FFFF). Bit Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Source or destination address An IOAR functions as a source or destination address register depending on how the DMAC is activated: as a source address register if activation is by a receive-data-full interrupt from serial communication interface (SCI) channel 0 or by an A/D converter conversion-end interrupt, and as a destination address register otherwise. The IOAR value is held fixed. It is not incremented or decremented when a transfer is executed. The IOARs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 7.2.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCR) An execute transfer count register (ETCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers to be executed. These registers function in one way in I/O mode and idle mode, and another way in repeat mode. * I/O mode and idle mode Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Transfer counter In I/O mode and idle mode, ETCR functions as a 16-bit counter. The count is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. The transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 215 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller * Repeat mode Bit Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCRH Transfer counter Bit Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCRL Initial count In repeat mode, ETCRH functions as an 8-bit transfer counter and ETCRL holds the initial transfer count. ETCRH is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. When ETCRH reaches H'00, the value in ETCRL is reloaded into ETCRH and the same operation is repeated. The ETCRs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 216 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.2.4 Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR) A data transfer control register (DTCR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of one DMAC channel. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 DTE 0 R/W 6 DTSZ 0 R/W 5 DTID 0 R/W 4 RPE 0 R/W 3 DTIE 0 R/W 2 DTS2 0 R/W 1 DTS1 0 R/W 0 DTS0 0 R/W Data transfer enable Enables or disables data transfer Data transfer size Selects byte or word size Data transfer increment/decrement Selects whether to increment or decrement the memory address register Repeat enable Selects repeat mode Data transfer select These bits select the data transfer activation source Data transfer interrupt enable Enables or disables the CPU interrupt at the end of the transfer The DTCRs are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Data Transfer Enable (DTE): Enables or disables data transfer on a channel. When the DTE bit is set to 1, the channel waits for a transfer to be requested, and executes the transfer when activated as specified by bits DTS2 to DTS0. When DTE is 0, the channel is disabled and does not accept transfer requests. DTE is set to 1 by reading the register when DTE is 0, then writing 1. Bit 7 DTE 0 1 Description Data transfer is disabled. In I/O mode or idle mode, DTE is cleared to 0 when the specified number of transfers have been completed Data transfer is enabled (Initial value) If DTIE is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested when DTIE is cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 217 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Bit 6--Data Transfer Size (DTSZ): Selects the data size of each transfer. Bit 6 DTSZ 0 1 Description Byte-size transfer Word-size transfer (Initial value) Bit 5--Data Transfer Increment/Decrement (DTID): Selects whether to increment or decrement the memory address register (MAR) after a data transfer in I/O mode or repeat mode. Bit 5 DTID 0 Description MAR is incremented after each data transfer * * 1 * * If DTSZ = 0, MAR is incremented by 1 after each transfer If DTSZ = 1, MAR is incremented by 2 after each transfer If DTSZ = 0, MAR is decremented by 1 after each transfer If DTSZ = 1, MAR is decremented by 2 after each transfer (Initial value) MAR is decremented after each data transfer MAR is not incremented or decremented in idle mode. Bit 4--Repeat Enable (RPE): Selects whether to transfer data in I/O mode, idle mode, or repeat mode. Bit 4 RPE 0 1 Bit 3 DTIE 0 1 0 1 Repeat mode Idle mode Description I/O mode (Initial value) Operations in these modes are described in sections 7.4.2, I/O Mode, 7.4.3, Idle Mode, and 7.4.4, Repeat Mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 218 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Bit 3--Data Transfer Interrupt Enable (DTIE): Enables or disables the CPU interrupt (DEND) requested when the DTE bit is cleared to 0. Bit 3 DTIE 0 1 Description The DEND interrupt requested by DTE is disabled The DEND interrupt requested by DTE is enabled (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0--Data Transfer Select (DTS2, DTS1, DTS0): These bits select the data transfer activation source. Some of the selectable sources differ between channels A and B. Bit 2 DTS2 0 Bit 1 DTS1 0 Bit 0 DTS0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 0 (Initial value) Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 Conversion-end interrupt from A/D converter Transmit-data-empty interrupt from SCI channel 0 Receive-data-full interrupt from SCI channel 0 Falling edge of DREQ input (channel B) Transfer in full address mode (channel A) Low level of DREQ input (channel B) Transfer in full address mode (channel A) Note: See section 7.3.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR). The same internal interrupt can be selected as an activation source for two or more channels at once. In that case the channels are activated in a priority order, highest-priority channel first. For the priority order, see section 7.4.9, Multiple-Channel Operation. When a channel is enabled (DTE = 1), its selected DMAC activation source cannot generate a CPU interrupt. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 219 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.3 Register Descriptions (2) (Full Address Mode) In full address mode the A and B channels operate together. Full address mode is selected as indicated in table 7.4. 7.3.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR) A memory address register (MAR) is a 32-bit readable/writable register. MARA functions as the source address register of the transfer, and MARB as the destination address register. An MAR consists of four 8-bit registers designated MARR, MARE, MARH, and MARL. All bits of MARR are reserved; they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. (Write is invalid.) Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undetermined -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/W MARR MARE MARH MARL Source or destination address The MAR value is incremented or decremented each time one byte or word is transferred, automatically updating the source or destination memory address. For details, see section 7.3.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR). The MARs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 7.3.2 I/O Address Registers (IOAR) The I/O address registers (IOARs) are not used in full address mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 220 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCR) An execute transfer count register (ETCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers to be executed. The functions of these registers differ between normal mode and block transfer mode. * Normal mode ETCRA Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Transfer counter ETCRB: Is not used in normal mode. In normal mode ETCRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. The count is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. The transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. ETCRB is not used. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 221 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller * Block transfer mode ETCRA Bit Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCRAH Block size counter Bit Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCRAL Initial block size ETCRB Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Block transfer counter In block transfer mode, ETCRAH functions as an 8-bit block size counter. ETCRAL holds the initial block size. ETCRAH is decremented by 1 each time one byte or word is transferred. When the count reaches H'00, ETCRAH is reloaded from ETCRAL. Blocks consisting of an arbitrary number of bytes or words can be transferred repeatedly by setting the same initial block size value in ETCRAH and ETCRAL. In block transfer mode ETCRB functions as a 16-bit block transfer counter. ETCRB is decremented by 1 each time one block is transferred. The transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. The ETCRs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 222 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.3.4 Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR) The data transfer control registers (DTCRs) are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the operation of the DMAC channels. A channel operates in full address mode when bits DTS2A and DTS1A are both set to 1 in DTCRA. DTCRA and DTCRB have different functions in full address mode. DTCRA Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 DTE 0 R/W 6 DTSZ 0 R/W 5 SAID 0 R/W 4 SAIDE 0 R/W 3 DTIE 0 R/W 2 DTS2A 0 R/W 1 DTS1A 0 R/W 0 DTS0A 0 R/W Data transfer enable Enables or disables data transfer Data transfer size Selects byte or word size Data transfer interrupt enable Enables or disables the CPU interrupt at the end of the transfer Data transfer select 0A Selects block transfer mode Source address increment/decrement Source address increment/ decrement enable These bits select whether the source address register (MARA) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer Data transfer select 2A and 1A These bits must both be set to 1 DTCRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 223 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Bit 7--Data Transfer Enable (DTE): Together with the DTME bit in DTCRB, this bit enables or disables data transfer on the channel. When the DTME and DTE bits are both set to 1, the channel is enabled. If auto-request is specified, data transfer begins immediately. Otherwise, the channel waits for transfers to be requested. When the specified number of transfers have been completed, the DTE bit is automatically cleared to 0. When DTE is 0, the channel is disabled and does not accept transfer requests. DTE is set to 1 by reading the register when DTE is 0, then writing 1. Bit 7 DTE 0 1 Description Data transfer is disabled (DTE is cleared to 0 when the specified number of transfers have been completed) Data transfer is enabled (Initial value) If DTIE is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested when DTE is cleared to 0. Bit 6--Data Transfer Size (DTSZ): Selects the data size of each transfer. Bit 6 DTSZ 0 1 Description Byte-size transfer Word-size transfer (Initial value) Bit 5--Source Address Increment/Decrement (SAID) and, Bit 4--Source Address Increment/Decrement Enable (SAIDE): These bits select whether the source address register (MARA) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer. Bit 5 SAID 0 Bit 4 SAIDE 0 1 Description MARA is held fixed MARA is incremented after each data transfer * * 1 0 1 If DTSZ = 0, MARA is incremented by 1 after each transfer If DTSZ = 1, MARA is incremented by 2 after each transfer (Initial value) MARA is held fixed MARA is decremented after each data transfer * * If DTSZ = 0, MARA is decremented by 1 after each transfer If DTSZ = 1, MARA is decremented by 2 after each transfer Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 224 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Bit 3--Data Transfer Interrupt Enable (DTIE): Enables or disables the CPU interrupt (DEND) requested when the DTE bit is cleared to 0. Bit 3 DTIE 0 1 Description The DEND interrupt requested by DTE is disabled The DEND interrupt requested by DTE is enabled (Initial value) Bits 2 and 1--Data Transfer Select 2A and 1A (DTS2A, DTS1A): A channel operates in full address mode when DTS2A and DTS1A are both set to 1. Bit 0--Data Transfer Select 0A (DTS0A): Selects normal mode or block transfer mode. Bit 0 DTS0A 0 1 Description Normal mode Block transfer mode (Initial value) Operations in these modes are described in sections 7.4.5, Normal Mode, and 7.4.6, Block Transfer Mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 225 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller DTCRB Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 DTME 0 R/W 6 N 0 R/W 5 DAID 0 R/W 4 DAIDE 0 R/W 3 TMS 0 R/W 2 DTS2B 0 R/W 1 DTS1B 0 R/W 0 DTS0B 0 R/W Data transfer master enable Enables or disables data transfer, together with the DTE bit, and is cleared to 0 by an interrupt Reserved bit Transfer mode select Selects whether the block area is the source or destination in block transfer mode Data transfer select 2B to 0B These bits select the data transfer activation source Destination address increment/decrement Destination address increment/decrement enable These bits select whether the destination address register (MARB) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer DTCRB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Data Transfer Master Enable (DTME): Together with the DTE bit in DTCRA, this bit enables or disables data transfer. When the DTME and DTE bits are both set to 1, the channel is enabled. When an NMI interrupt occurs DTME is cleared to 0, suspending the transfer so that the CPU can use the bus. The suspended transfer resumes when DTME is set to 1 again. For further information on operation in block transfer mode, see section 7.6.6, NMI Interrupts and Block Transfer Mode. DTME is set to 1 by reading the register while DTME = 0, then writing 1. Bit 7 DTME 0 1 Description Data transfer is disabled (DTME is cleared to 0 when an NMI interrupt occurs) Data transfer is enabled (Initial value) Bit 6--Reserved: Although reserved, this bit can be written and read. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 226 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Bit 5--Destination Address Increment/Decrement (DAID) and, Bit 4--Destination Address Increment/Decrement Enable (DAIDE): These bits select whether the destination address register (MARB) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer. Bit 5 DAID 0 Bit 4 DAIDE 0 1 Description MARB is held fixed MARB is incremented after each data transfer * * 1 0 1 If DTSZ = 0, MARB is incremented by 1 after each data transfer If DTSZ = 1, MARB is incremented by 2 after each data transfer (Initial value) MARB is held fixed MARB is decremented after each data transfer * * If DTSZ = 0, MARB is decremented by 1 after each data transfer If DTSZ = 1, MARB is decremented by 2 after each data transfer Bit 3--Transfer Mode Select (TMS): Selects whether the source or destination is the block area in block transfer mode. Bit 3 TMS 0 1 Description Destination is the block area in block transfer mode Source is the block area in block transfer mode (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 227 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Bits 2 to 0--Data Transfer Select 2B to 0B (DTS2B, DTS1B, DTS0B): These bits select the data transfer activation source. The selectable activation sources differ between normal mode and block transfer mode. Normal mode Bit 2 DTS2B 0 Bit 1 DTS1B 0 1 1 0 1 Bit 0 DTS0B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description Auto-request (burst mode) Cannot be used Auto-request (cycle-steal mode) Cannot be used Cannot be used Cannot be used Falling edge of DREQ Low level input at DREQ (Initial value) Block transfer mode Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DTS2B DTS1B DTS0B Description 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 0 (Initial value) Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 Conversion-end interrupt from A/D converter Cannot be used Cannot be used Falling edge of DREQ Cannot be used The same internal interrupt can be selected to activate two or more channels. The channels are activated in a priority order, highest priority first. For the priority order, see section 7.4.9, Multiple-Channel Operation. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 228 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4 7.4.1 Operation Overview Table 7.5 summarizes the DMAC modes. Table 7.5 DMAC Modes Activation I/O mode Idle mode Repeat mode Notes Up to four channels can operate independently Only the B channels support external requests Transfer Mode Short address mode Compare match/input * capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2 Transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI channel 0 Conversion-end interrupt from A/D converter External request * Full address mode Normal mode Auto-request * A and B channels are paired; up to two channels are available Burst mode transfer or cycle-steal mode transfer can be selected for autorequests External request Block transfer mode Compare match/input * capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2 Conversion-end interrupt from A/D converter External request A summary of operations in these modes follows. I/O Mode: One byte or word is transferred per request. A designated number of these transfers are executed. A CPU interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of transfers. One 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. The transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. Idle Mode: One byte or word is transferred per request. A designated number of these transfers are executed. A CPU interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 229 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller transfers. One 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. The addresses are held fixed. The transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. Repeat Mode: One byte or word is transferred per request. A designated number of these transfers are executed. When the designated number of transfers are completed, the initial address and counter value are restored and operation continues. No CPU interrupt is requested. One 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. The transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. Normal Mode * Auto-request The DMAC is activated by register setup alone, and continues executing transfers until the designated number of transfers have been completed. A CPU interrupt can be requested at completion of the transfers. Both addresses are 24-bit addresses. Cycle-steal mode The bus is released to another bus master after each byte or word is transferred. Burst mode Unless requested by a higher-priority bus master, the bus is not released until the designated number of transfers have been completed. * External request One byte or word is transferred per request. A designated number of these transfers are executed. A CPU interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of transfers. Both addresses are 24-bit addresses. Block Transfer Mode: One block of a specified size is transferred per request. A designated number of block transfers are executed. At the end of each block transfer, one address is restored to its initial value. When the designated number of blocks have been transferred, a CPU interrupt can be requested. Both addresses are 24-bit addresses. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 230 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.2 I/O Mode I/O mode can be selected independently for each channel. One byte or word is transferred at each transfer request in I/O mode. A designated number of these transfers are executed. One address is specified in the memory address register (MAR), the other in the I/O address register (IOAR). The direction of transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. The transfer is from the address specified in IOAR to the address specified in MAR if activated by an SCI channel 0 receive-data-full interrupt, and from the address specified in MAR to the address specified in IOAR otherwise. Table 7.6 indicates the register functions in I/O mode. Table 7.6 Register Functions in I/O Mode Function Activated by SCI 0 ReceiveData-Full Interrupt or by A/D Converter ConversionOther End Interrupt Activation 0 MAR Register 23 Initial Setting Destination or source start address Source or destination address Number of transfers Operation Incremented or decremented once per transfer Held fixed Destination address register Source address register Transfer counter Source address register Destination address register 23 All 1s 15 7 IOAR 0 0 ETCR Decremented once per transfer until H'0000 is reached and transfer ends Legend MAR: Memory address register IOAR: I/O address register ETCR: Execute transfer count register Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 231 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller MAR and IOAR specify the source and destination addresses. MAR specifies a 24-bit source or destination address, which is incremented or decremented as each byte or word is transferred. IOAR specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. The upper 16 bits are all 1s. IOAR is not incremented or decremented. Figure 7.2 illustrates how I/O mode operates. Address T Transfer IOAR 1 byte or word is transferred per request Address B Legend L = initial setting of MAR N = initial setting of ETCR Address T = L Address B = L + (-1) DTID * (2 DTSZ * N - 1) Figure 7.2 Operation in I/O Mode The transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in ETCR. The ETCR value is decremented by 1 at each transfer. When the ETCR value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and the transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested at this time. The maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting ETCR to H'0000. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 232 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture A interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI channel 0, conversion-end interrupts from the A/D converter, and external request signals. For the detailed settings see section 7.2.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR). Figure 7.3 shows a sample setup procedure for I/O mode. I/O mode setup Set source and destination addresses 1 Set transfer count 2 Read DTCR 3 1. Set the source and destination addresses in MAR and IOAR. The transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. 2. Set the transfer count in ETCR. 3. Read DTCR while the DTE bit is cleared to 0. 4. Set the DTCR bits as follows. * Select the DMAC activation source with bits DTS2 to DTS0. * Set or clear the DTIE bit to enable or disable the CPU interrupt at the end of the transfer. * Clear the RPE bit to 0 to select I/O mode. * Select MAR increment or decrement with the DTID bit. * Select byte size or word size with the DTSZ bit. * Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable the transfer. Set DTCR 4 I/O mode Figure 7.3 I/O Mode Setup Procedure (Example) 7.4.3 Idle Mode Idle mode can be selected independently for each channel. One byte or word is transferred at each transfer request in idle mode. A designated number of these transfers are executed. One address is specified in the memory address register (MAR), the other in the I/O address register (IOAR). The direction of transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. The transfer is from the address specified in IOAR to the address specified in MAR if activated by an SCI channel 0 receive-data-full interrupt, and from the address specified in MAR to the address specified in IOAR otherwise. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 233 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Table 7.7 indicates the register functions in idle mode. Table 7.7 Register Functions in Idle Mode Function Activated by SCI 0 ReceiveData-Full Interrupt or by A/D Converter ConversionOther End Interrupt Activation 0 MAR 23 All 1s 15 ETCR 7 IOAR 0 0 Register 23 Initial Setting Operation Destination address register Source address register Transfer counter Source address register Destination address register Destination or Held fixed source address Source or destination address Number of transfers Held fixed Decremented once per transfer until H'0000 is reached and transfer ends Legend MAR: Memory address register IOAR: I/O address register ETCR: Execute transfer count register MAR and IOAR specify the source and destination addresses. MAR specifies a 24-bit source or destination address. IOAR specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. The upper 16 bits are all 1s. MAR and IOAR are not incremented or decremented. Figure 7.4 illustrates how idle mode operates. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 234 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller MAR Transfer IOAR 1 byte or word is transferred per request Figure 7.4 Operation in Idle Mode The transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in ETCR. The ETCR value is decremented by 1 at each transfer. When the ETCR value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared, the transfer ends, and a CPU interrupt is requested. The maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting ETCR to H'0000. Transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture A interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI channel 0, conversion-end interrupts from the A/D converter, and external request signals. For the detailed settings see section 7.3.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR). Figure 7.5 shows a sample setup procedure for idle mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 235 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Idle mode setup Set source and destination addresses 1 Set transfer count 2 1. Set the source and destination addresses in MAR and IOAR. The transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. 2. Set the transfer count in ETCR. 3. Read DTCR while the DTE bit is cleared to 0. 4. Set the DTCR bits as follows. * Select the DMAC activation source with bits DTS2 to DTS0. * Set the DTIE and RPE bits to 1 to select idle mode. * Select byte size or word size with the DTSZ bit. * Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable the transfer. Read DTCR 3 Set DTCR 4 Idle mode Figure 7.5 Idle Mode Setup Procedure (Example) 7.4.4 Repeat Mode Repeat mode is useful for cyclically transferring a bit pattern from a table to the programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) in synchronization, for example, with 16-bit timer compare match. Repeat mode can be selected for each channel independently. One byte or word is transferred per request in repeat mode, as in I/O mode. A designated number of these transfers are executed. One address is specified in the memory address register (MAR), the other in the I/O address register (IOAR). At the end of the designated number of transfers, MAR and ETCRH are restored to their original values and operation continues. The direction of transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. The transfer is from the address specified in IOAR to the address specified in MAR if activated by an SCI channel 0 receive-datafull interrupt, and from the address specified in MAR to the address specified in IOAR otherwise. Table 7.8 indicates the register functions in repeat mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 236 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Table 7.8 Register Functions in Repeat Mode Function Activated by SCI 0 ReceiveData-Full Interrupt or by A/D Converter ConversionOther End Interrupt Activation 0 MAR Register 23 Initial Setting Destination or source start address Operation Incremented or decremented at each transfer until ETCRH reaches H'0000, then restored to initial value Held fixed Destination address register Source address register 23 All 1s 7 IOAR 0 Source address register Transfer counter Destination address register Source or destination address Number of transfers 7 0 ETCRH 7 0 Decremented once per transfer until H'0000 is reached, then reloaded from ETCRL Held fixed ETCRL Initial transfer count Number of transfers Legend MAR: Memory address register IOAR: I/O address register ETCR: Execute transfer count register In repeat mode ETCRH is used as the transfer counter while ETCRL holds the initial transfer count. ETCRH is decremented by 1 at each transfer until it reaches H'00, then is reloaded from ETCRL. MAR is also restored to its initial value, which is calculated from the DTSZ and DTID bits in DTCR. Specifically, MAR is restored as follows: MAR MAR - (-1) DTID *2 DTSZ * ETCRL ETCRH and ETCRL should be initially set to the same value. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 237 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller In repeat mode transfers continue until the CPU clears the DTE bit to 0. After DTE is cleared to 0, if the CPU sets DTE to 1 again, transfers resume from the state at which DTE was cleared. No CPU interrupt is requested. As in I/O mode, MAR and IOAR specify the source and destination addresses. MAR specifies a 24-bit source or destination address. IOAR specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. The upper 16 bits are all 1s. IOAR is not incremented or decremented. Figure 7.6 illustrates how repeat mode operates. Address T Transfer IOAR 1 byte or word is transferred per request Address B Legend L = initial setting of MAR N = initial setting of ETCRH and ETCRL Address T = L Address B = L + (-1) DTID * (2 DTSZ * N - 1) Figure 7.6 Operation in Repeat Mode The transfer count is specified as an 8-bit value in ETCRH and ETCRL. The maximum transfer count is 255, obtained by setting both ETCRH and ETCRL to H'FF. Transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture A interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI channel 0, conversion-end interrupts from the A/D converter, and external request signals. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 238 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller For the detailed settings see section 7.2.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR). Figure 7.7 shows a sample setup procedure for repeat mode. Repeat mode Set source and destination addresses 1 Set transfer count 2 1. Set the source and destination addresses in MAR and IOAR. The transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. 2. Set the transfer count in both ETCRH and ETCRL. 3. Read DTCR while the DTE bit is cleared to 0. 4. Set the DTCR bits as follows. * Select the DMAC activation source with bits DTS2 to DTS0. * Clear the DTIE bit to 0 and set the RPE bit to 1 to select repeat mode. * Select MAR increment or decrement with the DTID bit. * Select byte size or word size with the DTSZ bit. * Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable the transfer. Read DTCR 3 Set DTCR 4 Repeat mode Figure 7.7 Repeat Mode Setup Procedure (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 239 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.5 Normal Mode In normal mode the A and B channels are combined. One byte or word is transferred per request. A designated number of these transfers are executed. Addresses are specified in MARA and MARB. Table 7.9 indicates the register functions in I/O mode. Table 7.9 Register 23 MARA 23 MARB 15 ETCRA Register Functions in Normal Mode Function 0 Source address register 0 Destination address register 0 Transfer counter Initial Setting Source start address Destination start address Number of transfers Operation Incremented or decremented once per transfer, or held fixed Incremented or decremented once per transfer, or held fixed Decremented once per transfer Legend MARA: Memory address register A MARB: Memory address register B ETCRA: Execute transfer count register A The source and destination addresses are both 24-bit addresses. MARA specifies the source address. MARB specifies the destination address. MARA and MARB can be independently incremented, decremented, or held fixed as data is transferred. The transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in ETCRA. The ETCRA value is decremented by 1 at each transfer. When the ETCRA value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and the transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested at this time. The maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting ETCRA to H'0000. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 240 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Figure 7.8 illustrates how normal mode operates. Address TA Transfer Address T B Address BA Address B B Legend L A = initial setting of MARA L B = initial setting of MARB N = initial setting of ETCRA TA = LA BA = L A + SAIDE * (-1) SAID * (2 DTSZ * N - 1) TB = LB BB = L B + DAIDE * (-1) DAID * (2 DTSZ * N - 1) Figure 7.8 Operation in Normal Mode Transfers can be requested (activated) by an external request or auto-request. An auto-requested transfer is activated by the register settings alone. The designated number of transfers are executed automatically. Either cycle-steal or burst mode can be selected. In cycle-steal mode the DMAC releases the bus temporarily after each transfer. In burst mode the DMAC keeps the bus until the transfers are completed, unless there is a bus request from a higher-priority bus master. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 241 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller For the detailed settings see section 7.3.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR). Figure 7.9 shows a sample setup procedure for normal mode. Normal mode Set initial source address 1 1. 2. 3. 4. Set initial destination address 2 5. Set transfer count 3 Set DTCRB (1) 4 Set DTCRA (1) 5 Read DTCRB 6 6. 7. 8. 9. Set the initial source address in MARA. Set the initial destination address in MARB. Set the transfer count in ETCRA. Set the DTCRB bits as follows. * Clear the DTME bit to 0. * Set the DAID and DAIDE bits to select whether MARB is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. * Select the DMAC activation source with bits DTS2B to DTS0B. Set the DTCRA bits as follows. * Clear the DTE bit to 0. * Select byte or word size with the DTSZ bit. * Set the SAID and SAIDE bits to select whether MARA is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. * Set or clear the DTIE bit to enable or disable the CPU interrupt at the end of the transfer. * Clear the DTS0A bit to 0 and set the DTS2A and DTS1A bits to 1 to select normal mode. Read DTCRB with DTME cleared to 0. Set the DTME bit to 1 in DTCRB. Read DTCRA with DTE cleared to 0. Set the DTE bit to 1 in DTCRA to enable the transfer. Set DTCRB (2) 7 Read DTCRA 8 Set DTCRA (2) 9 Normal mode Note: Carry out settings 1 to 9 with the DEND interrupt masked in the CPU. If an NMI interrupt occurs during the setup procedure, it may clear the DTME bit to 0, in which case the transfer will not start. Figure 7.9 Normal Mode Setup Procedure (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 242 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.6 Block Transfer Mode In block transfer mode the A and B channels are combined. One block of a specified size is transferred per request. A designated number of block transfers are executed. Addresses are specified in MARA and MARB. The block area address can be either held fixed or cycled. Table 7.10 indicates the register functions in block transfer mode. Table 7.10 Register Functions in Block Transfer Mode Register 23 MARA 23 MARB 7 0 0 0 Function Source address register Destination address register Block size counter Initial Setting Source start address Destination start address Block size Operation Incremented or decremented once per transfer, or held fixed Incremented or decremented once per transfer, or held fixed Decremented once per transfer until H'00 is reached, then reloaded from ETCRL Held fixed ETCRAH 7 0 Initial block size Block size ETCRAL 15 ETCRB Legend MARA: MARB: ETCRA: ETCRB: 0 Block transfer counter Number of block transfers Decremented once per block transfer until H'0000 is reached and the transfer ends Memory address register A Memory address register B Execute transfer count register A Execute transfer count register B The source and destination addresses are both 24-bit addresses. MARA specifies the source address. MARB specifies the destination address. MARA and MARB can be independently incremented, decremented, or held fixed as data is transferred. One of these registers operates as a block area register: even if it is incremented or decremented, it is restored to its initial value at the end of each block transfer. The TMS bit in DTCRB selects whether the block area is the source or destination. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 243 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller If M (1 to 255) is the size of the block transferred at each request and N (1 to 65,536) is the number of blocks to be transferred, then ETCRAH and ETCRAL should initially be set to M and ETCRB should initially be set to N. Figure 7.10 illustrates how block transfer mode operates. In this figure, bit TMS is cleared to 0, meaning the block area is the destination. TA Transfer Block 1 Block area BA Address T B Address B B Block 2 M bytes or words are transferred per request Block N Legend L A = initial setting of MARA L B = initial setting of MARB M = initial setting of ETCRAH and ETCRAL N = initial setting of ETCRB T A = LA B A = L A + SAIDE * (-1)SAID * (2 DTSZ * M - 1) T B = LB B B = L B + DAIDE * (-1)DAID * (2DTSZ * M - 1) Figure 7.10 Operation in Block Transfer Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 244 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller When activated by a transfer request, the DMAC executes a burst transfer. During the transfer MARA and MARB are updated according to the DTCR settings, and ETCRAH is decremented. When ETCRAH reaches H'00, it is reloaded from ETCRAL to restore the initial value. The memory address register of the block area is also restored to its initial value, and ETCRB is decremented. If ETCRB is not H'0000, the DMAC then waits for the next transfer request. ETCRAH and ETCRAL should be initially set to the same value. The above operation is repeated until ETCRB reaches H'0000, at which point the DTE bit is cleared to 0 and the transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested at this time. Figure 7.11 shows examples of a block transfer with byte data size when the block area is the destination. In (a) the block area address is cycled. In (b) the block area address is held fixed. Transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture A interrupts from ITU channels 0 to 2, by an A/D converter conversion-end interrupt, and by external request signals. For the detailed settings see section 7.3.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 245 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Start (DTE = DTME = 1) Start (DTE = DTME = 1) Transfer requested? Yes Get bus No Transfer requested? Yes Get bus No Read from MARA address MARA = MARA + 1 Write to MARB address MARB = MARB + 1 ETCRAH = ETCRAH E1 No ETCRAH = H'00 Yes Release bus ETCRAH = ETCRAL MARB = MARB EETCRAL ETCRB = ETCRB E1 No Read from MARA address MARA = MARA + 1 Write to MARB address ETCRAH = ETCRAH E1 No ETCRAH = H'00 Yes Release bus ETCRAH = ETCRAL ETCRB = ETCRB E1 No ETCRB = H'0000 Yes Clear DTE to 0 and end transfer ETCRB = H'0000 Yes Clear DTE to 0 and end transfer a. DTSZ = TMS = 0 SAID = DAID = 0 SAIDE = DAIDE = 1 b. DTSZ = TMS = 0 SAID = 0 SAIDE = 1 DAIDE = 0 Figure 7.11 Block Transfer Mode Flowcharts (Examples) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 246 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Figure 7.12 shows a sample setup procedure for block transfer mode. Block transfer mode Set source address 1 Set destination address 2 Set block transfer count 3 Set block size 4 Set DTCRB (1) 5 Set DTCRA (1) 6 Read DTCRB 7 Set the source address in MARA. Set the destination address in MARB. Set the block transfer count in ETCRB. Set the block size (number of bytes or words) in both ETCRAH and ETCRAL. 5. Set the DTCRB bits as follows. * Clear the DTME bit to 0. * Set the DAID and DAIDE bits to select whether MARB is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. * Set or clear the TMS bit to make the block area the source or destination. * Select the DMAC activation source with bits DTS2B to DTS0B. 6. Set the DTCRA bits as follows. * Clear the DTE to 0. * Select byte size or word size with the DTSZ bit. * Set the SAID and SAIDE bits to select whether MARA is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. * Set or clear the DTIE bit to enable or disable the CPU interrupt at the end of the transfer. * Set bits DTS2A to DTS0A all to 1 to select block transfer mode. 7. Read DTCRB with DTME cleared to 0. 8. Set the DTME bit to 1 in DTCRB. 9. Read DTCRA with DTE cleared to 0. 10. Set the DTE bit to 1 in DTCRA to enable the transfer. 1. 2. 3. 4. Set DTCRB (2) 8 Read DTCRA 9 Set DTCRA (2) 10 Block transfer mode Note: Carry out settings 1 to 10 with the DEND interrupt masked in the CPU. If an NMI interrupt occurs during the setup procedure, it may clear the DTME bit to 0, in which case the transfer will not start. Figure 7.12 Block Transfer Mode Setup Procedure (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 247 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.7 DMAC Activation The DMAC can be activated by an internal interrupt, external request, or auto-request. The available activation sources differ depending on the transfer mode and channel as indicated in table 7.11. Table 7.11 DMAC Activation Sources Short Address Mode Channels Activation Source Internal interrupts IMIA0 IMIA1 IMIA2 ADI TXI0 RXI0 External requests Falling edge of DREQ Low input at DREQ Auto-request 0A and 1A ! ! ! ! ! ! x x x Channels 0B and 1B ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! x x x x x x x ! ! ! Full Address Mode Normal Block ! ! ! ! x x ! x x Activation by Internal Interrupts: When an interrupt request is selected as a DMAC activation source and the DTE bit is set to 1, that interrupt request is not sent to the CPU. It is not possible for an interrupt request to activate the DMAC and simultaneously generate a CPU interrupt. When the DMAC is activated by an interrupt request, the interrupt request flag is cleared automatically. If the same interrupt is selected to activate two or more channels, the interrupt request flag is cleared when the highest-priority channel is activated, but the transfer request is held pending on the other channels in the DMAC, which are activated in their priority order. Activation by External Request: If an external request (DREQ pin) is selected as an activation source, the DREQ pin becomes an input pin and the corresponding TEND pin becomes an output pin, regardless of the port data direction register (DDR) settings. The DREQ input can be levelsensitive or edge-sensitive. In short address mode and normal mode, an external request operates as follows. If edge sensing is selected, one byte or word is transferred each time a high-to-low transition of the DREQ input is detected. If the next edge is input before the transfer is completed, the next transfer may not be Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 248 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller executed. If level sensing is selected, the transfer continues while DREQ is low, until the transfer is completed. The bus is released temporarily after each byte or word has been transferred, however. If the DREQ input goes high during a transfer, the transfer is suspended after the current byte or word has been transferred. When DREQ goes low, the request is held internally until one byte or word has been transferred. The TEND signal goes low during the last write cycle. In block transfer mode, an external request operates as follows. Only edge-sensitive transfer requests are possible in block transfer mode. Each time a high-to-low transition of the DREQ input is detected, a block of the specified size is transferred. The TEND signal goes low during the last write cycle in each block. Activation by Auto-Request: The transfer starts as soon as enabled by register setup, and continues until completed. Cycle-steal mode or burst mode can be selected. In cycle-steal mode the DMAC releases the bus temporarily after transferring each byte or word. Normally, DMAC cycles alternate with CPU cycles. In burst mode the DMAC keeps the bus until the transfer is completed, unless there is a higherpriority bus request. If there is a higher-priority bus request, the bus is released after the current byte or word has been transferred. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 249 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.8 DMAC Bus Cycle Figure 7.13 shows an example of the timing of the basic DMAC bus cycle. This example shows a word-size transfer from a 16-bit two-state access area to an 8-bit three-state access area. When the DMAC gets the bus from the CPU, after one dead cycle (Td), it reads from the source address and writes to the destination address. During these read and write operations the bus is not released even if there is another bus request. DMAC cycles comply with bus controller settings in the same way as CPU cycles. CPU cycle T1 Source address Address bus RD Destination address T2 T1 T2 Td T1 DMAC cycle (1 word transfer) T2 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 CPU cycle T2 T1 T2 HWR LWR Figure 7.13 DMA Transfer Bus Timing (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 250 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Figure 7.14 shows the timing when the DMAC is activated by low input at a DREQ pin. This example shows a word-size transfer from a 16-bit two-state access area to another 16-bit two-state access area. The DMAC continues the transfer while the DREQ pin is held low. DMAC cycle (last transfer cycle) Td T1 T2 T1 T2 CPU cycle T1 T2 T3 Td DMAC cycle T1 T2 T1 T2 CPU cycle T1 T2 CPU cycle T1 T2 DREQ Address bus RD Source Destination address address Source Destination address address HWR , LWR TEND Figure 7.14 Bus Timing of DMA Transfer Requested by Low DREQ Input Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 251 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Figure 7.15 shows an auto-requested burst-mode transfer. This example shows a transfer of three words from a 16-bit two-state access area to another 16-bit two-state access area. CPU cycle T1 Source address Address bus RD Destination address T2 Td T1 T2 T1 T2 DMAC cycle T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 CPU cycle T1 T2 HWR , LWR Figure 7.15 Burst DMA Bus Timing When the DMAC is activated from a DREQ pin there is a minimum interval of four states from when the transfer is requested until the DMAC starts operating. The DREQ pin is not sampled during the time between the transfer request and the start of the transfer. In short address mode and normal mode, the pin is next sampled at the end of the read cycle. In block transfer mode, the pin is next sampled at the end of one block transfer. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 252 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Figure 7.16 shows the timing when the DMAC is activated by the falling edge of DREQ in normal mode. CPU cycle T2 T1 T2 CPU cycle T2 DREQ Address bus RD HWR , LWR Minimum 4 states T1 T2 T1 T2 Td DMAC cycle T1 T2 T1 DMAC cycle Td T1 T2 Next sampling point Figure 7.16 Timing of DMAC Activation by Falling Edge of DREQ in Normal Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 253 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Figure 7.17 shows the timing when the DMAC is activated by level-sensitive low DREQ input in normal mode. CPU cycle T2 DREQ Address bus RD HWR , LWR Minimum 4 states Next sampling point T1 T2 T1 T2 Td DMAC cycle T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 CPU cycle T2 T1 T2 T1 Figure 7.17 Timing of DMAC Activation by Low DREQ Level in Normal Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 254 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Figure 7.18 shows the timing when the DMAC is activated by the falling edge of DREQ in block transfer mode. End of 1 block transfer DMAC cycle T1 DREQ Address bus RD HWR , LWR T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 CPU cycle T2 T1 T2 DMAC cycle Td T1 T2 TEND Next sampling Minimum 4 states Figure 7.18 Timing of DMAC Activation by Falling Edge of DREQ in Block Transfer Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 255 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.9 Multiple-Channel Operation The DMAC channel priority order is: channel 0 > channel 1 and channel A > channel B. Table 7.12 shows the complete priority order. Table 7.12 Channel Priority Order Short Address Mode Channel 0A Channel 0B Channel 1A Channel 1B Channel 1 Low Full Address Mode Channel 0 Priority High If transfers are requested on two or more channels simultaneously, or if a transfer on one channel is requested during a transfer on another channel, the DMAC operates as follows. * When a transfer is requested, the DMAC requests the bus right. When it gets the bus right, it starts a transfer on the highest-priority channel at that time. * Once a transfer starts on one channel, requests to other channels are held pending until that channel releases the bus. * After each transfer in short address mode, and each externally-requested or cycle-steal transfer in normal mode, the DMAC releases the bus and returns to step 1. After releasing the bus, if there is a transfer request for another channel, the DMAC requests the bus again. * After completion of a burst-mode transfer, or after transfer of one block in block transfer mode, the DMAC releases the bus and returns to step 1. If there is a transfer request for a higher-priority channel or a bus request from a higher-priority bus master, however, the DMAC releases the bus after completing the transfer of the current byte or word. After releasing the bus, if there is a transfer request for another channel, the DMAC requests the bus again. Figure 7.19 shows the timing when channel 0A is set up for I/O mode and channel 1 for burst mode, and a transfer request for channel 0A is received while channel 1 is active. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 256 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller DMAC cycle (channel 1) T1 Address bus RD HWR , LWR T2 T1 CPU cycle T2 Td DMAC cycle (channel 0A) T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 CPU cycle T2 Td DMAC cycle (channel 1) T1 T2 T1 T2 Figure 7.19 Timing of Multiple-Channel Operations 7.4.10 External Bus Requests, DRAM Interface, and DMAC During a DMAC transfer, if the bus right is requested by an external bus request signal (BREQ) or by the DRAM interface (refresh cycle), the DMAC releases the bus after completing the transfer of the current byte or word. If there is a transfer request at this point, the DMAC requests the bus right again. Figure 7.20 shows an example of the timing of insertion of a refresh cycle during a burst transfer on channel 0. Refresh cycle T2 T1 T2 Td DMAC cycle (channel 0) T1 Address bus RD HWR , LWR T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 DMAC cycle (channel 0) T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 Figure 7.20 Bus Timing of DRAM Interface, and DMAC Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 257 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.11 NMI Interrupts and DMAC NMI interrupts do not affect DMAC operations in short address mode. If an NMI interrupt occurs during a transfer in full address mode, the DMAC suspends operations. In full address mode, a channel is enabled when its DTE and DTME bits are both set to 1. NMI input clears the DTME bit to 0. After transferring the current byte or word, the DMAC releases the bus to the CPU. In normal mode, the suspended transfer resumes when the CPU sets the DTME bit to 1 again. Check that the DTE bit is set to 1 and the DTME bit is cleared to 0 before setting the DTME bit to 1. Figure 7.21 shows the procedure for resuming a DMAC transfer in normal mode on channel 0 after the transfer was halted by NMI input. Resuming DMAC transfer in normal mode 1. Check that DTE = 1 and DTME = 0. 2. Read DTCRB while DTME = 0, then write 1 in the DTME bit. 1 DTE = 1 DTME = 0 Yes Set DTME to 1 No 2 DMA transfer continues End Figure 7.21 Procedure for Resuming a DMAC Transfer Halted by NMI (Example) For information about NMI interrupts in block transfer mode, see section 7.6.6, NMI Interrupts and Block Transfer Mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 258 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.12 Aborting a DMAC Transfer When the DTE bit in an active channel is cleared to 0, the DMAC halts after transferring the current byte or word. The DMAC starts again when the DTE bit is set to 1. In full address mode, the DTME bit can be used for the same purpose. Figure 7.22 shows the procedure for aborting a DMAC transfer by software. DMAC transfer abort 1. Clear the DTE bit to 0 in DTCR. To avoid generating an interrupt when aborting a DMA transfer, clear the DTIE bit to 0 simultaneously. 1 Set DTCR DMAC transfer aborted Figure 7.22 Procedure for Aborting a DMAC Transfer Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 259 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.13 Exiting Full Address Mode Figure 7.23 shows the procedure for exiting full address mode and initializing the pair of channels. To set the channels up in another mode after exiting full address mode, follow the setup procedure for the relevant mode. Exiting full address mode Halt the channel 1 1. Clear the DTE bit to 0 in DTCRA, or wait for the transfer to end and the DTE bit to be cleared to 0. 2. Clear all DTCRB bits to 0. 3. Clear all DTCRA bits to 0. Initialize DTCRB 2 Initialize DTCRA 3 Initialized and halted Figure 7.23 Procedure for Exiting Full Address Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 260 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.4.14 DMAC States in Reset State, Standby Modes, and Sleep Mode When the chip is reset or enters software standby mode, the DMAC is initialized and halts. DMAC operations continue in sleep mode. Figure 7.24 shows the timing of a cycle-steal transfer in sleep mode. Sleep mode CPU cycle T2 Td DMAC cycle T1 T2 T1 T2 Td DMAC cycle T1 T2 T1 T2 Td Address bus RD HWR , LWR Figure 7.24 Timing of Cycle-Steal Transfer in Sleep Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 261 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.5 Interrupts The DMAC generates only DMA-end interrupts. Table 7.13 lists the interrupts and their priority. Table 7.13 DMAC Interrupts Description Interrupt DEND0A DEND0B DEND1A DEND1B Short Address Mode End of transfer on channel 0A End of transfer on channel 0B End of transfer on channel 1A End of transfer on channel 1B Full Address Mode End of transfer on channel 0 End of transfer on channel 1 Low Interrupt Priority High Each interrupt is enabled or disabled by the DTIE bit in the corresponding data transfer control register (DTCR). Separate interrupt signals are sent to the interrupt controller. The interrupt priority order among channels is channel 0 > channel 1 and channel A > channel B. Figure 7.25 shows the DMA-end interrupt logic. An interrupt is requested whenever DTE = 0 and DTIE = 1. DTE DMA-end interrupt DTIE Figure 7.25 DMA-End Interrupt Logic The DMA-end interrupt for the B channels (DENDB) is unavailable in full address mode. The DTME bit does not affect interrupt operations. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 262 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.6 7.6.1 Usage Notes Note on Word Data Transfer Word data cannot be accessed starting at an odd address. When word-size transfer is selected, set even values in the memory and I/O address registers (MAR and IOAR). 7.6.2 DMAC Self-Access The DMAC itself cannot be accessed during a DMAC cycle. DMAC registers cannot be specified as source or destination addresses. 7.6.3 Longword Access to Memory Address Registers A memory address register can be accessed as longword data at the MARR address. Example MOV.L MOV.L #LBL, ER0 ER0, @MARR Four byte accesses are performed. Note that the CPU may release the bus between the second byte (MARE) and third byte (MARH). Memory address registers should be written and read only when the DMAC is halted. 7.6.4 Note on Full Address Mode Setup Full address mode is controlled by two registers: DTCRA and DTCRB. Care must be taken to prevent the B channel from operating in short address mode during the register setup. The enable bits (DTE and DTME) should not be set to 1 until the end of the setup procedure. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 263 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.6.5 Note on Activating DMAC by Internal Interrupts When using an internal interrupt to activate the DMAC, make sure that the interrupt selected as the activating source does not occur during the interval after it has been selected but before the DMAC has been enabled. The on-chip supporting module that will generate the interrupt should not be activated until the DMAC has been enabled. If the DMAC must be enabled while the onchip supporting module is active, follow the procedure in figure 7.26. Enabling of DMAC Yes Interrupt handling by CPU Selected interrupt requested? No 1 1. While the DTE bit is cleared to 0, interrupt requests are sent to the CPU. 2. Clear the interrupt enable bit to 0 in the interrupt-generating on-chip supporting module. 3. Enable the DMAC. 4. Enable the DMAC-activating interrupt. Clear selected interruptOs enable bit to 0 2 Enable DMAC 3 Set selected interruptOs enable bit to 1 4 DMAC operates Figure 7.26 Procedure for Enabling DMAC while On-Chip Supporting Module is Operating (Example) If the DTE bit is set to 1 but the DTME bit is cleared to 0, the DMAC is halted and the selected activating source cannot generate a CPU interrupt. If the DMAC is halted by an NMI interrupt, for example, the selected activating source cannot generate CPU interrupts. To terminate DMAC operations in this state, clear the DTE bit to 0 to allow CPU interrupts to be requested. To continue DMAC operations, carry out steps 2 and 4 in figure 7.26 before and after setting the DTME bit to 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 264 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller When 16-bit timer interrupt activates the DMAC, make sure the next interrupt does not occur before the DMA transfer ends. If one 16-bit timer interrupt activates two or more channels, make sure the next interrupt does not occur before the DMA transfers end on all the activated channels. If the next interrupt occurs before a transfer ends, the channel or channels for which that interrupt was selected may fail to accept further activation requests. 7.6.6 NMI Interrupts and Block Transfer Mode If an NMI interrupt occurs in block transfer mode, the DMAC operates as follows. * When the NMI interrupt occurs, the DMAC finishes transferring the current byte or word, then clears the DTME bit to 0 and halts. The halt may occur in the middle of a block. It is possible to find whether a transfer was halted in the middle of a block by checking the block size counter. If the block size counter does not have its initial value, the transfer was halted in the middle of a block. * If the transfer is halted in the middle of a block, the activating interrupt flag is cleared to 0. The activation request is not held pending. * While the DTE bit is set to 1 and the DTME bit is cleared to 0, the DMAC is halted and does not accept activating interrupt requests. If an activating interrupt occurs in this state, the DMAC does not operate and does not hold the transfer request pending internally. Neither is a CPU interrupt requested. For this reason, before setting the DTME bit to 1, first clear the enable bit of the activating interrupt to 0. Then, after setting the DTME bit to 1, set the interrupt enable bit to 1 again. See section 7.6.5, Note on Activating DMAC by Internal Interrupts. * When the DTME bit is set to 1, the DMAC waits for the next transfer request. If it was halted in the middle of a block transfer, the rest of the block is transferred when the next transfer request occurs. Otherwise, the next block is transferred when the next transfer request occurs. 7.6.7 Memory and I/O Address Register Values Table 7.14 indicates the address ranges that can be specified in the memory and I/O address registers (MAR and IOAR). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 265 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Table 7.14 Address Ranges Specifiable in MAR and IOAR 1-Mbyte Mode MAR IOAR H'00000 to H'FFFFF (0 to 1048575) H'FFF00 to H'FFFFF (1048320 to 1048575) 16-Mbyte Mode H'000000 to H'FFFFFF (0 to 16777215) H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF (16776960 to 16777215) MAR bits 23 to 20 are ignored in 1-Mbyte mode. 7.6.8 Bus Cycle when Transfer is Aborted When a transfer is aborted by clearing the DTE bit or suspended by an NMI that clears the DTME bit, if this halts a channel for which the DMAC has a transfer request pending internally, a dead cycle may occur. This dead cycle does not update the halted channel's address register or counter value. Figure 7.27 shows an example in which an auto-requested transfer in cycle-steal mode on channel 0 is aborted by clearing the DTE bit in channel 0. DMAC cycle Td Td CPU cycle T1 T2 Td DMAC cycle T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 CPU cycle T2 T3 CPU cycle T1 T2 Address bus RD HWR, LWR DTE bit is cleared Figure 7.27 Bus Timing at Abort of DMA Transfer in Cycle-Steal Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 266 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller 7.6.9 Transfer Requests by A/D Converter When the A/D converter is set to scan mode and conversion is performed on more than one channel, the A/D converter generates a transfer request when all conversions are completed. The converted data is stored in the appropriate ADDR registers. Block transfer mode and full address mode should therefore be used to transfer all the conversion results at one time. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 267 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 7 DMA Controller Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 268 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Section 8 I/O Ports 8.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group has 11 input/output ports (ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, and B). Table 8.1 summarizes the port functions. The pins in each port are multiplexed as shown in table 8.1. Each port has a data direction register (DDR) for selecting input or output, and a data register (DR) for storing output data. In addition to these registers, ports 2, 4, and 5 have an input pull-up control register (PCR) for switching input pull-up transistors on and off. Ports 1 to 6 and port 8 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. Ports 9, A, and B can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. Ports 1 to 6 and 8 to B can drive a darlington pair. Ports 1, 2, and 5 can drive LEDs (with 10-mA current sink). Pins P82 to P80, PA7 to PA0 have Schmitt-trigger input circuits. For block diagrams of the ports see appendix C, I/O Port Block Diagrams. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 269 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.1 Port Functions (1) Expanded Modes Single-Chip Modes Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Address output (A7 to A0) and generic input DDR = 0: generic input DDR = 1: address output Address output (A15 to A8) and generic input DDR = 0: generic input DDR = 1: address output Mode 6 Mode 7 Port Description Pins P17 to P10/ A7 to A0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Port 1 * 8-bit I/O port * Can drive LEDs Address output pins (A7 to A0) Generic input/output Port 2 * 8-bit I/O port * Built-in input pull-up transistors * Can drive LEDs Port 3 * 8-bit I/O port P27 to P20/ A15 to A8 Address output pins (A15 to A8) Generic input/output P37 to P30/ D15 to D8 P47 to P40/ D7 to D0 Data input/output (D15 to D8) Generic input/output Port 4 * 8-bit I/O port * Built-in input pull-up transistors Port 5 * 4-bit I/O port * Built-in input pull-up transistors * Can drive LEDs Port 6 * 8-bit I/O port Data input/output (D7 to D0) and 8-bit generic input/output 8-bit bus mode: generic input/output 16-bit bus mode: data input/output Generic input/output P53 to P50/ A19 to A16 Address output (A19 to A16) Address output (A19 to A16) and 4-bit generic input DDR = 0: generic input DDR = 1: address output Generic input/output P67/ P66/LWR P65/HWR P64/RD P63/AS P62/BACK P61/BREQ P60/WAIT Clock output () and generic input Bus control signal output (LWR, HWR, RD, AS) Generic input/output Bus control signal input/output (BACK, BREQ, WAIT) and 3-bit generic input/output Port 7 * 8-bit I/O port P77/AN7/DA1 P76/AN6/DA0 P75 to P70/ AN5 to AN0 Analog input (AN7, AN6) to A/D converter, analog output (DA1, DA0) from D/A converter, and generic input Analog input (AN5 to AN0) to A/D converter, and generic input DDR = 0: generic input DDR = 1 (reset value): CS0 output DDR = 0 (reset value): generic input DDR = 1: CS0 output Generic input/output Port 8 * 5-bit I/O port * P82 to P80 have Schmitt inputs P84/CS0 P83/IRQ3/ CS1/ADTRG IRQ3 input, CS1 output, external trigger input (ADTRG) to A/D converter, and generic input DDR = 0 (after reset): generic input DDR = 1: CS1 output IRQ3 input, external trigger input (ADTRG) to A/D converter, and generic input/output IRQ2 and IRQ1 input and generic input/output IRQ0 input and generic input/output P82/IRQ2/CS2 IRQ2 and IRQ1 input, CS2 and CS3 output, and generic input* P81/IRQ1/CS3 DDR = 0 (reset value): generic input DDR = 1: CS2 and CS3 output P80/IRQ0 /RFSH IRQ0 input, RFSH output, and generic input/output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 270 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Expanded Modes Port Description Pins P95/IRQ5 /SCK1 P94/IRQ4 /SCK0 P93/RxD1 P92/RxD0 P91/TxD1 P90/TxD0 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2/A20 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Single-Chip Modes Mode 6 Mode 7 Port 9 * 6-bit I/O port Input and output (SCK1, SCK0, RxD1, RxD0, TxD1, TxD0) for serial communication interfaces 1 and 0 (SCI1/0), IRQ5 and IRQ4 input, and 6-bit generic input/output Port A * 8-bit I/O port * Schmitt inputs Output (TP7) from programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), input or output (TIOCB2) for 16-bit timer and generic input/output TPC output (TP6 to TP4), 16-bit timer input and output (TIOCA2, TIOCB1, TIOCA1) , and generic input/output Address output (A20) Address output (A20), TPC output (TP7), input or output (TIOCB2) for 16-bit timer, and generic input/output TPC output (TP7), 16-bit timer input or output (TIOCB2), and generic input/output PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/A21 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/A22 PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/A23 PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC PA1/TP1/ TCLKB /TEND1 PA0/TP0/ TCLKA /TEND0 Port B * 8-bit I/O port PB7/TP15/ RXD2 PB6/TP14/ TXD2 PB5/TP13/ SCK2/LCAS PB4/TP12/ UCAS PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/ DREQ1/CS4 PB2/TP10/ TMO2/CS5 PB1/TP9/ TMIO1/ DREQ0/CS6 PB0/TP8/ TMO0/CS7 TPC output (TP6 to TP4), 16-bit timer input and output (TIOCA2, TIOCB1, TIOCA1), address output (A23 to A21), and generic input/output TPC output (TP6 to TP4), 16-bit timer input and output (TIOCA2, TIOCB1, TIOCA1) and generic input/output TPC output (TP3 to TP0), 16-bit timer input and output (TIOCB0, TIOCA0, TCLKD, TCLKC, TCLKB, TCLKA), 8-bit timer input (TCLKD, TCLKC, TCLKB, TCLKA), output (TEND1, TEND0) from DMA controller (DMAC), and generic input/output TPC output (TP15 to TP12), SCI2 input and output (SCK2 , RxD2, TxD2), DRAM interface output (LCAS, UCAS), and generic input/output TPC output (TP15 to TP12), SCI2 input and output (SCK2, RxD2, TxD2), and generic input/output TPC output (TP11 to TP8), 8-bit timer input and output (TMIO3, TMO2, TMIO1, TMO0), DMAC input (DREQ1, DREQ0), CS7 to CS4 output, and generic input/output TPC output (TP11 to TP8), 8-bit timer input and output (TMIO3, TMO2, TMIO1, TMO0), DMAC input (DREQ1, DREQ0), and generic input/output Note: * P81 can be used as an output port by making a setting in DRCRA. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 271 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.2 8.2.1 Port 1 Overview Port 1 is an 8-bit input/output port also used for address output, with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.1. The pin functions differ between the expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled, expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled, and single-chip mode. In modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled), they are address bus output pins (A7 to A0). In modes 5 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled), settings in the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR) can designate pins for address bus output (A7 to A0) or generic input. In mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode), port 1 is a generic input/output port. When DRAM is connected to area 2, 3, 4, 5, A7 to A0 output row and column addresses in read and write cycles. For details see section 6.5, DRAM Interface. Pins in port 1 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive an LED or a darlington transistor pair. Port 1 pins P17 /A 7 P16 /A 6 P15 /A 5 Port 1 P14 /A 4 P13 /A 3 P12 /A 2 P11 /A 1 P10 /A 0 Modes 1 to 4 A 7 (output) A 6 (output) A 5 (output) A 4 (output) A 3 (output) A 2 (output) A 1 (output) A 0 (output) Modes 5 P17 (input)/A 7 (output) P16 (input)/A 6 (output) P15 (input)/A 5 (output) P14 (input)/A 4 (output) P13 (input)/A 3 (output) P12 (input)/A 2 (output) P11 (input)/A 1 (output) P10 (input)/A 0 (output) Mode 6 and 7 P17 (input/output) P16 (input/output) P15 (input/output) P14 (input/output) P13 (input/output) P12 (input/output) P11 (input/output) P10 (input/output) Figure 8.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 272 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.2.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.2 summarizes the registers of port 1. Table 8.2 Port 1 Registers Initial Value Address* H'EE000 H'FFFD0 Name Abbreviation R/W W R/W Modes 1 to 4 H'FF H'00 Modes 5 to 7 H'00 H'00 Port 1 data direction register P1DDR Port 1 data register P1DR Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR): P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 1. Bit Modes Initial value 1 to 4 Read/Write Modes Initial value 5 to 7 Read/Write 7 1 0 W 6 1 0 W 5 1 0 W 4 1 0 W 3 1 0 W 2 1 0 W 1 1 0 W 0 1 0 W P1 7 DDR P1 6 DDR P1 5 DDR P1 4 DDR P1 3 DDR P1 2 DDR P1 1 DDR P1 0 DDR Port 1 data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 1 pins Modes 1 to 4 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Disabled): P1DDR values are fixed at 1. Port 1 functions as an address bus. Modes 5 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Enabled): After a reset, port 1 functions as an input port.A pin in port 1 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. Mode 6 and 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 1 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 1 becomes an output port if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 273 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports In modes 1 to 4, P1DDR bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. In modes 5 to 7, P1DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P1DDR is initialized to H'FF in modes 1 to 4, and to H'00 in modes 5 to 7, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 1 is functioning as an input/output port and a P1DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Port 1 Data Register (P1DR): P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores port 1 output data. When port 1 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. When this register is read, the pin logic level is read for bits for which the P1DDR setting is 0, and the P1DR value is read for bits for which the P1DDR setting is 1. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P1 7 0 R/W 6 P1 6 0 R/W 5 P1 5 0 R/W 4 P1 4 0 R/W 3 P1 3 0 R/W 2 P1 2 0 R/W 1 P1 1 0 R/W 0 P1 0 0 R/W Port 1 data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port 1 pins P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 274 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.3 8.3.1 Port 2 Overview Port 2 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.2. The pin functions differ according to the operating mode. In modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled), port 2 consists of address bus output pins (A15 to A8). In modes 5 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled), settings in the port 2 data direction register (P2DDR) can designate pins for address bus output (A15 to A8) or generic input. In mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode), port 2 is a generic input/output port. When DRAM is connected to areas 2 to 5, A12 to A8 output row and column addresses in read and write cycles. For details see section 6.5, DRAM Interface. Port 2 has software-programmable built-in pull-up transistors. Pins in port 2 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive an LED or a darlington transistor pair. Port 2 pins P27 /A 15 P26 /A 14 P25 /A 13 Port 2 P24 /A 12 P23 /A 11 P22 /A 10 P21 /A 9 P20 /A 8 Modes 1 to 4 A15 (output) A14 (output) A13 (output) A12 (output) A11 (output) A10 (output) A9 (output) A8 (output) Modes 5 P27 (input)/A15 (output) P26 (input)/A14 (output) P25 (input)/A13 (output) P24 (input)/A12 (output) P23 (input)/A11 (output) P22 (input)/A10 (output) P21 (input)/A9 (output) P20 (input)/A8 (output) Mode 6 and 7 P27 (input/output) P26 (input/output) P25 (input/output) P24 (input/output) P23 (input/output) P22 (input/output) P21 (input/output) P20 (input/output) Figure 8.2 Port 2 Pin Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 275 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.3.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.3 summarizes the registers of port 2. Table 8.3 Port 2 Registers Initial Value Address* H'EE001 H'FFFD1 H'EE03C Name Port 2 data direction register Port 2 data register Port 2 input pull-up MOS control register Abbreviation R/W Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7 P2DDR P2DR P2PCR W H'FF H'00 H'00 H'00 R/W H'00 R/W H'00 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR): P2DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 2. Bit Modes Initial value 1 to 4 Read/Write Modes Initial value 5 to 7 Read/Write 7 1 0 W 6 1 0 W 5 1 0 W 4 1 0 W 3 1 0 W 2 1 0 W 1 1 0 W 0 1 0 W P2 7 DDR P2 6 DDR P2 5 DDR P2 4 DDR P2 3 DDR P2 2 DDR P2 1 DDR P2 0 DDR Port 2 data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 2 pins Modes 1 to 4 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Disabled): P2DDR values are fixed at 1. Port 2 functions as an address bus. Modes 5 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Enabled): Following a reset, port 2 is an input port. A pin in port 2 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set to 1, and a generic input port if this bit is cleared to 0. Mode 6 and 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 2 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 2 becomes an output port if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 276 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports In modes 1 to 4, P2DDR bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. In modes 5 to 7, P2DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P2DDR is initialized to H'FF in modes 1 to 4, and to H'00 in modes 5 to 7, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 2 is functioning as an input/output port and a P2DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Port 2 Data Register (P2DR): P2DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for Port 2. When port 2 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. When a bit in P2DDR is set to 1, if port 2 is read the value of the corresponding P2DR bit is returned. When a bit in P2DDR is cleared to 0, if port 2 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P2 7 0 R/W 6 P2 6 0 R/W 5 P2 5 0 R/W 4 P2 4 0 R/W 3 P2 3 0 R/W 2 P2 2 0 R/W 1 P2 1 0 R/W 0 P2 0 0 R/W Port 2 data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port 2 pins P2DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Port 2 Input Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P2PCR): P2PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up transistors in port 2. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W P2 7 PCR P2 6 PCR P2 5 PCR P2 4 PCR P2 3 PCR P2 2 PCR P2 1 PCR P2 0 PCR Port 2 input pull-up MOS control 7 to 0 These bits control input pull-up transistors built into port 2 In modes 5 to 7, when a P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding bit in P2PCR is set to 1, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 277 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports P2PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Table 8.4 Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Input Pull-Up Transistor States (Port 2) Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode Off Other Modes Off Reset Off Off Off On/off On/off Legend Off: The input pull-up transistor is always off. On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P2PCR = 1 and P2DDR = 0. Otherwise, it is off. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 278 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.4 8.4.1 Port 3 Overview Port 3 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.3. Port 3 is a data bus in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes) and a generic input/output port in mode 6, 7 (single-chip mode). Pins in port 3 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port 3 pins P37 /D15 P36 /D14 P35 /D13 Port 3 P34 /D12 P33 /D11 P32 /D10 P31 /D9 P30 /D8 Modes 1 to 5 D15 (input/output) D14 (input/output) D13 (input/output) D12 (input/output) D11 (input/output) D10 (input/output) D9 (input/output) D8 (input/output) Mode 6 and 7 P37 (input/output) P36 (input/output) P35 (input/output) P34 (input/output) P33 (input/output) P32 (input/output) P31 (input/output) P30 (input/output) Figure 8.3 Port 3 Pin Configuration 8.4.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.5 summarizes the registers of port 3. Table 8.5 Address* H'EE002 H'FFFD2 Port 3 Registers Name Port 3 data direction register Port 3 data register Abbreviation P3DDR P3DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 279 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR): P3DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 3. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P3 7 DDR P3 6 DDR P3 5 DDR P3 4 DDR P3 3 DDR P3 2 DDR P3 1 DDR P3 0 DDR Port 3 data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 3 pins Modes 1 to 5 (Expanded Modes): Port 3 functions as a data bus, regardless of the P3DDR settings. Mode 6 and 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 3 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 3 becomes an output port if the corresponding P3DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. P3DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P3DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 3 is functioning as an input/output port and a P3DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Port 3 Data Register (P3DR): P3DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 3. When port 3 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. When a bit in P3DDR is set to 1, if port 3 is read the value of the corresponding P3DR bit is returned. When a bit in P3DDR is cleared to 0, if port 3 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P3 7 0 R/W 6 P3 6 0 R/W 5 P3 5 0 R/W 4 P3 4 0 R/W 3 P3 3 0 R/W 2 P3 2 0 R/W 1 P3 1 0 R/W 0 P3 0 0 R/W Port 3 data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port 3 pins P3DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 280 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.5 8.5.1 Port 4 Overview Port 4 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.4. The pin functions differ depending on the operating mode. In modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), when the bus width control register (ABWCR) designates areas 0 to 7 all as 8-bit-access areas, the chip operates in 8-bit bus mode and port 4 is a generic input/output port. When at least one of areas 0 to 7 is designated as a 16-bit-access area, the chip operates in 16-bit bus mode and port 4 becomes part of the data bus. In mode 6, 7 (single-chip mode), port 4 is a generic input/output port. Port 4 has software-programmable built-in pull-up transistors. Pins in port 4 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port 4 pins P47 /D7 P46 /D6 P45 /D5 Port 4 P44 /D4 P43 /D3 P42 /D2 P41 /D1 P40 /D0 Modes 1 to 5 P47 (input/output)/D7 (input/output) P46 (input/output)/D6 (input/output) P45 (input/output)/D5 (input/output) P44 (input/output)/D4 (input/output) P43 (input/output)/D3 (input/output) P42 (input/output)/D2 (input/output) P41 (input/output)/D1 (input/output) P40 (input/output)/D0 (input/output) Mode 6 and 7 P47 (input/output) P46 (input/output) P45 (input/output) P44 (input/output) P43 (input/output) P42 (input/output) P41 (input/output) P40 (input/output) Figure 8.4 Port 4 Pin Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 281 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.5.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.6 summarizes the registers of port 4. Table 8.6 Address* H'EE003 H'FFFD3 H'EE03E Port 4 Registers Name Port 4 data direction register Port 4 data register Port 4 input pull-up control register Abbreviation P4DDR P4DR P4PCR R/W W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR): P4DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 4. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P4 7 DDR P4 6 DDR P4 5 DDR P4 4 DDR P4 3 DDR P4 2 DDR P4 1 DDR P4 0 DDR Port 4 data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 4 pins Modes 1 to 5 (Expanded Modes): When all areas are designated as 8-bit-access areas by the bus controller's bus width control register (ABWCR), selecting 8-bit bus mode, port 4 functions as an input/output port. In this case, a pin in port 4 becomes an output port if the corresponding P4DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. When at least one area is designated as a 16-bit-access area, selecting 16-bit bus mode, port 4 functions as part of the data bus, regardless of the P4DDR settings. Mode 6 and 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 4 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 4 becomes an output port if the corresponding P4DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. P4DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P4DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 282 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports ABWCR and P4DDR are not initialized in software standby mode. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 4 is functioning as an input/output port and a P4DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Port 4 Data Register (P4DR): P4DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 4. When port 4 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. When a bit in P4DDR is set to 1, if port 4 is read the value of the corresponding P4DR bit is returned. When a bit in P4DDR is cleared to 0, if port 4 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P4 7 0 R/W 6 P4 6 0 R/W 5 P4 5 0 R/W 4 P4 4 0 R/W 3 P4 3 0 R/W 2 P4 2 0 R/W 1 P4 1 0 R/W 0 P4 0 0 R/W Port 4 data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port 4 pins P4DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Port 4 Input Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P4PCR): P4PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up transistors in port 4. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W P4 7 PCR P4 6 PCR P4 5 PCR P4 4 PCR P4 3 PCR P4 2 PCR P4 1 PCR P4 0 PCR Port 4 input pull-up control 7 to 0 These bits control input pull-up transistors built into port 4 In mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode), and in 8-bit bus mode in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), when a P4DDR bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding P4PCR bit is set to 1, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. P4PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 283 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.7 summarizes the states of the input pull-ups in each operating mode. Table 8.7 Mode 1 to 5 6 and 7 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode Input Pull-Up Transistor States (Port 4) Reset Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode On/off Off On/off Other Modes On/off Off On/off Legend Off: The input pull-up transistor is always off. On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P4PCR = 1 and P4DDR = 0. Otherwise, it is off. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 284 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.6 8.6.1 Port 5 Overview Port 5 is a 4-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.5. The pin functions differ depending on the operating mode. In modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled), port 5 consists of address output pins (A19 to A16). In modes 5 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled), settings in the port 5 data direction register (P5DDR) designate pins for address bus output (A19 to A16) or generic input. In mode 6, 7 (single-chip mode), port 5 is a generic input/output port. Port 5 has software-programmable built-in pull-up transistors. Pins in port 5 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive an LED or a darlington transistor pair. Port 5 pins P53 /A 19 Port 5 P52 /A 18 P51 /A 17 P50 /A 16 Modes 1 to 4 A19 (output) A18 (output) A17 (output) A16 (output) Mode 5 P5 3 (input)/A19 (output) P5 2 (input)/A18 (output) P5 1 (input)/A17 (output) P5 0 (input)/A16 (output) Mode 6 and 7 P5 3 (input/output) P5 2 (input/output) P5 1 (input/output) P5 0 (input/output) Figure 8.5 Port 5 Pin Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 285 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.6.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.8 summarizes the registers of port 5. Table 8.8 Port 5 Registers Initial Value Address* Name H'EE004 Port 5 data direction register H'FFFD4 Port 5 data register H'EE03F Port 5 input pull-up control register Abbreviation P5DDR P5DR P5PCR R/W Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7 W H'FF H'F0 H'F0 H'F0 R/W H'F0 R/W H'F0 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR): P5DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 5. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. They are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. Bit Modes Initial value 1 to 4 Read/Write Modes Initial value 5 to 7 Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 1 -- Reserved bits 5 -- 1 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 1 -- 3 1 -- 0 W 2 1 -- 0 W 1 1 -- 0 W 0 1 -- 0 W P5 3 DDR P5 2 DDR P5 1 DDR P5 0 DDR Port 5 data direction 3 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 5 pins Modes 1 to 4 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Disabled): P5DDR values are fixed at 1. Port 5 functions as an address bus. Modes 5 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Enabled): Following a reset, port 5 is an input port. A pin in port 5 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P5DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. Mode 6 and 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 5 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 5 becomes an output port if the corresponding P5DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. In modes 1 to 4, P5DDR bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 286 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports In modes 5 to 7, P5DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P5DDR is initialized to H'FF in modes 1 to 4, and to H'F0 in modes 5 to 7, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 5 is functioning as an input/output port and a P5DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Port 5 Data Register (P5DR): P5DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 5. When port 5 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. When a bit in P5DDR is set to 1, if port 5 is read the value of the corresponding P5DR bit is returned. When a bit in P5DDR is cleared to 0, if port 5 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. They are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 P5 3 0 R/W 2 P5 2 0 R/W 1 P5 1 0 R/W 0 P5 0 0 R/W Reserved bits Port 5 data 3 to 0 These bits store data for port 5 pins P5DR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Port 5 Input Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P5PCR): P5PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up transistors in port 5. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. They are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W P5 3 PCR P5 2 PCR P5 1 PCR P5 0 PCR Reserved bits Port 5 input pull-up control 3 to 0 These bits control input pull-up transistors built into port 5 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 287 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports In modes 5 to 7, when a P5DDR bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding bit in P5PCR is set to 1, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. P5PCR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Table 8.9 summarizes the states of the input pull-ups in each mode. Table 8.9 Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Input Pull-Up Transistor States (Port 5) Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode Off Other Modes Off Reset Off Off Off On/off On/off Legend Off: The input pull-up transistor is always off. On/off: The input pull-up transistor is on if P5PCR = 1 and P5DDR = 0. Otherwise, it is off. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 288 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.7 8.7.1 Port 6 Overview Port 6 is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output of bus control signals (LWR, HWR, RD, AS, BACK, BREQ, WAIT) and for clock () output. In modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), the pin functions are P67 (generic input)/, LWR, HWR, RD, AS, P62/BACK, P61/BREQ, and P60/WAIT). See table 8.11 for the selection of the pin functions. In modes 6 and 7 (single-chip modes), P67 functions as a generic input port or o output, and P66 to P60 function as generic input/output ports. When DRAM is connected to areas 2 to 5, LWR, HWR, and RD also function as LCAS, UCAS, and WE, respectively. For details see section 6.5, DRAM Interface. Pins in port 6 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port 6 pins P6 7 / P6 6 / LWR P6 5 / HWR Port 6 P6 4 / RD P6 3 / AS P6 2 / BACK P6 1 / BREQ P6 0 / WAIT Modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes) P67 (input)/ (output) Mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode) P6 7 (input) / (output) P6 6 (input/output) P6 5 (input/output) P6 4 (input/output) P6 3 (input/output) P6 2 (input/output) P6 1 (input/output) P6 0 (input/output) LWR (output) HWR (output) RD AS (output) (output) P62 (input/output) BACK (output) P61 (input/output)/ BREQ (input) P60 (input/output)/ WAIT (input) Figure 8.6 Port 6 Pin Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 289 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.7.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.10 summarizes the registers of port 6. Table 8.10 Port 6 Registers Address* H'EE005 H'FFFD5 Name Port 6 data direction register Port 6 data register Abbreviation P6DDR P6DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'80 H'80 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR): P6DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 6. Bit 7 is reserved. It is fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- Reserved bit 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P6 6 DDR P6 5 DDR P6 4 DDR P6 3 DDR P6 2 DDR P6 1 DDR P6 0 DDR Port 6 data direction 6 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 6 pins Modes 1 to 5 (Expanded Modes): P67 functions as the clock output pin () or an input port. P67 is the clock output pin (o) if the PSTOP bit in MSTRCH is cleared to 0 (initial value), and an input port if this bit is set to 1. P66 to P63 function as bus control output pins (LWR, HWR, RD, and AS), regardless of the settings of bits P66DDR to P63DDR. P62 to P60 function as bus control input/output pins (BACK, BREQ, and WAIT) or input/output ports. For the method of selecting the pin functions, see table 8.11. When P62 to P60 function as input/output ports, the pin becomes an output port if the corresponding P6DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. Mode 6 and 7 (Single-Chip Mode): P67 functions as the clock output pin () or an input port. P66 to P60 function as generic input/output ports. P67 is the clock output pin () if the PSTOP bit in MSTCRH is cleared to 0 (initial value), and an input port if this bit is set to 1. A pin in port 6 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 290 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports becomes an output port if the corresponding bit of P66DDR to P60DDR is set to 1, and an input port if this pin is cleared to 0. P6DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P6DDR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 6 is functioning as an input/output port and a P6DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Port 6 Data Register (P6DR): P6DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 6. When port 6 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. For bit 7, a value of 1 is returned if the bit is read while the PSTOP bit in MSTCRH is cleared to 0, and the P67 pin logic level is returned if the bit is read while the PSTOP bit is set to 1. Bit 7 cannot be modified. For bits 6 to 0, the pin logic level is returned if the bit is read while the corresponding bit in P6DDR is cleared to 0, and the P6DR value is returned if the bit is read while the corresponding bit in P6DDR is set to 1. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P67 1 R 6 P6 6 0 R/W 5 P6 5 0 R/W 4 P6 4 0 R/W 3 P6 3 0 R/W 2 P6 2 0 R/W 1 P6 1 0 R/W 0 P6 0 0 R/W Port 6 data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port 6 pins P6DR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 291 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.11 Port 6 Pin Functions in Modes 1 to 5 Pin P67/ Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit PSTOP in MSTCRH selects the pin function. PSTOP Pin function LWR 0 output 1 P67 input Functions as LWR regardless of the setting of bit P66DDR P66DDR Pin function Note: * 0 LWR output* 1 If any of bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA is 1 and bit CSEL in DRCRB is 1, LWR output functions as LCAS. HWR Functions as HWR regardless of the setting of bit P65DDR P65DDR Pin function Note: * 0 HWR output* 1 If any of bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA is 1 and bit CSEL in DRCRB is 1, HWR output functions as UCAS. RD Functions as RD regardless of the setting of bit P64DDR P64DDR Pin function Note: * 0 RD output* 1 If any of bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA is 1, RD output functions as WE. AS Functions as AS regardless of the setting of bit P63DDR P63DDR Pin function 0 AS output 1 P62/BACK Bit BRLE in BRCR and bit P62DDR select the pin function as follows BRLE P62DDR Pin function 0 P62 input 0 1 P62 output 1 -- BACK output P61/BREQ Bit BRLE in BRCR and bit P61DDR select the pin function as follows BRLE P61DDR Pin function 0 P61 input 0 1 P61 output 1 -- BREQ input P60/WAIT Bit WAITE in BCR and bit P60DDR select the pin function as follows. WAITE P60DDR Pin function Note: * 0 P60 input 0 1 P60 output 1 0* WAIT input Do not set bit P60DDR to 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 292 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.8 8.8.1 Port 7 Overview Port 7 is an 8-bit input port that is also used for analog input to the A/D converter and analog output from the D/A converter. The pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 8.7 shows the pin configuration of port 7. See section 15, A/D Converter, for details of the A/D converter analog input pins, and section 16, D/A Converter, for details of the D/A converter analog output pins. Port 7 pins P77 (input)/AN 7 (input)/DA 1 (output) P76 (input)/AN 6 (input)/DA 0 (output) P75 (input)/AN 5 (input) Port 7 P74 (input)/AN 4 (input) P73 (input)/AN 3 (input) P72 (input)/AN 2 (input) P71 (input)/AN 1 (input) P70 (input)/AN 0 (input) Figure 8.7 Port 7 Pin Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 293 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.8.2 Register Description Table 8.12 summarizes the port 7 register. Port 7 is an input port, and port 7 has no data direction register. Table 8.12 Port 7 Data Register Address* H'FFFD6 Name Port 7 data register Abbreviation P7DR R/W R Initial Value Undetermined Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Port 7 Data Register (P7DR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P77 * R 6 P76 * R 5 P75 * R 4 P74 * R 3 P73 * R 2 P72 * R 1 P71 * R 0 P70 * R Note: * Determined by pins P7 7 to P70 . When port 7 is read, the pin logic levels are always read. P7DR cannot be modified. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 294 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.9 8.9.1 Port 8 Overview Port 8 is a 5-bit input/output port that is also used for CS3 to CS0 output, RFSH output, IRQ3 to IRQ0 input, and A/D converter ADTRG input. Figure 8.8 shows the pin configuration of port 8. In modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), port 8 can provide CS3 to CS0 output, RFSH output, IRQ3 to IRQ0 input, and ADTRG input. See table 8.14 for the selection of pin functions in expanded modes. In modes 6 and 7 (single-chip modes), port 8 can provide IRQ3 to IRQ0 input and ADTRG input. See table 8.15 for the selection of pin functions in single-chip mode. See section 15, A/D Converter, for a description of the A/D converter's ADTRG input pin. The IRQ3 to IRQ0 functions are selected by IER settings, regardless of whether the pin is used for input or output. Caution is therefore required. For details see section 5.3.1, External Interrupts. When DRAM is connected to areas 2 to 5, the CS3 and CS2 output pins function as RAS output pins for each area. For details see section 6.5, DRAM Interface. Pins in port 8 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Pins P82 to P80 have Schmitt-trigger inputs. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 295 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 8 pins Pin functions in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes) P84 (input)/ CS 0 (output) P83 (input)/ CS 1 (output)/ IRQ 3 (input) / ADTRG (input) P82 (input)/ CS 2 (output)/ IRQ 2 (input) P81 (input/output)/ CS3 (output)/IRQ1(input) P80 (input/output)/ RFSH (output)/ IRQ 0 (input) P84 / CS 0 P83 / CS 1 / IRQ 3 / ADTRG Port 8 P82 / CS 2 / IRQ 2 P81 / CS 3 / IRQ 1 P80 / RFSH /IRQ 0 Pin functions in mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode) P84 /(input/output) P83 /(input/output)/ IRQ 3 (input) / ADTRG (input) P82 /(input/output)/ IRQ 2 (input) P81 /(input/output)/ IRQ 1 (input) P80 /(input/output)/ IRQ 0 (input) Figure 8.8 Port 8 Pin Configuration 8.9.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.13 summarizes the registers of port 8. Table 8.13 Port 8 Registers Initial Value Address* H'EE007 H'FFFD7 Name Port 8 data direction register Port 8 data register Abbreviation P8DDR P8DR R/W W R/W Mode 1 to 4 H'F0 H'E0 Mode 5 to 7 H'E0 H'E0 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 296 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 8 Data Direction Register (P8DDR): P8DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 8. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved. They are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. Bit Modes Initial value 1 to 4 Read/Write Modes Initial value 5 to 7 Read/Write 7 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 1 W 0 W 3 0 W 0 W 2 0 W 0 W 1 0 W 0 W 0 0 W 0 W P8 4 DDR P8 3 DDR P8 2 DDR P8 1 DDR P8 0 DDR Reserved bits Port 8 data direction 4 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 8 pins Modes 1 to 5 (Expanded Modes): When bits in P8DDR bit are set to 1, P84 to P81 become CS0 to CS3 output pins. When bits in P8DDR are cleared to 0, the corresponding pins become input ports. However, P81 can also be used as an output port, depending on the setting of bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRAM control register A (DRCRA). For details see section 6.5.2, DRAM Space and RAS Output Pin Settings. In modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled), following a reset P84 functions as the CS0 output, while CS1 to CS3 are input ports. In mode 5 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled), following a reset CS0 to CS3 are all input ports. When the refresh enable bit (RFSHE) in DRCRA is set to 1, P80 is used for RFSH output. When RFSHE is cleared to 0, P80 becomes an input/output port according to the P8DDR setting. For details see table 8.14. Mode 6 and 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 8 is a generic input/output port. A pin in port 8 becomes an output port if the corresponding P8DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. P8DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P8DDR is initialized to H'F0 in modes 1 to 4, and to H'E0 in modes 5 to 7, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode P8DDR retains its previous setting. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 8 is functioning as an input/output port and a P8DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 297 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 8 Data Register (P8DR): P8DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 8. When port 8 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. When a bit in P8DDR is set to 1, if port 8 is read the value of the corresponding P8DR bit is returned. When a bit in P8DDR is cleared to 0, if port 8 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved. They are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 Reserved bits 5 1 4 P8 4 0 R/W 3 P8 3 0 R/W 2 P8 2 0 R/W 1 P8 1 0 R/W 0 P8 0 0 R/W Port 8 data 4 to 0 These bits store data for port 8 pins P8DR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 298 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.14 Port 8 Pin Functions in Modes 1 to 5 Pin P84/CS0 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit P84DDR selects the pin function as follows P84DDR Pin function P83/CS1/IRQ3/ADTRG 0 P84 input 1 CS0 output Bit P83DDR selects the pin function as follows P83DDR Pin function 0 P83 input IRQ3 input ADTRG input 1 CS1 output P82/CS2/IRQ2 The DRAM interface settings by bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA, and bit P82DDR, select the pin function as follows. DRAM interface settings P82DDR Pin function (1) in table below 0 P82 input 1 CS2 output IRQ3 input Note: * CS2 is output as RAS2. DRAM interface setting DRAS2 DRAS1 DRAS0 0 0 1 0 (1) 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 (2) 1 1 1 |(2) in table below -- CS2 output* P81/CS3/IRQ1 The DRAM interface settings by bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA, and bit P81DDR, select the pin function as follows. DRAM interface settings P81DDR Pin function (1) in table below 0 1 (2) in table below 0 1 P81 output pin (3) in table below -- CS3 output pin* P81 input CS3 output P81 input pin pin pin IRQ1 input pin Note: * CS3 is output as RAS3. (1) 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 (3) (2) (3) 1 1 1 (2) DRAM interface setting DRAS2 DRAS1 DRAS0 P80/RFSH/IRQ0 Bit RFSHE in DRCRA and bit P80DDR select the pin function as follows. RFSHE P80DDR Pin function 0 P80 input 0 1 P80 output IRQ0 input Note: * If areas 2 to 5 are not designated as DRAM space, this bit should not be set to 1. 1* -- RFSH output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 299 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.15 Port 8 Pin Functions in Mode 6 and 7 Pin P84 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit P84DDR selects the pin function as follows P84DDR Pin function P83/IRQ3/ADTRG 0 P84 input 1 P84 output Bit P83DDR selects the pin function as follows P83DDR Pin function 0 P83 input IRQ3 input ADTRG input 1 P83 output P82/IRQ2 Bit P82DDR selects the pin function as follows P82DDR Pin function 0 P82 input IRQ2 input 1 P82 output P81/IRQ1 Bit P81DDR selects the pin function as follows P81DDR Pin function 0 P81 input IRQ1 input 1 P81 output P80/IRQ0 Bit P80DDR select the pin function as follows P80DDR Pin function 0 P80 input IRQ0 input 1 P80 output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 300 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.10 8.10.1 Port 9 Overview Port 9 is a 6-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output (TxD0, TxD1, RxD0, RxD1, SCK0, SCK1) by serial communication interface channels 0 and 1 (SCI0 and SCI1), and for IRQ5 and IRQ4 input. See table 8.17 for the selection of pin functions. The IRQ5 and IRQ4 functions are selected by IER settings, regardless of whether the pin is used for input or output. Caution is therefore required. For details see section 5.3.1, External Interrupts. Port 9 has the same set of pin functions in all operating modes. Figure 8.9 shows the pin configuration of port 9. Pins in port 9 can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port 9 pins P95 (input/output)/SCK 1 (input/output)/IRQ 5 (input) P94 (input/output)/SCK 0 (input/output)/IRQ 4 (input) Port 9 P93 (input/output)/RxD1 (input) P92 (input/output)/RxD0 (input) P91 (input/output)/TxD1 (output) P90 (input/output)/TxD0 (output) Figure 8.9 Port 9 Pin Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 301 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.10.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.16 summarizes the registers of port 9. Table 8.16 Port 9 Registers Address* H'EE008 H'FFFD8 Name Port 9 data direction register Port 9 data register Abbreviation P9DDR P9DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'C0 H'C0 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Port 9 Data Direction Register (P9DDR): P9DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 9. Bits 7 and 6 are reserved. They are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P9 5 DDR P9 4 DDR P9 3 DDR P9 2 DDR P9 1 DDR P9 0 DDR Reserved bits Port 9 data direction 5 to 0 These bits select input or output for port 9 pins When port 9 functions as an input/output port, a pin in port 9 becomes an output port if the corresponding P9DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. For the method of selecting the pin functions, see table 8.17. P9DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. P9DDR is initialized to H'C0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 9 is functioning as an input/output port and a P9DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 302 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 9 Data Register (P9DR): P9DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 9. When port 9 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. When a bit in P9DDR is set to 1, if port 9 is read the value of the corresponding P9DR bit is returned. When a bit in P9DDR is cleared to 0, if port 9 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. Bits 7 and 6 are reserved. They are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 P9 5 0 R/W 4 P9 4 0 R/W 3 P9 3 0 R/W 2 P9 2 0 R/W 1 P9 1 0 R/W 0 P9 0 0 R/W Reserved bits Port 9 data 5 to 0 These bits store data for port 9 pins P9DR is initialized to H'C0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 303 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.17 Port 9 Pin Functions Pin P95/SCK1/IRQ5 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit C/A in SMR of SCI1, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, and bit P95DDR select the pin function as follows CKE1 C/A CKE0 P95DDR Pin function 0 P95 input 0 1 P95 output 0 1 -- SCK1 output 0 1 -- -- SCK1 output 1 -- -- -- SCK1 input IRQ5 input P94/SCK0/IRQ4 Bit C/A in SMR of SCI0, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, and bit P94DDR select the pin function as follows CKE1 C/A CKE0 P94DDR Pin function 0 P94 input 0 1 P94 output 0 1 -- SCK0 output 0 1 -- -- SCK0 output 1 -- -- -- SCK0 input IRQ4 input P93/RxD1 Bit RE in SCR of SCI1, bit SMIF in SCMR, and bit P93DDR select the pin function as follows. SMIF RE P93DDR Pin function P92/RxD0 0 P93 input P93 output 0 0 1 -- RxD1 input 1 -- -- RxD1 input Bit RE in SCR of SCI0, bit SMIF in SCMR, and bit P92DDR select the pin function as follows SMIF RE P92DDR Pin function 0 P92 input 0 1 P92 output 0 1 -- RxD0 input 1 -- -- RxD0 input Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 304 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin P91/TxD1 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit TE in SCR of SCI1, bit SMIF in SCMR, and bit P91DDR select the pin function as follows. SMIF TE P91 DDR Pin function Note: * P90/TxD0 0 P91 input 0 1 P91 output 0 1 -- TxD1 output 1 -- -- TxD1 output* Functions as the TxD1 output pin, but there are two states: one in which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at high-impedance. Bit TE in SCR of SCI0, bit SMIF in SCMR, and bit P90DDR select the pin function as follows. SMIF TE P90DDR Pin function Note: * 0 P90 input 0 1 P90 output 0 1 -- TxD0 output 1 -- -- TxD0 output* Functions as the TxD0 output pin, but there are two states: one in which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at high-impedance. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 305 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.11 8.11.1 Port A Overview Port A is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for output (TP7 to TP0) from the programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), input and output, (TIOCB2, TIOCA2, TIOCB1, TIOCA1, TIOCB0, TIOCA0, TCLKD, TCLKC, TCLKB, TCLKA) by the 16-bit timer, input (TCLKD, TCLKC, TCLKB, TCLKA) to the 8-bit timer, output (TEND1, TEND0) from the DMA controller (DMAC), and address output (A23 to A20). A reset or hardware standby transition leaves port A as an input port, except that in modes 3 and 4, one pin is always used for A20 output. See table 8.19 to 8.21 for the selection of pin functions. Usage of pins for TPC, 16-bit timer, 8-bit timer, and DMAC input and output is described in the sections on those modules. For output of address bits A23 to A20 in modes 3, 4, and 5, see section 6.2.4, Bus Release Control Register (BRCR). Pins not assigned to any of these functions are available for generic input/output. Figure 8.10 shows the pin configuration of port A. Pins in port A can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair. Port A has Schmitt-trigger inputs. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 306 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port A pins PA7 /TP7 /TIOCB2 /A20 PA6 /TP6 /TIOCA2 /A 21 PA5 /TP5 /TIOCB1 /A22 PA4 /TP4 /TIOCA1 /A 23 Port A PA3 /TP3 /TIOCB0 /TCLKD PA2 /TP2 /TIOCA0 /TCLKC PA1 /TP1 /TEND1 /TCLKB PA0 /TP0 /TEND0 /TCLKA Pin functions in modes 1, 2, 6 and 7 PA 7 (input/output)/TP7 (output)/TIOCB 2 (input/output) PA 6 (input/output)/TP6 (output)/TIOCA 2 (input/output) PA 5 (input/output)/TP5 (output)/TIOCB 1 (input/output) PA 4 (input/output)/TP4 (output)/TIOCA 1 (input/output) PA 3 (input/output)/TP3 (output)/TIOCB 0 (input/output)/TCLKD (input) PA 2 (input/output)/TP2 (output)/TIOCA 0 (input/output)/TCLKC (input) PA 1 (input/output)/TP1 (output)/TEND 1 (output)/TCLKB (input) PA 0 (input/output)/TP0 (output)/TEND 0 (output)/TCLKA (input) Pin functions in modes 3, 4 A 20 (output) PA 6 (input/output)/TP6 (output)/TIOCA 2 (input/output)/A 21 (output) PA 5 (input/output)/TP5 (output)/TIOCB 1 (input/output)/A 22 (output) PA 4 (input/output)/TP4 (output)/TIOCA 1 (input/output)/A 23 (output) PA 3 (input/output)/TP3 (output)/TIOCB 0 (input/output)/TCLKD (input) PA 2 (input/output)/TP2 (output)/TIOCA 0 (input/output)/TCLKC (input) PA 1 (input/output)/TP1 (output)/TEND 1 (output)/TCLKB (input) PA 0 (input/output)/TP0 (output)/TEND 0 (output)/TCLKA (input) Pin functions in mode 5 PA7 (input/output)/TP7 (output)/TIOCB2 (input/output)/A 20 (output) PA6 (input/output)/TP6 (output)/TIOCA2 (input/output)/A 21 (output) PA5 (input/output)/TP5 (output)/TIOCB1 (input/output)/A 22 (output) PA4 (input/output)/TP4 (output)/TIOCA1 (input/output)/A 23 (output) PA3 (input/output)/TP3 (output)/TIOCB0 (input/output)/TCLKD (input) PA2 (input/output)/TP2 (output)/TIOCA0 (input/output)/TCLKC (input) PA1 (input/output)/TP1 (output)/TEND1 (output)/TCLKB (input) PA0 (input/output)/TP0 (output)/TEND0 (output)/TCLKA (input) Figure 8.10 Port A Pin Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 307 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.11.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.18 summarizes the registers of port A. Table 8.18 Port A Registers Initial Value Address* H'EE009 H'FFFD9 Name Port A data direction register Port A data register PADDR PADR R/W W R/W Modes 1, 2, 5, 6 and 7 H'00 H'00 Modes 3, 4 H'80 H'00 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR): PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port A. When pins are used for TPC output, the corresponding PADDR bits must also be set. Bit 7 6 0 W 0 W 5 0 W 0 W 4 0 W 0 W 3 0 W 0 W 2 0 W 0 W 1 0 W 0 W 0 0 W 0 W PA7 DDR PA6 DDR PA5 DDR PA4 DDR PA3 DDR PA2 DDR PA1 DDR PA0 DDR Modes Initial value 1 3, 4 Read/Write -- Modes Initial value 0 1, 2, 5, 6 and 7 Read/Write W Port A data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port A pins The pin functions that can be selected for pins PA7 to PA4 differ between modes 1, 2, 6, and 7, and modes 3 to 5. For the method of selecting the pin functions, see tables 8.19 and 8.20. The pin functions that can be selected for pins PA3 to PA0 are the same in modes 1 to 7. For the method of selecting the pin functions, see table 8.21. When port A functions as an input/output port, a pin in port A becomes an output port if the corresponding PADDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. In modes 3 and 4, PA7DDR is fixed at 1 and PA7 functions as the A20 address output pin. PADDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 308 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports PADDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode in modes 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7. It is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode in modes 3 and 4. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port A is functioning as an input/output port and a PADDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Port A Data Register (PADR): PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port A. When port A functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. When a bit in PADDR is set to 1, if port A is read the value of the corresponding PADR bit is returned. When a bit in PADDR is cleared to 0, if port A is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PA 7 0 R/W 6 PA 6 0 R/W 5 PA 5 0 R/W 4 PA 4 0 R/W 3 PA 3 0 R/W 2 PA 2 0 R/W 1 PA 1 0 R/W 0 PA 0 0 R/W Port A data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port A pins PADR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 309 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.19 Port A Pin Functions (Modes 1, 2, 6, 7) Pin PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit PWM2 in TMDR, bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR2, bit NDER7 in NDERA, and bit PA7DDR select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 2 settings PA7DDR NDER7 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB2 output 0 -- PA7 input (2) in table below 1 0 PA7 output TIOCB2 input* Note: * TIOCB2 input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM2 = 0. (2) 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- (1) (2) 1 -- -- 1 1 TP7 output 16-bit timer channel 2 settings IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2 Bit PWM2 in TMDR, bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR2, bit NDER6 in NDERA, and bit PA6DDR select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 2 settings PA6DDR NDER6 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCA2 output 0 -- PA6 input (2) in table below 1 0 PA6 output TIOCA2 input* Note: * TIOCA2 input when IOA2 = 1. (2) (1) 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- 1 -- -- (2) (1) 1 -- -- -- 1 1 TP6 output 16-bit timer channel 2 settings PWM2 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 310 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit PWM1 in TMDR, bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR1, bit NDER5 in NDERA, and bit PA5DDR select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 1 settings PA5DDR NDER5 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB1 output 0 -- PA5 input (2) in table below 1 0 PA5 output TIOCB1 input* Note: * TIOCB1 input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM1 = 0. (2) 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- (1) (2) 1 -- -- 1 1 TP5 output 16-bit timer channel 1 settings IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1 Bit PWM1 in TMDR, bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR1, bit NDER4 in NDERA, and bit PA4DDR select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 1 settings PA4DDR NDER4 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCA1 output 0 -- PA4 input (2) in table below 1 0 PA4 output TIOCA1 input* Note: * TIOCA1 input when IOA2 = 1. (2) (1) 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- 1 -- -- (2) (1) 1 -- -- -- 1 1 TP4 output 16-bit timer channel 1 settings PWM1 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 311 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.20 Port A Pin Functions (Modes 3, 4, 5) Pin PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2/ A20 Pin Functions and Selection Method Modes 3 and 4: Always used as A20 output. Pin function A20 output Mode 5: Bit PWM2 in TMDR, bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR2, bit NDER7 in NDERA, bit A20E in BRCR, and bit PA7DDR select the pin function as follows. A20E 16-bit timer channel 2 settings PA7DDR NDER7 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB2 output 0 -- PA7 input 1 (2) in table below 1 0 PA7 output TIOCB2 input* Note: * TIOCB2 input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM2 = 0. (2) 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- (1) (2) 1 -- -- 1 1 TP7 output 0 -- -- -- A20 output 16-bit timer channel 2 settings IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/A21 Bit PWM2 in TMDR, bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR2, bit NDER6 in NDERA, bit A21E in BRCR, and bit PA6DDR select the pin function as follows. A21E 16-bit timer channel 2 settings PA6DDR NDER6 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCA2 output 0 -- PA6 input 1 (2) in table below 1 0 PA6 output TIOCA2 input* Note: * TIOCA2 input when IOA2 = 1. (2) (1) 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- 1 -- -- (2) (1) 1 -- -- -- 1 1 TP6 output 0 -- -- -- A21 output 16-bit timer channel 2 settings PWM2 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 312 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/A22 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit PWM1 in TMDR, bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR1, bit NDER5 in NDERA, bit A22E in BRCR, and bit PA5DDR select the pin function as follows. A22E 16-bit timer channel 1 settings PA5DDR NDER5 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB1 output 0 -- PA5 input 1 (2) in table below 1 0 PA5 output TIOCB1 input* Note: * TIOCB1 input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM1 = 0. (2) 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- (1) (2) 1 -- -- 1 1 TP5 output 0 -- -- -- A22 output 16-bit timer channel 1 settings IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/A23 Bit PWM1 in TMDR, bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR1, bit NDER4 in NDERA, bit A23E in BRCR, and bit PA4DDR select the pin function as follows. A23E 16-bit timer channel 1 settings PA4DDR NDER4 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCA1 output 0 -- PA4 input 1 (2) in table below 1 0 PA4 output TIOCA1 input* Note: * TIOCA1 input when IOA2 = 1. (2) (1) 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- 1 -- -- (2) (1) 1 -- -- -- 1 1 TP4 output 0 -- -- -- A23 output 16-bit timer channel 1 settings PWM1 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 313 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.21 Port A Pin Functions (Modes 1 to 7) Pin PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/ TCLKD Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit PWM0 in TMDR, bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR0, bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR2 to TCR0 of the 16-bit timer, bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR3 of the 8-bit timer, bit NDER3 in NDERA, and bit PA3DDR select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 0 settings PA3DDR NDER3 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCB0 output 0 -- PA3 input (2) in table below 1 0 PA3 output TIOCB0 input* TCLKD input* Notes: 1. 2. TIOCB0 input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM0 = 0. TCLKD input when TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 1 in any of TCR2 to TCR0, or bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR3 are as shown in (3) in the table below. (2) 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- (1) (2) 1 -- -- 2 1 1 1 TP3 output 16-bit timer channel 0 settings IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 8-bit timer channel 0 settings CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 -- -- (4) 1 0 0 1 (3) 1 -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 314 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/ TCLKC Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit PWM0 in TMDR, bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR0, bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR2 to TCR0 of the 16-bit timer, bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR1 of the 8-bit timer, bit NDER2 in NDERA, and bit PA2DDR select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 0 settings PA2DDR NDER2 Pin function (1) in table below -- -- TIOCA0 output 0 -- PA2 input (2) in table below 1 0 PA2 output TIOCA0 input* TCLKC input* Notes: 1. 2. TIOCA0 input when IOA2 = 1. TCLKC input when TPSC2 = TPSC1 = 1 and TPSC0 = 0 in any of TCR2 to TCR0, or bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR1 are as shown in (3) in the table below. (2) (1) 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 -- 1 -- -- (2) (1) 1 -- -- -- 2 1 1 1 TP2 output 16-bit timer channel 0 settings PWM0 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 8-bit timer channel 1 settings CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 -- -- (4) 1 0 0 1 (3) 1 -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 315 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin PA1/TP1/ TCLKB/ TEND1 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit MDF in TMDR, bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR2 to TCR0 of the 16-bit timer, bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR2 of the 8-bit timer, bit NDER1 in NDERA, and bit PA1DDR select the pin function as follows. PA1DDR NDER1 Pin function 0 -- PA1 input 1 0 PA1 output TCLKB input* 1 1 1 TP1 output TEND1 output* Notes: 1. 2. 2 TCLKB input when MDF = 1 in TMDR, or TPSC2 = 1, TPSC1 = 0, and TPSC0 = 1 in any of TCR2 to TCR0, or bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR2 are as shown in (1) in the table below. When an external request is specified as a DMAC activation source, TEND1 output regardless of bits PA1DDR and NDER1. (2) 0 -- -- 0 0 1 1 1 -- (1) 8-bit timer channel 1 settings CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 PA0/TP0/ TCLKA/ TEND0 Bit MDF in TMDR, bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR2 to TCR0 of the 16-bit timer, bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR0 of the 8-bit timer, bit NDER0 in NDERA, and bit PA0DDR select the pin function as follows. PA0DDR NDER0 Pin function 0 -- PA0 input 0 PA0 output TCLKA input*1 TEND0 output*2 Notes: 1. 2. TCLKA input when MDF = 1 in TMDR, or TPSC2 = 1, TPSC1 = 0 and TPSC0 = 0 in any of TCR2 to TCR0, or bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR0 are as shown in (1) in the table below. When an external request is specified as a DMAC activation source, TEND0 output regardless of bits PA0DDR and NDER0. (2) 0 -- -- 0 0 1 1 1 -- (1) 1 1 TP0 output 8-bit timer channel 0 settings CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 316 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.12 8.12.1 Port B Overview Port B is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for output (TP15 to TP8) from the programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), input/output (TMIO3, TMO2, TMIO1, TMO0) by the 8-bit timer, CS7 to CS4 output, input (DREQ1, DREQ0) to the DMA controller (DMAC), input and output (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2) by serial communication interface channel 2 (SCI2), and output (UCAS, LCAS) by the DRAM interface. See table 8.23 to 8.24 for the selection of pin functions. A reset or hardware standby transition leaves port B as an input port. For output of CS7 to CS4 in modes 1 to 5, see section 6.3.4, Chip Select Signals. When DRAM is connected to areas 2, 3, 4, and 5, the CS4 and CS5 output pins become RAS output pins for these areas. For details see 6.5, DRAM Interface. Pins not assigned to any of these functions are available for generic input/output. Figure 8.11 shows the pin configuration of port B. When DRAM is connected to areas 2, 3, 4, and 5, the CS4 and CS5 output pins become RAS output pins for these areas. For details see 6.5, DRAM Interface. Pins in port B can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive darlington transistor pair. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 317 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port B pins PB7/TP15 /RxD2 PB6/TP14 /TxD2 PB5/TP13 /SCK2/LCAS PB4/TP12 /UCAS Port B PB3/TP11 /TMIO3/DREQ1/CS4 PB2/TP10 /TMO2/CS5 PB1/TP9 /TMIO1/DREQ0/CS6 PB0/TP8 /TMO0/CS7 Pin functions in modes 1 to 5 PB7 (input/output)/TP15 (output) /RxD2 (input) PB6 (input/output)/TP14 (output) /TxD2 (output) PB5 (input/output)/TP13 (output) /SCK2 (input/output) /LCAS (output) PB4 (input/output)/TP12 (output) /UCAS (output) PB3 (input/output)/TP11 (output) /TMIO3 (input/output) /DREQ1 (input) CS4 (output) PB2 (input/output)/TP10 (output) /TMO2 (output) /CS5 (output) PB1 (input/output)/TP9 (output) /TMIO1 (input/output) /DREQ0 (input) /CS6 (output) PB0 (input/output)/TP8 (output) /TMO0 (output) /CS7 (output) Pin functions in mode 6 and 7 PB7 (input/output)/TP15 (output) /RxD2 (input) PB6 (input/output)/TP14 (output) /TxD2 (output) PB5 (input/output)/TP13 (output) /SCK2 (input/output) PB4 (input/output)/TP12 (output) PB3 (input/output)/TP11 (output) /TMIO3 (input/output) /DREQ1 (input) PB2 (input/output)/TP10 (output) /TMO2 (output) PB1 (input/output)/TP9 (output) /TMIO1 (input/output) /DREQ0 (input) PB0 (input/output)/TP8 (output) /TMO0 (output) Figure 8.11 Port B Pin Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 318 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.12.2 Register Descriptions Table 8.22 summarizes the registers of port B. Table 8.22 Port B Registers Address* H'EE00A H'FFFDA Name Port B data direction register Port B data register Abbreviation PBDDR PBDR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR): PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port B. When pins are used for TPC output, the corresponding PBDDR bits must also be set. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W PB7 DDR PB6 DDR PB5 DDR PB4 DDR PB3 DDR PB2 DDR PB1 DDR PB0 DDR Port B data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port B pins The pin functions that can be selected for port B differ between modes 1 to 5, and modes 6 and 7. For the method of selecting the pin functions, see tables 8.23 and 8.24. When port B functions as an input/output port, a pin in port B becomes an output port if the corresponding PBDDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. PBDDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read. PBDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port B is functioning as an input/output port and a PBDDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 319 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port B Data Register (PBDR): PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins port B. When port B functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. When a bit in PBDDR is set to 1, if port B is read the value of the corresponding PBDR bit is returned. When a bit in PBDDR is cleared to 0, if port B is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PB 7 0 R/W 6 PB 6 0 R/W 5 PB 5 0 R/W 4 PB 4 0 R/W 3 PB 3 0 R/W 2 PB 2 0 R/W 1 PB 1 0 R/W 0 PB 0 0 R/W Port B data 7 to 0 These bits store data for port B pins PBDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 320 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.23 Port B Pin Functions (Modes 1 to 5) Pin PB7/TP15/ RxD2 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit RE in SCR of SCI2, bit SMIF in SCMR, bit NDER15 in NDERB, and bit PB7DDR select the pin function as follows. SMIF RE PB7DDR NDER15 Pin function PB6/TP14/ TxD2 0 -- PB7 input 0 1 0 PB7 output 1 1 TP15 output 0 1 -- -- RxD2 input 1 -- -- -- RxD2 input Bit TE in SCR of SCI2, bit SMIF in SCMR, bit NDER14 in NDERB, and bit PB6DDR select the pin function as follows. SMIF TE PB6DDR NDER14 Pin function Note: * 0 -- PB6 input 0 1 0 PB6 output 1 1 TP14 output 0 1 -- -- TxD2 output 1 -- -- -- TxD2 output* Functions as the TxD2 output pin, but there are two states: one in which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at high-impedance. PB5/TP13/ Bit C/A in SMR of SCI2, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, bit NDER13 in NDERB, and bit PB 5DDR select the pin SCK2/LCAS function as follows. CKE1 C/A CKE0 PB5DDR NDER13 Pin function 0 -- PB5 input 0 1 0 PB5 output 1 1 TP13 output 0 1 -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- SCK2 input SCK2 output SCK2 output LCAS output* Note: * LCAS output depending on bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA and bit CSEL in DRCRB, and regardless of bits C/A, CKE0 and CKE1, NDER13, and PB5DDR. For details, see section 6, Bus Controller. PB4/TP12/ UCAS Bit NDER12 in NDERB and bit PB4DDR select the pin function as follows. PB4DDR NDER12 Pin function 0 -- PB4 input 1 0 PB4 output UCAS output* Note: * UCAS output depending on bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA and bit CSEL in DRCRB, and regardless of bits NDER12 and PB4DDR. For details, see section 6, Bus Controller. 1 1 TP12 output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 321 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method PB3/TP11/ The DRAM interface settings by bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA, bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0 in TCSR3, bits TMIO3/ CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR3, bit CS4E in CSCR, bit NDER11 in NDERB, and bit PB3DDR select the pin DREQ1/CS4 function as follows. DRAM interface settings OIS3/2 and OS1/0 CS4E PB3DDR NDER11 Pin function 0 -- PB3 input 0 1 0 PB3 output 1 1 TP11 output (1) in table below All 0 1 -- -- CS4 output Not all 0 -- -- -- TMIO3 output (2) in table below -- -- -- -- CS4 3 output* 1 TMIO3 input* DREQ1 input* Notes: 1. 2. 3. TMIO3 input when CCLR1 = CCLR0 = 1. 2 When an external request is specified as a DMAC activation source, DREQ1 input regardless of bits OIS3 and OIS2, OS1 and OS0, CCLR1 and CCLR0, CS4E, NDER11, and PB3DDR. CS4 is output as RAS4. (1) 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 (2) 1 1 1 (1) DRAM interface settings DRAS2 DRAS1 DRAS0 PB2/TP10/ TMO2/CS5 The DRAM interface settings by bits DRAS2 to DRAS0 in DRCRA, bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0 in TCSR2, bit CS5E in CSCR, bit NDER10 in NDERB, and bit PB2DDR select the pin function as follows. DRAM interface settings OIS3/2 and OS1/0 CS5E PB2DDR NDER10 Pin function Note: * 0 -- PB2 input 0 1 0 PB2 output 1 1 TP10 output (1) in table below All 0 1 -- -- CS5 output Not all 0 -- -- -- TMIO2 output (2) in table below -- -- -- -- CS5 output* CS5 is output as RAS5. (1) 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 (2) 1 1 1 (1) DRAM interface settings DRAS2 DRAS1 DRAS0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 322 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method Bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0 in TCSR1, bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1, bit CS6E in CSCR, bit NDER9 in PB1/TP9/ NDERB, and bit PB1DDR select the pin function as follows. TMIO1/ DREQ0/CS6 OIS3/2 and OS1/0 All 0 Not all 0 CS6E PB1DDR NDER9 Pin function 0 -- PB1 input 0 1 0 PB1 output 1 1 TP9 output TMIO1 input* 1 1 -- -- CS6 output -- -- -- TMIO1 output DREQ0 input* Notes: 1. 2. PB0/TP8/ TMO0/CS7 TMIO1 input when CCLR1 = CCLR0 = 1. 2 When an external request is specified as a DMAC activation source, DREQ0 input regardless of bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0, bits CCLR1/0, bit CS6E, bit NDER9, and bit PB1DDR. Bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0 in TCSR0, bit CS7E in CSCR, bit NDER8 in NDERB, and bit PB0DDR select the pin function as follows. OIS3/2 and OS1/0 CS7E PB0DDR NDER8 Pin function 0 -- PB0 input 0 1 0 PB0 output 1 1 TP8 output All 0 1 -- -- CS7 output Not all 0 -- -- -- TMO0 output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 323 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.24 Port B Pin Functions (Modes 6 to 7) Pin PB7/TP15/ RxD2 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bit RE in SCR of SCI2, bit SMIF in SCMR, bit NDER15 in NDERB, and bit PB7DDR select the pin function as follows. SMIF RE PB7DDR NDER15 Pin function PB6/TP14/ TxD2 0 -- PB7 input 0 1 0 PB7 output 1 1 TP15 output 0 1 -- -- RxD2 input 1 -- -- -- RxD2 input Bit TE in SCR of SCI2, bit SMIF in SCMR, bit NDER14 in NDERB, and bit PB6DDR select the pin function as follows. SMIF TE PB6DDR NDER14 Pin function Note: * 0 -- PB6 input 0 1 0 PB6 output 1 1 TP14 output 0 1 -- -- TxD2 output 1 -- -- -- TxD2 output* Functions as the TxD2 output pin, but there are two states: one in which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at high-impedance. PB5/TP13/ SCK2 Bit C/A in SMR of SCI2, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR, bit NDER13 in NDERB, and bit PB 5DDR select the pin function as follows. CKE1 C/A CKE0 PB5DDR NDER13 Pin function 0 -- PB5 input 0 1 0 PB5 output 1 1 TP13 output 0 1 -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- SCK2 input SCK2 output SCK2 output PB4/TP12 Bit NDER12 in NDERB and bit PB4DDR select the pin function as follows. PB4DDR NDER12 Pin function 0 -- PB4 input 1 0 PB4 output 1 1 TP12 output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 324 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/ DREQ1 Pin Functions and Selection Method Bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0 in TCSR3, bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR3, bit NDER11 in NDERB, and bit PB3DDR select the pin function as follows. OIS3/2 and OS1/0 PB3DDR NDER11 Pin function 0 -- PB3 input All 0 1 0 PB3 output 1 1 TP11 output 1 Not all 0 -- -- TMIO3 output TMIO3 input* 2 DREQ1 input* Notes: 1. 2. TMIO3 input when CCLR1 = CCLR0 = 1. When an external request is specified as a DMAC activation source, DREQ1 input regardless of bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0, bit NDER11, and bit PB3DDR. PB2/TP10/ TMO2 Bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0 in TCSR2, bit NDER10 in NDERB, and bit PB2DDR select the pin function as follows. OIS3/2 and OS1/0 PB2DDR NDER10 Pin function 0 -- PB2 input All 0 1 0 PB2 output 1 1 TP10 output Not all 0 -- -- TMO2 output PB1/TP9/ TMIO1/ DREQ0 Bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0 in TCSR1, bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1, bit NDER9 in NDERB, and bit PB1DDR select the pin function as follows. OIS3/2 and OS1/0 PB1DDR NDER9 Pin function 0 -- PB1 input All 0 1 0 PB1 output TMIO1 input*1 DREQ0 input*2 Notes: 1. 2. TMIO1 input when CCLR1 = CCLR0 = 1. When an external request is specified as a DMAC activation source, DREQ0 input regardless of bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0, bit NDER9, and bit PB1DDR. 1 1 TP9 output Not all 0 -- -- TMIO1 output PB0/TP8/ TMO0 Bits OIS3/2 and OS1/0 in TCSR0, bit NDER8 in NDERB, and bit PB0DDR select the pin function as follows. OIS3/2 and OS1/0 PB0DDR NDER8 Pin function 0 -- PB0 input All 0 1 0 PB0 output 1 1 TP8 output Not all 0 -- -- TMO0 output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 325 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 326 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group has built-in 16-bit timer module with three 16-bit counter channels. 9.1.1 Features 16-bit timer features are listed below. * Capability to process up to 6 pulse outputs or 6 pulse inputs * Six general registers (GRs, two per channel) with independently-assignable output compare or input capture functions * Selection of eight counter clock sources for each channel: Internal clocks: , /2, /4, /8 External clocks: TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD * Five operating modes selectable in all channels: Waveform output by compare match Selection of 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output (only 0 or 1 output in channel 2) Input capture function Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges (selectable) Counter clearing function Counters can be cleared by compare match or input capture Synchronization Two or more timer counters (TCNTs) can be preset simultaneously, or cleared simultaneously by compare match or input capture. Counter synchronization enables synchronous register input and output. PWM mode PWM output can be provided with an arbitrary duty cycle. With synchronization, up to three-phase PWM output is possible * Phase counting mode selectable in channel 2 Two-phase encoder output can be counted automatically. * High-speed access via internal 16-bit bus The TCNTs and GRs can be accessed at high speed via a 16-bit bus. * Any initial timer output value can be set Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 327 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer * Nine interrupt sources Each channel has two compare match/input capture interrupts and an overflow interrupt. All interrupts can be requested independently. * Output triggering of programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) Compare match/input capture signals from channels 0 to 2 can be used as TPC output triggers. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 328 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Table 9.1 summarizes the 16-bit timer functions. Table 9.1 Item Clock sources 16-bit timer Functions Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Internal clocks: , /2, /4, /8 External clocks: TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, selectable independently General registers (output compare/input capture registers) Input/output pins Counter clearing function Initial output value setting function Compare match 0 output 1 Toggle Input capture function Synchronization PWM mode Phase counting mode Interrupt sources GRA0, GRB0 GRA1, GRB1 GRA2, GRB2 TIOCA0, TIOCB0 TIOCA1, TIOCB1 TIOCA2, TIOCB2 GRA0/GRB0 compare GRA1/GRB1 compare GRA2/GRB2 compare match or input capture match or input capture match or input capture ! ! ! ! ! ! ! -- Three sources ! ! ! ! ! ! ! -- Three sources ! ! ! -- ! ! ! ! Three sources * Compare * Compare * Compare match/input capture match/input capture match/input capture A0 A1 A2 * Compare * Compare * Compare match/input capture match/input capture match/input capture B0 B1 B2 * Overflow Legend Available !: --: Not available * Overflow * Overflow Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 329 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.1.2 Block Diagrams 16-bit timer Block Diagram (Overall): Figure 9.1 is a block diagram of the 16-bit timer. TCLKA to TCLKD , /2, /4, /8 Clock selector Control logic IMIA0 to IMIA2 IMIB0 to IMIB2 OVI0 to OVI2 TIOCA0 to TIOCA2 TIOCB0 to TIOCB2 TSTR 16-bit timer channel 2 16-bit timer channel 1 16-bit timer channel 0 TSNC TOLR TISRA TISRB TISRC Module data bus Legend TSTR: TSNC: TMDR: TOLR: TISRA: TISRB: TISRC: Timer start register (8 bits) Timer synchro register (8 bits) Timer mode register (8 bits) Timer output level setting register (8 bits) Timer interrupt status register A (8 bits) Timer interrupt status register B (8 bits) Timer interrupt status register C (8 bits) Figure 9.1 16-bit timer Block Diagram (Overall) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 330 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Bus interface TMDR On-chip data bus Section 9 16-Bit Timer Block Diagram of Channels 0 and 1: 16-bit timer channels 0 and 1 are functionally identical. Both have the structure shown in figure 9.2. TCLKA to TCLKD , /2, /4, /8 Clock selector Control logic Comparator TIOCA0 TIOCB0 IMIA0 IMIB0 OVI0 TCNT Module data bus Legend TCNT: GRA, GRB: TCR: TIOR: Timer counter (16 bits) General registers A and B (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits x 2) Timer control register (8 bits) Timer I/O control register (8 bits) Figure 9.2 Block Diagram of Channels 0 and 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 331 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 TIOR GRA GRB TCR Section 9 16-Bit Timer Block Diagram of Channel 2: Figure 9.3 is a block diagram of channel 2 TCLKA to TCLKD , /2, /4, /8 Clock selector Control logic Comparator TIOCA2 TIOCB2 IMIA2 IMIB2 OVI2 TCNT2 Module data bus Legend Timer counter 2 (16 bits) TCNT2: GRA2, GRB2: General registers A2 and B2 (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits x 2) Timer control register 2 (8 bits) TCR2: Timer I/O control register 2 (8 bits) TIOR2: Figure 9.3 Block Diagram of Channel 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 332 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 TIOR2 GRA2 GRB2 TCR2 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.1.3 Input/Output Pins Table 9.2 summarizes the 16-bit timer pins. Table 9.2 16-bit timer Pins Abbreviation TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD Input/ Output Function Input Input Input Input Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output Input/ output External clock A input pin (phase-A input pin in phase counting mode) External clock B input pin (phase-B input pin in phase counting mode) External clock C input pin External clock D input pin GRA0 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in PWM mode GRB0 output compare or input capture pin GRA1 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in PWM mode GRB1 output compare or input capture pin GRA2 output compare or input capture pin PWM output pin in PWM mode GRB2 output compare or input capture pin Channel Name Common Clock input A Clock input B Clock input C Clock input D 0 Input capture/output TIOCA0 compare A0 Input capture/output TIOCB0 compare B0 1 Input capture/output TIOCA1 compare A1 Input capture/output TIOCB1 compare B1 2 Input capture/output TIOCA2 compare A2 Input capture/output TIOCB2 compare B2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 333 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.1.4 Register Configuration Table 9.3 summarizes the 16-bit timer registers. Table 9.3 Channel Common 16-bit timer Registers Address* H'FFF60 H'FFF61 H'FFF62 H'FFF63 H'FFF64 H'FFF65 H'FFF66 1 Name Timer start register Timer synchro register Timer mode register Timer output level setting register Timer interrupt status register A Timer interrupt status register B Timer interrupt status register C Timer control register 0 Timer I/O control register 0 Timer counter 0H Timer counter 0L General register A0H General register A0L General register B0H General register B0L Timer control register 1 Timer I/O control register 1 Timer counter 1H Timer counter 1L General register A1H General register A1L General register B1H General register B1L Abbreviation TSTR TSNC TMDR TOLR TISRA TISRB TISRC TCR0 TIOR0 TCNT0H TCNT0L GRA0H GRA0L GRB0H GRB0L TCR1 TIOR1 TCNT1H TCNT1L GRA1H GRA1L GRB1H GRB1L R/W R/W R/W R/W W R/(W) * 2 R/(W) * 2 2 R/(W) * Initial Value H'F8 H'F8 H'98 H'C0 H'80 H'88 H'88 H'80 H'88 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'80 H'88 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF 0 H'FFF68 H'FFF69 H'FFF6A H'FFF6B H'FFF6C H'FFF6D H'FFF6E H'FFF6F R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 H'FFF70 H'FFF71 H'FFF72 H'FFF73 H'FFF74 H'FFF75 H'FFF76 H'FFF77 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 334 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Abbreviation TCR2 TIOR2 TCNT2H TCNT2L GRA2H GRA2L GRB2H GRB2L Initial Value H'80 H'88 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF Channel 2 Address* H'FFF78 H'FFF79 H'FFF7A H'FFF7B H'FFF7C H'FFF7D H'FFF7E H'FFF7F 1 Name Timer control register 2 Timer I/O control register 2 Timer counter 2H Timer counter 2L General register A2H General register A2L General register B2H General register B2L R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Notes: 1. The lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode are indicated. 2. Only 0 can be written in bits 3 to 0, to clear the flags. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 335 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.2 9.2.1 Register Descriptions Timer Start Register (TSTR) TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that starts and stops the timer counter (TCNT) in channels 0 to 2. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 Reserved bits 4 1 3 1 2 STR2 0 R/W 1 STR1 0 R/W 0 STR0 0 R/W Counter start 2 to 0 These bits start and stop TCNT2 to TCNT0 TSTR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 2--Counter Start 2 (STR2): Starts and stops timer counter 2 (TCNT2). Bit 2 STR2 0 1 Description TCNT2 is halted TCNT2 is counting (Initial value) Bit 1--Counter Start 1 (STR1): Starts and stops timer counter 1 (TCNT1). Bit 1 STR1 0 1 Description TCNT1 is halted TCNT1 is counting (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 336 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 0--Counter Start 0 (STR0): Starts and stops timer counter 0 (TCNT0). Bit 0 STR0 0 1 Description TCNT0 is halted TCNT0 is counting (Initial value) 9.2.2 Timer Synchro Register (TSNC) TSNC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether channels 0 to 2 operate independently or synchronously. Channels are synchronized by setting the corresponding bits to 1. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 Reserved bits 4 1 3 1 2 SYNC2 0 R/W 1 SYNC1 0 R/W 0 SYNC0 0 R/W Timer sync 2 to 0 These bits synchronize channels 2 to 0 TSNC is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 2--Timer Sync 2 (SYNC2): Selects whether channel 2 operates independently or synchronously. Bit 2 SYNC2 0 1 Description Channel 2's timer counter (TCNT2) operates independently TCNT2 is preset and cleared independently of other channels Channel 2 operates synchronously TCNT2 can be synchronously preset and cleared (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 337 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 1--Timer Sync 1 (SYNC1): Selects whether channel 1 operates independently or synchronously. Bit 1 SYNC1 0 1 Description Channel 1's timer counter (TCNT1) operates independently TCNT1 is preset and cleared independently of other channels Channel 1 operates synchronously TCNT1 can be synchronously preset and cleared (Initial value) Bit 0--Timer Sync 0 (SYNC0): Selects whether channel 0 operates independently or synchronously. Bit 0 SYNC0 0 1 Description Channel 0's timer counter (TCNT0) operates independently TCNT0 is preset and cleared independently of other channels Channel 0 operates synchronously TCNT0 can be synchronously preset and cleared (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 338 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.2.3 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) TMDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects PWM mode for channels 0 to 2. It also selects phase counting mode and the overflow flag (OVF) setting conditions for channel 2. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 MDF 0 R/W 5 FDIR 0 R/W 4 1 3 1 2 PWM2 0 R/W 1 PWM1 0 R/W 0 PWM0 0 R/W Reserved bit PWM mode 2 to 0 These bits select PWM mode for channels 2 to 0 Flag direction Selects the setting condition for the overflow flag (OVF) in TISRC Phase counting mode flag Selects phase counting mode for channel 2 Reserved bit TMDR is initialized to H'98 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6--Phase Counting Mode Flag (MDF): Selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in phase counting mode. Bit 6 MDF 0 1 Description Channel 2 operates normally Channel 2 operates in phase counting mode (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 339 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer When MDF is set to 1 to select phase counting mode, TCNT2 operates as an up/down-counter and pins TCLKA and TCLKB become counter clock input pins. TCNT2 counts both rising and falling edges of TCLKA and TCLKB, and counts up or down as follows. Counting Direction TCLKA pin TCLKB pin Low Down-Counting High High Low Up-Counting Low High High Low In phase counting mode channel 2 operates as above regardless of the external clock edges selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 and the clock source selected by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0. Phase counting mode takes precedence over these settings. The counter clearing condition selected by the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR2 and the compare match/input capture settings and interrupt functions of TIOR2, TISRA, TISRB, TISRC remain effective in phase counting mode. Bit 5--Flag Direction (FDIR): Designates the setting condition for the OVF flag in TISRC. The FDIR designation is valid in all modes in channel 2. Bit 5 FDIR 0 1 Description OVF is set to 1 in TISRC when TCNT2 overflows or underflows OVF is set to 1 in TISRC when TCNT2 overflows (Initial value) Bits 4 and 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 2--PWM Mode 2 (PWM2): Selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in PWM mode. Bit 2 PWM2 0 1 Description Channel 2 operates normally Channel 2 operates in PWM mode (Initial value) When bit PWM2 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA2 becomes a PWM output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA2, and to 0 at compare match with GRB2. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 340 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 1--PWM Mode 1 (PWM1): Selects whether channel 1 operates normally or in PWM mode. Bit 1 PWM1 0 1 Description Channel 1 operates normally Channel 1 operates in PWM mode (Initial value) When bit PWM1 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA1 becomes a PWM output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA1, and to 0 at compare match with GRB1. Bit 0--PWM Mode 0 (PWM0): Selects whether channel 0 operates normally or in PWM mode. Bit 0 PWM0 0 1 Description Channel 0 operates normally Channel 0 operates in PWM mode (Initial value) When bit PWM0 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA0 becomes a PWM output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA0, and to 0 at compare match with GRB0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 341 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.2.4 Timer Interrupt Status Register A (TISRA) TISRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates GRA compare match or input capture and enables or disables general register compare match and input capture interrupt requests. Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 5 4 3 1 2 IMFA2 0 1 IMFA1 0 0 IMFA0 0 R/(W)* IMIEA2 IMIEA1 IMIEA0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W R/(W)* R/(W)* Input capture/compare match flags A2 to A0 Status flags indicating GRA compare match or input capture Reserved bit Input capture/compare match interrupt enable A2 to A0 These bits enable or disable interrupts by the IMFA flags Reserved bit Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. TISRA is initialized to H'88 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6--Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable A2 (IMIEA2): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the IMFA2 flag when IMFA2 is set to 1. Bit 6 IMIEA2 0 1 Description IMIA2 interrupt requested by IMFA2 flag is disabled IMIA2 interrupt requested by IMFA2 flag is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 342 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 5--Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable A1 (IMIEA1): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the IMFA1 flag when IMFA1 is set to 1. Bit 5 IMIEA1 0 1 Description IMIA1 interrupt requested by IMFA1 flag is disabled IMIA1 interrupt requested by IMFA1 flag is enabled (Initial value) Bit 4--Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable A0 (IMIEA0): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the IMFA0 flag when IMFA0 is set to 1. Bit 4 IMIEA0 0 1 Description IMIA0 interrupt requested by IMFA0 flag is disabled IMIA0 interrupt requested by IMFA0 flag is enabled (Initial value) Bit 3--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 2--Input Capture/Compare Match Flag A2 (IMFA2): This status flag indicates GRA2 compare match or input capture events. Bit 2 IMFA2 0 Description [Clearing conditions] Read IMFA2 when IMFA2 =1, then write 0 in IMFA2. DMAC activated by IMIA2 interrupt. (Initial value) 1 [Setting conditions] TCNT2 = GRA2 when GRA2 functions as an output compare register. TCNT2 value is transferred to GRA2 by an input capture signal when GRA2 functions as an input capture register. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 343 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 1--Input Capture/Compare Match Flag A1 (IMFA1): This status flag indicates GRA1 compare match or input capture events. Bit 1 IMFA1 0 Description [Clearing conditions] Read IMFA1 when IMFA1 =1, then write 0 in IMFA1. DMAC activated by IMIA1 interrupt. (Initial value) 1 [Setting conditions] TCNT1 = GRA1 when GRA1 functions as an output compare register. TCNT1 value is transferred to GRA1 by an input capture signal when GRA1 functions as an input capture register. Bit 0--Input Capture/Compare Match Flag A0 (IMFA0): This status flag indicates GRA0 compare match or input capture events. Bit 0 IMFA0 0 Description [Clearing conditions] Read IMFA0 when IMFA0 =1, then write 0 in IMFA0. DMAC activated by IMIA0 interrupt. (Initial value) 1 [Setting conditions] TCNT0 = GRA0 when GRA0 functions as an output compare register. TCNT0 value is transferred to GRA0 by an input capture signal when GRA0 functions as an input capture register. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 344 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.2.5 Timer Interrupt Status Register B (TISRB) TISRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates GRB compare match or input capture and enables or disables general register compare match and input capture interrupt requests. Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 5 4 3 1 2 IMFB2 0 R/(W)* 1 IMFB1 0 R/(W)* 0 IMFB0 0 R/(W)* IMIEB2 IMIEB1 IMIEB0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Input capture/compare match flags B2 to B0 Status flags indicating GRB compare match or input capture Reserved bit Input capture/compare match interrupt enable B2 to B0 These bits enable or disable interrupts by the IMFB flags Reserved bit Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. TISRB is initialized to H'88 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6--Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable B2 (IMIEB2): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the IMFB2 flag when IMFB2 is set to 1. Bit 6 IMIEB2 0 1 Description IMIB2 interrupt requested by IMFB2 flag is disabled IMIB2 interrupt requested by IMFB2 flag is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 345 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 5--Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable B1 (IMIEB1): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the IMFB1 flag when IMFB1 is set to 1. Bit 5 IMIEB1 0 1 Description IMIB1 interrupt requested by IMFB1 flag is disabled IMIB1 interrupt requested by IMFB1 flag is enabled (Initial value) Bit 4--Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable B0 (IMIEB0): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the IMFB0 flag when IMFB0 is set to 1. Bit 4 IMIEB0 0 1 Description IMIB0 interrupt requested by IMFB0 flag is disabled IMIB0 interrupt requested by IMFB0 flag is enabled (Initial value) Bit 3--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 2--Input Capture/Compare Match Flag B2 (IMFB2): This status flag indicates GRB2 compare match or input capture events. Bit 2 IMFB2 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Read IMFB2 when IMFB2 =1, then write 0 in IMFB2. (Initial value) [Setting conditions] TCNT2 = GRB2 when GRB2 functions as an output compare register. TCNT2 value is transferred to GRB2 by an input capture signal when GRB2 functions as an input capture register. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 346 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 1--Input Capture/Compare Match Flag B1 (IMFB1): This status flag indicates GRB1 compare match or input capture events. Bit 1 IMFB1 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Read IMFB1 when IMFB1 =1, then write 0 in IMFB1. (Initial value) [Setting conditions] TCNT1 = GRB1 when GRB1 functions as an output compare register. TCNT1 value is transferred to GRB1 by an input capture signal when GRB1 functions as an input capture register. Bit 0--Input Capture/Compare Match Flag B0 (IMFB0): This status flag indicates GRB0 compare match or input capture events. Bit 0 IMFB0 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Read IMFB0 when IMFB0 =1, then write 0 in IMFB0. (Initial value) [Setting conditions] TCNT0 = GRB0 when GRB0 functions as an output compare register. TCNT0 value is transferred to GRB0 by an input capture signal when GRB0 functions as an input capture register. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 347 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.2.6 Timer Interrupt Status Register C (TISRC) TISRC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates TCNT overflow or underflow and enables or disables overflow interrupt requests. Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 OVIE2 0 R/W 5 OVIE1 0 R/W 4 OVIE0 0 R/W 3 1 2 OVF2 0 1 OVF1 0 0 OVF0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* Overflow flags 2 to 0 Status flags indicating overflow or underflow Reserved bit Overflow interrupt enable 2 to 0 These bits enable or disable interrupts by the OVF flags Reserved bit Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. TISRC is initialized to H'88 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6--Overflow Interrupt Enable 2 (OVIE2): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the OVF2 flag when OVF2 is set to 1. Bit 6 OVIE2 0 1 Description OVI2 interrupt requested by OVF2 flag is disabled OVI2 interrupt requested by OVF2 flag is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 348 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 5--Overflow Interrupt Enable 1 (OVIE1): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the OVF1 flag when OVF1 is set to 1. Bit 5 OVIE1 0 1 Description OVI1 interrupt requested by OVF1 flag is disabled OVI1 interrupt requested by OVF1 flag is enabled (Initial value) Bit 4--Overflow Interrupt Enable 0 (OVIE0): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the OVF0 flag when OVF0 is set to 1. Bit 4 OVIE0 0 1 Description OVI0 interrupt requested by OVF0 flag is disabled OVI0 interrupt requested by OVF0 flag is enabled (Initial value) Bit 3--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 2--Overflow Flag 2 (OVF2): This status flag indicates TCNT2 overflow or underflow. Bit 2 OVF2 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Read OVF2 when OVF2 =1, then write 0 in OVF2. (Initial value) [Setting condition] TCNT2 overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000, or underflowed from H'0000 to H'FFFF. Note: TCNT underflow occurs when TCNT operates as an up/down-counter. Underflow occurs only when channel 2 operates in phase counting mode (MDF = 1 in TMDR). Bit 1--Overflow Flag 1 (OVF1): This status flag indicates TCNT1 overflow. Bit 1 OVF1 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Read OVF1 when OVF1 =1, then write 0 in OVF1. [Setting condition] TCNT1 overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000. (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 349 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 0--Overflow Flag 0 (OVF0): This status flag indicates TCNT0 overflow. Bit 0 OVF0 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Read OVF0 when OVF0 =1, then write 0 in OVF0. [Setting condition] TCNT0 overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000. (Initial value) 9.2.7 Timer Counters (TCNT) TCNT is a 16-bit counter. The 16-bit timer has three TCNTs, one for each channel. Channel 0 1 2 Abbreviation TCNT0 TCNT1 TCNT2 Phase counting mode: up/down-counter Other modes: up-counter Function Up-counter Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Each TCNT is a 16-bit readable/writable register that counts pulse inputs from a clock source. The clock source is selected by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. TCNT0 and TCNT1 are up-counters. TCNT2 is an up/down-counter in phase counting mode and an up-counter in other modes. TCNT can be cleared to H'0000 by compare match with GRA or GRB or by input capture to GRA or GRB (counter clearing function). When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000), the OVF flag is set to 1 in TISRC of the corresponding channel. When TCNT underflows (changes from H'0000 to H'FFFF), the OVF flag is set to 1 in TISRC of the corresponding channel. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 350 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer The TCNTs are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word access or byte access. Each TCNT is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in standby mode. 9.2.8 General Registers (GRA, GRB) The general registers are 16-bit registers. The 16-bit timer has 6 general registers, two in each channel. Channel 0 1 2 Abbreviation GRA0, GRB0 GRA1, GRB1 GRA2, GRB2 Function Output compare/input capture register Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W A general register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that can function as either an output compare register or an input capture register. The function is selected by settings in TIOR. When a general register is used as an output compare register, its value is constantly compared with the TCNT value. When the two values match (compare match), the IMFA or IMFB flag is set to 1 in TISRA/TISRB. Compare match output can be selected in TIOR. When a general register is used as an input capture register, rising edges, falling edges, or both edges of an external input capture signal are detected and the current TCNT value is stored in the general register. The corresponding IMFA or IMFB flag in TISRA/TISRB is set to 1 at the same time. The valid edge or edges of the input capture signal are selected in TIOR. TIOR settings are ignored in PWM mode. General registers are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word access or byte access. General registers are initialized to the output compare function (with no output signal) by a reset and in standby mode. The initial value is H'FFFF. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 351 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.2.9 Timer Control Registers (TCR) TCR is an 8-bit register. The 16-bit timer has three TCRs, one in each channel. Channel 0 1 2 Abbreviation TCR0 TCR1 TCR2 Function CR controls the timer counter. The TCRs in all channels are functionally identical. When phase counting mode is selected in channel 2, the settings of bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 and TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR2 are ignored. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 CCLR1 0 R/W 5 CCLR0 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 TPSC2 0 R/W 1 TPSC1 0 R/W 0 TPSC0 0 R/W CKEG1 CKEG0 Timer prescaler 2 to 0 These bits select the counter clock Clock edge 1/0 These bits select external clock edges Counter clear 1/0 These bits select the counter clear source Reserved bit Each TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the timer counter clock source, selects the edge or edges of external clock sources, and selects how the counter is cleared. TCR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 352 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bits 6 and 5--Counter Clear 1/0 (CCLR1, CCLR0): These bits select how TCNT is cleared. Bit 6 CCLR1 0 1 Bit 5 CCLR0 0 1 0 1 Description TCNT is not cleared 1 TCNT is cleared by GRA compare match or input capture* (Initial value) 1 TCNT is cleared by GRB compare match or input capture* Synchronous clear: TCNT is cleared in synchronization with other 2 synchronized timers* Notes: 1. TCNT is cleared by compare match when the general register functions as an output compare register, and by input capture when the general register functions as an input capture register. 2. Selected in TSNC. Bits 4 and 3--Clock Edge 1/0 (CKEG1, CKEG0): These bits select external clock input edges when an external clock source is used. Bit 4 CKEG1 0 1 Bit 3 CKEG0 0 1 -- Description Count rising edges Count falling edges Count both edges (Initial value) When channel 2 is set to phase counting mode, bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR2 are ignored. Phase counting takes precedence. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 353 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bits 2 to 0--Timer Prescaler 2 to 0 (TPSC2 to TPSC0): These bits select the counter clock source. Bit 2 TPSC2 0 Bit 1 TPSC1 0 1 1 0 1 Bit 0 TPSC0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Function Internal clock: Internal clock: /2 Internal clock: /4 Internal clock: /8 External clock A: TCLKA input External clock B: TCLKB input External clock C: TCLKC input External clock D: TCLKD input (Initial value) When bit TPSC2 is cleared to 0 an internal clock source is selected, and the timer counts only falling edges. When bit TPSC2 is set to 1 an external clock source is selected, and the timer counts the edge or edges selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0. When channel 2 is set to phase counting mode (MDF = 1 in TMDR), the settings of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR2 are ignored. Phase counting takes precedence. 9.2.10 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) TIOR is an 8-bit register. The 16-bit timer has three TIORs, one in each channel. Channel Abbreviation Function 0 1 2 TIOR0 TIOR1 TIOR2 TIOR controls the general registers. Some functions differ in PWM mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 354 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W 4 IOB0 0 R/W 3 1 2 IOA2 0 R/W 1 IOA1 0 R/W 0 IOA0 0 R/W I/O control A2 to A0 These bits select GRA functions Reserved bit I/O control B2 to B0 These bits select GRB functions Reserved bit Each TIOR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the output compare or input capture function for GRA and GRB, and specifies the functions of the TIORA and TIORC pins. If the output compare function is selected, TIOR also selects the type of output. If input capture is selected, TIOR also selects the edge or edges of the input capture signal. TIOR is initialized to H'88 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bits 6 to 4--I/O Control B2 to B0 (IOB2 to IOB0): These bits select the GRB function. Bit 6 IOB2 0 Bit 5 IOB1 0 1 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Notes: 1. After a reset, the output conforms to the TOLR setting until the first compare match. 2. Channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. This setting selects 1 output instead. GRB is an input compare register Function GRB is an output compare register No output at compare match (Initial value) *1 0 output at GRB compare match 1 output at GRB compare match* 1 Output toggles at GRB compare match 12 (1 output in channel 2)* * GRB captures rising edge of input GRB captures falling edge of input GRB captures both edges of input Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 355 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 3--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bits 2 to 0--I/O Control A2 to A0 (IOA2 to IOA0): These bits select the GRA function. Bit 2 IOA2 0 Bit 1 IOA1 0 1 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Notes: 1. After a reset, the output conforms to the TOLR setting until the first compare match. 2. Channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. This setting selects 1 output instead. GRA is an input compare register Function GRA is an output compare register No output at compare match (Initial value) *1 0 output at GRA compare match 1 output at GRA compare match* 1 Output toggles at GRA compare match 12 (1 output in channel 2)* * GRA captures rising edge of input GRA captures falling edge of input GRA captures both edges of input 9.2.11 Timer Output Level Setting Register C (TOLR) TOLR is an 8-bit write-only register that selects the timer output level for channels 0 to 2. Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 TOB2 0 W 4 TOA2 0 W 3 TOB1 0 W 2 TOA1 0 W 1 TOB0 0 W 0 TOA0 0 W Output level setting A2 to A0, B2 to B0 These bits set the levels of the timer outputs (TIOCA2 to TIOCA0, and TIOCB2 to TIOCB0) Reserved bits A TOLR setting can only be made when the corresponding bit in TSTR is 0. TOLR is a write-only register; if read, a value of 1 will be returned. TOLR is initialized to H'C0 by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 356 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bits 7 and 6--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified. Bit 5--Output Level Setting B2 (TOB2): Sets the value of timer output TIOCB2. Bit 5 TOB2 0 1 Description TIOCB2 is 0 TIOCB2 is 1 (Initial value) Bit 4--Output Level Setting A2 (TOA2): Sets the value of timer output TIOCA2. Bit 4 TOA2 0 1 Description TIOCA2 is 0 TIOCA2 is 1 (Initial value) Bit 3--Output Level Setting B1 (TOB1): Sets the value of timer output TIOCB1. Bit 3 TOB1 0 1 Description TIOCB1 is 0 TIOCB1 is 1 (Initial value) Bit 2--Output Level Setting A1 (TOA1): Sets the value of timer output TIOCA1. Bit 2 TOA1 0 1 Description TIOCA1 is 0 TIOCA1 is 1 (Initial value) Bit 1--Output Level Setting B0 (TOB0): Sets the value of timer output TIOCB0. Bit 0 TOB0 0 1 Description TIOCB0 is 0 TIOCB0 is 1 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 357 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Bit 0--Output Level Setting A0 (TOA0): Sets the value of timer output TIOCA0. Bit 0 TOA0 0 1 Description TIOCA0 is 0 TIOCA0 is 1 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 358 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.3 9.3.1 CPU Interface 16-Bit Accessible Registers The timer counters (TCNTs), general registers A and B (GRAs and GRBs) are 16-bit registers, and are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit data bus. These registers can be written or read a word at a time, or a byte at a time. Figures 9.4 and 9.5 show examples of word read/write access to a timer counter (TCNT). Figures 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, and 9.9 show examples of byte read/write access to TCNTH and TCNTL. On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 9.4 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCNT, Word) On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 9.5 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCNT, Word) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 359 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 9.6 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCNT, Upper Byte) On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 9.7 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCNT, Lower Byte) On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 9.8 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCNT, Upper Byte) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 360 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 9.9 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCNT, Lower Byte) 9.3.2 8-Bit Accessible Registers The registers other than the timer counters, general registers, and buffer registers are 8-bit registers. These registers are linked to the CPU by an internal 8-bit data bus. Figures 9.10 and 9.11 show examples of byte read and write access to a TCR. If a word-size data transfer instruction is executed, two byte transfers are performed. On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCR Figure 9.10 TCR Access (CPU Writes to TCR) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 361 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer On-chip data bus H CPU L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCR Figure 9.11 TCR Access (CPU Reads TCR) 9.4 9.4.1 Operation Overview A summary of operations in the various modes is given below. Normal Operation: Each channel has a timer counter and general registers. The timer counter counts up, and can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, or external event counter. General registers A and B can be used for input capture or output compare. Synchronous Operation: The timer counters in designated channels are preset synchronously. Data written to the timer counter in any one of these channels is simultaneously written to the timer counters in the other channels as well. The timer counters can also be cleared synchronously if so designated by the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in the TCRs. PWM Mode: A PWM waveform is output from the TIOCA pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match A and to 0 at compare match B. The duty cycle can be varied from 0% to 100% depending on the settings of GRA and GRB. When a channel is set to PWM mode, its GRA and GRB automatically become output compare registers. Phase Counting Mode: The phase relationship between two clock signals input at TCLKA and TCLKB is detected and TCNT2 counts up or down accordingly. When phase counting mode is selected TCLKA and TCLKB become clock input pins and TCNT2 operates as an up/downcounter. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 362 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.4.2 Basic Functions Counter Operation: When one of bits STR0 to STR2 is set to 1 in the timer start register (TSTR), the timer counter (TCNT) in the corresponding channel starts counting. The counting can be freerunning or periodic. * Sample setup procedure for counter Figure 9.12 shows a sample procedure for setting up a counter. Counter setup Select counter clock 1 Type of counting? Yes Periodic counting No Free-running counting Select counter clear source 2 Select output compare register function 3 Set period 4 Start counter Periodic counter 5 Start counter Free-running counter 5 Figure 9.12 Counter Setup Procedure (Example) 1. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to select the counter clock source. If an external clock source is selected, set bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR to select the desired edge(s) of the external clock signal. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 363 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 2. For periodic counting, set CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to have TCNT cleared at GRA compare match or GRB compare match. 3. Set TIOR to select the output compare function of GRA or GRB, whichever was selected in step 2. 4. Write the count period in GRA or GRB, whichever was selected in step 2. 5. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. * Free-running and periodic counter operation A reset leaves the counters (TCNTs) in 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2 all set as free-running counters. A free-running counter starts counting up when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the count overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the OVF flag is set to 1 in TISRC. After the overflow, the counter continues counting up from H'0000. Figure 9.13 illustrates free-running counting. TCNT value H'FFFF H'0000 STR0 to STR2 bit OVF Time Figure 9.13 Free-Running Counter Operation When a channel is set to have its counter cleared by compare match, in that channel TCNT operates as a periodic counter. Select the output compare function of GRA or GRB, set bit CCLR1 or CCLR0 in TCR to have the counter cleared by compare match, and set the count period in GRA or GRB. After these settings, the counter starts counting up as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit is set to 1 in TSTR. When the count matches GRA or GRB, the IMFA or IMFB flag is set to 1 in TISRA/TISRB and the counter is cleared to H'0000. If the corresponding IMIEA or IMIEB bit is set to 1 in TISRA/TISRB, a CPU interrupt is requested at this time. After the compare match, TCNT continues counting up from H'0000. Figure 9.14 illustrates periodic counting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 364 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer TCNT value GR Counter cleared by general register compare match H'0000 STR bit IMF Time Figure 9.14 Periodic Counter Operation * TCNT count timing Internal clock source Bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR select the system clock () or one of three internal clock sources obtained by prescaling the system clock (/2, /4, /8). Figure 9.15 shows the timing. Internal clock TCNT input TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 9.15 Count Timing for Internal Clock Sources External clock source Bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR select an external clock input pin (TCLKA to TCLKD), and its valid edge or edges are selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0. The rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected. The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks when a single edge is selected, and at least 2.5 system clocks when both edges are selected. Shorter pulses will not be counted correctly. Figure 9.16 shows the timing when both edges are detected. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 365 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer External clock input TCNT input TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 9.16 Count Timing for External Clock Sources (when Both Edges are Detected) Waveform Output by Compare Match: In 16-bit timer channels 0, 1 compare match A or B can cause the output at the TIOCA or TIOCB pin to go to 0, go to 1, or toggle. In channel 2 the output can only go to 0 or go to 1. * Sample setup procedure for waveform output by compare match Figure 9.17 shows the timing for detection of both rising and falling edges. Output setup 1. Select the compare match output mode (0, 1, or toggle) in TIOR. When a waveform output mode is selected, the pin switches from its generic input/ output function to the output compare function (TIOCA or TIOCB). An output compare pin outputs the value set in TOLR until the first compare match occurs. 2. Set a value in GRA or GRB to designate the compare match timing. Select waveform output mode 1 Set output timing 2 Start counter 3 3. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. Waveform output Figure 9.17 Setup Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match (Example) * Examples of waveform output Figure 9.18 shows examples of 0 and 1 output. TCNT operates as a free-running counter, 0 output is selected for compare match A, and 1 output is selected for compare match B. When the pin is already at the selected output level, the pin level does not change. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 366 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer TCNT value H'FFFF GRB GRA H'0000 TIOCB Time No change No change 1 output TIOCA No change No change 0 output Figure 9.18 0 and 1 Output (TOA = 1, TOB = 0) Figure 9.19 shows examples of toggle output. TCNT operates as a periodic counter, cleared by compare match B. Toggle output is selected for both compare match A and B. TCNT value GRB Counter cleared by compare match with GRB GRA H'0000 TIOCB Time Toggle output Toggle output TIOCA Figure 9.19 Toggle Output (TOA = 1, TOB = 0) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 367 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer * Output compare output timing The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which TCNT and the general register match (when TCNT changes from the matching value to the next value). When the compare match signal is generated, the output value selected in TIOR is output at the output compare pin (TIOCA or TIOCB). When TCNT matches a general register, the compare match signal is not generated until the next counter clock pulse. Figure 9.20 shows the output compare timing. TCNT input clock TCNT N N+1 GR Compare match signal TIOCA, TIOCB N Figure 9.20 Output Compare Output Timing Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be captured into a general register when a transition occurs at an input capture/output compare pin (TIOCA or TIOCB). Capture can take place on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges. The input capture function can be used to measure pulse width or period. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 368 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer * Sample setup procedure for input capture Figure 9.21 shows a sample procedure for setting up input capture. Input selection 1. Set TIOR to select the input capture function of a general register and the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture signal. Clear the DDR bit to 0 before making these TIOR settings. 1 Select input-capture input Start counter 2 2. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. Input capture Figure 9.21 Setup Procedure for Input Capture (Example) * Examples of input capture Figure 9.22 illustrates input capture when the falling edge of TIOCB and both edges of TIOCA are selected as capture edges. TCNT is cleared by input capture into GRB. TCNT value H'0180 H'0160 H'0005 H'0000 TIOCB TIOCA GRA H'0005 H'0160 GRB H'0180 Figure 9.22 Input Capture (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 369 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer * Input capture signal timing Input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected by settings in TIOR. Figure 9.23 shows the timing when the rising edge is selected. The pulse width of the input capture signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks for single-edge capture, and 2.5 system clocks for capture of both edges. Input-capture input Input capture signal TCNT N GRA, GRB N Figure 9.23 Input Capture Signal Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 370 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.4.3 Synchronization The synchronization function enables two or more timer counters to be synchronized by writing the same data to them simultaneously (synchronous preset). With appropriate TCR settings, two or more timer counters can also be cleared simultaneously (synchronous clear). Synchronization enables additional general registers to be associated with a single time base. Synchronization can be selected for all channels (0 to 2). Sample Setup Procedure for Synchronization: Figure 9.24 shows a sample procedure for setting up synchronization. Setup for synchronization Select synchronization 1 Synchronous preset Synchronous clear Write to TCNT 2 Clearing synchronized to this channel? Yes Select counter clear source No 3 Select counter clear source 4 Start counter 5 Start counter 5 Synchronous preset Counter clear Synchronous clear 1. Set the SYNC bits to 1 in TSNC for the channels to be synchronized. 2. When a value is written in TCNT in one of the synchronized channels, the same value is simultaneously written in TCNT in the other channels (synchronized preset). 3. Set the CCLR1 or CCLR0 bit in TCR to have the counter cleared by compare match or input capture. 4. Set the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR to have the counter cleared synchronously. 5. Set the STR bits in TSTR to 1 to start the synchronized counters. Figure 9.24 Setup Procedure for Synchronization (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 371 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Example of Synchronization: Figure 9.25 shows an example of synchronization. Channels 0, 1, and 2 are synchronized, and are set to operate in PWM mode. Channel 0 is set for counter clearing by compare match with GRB0. Channels 1 and 2 are set for synchronous counter clearing. The timer counters in channels 0, 1, and 2 are synchronously preset, and are synchronously cleared by compare match with GRB0. A three-phase PWM waveform is output from pins TIOCA0, TIOCA1, and TIOCA2. For further information on PWM mode, see section 9.4.4, PWM Mode. Value of TCNT0 to TCNT2 Cleared by compare match with GRB0 GRB0 GRB1 GRA0 GRB2 GRA1 GRA2 H'0000 TIOCA0 TIOCA1 TIOCA2 Figure 9.25 Synchronization (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 372 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.4.4 PWM Mode In PWM mode GRA and GRB are paired and a PWM waveform is output from the TIOCA pin. GRA specifies the time at which the PWM output changes to 1. GRB specifies the time at which the PWM output changes to 0. If either GRA or GRB is selected as the counter clear source, a PWM waveform with a duty cycle from 0% to 100% is output at the TIOCA pin. PWM mode can be selected in all channels (0 to 2). Table 9.4 summarizes the PWM output pins and corresponding registers. If the same value is set in GRA and GRB, the output does not change when compare match occurs. Table 9.4 Channel 0 1 2 PWM Output Pins and Registers Output Pin TIOCA0 TIOCA1 TIOCA2 1 Output GRA0 GRA1 GRA2 0 Output GRB0 GRB1 GRB2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 373 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Sample Setup Procedure for PWM Mode: Figure 9.26 shows a sample procedure for setting up PWM mode. PWM mode Select counter clock 1 Select counter clear source 2 Set GRA 3 Set GRB 4 Select PWM mode 5 Start counter 6 PWM mode 1. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to select the counter clock source. If an external clock source is selected, set bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR to select the desired edge(s) of the external clock signal. 2. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to select the counter clear source. 3. Set the time at which the PWM waveform should go to 1 in GRA. 4. Set the time at which the PWM waveform should go to 0 in GRB. 5. Set the PWM bit in TMDR to select PWM mode. When PWM mode is selected, regardless of the TIOR contents, GRA and GRB become output compare registers specifying the times at which the PWM output goes to 1 and 0. The TIOCA pin automatically becomes the PWM output pin. The TIOCB pin conforms to the settings of bits IOB1 and IOB0 in TIOR. If TIOCB output is not desired, clear both IOB1 and IOB0 to 0. 6. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. Figure 9.26 Setup Procedure for PWM Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 374 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Examples of PWM Mode: Figure 9.27 shows examples of operation in PWM mode. In PWM mode TIOCA becomes an output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA, and to 0 at compare match with GRB. In the examples shown, TCNT is cleared by compare match with GRA or GRB. Synchronized operation and free-running counting are also possible. TCNT value Counter cleared by compare match A GRA GRB H'0000 Time TIOCA a. Counter cleared by GRA (TOA = 1) TCNT value Counter cleared by compare match B GRB GRA H'0000 Time TIOCA b. Counter cleared by GRB (TOA = 0) Figure 9.27 PWM Mode (Example 1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 375 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Figure 9.28 shows examples of the output of PWM waveforms with duty cycles of 0% and 100%. If the counter is cleared by compare match with GRB, and GRA is set to a higher value than GRB, the duty cycle is 0%. If the counter is cleared by compare match with GRA, and GRB is set to a higher value than GRA, the duty cycle is 100%. TCNT value GRB Counter cleared by compare match B GRA H'0000 Time TIOCA Write to GRA Write to GRA a. 0% duty cycle (TOA=0) TCNT value GRA Counter cleared by compare match A GRB H'0000 Time TIOCA Write to GRB Write to GRB b. 100% duty cycle (TOA=1) Figure 9.28 PWM Mode (Example 2) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 376 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.4.5 Phase Counting Mode In phase counting mode the phase difference between two external clock inputs (at the TCLKA and TCLKB pins) is detected, and TCNT2 counts up or down accordingly. In phase counting mode, the TCLKA and TCLKB pins automatically function as external clock input pins and TCNT2 becomes an up/down-counter, regardless of the settings of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0, CKEG1, and CKEG0 in TCR2. Settings of bits CCLR1, CCLR0 in TCR2, and settings in TIOR2, TISRA, TISRB, TISRC, STR2 in TSTR, GRA2, and GRB2 are valid. The input capture and output compare functions can be used, and interrupts can be generated. Phase counting is available only in channel 2. Sample Setup Procedure for Phase Counting Mode: Figure 9.29 shows a sample procedure for setting up phase counting mode. Phase counting mode Select phase counting mode 1 Select flag setting condition 2 1. Set the MDF bit in TMDR to 1 to select phase counting mode. 2. Select the flag setting condition with the FDIR bit in TMDR. 3. Set the STR2 bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. Start counter 3 Phase counting mode Figure 9.29 Setup Procedure for Phase Counting Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 377 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Example of Phase Counting Mode: Figure 9.30 shows an example of operations in phase counting mode. Table 9.5 lists the up-counting and down-counting conditions for TCNT2. In phase counting mode both the rising and falling edges of TCLKA and TCLKB are counted. The phase difference between TCLKA and TCLKB must be at least 1.5 states, the phase overlap must also be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. TCNT2 value Counting up Counting down Time TCLKB TCLKA Figure 9.30 Operation in Phase Counting Mode (Example) Table 9.5 Up/Down Counting Conditions Up-Counting High Low High Low Down-Counting High Low Low High Counting Direction TCLKB pin TCLKA pin Phase difference Phase difference Pulse width Pulse width TCLKA TCLKB Phase difference and overlap: at least 1.5 states Pulse width: at least 2.5 states Overlap Overlap Figure 9.31 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 378 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.4.6 Setting Initial Value of 16-Bit Timer Output Any desired value can be specified for the initial 16-bit timer output value when a timer count operation is started by making a setting in TOLR. Figure 9.32 shows the timing for setting the initial output value with TOLR. Only write to TOLR when the corresponding bit in TSTR is cleared to 0. T1 T2 T3 Address bus TOLR address TOLR N 16-bit timer output pin N Figure 9.32 Example of Timing for Setting Initial Value of 16-Bit Timer Output by Writing to TOLR Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 379 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.5 Interrupts The 16-bit timer has two types of interrupts: input capture/compare match interrupts, and overflow interrupts. 9.5.1 Setting of Status Flags Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB at Compare Match: IMFA and IMFB are set to 1 by a compare match signal generated when TCNT matches a general register (GR). The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when TCNT is updated from the matching count to the next count). Therefore, when TCNT matches a general register, the compare match signal is not generated until the next TCNT clock input. Figure 9.33 shows the timing of the setting of IMFA and IMFB. TCNT input clock TCNT N N+1 GR N Compare match signal IMF IMI Figure 9.33 Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB by Compare Match Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 380 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB by Input Capture: IMFA and IMFB are set to 1 by an input capture signal. The TCNT contents are simultaneously transferred to the corresponding general register. Figure 9.34 shows the timing. Input capture signal IMF TCNT N GR N IMI Figure 9.34 Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB by Input Capture Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 381 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF): OVF is set to 1 when TCNT overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000 or underflows from H'0000 to H'FFFF. Figure 9.35 shows the timing. TCNT Overflow signal OVF OVI Figure 9.35 Timing of Setting of OVF 9.5.2 Timing of Clearing of Status Flags If the CPU reads a status flag while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the status flag, the status flag is cleared. Figure 9.36 shows the timing. TISR write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address TISR address IMF, OVF Figure 9.36 Timing of Clearing of Status Flags Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 382 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.5.3 Interrupt Sources and DMA Controller Activation Each 16-bit timer channel can generate a compare match/input capture A interrupt, a compare match/input capture B interrupt, and an overflow interrupt. In total there are nine interrupt sources of three kinds, all independently vectored. An interrupt is requested when the interrupt request flag are set to 1. The priority order of the channels can be modified in interrupt priority register A (IPRA). For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Compare match/input capture A interrupts in channels 0 to 2 can activate the DMA controller (DMAC). When the DMAC is activated a CPU interrupt is not requested. Table 9.6 lists the interrupt sources. Table 9.6 16-bit timer Interrupt Sources Interrupt Source IMIA0 IMIB0 OVI0 IMIA1 IMIB1 OVI1 IMIA2 IMIB2 OVI2 DMAC Activatable Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No Channel 0 Description Compare match/input capture A0 Compare match/input capture B0 Overflow 0 Compare match/input capture A1 Compare match/input capture B1 Overflow 1 Compare match/input capture A2 Compare match/input capture B2 Overflow 2 Priority* High 1 2 Low Note: * The priority immediately after a reset is indicated. Inter-channel priorities can be changed by settings in IPRA. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 383 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 9.6 Usage Notes This section describes contention and other matters requiring special attention during 16-bit timer operations. Contention between TCNT Write and Clear: If a counter clear signal occurs in the T3 state of a TCNT write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. See figure 9.37. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCNT address Internal write signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'0000 Figure 9.37 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 384 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Contention between TCNT Word Write and Increment: If an increment pulse occurs in the T3 state of a TCNT word write cycle, writing takes priority and TCNT is not incremented. Figure 9.38 shows the timing in this case. TCNT word write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M TCNT write data Figure 9.38 Contention between TCNT Word Write and Increment Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 385 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Contention between TCNT Byte Write and Increment: If an increment pulse occurs in the T2 or T3 state of a TCNT byte write cycle, writing takes priority and TCNT is not incremented. The TCNT byte that was not written retains its previous value. See figure 9.39, which shows an increment pulse occurring in the T2 state of a byte write to TCNTH. TCNTH byte write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCNTH address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNTH N TCNT write data M TCNTL X X+1 X Figure 9.39 Contention between TCNT Byte Write and Increment Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 386 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Contention between General Register Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T3 state of a general register write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited. See figure 9.40. General register write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus GR address Internal write signal TCNT N N+1 GR N M General register write data Compare match signal Inhibited Figure 9.40 Contention between General Register Write and Compare Match Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 387 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow or Underflow: If an overflow occurs in the T3 state of a TCNT write cycle, writing takes priority and the counter is not incremented. OVF is set to 1.The same holds for underflow. See figure 9.41. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock Overflow signal TCNT H'FFFF TCNT write data M OVF Figure 9.41 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 388 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Contention between General Register Read and Input Capture: If an input capture signal occurs during the T3 state of a general register read cycle, the value before input capture is read. See figure 9.42. General register read cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus GR address Internal read signal Input capture signal GR X M Internal data bus X Figure 9.42 Contention between General Register Read and Input Capture Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 389 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Contention between Counter Clearing by Input Capture and Counter Increment: If an input capture signal and counter increment signal occur simultaneously, the counter is cleared according to the input capture signal. The counter is not incremented by the increment signal.The counter is not incremented by the increment signal. The value before the counter is cleared is transferred to the general register. See figure 9.43. Input capture signal Counter clear signal TCNT input clock TCNT N H'0000 GR N Figure 9.43 Contention between Counter Clearing by Input Capture and Counter Increment Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 390 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Contention between General Register Write and Input Capture: If an input capture signal occurs in the T3 state of a general register write cycle, input capture takes priority and the write to the general register is not performed. See figure 9.44. General register write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus GR address Internal write signal Input capture signal TCNT M GR M Figure 9.44 Contention between General Register Write and Input Capture Note on Waveform Period Setting: When a counter is cleared by compare match, the counter is cleared in the last state at which the TCNT value matches the general register value, at the time when this value would normally be updated to the next count. The actual counter frequency is therefore given by the following formula: f= (N+1) (f: counter frequency. : system clock frequency. N: value set in general register.) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 391 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Note on Writes in Synchronized Operation: When channels are synchronized, if a TCNT value is modified by byte write access, all 16 bits of all synchronized counters assume the same value as the counter that was addressed. (Example) When channels 1 and 2 are synchronized * Byte write to channel 1 or byte write to channel 2 Write A to upper byte of channel 1 TCNT1 TCNT2 W Y X Z TCNT1 TCNT2 A A X X Upper byte Lower byte Write A to lower byte of channel 2 TCNT1 TCNT2 Upper byte Lower byte Y Y A A Upper byte Lower byte * Word write to channel 1 or word write to channel 2 TCNT1 TCNT2 W Y X Z Write AB word to channel 1 or 2 TCNT1 TCNT2 A A B B Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 392 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer 16-bit timer Operating Modes: Table 9.7 (a)16-bit timer Operating Modes (Channel 0) Register Settings TSNC Operating Mode Synchronous preset PWM mode Output compare A Synchronization MDF TMDR FDIR PWM PWM0 = 1 PWM0 = 0 IOA2 = 0 Other bits unrestricted IOB2 = 0 Other bits unrestricted PWM0 = 0 IOA2 = 1 Other bits unrestricted IOB2 = 1 Other bits unrestricted CCLR1 = 0 CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 1 CCLR0 = 0 CCLR1 = 1 CCLR0 = 1 * IOA TIOR0 IOB Clear Select TCR0 Clock Select SYNC0 = 1 Output compare B Input capture A Input capture B PWM0 = 0 Counter By compare clearing match/input capture A By compare match/input capture B Synchronous clear Legend: SYNC0 = 1 Setting available (valid). Setting does not affect this mode. Note: * The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 393 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Table 9.7 (b) 16-bit timer Operating Modes (Channel 1) Register Settings TSNC Operating Mode Synchronous preset PWM mode Output compare A Synchronization MDF TMDR FDIR PWM PWM1 = 1 PWM1 = 0 IOA2 = 0 Other bits unrestricted IOB2 = 0 Other bits unrestricted PWM1 = 0 IOA2 = 1 Other bits unrestricted IOB2 = 1 Other bits unrestricted CCLR1 = 0 CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 1 CCLR0 = 0 CCLR1 = 1 CCLR0 = 1 * IOA TIOR1 IOB Clear Select TCR1 Clock Select SYNC1 = 1 Output compare B Input capture A Input capture B PWM1 = 0 Counter By compare clearing match/input capture A By compare match/input capture B Synchronous clear SYNC1 = 1 Legend: Setting available (valid). Setting does not affect this mode. Notes: * The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 394 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Table 9.7 (c) 16-bit timer Operating Modes (Channel 2) Register Settings TSNC Operating Mode Synchronous preset PWM mode Output compare A Synchronization SYNC2 = 1 MDF TMDR FDIR PWM PWM2 = 1 PWM2 = 0 IOA2 = 0 Other bits unrestricted IOB2 = 0 Other bits unrestricted PWM2 = 0 IOA2 = 1 Other bits unrestricted IOB2 = 1 Other bits unrestricted CCLR1 = 0 CCLR0 = 1 CCLR1 = 1 CCLR0 = 0 CCLR1 = 1 CCLR0 = 1 * IOA TIOR2 IOB Clear Select TCR2 Clock Select Output compare B Input capture A Input capture B PWM2 = 0 Counter By compare clearing match/input capture A By compare match/input capture B Synchronous clear Phase counting mode SYNC2 = 1 MDF = 1 Legend: Setting available (valid). Setting does not affect this mode. Note: * The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 395 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 9 16-Bit Timer Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 396 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group has a built-in 8-bit timer module with four channels (TMR0, TMR1, TMR2, and TMR3), based on 8-bit counters. Each channel has an 8-bit timer counter (TCNT) and two 8bit time constant registers (TCORA and TCORB) that are constantly compared with the TCNT value to detect compare match events. The timers can be used as multifunctional timers in a variety of applications, including the generation of a rectangular-wave output with an arbitrary duty cycle. 10.1.1 Features The features of the 8-bit timer module are listed below. * Selection of four clock sources The counters can be driven by one of three internal clock signals (/8, /64, or /8192) or an external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter). * Selection of three ways to clear the counters The counters can be cleared on compare match A or B, or input capture B. * Timer output controlled by two compare match signals The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by two independent compare match signals, enabling the timer to generate output waveforms with an arbitrary duty cycle or PWM output. * A/D converter can be activated by a compare match * Two channels can be cascaded Channels 0 and 1 can be operated as the upper and lower halves of a 16-bit timer (16-bit count mode). Channels 2 and 3 can be operated as the upper and lower halves of a 16-bit timer (16-bit count mode). Channel 1 can count channel 0 compare match events (compare match count mode). Channel 3 can count channel 2 compare match events (compare match count mode). * Input capture function can be set 8-bit or 16-bit input capture operation is available. * Twelve interrupt sources There are twelve interrupt sources: four compare match sources, four compare match/input capture sources, four overflow sources. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 397 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Two of the compare match sources and two of the combined compare match/input capture sources each have an independent interrupt vector. The remaining compare match interrupts, combined compare match/input capture interrupts, and overflow interrupts have one interrupt vector for two sources. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 398 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.1.2 Block Diagram The 8-bit timers are divided into two groups of two channels each: group 0 comprising channels 0 and 1, and group 1 comprising channels 2 and 3. Figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of 8-bit timer group 0. External clock sources TCLKA TCLKC Internal clock sources /8 /64 /8192 Clock select Clock 1 Clock 0 TCORA0 Compare match A1 Compare match A0 Comparator A0 Overflow 1 Overflow 0 TCNT0 TCNT1 Internal bus TCORA1 Comparator A1 TMO0 TMIO1 Control logic Compare match B1 Compare match B0 Comparator B0 Input capture B1 TCORB0 Comparator B1 TCORB1 TCSR0 TCSR1 TCR0 CMIA0 CMIB0 CMIA1/CMIB1 OVI0/OVI1 Interrupt signals Legend TCORA TCORB TCNT TCSR TCR : Timer constant register A : Timer constant register B : Timer counter : Timer control/status register : Timer control register TCR1 Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Unit (Two Channels: Group 0) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 399 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 10.1 summarizes the input/output pins of the 8-bit timer module. Table 10.1 8-Bit Timer Pins Group 0 Channel Name 0 1 Timer output Timer clock input Abbreviation I/O TMO0 TCLKC Input/output Output Compare match output Input I/O Input Input I/O Input Counter external clock input Compare match output/input capture input Counter external clock input Counter external clock input Compare match output/input capture input Counter external clock input Timer input/output TMIO1 Timer clock input TCLKA TMO2 TCLKD 1 2 3 Timer output Timer clock input Output Compare match output Timer input/output TMIO3 Timer clock input TCLKB Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 400 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.1.4 Register Configuration Table 10.2 summarizes the registers of the 8-bit timer module. Table 10.2 8-Bit Timer Registers Channel Address* 0 H'FFF80 H'FFF82 H'FFF84 H'FFF86 H'FFF88 1 H'FFF81 H'FFF83 H'FFF85 H'FFF87 H'FFF89 2 H'FFF90 H'FFF92 H'FFF94 H'FFF96 H'FFF98 3 H'FFF91 H'FFF93 H'FFF95 H'FFF97 H'FFF99 1 Name Timer control register 0 Timer control/status register 0 Timer constant register A0 Timer constant register B0 Timer counter 0 Timer control register 1 Timer control/status register 1 Timer constant register A1 Timer constant register B1 Timer counter 1 Timer control register 2 Timer control/status register 2 Timer constant register A2 Timer constant register B2 Timer counter 2 Timer control register 3 Timer control/status register 3 Timer constant register A3 Timer constant register B3 Timer counter 3 Abbreviation R/W TCR0 TCSR0 TCORA0 TCORB0 TCNT0 TCR1 TCSR1 TCORA1 TCORB1 TCNT1 TCR2 TCSR2 TCORA2 TCORB2 TCNT2 TCR3 TCSR3 TCORA3 TCORB3 TCNT3 R/W 2 Initial value H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'00 2 R/(W)* H'00 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 2 R/(W)* H'00 2 R/(W)* H'00 Notes: 1. Indicates the lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. Each pair of registers for channel 0 and channel 1 comprises a 16-bit register with the channel 0 register as the upper 8 bits and the channel 1 register as the lower 8 bits, so they can be accessed together by word access. Similarly, each pair of registers for channel 2 and channel 3 comprises a 16-bit register with the channel 2 register as the upper 8 bits and the channel 3 register as the lower 8 bits, so they can be accessed together by word access. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 401 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.2 10.2.1 Register Descriptions Timer Counters (TCNT) TCNT0 Bit 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 TCNT1 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCNT2 TCNT3 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The timer counters (TCNT) are 8-bit readable/writable up-counters that increment on pulses generated from an internal or external clock source. The clock source is selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0) in the timer control register (TCR). The CPU can always read or write to the timer counters. The TCNT0 and TCNT1 pair, and the TCNT2 and TCNT3 pair, can each be accessed as a 16-bit register by word access. TCNT can be cleared by an input capture signal or compare match signal. Counter clear bits 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0) in TCR select the method of clearing. When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00, the overflow flag (OVF) in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is set to 1. Each TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 402 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.2.2 Time Constant Registers A (TCORA) TCORA0 Bit 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 TCORA1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORA2 TCORA3 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORA0 to TCORA3 are 8-bit readable/writable registers. The TCORA0 and TCORA1 pair, and the TCORA2 and TCORA3 pair, can each be accessed as a 16-bit register by word access. The TCORA value is constantly compared with the TCNT value. When a match is detected, the corresponding compare match flag A (CMFA) is set to 1 in TCSR. The timer output can be freely controlled by these compare match signals and the settings of output select bits 1 and 0 (OS1, OS0) in TCSR. Each TCORA register is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 403 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.2.3 Time Constant Registers B (TCORB) TCORB0 Bit 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 TCORB1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORB2 TCORB3 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORB0 to TCORB3 are 8-bit readable/writable registers. The TCORB0 and TCORB1 pair, and the TCORB2 and TCORB3 pair, can each be accessed as a 16-bit register by word access. The TCORB value is constantly compared with the TCNT value. When a match is detected, the corresponding compare match flag B (CMFB) is set to 1 in TCSR. The timer output can be freely controlled by these compare match signals and the settings of output/input capture edge select bits 3 and 2 (OIS3, OIS2) in TCSR. When TCORB is used for input capture, it stores the TCNT value on detection of an external input capture signal. At this time, the CMFB flag is set to 1 in the corresponding TCSR register. The detected edge of the input capture signal is set in TCSR. Each TCORB register is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 404 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.2.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) Bit 7 CMIEB 0 R/W 6 CMIEA 0 R/W 5 OVIE 0 R/W 4 CCLR1 0 R/W 3 CCLR0 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the input clock source and the time at which TCNT is cleared, and enables interrupts. TCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. For the timing, see section 10.4, Operation. Bit 7--Compare Match Interrupt Enable B (CMIEB): Enables or disables the CMIB interrupt request when the CMFB flag is set to 1 in TCSR. Bit 7 CMIEB 0 1 Description CMIB interrupt requested by CMFB is disabled CMIB interrupt requested by CMFB is enabled (Initial value) Bit 6--Compare Match Interrupt Enable A (CMIEA): Enables or disables the CMIA interrupt request when the CMFA flag is set to 1 in TCSR. Bit 6 CMIEA 0 1 Description CMIA interrupt requested by CMFA is disabled CMIA interrupt requested by CMFA is enabled (Initial value) Bit 5--Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): Enables or disables the OVI interrupt request when the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. Bit 5 OVIE 0 1 Description OVI interrupt requested by OVF is disabled OVI interrupt requested by OVF is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 405 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Bits 4 and 3--Counter Clear 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0): These bits select how TCNT is cleared: by compare match A or B, or input capture B.. Bit 4 CCLR1 0 1 Bit 3 CCLR0 0 1 0 1 Description Clearing is disabled Cleared by compare match A Cleared by compare match B/ input capture B Cleared by input capture B (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 406 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Bits 2 to 0--Clock Select 2 to 0 (CSK2 to CSK0): These bits select whether the clock input to TCNT is an internal or external clock. Three internal clocks can be selected, all divided from the system clock (): /8, /64, and /8192. The rising edge of the selected internal clock triggers the count. When use of an external clock is selected, three types of count can be selected: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. Some functions differ between channels 0 and 2 and channels 1 and 3. Bit 2 CKS2 0 Bit 1 CKS1 0 1 1 0 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 0 1 0 Description Clock input disabled Internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8 Internal clock, counted on rising edge of /64 Internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8192 1 Channel 0: Count on TCNT1 overflow signal* 1 Channel 1: Count on TCNT0 compare match A* 2 Channel 2: Count on TCNT3 overflow signal* 2 Channel 3: Count on TCNT2 compare match A* (Initial value) 1 1 0 1 External clock, counted on falling edge External clock, counted on rising edge External clock, counted on both rising and falling edges Notes: 1. If the clock input of channel 0 is the TCNT1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the TCNT0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. Do not use this setting. 2. If the clock input of channel 2 is the TCNT3 overflow signal and that of channel 3 is the TCNT2 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. Do not use this setting. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 407 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.2.5 Timer Control/Status Registers (TCSR) TCSR0 Bit Initial value Read/Write TCSR2 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 1 3 OIS3 0 R/W 2 OIS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ADTE 0 R/W 3 OIS3 0 R/W 2 OIS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W TCSR1, TCSR3 7 Bit CMFB Initial value Read/Write 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ICE 0 R/W 3 OIS3 0 R/W 2 OIS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. The timer control/status registers (TCSR0 to TCSR3) are 8-bit registers that indicate compare match/input capture and overflow statuses, and control compare match output/input capture edge selection. Each TCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 408 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Bit 7--Compare Match/Input Capture Flag B (CMFB): Status flag that indicates the occurrence of a TCORB compare match or input capture. Bit 7 CMFB 0 1 Description Clearing condition Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB (Initial value) Setting conditions TCNT = TCORB The TCNT value is transferred to TCORB by an input capture signal when TCORB functions as an input capture register Bit 6--Compare Match Flag A (CMFA): Status flag that indicates the occurrence of a TCORA compare match. Bit 6 CMFA 0 1 Description Clearing condition Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA Setting condition TCNT = TCORA (Initial value) Bit 5--Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): Status flag that indicates that the TCNT has overflowed (from H'FF to H'00). Bit 5 OVF 0 1 Description Clearing condition Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF Setting condition TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 409 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Bit 4--A/D Trigger Enable (ADTE) (TCSR0): In combination with TRGE in the A/D control register (ADCR), enables or disables A/D converter start requests by compare match A or an external trigger. TCSR2 is a reserved bit, but can be read and written. TRGE* 0 Bit 4 ADTE 0 1 1 0 1 Description A/D converter start requests by compare match A or an external trigger are disabled (Initial value) A/D converter start requests by compare match A or an external trigger are disabled A/D converter start requests by an external trigger are enabled, and A/D converter start requests by compare match A are disabled A/D converter start requests by compare match A are enabled, and A/D converter start requests by an external trigger are disabled Note: * TRGE is bit 7 of the A/D control register (ADCR). Bit 4--Input Capture Enable (ICE) (TCSR1, TCSR3): Selects the function of TCORB. Bit 4 ICE 0 1 Description TCORB is a compare match register TCORB is an input capture register (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 410 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Bits 3 and 2--Output/Input Capture Edge Select B3 and B2 (OIS3, OIS2): In combination with the ICE bit in TCSR1 (TCSR3), these bits select the compare match B output level or the input capture input detected edge. The function of TCORB1 (TCORB3) depends on the setting of bit 4 of TCSR1 (TCSR3). TCORB0 and TCORB2 function as compare match registers regardless of the setting of bit 4 of TCSR1 (TCSR3). ICE Bit in TCSR1 Bit 3 Bit 2 (TCSR3) OIS3 OIS2 Description 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 No change when compare match B occurs 0 is output when compare match B occurs 1 is output when compare match B occurs Output is inverted when compare match B occurs (toggle output) TCORB input capture on rising edge TCORB input capture on falling edge TCORB input capture on both rising and falling edges (Initial value) * When the compare match register function is used, the timer output priority order is: toggle output > 1 output > 0 output. * If compare match A and B occur simultaneously, the output changes in accordance with the higher-priority compare match. * When bits OIS3, OIS2, OS1, and OS0 are all cleared to 0, timer output is disabled. Bits 1 and 0--Output Select A1 and A0 (OS1, OS0): These bits select the compare match A output level. Bit 1 OS1 0 1 Bit 0 OS0 0 1 0 1 Description No change when compare match A occurs 0 is output when compare match A occurs 1 is output when compare match A occurs Output is inverted when compare match A occurs (toggle output) (Initial value) * When the compare match register function is used, the timer output priority order is: toggle output > 1 output > 0 output. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 411 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers * If compare match A and B occur simultaneously, the output changes in accordance with the higher-priority compare match. * When bits OIS3, OIS2, OS1, and OS0 are all cleared to 0, timer output is disabled. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 412 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.3 10.3.1 CPU Interface 8-Bit Registers TCNT, TCORA, TCORB, TCR, and TCSR are 8-bit registers. These registers are connected to the CPU by an internal 16-bit data bus and can be read and written a word at a time or a byte at a time. Figures 10.2 and 10.3 show the operation in word read and write accesses to TCNT. Figures 10.4 to 10.7 show the operation in byte read and write accesses to TCNT0 and TCNT1. Internal data bus H C P U L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNT0 TCNT1 Figure 10.2 TCNT Access Operation (CPU Writes to TCNT, Word) Internal data bus H C P U L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNT0 TCNT1 Figure 10.3 TCNT Access Operation (CPU Reads TCNT, Word) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 413 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Internal data bus H C P U L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNT0 TCNT1 Figure 10.4 TCNT Access Operation (CPU Writes to TCNT, Upper Byte) Internal data bus H C P U L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNT0 TCNT1 Figure 10.5 TCNT Access Operation (CPU Writes to TCNT, Lower Byte) Internal data bus H C P U L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNT0 TCNT1 Figure 10.6 TCNT Access Operation (CPU Reads TCNT, Upper Byte) Internal data bus H C P U L Bus interface H L Module data bus TCNT0 TCNT1 Figure 10.7 TCNT Access Operation (CPU Reads TCNT, Lower Byte) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 414 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.4 10.4.1 Operation TCNT Count Timing TCNT is incremented by input clock pulses (either internal or external). Internal Clock: Three different internal clock signals (/8, /64, or /8192) divided from the system clock () can be selected, by setting bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR. Figure 10.8 shows the count timing. Internal clock TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 10.8 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input Note: Even when the same internal clock is selected for both the 16- and 8-bit timers, they do not operate in the same manner because the count-up edge differs. External Clock: Three incrementation methods can be selected by setting bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR: on the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 serial clocks when a single edge is selected, and at least 2.5 system clocks when both edges are selected. Shorter pulses will not be counted correctly. Figure 10.9 shows the timing for incrementation on both edges of the external clock signal. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 415 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers External clock input TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 10.9 Count Timing for External Clock Input (when Detecting the Both Edges) 10.4.2 Compare Match Timing Timer Output Timing: When compare match A or B occurs, the timer output is as specified by the OIS3, OIS2, OS1, and OS0 bits in TCSR (unchanged, 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output). Figure 10.10 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle on compare match A. Compare match A signal Timer output Figure 10.10 Timing of Timer Output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 416 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Clear by Compare Match: Depending on the setting of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR, TCNT can be cleared when compare match A or B occurs, Figure 10.11 shows the timing of this operation. Compare match signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 10.11 Timing of Clear by Compare Match Clear by Input Capture: Depending on the setting of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR, TCNT can be cleared when input capture B occurs. Figure 10.12 shows the timing of this operation. Input capture input Input capture signal TCNT N H '00 Figure 10.12 Timing of Clear by Input Capture 10.4.3 Input Capture Signal Timing Input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected by settings in TCSR. Figure 10.13 shows the timing when the rising edge is selected. The pulse width of the input capture input signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks when a single edge is selected, and at least 2.5 system clocks when both edges are selected. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 417 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Input capture input Input capture signal TCNT N TCORB N Figure 10.13 Timing of Input Capture Input Signal 10.4.4 Timing of Status Flag Setting Timing of CMFA/CMFB Flag Setting when Compare Match Occurs: CMFA and CMFB in TCSR are set to 1 by the compare match signal output when the TCOR and TCNT values match. The compare match signal is generated in the last state of the match (when the matched TCNT count value is updated). Therefore, after the TCNT and TCOR values match, the compare match signal is not generated until an incrementing clock pulse is generated. Figure 10.14 shows the timing in this case. TCNT TCOR N N N+1 Compare match signal CMF Figure 10.14 CMF Flag Setting Timing when Compare Match Occurs Timing of CMFB Flag Setting when Input Capture Occurs: On generation of an input capture signal, the CMFB flag is set to 1 and at the same time the TCNT value is transferred to TCORB. Figure 10.15 shows the timing in this case. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 418 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers TCNT TCORB N N Input capture signal CMFB Figure 10.15 CMFB Flag Setting Timing when Input Capture Occurs Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting: The OVF flag in TCSR is set to 1 by the overflow signal generated when TCNT overflows (from H'FF to H'00). Figure 10.16 shows the timing in this case. TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF Figure 10.16 Timing of OVF Setting 10.4.5 Operation with Cascaded Connection If bits CKS2 to CKS0 are set to B'100 in either TCR0 or TCR1, the 8-bit timers of channels 0 and 1 are cascaded. With this configuration, the two timers can be used as a single 16-bit timer (16-bit count mode), or channel 0 8-bit timer compare matches can be counted in channel 1 (compare match count mode). In this case, the timer operates as below. Similarly, if bits CKS2 to CKS0 are set to B'100 in either TCR2 or TCR3, the 8-bit timers of channels 0 and 1 are cascaded. With this configuration, the two timers can be used as a single 16-bit timer (16-bit count mode),or channel 2 8-bit timer compare matches can be counted in channel 3 (compare match count mode). Timer operation in these cases is described below. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 419 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 16-Bit Count Mode * Channels 0 and 1: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 are set to B'100 in TCR0, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with channel 0 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 1 occupying the lower 8 bits. Setting when Compare Match Occurs * The CMF flag is set to 1 in TCR0 when a 16-bit compare match occurs. * The CMF flag is set to 1 in TCR1 when a lower 8-bit compare match occurs. * TMO0 pin output control by bits OIS3, OIS2, OS1, and OS0 in TCSR0 is in accordance with the 16-bit compare match conditions. * TMIO1 pin output control by bits OIS3, OIS2, OS1, and OS0 in TCSR1 is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare match conditions. Setting when Input Capture Occurs * The CMFB flag is set to 1 in TCR0 and TCR1 when the ICE bit is 1 in TCSR1 and input capture occurs. * TMIO1 pin input capture input signal edge detection is selected by bits OIS3 and OIS2 in TCSR0. Counter Clear Specification * If counter clear on compare match or input capture has been selected by the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR0, the 16-bit counter (both TCNT0 and TCNT1) is cleared. * The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR1 are ignored. The lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently. OVF Flag Operation * The OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR0 when the 16-bit counter (TCNT0 and TCNT1) overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000). * The OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR1 when the 8-bit counter (TCNT1) overflows (from H'FF to H'00). * Channels 2 and 3: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 are set to B'100 in TCR2, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with channel 2 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 3 occupying the lower 8 bits. Setting when Compare Match Occurs * The CMF flag is set to 1 in TCR2 when a 16-bit compare match occurs. * The CMF flag is set to 1 in TCR3 when a lower 8-bit compare match occurs. * TMO2 pin output control by bits OIS3, OIS2, OS1, and OS0 in TCSR2 is in accordance with the 16-bit compare match conditions. * TMIO3 pin output control by bits OIS3, OIS2, OS1, and OS0 in TCSR3 is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare match conditions. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 420 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Setting when Input Capture Occurs * The CMFB flag is set to 1 in TCR2 and TCR3 when the ICE bit is 1 in TCSR3 and input capture occurs. * TMIO3 pin input capture input signal edge detection is selected by bits OIS3 and OIS2 in TCSR2. Counter Clear Specification * If counter clear on compare match has been selected by the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR2, the 16-bit counter (both TCNT2 and TCNT3) is cleared. * The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR3 are ignored. The lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently. OVF Flag Operation * The OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR2 when the 16-bit counter (TCNT2 and TCNT3) overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000). * The OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR3 when the 16-bit counter (TCNT3) overflows (from H'FF to H'00). Compare Match Count Mode * Channels 0 and 1: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 are set to B'100 in TCR1, TCNT1 counts channel 0 compare match A events. Channels 0 and 1 are controlled independently. CMF flag setting, interrupt generation, TMO pin output, counter clearing, and so on, is in accordance with the settings for each channel. * Channels 2 and 3: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 are set to B'100 in TCR3, TCNT3 counts channel 2 compare match A events. Channels 2 and 3 are controlled independently. CMF flag setting, interrupt generation, TMO pin output, counter clearing, and so on, is in accordance with the settings for each channel. Caution Do not set 16-bit count mode and compare match count mode simultaneously within the same group, as the TCNT input clock will not be generated and the counters will not operate. 10.4.6 Input Capture Setting The TCNT value can be transferred to TCORB on detection of an input edge on the input capture/output compare pin (TMIO1 or TMIO3). Rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection can be selected. In 16-bit count mode, 16-bit input capture can be used. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 421 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Setting Input Capture Operation in 8-Bit Timer Mode (Normal Operation) * Channel 1: Set TCORB1 as an 8-bit input capture register with the ICE bit in TCSR1. Select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge(s) for the input capture signal (TMIO1) with bits OIS3 and OIS2 in TCSR1. Select the input clock with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR1, and start the TCNT count. * Channel 3: Set TCORB3 as an 8-bit input capture register with the ICE bit in TCSR3. Select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge(s) for the input capture signal (TMIO3) with bits OIS3 and OIS2 in TCSR3. Select the input clock with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR3, and start the TCNT count. Setting Input Capture Operation in 16-Bit Count Mode * Channels 0 and 1: In 16-bit count mode, TCORB0 and TCORB1 function as a 16-bit input capture register when the ICE bit is set to 1 in TCSR1. Select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge(s) for the input capture signal (TMIO1) with bits OIS3 and OIS2 in TCSR0. (In 16-bit count mode, the settings of bits OIS3 and OIS2 in TCSR1 are ignored.) Select the input clock with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR1, and start the TCNT count. * Channels 2 and 3: In 16-bit count mode, TCORB2 and TCORB3 function as a 16-bit input capture register when the ICE bit is set to 1 in TCSR3. Select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge(s) for the input capture signal (TMIO3) with bits OIS3 and OIS2 in TCSR2. (In 16-bit count mode, the settings of bits OIS3 and OIS2 in TCSR3 are ignored.) Select the input clock with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR3, and start the TCNT count. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 422 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.5 10.5.1 Interrupts Interrupt Sources The 8-bit timer unit can generate three types of interrupt: compare match A and B (CMIA and CMIB) and overflow (OVI). Table 10.3 shows the interrupt sources and their priority order. Each interrupt source is enabled or disabled by the corresponding interrupt enable bit in TCR. A separate interrupt request signal is sent to the interrupt controller by each interrupt source. Table 10.3 Types of 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources and Priority Order Interrupt Source CMIA CMIB TOVI Description Interrupt by CMFA Interrupt by CMFB Interrupt by OVF Low Priority High For compare match interrupts CMIA1/CMIB1 and CMIA3/CMIB3 and the overflow interrupts (TOVI0/TOVI1 and TOVI2/TOVI3), one vector is shared by two interrupts. Table 10.4 lists the interrupt sources. Table 10.4 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources Channel 0 1 0, 1 2 3 2,3 Interrupt Source CMIA0 CMIB0 CMIA1/CMIB1 TOVI0/TOVI1 CMIA2 CMIB2 CMIA3/CMIB3 TOVI2/TOVI3 Description TCORA0 compare match TCORB0 compare match/input capture TCORA1 compare match, or TCORB1 compare match/input capture Counter 0 or counter 1 overflow TCORA2 compare match TCORB2 compare match/input capture TCORA3 compare match, or TCORB3 compare match/input capture Counter 2 or counter 3 overflow Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 423 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.5.2 A/D Converter Activation The A/D converter can only be activated by channel 0 compare match A. If the ADTE bit setting is 1 when the CMFA flag in TCSR0 is set to 1 by generation of channel 0 compare match A, an A/D conversion start request will be issued to the A/D converter. If the TRGE bit in ADCR is 1 at this time, the A/D converter will be started. If the ADTE bit in TCSR0 is 1, the A/D converter external trigger input (ADTRG) is disabled. 10.6 8-Bit Timer Application Example Figure 10.17 shows how the 8-bit timer module can be used to output pulses with any desired duty cycle. The settings for this example are as follows: * Clear the CCLR1 bit to 0 and set the CCLR0 bit to 1 in TCR so that TCNT is cleared by a TCORA compare match. * Set bits OIS3, OIS2, OS1, and OS0 to B'0110 in TCSR so that 1 is output on a TCORA compare match and 0 is output on a TCORB compare match. The above settings enable a waveform with the cycle determined by TCORA and the pulse width detected by TCORB to be output without software intervention. TCNT H'FF TCORA TCORB H'00 Counter clear TMO Figure 10.17 Example of Pulse Output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 424 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.7 Usage Notes Note that the following kinds of contention can occur in 8-bit timer operation. 10.7.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear If a timer counter clear signal occurs in the T3 state of a TCNT write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. Figure 10.18 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCNT address Internal write signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 10.18 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 425 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.7.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment If an increment pulse occurs in the T3 state of a TCNT write cycle, writing takes priority and TCNT is not incremented. Figure 10.19 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N TCNT write data M Figure 10.19 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 426 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.7.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match If a compare match occurs in the T3 state of a TCOR write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited. Figure 10.20 shows the timing in this case. TCOR write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCOR address Internal write signal TCNT N N+1 TCOR N TCOR write data M Compare match signal Inhibited Figure 10.20 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 427 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.7.4 Contention between TCOR Read and Input Capture If an input capture signal occurs in the T3 state of a TCOR read cycle, the value before input capture is read. Figure 10.21 shows the timing in this case. TCORB read cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCORB address Internal read signal Input capture signal TCORB N M Internal data bus N Figure 10.21 Contention between TCOR Read and Input Capture Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 428 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.7.5 Contention between Counter Clearing by Input Capture and Counter Increment If an input capture signal and counter increment signal occur simultaneously, counter clearing by the input capture signal takes priority and the counter is not incremented. The value before the counter is cleared is transferred to TCORB. Figure 10.22 shows the timing in this case. T1 T2 T3 Input capture signal Counter clear signal TCNT internal clock TCNT N H'00 TCORB X N Figure 10.22 Contention between Counter Clearing by Input Capture and Counter Increment Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 429 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.7.6 Contention between TCOR Write and Input Capture If an input capture signal occurs in the T3 state of a TCOR write cycle, input capture takes priority and the write to TCOR is not performed. Figure 10.23 shows the timing in this case. TCOR write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCOR address Internal write signal Input capture signal TCNT M TCOR X M Figure 10.23 Contention between TCOR Write and Input Capture Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 430 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.7.7 Contention between TCNT Byte Write and Increment in 16-Bit Count Mode (Cascaded Connection) If an increment pulse occurs in the T2 or T3 state of a TCNT byte write cycle in 16-bit count mode, writing takes priority and TCNT is not incremented. The TCNT byte that was not written retains its previous value. Figure 10.24 shows the timing when an increment pulse occurs in the T2 state of a byte write to TCNTH. TCNTH byte write cycle T1 T2 T3 Address bus TCNTH address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNTH N TCNT write data TCNTL X X+1 Figure 10.24 Contention between TCNT Byte Write and Increment in 16-Bit Count Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 431 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers 10.7.8 Contention between Compare Matches A and B If compare matches A and B occur at the same time, the 8-bit timer operates according to the relative priority of the output states set for compare match A and compare match B, as shown in Table 10.5. Table 10.5 Timer Output Priority Order Output Setting Toggle output 1 output 0 output No change Low Priority High 10.7.9 TCNT Operation at Internal Clock Source Switchover Switching internal clock sources may cause TCNT to increment, depending on the switchover timing. Table 10.6 shows the relation between the time of the switchover (by writing to bits CKS1 and CKS0) and the operation of TCNT. The TCNT input clock is generated from the internal clock source by detecting the rising edge of the internal clock. If a switchover is made from a Low clock source to a High clock source, as in case No. 3 in Table 10.6, the switchover will be regarded as a falling edge, a TCNT clock pulse will be generated, and TCNT will be incremented. TCNT may also be incremented when switching between internal and external clocks. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 432 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers Table 10.6 Internal Clock Switchover and TCNT Operation No. 1 CKS1 and CKS0 Write Timing 1 High high switchover* TCNT Operation Old clock source New clock source TCNT clock TCNT N CKS bits rewritten N+1 2 2 High low switchover* Old clock source New clock source TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bits rewritten 3 3 Low high switchover* Old clock source New clock source TCNT clock *4 TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bits rewritten Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 433 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 10 8-Bit Timers No. 4 CKS1 and CKS0 Write Timing Low low switchover TCNT Operation Old clock source New clock source TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bits rewritten Notes: 1. Including switchovers from a high clock source to the halted state, and from the halted state to a high clock source. 2. Including switchover from the halted state to a low clock source. 3. Including switchover from a low clock source to the halted state. 4. The switchover is regarded as a rising edge, causing TCNT to increment. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 434 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group has a built-in programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) that provides pulse outputs by using the 16-bit timer as a time base. The TPC pulse outputs are divided into 4bit groups (group 3 to group 0) that can operate simultaneously and independently. 11.1.1 Features TPC features are listed below. * 16-bit output data Maximum 16-bit data can be output. TPC output can be enabled on a bit-by-bit basis. * Four output groups Output trigger signals can be selected in 4-bit groups to provide up to four different 4-bit outputs. * Selectable output trigger signals Output trigger signals can be selected for each group from the compare match signals of three 16-bit timer channels. * Non-overlap mode A non-overlap margin can be provided between pulse outputs. Can operate together with the DMA controller (DMAC) * The compare-match signals selected as trigger signals can activate the DMAC for sequential output of data without CPU intervention. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 435 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the TPC. 16-bit timer compare match signals PADDR Control logic NDERA TPMR PBDDR NDERB TPCR TP15 TP14 TP13 TP12 TP11 TP10 TP 9 TP 8 TP 7 TP 6 TP 5 TP 4 TP 3 TP 2 TP 1 TP 0 Legend TPMR: TPCR: NDERB: NDERA: PBDDR: PADDR: NDRB: NDRA: PBDR: PADR: Pulse output pins, group 3 PBDR Pulse output pins, group 2 NDRB Internal data bus Pulse output pins, group 1 PADR Pulse output pins, group 0 NDRA TPC output mode register TPC output control register Next data enable register B Next data enable register A Port B data direction register Port A data direction register Next data register B Next data register A Port B data register Port A data register Figure 11.1 TPC Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 436 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.1.3 TPC Pins Table 11.1 summarizes the TPC output pins. Table 11.1 TPC Pins Name TPC output 0 TPC output 1 TPC output 2 TPC output 3 TPC output 4 TPC output 5 TPC output 6 TPC output 7 TPC output 8 TPC output 9 TPC output 10 TPC output 11 TPC output 12 TPC output 13 TPC output 14 TPC output 15 Symbol TP0 TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10 TP11 TP12 TP13 TP14 TP15 I/O Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Group 3 pulse output Group 2 pulse output Group 1 pulse output Function Group 0 pulse output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 437 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.1.4 Registers Table 11.2 summarizes the TPC registers. Table 11.2 TPC Registers Address* H'EE009 H'FFFD9 H'EE00A H'FFFDA H'FFFA0 H'FFFA1 H'FFFA2 H'FFFA3 H'FFFA5/ 3 H'FFFA7* H'FFFA4/ 3 H'FFFA6* 1 Name Port A data direction register Port A data register Port B data direction register Port B data register TPC output mode register TPC output control register Next data enable register B Next data enable register A Next data register A Next data register B Abbreviation PADDR PADR PBDDR PBDR TPMR TPCR NDERB NDERA NDRA NDRB R/W W R/(W)* W 2 R/(W)* 2 Function H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'F0 H'FF H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Notes: 1. Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. Bits used for TPC output cannot be written. 3. The NDRA address is H'FFFA5 when the same output trigger is selected for TPC output groups 0 and 1 by settings in TPCR. When the output triggers are different, the NDRA address is H'FFFA7 for group 0 and H'FFFA5 for group 1. Similarly, the address of NDRB is H'FFFA4 when the same output trigger is selected for TPC output groups 2 and 3 by settings in TPCR. When the output triggers are different, the NDRB address is H'FFFA6 for group 2 and H'FFFA4 for group 3. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 438 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.2 11.2.1 Register Descriptions Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port A. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W PA7 DDR PA6 DDR PA5 DDR PA4 DDR PA3 DDR PA2 DDR PA1 DDR PA0 DDR Port A data direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port A pins Port A is multiplexed with pins TP7 to TP0. Bits corresponding to pins used for TPC output must be set to 1. For further information about PADDR, see section 8.11, Port A. 11.2.2 Port A Data Register (PADR) PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores TPC output data for groups 0 and 1, when these TPC output groups are used. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PA 7 0 R/(W) * 6 PA 6 0 R/(W) * 5 PA 5 0 R/(W) * 4 PA 4 0 R/(W) * 3 PA 3 0 R/(W) * 2 PA 2 0 R/(W) * 1 PA 1 0 R/(W) * 0 PA 0 0 R/(W) * Port A data 7 to 0 These bits store output data for TPC output groups 0 and 1 Note: * Bits selected for TPC output by NDERA settings become read-only bits. For further information about PADR, see section 8.11, Port A. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 439 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.2.3 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port B. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR Port B direction 7 to 0 These bits select input or output for port B pins Port B is multiplexed with pins TP15 to TP8. Bits corresponding to pins used for TPC output must be set to 1. For further information about PBDDR, see section 8.12, Port B. 11.2.4 Port B Data Register (PBDR) PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores TPC output data for groups 2 and 3, when these TPC output groups are used. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PB7 0 R/(W)* 6 PB6 0 R/(W)* 5 PB5 0 R/(W)* 4 PB4 0 R/(W)* 3 PB3 0 R/(W)* 2 PB2 0 R/(W)* 1 PB1 0 R/(W)* 0 PB0 0 R/(W)* Port B data 7 to 0 These bits store output data for TPC output groups 2 and 3 Note: * Bits selected for TPC output by NDERB settings become read-only bits. For further information about PBDR, see section 8.12, Port B. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 440 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.2.5 Next Data Register A (NDRA) NDRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for TPC output groups 1 and 0 (pins TP7 to TP0). During TPC output, when an 16-bit timer compare match event specified in TPCR occurs, NDRA contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in PADR. The address of NDRA differs depending on whether TPC output groups 0 and 1 have the same output trigger or different output triggers. NDRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Same Trigger for TPC Output Groups 0 and 1: If TPC output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by the same compare match event, the NDRA address is H'FFFA5. The upper 4 bits belong to group 1 and the lower 4 bits to group 0. Address H'FFFA7 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. Address H'FFFA5 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR7 0 R/W 6 NDR6 0 R/W 5 NDR5 0 R/W 4 NDR4 0 R/W 3 NDR3 0 R/W 2 NDR2 0 R/W 1 NDR1 0 R/W 0 NDR0 0 R/W Next data 7 to 4 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 1 Next data 3 to 0 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 0 Address H'FFFA7 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Reserved bits Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 441 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) Different Triggers for TPC Output Groups 0 and 1: If TPC output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of NDRA (group 1) is H'FFFA5 and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 0) is H'FFFA7. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FFFA5 and bits 7 to 4 of address H'FFFA7 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. Address H'FFFA5 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR7 0 R/W 6 NDR6 0 R/W 5 NDR5 0 R/W 4 NDR4 0 R/W 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Next data 7 to 4 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 1 Reserved bits Address H'FFFA7 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 NDR3 0 R/W 2 NDR2 0 R/W 1 NDR1 0 R/W 0 NDR0 0 R/W Reserved bits Next data 3 to 0 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 442 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.2.6 Next Data Register B (NDRB) NDRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for TPC output groups 3 and 2 (pins TP15 to TP8). During TPC output, when an 16-bit timer compare match event specified in TPCR occurs, NDRB contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in PBDR. The address of NDRB differs depending on whether TPC output groups 2 and 3 have the same output trigger or different output triggers. NDRB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Same Trigger for TPC Output Groups 2 and 3: If TPC output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by the same compare match event, the NDRB address is H'FFFA4. The upper 4 bits belong to group 3 and the lower 4 bits to group 2. Address H'FFFA6 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. Address H'FFFA4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR15 0 R/W 6 NDR14 0 R/W 5 NDR13 0 R/W 4 NDR12 0 R/W 3 NDR11 0 R/W 2 NDR10 0 R/W 1 NDR9 0 R/W 0 NDR8 0 R/W Next data 15 to 12 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 3 Next data 11 to 8 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 2 Address H'FFFA6 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Reserved bits Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 443 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) Different Triggers for TPC Output Groups 2 and 3: If TPC output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of NDRB (group 3) is H'FFFA4 and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 2) is H'FFFA6. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FFFA4 and bits 7 to 4 of address H'FFFA6 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. Address H'FFFA4 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDR15 0 R/W 6 NDR14 0 R/W 5 NDR13 0 R/W 4 NDR12 0 R/W 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Next data 15 to 12 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 3 Reserved bits Address H'FFFA6 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 NDR11 0 R/W 2 NDR10 0 R/W 1 NDR9 0 R/W 0 NDR8 0 R/W Reserved bits Next data 11 to 8 These bits store the next output data for TPC output group 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 444 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.2.7 Next Data Enable Register A (NDERA) NDERA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables TPC output groups 1 and 0 (TP7 to TP0) on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 NDER7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 NDER2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W NDER6 NDER5 NDER4 NDER3 NDER1 NDER0 Next data enable 7 to 0 These bits enable or disable TPC output groups 1 and 0 If a bit is enabled for TPC output by NDERA, then when the 16-bit timer compare match event selected in the TPC output control register (TPCR) occurs, the NDRA value is automatically transferred to the corresponding PADR bit, updating the output value. If TPC output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from NDRA to PADR and the output value does not change. NDERA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0--Next Data Enable 7 to 0 (NDER7 to NDER0): These bits enable or disable TPC output groups 1 and 0 (TP7 to TP0) on a bit-by-bit basis. Bits 7 to 0 NDER7 to NDER0 0 1 Description TPC outputs TP7 to TP0 are disabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are not transferred to PA7 to PA0) TPC outputs TP7 to TP0 are enabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are transferred to PA7 to PA0) (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 445 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.2.8 Next Data Enable Register B (NDERB) NDERB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables TPC output groups 3 and 2 (TP15 to TP8) on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 NDER8 Next data enable 15 to 8 These bits enable or disable TPC output groups 3 and 2 If a bit is enabled for TPC output by NDERB, then when the 16-bit timer compare match event selected in the TPC output control register (TPCR) occurs, the NDRB value is automatically transferred to the corresponding PBDR bit, updating the output value. If TPC output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from NDRB to PBDR and the output value does not change. NDERB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0--Next Data Enable 15 to 8 (NDER15 to NDER8): These bits enable or disable TPC output groups 3 and 2 (TP15 to TP8) on a bit-by-bit basis. Bits 7 to 0 NDER15 to NDER8 0 1 Description TPC outputs TP15 to TP8 are disabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are not transferred to PB7 to PB0) TPC outputs TP15 to TP8 are enabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are transferred to PB7 to PB0) (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 446 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.2.9 TPC Output Control Register (TPCR) TPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals for TPC outputs on a group-by-group basis. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 Group 3 compare match select 1 and 0 These bits select the compare match event that triggers Group 2 compare TPC output group 3 match select 1 and 0 These bits select (TP15 to TP12) the compare match event that triggers Group 1 compare TPC output group 2 match select 1 and 0 These bits select (TP11 to TP8) the compare match event that triggers Group 0 compare TPC output group 1 match select 1 and 0 These bits select (TP7 to TP4) the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) TPCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 447 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) Bits 7 and 6--Group 3 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G3CMS1, G3CMS0): These bits select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12). Bit 7 G3CMS1 0 Bit 6 G3CMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4--Group 2 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G2CMS1, G2CMS0): These bits select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8). Bit 5 G2CMS1 0 Bit 4 G2CMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 448 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) Bits 3 and 2--Group 1 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G1CMS1, G1CMS0): These bits select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4). Bit 3 G1CMS1 0 Bit 2 G1CMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Group 0 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G0CMS1, G0CMS0): These bits select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0). Bit 1 G0CMS1 0 Bit 0 G0CMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 449 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.2.10 TPC Output Mode Register (TPMR) TPMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for each group. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W G3NOV G2NOV G1NOV G0NOV Reserved bits Group 3 non-overlap Selects non-overlapping TPC output for group 3 (TP15 to TP12 ) Group 2 non-overlap Selects non-overlapping TPC output for group 2 (TP11 to TP8 ) Group 1 non-overlap Selects non-overlapping TPC output for group 1 (TP7 to TP4 ) Group 0 non-overlap Selects non-overlapping TPC output for group 0 (TP3 to TP0 ) The output trigger period of a non-overlapping TPC output waveform is set in general register B (GRB) in the 16-bit timer channel selected for output triggering. The non-overlap margin is set in general register A (GRA). The output values change at compare match A and B. For details see section 11.3.4, Non-Overlapping TPC Output. TPMR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 4--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 450 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) Bit 3--Group 3 Non-Overlap (G3NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for group 3 (TP15 to TP12). Bit 3 G3NOV 0 1 Description Normal TPC output in group 3 (output values change at compare match A in the selected 16-bit timer channel) Non-overlapping TPC output in group 3 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A and B in the selected 16-bit timer channel) (Initial value) Bit 2--Group 2 Non-Overlap (G2NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for group 2 (TP11 to TP8). Bit 2 G2NOV 0 1 Description Normal TPC output in group 2 (output values change at compare match A in the selected 16-bit timer channel) Non-overlapping TPC output in group 2 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A and B in the selected 16-bit timer channel) (Initial value) Bit 1--Group 1 Non-Overlap (G1NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for group 1 (TP7 to TP4). Bit 1 G1NOV 0 1 Description Normal TPC output in group 1 (output values change at compare match A in the selected 16-bit timer channel) Non-overlapping TPC output in group 1 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A and B in the selected 16-bit timer channel) (Initial value) Bit 0--Group 0 Non-Overlap (G0NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for group 0 (TP3 to TP0). Bit 0 G0NOV 0 1 Description Normal TPC output in group 0 (output values change at compare match A in the selected 16-bit timer channel) Non-overlapping TPC output in group 0 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A and B in the selected 16-bit timer channel) (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 451 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.3 11.3.1 Operation Overview When corresponding bits in PADDR or PBDDR and NDERA or NDERB are set to 1, TPC output is enabled. The TPC output initially consists of the corresponding PADR or PBDR contents. When a compare-match event selected in TPCR occurs, the corresponding NDRA or NDRB bit contents are transferred to PADR or PBDR to update the output values. Figure 11.2 illustrates the TPC output operation. Table 11.3 summarizes the TPC operating conditions. DDR Q NDER Q Output trigger signal C Q TPC output pin DR D Q NDR D Internal data bus Figure 11.2 TPC Output Operation Table 11.3 TPC Operating Conditions NDER 0 DDR 0 1 1 0 1 Pin Function Generic input port Generic output port Generic input port (but the DR bit is a read-only bit, and when compare match occurs, the NDR bit value is transferred to the DR bit) TPC pulse output Sequential output of up to 16-bit patterns is possible by writing new output data to NDRA and NDRB before the next compare match. For information on non-overlapping operation, see section 11.3.4, Non-Overlapping TPC Output. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 452 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.3.2 Output Timing If TPC output is enabled, NDRA/NDRB contents are transferred to PADR/PBDR and output when the selected compare match event occurs. Figure 11.3 shows the timing of these operations for the case of normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match A. TCNT N N+1 GRA Compare match A signal N NDRB n PBDR TP8 to TP15 m m n n Figure 11.3 Timing of Transfer of Next Data Register Contents and Output (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 453 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.3.3 Normal TPC Output Sample Setup Procedure for Normal TPC Output: Figure 11.4 shows a sample procedure for setting up normal TPC output. Normal TPC output Select GR functions Set GRA value Select counting operation Select interrupt request 1 2 3 4 1. 16-bit timer setup Set initial output data Select port output Port and TPC setup Enable TPC output Select TPC output trigger Set next TPC output data 16-bit timer setup 5 6 7 8 9 Start counter 10 Set TIOR to make GRA an output compare register (with output inhibited). 2. Set the TPC output trigger period. 3. Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0. 4. Enable the IMFA interrupt in TIER. The DMAC can also be set up to transfer data to the next data register. 5. Set the initial output values in the DR bits of the input/output port pins to be used for TPC output. 6. Set the DDR bits of the input/output port pins to be used for TPC output to 1. 7. Set the NDER bits of the pins to be used for TPC output to 1. 8. Select the 16-bit timer compare match event to be used as the TPC output trigger in TPCR. 9. Set the next TPC output values in the NDR bits. 10. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. 11. At each IMFA interrupt, set the next output values in the NDR bits. Compare match? Yes Set next TPC output data No 11 Figure 11.4 Setup Procedure for Normal TPC Output (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 454 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) Example of Normal TPC Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output): Figure 11.5 shows an example in which the TPC is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output. TCNT value TCNT GRA Compare match H'0000 NDRB 80 C0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 C0 40 Time PBDR 00 80 C0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 C0 TP15 TP14 TP13 TP12 TP11 * * * * The 16-bit timer channel to be used as the output trigger channel is set up so that GRA is an output compare register and the counter will be cleared by compare match A. The trigger period is set in GRA. The IMIEA bit is set to 1 in TIER to enable the compare match A interrupt. H'F8 is written in PBDDR and NDERB, and bits G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 are set in TPCR to select compare match in the 16-bit timer channel set up in step 1 as the output trigger. Output data H'80 is written in NDRB. The timer counter in this 16-bit timer channel is started. When compare match A occurs, the NDRB contents are transferred to PBDR and output. The compare match/input capture A (IMFA) interrupt service routine writes the next output data (H'C0) in NDRB. Five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained by writing H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30, H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88... at successive IMFA interrupts. If the DMAC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without loading the CPU. Figure 11.5 Normal TPC Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 455 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.3.4 Non-Overlapping TPC Output Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping TPC Output: Figure 11.6 shows a sample procedure for setting up non-overlapping TPC output. Non-overlapping TPC output Select GR functions Set GR values Select counting operation Select interrupt requests 1 2 3 4 1. Set TIOR to make GRA and GRB output compare registers (with output inhibited). 2. Set the TPC output trigger period in GRB and the non-overlap margin in GRA. 3. Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0. 4. Enable the IMFA interrupt in TISRA. The DMAC can also be set up to transfer data to the next data register. 5. Set the initial output values in the DR bits of the input/output port pins to be used for TPC output. 6. Set the DDR bits of the input/output port pins to be used for TPC output to 1. 7. Set the NDER bits of the pins to be used for TPC output to 1. 8. In TPCR, select the 16-bit timer compare match event to be used as the TPC output trigger. 9. In TPMR, select the groups that will operate in non-overlap mode. 10. Set the next TPC output values in the NDR bits. 11. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter. 12. At each IMFA interrupt, write the next output value in the NDR bits. 16-bit timer setup Set initial output data Set up TPC output Enable TPC transfer Port and TPC setup Select TPC transfer trigger Select non-overlapping groups Set next TPC output data 5 6 7 8 9 10 16-bit timer setup Start counter 11 Compare match A? Yes Set next TPC output data No 12 Figure 11.6 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping TPC Output (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 456 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) Example of Non-Overlapping TPC Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary NonOverlapping Output): Figure 11.7 shows an example of the use of TPC output for four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output. TCNT value GRB GRA H'0000 NDRB 95 65 59 56 95 65 Time TCNT PBDR 00 95 05 65 41 59 50 56 14 95 05 65 Non-overlap margin TP15 TP14 TP13 TP12 TP11 TP10 TP9 TP8 * The 16-bit timer channel to be used as the output trigger channel is set up so that GRA and GRB are output compare registers and the counter will be cleared by compare match B. The TPC output trigger period is set in GRB. The non-overlap margin is set in GRA. The IMIEA bit is set to 1 in TISRA to enable IMFA interrupts. * H'FF is written in PBDDR and NDERB, and bits G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 are set in TPCR to select compare match in the 16-bit timer channel set up in step 1 as the output trigger. Bits G3NOV and G2NOV are set to 1 in TPMR to select non-overlapping output. Output data H'95 is written in NDRB. * The timer counter in this 16-bit timer channel is started. When compare match B occurs, outputs change from 1 to 0. When compare match A occurs, outputs change from 0 to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value of GRA). The IMFA interrupt service routine writes the next output data (H'65) in NDRB. * Four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained by writing H'59, H'56, H'95... at successive IMFA interrupts. If the DMAC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without loading the CPU. Figure 11.7 Non-Overlapping TPC Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary Non-Overlapping Pulse Output) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 457 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.3.5 TPC Output Triggering by Input Capture TPC output can be triggered by 16-bit timer input capture as well as by compare match. If GRA functions as an input capture register in the 16-bit timer channel selected in TPCR, TPC output will be triggered by the input capture signal. Figure 11.8 shows the timing. TIOC pin Input capture signal NDR N DR M N Figure 11.8 TPC Output Triggering by Input Capture (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 458 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) 11.4 11.4.1 Usage Notes Operation of TPC Output Pins TP0 to TP15 are multiplexed with 16-bit timer, DMAC, address bus, and other pin functions. When 16-bit timer, DMAC, or address output is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for TPC output. The data transfer from NDR bits to DR bits takes place, however, regardless of the usage of the pin. Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not occur. 11.4.2 Note on Non-Overlapping Output During non-overlapping operation, the transfer of NDR bit values to DR bits takes place as follows. 1. NDR bits are always transferred to DR bits at compare match A. 2. At compare match B, NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. Bits are not transferred if their value is 1. Figure 11.9 illustrates the non-overlapping TPC output operation. DDR Q NDER Q Compare match A Compare match B C Q TPC output pin DR D Q NDR D Figure 11.9 Non-Overlapping TPC Output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 459 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller (TPC) Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before compare match A. NDR contents should not be altered during the interval from compare match B to compare match A (the non-overlap margin). This can be accomplished by having the IMFA interrupt service routine write the next data in NDR, or by having the IMFA interrupt activate the DMAC. The next data must be written before the next compare match B occurs. Figure 11.10 shows the timing relationships. Compare match A Compare match B NDR write NDR write NDR DR 0 output 0/1 output Write to NDR in this interval Do not write to NDR in this interval Do not write to NDR in this interval 0 output 0/1 output Write to NDR in this interval Figure 11.10 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 460 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.1 Overview The H8/3067 has an on-chip watchdog timer (WDT). The WDT has two selectable functions: it can operate as a watchdog timer to supervise system operation, or it can operate as an interval timer. As a watchdog timer, it generates a reset signal for the H8/3067 chip if a system crash allows the timer counter (TCNT) to overflow before being rewritten. In interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is requested at each TCNT overflow. 12.1.1 Features WDT features are listed below. * Selection of eight counter clock sources /2, /32, /64, /128, /256, /512, /2048, or /4096 * Interval timer option * Timer counter overflow generates a reset signal or interrupt. The reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation. An interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer operation. * Watchdog timer reset signal resets the entire H8/3067 internally, and can also be output externally. The reset signal generated by timer counter overflow during watchdog timer operation resets the entire H8/3067 internally. An external reset signal can be output from the RESO pin to reset other system devices simultaneously. This function is not provided in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 461 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the WDT. Overflow TCNT Interrupt signal (interval timer) Interrupt control TCSR Read/ write control Internal data bus RSTCSR Internal clock sources /2 /32 /64 Clock Clock selector /128 /256 /512 /2048 /4096 Reset (internal, external) Reset control Legend TCNT: Timer counter TCSR: Timer control/status register RSTCSR: Reset control/status register Figure 12.1 WDT Block Diagram 12.1.3 Pin Configuration 1 Table 12.1 describes the WDT output pin* . Table 12.1 WDT Pin Name Reset output Abbreviation RESO I/O Output* 2 Function External output of the watchdog timer reset signal Notes: 1. Not present in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. 2. Open-drain output. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 462 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.1.4 Register Configuration Table 12.2 summarizes the WDT registers. Table 12.2 WDT Registers Address* Write* 2 1 Read Name Abbreviation TCSR TCNT RSTCSR R/W R/(W)* R/W 3 Initial Value H'18 H'FFF8C H'FFF8C Timer control/status register H'FFF8D Timer counter H'FFF8E H'FFF8F Reset control/status register H'00 *3 H'3F R/(W) Notes: 1. Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. Write word data starting at this address. 3. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 463 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.2 12.2.1 Register Descriptions Timer Counter (TCNT) TCNT is an 8-bit readable and writable up-counter. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Note: TCNT is write-protected by a password. For details see section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access. When the TME bit is set to 1 in TCSR, TCNT starts counting pulses generated from an internal clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR. When the count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the OVF bit is set to 1 in TCSR. TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset and when the TME bit is cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 464 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR is an 8-bit readable and writable register. Its functions include selecting the timer mode and clock source. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OVF 0 R/(W) * 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 1 3 1 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock select These bits select the TCNT clock source Reserved bits Timer enable Selects whether TCNT runs or halts Timer mode select Selects the mode Overflow flag Status flag indicating overflow Notes: TCSR is write-protected by a password. For details see section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access. * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Bits 7 to 5 are initialized to 0 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 2 to 0 are initialized to 0 by a reset. In software standby mode bits 2 to 0 are not initialized, but retain their previous values. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 465 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer Bit 7--Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag indicates that the timer counter has overflowed from H'FF to H'00. Bit 7 OVF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] Cleared by reading OVF when OVF = 1, then writing 0 in OVF [Setting condition] Set when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00 (Initial value) Bit 6--Timer Mode Select (WT/IT Selects whether to use the WDT as a watchdog timer or IT): IT interval timer. If used as an interval timer, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt request when TCNT overflows. If used as a watchdog timer, the WDT generates a reset signal when TCNT overflows. Bit 6 WT/IT IT 0 1 Description Interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts Watchdog timer: generates a reset signal (Initial value) Bit 5--Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether TCNT runs or is halted. When WT/IT = 1, clear the software standby bit (SSBY) to 0 in SYSCR before setting TME. When setting SSBY to 1, TME should be cleared to 0. Bit 5 TME 0 1 Description TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted TCNT is counting (Initial value) Bits 4 and 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 466 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer Bits 2 to 0--Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2/1/0): These bits select one of eight internal clock sources, obtained by prescaling the system clock (), for input to TCNT. Bit 2 CKS2 0 Bit 1 CKS1 0 1 1 0 1 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description /2 /32 /64 /128 /256 /512 /2048 /4096 (Initial value) 12.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable and writable register that indicates when a reset signal has been generated by watchdog timer overflow, and controls external output of the reset signal. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 WRST 0 R/(W)* 6 RSTOE 0 R/W 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Reserved bits Reset output enable Enables or disables external output of the reset signal Watchdog timer reset Indicates that a reset signal has been generated Notes: RSTCSR is write-protected by a password. For details see section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access. * Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. Bits 7 and 6 are initialized by input of a reset signal at the RES pin. They are not initialized by reset signals generated by watchdog timer overflow. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 467 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer Bit 7--Watchdog Timer Reset (WRST): During watchdog timer operation, this bit indicates that TCNT has overflowed and generated a reset signal. This reset signal resets the entire H8/3067 chip internally. If bit RSTOE is set to 1, this reset signal is also output (low) at the RESO pin to initialize external system devices. Note that there is no RESO pin in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Bit 7 WRST 0 Description [Clearing condition] Reset signal at RES pin. Read WRST when WRST =1, then write 0 in WRST. (Initial value) 1 [Setting condition] Set when TCNT overflow generates a reset signal during watchdog timer operation Bit 6--Reset Output Enable (RSTOE): Enables or disables external output at the RESO pin of the reset signal generated if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. Note that there is no RESO pin in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Bit 6 RSTOE Description 0 1 Reset signal is not output externally (Initial value) Reset signal is output externally (Initial value) Bits 5 to 0--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 468 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.2.4 Notes on Register Access The watchdog timer's TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write. The procedures for writing and reading these registers are given below. Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written by byte instructions. Figure 12.2 shows the format of data written to TCNT and TCSR. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. The write data must be contained in the lower byte of the written word. The upper byte must contain H'5A (password for TCNT) or H'A5 (password for TCSR). This transfers the write data from the lower byte to TCNT or TCSR. 15 H'FFF8C * H'5A 87 Write data 0 TCNT write Address TCSR write Address H'FFF8C * 15 H'A5 87 Write data 0 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Figure 12.2 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 469 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer Writing to RSTCSR: RSTCSR must be written by a word transfer instruction. It cannot be written by byte transfer instructions. Figure 12.3 shows the format of data written to RSTCSR. To write 0 in the WRST bit, the write data must have H'A5 in the upper byte and H'00 in the lower byte. The data (H'00) in the lower byte is written to RSTCSR, clearing the WRST bit to 0. To write to the RSTOE bit, the upper byte must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. Writing this word transfers a write data value into the RSTOE bit. 15 H'A5 87 H'00 0 Writing 0 in WRST bit Address H'FFF8E* Writing to RSTOE bit Address H'FFF8E* 15 H'5A 87 Write data 0 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Figure 12.3 Format of Data Written to RSTCSR Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR: These registers are read like other registers. Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR: These registers are read like other registers. Byte transfer instructions can be used. The read addresses are H'FFF8C for TCSR, H'FFF8D for TCNT, and H'FFF8F for RSTCSR, as listed in table 12-3. Table 12.3 Read Addresses of TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR Address* H'FFF8C H'FFF8D H'FFF8F Register TCSR TCNT RSTCSR Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 470 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.3 Operation Operations when the WDT is used as a watchdog timer and as an interval timer are described below. 12.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation Figure 12.4 illustrates watchdog timer operation. To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT and TME bits to 1 in TCSR. Software must prevent TCNT overflow by rewriting the TCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before overflow occurs. If TCNT fails to be rewritten and overflows due to a system crash etc., the H8/3067 is internally reset for a duration of 518 states. The watchdog reset signal can be externally output from the RESO pin to reset external system devices. The reset signal is output externally for 132 states. External output can be enabled or disabled by the RSTOE bit in RSTCSR. The RESO pin function is not available in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. A watchdog reset has the same vector as a reset generated by input at the RES pin. Software can distinguish a RES reset from a watchdog reset by checking the WRST bit in RSTCSR. If a RES reset and a watchdog reset occur simultaneously, the RES reset takes priority. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 471 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer WDT overflow H'FF TCNT count value H'00 TME set to 1 OVF = 1 Start Internal reset signal H'00 written in TCNT Reset H'00 written in TCNT 518 states RESO 132 states Figure 12.4 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode 12.3.2 Interval Timer Operation Figure 12.5 illustrates interval timer operation. To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear bit WT/IT to 0 and set bit TME to 1 in TCSR. An interval timer interrupt request is generated at each TCNT overflow. This function can be used to generate interval timer interrupts at regular intervals. H'FF TCNT count value Time t H'00 WT/ IT = 0 TME = 1 Interval timer interrupt Interval timer interrupt Interval timer interrupt Interval timer interrupt Figure 12.5 Interval Timer Operation Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 472 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) Figure 12.6 shows the timing of setting of the OVF flag. The OVF flag is set to 1 when TCNT overflows. At the same time, a reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation, or an interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer operation. TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF Figure 12.6 Timing of Setting of OVF Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 473 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Reset Bit (WRST) The WRST bit in RSTCSR is valid when bits WT/IT and TME are both set to 1 in TCSR. Figure 12.7 shows the timing of setting of WRST and the internal reset timing. The WRST bit is set to 1 when TCNT overflows and OVF is set to 1. At the same time an internal reset signal is generated for the entire H8/3067 chip. This internal reset signal clears OVF to 0, but the WRST bit remains set to 1. The reset routine must therefore clear the WRST bit. TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF WDT internal reset WRST Figure 12.7 Timing of Setting of WRST Bit and Internal Reset Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 474 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer 12.4 Interrupts During interval timer operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF bit is set to 1 in TCSR. 12.5 Usage Notes Contention between TCNT Write and Increment: If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T3 state of a write cycle to TCNT, the write takes priority and the timer count is not incremented. See figure 12.8. CPU: TCNT write cycle T1 T2 T3 TCNT Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 12.8 Contention between TCNT Write and Count up Changing CKS2 to CKS0 Bit: Halt TCNT by clearing the TME bit to 0 in TCSR before changing the values of bits CKS2 to CKS0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 475 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 12 Watchdog Timer Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 476 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group has a serial communication interface (SCI) with three independent channels. All three channels have identical functions. The SCI can communicate in both asynchronous and synchronous mode. It also has a multiprocessor communication function for serial communication among two or more processors. When the SCI is not used, it can be halted to conserve power. Each SCI channel can be halted independently. For details, see section 20.6, Module Standby Function. The SCI also has a smart card interface function conforming to the ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) standard. This function supports serial communication with a smart card. Switching between the normal serial communication interface and the smart card interface is carried out by means of a register setting. 13.1.1 Features SCI features are listed below. * Selection of synchronous or asynchronous mode for serial communication Asynchronous mode Serial data communication is synchronized one channel at a time. The SCI can communicate with a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART), asynchronous communication interface adapter (ACIA), or other chip that employs standard asynchronous communication. It can also communicate with two or more other processors using the multiprocessor communication function. There are twelve selectable serial data transfer formats. Data length: Stop bit length: Parity: Multiprocessor bit: Break detection: Synchronous mode Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock signal. The SCI can communicate with other chips having a synchronous communication function. There is a single serial data communication format. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 477 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 7 or 8 bits 1 or 2 bits even/odd/none 1 or 0 by reading the RxD level directly when a framing error occurs Receive error detection: parity, overrun, and framing errors Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Data length: 8 bits overrun errors Receive error detection: * Full-duplex communication The transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so the SCI can transmit and receive simultaneously. The transmitting and receiving sections are both double-buffered, so serial data can be transmitted and received continuously. * The following settings can be made for the serial data to be transferred: LSB-first or MSB-first transfer Inversion of data logic level * Built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates * Selectable transmit/receive clock sources: internal clock from baud rate generator, or external clock from the SCK pin * Four types of interrupts Transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive-error interrupts are requested independently. The transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI0 can activate the DMA controller (DMAC) to transfer data. Features of the smart card interface are listed below. * Asynchronous communication Data length: 8 bits Parity bits generated and checked Error signal output in receive mode (parity error) Error signal detect and automatic data retransmit in transmit mode Supports both direct convention and inverse convention * Built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates * Three types of interrupts Transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and transmit/receive-error interrupts are requested independently. The transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts can activate the DMA controller (DMAC) to transfer data. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 478 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI. Module data bus Bus interface Internal data bus RDR TDR SSR SCR SMR SCMR Transmit/receive control BRR Baud rate generator / 4 /16 /64 RxD RSR TSR TxD Parity generate Parity check Clock External clock TEI TXI RXI ERI SCK Legend RSR RDR TSR TDR SMR SCR SSR BRR SCMR : Receive shift register : Receive data register : Transmit shift register : Transmit data register : Serial mode register : Serial control register : Serial status register : Bit rate register : Smart card mode register Figure 13.1 SCI Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 479 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.1.3 Input/Output Pins The SCI has serial pins for each channel as listed in table 13.1. Table 13.1 SCI Pins Channel Name 0 Serial clock pin Receive data pin Transmit data pin 1 Serial clock pin Receive data pin Transmit data pin 2 Serial clock pin Receive data pin Transmit data pin Abbreviation SCK0 RxD0 TxD0 SCK1 RxD1 TxD1 SCK2 RxD2 TxD2 I/O Input/output Input Output Input/output Input Output Input/output Input Output Function SCI0 clock input/output SCI0 receive data input SCI0 transmit data output SCI1 clock input/output SCI1 receive data input SCI1 transmit data output SCI2 clock input/output SCI2 receive data input SCI2 transmit data output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 480 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.1.4 Register Configuration The SCI has internal registers as listed in table 13.2. These registers select asynchronous or synchronous mode, specify the data format and bit rate, control the transmitter and receiver sections, and specify switching between the serial communication interface and smart card interface. Table 13.2 SCI Registers Channel 0 Address* H'FFFB0 H'FFFB1 H'FFFB2 H'FFFB3 H'FFFB4 H'FFFB5 H'FFFB6 1 H'FFFB8 H'FFFB9 H'FFFBA H'FFFBB H'FFFBC H'FFFBD H'FFFBE 2 H'FFFC0 H'FFFC1 H'FFFC2 H'FFFC3 H'FFFC4 H'FFFC5 H'FFFC6 1 Name Serial mode register Bit rate register Serial control register Transmit data register Serial status register Receive data register Smart card mode register Serial mode register Bit rate register Serial control register Transmit data register Serial status register Receive data register Smart card mode register Serial mode register Bit rate register Serial control register Transmit data register Serial status register Receive data register Smart card mode register Abbreviation SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR SCMR SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR SCMR SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR SCMR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W Initial Value H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF H'00 H'F2 H'00 H'FF H'00 2 R/(W)* H'84 H'FF *2 H'84 R/(W) H'00 H'F2 H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF *2 H'84 R/(W) H'00 H'F2 Notes: 1. Indicates the lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 481 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.2 13.2.1 Register Descriptions Receive Shift Register (RSR) RSR is the register that receives serial data. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write The SCI loads serial data input at the RxD pin into RSR in the order received, LSB (bit 0) first, thereby converting the data to parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is automatically transferred to RDR. The CPU cannot read or write RSR directly. 13.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) RDR is the register that stores received serial data. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received data from RSR into RDR for storage, completing the receive operation. RSR is then ready to receive the next data. This double-buffering allows data to be received continuously. RDR is a read-only register. Its contents cannot be modified by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 482 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) TSR is the register that transmits serial data. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write The SCI loads transmit data from TDR to TSR, then transmits the data serially from the TxD pin, LSB (bit 0) first. After transmitting one data byte, the SCI automatically loads the next transmit data from TDR into TSR and starts transmitting it. If the TDRE flag is set to 1 in SSR, however, the SCI does not load the TDR contents into TSR. The CPU cannot read or write RSR directly. 13.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR) TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it moves transmit data written in TDR from TDR into TSR and starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission is possible by writing the next transmit data in TDR during serial transmission from TSR. The CPU can always read and write TDR. TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 483 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) SMR is an 8-bit register that specifies the SCI's serial communication format and selects the clock source for the baud rate generator. Bit 7 C/A Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock select 1/0 These bits select the baud rate generator's clock source Multiprocessor mode Selects the multiprocessor function Stop bit length Selects the stop bit length Parity mode Selects even or odd parity Parity enable Enables or disables the addition of a parity bit Character length Selects character length in asynchronous mode Communication mode Selects asynchronous or synchronous mode The CPU can always read and write SMR. SMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 484 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Bit 7--Communication Mode (C/A)/GSM Mode (GM): The function of this bit differs for the A normal serial communication interface and for the smart card interface. Its function is switched with the SMIF bit in SCMR. For serial communication interface (SMIF bit in SCMR cleared to 0): Selects whether the SCI operates in asynchronous or synchronous mode. Bit 7 C/A A 0 1 Description Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode (Initial value) For smart card interface (SMIF bit in SCMR set to 1): Selects GSM mode for the smart card interface. Bit 7 GM 0 1 Description The TEND flag is set 12.5 etu after the start bit The TEND flag is set 11.0 etu after the start bit (Initial value) Note: etu: Elementary time unit (time required to transmit one bit) Bit 6--Character Length (CHR): Selects 7-bit or 8-bits data length in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode, the data length is 8 bits regardless of the CHR setting, Bit 6 CHR 0 1 Description 8-bit data 7-bit data* (Initial value) Note: * When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 485 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Bit 5--Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, this bit enables or disables the addition of a parity bit to transmit data, and the checking of the parity bit in receive data. In synchronous mode, the parity bit is neither added nor checked, regardless of the PE bit setting. Bit 5 PE 0 1 Description Parity bit not added or checked Parity bit added and checked* (Initial value) Note: * When PE bit is set to 1, an even or odd parity bit is added to transmit data according to the even or odd parity mode selection by the O/E bit, and the parity bit in receive data is checked to see that it matches the even or odd mode selected by the O/E bit. Bit 4--Parity Mode (O/E): Selects even or odd parity. The O/E bit setting is only valid when the E PE bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and checking, in asynchronous mode. The O/E bit setting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when parity addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode. Bit 4 O/E E 0 1 Description Even parity* 2 Odd parity* 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. When even parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an even number of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. Receive data must have an even number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined. 2. When odd parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an odd number of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. Receive data must have an odd number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined. Bit 3--Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects one or two stop bits in asynchronous mode. This setting is used only in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mod no stop bit is added, so the STOP bit setting is ignored. Bit 3 STOP 0 1 Description 1 stop bit* 2 2 stop bits* 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. One stop bit (with value 1) is added to the end of each transmitted character. 2. Two stop bits (with value 1) are added to the end of each transmitted character. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 486 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface In receiving, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit. If the second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next incoming character. Bit 2--Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects a multiprocessor format. When a multiprocessor format is selected, parity settings made by the PE and O/E bits are ignored. The MP bit setting is valid only in asynchronous mode. It is ignored in synchronous mode. For further information on the multiprocessor communication function, see section 13.3.3, Multiprocessor Communication. Bit 2 MP 0 1 Description Multiprocessor function disabled Multiprocessor format selected (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1/0): These bits select the clock source for the on-chip baud rate generator. Four clock sources are available: , /4, /16, and /64. For the relationship between the clock source, bit rate register setting, and baud rate, see section 13.2.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR). Bit 1 CKS1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 0 1 Description /4 /16 /64 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 487 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) SCR register enables or disables the SCI transmitter and receiver, enables or disables serial clock output in asynchronous mode, enables or disables interrupts, and selects the transmit/receive clock source. Bit 7 TIE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W 0 CKE0 0 R/W Clock enable 1/0 hese bits select the SCI clock source Transmit-end interrupt enable Enables or disables transmit-end interrupts (TEI) Multiprocessor interrupt enable Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts Receive enable Enables or disables the receiver Transmit enable Enables or disables the transmitter Receive interrupt enable Enables or disables receive-data-full interrupts (RXI) and receive-error interrupts (ERI) Transmit interrupt enable Enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupts (TXI) The CPU can always read and write SCR. SCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 488 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Bit 7--Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables the transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) requested when the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1 due to transfer of serial transmit data from TDR to TSR. Bit 7 TIE 0 1 Description Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled* Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled (Initial value) Note: * TXI interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the TDRE flag, then clearing it to 0; or by clearing the TIE bit to 0. Bit 6--Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables the receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) requested when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1 due to transfer of serial receive data from RSR to RDR; also enables or disables the receive-error interrupt (ERI). Bit 6 RIE 0 1 Description Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are disabled* (Initial value) Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are enabled Note: * RXI and ERI interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0; or by clearing the RIE bit to 0. Bit 5--Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the start of SCI serial transmitting operations. Bit 5 TE 0 1 Description 1 Transmitting disabled* 2 Transmitting enabled* (Initial value) Notes: 1. The TDRE flag is fixed at 1 in SSR. 2. In the enabled state, serial transmission starts when the TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0 after writing of transmit data into TDR. Select the transmit format in SMR before setting the TE bit to 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 489 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Bit 4--Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the start of SCI serial receiving operations. Bit 4 RE 0 1 Description Receiving disabled* 2 Receiving enabled* 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags. These flags retain their previous values. 2. In the enabled state, serial receiving starts when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode, or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode. Select the receive format in SMR before setting the RE bit to 1. Bit 3--Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts. The MPIE bit setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only if the MP bit is set to 1 in SMR. The MPIE bit setting is ignored in synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0. Bit 3 MPIE 0 Description Multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) (Initial value) Clearing conditions (1) The MPIE bit is cleared to 0 (2) MPB = 1 in received data Multiprocessor interrupts are enabled* Receive-data-full interrupts (RXI), receive-error interrupts (ERI), and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in SSR are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received. 1 Note: * The SCI does not transfer receive data from RSR to RDR, does not detect receive errors, and does not set the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR. When it receives data in which MPB = 1, the SCI sets the MPB bit to 1 in SSR, automatically clears the MPIE bit to 0, enables RXI and ERI interrupts (if the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1), and allows the FER and ORER flags to be set. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 490 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Bit 2--Transmit-End interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables the transmit-end interrupt (TEI) requested if TDR does not contain valid transmit data when the MSB is transmitted. Bit 2 TEIE 0 1 Description Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are disabled* Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are enabled* (Initial value) Note: * TEI interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing the TDRE flag to 0, thereby also clearing the TEND flag to 0; or by clearing the TEIE bit to 0. Bits 1 and 0--Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1/0): The function of these bits differs for the normal serial communication interface and for the smart card interface. Their function is switched with the SMIF bit in SCMR. For serial communication interface (SMIF bit in SCMR cleared to 0): These bits select the SCI clock source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. Depending on the settings of CKE1 and CKE0, the SCK pin can be used for generic input/output, serial clock output, or serial clock input. The CKE0 setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only when the SCI is internally clocked (CKE1 = 0). The CKE0 setting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when an external clock source is selected (CKE1 = 1). Select the SCI operating mode in SMR before setting the CKE1 and CKE0 bits . For further details on selection of the SCI clock source, see table 13.9 in section 13.3, Operation. Bit 1 Bit 0 CKE1 CKE0 Description 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin available for generic input/output* 1 Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output* Internal clock, SCK pin used for clock output* 2 1 Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output 3 External clock, SCK pin used for clock input* External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input 3 External clock, SCK pin used for clock input* External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input Notes: 1. Initial value 2. The output clock frequency is the same as the bit rate. 3. The input clock frequency is 16 times the bit rate. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 491 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface For smart card interface (SMIF bit in SCMR set to 1): These bits, together with the GM bit in SMR, determine whether the SCK pin is used for generic input/output or as the serial clock output pin. SMR GM 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 CKE1 CKE0 Description 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 SCK pin available for generic input/output SCK pin used for clock output SCK pin output fixed low SCK pin used for clock output SCK pin output fixed high SCK pin used for clock output (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 492 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) SSR is an 8-bit register containing multiprocessor bit values, and status flags that indicate the operating status of the SCI. Bit 7 TDRE Initial value Read/Write 1 R/(W)*1 6 RDRF 0 5 4 3 PER 0 R/(W)*1 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor bit transfer Value of multiprocessor bit to be transmitted ORER FER/ERS 0 0 R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 Multiprocessor bit Stores the received multiprocessor bit value Transmit end*2 Status flag indicating end of transmission Parity error Status flag indicating detection of a receive parity error Framing error (FER)/Error signal status (ERS)*2 Status flag indicating detection of a receive framing error, or flag indicating detection of an error signal Overrun error Status flag indicating detection of a receive overrun error Receive data register full Status flag indicating that data has been received and stored in RDR Transmit data register empty Status flag indicating that transmit data has been transferred from TDR into TSR and new data can be written in TDR Notes: 1. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Function differs between the normal serial communication interface and the smart card interface. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 493 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface The CPU can always read and write SSR, but cannot write 1 in the TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER flags. These flags can be cleared to 0 only if they have first been read while set to 1. The TEND and MPB flags are read-only bits that cannot be written. SSR is initialized to H'84 by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that the SCI has loaded transmit data from TDR into TSR and the next serial data can be written in TDR. Bit 7 TDRE 0 Description TDR contains valid transmit data Clearing conditions Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE The DMAC writes data in TDR TDR does not contain valid transmit data (Initial value) Setting conditions The chip is reset or enters standby mode The TE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 TDR contents are loaded into TSR, so new data can be written in TDR 1 Bit 6--Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that RDR contains new receive data. Bit 6 RDRF 0 Description RDR does not contain new receive data Clearing conditions The chip is reset or enters standby mode Read RDRF when RDRF = 1, then write 0 in RDRF The DMAC reads data from RDR (Initial value) 1 RDR contains new receive data Setting condition Serial data is received normally and transferred from RSR to RDR Note: The RDR contents and the RDRF flag are not affected by detection of receive errors or by clearing of the RE bit to 0 in SCR. They retain their previous values. If the RDRF flag is still set to 1 when reception of the next data ends, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 494 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Bit 5--Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to an overrun error. Bit 5 ORER 0 Description Receiving is in progress or has ended normally* Clearing conditions The chip is reset or enters standby mode Read ORER when ORER = 1, then write 0 in ORER 2 A receive overrun error occurred* Setting condition Reception of the next serial data ends when RDRF = 1 1 (Initial value) 1 Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the ORER flag, which retains its previous value. 2. RDR continues to hold the receive data prior to the overrun error, so subsequent receive data is lost. Serial receiving cannot continue while the ORER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. Bit 4--Framing Error (FER)/Error Signal Status (ERS): The function of this bit differs for the normal serial communication interface and for the smart card interface. Its function is switched with the SMIF bit in SCMR. For serial communication interface (SMIF bit in SCMR cleared to 0): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a framing error in asynchronous mode. Bit 4 FER 0 Description (Initial value) Receiving is in progress or has ended normally* Clearing conditions The chip is reset or enters standby mode Read FER when FER = 1, then write 0 in FER 2 A receive framing error occurred* Setting condition The stop bit at the end of the receive data is checked and found to be 0 1 1 Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the FER flag, which retains its previous value. 2. When the stop bit length is 2 bits, only the first bit is checked. The second stop bit is not checked. When a framing error occurs the SCI transfers the receive data into RDR but does not set the RDRF flag. Serial receiving cannot continue while the FER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 495 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface For smart card interface (SMIF bit in SCMR set to 1): Indicates the status of the error signal sent back from the receiving side during transmission. Framing errors are not detected in smart card interface mode. Bit 4 ERS 0 Description Normal reception, no error signal* Clearing conditions The chip is reset or enters standby mode Read ERS when ERS = 1, then write 0 in ERS (Initial value) 1 An error signal has been sent from the receiving side indicating detection of a parity error Setting condition The error signal is low when sampled Note: * Clearing the TE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the ERS flag, which retains its previous value. Bit 3--Parity Error (PER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a parity error in asynchronous mode. Bit 3 PER 0 Description (Initial value) Receiving is in progress or has ended normally* Clearing conditions The chip is reset or enters standby mode Read PER when PER = 1, then write 0 in PER 2 A receive parity error occurred* Setting condition The number of 1s in receive data, including the parity bit, does not match the even or odd parity setting of O/E in SMR 1 1 Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the PER flag, which retains its previous value. 2. When a parity error occurs the SCI transfers the receive data into RDR but does not set the RDRF flag. Serial receiving cannot continue while the PER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 496 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Bit 2--Transmit End (TEND): The function of this bit differs for the normal serial communication interface and for the smart card interface. Its function is switched with the SMIF bit in SCMR. For serial communication interface (SMIF bit in SCMR cleared to 0): Indicates that when the last bit of a serial character was transmitted TDR did not contain valid transmit data, so transmission has ended. The TEND flag is a read-only bit and cannot be written. Bit 2 TEND 0 Description Transmission is in progress Clearing conditions Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE The DMAC writes data in TDR End of transmission (Initial value) Setting conditions The chip is reset or enters standby mode The TE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 TDRE is 1 when the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character is transmitted 1 For smart card interface (SMIF bit in SCMR set to 1): Indicates that when the last bit of a serial character was transmitted TDR did not contain valid transmit data, so transmission has ended. The TEND flag is a read-only bit and cannot be written. Bit 2 TEND 0 Description Transmission is in progress Clearing conditions Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE The DMAC writes data in TDR End of transmission (Initial value) Setting conditions The chip is reset or enters standby mode The TE bit is cleared to 0 in SCR and the FER/ERS bit is also cleared to 0 TDRE is 1 and FER/ERS is 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu (when GM = 0) or 1.0 etu (when GM = 1) after a 1-byte serial character is transmitted 1 Note: etu: Elementary time unit (time required to transmit one bit) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 497 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Bit 1--Multiprocessor bit (MPB): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit in the receive data when a multiprocessor format is used in asynchronous mode. MPB is a read-only bit, and cannot be written. Bit 1 MPB 0 1 Description Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0* Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1 (Initial value) Note: * If the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 when a multiprocessor format is selected, MPB retains its previous value. Bit 0--Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit added to transmit data when a multiprocessor format in selected for transmitting in asynchronous mode. The MPBT bit setting is ignored in synchronous mode, when a multiprocessor format is not selected, or when the SCI cannot transmit. Bit 1 MPBT 0 1 Description Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 498 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) BRR is an 8-bit register that., together with the CKS1 and CKS0 bits in SMR that select the baud rate generator clock source, determines the serial communication bit rate. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W The CPU can always read and write BRR. BRR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode. Each SCI channel has independent baud rate generator control, so different values can be set in the three channels. Table 13.3 shows examples of BRR settings in asynchronous mode. Table 13.4 shows examples of BRR settings in synchronous mode. Table 13.3 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (MHz) Bit Rate n (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 N Error (%) n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.097152 N Error (%) n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 2.4576 Error (%) n 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 3 Error (%) 141 0.03 103 0.16 207 0.16 103 0.16 51 25 12 6 2 1 1 0.16 0.16 0.16 -6.99 8.51 0.00 -18.62 148 -0.04 108 0.21 217 0.21 108 0.21 54 26 13 6 2 1 1 -0.70 1.14 -2.48 -2.48 13.78 4.86 -14.67 174 -0.26 127 0.00 255 0.00 127 0.00 63 31 15 7 3 1 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 22.88 0.00 212 0.03 155 0.16 77 77 38 19 9 4 2 -- 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 -2.34 -2.34 0.00 -- 155 0.16 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 499 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (MHz) Bit Rate n (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 3.6864 N 64 95 95 47 23 11 5 -- 2 Error (%) n 0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -- 0.00 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 4 Error (%) n 0.03 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (MHz) Bit Rate n (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 N Error (%) n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 6.144 Error (%) n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 7.3728 Error (%) n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 8 Error (%) N 86 4.9152 Error (%) n 0.31 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 64 64 32 15 7 4 3 5 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 1.73 1.73 0.00 1.73 191 0.00 191 0.00 207 0.16 103 0.16 207 0.16 103 0.16 51 25 12 6 3 2 0.16 0.16 0.16 -6.99 0.00 8.51 255 0.00 127 0.00 255 0.00 127 0.00 63 31 15 7 4 3 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 129 0.16 129 0.16 106 -0.44 77 77 77 38 19 9 5 4 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 -2.34 0.00 -2.34 155 0.16 155 0.16 108 0.08 79 79 79 39 19 9 5 4 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 159 0.00 159 0.00 130 -0.07 95 95 95 47 23 11 6 5 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5.33 0.00 191 0.00 191 0.00 141 0.03 103 0.16 207 0.16 103 0.16 207 0.16 103 0.16 51 25 12 7 6 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 -6.99 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 500 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (MHz) Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 9.8304 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N Error (%) n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 10 Error (%) n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (MHz) Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 13 nN Error n N (%) 14 14.7456 Error n N (%) 0.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 70 16 Error n N (%) 0.03 3 79 18 Error n N (%) -0.12 3 88 3 64 2 64 1 64 20 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 0.00 1.73 Error n N (%) N 12 Error (%) n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 12.288 Error (%) 174 -0.26 127 0.00 255 0.00 127 0.00 255 0.00 127 0.00 63 31 15 9 7 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 177 -0.25 129 0.16 64 64 64 32 15 9 7 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 1.73 0.00 1.73 129 0.16 129 0.16 212 0.03 155 0.16 77 77 77 38 19 11 9 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 0.00 -2.34 155 0.16 155 0.16 217 0.08 159 0.00 79 79 79 39 19 11 9 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 159 0.00 159 0.00 2 230 -0.08 2 248 -0.17 3 64 2 168 0.16 2 84 1 84 0 84 0 41 0 20 0 12 0 10 1 168 0.16 0 168 0.16 0.76 0.76 0.00 2 181 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 1 181 0.16 0 181 0.16 0 45 0 22 0 13 -0.43 2 90 -0.43 1 90 -0.43 0 90 2 95 1 95 0 95 2 191 0.00 1 191 0.00 0 191 0.00 2 207 0.16 2 103 0.16 1 207 0.16 1 103 0.16 0 207 0.16 0 103 0.16 0 51 0 25 0 12 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 2 233 0.16 2 116 0.16 1 233 0.16 1 116 0.16 0 233 0.16 0 116 0.16 0 58 0 28 0 17 0 14 1.02 0.00 2 129 0.16 1 129 0.16 0 129 0.16 0 32 0 19 -0.93 0 47 -0.93 0 23 0.00 3.57 0 14 0 11 -0.69 0 64 -1.70 0 15 -3.82 0 10 -2.34 0 15 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 501 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Table 13.4 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode (MHz) Bit 2 Rate (bit/s) n 110 250 500 1k 2.5k 5k 10k 25k 50k 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 4 N 70 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 1 0* n -- 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N -- 249 124 249 99 199 99 39 19 9 3 1 0* n -- 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 8 N -- 124 249 124 199 99 199 79 39 19 7 3 1 0* -- 10 n -- -- -- -- 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- 0 N -- -- -- -- 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 -- -- 0* 13 n -- 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 -- 0 -- -- -- -- N -- 202 101 202 80 162 80 129 64 -- 12 -- -- -- -- 16 n -- 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 N -- 249 124 249 99 199 99 159 79 39 15 7 3 1 -- 0* 18 n -- -- 3 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- N -- -- 140 69 112 224 112 179 89 44 17 8 4 -- -- -- 20 n -- -- 3 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- N -- -- 155 77 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 -- -- -- 100k 0 250k 0 500k 0 1M 2M 2.5M 4M Note: Settings with an error of 1% or less are recommended. Legend Blank: No setting available --: Setting possible, but error occurs *: Continuous transmission/reception not possible Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 502 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface The BRR setting is calculated as follows: Asynchronous mode: N= Synchronous mode: 64 x 22n-1 x B x 106 - 1 N= B: N: : n: 8 x 22n-1 x B x 106 - 1 Bit rate (bit/s) BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 N 255) System clock frequency (MHz) Baud rate generator clock source (n = 0, 1, 2, 3) (For the clock sources and values of n, see the following table.) SMR Settings n 0 1 2 3 Clock Source /4 /16 /64 CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is calculated as follows: Error (%) = x 106 (N + 1) x B x 64 x 22n-1 -1 x 100 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 503 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Table 13.5 shows the maximum bit rates in asynchronous mode for various system clock frequencies. Table 13.6 and 13.7 shows the maximum bit rates with external clock input. Table 13.5 Maximum Bit Rates for Various Frequencies (Asynchronous Mode) Settings (MHz) 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 17.2032 18 20 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 62500 65536 76800 93750 115200 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 230400 250000 307200 312500 375000 384000 437500 460800 500000 537600 562500 625000 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 504 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Table 13.6 Maximum Bit Rates with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) (MHz) 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 17.2032 18 20 External Input Clock (MHz) 0.5000 0.5243 0.6144 0.7500 0.9216 1.0000 1.2288 1.2500 1.5000 1.5360 1.8432 2.0000 2.4576 2.5000 3.0000 3.0720 3.5000 3.6864 4.0000 4.3008 4.5000 5.0000 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 31250 32768 38400 46875 57600 62500 76800 78125 93750 96000 115200 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 218750 230400 250000 268800 281250 312500 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 505 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Table 13.7 Maximum Bit Rates with External Clock Input (Synchronous Mode) (MHz) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 External Input Clock (MHz) 0.3333 0.6667 1.0000 1.3333 1.6667 2.0000 2.3333 2.6667 3.0000 3.3333 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 333333.3 666666.7 1000000.0 1333333.3 1666666.7 2000000.0 2333333.3 2666666.7 3000000.0 3333333.3 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 506 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.3 13.3.1 Operation Overview The SCI can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved character by character, and synchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved with clock pulses. A smart card interface is also supported as a serial communication function for an IC card interface. Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode and the transmission format for the normal serial communication interface is made in SMR, as shown in table 13.8. The SCI clock source is selected by the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR, as shown in table 13.9. For details of the procedures for switching between LSB-first and MSB-first mode and inverting the data logic level, see section 14.2.1, Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR). For selection of the smart card interface format, see section 14.3.3, Data Format. Asynchronous Mode * Data length is selectable: 7 or 8 bits * Parity and multiprocessor bits are selectable, and so is the stop bit length (1 or 2 bits). These selections determine the communication format and character length. * In receiving, it is possible to detect framing errors, parity errors, overrun errors, and the break state. * An internal or external clock can be selected as the SCI clock source. When an internal clock is selected, the SCI operates using the on-chip baud rate generator, and can output a serial clock signal with a frequency matching the bit rate. When an external clock is selected, the external clock input must have a frequency 16 times the bit rate. (The on-chip baud rate generator is not used.) Synchronous Mode * The communication format has a fixed 8-bit data length. * In receiving, it is possible to detect overrun errors. * An internal or external clock can be selected as the SCI clock source. When an internal clock is selected, the SCI operates using the on-chip baud rate generator, and can output a serial clock signal to external devices. When an external clock is selected, the SCI operates on the input serial clock. The on-chip baud rate generator is not used. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 507 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Smart Card Interface * One frame consists of 8-bit data and a parity bit. * In transmitting, a guard time of at least two elementary time units (2 etu) is provided between the end of the parity bit and the start of he next frame. (An elementary time unit is the time required to transmit one bit.) * In receiving, if a parity error is detected, a low error signal level is output for 1 etu, beginning 10.5 etu after the start bit.. * In transmitting, if an error signal is received, the same data is automatically transmitted again after at least 2 etu. * Only asynchronous communication is supported. There is no synchronous communication function. For details of smart card interface operation, see section 14, Smart Card Interface. Table 13.8 SMR Settings and Serial Communication Formats SMR Settings Bit 7 C/A A 0 Bit 6 Bit 2 Bit 5 Bit 3 CHR MP PE STOP Mode 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- -- 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- Synchronous mode 8-bit data Absent Asynchronous 8-bit data mode (multiprocessor 7-bit data format) Present Absent Present 7-bit data Absent Data Length SCI Communication Format Multiprocessor Bit Absent Parity Bit Absent Present Stop Bit Length 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits None AsynChronous 8-bit data mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 508 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Table 13.9 SMR and SCR Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection SMR Bit 7 C/A A 0 SCR Setting Bit 1 Bit 0 CKE1 CKE0 Mode 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Synchronous mode Internal External Asynchronous mode SCI Transmit/Receive clock Clock Source SCK Pin Function Internal SCI does not use the SCK pin Outputs clock with frequency matching the bit rate External Inputs clock with frequency 16 times the bit rate Outputs the serial clock Inputs the serial clock 13.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, each transmitted or received character begins with a start bit and ends with one or two stop bits. Serial communication is synchronized one character at a time. The transmitting and receiving sections of the SCI are independent, so full-duplex communication is possible. The transmitter and the receiver are both double-buffered, so data can be written and read while transmitting and receiving are in progress, enabling continuous transmitting and receiving. Figure 13.2 shows the general format of asynchronous serial communication. In asynchronous serial communication the communication line is normally held in the mark (high) state. The SCI monitors the line and starts serial communication when the line goes to the space (low) state, indicating a start bit. One serial character consists of a start bit (low), data (LSB first), parity bit (high or low), and one or two stop bits (high), in that order. When receiving in asynchronous mode, the SCI synchronizes at the falling edge of the start bit. The SCI samples each data bit on the eighth pulse of a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. Receive data is latched at the center of each bit. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 509 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Idle (mark) state 1 (LSB) 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 (MSB) D7 0/1 1 1 1 Serial data Start bit 1 bit Transmit or receive data 7 or 8 bits One unit of data (character or frame) Parity bit 1 bit, or none Stop bit(s) 1 or 2 bits Figure 13.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example: 8-Bit Data with Parity and 2 Stop Bits) Communication Formats: Table 13.10 shows the 12 communication formats that can be selected in asynchronous mode. The format is selected by settings in SMR. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 510 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Table 13.10 Serial Communication Formats (Asynchronous Mode) SMR Settings CHR 0 PE 0 MP 0 STOP 0 Serial Communication Format and Frame Length 1 S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 STOP 11 12 8-bit data 0 0 0 1 S 8-bit data STOP STOP 0 1 0 0 S 8-bit data P STOP 0 1 0 1 S 8-bit data P STOP STOP 1 0 0 0 S 7-bit data STOP 1 0 0 1 S 7-bit data STOP STOP 1 1 0 0 S 7-bit data P STOP 1 1 0 1 S 7-bit data P STOP STOP 0 1 0 S 8-bit data MPB STOP 0 1 1 S 8-bit data MPB STOP STOP 1 1 0 S 7-bit data MPB STOP 1 1 1 S 7-bit data MPB STOP STOP Legend S: STOP: P: MPB: Start bit Stop bit Parity bit Multiprocessor bit Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 511 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input from the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI transmit/receive clock. The clock source is selected by the C/A bit in SMR and bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR. For details of SCI clock source selection, see table 13.9. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, it must have a frequency 16 times the desired bit rate. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, it can output a clock signal at the SCK pin. The frequency of this output clock is equal to the bit rate. The phase is aligned as shown in figure 13.3 so that the rising edge of the clock occurs at the center of each transmit data bit. 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 1frame D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1 Figure 13.3 Phase Relationship between Output Clock and Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode) Transmitting and Receiving Data: * SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode): Before transmitting or receiving data, clear the TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR, then initialize the SCI as follows. When changing the communication mode or format, always clear the TE and RE bits to 0 before following the procedure given below. Clearing TE to 0 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and initializes TSR. Clearing RE to 0, however, does not initialize the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or RDR, which retain their previous contents. When an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during initialization or subsequent operation, since operation will be unreliable in this case. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 512 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Figure 13.4 shows a sample flowchart for initializing the SCI. Start of initialization Clear TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (leaving TE and RE bits cleared to 0) Select communication format in SMR Set value in BRR Wait No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR Set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits (4) (4) (1) (1) Set the clock source in SCR. Clear the RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, TE, and RE bits to 0. If clock output is selected in asynchronous mode, clock output starts immediately after the setting is made in SCR. Select the communication format in SMR. (2) (2) (3) (3) Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR. This step is not necessary when an external clock is used. Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive one bit, then set the TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR. Set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary. Setting the TE or RE bit enables the SCI to use the TxD or RxD pin. Figure 13.4 Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 513 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface * Transmitting Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 13.5 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. Initialize Start transmitting (1) (1) SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin is selected automatically. (2) SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. (3) To continue transmitting serial data: after checking that the TDRE flag is 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag to 0. When the DMAC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) to write data in TDR, the TDRE flag is checked and cleared automatically. (4) To output a break signal at the end of serial transmission: set the DDR bit to 1 and clear the DR bit to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0 in SCR. Read TDRE flag in SSR No (2) TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data in TDR and clear TDRE flag to 0 in SSR All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No (3) TEND = 1 Yes Output break signal? Yes Clear DR bit to 0 and set DDR bit to 1 No No (4) Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR Figure 13.5 Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Serial Data Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 514 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows: * The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. When the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the SCI recognizes that TDR contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into TSR. * After loading the data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmitting. If the TIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) at this time. Serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin: Start bit: One 0 bit is output. Transmit data: 7 or 8 bits are output, LSB first. Parity bit or multiprocessor bit: One parity bit (even or odd parity),or one multiprocessor bit is output. Formats in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected. Stop bit(s): One or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output. Mark state: Output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data. * The SCI checks the TDRE flag when it outputs the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is 0, the SCI loads new data from TDR into TSR, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. If the TDRE flag is 1, the SCI sets the TEND flag to 1 in SSR, outputs the stop bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. If the TEIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a transmitend interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time Figure 13.6 shows an example of SCI transmit operation in asynchronous mode. Data Parity Stop Start bit bit bit Data Parity Stop bit bit 1 Start bit 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 Idle state (mark state) TDRE TEND 1 frame TXI interrupt request TXI interrupt handler writes data in TDR and clears TDRE flag to 0 TXI interrupt request TEI interrupt request Figure 13.6 Example of SCI Transmit Operation in Asynchronous Mode (8-Bit Data with Parity and One Stop Bit) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 515 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface * Receiving Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 13.7 shows a sample flowchart for receiving serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. Initialize Start receiving (2)(3) Read ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR (2) (1) (1) SCI initialization: the receive data input function of the RxD pin is selected automatically. Receive error handling and break detection: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After executing the necessary error handling, clear the ORER, PER, and FER flags all to 0. Receiving cannot resume if any of these flags remains set to 1. When a framing error occurs, the RxD pin can be read to detect the break state. PERFEROPER = 1 Yes (3) No Error handling (continued on next page) Read RDRF flag in SSR No (4) (4) RDRF = 1 Yes SCI status check and receive data read: read SSR, check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read receive data from RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Notification that the RDRF flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the RXI interrupt. To continue receiving serial data: check the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0 before the stop bit of the current frame is received. When the DMAC is activated by a receive-data-full interrupt request (RXI) to read RDR, the RDRF flag is cleared automatically. Read receive data from RDR, and clear RDRF flag to 0 in SSR (5) No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR (5) Figure 13.7 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data (1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 516 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (3) Error handling No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1 Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR Yes No PER = 1 Yes Parity error handling Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags to 0 in SSR Figure 13.7 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data (2) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 517 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface In receiving, the SCI operates as follows: * The SCI monitors the communication line. When it detects a start bit (0 bit), the SCI synchronizes internally and starts receiving. * Receive data is stored in RSR in order from LSB to MSB. * The parity bit and stop bit are received. After receiving these bits, the SCI carries out the following checks: Parity check: The number of 1s in the receive data must match the even or odd parity setting of in the O/E bit in SMR. Stop bit check: The stop bit value must be 1. If there are two stop bits, only the first is checked. Status check: The RDRF flag must be 0, indicating that the receive data can be transferred from RSR into RDR. If these all checks pass, the RDRF flag is set to 1 and the received data is stored in RDR. If one of the checks fails (receive error*), the SCI operates as shown in table 13.11. Note: * When a receive error occurs, further receiving is disabled. In receiving, the RDRF flag is not set to 1. Be sure to clear the error flags to 0. * When the RDRF flag is set to 1, if the RIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) is requested. If the ORER, PER, or FER flag is set to 1 and the RIE bit in SCR is also set to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) is requested. Table 13.11 Receive Error Conditions Receive Error Abbreviation Condition Overrun error ORER Framing error FER Parity error PER Data Transfer Receiving of next data ends while Receive data is not transferred RDRF flag is still set to 1 in SSR from RSR to RDR Stop bit is 0 Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR Parity of received data differs from Receive data is transferred from even/odd parity setting in SMR RSR to RDR Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 518 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Figure 13.8 shows an example of SCI receive operation in asynchronous mode. Start bit Parity Stop bit bit Start bit Stop Parity Stop bit bit bit 1 Data Data 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 Idle (mark) state RDRF FER RXI request 1 frame RXI interrupt handler reads data in RDR and clears RDRF flag to 0 Framing error, ERI request Figure 13.8 Example of SCI Receive Operation (8-Bit Data with Parity and One Stop Bit) 13.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication The multiprocessor communication function enables several processors to share a single serial communication line. The processors communicate in asynchronous mode using a format with an additional multiprocessor bit (multiprocessor format). In multiprocessor communication, each receiving processor is addressed by an ID. A serial communication cycle consists of an ID-sending cycle that identifies the receiving processor, and a data-sending cycle. The multiprocessor bit distinguishes ID-sending cycles from data-sending cycles. The transmitting processor stars by sending the ID of the receiving processor with which it wants to communicate as data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Next the transmitting processor sends transmit data with the multiprocessor bit cleared to 0. Receiving processors skip incoming data until they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. When they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1, receiving processors compare the data with their IDs. Processors with IDs not matching the received data skip further incoming data until they again receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Multiple processors can send and receive data in this way. Figure 13.9 shows an example of communication among different processors using a multiprocessor format. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 519 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Communication Formats: Four formats are available. Parity bit settings are ignored when a multiprocessor format is selected. For details see table 13.10. Clock: See the description of asynchronous mode. Transmitting processor Serial communication line Receiving processor A (ID=01) Receiving processor B (ID=02) Receiving processor C (ID=03) Receiving processor D (ID=04) Serial data H'01 (MPB=1) ID-sending cycle: receiving processor address H'AA (MPB=0) Data-sending cycle: data sent to receiving processor specified by ID Legend MPB : Multiprocessor bit Figure 13.9 Example of Communication among Processors using Multiprocessor Format (Sending Data H'AA to Receiving Processor A) Transmitting and Receiving Data: * Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data: Figure 13.10 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 520 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Initialize Start transmitting (1) (1) SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin is selected automatically. SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR, check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write transmit data in TDR. Also set the MPBT flag to 0 or 1 in SSR. Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0. To continue transmitting serial data: after checking that the TDRE flag is 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag to 0. When the DMAC is activated by a transmit-dataempty interrupt request (TXI) to write data in TDR, the TDRE flag is checked and cleared automatically. To output a break signal at the end of serial transmission: set the DDR bit to 1 and clear the DR bit to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0 in SCR. (2) Read TDRE flag in SSR (2) TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data in TDR and set MPBT bit in SSR Clear TDRE flag to 0 No (3) (4) No All data transmitted? Yes (3) Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1 Yes Output break signal? Yes No (4) Clear DR bit to 0 and set DDR to 1 Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR Figure 13.10 Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 521 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows: * The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. When the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the SCI recognizes that TDR contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into TSR. * After loading the data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmitting. If the TIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) at this time. Serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin: Start bit: One 0 bit is output. Transmit data: 7 or 8 bits are output, LSB first. Multiprocessor bit: One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output. Stop bit(s): One or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output. Mark state: Output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data. * The SCI checks the TDRE flag when it outputs the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is 0, the SCI loads new data from TDR into TSR, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. If the TDRE flag is 1, the SCI sets the TEND flag to 1 in SSR, outputs the stop bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. If the TEIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a transmitend interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time Figure 13.11 shows an example of SCI transmit operation using a multiprocessor format. Multiprocessor Stop Start bit bit bit Multiprocessor Stop bit bit 1 Start bit Data Data 0 TDRE TEND D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 Idle (mark) state TXI interrupt TXI interrupt handler writes data in TDR and request clears TDRE flag to 0 1 frame TXI interrupt request TEI interrupt request Figure 13.11 Example of SCI Transmit Operation (8-Bit Data with Multiprocessor Bit and One Stop Bit) * Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data: Figure 13.12 shows a sample flowchart for receiving multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 522 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Initialize Start receiving (2) Set MPIE bit to 1 in SCR Read ORER and FER flags in SSR (2) (3) (1) (1) SCI initialization: the receive data input function of the RxD pin is selected automatically. ID receive cycle: set the MPIE bit to 1 in SCR. SCI status check and ID check: read SSR, check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read data from RDR and compare it with the processor's own ID. If the ID does not match, set the MPIE bit to 1 again and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the ID matches, clear the RDRF flag to 0. SCI status check and data receiving: read SSR, check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read data from RDR. Receive error handling and break detection: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After executing the necessary error handling, clear the ORER and FER flags both to 0. Receiving cannot resume while either the ORER or FER flag remains set to 1. When a framing error occurs, the RxD pin can be read to detect the break state. FERORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR Yes (4) (3) (5) No RDRF = 1 Yes Read RDRF flag in SSR No Own ID? Yes Read ORER and FER flags in SSR FERORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No (4) Yes RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data from RDR No Finished receiving? Yes Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR (5) Error handling (continued on next page) Figure 13.12 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data (1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 523 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (5) Error handling No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1 Yes Break? No Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR Framing error handling Yes Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags to 0 in SSR Figure 13.12 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data (2) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 524 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Figure 13.13 shows an example of SCI receive operation using a multiprocessor format. Start bit Stop Start bit Stop 1 Data (ID1) MPB bit D7 1 Data (data1) MPB bit D7 0 1 0 D0 D1 1 0 D0 D1 1 Idle (mark) state MPIE RDRF RDR value MPB detection MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) RXI interrupt handler reads RDR data and clears RDRF flag to 0 ID1 Not own ID, so MPIE bit is set to 1 again No RXI interrupt request, RDR not updated a. Own ID does not match data 1 Start bit Data (ID2) MPB D7 1 Stop bit Start bit Data (data1) MPB D7 0 Stop bit 1 0 D0 D1 1 0 D0 D1 1 Idle (mark) state MPIE RDRF RDR value ID1 ID2 Data2 MPB detection MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) RXI interrupt handler reads RDR data and clears RDRF flag to 0 Own ID, so receiving MPIE bit is set to continues, with data 1 again received by RXI interrupt handler b. Own ID matches data Figure 13.13 Example of SCI Receive Operation (8-Bit Data with Multiprocessor Bit and One Stop Bit) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 525 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.3.4 Synchronous Operation In synchronous mode, the SCI transmits and receives data in synchronization with clock pulses. This mode is suitable for high-speed serial communication. The SCI transmitter and receiver share the same clock but are otherwise independent, so fullduplex communication is possible. The transmitter and the receiver are also double-buffered, so continuous transmitting or receiving is possible by reading or writing data while transmitting or receiving is in progress. Figure 13.14 shows the general format in synchronous serial communication. One unit (character or frame) of transfer data * Serial clock LSB MSB * Serial data Don't care Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Don't care Note: * High except in continuous transmitting or receiving Figure 13.14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication In synchronous serial communication, each data bit is placed on the communication line from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data is guaranteed valid at the rise of the serial clock. In each character, the serial data bits are transferred in order from LSB (first) to MSB (last). After output of the MSB, the communication line remains in the state of the MSB. In synchronous mode the SCI receives data by synchronizing with the rise of the serial clock. Communication Format: The data length is fixed at 8 bits. No parity bit or multiprocessor bit can be added. Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input from the SCK pin can be selected by means of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. See table 13.6 for details of SCI clock source selection. When the SCI operates on an internal clock, it outputs the clock source at the SCK pin. Eight clock pulses are output per transmitted or received character. When the SCI is not transmitting or receiving, the clock signal remains in the high state. If receiving in single-character units is required, an external clock should be selected. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 526 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Transmitting and Receiving Data: * SCI Initialization (Synchronous Mode): Before transmitting or receiving data, clear the TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR, then initialize the SCI as follows. When changing the communication mode or format, always clear the TE and RE bits to 0 before following the procedure given below. Clearing TE to 0 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and initializes TSR. Note that clearing RE to 0, however, does not initialize the RDRF, PER, and ORE flags, or RDR, which retain their previous contents. Figure 13.15 shows a sample flowchart for initializing the SCI. (1) Set the clock source in SCR. Clear the RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, TE, and RE bits to 0.* Select the communication format in SMR. Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR. This step is not necessary when an external clock is used. Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive one bit, then set the TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR.* Set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary. Setting the TE or RE bit enables the SCI to use the TxD or RxD pin. Start of initialization Clear TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR (2) (3) Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE, CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (leaving TE and RE bits cleared to 0) Select communication format in SMR Set value in BRR Wait 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary (1) (4) (2) (3) Note: * In simultaneous transmitting and receiving, the TE and RE bits should be cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously. Yes (4) Figure 13.15 Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 527 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface * Transmitting Serial Data (Synchronous Mode): Figure 13.16 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. Initialize Start transmitting (2) Read TDRE flag in SSR (2) (1) (1) SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin is selected automatically. SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR, check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write transmit data in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. To continue transmitting serial data: after checking that the TDRE flag is 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag to 0. When the DMAC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) to write data in TDR, the TDRE flag is checked and cleared automatically. TDRE = 1 Yes No (3) Write transmit data in TDR and clear TDRE flag to 0 in SSR All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No (3) TEND = 1 Yes Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR No Figure 13.16 Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 528 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows. * The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. When the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the SCI recognizes that TDR contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into TSR. * After loading the data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmitting. If the TIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) at this time. If clock output is selected, the SCI outputs eight serial clock pulses. If an external clock source is selected, the SCI outputs data in synchronization with the input clock. Data is output from the TxD pin n order from LSB (bit 0) to MSB (bit 7). * The SCI checks the TDRE flag when it outputs the MSB (bit 7). If the TDRE flag is 0, the SCI loads data from TDR into TSR and begins serial transmission of the next frame. If the TDRE flag is 1, the SCI sets the TEND flag to 1 in SSR, and after transmitting the MSB (bit 7), holds the TxD pin in the MSB state. If the TEIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time * After the end of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held in a constant state. Figure 13.17 shows an example of SCI transmit operation. Transmit direction Serial clock Serial data TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 TXI interrupt handler TXI interrupt writes data in TDR request and clears TDRE flag to 0 1 frame TEI interrupt request Figure 13.17 Example of SCI Transmit Operation Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 529 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface * Receiving Serial Data (Synchronous Mode): Figure 13.18 shows a sample flowchart for receiving serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. When switching from asynchronous to synchronous mode. make sure that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are cleared to 0. If the FER or PER flag is set to 1 the RDRF flag will not be set and both transmitting and receiving will be disabled. Initialize Start receiving (1) (1) SCI initialization: the receive data input function of the RxD pin is selected automatically. Read ORER flag in SSR (2) ORER = 1 No Yes (3) Error handling (continued on next page) (2)(3) Receive error handling: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, then after executing the necessary error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Neither transmitting nor receiving can resume while the ORER flag remains set to 1. (4) SCI status check and receive data read: read SSR, check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read receive data from RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Notification that the RDRF flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the RXI interrupt. To continue receiving serial data: check the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received. When the DMAC is activated by a receive-data-full interrupt request (RXI) to read RDR, the RDRF flag is cleared automatically. Read RDRF flag in SSR No (4) RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data from RDR, and clear RDRF flag to 0 in SSR (5) No Finished receiving? Yes Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR (5) Figure 13.18 Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving (1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 530 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface (3) Error handling Overrun error handling Clear ORER flag to 0 in SSR Figure 13.18 Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving (2) In receiving, the SCI operates as follows: * The SCI synchronizes with serial clock input or output and synchronizes internally. * Receive data is stored in RSR in order from LSB to MSB. After receiving the data, the SCI checks that the RDRF flag is 0, so that receive data can be transferred from RSR to RDR. If this check passes, the RDRF flag is set to 1 and the received data is stored in RDR. If the checks fails (receive error), the SCI operates as shown in table 13.11. When a receive error has been identified in the error check, subsequent transmit and receive operations are disabled. * When the RDRF flag is set to 1, if the RIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) is requested. If the ORER flag is set to 1 and the RIE bit in SCR is also set to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) is requested. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 531 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Figure 13.19 shows an example of SCI receive operation. Serial clock Serial data Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 RDRF ORER RXI interrupt request RXI interrupt handler reads data in RDR and clears RDRF flag to 0 1 frame RXI interrupt request Overrun error, ERI interrupt request Figure 13.19 Example of SCI Receive Operation Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 532 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface * Transmitting and Receiving Data Simultaneously (Synchronous Mode): Figure 13.20 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting and receiving serial data simultaneously and indicates the procedure to follow. Initialize Start of transmitting and receiving (2) (2) (1) (1) SCI initialization: the transmit data output function of the TxD pin and the read data input function of the RxD pin are selected, enabling simultaneous transmitting and receiving. SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR, check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write transmit data in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Notification that the TDRE flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the TXI interrupt. Receive error handling: if a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, then after executing the necessary error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Neither transmitting nor receiving can resume while the ORER flag remains set to 1. SCI status check and receive data read: read SSR, check that the RDRF flag is 1, then read receive data from RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Notification that the RDRF flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the RXI interrupt. To continue transmitting and receiving serial data: check the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received. Also check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted. When the DMAC is activated by a transmitdata-empty interrupt request (TXI) to write data in TDR, the TDRE flag is checked and cleared automatically. When the DMAC is activated by a receive-data-full interrupt request (RXI) to read RDR, the RDRF flag is cleared automatically. Read TDRE flag in SSR No TDRE = 1 Yes (3) Write transmit data in TDR and clear TDRE flag to 0 in SSR (4) Read ORER flag in SSR Yes (3) No Error handling (4) (5) ORER = 1 Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data from RDR, and clear RDRF flag to 0 in SSR No End of transmitting and receiving? Yes (5) Clear TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR Figure 13.20 Sample Flowchart for Simultaneous Serial Transmitting and Receiving Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 533 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.4 SCI Interrupts The SCI has four interrupt request sources: the transmit-end interrupt (TEI), receive-error interrupt (ERI), receive-data-full interrupt (RXI), and transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI). Table 13.12 lists the interrupt sources and indicates their priority. These interrupts can be enabled or disabled by the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in SCR. Each interrupt request is sent separately to the interrupt controller. A TXI interrupt is requested when the TDRE flag is set to 1 in SSR. A TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 in SSR. A TXI interrupt request can activate the DMAC to transfer data. Data transfer by the DMAC automatically clears the TDRE flag to 0. A TEI interrupt request cannot activate the DMAC. An RXI interrupt is requested when the RDRF flag is set to 1 in SSR. An ERI interrupt is requested when the ORER, PER, or FER flag is set to 1 in SSR. An RXI interrupt can activate the DMAC to transfer data. Data transfer by the DMAC automatically clears the RDRF flag to 0. An ERI interrupt request cannot activate the DMAC. The DMAC can be activated by interrupts from SCI channel 0. Table 13.12 SCI Interrupt Sources Interrupt Source ERI RXI TXI TEI Description Receive error (ORER, FER, or PER) Receive data register full (RDRF) Transmit data register empty (TDRE) Transmit end (TEND) Low Priority High Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 534 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface 13.5 13.5.1 Usage Notes Notes on Use of SCI Note the following points when using the SCI. TDR Write and TDRE Flag: The TDRE flag in SSR is a status flag indicating the loading of transmit data from TDR to TSR. The SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 when it transfers data from TDR to TSR. Data can be written into TDR regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. If new data is written in TDR when the TDRE flag is 0, the old data stored in TDR will be lost because this data has not yet been transferred to TSR. Before writing transmit data in TDR, be sure to check that the TDRE flag is set to 1. Simultaneous Multiple Receive Errors: Table 13.13 shows the state of the SSR status flags when multiple receive errors occur simultaneously. When an overrun error occurs the RSR contents are not transferred to RDR, so receive data is lost. Table 13.13 SSR Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data SSR Status Flags RDRF 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 ORER 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 FER 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Receive Data Transfer RSR RDR x ! ! x x ! x Receive Errors Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun error + framing error Overrun error + parity error Framing error + parity error Overrun error + framing error + parity error Notes: !: Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR. x : Receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR. Break Detection and Processing: Break signals can be detected by reading the RxD pin directly when a framing error (FER) is detected. In the break state the input from the RxD pin consists of all 0s, so the FER flag is set and the parity error flag (PER) may also be set. In the break state the SCI receiver continues to operate, so if the FER flag is cleared to 0 it will be set to 1 again. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 535 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Sending a Break Signal: The input/output condition and level of the TxD pin are determined by DR and DDR bits. This feature can be used to send a break signal. After the serial transmitter is initialized, the DR value substitutes for the mark state until the TE bit is set to 1 (the TxD pin function is not selected until the TE bit is set to 1). The DDR and DR bits should therefore be set to 1 beforehand. To send a break signal during serial transmission, clear the DR bit to 0 , then clear the TE bit to 0. When the TE bit is cleared to 0 the transmitter is initialized, regardless of its current state, so the TxD pin becomes an input/output outputting the value 0. Receive Error Flags and Transmitter Operation (Synchronous Mode Only): When a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1 the SCI will not start transmitting, even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 when starting to transmit. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags to 0. Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode and Receive Margin: In asynchronous mode the SCI operates on a base clock with 16 times the bit rate frequency. In receiving, the SCI synchronizes internally with the fall of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock. Receive data is latched at the rising edge of the eighth base clock pulse. See figure 13.21. 16 clocks 8 clocks 0 7 15 0 7 15 0 Internal base clock Receive data (RxD) Start bit D0 D1 Synchronization sampling timing Data sampling timing Figure 13.21 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 536 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface The receive margin in asynchronous mode can therefore be expressed as shown in equation (1). M= (0.5 - 1 2N ) - (L - 0.5) F - D - 0.5 N (1 + F) x 100% . . . . . . . . (1) M: N: D: L: F: Receive margin (%) Ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (N = 16) Clock duty cycle (L = 0 to 1.0) Frame length (L = 9 to 12) Absolute deviation of clock frequency From equation (1), if F = 0 and D = 0.5, the receive margin is 46.875%, as given by equation (2). D = 0.5, F = 0 M = (0.5 - 1 2 x 16 ) x 100% . . . . . . . . (2) = 46.875% This is a theoretical value. A reasonable margin to allow in system designs is 20% to 30%. Restrictions on Use of DMAC: * When an external clock source is used for the serial clock, after the DMAC updates TDR, allow an inversion of at least five system clock () cycles before input of the serial clock to start transmitting. If the serial clock is input within four states of the TDR update, a malfunction may occur. (See figure 13.22) * To have the DMAC read RDR, be sure to select the corresponding SCI receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) as the activation source with bits DTS2 to DTS0 in DTCR. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 537 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface SCK t TDRE D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Note: In operation with an external clock source, be sure that t >4 states. Figure 13.22 Example of Synchronous Transmission Using DMAC Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function: * Problem in Operation: When switching the SCK pin function to the output port function (highlevel output) by making the following settings while DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1 (synchronous mode), low-level output occurs for one half-cycle. 1. End of serial data transmission 2. TE bit = 0 3. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output 4. Occurrence of low-level output (see figure 13.23) Half-cycle low-level output SCK/port 1. End of transmission Data TE C/A CKE1 CKE0 Bit 6 Bit 7 2.TE= 0 4. Low-level output 3.C/A= 0 Figure 13.23 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 538 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface * Sample Procedure for Avoiding Low-Level Output: As this sample procedure temporarily places the SCK pin in the input state, the SCK/port pin should be pulled up beforehand with an external circuit. With DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE0 = 0, and TE = 1, make the following settings in the order shown. 1. End of serial data transmission 2. TE bit = 0 3. CKE1 bit = 1 4. C/A bit = 0 ... switchover to port output 5. CKE1 bit = 0 High-level outputTE SCK/port 1. End of transmission Data TE C/A 3.CKE1= 1 CKE1 CKE0 5.CKE1= 0 Bit 6 Bit 7 2.TE= 0 4.C/A= 0 Figure 13.24 Operation when Switching from SCK Pin Function to Port Pin Function (Example of Preventing Low-Level Output) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 539 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 13 Serial Communication Interface Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 540 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.1 Overview An IC card (smart card) interface conforming to the ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) standard is supported as an extension of the serial communication interface (SCI) functions. Switchover between the normal serial communication interface and the smart card interface is controlled by a register setting. 14.1.1 Features Features of the smart card interface supported by the H8/3067 Group are listed below. * Asynchronous communication Data length: 8 bits Parity bit generation and checking Transmission of error signal (parity error) in receive mode Error signal detection and automatic data retransmission in transmit mode Direct convention and inverse convention both supported * Built-in baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected * Three interrupt sources There are three interrupt sources--transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and transmit/receive error--that can issue requests independently. The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive-data-full interrupt can activate the DMA controller (DMAC) to execute data transfer. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 541 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the smart card interface. Bus interface Module data bus Internal data bus RDR TDR RxD RSR TSR TxD Parity generation Parity check SCK Legend SCMR: RSR: RDR: TSR: TDR: SMR: SCR: SSR: BRR: SCMR SSR SCR SMR Transmission/ reception control BRR Baud rate generator /4 /16 /64 Clock External clock TXI RXI ERI Smart card mode register Receive shift register Receive data register Transmit shift register Transmit data register Serial mode register Serial control register Serial status register Bit rate register Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of Smart Card Interface Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 542 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 14.1 shows the smart card interface pins. Table 14.1 Smart Card Interface Pins Pin Name Serial clock pin Receive data pin Transmit data pin Abbreviation SCK RxD TxD I/O I/O Input Output Function Clock input/output Receive data input Transmit data output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 543 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.1.4 Register Configuration The smart card interface has the internal registers listed in table 14.2. The BRR, TDR, and RDR registers have their normal serial communication interface functions, as described in section 13, Serial Communication Interface. Table 14.2 Smart Card Interface Registers Channel 0 Address* H'FFFB0 H'FFFB1 H'FFFB2 H'FFFB3 H'FFFB4 H'FFFB5 H'FFFB6 1 H'FFFB8 H'FFFB9 H'FFFBA H'FFFBB H'FFFBC H'FFFBD H'FFFBE 2 H'FFFC0 H'FFFC1 H'FFFC2 H'FFFC3 H'FFFC4 H'FFFC5 H'FFFC6 1 Name Serial mode register Bit rate register Serial control register Transmit data register Serial status register Receive data register Smart card mode register Serial mode register Bit rate register Serial control register Transmit data register Serial status register Receive data register Smart card mode register Serial mode register Bit rate register Serial control register Transmit data register Serial status register Receive data register Smart card mode register Abbreviation SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR SCMR SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR SCMR SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR SCMR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 2 R/(W)* 2 2 Initial Value H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF H'84 H'00 H'F2 H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF H'84 H'00 H'F2 H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF H'84 H'00 H'F2 R R/W Notes: 1. Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 3, to clear the flags. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 544 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.2 Register Descriptions This section describes the new or modified registers and bit functions in the smart card interface. 14.2.1 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR) SCMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects smart card interface functions. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 SDIR 0 R/W 2 SINV 0 R/W 1 1 0 SMIF 0 R/W Reserved bits Reserved bit Smart card interface mode select Enables or disables the smart card interface function Smart card data invert Inverts data logic levels Smart card data transfer direction Selects the serial/parallel conversion format SCMR is initialized to H'F2 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 4--Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1. Bit 3--Smart Card Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion 1 format.* Bit 3 SDIR 0 1 Description TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first Receive data is stored LSB-first in RDR TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first Receive data is stored MSB-first in RDR (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 545 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface Bit 2--Smart Card Data Invert (SINV): Specifies inversion of the data logic level. This function is used in combination with the SDIR bit to communicate with inverse-convention 2 cards.* The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. For parity settings, see section 14.3.4, Register Settings. Bit 2 SINV 0 1 Description Unmodified TDR contents are transmitted Receive data is stored unmodified in RDR Inverted TDR contents are transmitted Receive data is inverted before storage in RDR (Initial value) Bit 1--Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1. Bit 0--Smart Card Interface Mode Select (SMIF): Enables the smart card interface function. Bit 0 SMIF 0 1 Description Smart card interface function is disabled Smart card interface function is enabled (Initial value) Notes: 1. The function for switching between LSB-first and MSB-first mode can also be used with the normal serial communication interface. Note that when the communication format data length is set to 7 bits and MSB-first mode is selected for the serial data to be transferred, bit 0 of TDR is not transmitted, and only bits 7 to 1 of the received data are valid. 2. The data logic level inversion function can also be used with the normal serial communication interface. Note that, when inverting the serial data to be transferred, parity transmission and parity checking is based on the number of high-level periods at the serial data I/O pin, and not on the register value. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 546 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.2.2 Serial Status Register (SSR) The function of SSR bit 4 is modified in smart card interface mode. This change also causes a modification to the setting conditions for bit 2 (TEND). Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TDRE 1 R/(W)* 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* 4 ERS 0 R/(W)* 3 PER 0 R/(W)* 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R 0 MPBT 0 R/W Transmit end Status flag indicating end of transmission Error signal status (ERS) Status flag indicating that an error signal has been received Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Bits 7 to 5: These bits operate as in normal serial communication. For details see section 13.2.7, Serial Status Register (SSR). Bit 4--Error Signal Status (ERS): In smart card interface mode, this flag indicates the status of the error signal sent from the receiving device to the transmitting device. The smart card interface does not detection framing errors. Bit 4 ERS 0 Description Indicates normal transmission, with no error signal returned [Clearing conditions] The chip is reset, or enters standby mode or module stop mode Software reads ERS while it is set to 1, then writes 0. 1 Indicates that the receiving device sent an error signal reporting a parity error [Setting condition] A low error signal was sampled. Note: Clearing the TE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the ERS flag, which retains its previous value. (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 547 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface Bits 3 to 0: These bits operate as in normal serial communication. For details see section 13.2.7, Serial Status Register (SSR). The setting conditions for transmit end (TEND), however, are modified as follows. Bit 2 TEND 0 Description Transmission is in progress [Clearing conditions] Software reads TDRE while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the TDRE flag. The DMAC or DTC writes data in TDR. 1 End of transmission [Setting conditions] The chip is reset or enters standby mode. The TE bit and FER/ERS bit are both cleared to 0 in SCR. TDRE is 1 and FER/ERS is 0 at a time 2.5 etu after the last bit of a 1-byte serial character is transmitted (normal transmission). Note: An etu (elementary time unit) is the time needed to transmit one bit. (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 548 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.2.3 Serial Mode Register (SMR) The function of SMR bit 7 is modified in smart card interface mode. This change also causes a modification to the function of bits 1 and 0 in the serial control register (SCR). Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 GM 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Bit 7--GSM Mode (GM): With the normal smart card interface, this bit is cleared to 0. Setting this bit to 1 selects GSM mode, an additional mode for controlling the timing for setting the TEND flag that indicates completion of transmission, and the type of clock output used. The details of the additional clock output control mode are specified by the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in the serial control register (SCR). Bit 7 GM 0 Description Normal smart card interface mode operation The TEND flag is set 12.5 etu after the beginning of the start bit. Clock output on/off control only. 1 GSM mode smart card interface mode operation The TEND flag is set 11.0 etu after the beginning of the start bit. Clock output on/off and fixed-high/fixed-low control. (Initial value) Bits 6 to 0: These bits operate as in normal serial communication. For details see section 13.2.5, Serial Mode Register (SMR). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 549 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.2.4 Serial Control Register (SCR) The function of SCR bits 1 and 0 is modified in smart card interface mode Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TIE 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W 0 CKE0 0 R/W Bits 7 to 2: These bits operate as in normal serial communication. For details see section 13.2.6, Serial Control Register (SCR). Bits 1 and 0--Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0): These bits select the SCI clock source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. In smart card interface mode, it is possible to specify a fixed high level or fixed low level for the clock output, in addition to the usual switching between enabling and disabling of the clock output. Bit 7 GM 0 1 1 Bit 1 CKE1 0 Bit 0 CKE0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description Internal clock/SCK pin is I/O port Internal clock/SCK pin is clock output Internal clock/SCK pin is fixed at low output Internal clock/SCK pin is clock output Internal clock/SCK pin is fixed at high output Internal clock/SCK pin is clock output (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 550 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.3 14.3.1 Operation Overview The main features of the smart card interface are as follows. * One frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit. * In transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (elementary time units: the time for transfer of one bit) is provided between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. * If a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for a1 etu period 10.5 etu after the start bit. * If an error signal is detected during transmission, the same data is transmitted automatically after the elapse of 2 etu or longer. * Only asynchronous communication is supported; there is no synchronous communication function. 14.3.2 Pin Connections Figure 14.2 shows a pin connection diagram for the smart card interface. In communication with a smart card, since both transmission and reception are carried out on a single data transmission line, the TxD pin and RxD pin should both be connected to this line. The data transmission line should be pulled up to VCC with a resistor. When the smart card uses the clock generated on the smart card interface, the SCK pin output is input to the CLK pin of the smart card. If the smart card uses an internal clock, this connection is unnecessary. The reset signal should be output from one of the H8/3067 Group's generic ports. In addition to these pin connections, power and ground connections will normally also be necessary. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 551 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface VCC TxD RxD SCK H8/3067 Group Px (port) chip Clock line Reset line Data line I/O CLK RST Smart card Card-processing device Figure 14.2 Smart Card Interface Connection Diagram Note: A loop-back test can be performed by setting both RE and TE to 1 without connecting a smart card. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 552 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.3.3 Data Format Figure 14.3 shows the smart card interface data format. In reception in this mode, a parity check is carried out on each frame, and if an error is detected an error signal is sent back to the transmitting device to request retransmission of the data. In transmission, the error signal is sampled and the same data is retransmitted if the error signal is low. No parity error Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp Output from transmitting device Parity error Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Output from transmitting device Output from receiving device Legend Ds: D0 to D7: Dp: DE: Start bit Data bits Parity bit Error signal Figure 14.3 Smart Card Interface Data Format The operating sequence is as follows. 1. When the data line is not in use it is in the high-impedance state, and is fixed high with a pullup resistor. 2. The transmitting device starts transfer of one frame of data. The data frame starts with a start bit (Ds, low-level), followed by 8 data bits (D0 to D7) and a parity bit (Dp). 3. With the smart card interface, the data line then returns to the high-impedance state. The data line is pulled high with a pull-up resistor. 4. The receiving device carries out a parity check. If there is no parity error and the data is received normally, the receiving device waits for reception of the next data. If a parity error occurs, however, the receiving device outputs an error signal (DE, low-level) to request retransmission of the data. After outputting the error signal for the prescribed length of time, Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 553 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface the receiving device places the signal line in the high-impedance state again. The signal line is pulled high again by a pull-up resistor. 5. If the transmitting device does not receive an error signal, it proceeds to transmit the next data frame. If it receives an error signal, however, it returns to step 2 and transmits the same data again. 14.3.4 Register Settings Table 14.3 shows a bit map of the registers used in the smart card interface. Bits indicated as 0 or 1 must be set to the value shown. The setting of other bits is described in this section. Table 14.3 Smart Card Interface Register Settings Bit 1 Register Address* Bit 7 Bit 6 0 BRR6 RIE TDR6 RDRF RDR6 -- Bit 5 1 BRR5 TE TDR5 ORER RDR5 -- Bit 4 O/E BRR4 RE TDR4 ERS RDR4 -- Bit 3 1 BRR3 0 TDR3 PER RDR3 SDIR Bit 2 0 BRR2 0 TDR2 TEND RDR2 SINV Bit 1 CKS1 Bit 0 CKS0 SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR SCMR H'FFFB0 H'FFFB1 H'FFFB2 H'FFFB3 H'FFFB4 H'FFFB5 H'FFFB6 GM BRR7 TIE TDR7 TDRE RDR7 -- BRR1 BRR0 2 CKE1* CKE0 TDR1 0 RDR1 -- TDR0 0 RDR0 SMIF Notes: -- Unused bit. 1. Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. When GM is cleared to 0 in SMR, the CKE1 bit must also be cleared to 0. Serial Mode Register (SMR) Settings: Clear the GM bit to 0 when using the normal smart card interface mode, or set to 1 when using GSM mode. Clear the O/E bit to 0 if the smart card is of the direct convention type, or set to 1 if of the inverse convention type. Bits CKS1 and CKS0 select the clock source of the built-in baud rate generator. See section 14.3.5, Clock. Bit Rate Register (BRR) Settings: BRR is used to set the bit rate. See section 14.3.5, Clock, for the method of calculating the value to be set. Serial Control Register (SCR) Settings: The TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits have their normal serial communication functions. See section 13, Serial Communication Interface, for details. The CKE1 and CKE0 bits specify clock output. To disable clock output, clear these bits to 00; to enable clock Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 554 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface output, set these bits to 01. Clock output is not performed when the GM bit is set to 1 in SMR. Clock output can also be fixed low or high. Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR) Settings: Clear both the SDIR bit and SINV bit cleared to 0 if the smart card is of the direct convention type, and set both to 1 if of the inverse convention type. To use the smart card interface, set the SMIF bit to 1. The register settings and examples of starting character waveforms are shown below for two smart cards, one following the direct convention and one the inverse convention. 1. Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0) (Z) A Ds Z D0 Z D1 A D2 Z D3 Z D4 Z D5 A D6 A D7 Z Dp (Z) State With the direct convention type, the logic 0 level corresponds to state Z and the logic 1 level to state A, and transfer is performed in LSB-first order. In the example above, the first character data is H'3B. The parity bit is 1, following the even parity rule designated for smart cards. 2. Indirect Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1) (Z) A Ds Z D7 Z D6 A D5 A D4 A D3 A D2 A D1 A D0 Z Dp (Z) State With the indirect convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state Z and the logic 0 level to state A, and transfer is performed in MSB-first order. In the example above, the first character data is H'3F. The parity bit is 0, corresponding to state Z, following the even parity rule designated for smart cards. In the H8/3067 Group, inversion specified by the SINV bit applies only to the data bits, D7 to D0. For parity bit inversion, the O/E bit in SMR must be set to odd parity mode. This applies to both transmission and reception. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 555 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.3.5 Clock Only an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can be used as the transmit/receive clock for the smart card interface. The bit rate is set with the bit rate register (BRR) and the CKS1 and CKS0 bits in the serial mode register (SMR). The equation for calculating the bit rate is shown below. Table 14.5 shows some sample bit rates. If clock output is selected with CKE0 set to 1, a clock with a frequency of 372 times the bit rate is output from the SCK pin. B= 1488 x 22n-1 x (N + 1) x 106 where, N: BRR setting (0 N 255) B: Bit rate (bit/s) : Operating frequency (MHz) n: See table 14.4 Table 14.4 n-Values of CKS1 and CKS0 Settings n 0 1 2 3 1 CKS1 0 CKS0 0 1 0 1 Note: If the gear function is used to divide the clock frequency, use the divided frequency to calculate the bit rate. The equation above applies directly to 1/1 frequency division. Table 14.5 Bit Rates (bits/s) for Various BRR Settings (When n = 0) (MHz) N 0 1 2 7.1424 9600.0 4800.0 3200.0 10.00 13440.9 6720.4 4480.3 10.7136 14400.0 7200.0 4800.0 13.00 17473.1 8736.6 5824.4 14.2848 19200.0 9600.0 6400.0 16.00 21505.4 10752.7 7168.5 18.00 24193.5 12096.8 8064.5 Note: Bit rates are rounded off to one decimal place. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 556 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface The following equation calculates the bit rate register (BRR) setting from the operating frequency and bit rate. N is an integer from 0 to 255, specifying the value with the smaller error. N= 1488 x 22n-1 x B x 106 - 1 Table 14.6 BRR Settings for Typical Bit Rates (bits/s) (When n = 0) (MHz) 7.1424 bit/s 9600 N 0 Error 0.00 N 1 10.00 Error 30 10.7136 N 1 Error 25 N 1 13.00 Error 8.99 14.2848 N 1 Error 0.00 N 1 16.00 Error 12.01 N 2 18.00 Error 15.99 Table 14.7 Maximum Bit Rates for Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface Mode) (MHz) 7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00 14.2848 16.00 18.00 Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 9600 13441 14400 17473 19200 21505 24194 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The bit rate error is given by the following equation: Error (%) = 1488 x 22n-1 x B x (N + 1) x 106 - 1 x 100 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 557 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.3.6 Transmitting and Receiving Data Initialization: Before transmitting or receiving data, the smart card interface must be initialized as described below. Initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa. 1. Clear the TE and RE bits to 0 in the serial control register (SCR). 2. Clear error flags FER/ERS, PER, and ORER to 0 in the serial status register (SSR). 3. Set the parity bit (O/E) and baud rate generator select bits (CKS1 and CKS0) in the serial mode register (SMR). Clear the C/A, CHR, and MP bits to 0, and set the STOP and PE bits to 1. 4. Set the SMIF, SDIR, and SINV bits in the smart card mode register (SCMR). When the SMIF bit is set to 1, the TxD pin and RxD pin are both switched from port to SCI pin functions and go to the high-impedance state. 5. Set a value corresponding to the desired bit rate in the bit rate register (BRR). 6. Set the CKE0 bit in SCR. Clear the TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, TEIE, and CKE1 bits to 0. If the CKE0 bit is set to 1, the clock is output from the SCK pin. 7. Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits in SCR. Do not set the TE bit and RE bit at the same time, except for self-diagnosis. Transmitting Serial Data: As data transmission in smart card mode involves error signal sampling and retransmission processing, the processing procedure is different from that for the normal SCI. Figure 14.5 shows a sample transmission processing flowchart. 1. Perform smart card interface mode initialization as described in Initialization above. 2. Check that the FER/ERS error flag is cleared to 0 in SSR. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until it can be confirmed that the TEND flag is set to 1 in SSR. 4. Write the transmit data in TDR, clear the TDRE flag to 0, and perform the transmit operation. The TEND flag is cleared to 0. 5. To continue transmitting data, go back to step 2. 6. To end transmission, clear the TE bit to 0. The above processing may include interrupt handling DMA transfer. If transmission ends and the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TIE bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests are enabled, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) will be requested. If an error occurs in transmission and the ERS flag is set to 1 while the RIE bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests are enabled, a transmit/receive-error interrupt (ERI) will be requested. The timing of TEND flag setting depends on the GM bit in SMR (see figure 14.4). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 558 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface If the TXI interrupt activates the DMAC, the number of bytes designated in the DMAC can be transmitted automatically, including automatic retransmission. For details, see Interrupt Operations and Data Transfer by DMAC in this section. Serial data Ds Dp DE Guard time (1) GM = 0 TEND 12.5 etu (2) GM = 1 TEND 11.0 etu Figure 14.4 Timing of TEND Flag Setting Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 559 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface Start Initialization Start transmitting No FER/ERS = 0? Yes Error handling No TEND = 1? Yes Write transmit data in TDR, and clear TDRE flag to 0 in SSR No All data transmitted? Yes No FER/ERS = 0? Yes Error handling No TEND = 1? Yes Clear TE bit to 0 End Figure 14.5 Sample Transmission Processing Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 560 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface TDR 1. Data write 2. Transfer from TDR to TSR 3. Serial data output Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 TSR (shift register) Data 1 Data remains in TDR Data 1 I/O signal output In case of normal transmission: TEND flag is set In case of transmit error: ERS flag is set Steps 2 and 3 above are repeated until the TEND flag is set. Note: When the ERS flag is set, it should be cleared until transfer of the last bit (D7 in LSB-first transmission, D0 in MSB-first transmission) of the retransmit data to be transmitted next has been completed. Figure 14.6 Relation Between Transmit Operation and Internal Registers I/O data Ds Da Db Dc Dd De Df Dg Dh Dp DE Guard time TXI (TEND interrupt) 12.5 etu When GM = 0 11.0 etu When GM = 1 Figure 14.7 Timing of TEND Flag Setting Receiving Serial Data: Data reception in smart card mode uses the same processing procedure as for the normal SCI. Figure 14.8 shows a sample reception processing flowchart. 1. Perform smart card interface mode initialization as described in Initialization above. 2. Check that the ORER flag and PER flag are cleared to 0 in SSR. If either is set, perform the appropriate receive error handling, then clear both the ORER and the PER flag to 0. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until it can be confirmed that the RDRF flag is set to 1. 4. Read the receive data from RDR. 5. To continue receiving data, clear the RDRF flag to 0 and go back to step 2. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 561 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 6. To end reception, clear the RE bit to 0. Start Initialization Start receiving ORER = 0 and PER = 0? Yes No Error handling No RDRF = 1? Yes Read RDR and clear RDRF flag to 0 in SSR No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit to 0 Figure 14.8 Sample Reception Processing Flowchart The above procedure may include interrupt handling and DMA transfer. If reception ends and the RDRF flag is set to 1 while the RIE bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests are enabled, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) will be requested. If an error occurs in reception and either the ORER flag or the PER flag is set to 1, a transmit/receive-error interrupt (ERI) will be requested. If the RXI interrupt activates the DMAC, the number of bytes designated in the DMAC will be transferred, skipping receive data in which an error occurred. For details, see Interrupt Operations and Data Transfer by DMAC in this section. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 562 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface If a parity error occurs during reception and the PER flag is set to 1, the received data is transferred to RDR, so the erroneous data can be read. Switching Modes: When switching from receive mode to transmit mode, first confirm that the receive operation has been completed, then start from initialization, clearing RE to 0 and setting TE to 1. The RDRF, PER, or ORER flag can be used to check that the receive operation has been completed. When switching from transmit mode to receive mode, first confirm that the transmit operation has been completed, then start from initialization, clearing TE to 0 and setting RE to 1. The TEND flag can be used to check that the transmit operation has been completed. Fixing Clock Output: When the GM bit is set to 1 in SMR, clock output can be fixed by means of the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. The minimum clock pulse width can be set to the specified width in this case. Figure 14.9 shows the timing for fixing clock output. In this example, GM = 1, CKE1 = 0, and the CKE0 bit is controlled. Specified pulse width CKE1 value SCK Specified pulse width SCR write (CKE0 = 0) SCR write (CKE0 = 1) Figure 14.9 Timing for Fixing Cock Output Interrupt Operations: The smart card interface has three interrupt sources: transmit-data-empty (TXI), transmit/receive-error (ERI), and receive-data-full (RXI). The transmit-end interrupt request (TEI) is not available in smart card mode. A TXI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 in SSR. An RXI interrupt is requested when the RDRF flag is set to 1 in SSR. An ERI interrupt is requested when the ORER, PER, or ERS flag is set to 1 in SSR. These relationships are shown in table 14.8. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 563 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface Table 14.8 Smart Card Interface Mode Operating States and Interrupt Sources Operating State Transmit Mode Receive Mode Normal operation Error Normal operation Error Flag TEND ERS RDRF Enable Bit TIE RIE RIE Interrupt Source TXI ERI RXI ERI DMAC Activation Available Not available Available Not available PER, ORER RIE Data Transfer by DMAC: The DMAC can be used to transmit and receive data in smart card mode, as in normal SCI operations. In transmit mode, when the TEND flag is set to 1 in SSR, the TDRE flag is set simultaneously, generating a TXI interrupt. If the TXI request is designated beforehand as a DMAC activation source, the DMAC will be activated by the TXI request and will transfer the next transmit data. This data transfer by the DMAC automatically clears the TDRE and TEND flags to 0. In the event of an error, the SCI automatically retransmits the same data, keeping the TEND flag cleared to 0 so that the DMAC is not activated. The SCI and DMAC will therefore automatically transmit the designated number of bytes, including retransmission when an error occurs. When an error occurs, the ERS flag is not cleared automatically, so the RIE bit should be set to 1 to enable the error to generate an ERI request, and the ERI interrupt handler should clear ERS. When using the DMAC to transmit or receive, first set up and enable the DMAC, then make SCI settings. DMAC settings are described in section 7, DMA controller. In receive operations, an RXI interrupt is requested when the RDRF flag is set to 1 in SSR. If the RXI request is designated beforehand as a DMAC activation source, the DMAC will be activated by the RXI request and will transfer the received data. This data transfer by the DMAC automatically clears the RDRF flag to 0. When an error occurs, the RDRF flag is not set and an error flag is set instead. The DMAC is not activated. The ERI interrupt request is directed to the CPU. The ERI interrupt handler should clear the error flags. Examples of Operation in GSM Mode: When switching between smart card interface mode and software standby mode, use the following procedures to maintain the clock duty cycle. * Switching from smart card interface mode to software standby mode 1. Set the P94 data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) to the values for the fixed output state in software standby mode. 2. Write 0 in the TE and RE bits in the serial control register (SCR) to stop transmit/receive operations. At the same time, set the CKE1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 564 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 3. Write 0 in the CKE0 bit in SCR to stop the clock. 4. Wait for one serial clock cycle. During this period, the duty cycle is preserved and clock output is fixed at the specified level. 5. Write H'00 in the serial mode register (SMR) and smart card mode register (SCMR). 6. Make the transition to the software standby state. * Returning from software standby mode to smart card interface mode 1. Clear the software standby state. 2. Set the CKE1 bit in SCR to the value for the fixed output state at the start of software standby (the current P94 pin state). 3. Set smart card interface mode and output the clock. Clock signal generation is started with the normal duty cycle. Software standby Normal operation Normal operation (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (2) (3) Figure 14.10 Procedure for Stopping and Restarting the Clock Use the following procedure to secure the clock duty cycle after powering on. 1. The initial state is port input and high impedance. Use pull-up or pull-down resistors to fix the potential. 2. Fix at the output specified by the CKE1 bit in SCR. 3. Set SMR and SCMR, and switch to smart card interface mode operation. 4. Set the CKE0 bit to 1 in SCR to start clock output. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 565 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface 14.4 Usage Notes The following points should be noted when using the SCI as a smart card interface. Receive Data Sampling Timing and Receive Margin in Smart Card Interface Mode: In smart card interface mode, the SCI operates on a base clock with a frequency of 372 times the transfer rate. In reception, the SCI synchronizes internally with the fall of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock. Receive data is latched at the rising edge of the 186th base clock pulse. The timing is shown in figure 14.11. 372 clocks 186 clocks 0 185 371 0 185 371 0 Internal base clock Receive data (RxD) Start bit D0 D1 Synchronization sampling timing Data sampling timing Figure 14.11 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Interface Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 566 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface The receive margin can therefore be expressed as follows. Receive margin in smart card interface mode: M = (0.5 - 1 2N ) - (L - 0.5) F - D - 0.5 N (1 + F) x 100% M: N: D: L: F: Receive margin (%) Ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (N = 372) Clock duty cycle (L = 0 to 1.0) Frame length (L =10) Absolute deviation of clock frequency From the above equation, if F = 0 and D = 0.5, the receive margin is as follows. When D = 0.5 and F = 0: M = (0.5 - 1/2 x 372) x 100% = 49.866% Retransmission: Retransmission is performed by the SCI in receive mode and transmit mode as described below. * Retransmission when SCI is in Receive Mode Figure 14.12 illustrates retransmission when the SCI is in receive mode. 1. If an error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit is automatically set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to the enable state, an ERI interrupt is requested. The PER bit should be cleared to 0 in SSR before the next parity bit sampling timing. 2. The RDRF bit in SSR is not set for the frame in which the error has occurred. 3. If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the PER bit is not set to 1 in SSR. 4. If no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the receive operation is assumed to have been completed normally, and the RDRF bit is automatically set to 1 in SSR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to the enable state, an RXI interrupt is requested. If RXI is enabled as a DMA transfer activation source, the RDR contents can be read automatically. When the DMAC reads the RDR data, the RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. 5. When a normal frame is received, the data pin is held in the high-impedance state at the error signal transmission timing. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 567 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 14 Smart Card Interface Frame n Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Retransmitted frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp (DE) Frame n+1 Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 RDRF [2] PER [1] [3] [4] Figure 14.12 Retransmission in SCI Receive Mode * Retransmission when SCI is in Transmit Mode Figure 14.13 illustrates retransmission when the SCI is in transmit mode. 6. If an error signal is sent back from the receiving device after transmission of one frame is completed, the FER/ERS bit is set to 1 in SSR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to the enable state, an ERI interrupt is requested. The ERS bit should be cleared to 0 in SSR before the next parity bit sampling timing. 7. The TEND bit in SSR is not set for the frame for which the error signal was received. 8. If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving device, the ERS flag is not set in SSR. 9. If an error signal is not sent back from the receiving device, transmission of one frame, including retransmission, is assumed to have been completed, and the TEND bit is set to 1 in SSR. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to the enable state, a TXI interrupt is requested. If TXI is enabled as a DMA transfer activation source, the next data can be written in TDR automatically. When the DMAC writes data in TDR, the TDRE bit is automatically cleared to 0. Frame n Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Retransmitted frame Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp (DE) Frame n+1 Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 TDRE Transfer from TDR to TSR TEND [7] ERS [6] [8] [9] Transfer from TDR to TSR Transfer from TDR to TSR Figure 14.13 Retransmission in SCI Transmit Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 568 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter Section 15 A/D Converter 15.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group includes a 10-bit successive-approximations A/D converter with a selection of up to eight analog input channels. When the A/D converter is not used, it can be halted independently to conserve power. For details see section 20.6, Module Standby Function. 15.1.1 Features A/D converter features are listed below. * 10-bit resolution * Eight input channels * Selectable analog conversion voltage range The analog voltage conversion range can be programmed by input of an analog reference voltage at the VREF pin. * High-speed conversion Conversion time: maximum 3.5 s per channel (with 20 MHz system clock) * Two conversion modes Single mode: A/D conversion of one channel Scan mode: continuous conversion on one to four channels * Four 16-bit data registers A/D conversion results are transferred for storage into data registers corresponding to the channels. * Sample-and-hold function * Three conversion start sources The A/D converter can be activated by software, an external trigger, or an 8-bit timer compare match. * A/D interrupt requested at end of conversion At the end of A/D conversion, an A/D end interrupt (ADI) can be requested. * DMA controller (DMAC) activation The DMAC can be activated at the end of A/D conversion. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 569 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter. Module data bus Bus interface ADDRC ADDRD ADDRA ADDRB ADCSR On-chip data bus AVCC VREF AVSS 10-bit D/A Successiveapproximations register AN 0 AN 1 AN 2 AN 3 AN 4 AN 5 AN 6 AN 7 ADTRG Compare match A0 ADTE 8-bit timer TCSR0 Legend ADCR: ADCSR: ADDRA: ADDRB: ADDRC: ADDRD: Analog multiplexer + - Comparator Control circuit Sample-andhold circuit /8 /4 ADCR ADI interrupt signal A/D control register A/D control/status register A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C A/D data register D Figure 15.1 A/D Converter Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 570 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.1.3 Input Pins Table 15.1 summarizes the A/D converter's input pins. The eight analog input pins are divided into two groups: group 0 (AN0 to AN3), and group 1 (AN4 to AN7). AVCC and AVSS are the power supply for the analog circuits in the A/D converter. VREF is the A/D conversion reference voltage. Table 15.1 A/D Converter Pins Pin Name Analog power supply pin Analog ground pin Reference voltage pin Analog input pin 0 Analog input pin 1 Analog input pin 2 Analog input pin 3 Analog input pin 4 Analog input pin 5 Analog input pin 6 Analog input pin 7 Abbreviation I/O AVCC AVSS VREF AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input External trigger input for starting A/D conversion Group 1 analog inputs Function Analog power supply Analog ground and reference voltage Analog reference voltage Group 0 analog inputs A/D external trigger input pin ADTRG Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 571 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.1.4 Register Configuration Table 15.2 summarizes the A/D converter's registers. Table 15.2 A/D Converter Registers Address* H'FFFE0 H'FFFE1 H'FFFE2 H'FFFE3 H'FFFE4 H'FFFE5 H'FFFE6 H'FFFE7 H'FFFE8 H'FFFE9 1 Name A/D data register A H A/D data register A L A/D data register B H A/D data register B L A/D data register C H A/D data register C L A/D data register D H A/D data register D L A/D control/status register A/D control register Abbreviation ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR R/W R R R R R R R R 2 R/(W)* Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'7E R/W Notes: 1. Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 572 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.2 15.2.1 Bit ADDRn Register Descriptions A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 Initial value Read/Write (n = A to D) A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result Reserved bits The four A/D data registers (ADDRA to ADDRD) are 16-bit read-only registers that store the results of A/D conversion. An A/D conversion produces 10-bit data, which is transferred for storage into the A/D data register corresponding to the selected channel. The upper 8 bits of the result are stored in the upper byte of the A/D data register. The lower 2 bits are stored in the lower byte. Bits 5 to 0 of an A/D data register are reserved bits that are always read as 0. Table 15.3 indicates the pairings of analog input channels and A/D data registers. The CPU can always read and write the A/D data registers. The upper byte can be read directly, but the lower byte is read through a temporary register (TEMP). For details see section 15.3, CPU Interface. The A/D data registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in standby mode. Table 15.3 Analog Input Channels and A/D Data Registers Analog Input Channel Group 0 AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 Group 1 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 A/D Data Register ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 573 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.2.2 Bit A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) 7 ADF 0 R/(W) * 6 ADIE 0 R/W 5 ADST 0 R/W 4 SCAN 0 R/W 3 CKS 0 R/W 2 CH2 0 R/W 1 CH1 0 R/W 0 CH0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write Channel select 2 to 0 These bits select analog input channels Clock select Selects the A/D conversion time Scan mode Selects single mode or scan mode A/D start Starts or stops A/D conversion A/D interrupt enable Enables and disables A/D end interrupts A/D end flag Indicates end of A/D conversion Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. ADCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the mode and controls the A/D converter. ADCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 574 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter Bit 7--A/D End Flag (ADF): Indicates the end of A/D conversion. Bit 7 ADF 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read ADF when ADF =1, then write 0 in ADF. DMAC activated by ADI interrupt. [Setting conditions] Single mode: A/D conversion ends Scan mode: A/D conversion ends in all selected channels (Initial value) 1 Bit 6--A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Enables or disables the interrupt (ADI) requested at the end of A/D conversion. Bit 6 ADIE 0 1 Description A/D end interrupt request (ADI) is disabled A/D end interrupt request (ADI) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 5--A/D Start (ADST): Starts or stops A/D conversion. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. It can also be set to 1 by external trigger input at the ADTRG pin, or by an 8-bit timer compare match. Bit 5 ADST 0 1 Description A/D conversion is stopped (Initial value) Single mode: A/D conversion starts; ADST is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected channels, until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a transition to standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 575 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter Bit 4--Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects single mode or scan mode. For further information on operation in these modes, see section 15.4, Operation. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching the conversion mode. Bit 4 SCAN 0 1 Description Single mode Scan mode (Initial value) Bit 3--Clock Select (CKS): Selects the A/D conversion time. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching the conversion time. Bit 3 CKS 0 1 Description Conversion time = 134 states (maximum) Conversion time = 70 states (maximum) (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0--Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): These bits and the SCAN bit select the analog input channels. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before changing the channel selection. Group Selection CH2 0 Channel Selection CH1 0 1 1 0 1 CH0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description Single Mode AN0 (Initial value) AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Scan Mode AN0 AN0, AN1 AN0 to AN2 AN0 to AN3 AN4 AN4, AN5 AN4 to AN6 AN4 to AN7 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 576 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.2.3 Bit A/D Control Register (ADCR) 7 TRGE 0 R/W 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 Reserved bits Trigger enable Enables or disables starting of A/D conversion by an external trigger or 8-bit timer compare match 2 1 1 1 0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables starting of A/D conversion by external trigger input or an 8-bit timer compare match signal. ADCR is initialized to H'7F by a reset and in standby mode. Bit 7--Trigger Enable (TRGE): Enables or disables starting of A/D conversion by an external trigger or 8-bit timer compare match. Bit 7 TRGE 0 1 Description Starting of A/D conversion by an external trigger or 8-bit timer compare match is disabled A/D conversion is started at the falling edge of the external trigger signal (ADTRG) or by an 8-bit timer compare match (Initial value) External trigger pin and 8-bit timer selection are performed by the 8-bit timer. For details, see section 10, 8-Bit Timers. Bits 6 to 1--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 0--Reserved: This bit can be read or written, but must not be set to 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 577 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.3 CPU Interface ADDRA to ADDRD are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to the CPU by an 8-bit data bus. Therefore, although the upper byte can be be accessed directly by the CPU, the lower byte is read through an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP). An A/D data register is read as follows. When the upper byte is read, the upper-byte value is transferred directly to the CPU and the lower-byte value is transferred into TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU. When reading an A/D data register, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained. Figure 15.2 shows the data flow for access to an A/D data register. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 578 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter Upper-byte read CPU (H'AA) Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'40) ADDRnH (H'AA) ADDRnL (H'40) (n = A to D) Lower-byte read CPU (H'40) Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'40) ADDRnH (H'AA) ADDRnL (H'40) (n = A to D) Figure 15.2 A/D Data Register Access Operation (Reading H'AA40) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 579 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.4 Operation The A/D converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution. It has two operating modes: single mode and scan mode. 15.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) Single mode should be selected when only one A/D conversion on one channel is required. A/D conversion starts when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or by external trigger input. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. When conversion ends the ADF bit is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is also set to 1, an ADI interrupt is requested at this time. To clear the ADF flag to 0, first read ADCSR, then write 0 in ADF. When the mode or analog input channel must be switched during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel is changed. Typical operations when channel 1 (AN1) is selected in single mode are described next. Figure 15.3 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. Single mode is selected (SCAN = 0), input channel AN1 is selected (CH2 = CH1 = 0, CH0 = 1), the A/D interrupt is enabled (ADIE = 1), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1). 2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred into ADDRB. At the same time the ADF flag is set to 1, the ADST bit is cleared to 0, and the A/D converter becomes idle. 3. Since ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, an ADI interrupt is requested. 4. The A/D interrupt handling routine starts. 5. The routine reads ADCSR, then writes 0 in the ADF flag. 6. The routine reads and processes the conversion result (ADDRB). 7. Execution of the A/D interrupt handling routine ends. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again and steps 2 to 7 are repeated. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 580 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Set * ADIE A/D conversion starts Clear * Clear * Set * Set * ADST ADF Idle State of channel 0 (AN 0) Idle A/D conversion (1) State of channel 1 (AN 1) Idle Idle A/D conversion (2) Idle State of channel 2 (AN 2) Idle State of channel 3 (AN 3) ADDRA Read conversion result A/D conversion result (1) Read conversion result A/D conversion result (2) ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD Figure 15.3 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 581 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter Note: * Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. Section 15 A/D Converter 15.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1) Scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first channel in the group (AN0 when CH2 = 0, AN4 when CH2 = 1). When two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (AN1 or AN5) starts immediately. A/D conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the ADST bit is cleared to 0. The conversion results are transferred for storage into the A/D data registers corresponding to the channels. When the mode or analog input channel selection must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1. A/D conversion will start again from the first channel in the group. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel selection is changed. Typical operations when three channels in group 0 (AN0 to AN2) are selected in scan mode are described next. Figure 15.4 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. Scan mode is selected (SCAN = 1), scan group 0 is selected (CH2 = 0), analog input channels AN0 to AN2 are selected (CH1 = 1, CH0 = 0), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1). 2. When A/D conversion of the first channel (AN0) is completed, the result is transferred into ADDRA. Next, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts automatically. 3. Conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (AN2). 4. When conversion of all selected channels (AN0 to AN2) is completed, the ADF flag is set to 1 and conversion of the first channel (AN0) starts again. If the ADIE bit is set to 1, an ADI interrupt is requested at this time. 5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again from the first channel (AN0). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 582 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Continuous A/D conversion Set*1 Clear*1 ADST Clear*1 A/D conversion time Idle A/D conversion (1) ADF Idle A/D conversion (4) Idle State of channel 0 (AN 0) Idle Idle A/D conversion (2) State of channel 1 (AN 1) Idle A/D conversion (3) A/D conversion (5)*2 Idle State of channel 2 (AN 2) Idle Transfer A/D conversion result (1) Idle State of channel 3 (AN 3) ADDRA A/D conversion result (4) ADDRB A/D conversion result (2) ADDRC A/D conversion result (3) Figure 15.4 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected) ADDRD Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 583 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter Notes: 1. Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. 2. Data currently being converted is ignored. Section 15 A/D Converter 15.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog input at a time tD after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 15.5 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 15.4 indicates the A/D conversion time. As indicated in figure 15.5, the A/D conversion time includes tD and the input sampling time. The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 15.4. In scan mode, the values given in table 15.4 apply to the first conversion. In the second and subsequent conversions the conversion time is fixed at 128 states when CKS = 0 or 66 states when CKS = 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 584 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter (1) Address bus (2) Write signal Input sampling timing ADF tD t SPL t CONV Legend (1): ADCSR write cycle (2): ADCSR address tD : Synchronization delay t SPL : Input sampling time t CONV: A/D conversion time Figure 15.5 A/D Conversion Timing Table 15.4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) CKS = 0 Symbol Synchronization delay Input sampling time A/D conversion time tD tSPL tCONV Min 6 -- 131 Typ -- 31 -- Max 9 -- 134 CKS = 1 Min 4 -- 69 Typ -- 15 -- Max 5 -- 70 Note: Values in the table are numbers of states. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 585 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGE bit is set to 1 in ADCR and the 8-bit timer's ADTE bit is cleared to 0, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A high-tolow transition at the ADTRG pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as if the ADST bit had been set to 1 by software. Figure 15.6 shows the timing. ADTRG Internal trigger signal ADST A/D conversion Figure 15.6 External Trigger Input Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 586 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 15.5 Interrupts The A/D converter generates an interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. The ADI interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit in ADCSR. The ADI interrupt request can be designated as a DMAC activation source. In this case, an interrupt request is not sent to the CPU. 15.6 Usage Notes When using the A/D converter, note the following points: 1. Analog Input Voltage Range: During A/D conversion, the voltages input to the analog input pins should be in the range AVSS ANn VREF. 2. Relationships of AVCC and AVSS to VCC and VSS: AVCC, AVSS, VCC, and VSS should be related as follows: AVSS = VSS. AVCC and AVSS must not be left open, even if the A/D converter is not used. 3. VREF Programming Range: The reference voltage input at the VREF pin should be in the range VREF AVCC. 4. Note on Board Design: In board layout, separate the digital circuits from the analog circuits as much as possible. Particularly avoid layouts in which the signal lines of digital circuits cross or closely approach the signal lines of analog circuits. Induction and other effects may cause the analog circuits to operate incorrectly, or may adversely affect the accuracy of A/D conversion. The analog input signals (AN0 to AN7), analog reference voltage (VREF), and analog supply voltage (AVCC) must be separated from digital circuits by the analog ground (AVSS). The analog ground (AVSS) should be connected to a stable digital ground (VSS) at one point on the board. 5. Note on Noise: To prevent damage from surges and other abnormal voltages at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) and analog reference voltage pin (VREF), connect a protection circuit like the one in figure 15.7 between AVCC and AVSS. The bypass capacitors connected to AVCC and VREF and the filter capacitors connected to AN0 to AN7 must be connected to AVSS. If filter capacitors like the ones in figure 15.7 are connected, the voltage values input to the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) will be smoothed, which may give rise to error. Error can also occur if A/D conversion is frequently performed in scan mode so that the current that charges and discharges the capacitor in the sample-and-hold circuit of the A/D converter becomes greater than that input to the analog input pins via input impedance Rin. The circuit constants should therefore be selected carefully. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 587 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter AVCC VREF Rin*2 *1 *1 100 AN0 to AN7 0.1 F AVSS Notes: 1. 10 F 0.01 F 2. Rin: input impedance Figure 15.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit Table 15.5 Analog Input Pin Ratings Item Analog input capacitance Allowable signal-source impedance min -- -- max 20 10* Unit pF k Note: * When conversion time = 134 states, VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, and 13 MHz. For details see section 21, Electrical Characteristics. 10 k AN0 to AN7 To A/D converter 20 pF Figure 15.8 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit Note: Numeric values are approximate, except in table 15.5 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 588 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter 6. A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions: A/D conversion accuracy in the H8/3067 Group is defined as follows: * * Resolution:..................Digital output code length of A/D converter Offset error: ................Deviation from ideal A/D conversion characteristic of analog input voltage required to raise digital output from minimum voltage value 0000000000 to 0000000001 (figure 15.10) Full-scale error: ..........Deviation from ideal A/D conversion characteristic of analog input voltage required to raise digital output from 1111111110 to 1111111111 (figure 15.10) Quantization error:......Intrinsic error of the A/D converter; 1/2 LSB (figure 15.9) Nonlinearity error: ......Deviation from ideal A/D conversion characteristic in range from zero volts to full scale, exclusive of offset error, full-scale error, and quantization error. Absolute accuracy: .....Deviation of digital value from analog input value, including offset error, full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. Digital output * * * * 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Quantization error 1/8 2/8 3/8 4/8 5/8 6/8 7/8 FS Analog input voltage Figure 15.9 A/D Converter Accuracy Definitions (1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 589 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter Full-scale error Digital output Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Nonlinearity error Actual A/D conversion characteristic FS Offset error Analog input voltage Figure 15.10 A/D Converter Accuracy Definitions (2) 7. Allowable Signal-Source Impedance: The analog inputs of the H8/3067 Group are designed to assure accurate conversion of input signals with a signal-source impedance not exceeding 10 k. The reason for this rating is that it enables the input capacitor in the sample-and-hold circuit in the A/D converter to charge within the sampling time. If the sensor output impedance exceeds 10 k, charging may be inadequate and the accuracy of A/D conversion cannot be guaranteed. If a large external capacitor is provided in single mode, then the internal 10-k input resistance becomes the only significant load on the input. In this case the impedance of the signal source is not a problem. A large external capacitor, however, acts as a low-pass filter. This may make it impossible to track analog signals with high dv/dt (e.g. a variation of 5 mV/s) (figure 15.11). To convert high-speed analog signals or to use scan mode, insert a low-impedance buffer. 8. Effect on Absolute Accuracy: Attaching an external capacitor creates a coupling with ground, so if there is noise on the ground line, it may degrade absolute accuracy. The capacitor must be connected to an electrically stable ground, such as AVSS. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 590 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter If a filter circuit is used, be careful of interference with digital signals on the same board, and make sure the circuit does not act as an antenna. H8/3067 Group Sensor output impedance Sensor input Up to 10 k Cin = 15 pF Equivalent circuit of A/D converter 10 k Low-pass filter C Up to 0.1F 20 pF Figure 15.11 Analog Input Circuit (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 591 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 15 A/D Converter Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 592 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 16 D/A Converter Section 16 D/A Converter 16.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group includes a D/A converter with two channels. 16.1.1 Features D/A converter features are listed below. * Eight-bit resolution * Two output channels * Conversion time: maximum 10 s (with 20-pF capacitive load) * Output voltage: 0 V to VREF * D/A outputs can be sustained in software standby mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 593 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 16 D/A Converter 16.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the D/A converter. Module data bus VREF DA 0 DA 1 AVSS 8-bit D/A Legend DACR: D/A control register DADR0: D/A data register 0 DADR1: D/A data register 1 DASTCR: D/A standby control register Control circuit Figure 16.1 D/A Converter Block Diagram 16.1.3 Input/Output Pins Table 16.1 summarizes the D/A converter's input and output pins. Table 16.1 D/A Converter Pins Pin Name Analog power supply pin Analog ground pin Analog output pin 0 Analog output pin 1 Reference voltage input pin Abbreviation I/O AVCC AVSS DA0 DA1 VREF Input Input Output Output Input Function Analog power supply and reference voltage Analog ground and reference voltage Analog output, channel 0 Analog output, channel 1 Analog reference voltage Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 594 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 DASTCR AVCC DADR0 DADR1 DACR Bus interface On-chip data bus Section 16 D/A Converter 16.1.4 Register Configuration Table 16.2 summarizes the D/A converter's registers. Table 16.2 D/A Converter Registers Address* H'FFF9C H'FFF9D H'FFF9E H'EE01A Name D/A data register 0 D/A data register 1 D/A control register D/A standby control register Abbreviation DADR0 DADR1 DACR DASTCR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'1F H'FE Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 595 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 16 D/A Converter 16.2 16.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions D/A Data Registers 0 and 1 (DADR0/1) 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write The D/A data registers (DADR0 and DADR1) are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store the data to be converted. When analog output is enabled, the D/A data register values are constantly converted and output at the analog output pins. The D/A data registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode. When the DASTE bit is set to 1 in the D/A standby control register (DASTCR), the D/A registers are not initialized in software standby mode. 16.2.2 Bit Initial value Read/Write D/A Control Register (DACR) 7 DAOE1 0 R/W 6 DAOE0 0 R/W 5 DAE 0 R/W 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 D/A enable Controls D/A conversion D/A output enable 0 Controls D/A conversion and analog output D/A output enable 1 Controls D/A conversion and analog output DACR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of the D/A converter. DACR is initialized to H'1F by a reset and in standby mode. When the DASTE bit is set to 1 in DASTCR, the DACR is not initialized in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 596 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 16 D/A Converter Bit 7--D/A Output Enable 1 (DAOE1): Controls D/A conversion and analog output. Bit 7 DAOE1 0 1 Description DA1 analog output is disabled Channel-1 D/A conversion and DA1 analog output are enabled Bit 6--D/A Output Enable 0 (DAOE0): Controls D/A conversion and analog output. Bit 6 DAOE0 0 1 Description DA0 analog output is disabled Channel-0 D/A conversion and DA0 analog output are enabled Bit 5--D/A Enable (DAE): Controls D/A conversion, together with bits DAOE0 and DAOE1. When the DAE bit is cleared to 0, analog conversion is controlled independently in channels 0 and 1. When the DAE bit is set to 1, analog conversion is controlled together in channels 0 and 1. Output of the conversion results is always controlled independently by DAOE0 and DAOE1. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 DAOE1 DAOE0 DAE 0 0 1 -- 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 -- Description D/A conversion is disabled in channels 0 and 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channel 0 D/A conversion is disabled in channel 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 D/A conversion is disabled in channel 0 D/A conversion is enabled in channel 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 When the DAE bit is set to 1, even if bits DAOE0 and DAOE1 in DACR and the ADST bit in ADCSR are cleared to 0, the same current is drawn from the analog power supply as during A/D and D/A conversion. Bits 4 to 0--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 597 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 16 D/A Converter 16.2.3 D/A Standby Control Register (DASTCR) DASTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables D/A output in software standby mode. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 Reserved bits D/A standby enable Enables or disables D/A output in software standby mode 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 DASTE 0 R/W DASTCR is initialized to H'FE by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 1--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 0--D/A Standby Enable (DASTE): Enables or disables D/A output in software standby mode. Bit 0 DASTE 0 1 Description D/A output is disabled in software standby mode D/A output is enabled in software standby mode (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 598 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 16 D/A Converter 16.3 Operation The D/A converter has two built-in D/A conversion circuits that can perform conversion independently. D/A conversion is performed constantly while enabled in DACR. If the DADR0 or DADR1 value is modified, conversion of the new data begins immediately. The conversion results are output when bits DAOE0 and DAOE1 are set to 1. An example of D/A conversion on channel 0 is given next. Timing is indicated in figure 16.2. 1. Data to be converted is written in DADR0. 2. Bit DAOE0 is set to 1 in DACR. D/A conversion starts and DA0 becomes an output pin. The converted result is output after the conversion time. The output value is DADR contents x VREF 256 Output of this conversion result continues until the value in DADR0 is modified or the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0. 3. If the DADR0 value is modified, conversion starts immediately, and the result is output after the conversion time. 4. When the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0, DA0 becomes an input pin. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 599 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 16 D/A Converter DADR0 write cycle DACR write cycle DADR0 write cycle DACR write cycle Address DADR0 DAOE0 DA 0 Conversion data 1 Conversion data 2 High-impedance state t DCONV Legend t DCONV : D/A conversion time Conversion result 1 t DCONV Conversion result 2 Figure 16.2 Example of D/A Converter Operation 16.4 D/A Output Control In the H8/3067 Group, D/A converter output can be enabled or disabled in software standby mode. When the DASTE bit is set to 1 in DASTCR, D/A converter output is enabled in software standby mode. The D/A converter registers retain the values they held prior to the transition to software standby mode. When D/A output is enabled in software standby mode, the reference supply current is the same as during normal operation. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 600 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 17 RAM Section 17 RAM 17.1 Overview The H8/3067 and H8/3066 have 4 kbytes of high-speed static RAM on-chip. The H8/3065 has 2 kbytes. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte data and word data in two states, making the RAM useful for rapid data transfer. The on-chip RAM of the H8/3067 and H8/3066 is assigned to addresses H'FEF20 to H'FFF1F in modes 1, 2, and 7, and to addresses H'FFEF20 to H'FFFF1F in modes 3, 4, and 5,and to addresses H'EF20 to H'FF1F in mode 6. The on-chip RAM of the H8/3065 are assigned to addresses H'FF720 to H'FFF1F in modes 1, 2, and 7, and to addresses H'FFF720 to H'FFFF1F in modes 3, 4, and 5, and to addresses H'F720 to H'FF1F in mode 6. The RAM enable bit (RAME) in the system control register (SYSCR) can enable or disable the on-chip RAM. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 601 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 17 RAM 17.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 17.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM. On-chip data bus (upper 8 bits) On-chip data bus (lower 8 bits) Bus interface SYSCR H'FEF20* H'FEF22* H'FEF21* H'FEF23* On-chip RAM H'FFF1E* Even addresses Legend SYSCR: System control register H'FFF1F* Odd addresses Note: * This example is of the H8/3067 operating in mode 7. The lower 20 bits of the address are shown. Figure 17.1 RAM Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 602 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 17 RAM 17.1.2 Register Configuration The on-chip RAM is controlled by SYSCR. Table 17.1 gives the address and initial value of SYSCR. Table 17.1 System Control Register Address* H'EE012 Name System control register Abbreviation SYSCR R/W R/W Initial Value H'09 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 603 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 17 RAM 17.2 Bit System Control Register (SYSCR) 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 SSOE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W Initial value Read/Write RAM enable bit Enables or disables on-chip RAM Software standby output port enable NMI edge select User bit enable Standby timer select 2 to 0 Software standby One function of SYSCR is to enable or disable access to the on-chip RAM. The on-chip RAM is enabled or disabled by the RAME bit in SYSCR. For details about the other bits, see section 3.3, System Control Register (SYSCR). Bit 0--RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized at the rising edge of the input at the RES pin. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME 0 1 Description On-chip RAM is disabled On-chip RAM is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 604 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 17 RAM 17.3 Operation When the RAME bit is set to 1, the on-chip RAM is enabled. Accesses to addresses H'FEF20 to H'FFF1F in the H8/3067 and H8/3066 in modes 1, 2, and 7, and to addresses H'FFEF20 to H'FFFF1F in the H8/3067 and H8/3066 in modes 3, 4, and 5, and to addresses H'EF20 to H'FF1F in mode 6, are directed to the on-chip RAM. In the H8/3065, accesses to addresses H'FF720 to H'FFF1F in modes 1, 2, and 7, to addresses H'FFF720 to H'FFFF1F in modes 3, 4, and 5, and to addresses H'F720 to H'FF1F in mode 6, are directed to the on-chip RAM. In modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the off-chip address space is accessed. In mode 6, 7 (single-chip mode), when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is not accessed: read access always results in H'FF data, and write access is ignored. Since the on-chip RAM is connected to the CPU by an internal 16-bit data bus, it can be written and read by word access. It can also be written and read by byte access. Byte data is accessed in two states using the upper 8 bits of the data bus. Word data starting at an even address is accessed in two states using all 16 bits of the data bus. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 605 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 17 RAM Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 606 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Section 18 ROM 18.1 Overview The H8/3067 has 128 kbytes of on-chip ROM (flash memory or mask ROM), the H8/3066 has 96 kbytes, and H8/3065 has 64 kbytes. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte and word data in two states, enabling rapid data transfer. The mode pins (MD2 to MD0) can be set to enable or disable the on-chip ROM. See table 18.1. The on-chip flash memory product (H8/3067RF-ZTAT) can be erased and programmed on-board as well as with a general-purpose PROM programmer. Table 18.1 Operating Mode and ROM Mode Pins Mode Mode 1 (1-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) Mode 2 (1-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) Mode 3 (16-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) Mode 4 (16-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) Mode 5 (16-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 6 (single-chip normal mode) Mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) On-Chip MD2 MD1 MD0 ROM 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Enabled Disabled (external address area) 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 607 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.2 18.2.1 Overview of Flash Memory Features The features of the flash memory are summarized below. * Four flash memory operating modes Program mode Erase mode Program-verify mode Erase-verify mode * Programming/erase methods The flash memory is programmed 32 bytes at a time. Erasing is performed by block erase. The block to be erased can be specified by setting the corresponding bit. There are block areas of 32KB x 3 blocks, 28KB x 1 block, and 1KB x 4 blocks. * Programming/erase times The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 32-byte programming, equivalent to 300 s (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block. * Reprogramming capability The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. * On-board programming modes There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board: Boot mode User program mode * Automatic bit rate adjustment With data transfer in boot mode, the H8/3067's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host (9600 bps and 4800 bps). * Flash memory emulation by RAM Part of the RAM area can be overlapped onto flash memory, to emulate flash memory updates in real time. * PROM mode Flash memory can be programmed/erased in PROM mode, using a PROM programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. * Protect modes There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 608 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.2.2 Block Diagram Figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the flash memory. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) FLMCR EBR RAMCR FLMSR H'00000 H'00002 H'00001 H'00003 Bus interface/controller Operating mode FWE pin*1 Mode pins On-chip Flash memory (128 kB) H'1FFFC H'1FFFD Legend: FLMCR: Flash memory control register*2 EBR: Erase block register*2 RAMCR: RAM control register*2 FLMSR: Flash memory status register*2 H'1FFFE H'1FFFF even address odd address Notes: 1. Functions as the FWE pin in the flash memory and flash memory R versions, and as the RESO pin in the mask ROM versions. 2. The registers that control the flash memory (FLMCR, EBR, RAMCR, and FLMSR) are used in the flash memory and flash memory R versions only. They are not provided in the mask ROM versions. Reading the corresponding addresses in a mask ROM version will always return 1s, and writes to these addresses are disabled. Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 609 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.2.3 Pin Configuration The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 18.2. Table 18.2 Flash Memory Pins Pin Name Reset Flash write enable Mode 2 Mode 1 Mode 0 Transmit data Receive data Abbreviation RES FWE* MD2 MD1 MD0 TxD1 RxD1 I/O Input Input Input Input Input Output Input Function Reset Flash program/erase protection by hardware Sets this LSI operating mode Sets this LSI operating mode Sets this LSI operating mode Serial transmit data output Serial receive data input Note: The transmit data and receive data pins are used in boot mode. * In the mask ROM versions, the FWE pin functions as the RESO pin. 18.2.4 Register Configuration The registers used to control the on-chip flash memory when enabled are shown in table 18.3. Table 18.3 Flash Memory Registers Register Name Flash memory control register Erase block register RAM control register Flash memory status register Abbreviation FLMCR EBR RAMCR FLMSR R/W R/W R/W R/W R Initial Value H'00* H'00 H'F1 H'7F 2 Address* H'EE030 H'EE032 H'EE077 H'EE07D 1 Notes: 1. Lower 20 bits of address in advanced mode. 2. When a high level is input to the FWE pin, the initial value is H'80. The registers in table 18.3 are used in the flash memory and flash memory R versions only. Reading the corresponding addresses in a mask ROM version will always return 1s, and writes to these addresses are disabled. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 610 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.3 18.3.1 Register Descriptions Flash Memory Control Register (FLMCR) FLMCR is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting SWE to 1 when FWE = 1. Program mode is entered by setting SWE to 1 when FWE = 1, then setting the PSU bit, and finally setting the P bit. Erase mode is entered by setting SWE to 1 when FWE = 1, then setting the ESU bit, and finally setting the E bit. FLMCR is initialized by a reset, and in hardware standby mode and software standby mode. Its initial value is H'80 when a high level is input to the FWE pin, and H'00 when a low level is input. In mode 6 the FWE pin must be fixed low, as flash memory on-board programming is not supported. Therefore, bits in this register cannot be set to 1 in mode 6. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. When setting bits 6 to 0 in this register to 1, each bit should be set individually. Writes to the ESU, PSU, EV and PV bits in FLMCR are enabled only when FWE = 1 and SWE = 1; writes to the E bit only when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU = 1; and writes to the P bit only when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and PSU = 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 611 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Bit 7 FWE Modes 1 to 4, and 6 Modes 5 and 7 Initial value R/W Initial value R/W 0 R 1/0 R 6 SWE 0 R 0 R/W 5 ESU 0 R 0 R/W 4 PSU 0 R 0 R/W 3 EV 0 R 0 R/W 2 PV 0 R 0 R/W 1 E 0 R 0 R/W 0 P 0 R 0 R/W Program mode Designates transition to or exit from program mode Erase mode Designates transition to or exit from erase mode Program-verify mode Designates transition to or exit from program-verify mode Erase-verify mode Designates transition to or exit from erase-verify mode Program setup Prepares for a transition to program mode. Erase setup Prepares for a transition to erase mode. Software write enable bit Enables or disables the flash memory. Flash write enable bit Sets hardware protection against flash memory programming/erasing. Bit 7--Flash Write Enable Bit (FWE): Sets hardware protection against flash memory programming/erasing. When using this bit, refer to section 18.9, Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. Bit 7: FWE 0 1 Description When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware-protected state) When a high level is input to the FWE pin Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 612 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 12 Bit 6--Software Write Enable Bit (SWE)* * : This bit enables/disables flash memory programming/erasing. This bit should be set before setting FLMCR bits 5 to 0, and EBR bits 7 to 0. Do not set the ESU, PSU, EV, PV, E, or P bits at the same time. Bit 6: SWE 0 1 Description Program/erase disabled Program/erase enabled [Setting condition] When FWE = 1 (Initial value) 1 Bit 5--Erase Setup Bit (ESU) * : Prepares for a transition to erase mode. Do not set the SWE, PSU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 5: ESU 0 1 Description Erase setup cleared Erase setup [Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1 1 (Initial value) Bit 4--Program Setup Bit (PSU) * : Prepares for a transition to program mode. Do not set the SWE, ESU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 4: PSU 0 1 Description Program setup cleared Program setup [Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 613 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 1 Bit 3--Erase-Verify (EV) * : Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 3: EV 0 1 Description Erase-verify mode cleared Transition to erase-verify mode [Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1 1 (Initial value) Bit 2--Program-Verify (PV)* : Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 2: PV 0 1 Description Program-verify mode cleared Transition to program-verify mode [Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1 (Initial value) 13 Bit 1--Erase (E) * * : Selects erase mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, or P bit at the same time. Bit 1: E 0 1 Description Erase mode cleared Transition to erase mode [Setting condition] When FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU = 1 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 614 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 13 Bit 0--Program (P) * * : Selects program mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, or E bit at the same time. Bit 0: P 0 1 Description Program mode cleared Transition to program mode [Setting condition] When FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and PSU = 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. Do not set two or more bits at the same time. Do not turn off VCC when a bit is set. 2. Do not set/clear the SWE bit simultaneously with other bits (ESU, PSU, EV, PV, E, P). 3. Set the P and E bits according to the program and erase algorithms shown in section 18.5, Programming and Erasing Flash Memory. For the usage precautions, see section 18.9, Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. 18.3.2 Erase Block Register (EBR) EBR is an 8-bit register that designates the flash memory block for erasure. EBR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, or software standby mode, when a high level is not input to the FWE terminal, or when the FLMCR SWE bit is 0 when a high level is applied to the FWE terminal. When a bit is set in EBR, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase - protected. The blocks are erased block by block. Therefore, set only one bit in EBR; do not set bits in EBR to erase two or more blocks at the same time. Each bit in EBR cannot be set until the SWE bit in FLMCR is set. The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 18.4. To erase all the blocks, erase each block sequentially. The H8/3067 Group does not support the on-board programming mode in mode 6, so bits in this register cannot be set to 1 in mode 6. Bit 7 EB7 Modes 1 to 4, and 6 Modes 5 and 7 Initial value R/W Initial value R/W 0 R 0 R/W 6 EB6 0 R 0 R/W 5 EB5 0 R 0 R/W 4 EB4 0 R 0 R/W 3 EB3 0 R 0 R/W 2 EB2 0 R 0 R/W 1 EB1 0 R 0 R/W 0 EB0 0 R 0 R/W Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 615 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Bits 7 to 0--Block 7 to 0 (EB7 to EB0): These bits select blocks (EB7 to EB0) to be erased. Bits 7 to 0: EB7 to EB0 0 1 Description Block EB7 to EB0 is not selected. Block EB7 to EB0 is selected. (Initial value) Note: Set each bit of EBR to H'00 except when erasing. Table 18.4 Flash Memory Erase Blocks Block (Size) EB0 (1 kB) EB1 (1 kB) EB2 (1 kB) EB3 (1 kB) EB4 (28 kB) EB5 (32 kB) EB6 (32 kB) EB7 (32 kB) Address H'000000 to H'0003FF H'000400 to H'0007FF H'000800 to H'000BFF H'000C00 to H'000FFF H'001000 to H'007FFF H'008000 to H'00FFFF H'010000 to H'017FFF H'018000 to H'01FFFF Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 616 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.3.3 RAM Control Register (RAMCR) RAMCR selects the RAM area used when emulating real-time reprogramming of the flash memory. Bit 7 Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7 Initial value R/W Initial value R/W 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 1 1 3 RAMS 0 R 0 R/W* 2 RAM2 0 R 0 R/W* 1 RAM1 0 R 0 R/W* 0 1 1 Reserved bit RAM2/1 This bit is used with bit 3 to set the RAM area. RAM select This bit is used with bits 2 and 1 to set the RAM area. Reserved bits Note: Cannot be set to 1 in mode 6. Bits 7 to 4--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 3--RAM Select (RAMS): Is used with bits 2 to 1 to reassign an area to RAM (see table 18.5). The initial setting for this bit is 0 in Modes 5, 6, and 7 (internal flash memory enabled) and programming is enabled.* In modes other than 5 to 7, 0 is always read and writing is disabled. It is initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. When bit 3 is set, all flash-memory blocks are protected from programming and erasing. Bits 2 to 1--RAM2 to RAM1: These bits are used with bit 3 to reassign an area to RAM (see table 18.5). The initial setting for this bit is 0 in Modes 5, 6, and 7 (internal flash memory enabled) and programming is enabled.* In modes other than 5 to 7, 0 is always read and writing is disabled. They are initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 617 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Bit 0--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Note: * Flash memory emulation by RAM is not supported for Mode 6 (single chip normal mode), so programming is possible, but do not set 1. When performing flash memory emulation by RAM, the RAME bit in SYSCR must be set to 1. Table 18.5 RAM Area Reassignment Bit 3 RAM Area H'FFF000 to H'FFF3FF H'000000 to H'0003FF H'000400 to H'0007FF H'000800 to H'000BFF H'000C00 to H'000FFF RAMS 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 RAM2 0/1 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 RAM1 0/1 0 1 0 1 RAM Emulation State No emulation Mapping RAM ROM area H'000000 H'0003FF H'000400 ROM block EB0-EB3 (H'000000-H'000FFF) H'0007FF H'000800 H'000BFF H'000C00 H'000FFF EB0 EB1 Mapping RAM EB2 EB3 ROM selection area RAM selection area RAM area H'FFEF20 H'FFEFFF H'FFF000 RAM overlap area H'FFF3FF (H'FFF000-H'FFF3FF) H'FFF400 H'FFFF1F Real RAM Figure 18.2 Example of Overlap ROM Area and RAM Area Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 618 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.3.4 Flash Memory Status Register The flash memory status register (FLMSR) detects flash memory errors. Bit 7 FLER 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Initial value R/W 0 R Reserved bits Flash memory error Status flag indicating that an error was detected during programming or erasing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 619 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Bit 7--Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error occurred while flash memory was being programmed or erased. When bit 7 is set, flash memory is placed in an error-protect mode. Bit 7 FLER 0 Description Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection * ) is disabled (Initial value) 1 [Clearing conditions] WDT reset, reset by RES pin, or hardware standby mode 1 An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing 1 Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection * ) is enabled [Setting conditions] 2 1. Flash memory was read* while being programmed or erased (including vector or instruction fetch, but not including reading of a RAM area overlapped onto flash memory). 2. A hardware exception-handling sequence (other than a reset, invalid instruction, trap instruction, or zero-divide exception) was executed just before programming or 3 erasing.* 3. The SLEEP instruction (including software standby mode) was executed during programming or erasing. Notes: 1. For details, see section 18.6.3, Error Protection. 2. The read data has undetermined values. 3. Before stack and vector read by exception handling. Bits 6 to 0--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 620 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.4 On-Board Programming Modes When pins are set to on-board programming mode, program/erase/verify operations can be performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table 18.6. In H8/3067RF mode 6 (on-chip ROM enabled), the boot mode and user program mode cannot be used. For the notes on FWE pin set/reset, see section 18.9 Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. Table 18.6 Setting On-Board Programming Modes Mode Boot mode User program mode mode 5 mode 7 mode 5 mode 7 FWE 1* 1 MD2 0* 2 0* 2 MD1 0 1 0 1 MD0 1 1 1 1 Notes 0 : VIL 1 : VIH 1 1 Notes: 1. For the High level input timing, see items (6) and (7) of Notes on Using the Boot Mode. 2. In the boot mode, the MD2 setting becomes inverted input. In the boot mode in the H8/3067 F-ZTATTM, the levels of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) are reflected in mode select bits 2 to 0 (MDS2 to MDS0) in the mode control register (MDCR). Note that this specification differs from that of the H8/3039F Group. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 621 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM On-Board Programming Modes * Boot mode 1. Initial state The flash memory is in the erased state when the device is shipped. The description here applies to the case where the old program version or data is being rewritten. The user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. Host Programming control program New application program H8/3067 Group chip Boot program Flash memory RAM SCI 2. Programming control program transfer When boot mode is entered, the boot program in the H8/3067 Group chip (originally incorporated in the chip) is started, an SCI communication check is carried out, and the boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot program area. Host Programming control program New application program H8/3067 Group chip Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area SCI Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The erase program in the boot program area (in RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, entire flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. Host Programming control program New application program H8/3067 Group chip Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area Flash memory erase SCI 4. Writing new application program The programming control program transferred from the host to RAM by SCI communication is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. Host H8/3067 Group chip Boot program Flash memory RAM Programming control program New application program SCI Program execution state Figure 18.3 Boot Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 622 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM * User program mode 1. Initial state (1) The program that will transfer the programming/ erase control program to on-chip RAM should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. (2) The programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. 2. Programming/erase control program transfer When the FWE pin is driven high, user software confirms this fact, executes the transfer program in the flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase control program to RAM. Host Programming/ erase control program New application program H8/3067 Group chip Boot program Flash memory Transfer program RAM SCI Host New application program H8/3067 Group chip Boot program Flash memory Transfer program Programming/ erase control program SCI RAM Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The programming/erase program in RAM is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. Host 4. Writing new application program Next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to unerased blocks. Host New application program H8/3067 Group chip Boot program Flash memory FWE assessment program H8/3067 Group chip SCI RAM Boot program Flash memory FWE assessment program Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Programming/ erase control program SCI RAM Transfer program Flash memory erase New application program Program execution state Figure 18.4 User Program Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 623 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.4.1 Boot Mode When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. The channel 1 SCI to be used is set to asynchronous mode. In reset start, after setting this LSI pin to the boot mode, start the microcomputer boot program, measure the Low period of the data sent from the host, and select the bit rate register (BRR) value beforehand. Then enable reception of the user program from the outside using the serial communication interface (SCI) on this LSI, and write the received user program to on-chip RAM. After the program has been stored the end of writing, execution branches to the top address (H'FFF400) of the on-chip RAM, execute the program written on the on-chip RAM, and enable flash memory program/erase. The system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 18.5, and the boot program mode execution procedure in figure 18.6. H8/3067RF Flash memory Host Write data reception Verify data transmission RXD1 SCI1 TXD1 On-chip RAM Figure 18.5 System Configuration in Boot Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 624 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Start Set pins to boot program mode and execute reset-start Host transfers data (H'00) continuously at prescribed bit rate The H8/3067 measures low period of H'00 data transmitted by host 1 2 1 2 Set the H8/3067 to the boot mode and reset starts the LSI. Set the host to the prescribed bit rate (4800, 9600) and consecutively send H'00 data in 8-bit data, 1 stop bit format. The H8/3067 repeatedly measures the RXD1 pin Low period and calculates the asynchronous communication bit rate at which the host performs transfer. At the end of SCI bit rate adjustment, the H8/3067 sends one byte of H'00 data to signal the end of adjustment. Check if the host normally received the one byte bit rate adjustment end signal sent from the H8/3067 and sent one byte of H'55 data. After H'55 is sent, the host receives H'AA and sends the byte count of the user program that is transferred to the H8/3067. Send the 2-byte count in upper byte and lower byte order. Then sequentially send the program set by the user. The H8/3067 sequentially sends (echo back) each byte of the received byte count and user program to the host as verification data. The H8/3067 sequentially writes the received user program to the on-chip RAM area (H'FFF400-H'FFFF1F). Before executing the transferred user program, the H8/3067 checks if data was written to flash memory after control branched to the RAM boot program area (H'FEF20-H'FFF3F). If data was already written to flash memory, all the blocks are erased. After sending H'AA, this LSI branches to the on-chip RAM area (H'FFF400) and executes the user program written to that area. 3 3 The H8/3067 calculates bit rate and sets value in bit rate register After bit rate adjustment, H8/3067 transmits one byte of H'00 data to host to indicate end of adjustment Host confirms normal reception of bit rate adjustment end indication (H'00), and transmits one byte of H'55 data After receiving H'55, the H8/3067 sends H'AA and receives two bytes of the byte count (N) of the program transferred to the on-chip RAM.*1 4 4 5 5 6 6 The H8/3067 transfers the user program to RAM. *2 7 7 The H8/3067 calculates the remaining number of bytes to be sent (N=N-1). Transfer end byte count N=0? Yes After branching to the RAM boot program area (H'FEF20 to H'FFF3FF), the H8/3067 checks the data in the flashmemory user area. No 8 9 8 All data=H'FF? Yes No Notes: 1. The RAM area that can be used by the user is 2.8k Byte. Set the transfer byte count to within 2.8k Byte. Always send the 2-byte transfer byte count in upper byte and lower byte order. Transfer byte count example: For 256 bytes (H'0100), upper byte H'01, lower byte H'00. 2. Set the part that controls the user program flash memory at the program according to the flash memory programming/erase algorithms described later. 3. When a memory cell malfunctions and cannot be erased, the H8/3067 sends one H'FF byte as an erase error and stops the erase operation and subsequent operations. Erase all blocks of flash memory. *3 9 After sending H'AA, the H8/3067 branches to the RAM area (H'FFF400) and executes the user program transferred to the RAM. Figure 18.6 Boot Mode Execution Procedure Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 625 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment Start bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Stop bit Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data) High period (1 or more bits) Figure 18.7 Measuring the low period of the communication data from the host When boot mode is initiated, this LSI measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host (figure 18.7). The SCI transmit/receive format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. This LSI calculates the bit rate of the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the LSI. If reception cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations. Depending on the host's transmission bit rate and the system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the LSI. To ensure correct SCI operation, the host's transfer bit rate should be set to 4800 and 9600 1 bps* . Table 18.7 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic adjustment of this LSI bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this system 2 clock range* . Table 18.7 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of This LSI Bit Rate is Possible Host Bit Rate (bps) 9600 4800 System Clock Frequency for which Automatic Adjustment of This LSI Bit Rate is Possible (MHz) 8 to 20 4 to 20 Notes: 1. The host bit rate settings are 4800 and 9600bps only. Do not use any other setting. 2. This LSI may automatically adjusts the bit rate except for bit rate and system clock combinations as shown in Table 18.7. However, the bit rate of the host and this LSI will be different and subsequent transfers will not be carried out normally. Therefore, always execute the boot mode within the range of the bit rate and system clock combinations shown in Table 18.7. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 626 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the RAM area is divided into an area used by the boot program and an area to which the user program is transferred via the SCI, as shown in figure 18.8. The boot program area can be used when a transition is made to the execution state for the user program transferred to RAM. H'FFEF20 Boot program area* H'FFF3FF H'FFF400 User program transfer area H'FFFF1F Note : * The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for the user program transferred to RAM. Note also that the boot program remains in this RAM area even after control branches to the user program. Figure 18.8 RAM Areas in Boot Mode Notes on using the boot mode (1) When this LSI comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period the input at the SCI's RXD1 pin. The reset should end with RXD1 high. After the reset ends, it takes about 100 states for this LSI to get ready to measure the low period of the RXD1 input. (2) If any data has been written to the flash memory (if all data is not H'FF), all flash memory blocks are erased when this mode is executed. Therefore, boot mode should be used for initial on-board programming, or for forced recovery if the program to be activated in user program mode is accidentally erased and user program mode cannot be executed, for example. (3) Interrupts cannot be used during programming or erasing of flash memory. (4) The RXD1 and TXD1 pins should be pulled up on the board. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 627 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM (5) This LSI terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI(channel 1) (by clearing the RE and TE bits in serial control register (SCR)) before branching to the user program. However, the adjusted bit rate is held in the bit rate register (BRR). At this time, the TXD1 pin is in the high level output state (P9DDR P91DDR=1, P9DR P91DR=1). Before branching to the user program the value of the general registers in the CPU are also undefined. Therefore, the general registers must be initialized immediately after control branches to the user program. Since the stack pointer (SP) is implicitly used during subroutine call, etc., a stack area must be specified for use by the user program. There are no other internal I/O registers in which the initial value is changed. (6) Transition to the boot mode executes a reset-start of this LSI after setting the MD0 to MD2 and FWE pins according to the mode setting conditions shown in Table 18.6. At this time, this LSI latches the status of the mode pin inside the microcomputer to maintain 1 the boot mode status at the reset clear (startup with Low -> High) timing* . To clear boot mode, it is necessary to drive the FWE pin low during the reset, and then execute 1 reset release* . The following points must be noted: (a) Before making a transition from the boot mode to the regular mode, the microcomputer boot mode must be reset by reset input via the RES pin. At this time, the RES pin must be 3 hold at low level for at least 20 system clock. * (b) Do not change the input levels at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) or the FWE pin while in boot mode. When making a mode transition, first enter the reset state by inputting a low level to the RES pin. When a watchdog timer reset was generated in the boot mode, the microcomputer mode is not reset and the on-chip boot program is restarted regardless of the state of the mode pin. (c) Do not input low level to the FWE pin while the boot program is executing and when 2 programming/erasing flash memory. * (7) If the mode pin and FWE pin input levels are changed from 0 V to VCC or from VCC to 0V during a reset (while a low level is being input to the RES pin), the microcomputer's operating mode will change. Therefore, since the state of the address dual port and bus control output signals (AS, RD, HWR, LWR) changes, use of these pins as output signals during reset must be disabled outside the microcomputer. Notes: 1. The mode pin and FWE pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS) relative to the reset clear timing. 2. For notes on FWE pin High/Low, see section 18.9, Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. 3. See section 4.2.2, Reset Sequence and 18.9, Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. With the mask ROM version of the H8/3067, H8/3066, and H8/3065, the minimum reset period during operation is 10 system clocks. However, the Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 628 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM flash memory and flash memory R versions of the H8/3037 requires a minimum of 20 system clocks. 18.4.2 User Program Mode When set to the user program mode, this LSI can erase and program its flash memory by executing a user program. Therefore, on-chip flash memory on-board programming can be performed by providing a means of controlling FWE and supplying the write data on the board and providing a write program in a part of the program area. To select this mode, set the LSI to on-chip ROM enable modes 5 and 7 and apply a high level to the FWE pin. In this mode, the peripheral functions, other than flash memory, are performed the same as in modes 5 and 7. In mode 6, do not program/erase the flash memory. When setting mode 6, always input low level to the FWE pin. Since the flash memory cannot be read while it is being programmed/erased, place a programming program on external memory, or transfer the programming program to RAM area, and execute it in the RAM. Figure 18.9 shows the procedure for executing when transferred to on-chip RAM. During reset start, starting from the user program mode is possible. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 629 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 1 MD2 - MD0 =101, 111 3 Transfer on-board programming program to RAM. 3 4 4 Branch to program in RAM. 5 6 5 FWE=high (user program mode) 7 6 Execute on-board programming program in RAM (flash memory reprogramming). 8 7 Input low level to FWE after SWE bit clear (user program mode exit) Note: * 8 Execute user application program in flash memory. Figure 18.9 User Program Mode Execution Procedure (Example) Notes: 1. Normally do not apply a high level to the FWE pin. To prevent erroneous programming or erasing in the event of program runaway, etc., apply a high level to the FWE pin only when programming/erasing flash memory (including flash memory emulation by RAM). If program runaway, etc. causes overprogramming or overerasing of flash memory, the memory cells will not operate normally. Also, while a high level is applied to the FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc. 2. In mode 6, do not reprogram flash memory. When setting mode 6, always set the FWE pin to a low level. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 630 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.5 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory A software method, using the CPU, is employed to program and erase flash memory in the onboard programming modes. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. Transitions to these modes can be made by setting the PSU, P, E, PV, and EV bits in FLMCR. For a description of state transition by FLMCR bit setting, see figure 18.10. The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program that controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory. For the programming/erasing notes, see section 18.9, Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. For the wait time after each bit in FLMCR is set or cleared, see section 21.2.6, Flash Memory Characteristics. Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, E, and P bits in FLMCR is executed by a program in flash memory. 2. When programming or erasing, set the FWE pin input level to the high level, and set FWE to 1. (programming/erasing will not be executed if FWE = 0). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 631 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM *2 Erase setup state E=1 Erase mode E=0 ES *1 Software reprogramming enable state Normal mode FWE=1 FWE=0 U ES U =0 Erase-verify mode On-board SWE=1 programming mode software reprogramming disable state SWE=0 =1 EV PSU =1 =0 EV =1 *3 P=1 Program setup state P=0 Programming mode =0 PV =1 PV =0 PSU Program-verify mode Notes: : Normal mode : On-board programming mode 1. Do not make a state transition by setting or clearing two or more bits at the same time. 2. After transition from the erase mode to the erase setup state, do not make a transition to the erase mode without going through the software reprogramming enable state. 3. After transition from the erase mode to the erase setup state, do not switch to the program mode without going through the software reprogramming enable state. Figure 18.10 State Transition by Setting of Each Bit of FLMCR 18.5.1 Program Mode Follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 18.11 to write data or programs to flash memory. Performing program operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 32 bytes at a time. For the wait time (x, y, z, , , , , ) after setting or clearing each bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR) and the maximum programming count (N), see table 21.19 in section 21.2.6, Flash Memory Characteristics. Following the elapse of (x) s or more after the SWE bit is set to 1 in flash memory control register (FLMCR), 32-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data area, and the 32-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write addresses. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 632 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM (The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0.) 32 consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The program address and program data are latched in the flash memory. A 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. Next, the watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z + + ) s as the WDT overflow period. Preparation for entering program mode (program setup) is performed next by setting the PSU bit in FLMCR. The operating mode is then switched to program mode by setting the P bit in FLMCR after the elapse of at least (y) s. The time while the P bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Make a program setting so that the time for one programming operation is within the range of (z) s. The wait time after P bit setting must be changed according to the number of reprogramming loops. For details, see section 21.2.6, Flash Memory Characteristics. 18.5.2 Program-Verify Mode In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been correctly written in the flash memory. Clear the P bit in FLMCR, then wait for at least ( ) s before clearing the PSU bit to exit program mode. After exiting program mode, the watchdog timer setting is also cleared. Then the operating mode is switched to program-verify mode by setting the PV bit in FLMCR. Before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of () s or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least () s after the dummy write before performing this read operation. Next, the originally written data is compared with the verify data, and reprogram data is computed (see figure 18.11) and transferred to RAM. After verification of 32 bytes of data has been completed, exit program-verify mode, wait for at least () s, then determine whether 32-byte programming has finished. If reprogramming is necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the program/program-verify sequence as before. However, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times on the same bits. Note: A 32-byte area to store program data and a 32-byte area to store reprogram data are required in RAM. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 633 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Start *1 Set SWE bit in FLMCR Wait (x) s Store 32-byte write data in write data area and reprogram data area Programming operation counter n 1 Consecutively write 32-byte data in reprogram data area in RAM to flash memory Enable WDT Set PSU bit in FLMCR Wait (y) s Set P bit in FLMCR Wait (z) s Clear P bit in FLMCR Wait () s Clear PSU bit in FLMCR Wait () s Disable WDT Set PV bit in FLMCR Wait () s Set verify start address Programming end flag 0 *6 *2 *6 Start of programming *6 * 7 End of programming *6 *6 *6 Notes: 1. Programming should be performed in the erased state. (Perform 32-byte programming on memory after all 32 bytes have been erased.) 2. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer (word transfer is not possible), with the write start address at a 32-byte boundary. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0. A 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 3. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. (Byte-unit reading is also possible.) 4. Reprogram data is determined by the computation shown in the table below (comparison of data stored in the program data area with verify data). Programming of reprogram data 0 bits is executed in the next programming loop. Therefore, even bits for which programming has been completed will be programmed again if the result of the subsequent verify operation is NG. 5. An area for storing write data (32 bytes) and an area for storing reprogram data (32 bytes) must be provided in RAM. The contents of the latter are rewritten in accordance with the reprogramming data computation. 6. The values of x, y, z, , , , , , and N are shown in section 21.2.6, Flash Memory Characteristics. 7. The value of z depends on the number of reprogramming loops (n). Details are given in section 21.2.6, Flash Memory Characteristics. H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait () s Read verify data *6 *3 Write Data 0 0 Verify Data 0 1 0 1 Reprogram Data 1 0 1 1 Comments Programming completed Programming incomplete; reprogram Still in erased state; no action Programming OK? OK Reprogram data computation NG Programming end flag 1 (unfinished) 1 1 *4 *5 RAM Transfer computation result to reprogram data area Increment verify address Program data storage area (32 bytes) No 32-byte data verification completed? Yes Clear PV bit in FLMCR Wait () s *6 Reprogram Programming end flag = 0? Yes Yes Clear SWE bit in FLMCR End of programming Clear SWE bit in FLMCR Programming failure No nn+1 Reprogram data storage area (32 bytes) *6 n > N? No Figure 18.11 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 634 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.5.3 Erase Mode Flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 18.12. For the wait time (x, y, z, , , , , ) after setting or clearing of each bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR and the maximum erase count (N)), see table 21.19 of section 21.2.6, Flash Memory Characteristics. To erase the contents of flash memory, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased in erase block register (EBR) at least (x) s after setting the SWE bit to 1 in FLMCR. Next, the watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than ( z ) ms + (y + + ) s as the WDT overflow period. Preparation for entering erase mode (erase setup) is performed next by setting the ESU bit in FLMCR. The operating mode is then switched to erase mode by setting the E bit in FLMCR after the elapse of at least (y) s. The time during which the E bit is set is the flash memory erase time. Ensure that the erase time does not exceed (z) ms. Note: With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased to "0") is not necessary before starting the erase procedure. 18.5.4 Erase-Verify Mode In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been correctly erased. After the elapse of the fixed erase time, clear the E bit in FLMCR, then wait for at least () s before clearing the ESU bit to exit erase mode. After exiting erase mode, the watchdog timer setting is also cleared. The operating mode is then switched to erase-verify mode by setting the EV bit in FLMCR. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of () s or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least () s after the dummy write before performing this read operation. If the read data has been erased (all "1"), a dummy write is performed to the next address, and erase-verify is performed. If the read data is unerased, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence as before. However, do not repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence more than (N) times. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 635 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Start *1 *2 Set SWE bit in FLMCR Wait (x) s Erase counter n 1 Set EBR Enable WDT Set ESU bit in FLMCR Wait (y) s Set E bit in FLMCR Wait (z) ms Clear E bit in FLMCR Wait () s Clear ESU bit in FLMCR Wait () s Disable WDT Set EV bit in FLMCR Wait () s Set block start address to verify address H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait () s Read verify data Increment verify address *4 *5 *2 Start of erase *2 End of erase *2 *2 *2 *2 *3 Verify data = all 1s? Yes No Last address of block? Yes Clear EV bit in FLMCR Wait () s No Re-erase *2 nn+1 Clear EV bit in FLMCR Wait () s *2 *2 No n>N? Yes Clear SWE bit in FLMCR End of erasing Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Clear SWE bit in FLMCR Erase failure Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary. The values of x, y, z, , , , , , and N are shown in section 21.2.6, Flash Memory Characteristics. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. (Byte-unit reading is also possible.) Set only one bit in EBR two or more bits must not be set simultaneously. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn. Figure 18.12 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single-Block Erasing) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 636 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.6 Flash Memory Protection There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 18.6.1 Hardware Protection Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in the flash memory control register (FLMCR) and erase block register (EBR). In the case of error protection, the P bit and E bit can be set, but a transition is not made to program mode or erase mode. (See table 18.8.) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 637 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Table 18.8 Hardware Protection Function Item Description Program Erase 2 Verify* No 1 FWE pin protection * When a low level is input to the FWE pin, No* FLMCR and EBR are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is 4 entered.* No In a reset (including a WDT overflow reset) and in standby mode, FLMCR and EBR are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is entered. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on (The minimum oscillation stabilization time is 20ms). In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin 5 low for at least 20 system clock cycles. * No When a microcomputer operation error (error generation (FLER=1)) was detected while flash memory was being programmed/erased, error protection is enabled. At this time, the FLMCR and EBR settings are held, but programming/erasing is aborted at the time the error was generated. Error protection is released only by a reset via the RES pin or a WDT reset, or in the hardware standby mode. No* 3 Reset/standby protection * No* 3 No * Error protection * No* 3 Yes Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Two modes: program-verify and erase-verify. The RAM area that overlapped flash memory is deleted. All blocks become unerasable and specification by block is impossible. For more information, see section 18.9, Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. See sections 4.2.2, Reset Sequence and 18.9, Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. The H8/3067RF requires a minimum reset time during operation of 20 system clocks. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 638 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.6.2 Software Protection Software protection can be implemented by setting the RAMS bit in RAM control register (RAMCR) and erase block register (EBR). When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit in flash memory control register (FLMCR) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (See table 18.9.) Table 18.9 Software Protection Function Item Emulation 2 protection* Block specification protection Description * Program Erase 2 Verify* Yes 1 Setting the RAMS bit in RAMCR sets the No* program/erase-protected state for all blocks. Erase protection can be set for individual -- blocks by settings in erase block register 4 (EBR).* However, program protection is disabled. Setting EBR to H'00 places all blocks in the erase-protected state. No* 3 * No Yes * Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Two modes: program-verify mode and erase-verify mode. Programming to the RAM area that overlaps flash memory is possible. All blocks become unerasable, and specification by block is impossible. Set H'00 in the EBR bits, except for erase. 18.6.3 Error Protection In error protection, an error is detected when this LSI runaway occurs during flash memory 1 programming/erasing* , or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. If the LSI malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit* is set to 1 in flash memory status register (FLMSR) and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR and 3 EBR settings* are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. When 1 is set in the FLER bit, transition to the program mode or erase mode cannot be made even by setting the P and E bits in FLMCR. However, PV and EV bit in FLMCR setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 639 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Error protection is released only by a reset via the RES pin or a WDT reset, or in the hardware standby mode. Figure 18.13 shows the flash memory state transition diagram. Notes: 1. This is the state in which the P or E bit in FLMCR is set to 1. In this state, NMI input is disabled. For more information, see section 18.6.4, NMI Input Disable Conditions. 2. For a detailed description of the FLER bits setting conditions, see section 18.3.4, Flash Memory Status Register (FLMSR). 3. Data can be written to FLMCR and EBR. However, when transition to the software standby mode was made in the error protection state, the registers are initialized. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 640 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Re set or , hard sof Re twa ware set s re sta tand RD VF PR ER FLER=0 mo relea nd by de se by m mo ode sta relea , hard P=1 or E=1 de , nd se, wa by mo and re sta P=0 and E=0 de sof n rel twa dby ea se re Reset or standby mode Program mode (hardware protection) Erase mode Reset or hardware standby mode Memory read verify mode RD VF PR ER FLER=0 (so Er ro ftw Error occurrence cc ar urre es n tan ce db ym od ro a rdw ha de or mo et es dby R an st re RD VF PR ER INIT FLER=0 e) Reset or hardware standby mode Error protection mode RD VF PR ER FLER=1 Software standby mode Software standby mode release Error protection mode (software standby mode) RD VF PR ER INIT FLER=1 RD VF PR ER : Memory read enable : Verify-read enable : Programming enable : Erasing enable RD VF PR ER INIT : Memory read disabled : Verify-read disabled : Programming disabled : Erasing disabled : Registers (FLMCR, EBR) initialize state Figure 18.13 Flash Memory State Transitions (When High level apply to FWE pin in modes 5 and 7 (on-chip ROM enabled)) The error protection function is disabled for errors other than the FLER bit set conditions. If considerable time elapses up to transit to this protection state, the flash memory may already be damaged. As a result, this function cannot completely protect the flash memory against damage. Therefore, to prevent such erroneous operation, operation must be carried out correctly in according with the program/erase algorithms in the state that flash write enable (FWE) is set. In addition, the operation must be always carried out correctly by supervising microcomputer errors inside and outside the chip with the watchdog timer, etc. At transition to this protection mode, the flash memory may be erroneously programmed or erased, or its abort may result in incomplete Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 641 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM programming and erasing. In such cases, always forcibly return (reprogram) by boot mode. However, overprogramming and overerasing may prevent the boot mode from starting normally. 18.6.4 NMI Input Disable Conditions While flash memory is being programed/erased and the boot program is executing in the boot 1 mode (however, period up to branching to on-chip RAM area)* , NMI input is disabled because the programming/erasing operations have priority. This is done to avoid the following operation states: 1. Generation of an NMI input during programming/erasing violates the program/erase algorithms and normal operation can not longer be assured. 2 2. Verify-read cannot be carried out normally* during NMI exception handling during programming/erasing and the microcomputer runs away as a result. 3. If an NMI input is generated during boot program execution, the normal boot mode sequence cannot be executed. Therefore, this LSI has conditions that exceptionally disable NMI inputs only in the on-board programming mode. However, this does not assure normal programming/erasing and microcomputer operation. Thus, in the FWE application state, all requests, including NMI, inside and outside the microcomputer, exception handling, and bus release must be restricted. NMI inputs are also disabled in the error protection state and the state that holds the P or E bit in FLMCR during flash memory emulation by RAM. Notes: 1. Indicates the period up to branching to the on-chip RAM boot program area (H'FEF20- H'FFF3F). (This branch occurs immediately after user program transfer was completed.) Therefore, after branching to RAM area, NMI input is enabled in states other than the program/erase state. Thus, interrupt requests inside and outside the microcomputer must be disabled until initial writing by user program (writing of vector table and NMI processing program, etc.) is completed. 2. In this case, vector read is not performed normally for the following two reasons: a. The correct value cannot be read even by reading the flash memory during programming/erasing. (Value is undefined.) b. If a value has not yet been written to the NMI vector table, NMI exception handling will not be performed correctly. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 642 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.7 Flash Memory Emulation by RAM Erasing and programming the flash memory takes time, which can make it difficult to tune parameters and other data in real time. In this case, overlapping part (H'FFF000 to H'FFF3FF) of RAM onto a small block area of flash memory can be performed to emulate real-time reprogramming of flash memory. This RAM reassignment is performed using bits 3 to 1 in the RAM control register (RAMCR). After the RAM area change, two areas can be accessed: the overlapped flash memory area and the original RAM area (H'FFF000 to H'FFF3FF). For a description of the RAMCR and RAM area setting procedure, see section 18.3.3 RAM Control Register (RAMCR). Example of real-time emulation of flash memory An example of RAM area H'FFF000 to H'FFF3FF overlapping EB2 (H'000800 to H'000BFF) flash memory area is shown below. H'000000 Block area Flash memory space * H'FFEF20 (Image RAM area) H'000FFF H'FFEFFF H'FFF000 H'FFF3FF (Real RAM area) H'FFF400 H'FFFF1F Figure 18.14 Example of RAM Overlapping Operation Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 643 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Notes on use of the RAM emulation function (1) Notes on flash write enable (FWE) high/low Care is necessary to prevent erroneous programming/erasing at FWE=high/low, the same as in the on-board programming mode. To prevent erroneous programming and erasing due to program runaway, etc., during FWE application, in particular, the watchdog timer should be set when the PSU, P, ESU, or E bit is set to 1 in FLMCR, even while the emulation function is being used. For more information, see section 18.9, Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. (2) NMI input disable conditions When the P and E bits in FLMCR are set, NMI input is disabled, the same as normal program/erase even when using the emulation function. NMI input is cleared when the P and E bits are reset (including watchdog timer reset), in the standby mode, when a high level is not applied to FWE, and when the SWE bit in FLMCR is 0 in state in which a high level is input to FWE. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 644 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.8 18.8.1 Flash Memory PROM Mode PROM Mode Setting This LSI has a PROM mode, besides an on-board programming mode, as a flash memory program/erase mode. In the PROM mode, a program can be freely written to the on-chip ROM using a PROM writer that supports the Renesas 128kbytes flash memory on-chip microcomputer device type. For notes on PROM mode use, see sections 18.8.9, Notes on Memory Programming and 18.9, Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. 18.8.2 Memory Map Figure 18.15 shows the PROM mode memory map. Address in MCU mode H'000000 Address in PROM mode H'000000 H8/3067RF On-chip ROM area H'01FFFF H'01FFFF Figure 18.15 PROM Mode Memory Map 18.8.3 PROM Mode Operation Table 18.10 shows how the different operating modes are set when using PROM mode, and table 18.11 lists the commands used in PROM mode. Details of each mode are given below. * Memory Read Mode Memory read mode supports byte reads. * Auto-Program Mode Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-programming. * Auto-Erase Mode Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-erasing. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 645 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM * Status Read Mode Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be confirmed by reading the I/O 6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an error occurs. Table 18.10 Settings for Each Operating Mode in PROM Mode Pin Names* Mode Read Output disable Command write 1 Chip disable* L H X Hi-Z Notes: FWE VCC or 0 VCC or 0 VCC or 0 VCC or 0 3 CE L L L H OE L H H X WE H H L X D0 to D7 Data output Hi-Z Data input Hi-Z A0 to A17 Ain X Ain* X 2 : Low level : High level : Undefined : High impedance For command writes when making a transition to auto-program or auto-erase mode, input Vcc (V) to FWE. 1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state. 2. Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode. 3. The pin names are those assigned in H8/3067RF PROM mode. Table 18.11 PROM Mode Commands 1st Cycle Command Name Number of Cycles Mode Write Write Write Write Address X X X X 2nd Cycle Data Mode Address H'00 H'40 H'20 H'71 Read RA Write WA Write X Write X Data Dout Din H'20 H'71 Memory read mode 1 Auto-program mode 129 Auto-erase mode Status read mode RA WA Dout Din Note: 2 2 : Read address : Program address : Read data : Program data In auto-program mode. 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous 128-byte write. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 646 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Table 18.12 DC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Input high voltage Input low voltage 07-00, A16-A0 07-00, A16-A0 Symbol VIH VIL VT VT - + + - Min 2.2 0.3 1.0 2.0 0.4 2.4 -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 40 50 50 Max Vcc + 0.3 0.8 2.5 3.5 -- -- 0.45 2 65 85 85 Unit V V V V V V V A mA mA mA Test Conditions Schmitt trigger OE, CE, WE input voltage VT - VT Output high voltage Output low voltage Input leakage current VCC current 07-00 07-00 07-00, A16-A0 Reading Erasing VOH VOL | ILI | Icc Icc IOH = - 200 A IOL = 1.6 mA Programming Icc Note: For the absolute maximum ratings, see section 20.2.1, Absolute Maximum Ratings Exceeding the absolute maximum ratings may cause permanent damage to the chip. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 647 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.8.4 Memory Read Mode AC Characteristics Table 18.13 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode Transition (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width WE rise time WE fall time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep tr tf Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 -- -- Max -- -- -- -- -- -- 30 30 Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes Command write A16-0 tces CE OE tf Memory read mode ADDRESS STABLE tceh tnxtc twep tr WE tds I/O7-0 tdh Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of WE. Figure 18.16 Timing Waveform in Memory Read Mode Transition Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 648 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Table 18.14 AC Characteristics in Memory Contents Read (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Access time CE output delay time OE output delay time Output disable delay time Data output hold time Symbol tacc tce toe tdf toh Min -- -- -- -- 5 Max 20 150 150 100 -- Unit s ns ns ns ns Notes A16-0 ADDRESS STABLE ADDRESS STABLE CE OE WE VIL VIL VIH tacc toh tacc toh I/O7-0 Figure 18.17 CE OE Enable State Read CE/OE A16-0 ADDRESS STABLE tce ADDRESS STABLE tce CE toe OE WE I/O7-0 VIH tacc tacc toh tdf tdf toe toh Figure 18.18 CE OE Clock Read CE/OE Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 649 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Table 18.15 AC Characteristics in Transition from Memory Read Mode to Another Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width WE rise time WE fall time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep tr tf Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 -- -- Max -- -- -- -- -- -- 30 30 Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes Memory read mode A16-0 ADDRESS STABLE tnxtc CE OE Another mode command write tces tceh tf twep tr WE tds I/O7-0 tdh Note: Do not enable WE and OE simultaneously Figure 18.19 Transition From Memory Read Mode to Another Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 650 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.8.5 Auto-Program Mode AC Characteristics Table 18.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width Status polling start time Status polling access time Address setup time Address hold time Memory write time WE rise time WE fall time Write setup time Write end setup time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep twsts tspa tas tah twrite tr tf tpns tpnh Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 1 -- 0 60 1 -- -- 100 100 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 150 -- -- 3000 30 30 -- -- Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ms ns ns ns ms ns ns ns ns Notes Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 651 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM FWE A16-0 ADDRESS STABLE tpnh tpns CE OE tces tceh tnxtc tnxtc tf WE twep tr tas tah Data transfer 1byte to 128bytes twsts tspa tds I/O7 tdh twrite Programming operation end identification signal I/O6 Programming normal end identification signal I/O5-0 H'40 H'00 Figure 18.20 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms Cautions on Use of Auto-Program Mode * In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried out by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers. * A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. * If a value other than an effective address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be flagged. * Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 18.20). Do not perform transfer after the second cycle. * Do not perform a command write during a programming operation. * Perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address. Characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations. * Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking I/O 6. Alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 652 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.8.6 Auto-Erase Mode AC Characteristics Table 18.17 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width Status polling start time Status polling access time Memory erase time WE rise time WE fall time Erase setup time Erase end setup time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep tests tspa terase tr tf tens tenh Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 1 -- 100 -- -- 100 100 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 150 40000 30 30 -- -- Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ms ns ms ns ns ns ns Notes Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 653 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM FWE A16-0 tpnh tens CE OE tces tceh tnxtc tnxtc tf WE twep tr tests tspa tds I/O7 tdh terase Erase end identification signal I/O6 Erase normal and confirmation signal I/O5-0 H'20 H'20 H'00 Figure 18.21 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms Caution on Use of Erase-Program Mode * Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing. * Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing. * Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking I/O 6. Alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 654 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.8.7 Status Read Mode Table 18.18 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width OE output delay time Disable delay time CE output delay time WE rise time WE fall time Symbol tnxtc tceh tces tdh tds twep toe tdf tce tr tf Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 -- -- -- -- -- Max -- -- -- -- -- -- 150 100 150 30 30 Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes A16-0 tces CE tceh tnxtc tces tceh tnxtc tnxtc tce OE tf WE twep tr tf twep tr toe tdf tds I/O7-0 H'71 tdh tds H'71 tdh Note: I/O3 and I/O2 are undefined. Figure 18.22 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 655 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Table 18.19 Status Read Mode Return Commands Pin Name I/O7 Attribute Normal end identification 0 I/O6 I/O5 I/O4 I/O3 -- I/O2 -- I/O1 I/O0 Command Program- Erase error ming error error Program- Effective ming or address erase error count exceeded 0 0 Initial value 0 0 0 Erase error: 1 0 -- 0 -- Indications Normal end: 0 Abnormal end: 1 Command Programerror: 1 ming Otherwise: error: 1 0 Otherwise: Otherwise: 0 0 Count Effective exceeded: address 1 error: 1 Otherwise: Otherwise: 0 0 Notes on status read mode After exiting auto-program mode or auto-erase mode, status read mode must be executed without dropping the power supply. Immediately after powering on, or once powering off, the return command is undefined. 18.8.8 PROM Mode Transition Time Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the PROM mode setup period. After the PROM mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode. Table 18.20 Stipulated Transition Times to Command Wait State Item Standby release (oscillation settling time) PROM mode setup time VCC hold time Symbol tosc1 tbmv tdwn Min 20 10 0 Max -- -- -- Unit ms ms ms Notes Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 656 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Memory read mode Command wait state tosc1 VCC tbmv Auto-program mode Auto-erase mode Command wait state Normal/abnormal end identification t dwn RES FWE Note: Set the FWE input pin low level, except in the auto-program and auto-erase modes. Figure 18.23 Oscillation Stabilization Time, Boot Program Transfer Time 18.8.9 Notes On Memory Programming * When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out autoerasing before auto-programming (figure 18.24). * When performing programming using PROM mode on a chip that has been programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before carrying out auto-programming. Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by Renesas. For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that autoerasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level. 2. In the PROM mode, auto-programming to a 128-byte programming unit block should be performed only once. Do not perform additional programming to a programmed 128-byte programming unit block. To reprogram, perform auto-programming after auto-erasing. Reprogram to programmed address Auto-erase (chip batch) Auto-program End Figure 18.24 Reprogramming to Programmed Address Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 657 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.9 Notes on Flash Memory Programming/Erasing The following describes notes when using the on-board programming mode, RAM emulation function, and PROM mode. (1) Program/erase with the specified voltage and timing. Applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. Use a PROM writer that supports the Renesas 128kbytes flash memory on-board microcomputer device type. Do not set the PROM writer at the HN28F101. If the PROM writer is set to the HN28F101 by mistake, a high level can be input to the FWE pin and the LSI can be destroyed. (2) Notes on powering on/powering off (See figures 18.25 to 18.27.) Input a high level to the FWE pin after verifying Vcc. Before turning off Vcc, set the FWE pin to a low level. When powering on and powering off the Vcc power supply, fix the FWE pin a low level and set the flash memory to the hardware protection mode. Be sure that the powering on and powering off timing is satisfied even when the power is turned off and back on in the event of a power interruption, etc. If this timing is not satisfied, microcomputer runaway, etc., may cause overprogramming or overerasing and the memory cells may not operate normally. (3) Notes on FWE pin High/Low switching (See figures 18.25 to 18.27.) Input FWE in the state microcomputer operation is verified. If the microcomputer does not satisfy the operation confirmation state, fix the FWE pin at a low level to set the protection mode. To prevent erroneous programming/erasing of flash memory, note the following in FWE pin High/Low switching: * Apply an input to the FWE pin after the Vcc voltage has stabilized within the rated voltage. If an input is applied to the FWE pin when the microcomputer Vcc voltage does not satisfy the rated voltage, flash memory may be erroneously programmed or erased because the microcomputer is in the unconfirmed state. * Apply an input to the FWE pin when the oscillation has stabilized (after the oscillation stabilization time). When turning on the Vcc power, apply an input to the FWE pin after holding the RES pin at a low level during the oscillation stabilization time (tosc1=20ms). Do not apply an input to the FWE pin when oscillation is stopped or unstable. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 658 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM * In the boot mode, perform FWE pin High/Low switching during reset. In transition to the boot mode, input FWE=High level and set MD2 to MD0 while the RES input is low. At this time, the FWE and MD2 to MD0 inputs must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS) relative to the reset clear timing. The mode programming setup time is necessary for RES reset timing even in transition from the boot mode to another mode. In reset during operation, the RES pin must be held at a low level for at least 20 system clocks. * In the user program mode, FWE=High/Low switching is possible regardless of the RES input. FWE input switching is also possible during program execution on flash memory. * Apply an input to FWE when the program is not running away. When applying an input to the FWE pin, the program execution state must be supervised using a watchdog timer, etc. * Input low level to the FWE pin when the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, E, and P bits in FLMCR have been cleared. Do not erroneously set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, E, and P bits when FWE High/Low. (4) Do not input a constant high level to the FWE pin. To prevent erroneous programming/erasing in the event of program runaway, etc., input a high level to the FWE pin only when programming/erasing flash memory (including flash memory emulation by RAM). Avoid system configurations that constantly input a high level to the FWE pin. Handle program runaway, etc. by starting the watchdog timer so that flash memory is not overprogrammed/overerased even while a high level is input to the FWE pin. (5) Program/erase the flash memory in accordance with the recommended algorithms. The recommended algorithms can program/erase the flash memory without applying voltage stress to the device or sacrificing the reliability of the program data. When setting the PSU and ESU bits in FLMCR, set the watchdog timer for program runaway, etc. (6) Do not set/clear the SWE bit while a program is executing on flash memory. Before performing flash memory program execution or data read, clear the SWE bit. If the SWE bit is set, the flash data can be reprogrammed, but flash memory cannot be accessed for purposes other than verify (verify during programming/erase). Similarly perform flash memory program execution and data read after clearing the SWE bit even when using the RAM emulation function with a high level input to the FWE pin. However, RAM area that overlaps flash memory space can be read/programmed whether the SWE bit is set or cleared. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 659 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM (7) Do not use an interrupt during flash memory programming or erasing. Since programming/erase operations (including emulation by RAM) have priority when a high level is input to the FWE pin, disable all interrupt requests, including NMI. (8) Do not perform additional programming. Reprogram flash memory after erasing. With on-board programming, program to 32-byte programming unit blocks one time only. Program to 128-byte programming unit blocks one time only even in the PROM mode. Erase all the programming unit blocks before reprogramming. Bus release must also be disabled. Wait time: x Programming and erase possible t OSC1 VCC min 0s FWE t MDS min 0s MD2 to MD0*1 t MDS RES SWE set SWE clear SWE bit Flash memory access disabled period (x: Wait time after SWE setting)*2 Flash memory reprogrammable period (Flash memory program execution and data read, other than verify, are disabled.) Notes: 1. Always fix the level by pulling down or pulling up the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) until powering off, except for mode switching. 2. See 21.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics. Figure 18.25 Powering On/Off Timing (Boot Mode) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 660 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Programming and erase possible Wait time: x tOSC1 VCC min 0s FWE MD2 to MD0*1 tMDS RES SWE set SWE clear SWE bit Flash memory access disabled period (x: Wait time after SWE setting)*2 Flash memory reprogrammable period (Flash memory program execution and data read, other than verify, are disabled.) Notes: 1. Always fix the level by pulling down or pulling up the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) up to powering off, except for mode switching. 2. See 21.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics. Figure 18.26 Powering On/Off Timing (User Program Mode) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 661 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM Programming and Wait erase Wait time: x possible time: x Programming and erase possible Programming and Wait time: x erase possible Programming and erase possible Wait time: x tOSC1 VCC min 0s FWE tMDS t MDS *2 MD 2 to MD 0 tMDS tRESW RES SWE set SWE clear SWE bit User program mode Mode switching * 1 Boot mode Mode User switching * 1 mode User program mode User mode Flash memory access disabled time (x: Wait time after SWE setting) * 3 Flash memory reprogammable period (Flash memory program execution and data read, other than verify, are disabled.) Notes: 1. In transition to the boot mode and transition from the boot mode to another mode, mode switching via RES input is necessary. During this switching period (period during which a low level is input to the RES pin), the state of the address dual port and bus control output signals (AS,RD,WR) changes. Therefore, do not use these pins as output signals during this switching period. 2. When making a transition from the boot mode to another mode, the mode programming setup time tMDS relative to the RES clear timing is necessary. 3. See 21.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics. Figure 18.27 Mode Transition Timing (Example: Boot mode User mode User program mode) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 662 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.10 Mask ROM Overview 18.10.1 Block Diagram Figure 18.28 shows a block diagram of the ROM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'000000 H'000002 H'000001 H'000003 On-chip ROM H'01FFFE Even addresses H'01FFFF Odd addresses Figure 18.28 ROM Block Diagram (H8/3067) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 663 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 18 ROM 18.11 Notes on Ordering Mask ROM Version Chip When ordering the H8/3067 Group chips with a mask ROM, note the following. * When ordering through an EPROM, use a 128-kbyte one. * Fill all the unused addresses with H'FF as shown in figure18.27 to make the ROM data size 128 kbytes for all H8/3067 Group chips, which incorporate different sizes of ROM. This applies to ordering through an EPROM and through electrical data transfer. * The flash memory and flash memory R versions only registers for flash memory control (FLMCR, EBR, RAMCR, and FLMSR) are not provided in the mask ROM versions. Reading the corresponding addresses in a mask ROM version will always return 1s, and writes to these addresses are disabled. This must be borne in mind when switching from the flash memory and flash memory R versions to a mask ROM version. HD6433067 (ROM:128kbytes) Address: H'00000-1FFFF H'00000 HD6433066 (ROM:96kbytes) Address: H'00000-17FFF H'00000 HD6433065 (ROM:64kbytes) Address: H'00000-0FFFF H'00000 H'0FFFF H'10000 H'17FFF H'18000 Not used * H'1FFFF H'1FFFF Not used * H'1FFFF Note: * Program H'FF to all addresses in these areas. Figure 18.29 Mask ROM Addresses and Data Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 664 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator 19.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group has a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock () and other internal clock signals (/2 to /4096). After duty adjustment, a frequency divider divides 1 the clock frequency to generate the system clock (). The system clock is output at the pin* and furnished as a master clock to prescalers that supply clock signals to the on-chip supporting modules. Frequency division ratios of 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, and 1/8 can be selected for the frequency 2 divider by settings in a division control register (DIVCR)* . Power consumption in the chip is reduced in almost direct proportion to the frequency division ratio. Notes: 1. Usage of the pin differs depending on the chip operating mode and the PSTOP bit setting in the module standby control register (MSTCR). For details, see section 20.7, System Clock Output Disabling Function. 2. The division ratio of the frequency divider can be changed dynamically during operation. The clock output at the pin also changes when the division ratio is changed. The frequency output at the pin is shown below. = EXTAL x n where, EXTAL: Frequency of crystal resonator or external clock signal n: Frequency division ratio (n = 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, or 1/8) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 665 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator 19.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. CPG XTAL Oscillator EXTAL Duty adjustment circuit Frequency divider Prescalers Division control register Data bus pin /2 to /4096 Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 666 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator 19.2 Oscillator Circuit Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock signal. 19.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator Circuit Configuration: A crystal resonator can be connected as in the example in figure 19.2. The damping resistance Rd should be selected according to table 19.1. An AT-cut parallelresonance crystal should be used. C EXTAL L1 XTAL Rd C L2 C L1 = C L2 = 10 pF to 22 pF Figure 19.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example) Table 19.1 Damping Resistance Value Damping Frequency f (MHz) Resistance 2 2 Note: A crystal resonator between 2 MHz and 20 MHz can be used. If the chip is to be operated at less than 2 MHz, the on-chip frequency divider should be used. (A crystal resonator of less than 2 MHz cannot be used.) Crystal Resonator: Figure 19.3 shows an equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. The crystal resonator should have the characteristics listed in table 19.2. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 667 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator CL L XTAL Rs EXTAL C AT-cut parallel-resonance type 0 Figure 19.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit Table 19.2 Crystal Resonator Parameters Frequency (MHz) Rs max () Co (pF) 2 500 4 120 8 80 10 70 12 60 16 50 18 40 20 40 7 pF max Use a crystal resonator with a frequency equal to the system clock frequency (). Notes on Board Design: When a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be noted: Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 19.4. When the board is designed, the crystal resonator and its load capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins. Avoid C L2 Signal A Signal B H8/3067 Group XTAL EXTAL C L1 Figure 19.4 Example of Incorrect Board Design Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 668 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator 19.2.2 External Clock Input Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 19.5. If the XTAL pin is left open, the stray capacitance should not exceed 10 pF. If the stray capacitance at the XTAL pin exceeds 10 pF in configuration a, use configuration b instead and hold the clock high in standby mode. EXTAL External clock input XTAL Open a. XTAL pin left open EXTAL External clock input XTAL b. Complementary clock input at XTAL pin Figure 19.5 External Clock Input (Examples) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 669 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator External Clock: The external clock frequency should be equal to the system clock frequency when not divided by the on-chip frequency divider. Table 19.3 shows the clock timing, figure 19.6 shows the external clock input timing, and figure 19.7 shows the external clock output settling delay timing. When the appropriate external clock is input via the EXTAL pin, its waveform is corrected by the on-chip oscillator and duty adjustment circuit. When the appropriate external clock is input via the EXTAL pin, its waveform is corrected by the on-chip oscillator and duty adjustment circuit. The resulting stable clock is output to external devices after the external clock settling time (tDEXT) has passed after the clock input. The system must remain reset with the reset signal low during tDEXT, while the clock output is unstable. Table 19.3 Clock Timing VCC = 2.7 V 2 to 5.5 V* Item Symbol Min 40 40 0.4 80 tCH tDEXT* 1 VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V Min 30 30 0.4 80 0.4 80 500 Max 8 8 0.6 0.6 VCC = 5.0 V 10% Min 15 15 0.4 80 0.4 80 500 Max 5 5 0.6 0.6 Unit Test Conditions ns ns ns ns tcyc ns tcyc ns s 5 MHz Figure < 5 MHz 21.11 5 MHz < 5 MHz Figure 19.7 Figure 19.6 Max 10 10 0.6 0.6 External clock input tEXL low pulse width External clock input tEXH high pulse width External clock rise time External clock fall time Clock low pulse width Clock high pulse width External clock output settling delay time tEXr tEXf tCL 0.4 80 500 Notes: 1. tDEXT includes RES pulse width (tRESW). tRESW is 10 tcyc in the mask ROM version, and 20 tcyc in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. 2. The operating range "VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V" applies to the mask ROM version. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 670 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator tEXH tEXL VCC x 0.7 EXTAL VCC x 0.5 0.3 V tEXr tEXf Figure 19.6 External Clock Input Timing VCC 2.7 V STBY EXTAL VIH (internal or external) RES tDEXT Figure 19.7 External Clock Output Settling Delay Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 671 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator 19.3 Duty Adjustment Circuit When the oscillator frequency is 5 MHz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate . 19.4 Prescalers The prescalers divide the system clock () to generate internal clocks (/2 to /4096). 19.5 Frequency Divider The frequency divider divides the duty-adjusted clock signal to generate the system clock (). The frequency division ratio can be changed dynamically by modifying the value in DIVCR, as described below. Power consumption in the chip is reduced in almost direct proportion to the frequency division ratio. The system clock generated by the frequency divider can be output at the pin. 19.5.1 Register Configuration Table 19.4 summarizes the frequency division register. Table 19.4 Frequency Division Register Address* H'EE01B Name Division control register Abbreviation DIVCR R/W R/W Initial Value H'FC Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 672 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator 19.5.2 Division Control Register (DIVCR) DIVCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the division ratio of the frequency divider. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 DIV1 0 R/W 0 DIV0 0 R/W Reserved bits Divide bits 1 and 0 These bits select the frequency division ratio DIVCR is initialized to H'FC by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 2--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bits 1 and 0--Divide (DIV1 and DIV0): These bits select the frequency division ratio, as follows. Bit 1 DIV1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 DIV0 0 1 0 1 Frequency Division Ratio 1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 (Initial value) 19.5.3 Usage Notes The DIVCR setting changes the frequency, so note the following points. * Select a frequency division ratio that stays within the assured operation range specified for the clock cycle time tcyc in the AC electrical characteristics. Note that min = 1 MHz. Avoid settings that give system clock frequencies less than 1 MHz. * All on-chip module operations are based on . Note that the timing of timer operations, serial communication, and other time-dependent processing differs before and after any change in the division ratio. The waiting time for exit from software standby mode also changes when the division ratio is changed. For details, see section 20.4.3, Selection of Waiting Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 673 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 674 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State Section 20 Power-Down State 20.1 Overview The H8/3067 Group has a power-down state that greatly reduces power consumption by halting the CPU, and a module standby function that reduces power consumption by selectively halting on-chip modules. The power-down state includes the following three modes: * Sleep mode * Software standby mode * Hardware standby mode The module standby function can halt on-chip supporting modules independently of the powerdown state. The modules that can be halted are the 16-bit timer, 8-bit timer, SCI0, SCI1, SCI2, DMAC, DRAM interface, and A/D converter. Table 20.1 indicates the methods of entering and exiting the power-down modes and module standby mode, and gives the status of the CPU and on-chip supporting modules in each mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 675 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 State CPU Other I/O Exiting Conditions * Interrupt * RES * STBY Ports Held SCI0 Active Active Active Active Active Held output SCI1 SCI2 A/D Modules RAM output *4 Registers DMAC Active Active Active Active Interface Timer Timer DRAM 8-Bit 16-Bit clock Entering Mode Conditions Clock CPU Sleep SLEEP instruc- Active Halted Held mode tion executed while SSBY = 0 in SYSCR Halted Halted and reset reset reset reset reset and and and and output Halted Halted Halted and reset held*1 reset reset and and and Halted Halted Halted Held High Halted Held * NMI * IRQ0 to IRQ2 * RES * STBY Halted and reset reset reset reset reset reset reset and and and and and and and reset High impedance*2 and reset * STBY * RES * Clear MSTCR bit to 0*5 Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Held*3 High impedance High * STBY impedance * RES Section 20 Power-Down State Software SLEEP instruc- Halted Halted Held standby tion executed mode while SSBY = 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 676 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 mined reset and Halted*2 Halted*2 Halted*2 Halted*2 Halted*2 Halted*2 Halted*2 Halted*2 Active and reset held*1 reset reset reset reset reset and and and and and and in SYSCR Hardware Low input at Halted Halted Undeter- Halted standby STBY pin mode Module Corresponding Active Active standby bit set to 1 in MSTCR Notes: 1. RTCNT and bits 7 and 6 of RTMCSR are initialized. Other bits and registers hold their previous states. Table 20.1 Power-Down State and Module Standby Function 2. State in which the corresponding MSTCR bit was set to 1. For details see section 20.2.2, Module Standby Control Register H (MSTCRH) and section 20.2.3, Module Standby Control Register L (MSTCRL). 3. The RAME bit must be cleared to 0 in SYSCR before the transition from the program execution state to hardware standby mode. 4. When P67 is used as the output pin. 5. When a MSTCR bit is set to 1, the registers of the corresponding on-chip supporting module are initialized. To restart the module, first clear the MSTCR bit to 0, then set up the module registers again. Legend SYSCR: System control register SSBY: Software standby bit MSTCRH: Module standby control register H MSTCRL: Module standby control register L Section 20 Power-Down State 20.2 Register Configuration The H8/3067 Group has a system control register (SYSCR) that controls the power-down state, and module standby control registers H (MSTCRH) and L (MSTCRL) that control the module standby function. Table 20.2 summarizes these registers. Table 20.2 Control Register Address* H'EE012 H'EE01C H'EE01D Name System control register Module standby control register H Module standby control register L Abbreviation SYSCR MSTCRH MSTCRL R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'09 H'78 H'00 Note: * Lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 20.2.1 Bit System Control Register (SYSCR) 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 SSOE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM enable Software standby output port enable NMI edge select User bit enable Standby timer select 2 to 0 These bits select the waiting time of the CPU and peripheral functions Software standby Enables transition to software standby mode Initial value Read/Write SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Bit 7 (SSBY), bits 6 to 4 (STS2 to STS0), and bit 1 (SSOE) control the power-down state. For information on the other SYSCR bits, see section 3.3, System Control Register (SYSCR). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 677 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State Bit 7--Software Standby (SSBY): Enables transition to software standby mode. When software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1 after the return to normal operation. To clear this bit, write 0. Bit 7 SSBY 0 1 Description SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode (Initial value) Bits 6 to 4--Standby Timer Select (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the length of time the CPU and on-chip supporting modules wait for the clock to settle when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt. If the clock is generated by a crystal resonator, set these bits according to the clock frequency so that the waiting time will be at least 7 ms (oscillation settling time). See table 20.3. If an external clock is used, any setting is permitted. Bit 6 STS2 0 Bit 5 STS1 0 1 1 0 1 Bit 4 STS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description Waiting time = 8,192 states Waiting time = 16,384 states Waiting time = 32,768 states Waiting time = 65,536 states Waiting time = 131,072 states Waiting time = 262,144 states Waiting time = 1,024 states Illegal setting (Initial value) Bit 1--Software Standby Output Port Enable (SSOE): Specifies whether the address bus and bus control signals (CS0 to CS7, AS, RD, HWR, LWR, UCAS, LCAS, and RFSH) are kept as outputs or fixed high, or placed in the high-impedance state in software standby mode. Bit 1 SSOE 0 1 Description In software standby mode, the address bus and bus control signals are all high-impedance In software standby mode, the address bus retains its output state and bus control signals are fixed high (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 678 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.2.2 Module Standby Control Register H (MSTCRH) MSTCRH is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls output of the system clock (). It also controls the module standby function, which places individual on-chip supporting modules in the standby state. Module standby can be designated for the SCI0, SCI1, SCI2. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 PSTOP 0 R/W 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W MSTPH2 MSTPH1 MSTPH0 Reserved bit clock stop Enables or disables output of the system clock Module standby H2 to 0 These bits select modules to be placed in standby MSTCRH is initialized to H'78 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7-- Clock Stop (PSTOP): Enables or disables output of the system clock (). Bit 1 PSTOP 0 1 Description System clock output is enabled System clock output is disabled (Initial value) Bits 6 to 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 2--Module Standby H2 (MSTPH2): Selects whether to place the SCI2 in standby. Bit 2 MSTPH2 0 1 Description SCI2 operates normally SCI2 is in standby state (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 679 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State Bit 1--Module Standby H1 (MSTPH1): Selects whether to place the SCI1 in standby. Bit 1 MSTPH1 0 1 Description SCI1 operates normally SCI1 is in standby state (Initial value) Bit 0--Module Standby H0 (MSTPH0): Selects whether to place the SCI0 in standby. Bit 0 MSTPH0 0 1 Description SCI0 operates normally SCI0 is in standby state (Initial value) 20.2.3 Module Standby Control Register L (MSTCRL) MSTCRL is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the module standby function, which places individual on-chip supporting modules in the standby state. Module standby can be designated for the DMAC, 16-bit timer, DRAM interface, 8-bit timer, and A/D converter modules. Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 MSTPL7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 MSTPL0 0 R/W MSTPL5 MSTPL4 MSTPL3 MSTPL2 Module standby L7, L5 to L2, L0 These bits select modules to be placed in standby Reserved bits MSTCRL is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 680 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State Bit 7--Module Standby L7 (MSTPL7): Selects whether to place the DMAC in standby. Bit 7 MSTPL7 0 1 Description DMAC operates normally DMAC is in standby state (Initial value) Bit 6--Reserved: This bit can be written and read. Bit 5--Module Standby L5 (MSTPL5): Selects whether to place the DRAM interface in standby. Bit 5 MSTPL5 0 1 Description DRAM interface operates normally DRAM interface is in standby state (Initial value) Bit 4--Module Standby L4 (MSTPL4): Selects whether to place the 16-bit timer in standby. Bit 4 MSTPL4 0 1 Description 16-bit timer operates normally 16-bit timer is in standby state (Initial value) Bit 3--Module Standby L3 (MSTPL3): Selects whether to place 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 in standby. Bit 3 MSTPL3 0 1 Description 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 operate normally 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 are in standby state (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 681 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State Bit 2--Module Standby L2 (MSTPL2): Selects whether to place 8-bit timer channels 2 and 3 in standby. Bit 2 MSTPL2 0 1 Description 8-bit timer channels 2 and 3 operate normally 8-bit timer channels 2 and 3 are in standby state (Initial value) Bit 1--Reserved: This bit can be written and read. Bit 0--Module Standby L0 (MSTPL0): Selects whether to place the A/D converter in standby. Bit 0 MSTPL0 0 1 Description A/D converter operates normally A/D converter is in standby state (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 682 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.3 20.3.1 Sleep Mode Transition to Sleep Mode When the SSBY bit is cleared to 0 in SYSCR, execution of the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from the program execution state to sleep mode. Immediately after executing the SLEEP instruction the CPU halts, but the contents of its internal registers are retained. The DMA controller (DMAC), DRAM interface, and on-chip supporting modules do not halt in sleep mode. Modules which have been placed in standby by the module standby function, however, remain halted. 20.3.2 Exit from Sleep Mode Sleep mode is exited by an interrupt, or by input at the RES or STBY pin. Exit by Interrupt: An interrupt terminates sleep mode and causes a transition to the interrupt exception handling state. Sleep mode is not exited by an interrupt source in an on-chip supporting module if the interrupt is disabled in the on-chip supporting module. Sleep mode is not exited by an interrupt other than NMI if the interrupt is masked by interrupt priority settings and the settings of the I and UI bits in CCR, IPR. Exit by RES Input: Low input at the RES pin exits from sleep mode to the reset state. Exit by STBY Input: Low input at the STBY pin exits from sleep mode to hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 683 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.4 20.4.1 Software Standby Mode Transition to Software Standby Mode To enter software standby mode, execute the SLEEP instruction while the SSBY bit is set to 1 in SYSCR. In software standby mode, current dissipation is reduced to an extremely low level because the CPU, clock, and on-chip supporting modules all halt. The DMAC and on-chip supporting modules are reset and halted. As long as the specified voltage is supplied, however, CPU register contents and on-chip RAM data are retained. The settings of the I/O ports and DRAM interface* are also held. When the WDT is used as a watchdog timer (WT/IT = 1), the TME bit must be cleared to 0 before setting SSBY. Also, when setting TME to 1, SSBY should be cleared to 0. Clear the BRLE bit in BRCR (inhibiting bus release) before making a transition to software standby mode. Note: * RTCNT and bits 7 and 6 of RTMCSR are initialized. Other bits and registers hold their previous states. 20.4.2 Exit from Software Standby Mode Software standby mode can be exited by input of an external interrupt at the NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 pin, or by input at the RES or STBY pin. Exit by Interrupt: When an NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 interrupt request signal is received, the clock oscillator begins operating. After the oscillator settling time selected by bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR, stable clock signals are supplied to the entire chip, software standby mode ends, and interrupt exception handling begins. Software standby mode is not exited if the interrupt enable bits of interrupts IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ2 are cleared to 0, or if these interrupts are masked in the CPU. Exit by RES Input: When the RES input goes low, the clock oscillator starts and clock pulses are supplied immediately to the entire chip. The RES signal must be held low long enough for the clock oscillator to stabilize. When RES goes high, the CPU starts reset exception handling. Exit by STBY Input: Low input at the STBY pin causes a transition to hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 684 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.4.3 Selection of Waiting Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode Bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR and bits DIV1 and DIV0 in DIVCR should be set as follows. Crystal Resonator: Set STS2 to STS0, DIV1, and DIV0 so that the waiting time (for the clock to stabilize) is at least 7 ms. Table 20.3 indicates the waiting times that are selected by STS2 to STS0, DIV1, and DIV0 settings at various system clock frequencies. External Clock: Any values may be set. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 685 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State Table 20.3 Clock Frequency and Waiting Time for Clock to Settle DIV1 DIV0 STS2 STS1 STS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 * : Recommended setting Waiting Time 8192 states 16384 states 32768 states 65536 states 131072 states 262144 states 1024 states 8192 states 16384 states 32768 states 65536 states 131072 states 262144 states 1024 states 8192 states 16384 states 32768 states 65536 states 131072 states 262144 states 1024 states 8192 states 16384 states 32768 states 65536 states 131072 states 262144 states 1024 states 20 MHz 0.4 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1* 0.05 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1* 26.2 0.10 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1* 26.2 52.4 0.20 3.3 6.6 13.1* 26.2 52.4 104.9 0.41 18 MHz 0.46 0.91 1.8 3.6 7.3* 14.6 0.057 0.91 1.8 3.6 7.3* 14.6 29.1 0.11 1.8 3.6 7.3* 14.6 29.1 58.3 0.23 3.6 7.3* 14.6 29.1 58.3 116.5 0.46 16 MHz 0.51 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2* 16.4 0.064 1.02 2.0 4.1 8.2* 16.4 32.8 0.13 2.0 4.1 8.2* 16.4 32.8 65.5 0.26 4.1 8.2* 16.4 32.8 65.5 131.1 0.51 12 MHz 0.65 1.3 2.7 5.5 10.9* 21.8 0.085 1.4 2.7 5.5 10.9* 21.8 43.7 0.17 2.7 5.5 10.9* 21.8 43.7 87.4 0.34 5.5 10.9* 21.8 43.7 87.4 174.8 0.68 10 MHz 8 MHz 0.8 1.0 1.6 2.0 3.3 4.1 6.6 8.2* 13.1* 16.4 26.2 32.8 0.10 0.13 Illegal setting 1.6 2.0 3.3 4.1 6.6 8.2* 13.1* 16.4 26.2 32.8 52.4 65.5 0.20 0.26 Illegal setting 3.3 4.1 6.6 8.2* 13.1* 16.4 26.2 32.8 52.4 65.5 104.9 131.1 0.41 0.51 Illegal setting 6.6 8.2* 13.1* 16.4 26.2 32.8 52.4 65.5 104.9 131.1 209.7 262.1 0.82 1.0 Illegal setting 6 MHz 1.3 2.7 5.5 10.9* 21.8 43.7 0.17 2.7 5.5 10.9* 21.8 43.7 87.4 0.34 5.5 10.9* 21.8 43.7 87.4 174.8 0.68 10.9* 21.8 43.7 87.4 174.8 349.5 1.4 4 MHz 2.0 4.1 8.2* 16.4 32.8 65.5 0.26 4.0 8.2* 16.4 32.8 65.5 131.1 0.51 8.2* 16.4 32.8 65.5 131.1 262.1 1.02 16.4* 32.8 65.5 131.1 262.1 524.3 2.0 2 MHz 4.1 8.2* 16.4 32.8 65.5 131.1 0.51 8.2* 16.4 32.8 65.5 131.1 262.1 1.0 16.4* 32.8 65.5 131.1 262.1 524.3 2.0 32.8* 65.5 131.1 262.1 524.3 1048.6 4.1 1 MHz Unit 8.2* ms 16.4 32.8 65.5 131.1 262.1 1.0 16.4* ms 32.8 65.5 131.1 262.1 524.3 2.0 32.8* ms 65.5 131.1 262.1 524.3 1048.6 4.1 65.5 ms 131.1 262.1 524.3 1048.6 2097.1 8.2* Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 686 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.4.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode Figure 20.1 shows an example in which software standby mode is entered at the fall of NMI and exited at the rise of NMI. With the NMI edge select bit (NMIEG) cleared to 0 in SYSCR (selecting the falling edge), an NMI interrupt occurs. Next the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (selecting the rising edge) and the SSBY bit is set to 1; then the SLEEP instruction is executed to enter software standby mode. Software standby mode is exited at the next rising edge of the NMI signal. Clock oscillator NMI NMIEG SSBY NMI interrupt handler NMIEG = 1 SSBY = 1 Software standby mode (powerdown state) Oscillator settling time (tosc2) NMI exception handling SLEEP instruction Figure 20.1 NMI Timing for Software Standby Mode (Example) 20.4.5 Note The I/O ports retain their existing states in software standby mode. If a port is in the high output state, its output current is not reduced. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 687 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.4.6 Cautions on Clearing the Software Standby Mode of F-ZTAT Version (1) Operation phenomena When using operating mode 5, 6, or 7* (on-chip flash memory enabled), the first read of onchip flash memory after exiting software standby mode may not be carried out correctly. Software standby mode is exited by means of an external interrupt (via the NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 pin), the RES pin, or the STBY pin. In the case of an external interrupt via the NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 pin, the first read after exiting software standby mode is a read of the vector corresponding to the respective exception handling interrupt source. This vector may not be read correctly, resulting in program runaway. Note: * Mode 5: expanded 16-Mbyte mode with on-chip ROM enabled Mode 6: single-chip normal mode Mode 7: single-chip advanced mode (2) Exemplary procedures to avoid program runaway This operation phenomenon can be avoided by writing or amending program code in accordance with the following procedures. (a) When using mode 5 or mode 7, assign addresses in the 64-kbyte space from H'00000 to H'0FFFF as the vector addresses for the external interrupts that clear software standby mode. (b) When using mode 6, change the mode to mode 7 in the program, and use change (a) above. Note that it is necessary to change vector address assignments and to extend addresses as follows. * Addresses H'DFFF and below (on-chip ROM area): H'xxxx H'0xxxx * Addresses H'E000 to H'E0FF (internal I/O registers-1): H'yyyy H'Eyyyy * Addresses H'EF20 and above (on-chip RAM area and internal I/O registers-2): H'zzzz H'Fzzzz (Where x, y and z are any hexadecimal numbers) With the production lots prior to the week code "9K1" of the HD64F3067 and HD64F3067R, avoid program runaway according to the procedures designated above. Meanwhile, as for the production lots of the week code "9K1" and after, the special constraint according to of the aforementioned Section (2) is not applicable. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 688 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.5 20.5.1 Hardware Standby Mode Transition to Hardware Standby Mode Regardless of its current state, the chip enters hardware standby mode whenever the STBY pin goes low. Hardware standby mode reduces power consumption drastically by halting all functions of the CPU, DMAC, DRAM interface, and on-chip supporting modules. All modules are reset except the on-chip RAM. As long as the specified voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM data is retained. I/O ports are placed in the high-impedance state. Clear the RAME bit to 0 in SYSCR before STBY goes low to retain on-chip RAM data. The inputs at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) should not be changed during hardware standby mode. 20.5.2 Exit from Hardware Standby Mode Hardware standby mode is exited by inputs at the STBY and RES pins. While RES is low, when STBY goes high, the clock oscillator starts running. RES should be held low long enough for the clock oscillator to settle. When RES goes high, reset exception handling begins, followed by a transition to the program execution state. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 689 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.5.3 Timing for Hardware Standby Mode Figure 20.2 shows the timing relationships for hardware standby mode. To enter hardware standby mode, first drive RES low, then drive STBY low. To exit hardware standby mode, first drive STBY high, wait for the clock to settle, then bring RES from low to high. Clock oscillator RES STBY Oscillator settling time Reset exception handling Figure 20.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 690 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.6 20.6.1 Module Standby Function Module Standby Timing The module standby function can halt several of the on-chip supporting modules (SCI2, SCI1, SCI0, the DMAC, 16-bit timer, 8-bit timer, DRAM interface, and A/D converter) independently in the power-down state. This standby function is controlled by bits MSTPH2 to MSTPH0 in MSTCRH and bits MSTPL7 to MSTPL0 in MSTCRL. When one of these bits is set to 1, the corresponding on-chip supporting module is placed in standby and halts at the beginning of the next bus cycle after the MSTCR write cycle. 20.6.2 Read/Write in Module Standby When an on-chip supporting module is in module standby, read/write access to its registers is disabled. Read access always results in H'FF data. Write access is ignored. 20.6.3 Usage Notes When using the module standby function, note the following points. DMAC: When setting a bit in MSTCR to 1 to place the DMAC in module standby, make sure that the DMAC is not currently requesting the bus right. If the corresponding bit in MSTCR is set to 1 when a bus request is present, operation of the bus arbiter becomes ambiguous and a malfunction may occur. DRAM Interface: When the module standby function is used on the DRAM interface, set the MSTCR bit to 1 while DRAM space is deselected. On-Chip Supporting Module Interrupts: Before setting a module standby bit, first disable interrupts by that module. When an on-chip supporting module is placed in standby by the module standby function, its registers are initialized, including registers with interrupt request flags. Pin States: Pins used by an on-chip supporting module lose their module functions when the module is placed in module standby. What happens after that depends on the particular pin. For details, see section 8, I/O Ports. Pins that change from the input to the output state require special care. For example, if SCI1 is placed in module standby, the receive data pin loses its receive data function and becomes a port pin. If its port DDR bit is set to 1, the pin becomes a data output pin, and its output may collide with external SCI transmit data. Data collision should be prevented by clearing the port DDR bit to 0 or taking other appropriate action. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 691 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State Register Resetting: When an on-chip supporting module is halted by the module standby function, all its registers are initialized. To restart the module, after its MSTCR bit is cleared to 0, its registers must be set up again. It is not possible to write to the registers while the MSTCR bit is set to 1. MSTCR Access from DMAC Disabled: To prevent malfunctions, MSTCR can only be accessed from the CPU. It can be read by the DMAC, but it cannot be written by the DMAC. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 692 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State 20.7 System Clock Output Disabling Function Output of the system clock () can be controlled by the PSTOP bit in MSTCRH. When the PSTOP bit is set to 1, output of the system clock halts and the pin is placed in the highimpedance state. Figure 20.3 shows the timing of the stopping and starting of system clock output. When the PSTOP bit is cleared to 0, output of the system clock is enabled. Table 20.4 indicates the state of the pin in various operating states. MSTCRH write cycle (PSTOP = 1) T1 pin High impedance T2 T3 MSTCRH write cycle (PSTOP = 0) T1 T2 T3 Figure 20.3 Starting and Stopping of System Clock Output Table 20.4 Pin State in Various Operating States Operating State Hardware standby Software standby Sleep mode Normal operation PSTOP = 0 High impedance Always high System clock output System clock output PSTOP = 1 High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 693 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 20 Power-Down State Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 694 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.1 21.1.1 Electrical Characteristics of Mask ROM Version Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 21.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage Input voltage (except for port 7) Input voltage (port 7) Reference voltage Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Storage temperature Symbol VCC Vin Vin VREF AVCC VAN Topr Tstg Value -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75 Wide-range specifications: -40 to +85 -55 to +125 Unit V V V V V V C C C Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 695 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.1.2 DC Characteristics Table 21.2 lists the DC characteristics. Table 21.3 lists the permissible output currents. Table 21.2 DC Characteristics (1) 1 Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC* , 1 VSS = AVSS = 0 V* , Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt trigger input voltages Input high voltage Port A, P80 to P82 RES, STBY, NMI, MD2 to MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Ports 1 to 6, P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD2 to MD0 NMI, EXTAL, ports 1 to 7, P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Output high voltage Output low voltage Symbol VT VT - + + - Min 1.0 -- 0.4 VCC - 0.7 Typ Max -- -- -- -- -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.3 Unit V V V V Test Conditions VT - VT VIH VCC x 0.7 2.0 2.0 -- -- -- VCC + 0.3 VCC + 0.3 V V AVCC + 0.3 V VIL -0.3 -0.3 -- -- 0.5 0.8 V V All output pins VOH (except RESO) All output pins VOL (except RESO) Ports 1, 2, and 5 RESO VCC - 0.5 3.5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 0.4 1.0 V V V V V A IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 10 mA IOL = 2.6 mA Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 V to AVCC - 0.5 V Input leakage current STBY, NMI, RES, MD2 to MD0 Port 7 |Iin| -- -- -- 1.0 A Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 696 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Item Three-state leakage current Ports 1 to 6 Ports 8 to B RESO -Ip Cin Symbol |ITSI| Min -- -- 50 -- -- 3 ICC* Typ -- -- -- -- -- 55 (5.0 V) 40 (5.0 V) 24 (5.0 V) 0.01 -- 0.6 0.6 Max 1.0 10.0 300 50 15 100 73 51 5.0 20.0 1.5 1.5 Unit A A A pF pF mA mA mA A A mA mA Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C f = 20 MHz f = 20 MHz f = 20 MHz Ta 50C 50C Ta Input pull-up Ports 2, 4, MOS current and 5 Input capacitance Current 2 dissipation* NMI All input pins except NMI Normal operation Sleep mode Module standby mode Standby mode Analog During A/D power supply conversion current During A/D and D/A conversion Idle Reference current During A/D conversion During A/D and D/A conversion Idle RAM standby voltage -- -- -- -- -- AICC -- -- -- AICC -- -- 0.01 0.5 2.0 5.0 0.8 3.0 A mA mA DASTE = 0 -- VRAM 2.0 0.01 -- 5.0 -- A V DASTE = 0 Notes: 1. Do not open the pin connections of the AVCC, VREF and AVSS pins while the A/D converter is not in use. Connect the AVCC and VREF pins to the VCC and connect the AVSS pin to the VSS, respectively. 2. Given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up MOS is turned off under conditions that VIH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V. Also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when VIH min = VCC x 0.9 and VIL max = 0.3 V under the condition of VRAM VCC < 4.5 V. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 697 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 3. ICC max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.90 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f = 1.0 (mA) + 0.65 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f ICC max. (when using the sleeve) ICC max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.45 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f Also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 698 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.2 DC Characteristics (2) 1 Conditions: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC* , 1 VSS = AVSS = 0 V* , Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt trigger input voltages Input high voltage Port A, P80 to P82 RES, STBY, NMI, MD2 to MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Ports 1 to 6 P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD2 to MD0 NMI, EXTAL, ports 1 to 7 P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Output high voltage Output low voltage Symbol VT VT - + + - Min VCC x 0.2 -- VCC x 0.9 Typ Max -- -- -- -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.3 Unit V V V V Test Conditions VT - VT VIH VCC x 0.07 -- VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 -- -- -- VCC + 0.3 VCC + 0.3 V V AVCC + 0.3 V VIL -0.3 -0.3 -- -- VCC x 0.1 VCC x 0.2 0.8 V V V VCC < 4.0 V VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V All output pins VOH (except RESO) All output pins VOL (except RESO) Ports 1, 2, and 5 VCC - 0.5 VCC - 1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 V V V V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 5 mA (VCC < 4.0 V) IOL = 10 mA (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V) RESO Input leakage current STBY, NMI, RES, MD2 to MD0 Port 7 |Iin| -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 V A IOL = 1.6 mA Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 V to AVCC - 0.5 V -- -- 1.0 A Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 699 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Item Three-state leakage current Ports 1 to 6 Ports 8 to B RESO -Ip Cin Symbol |ITSI| Min -- -- 10 -- -- 3 ICC* Typ -- -- -- -- -- 18 (3.0 V) 14 (3.0 V) 8 (3.0 V) 0.01 -- 0.2 0.6 0.2 0.6 0.01 0.3 0.5 1.2 2.0 0.01 -- Max 1.0 10.0 300 50 15 51 37 26 5.0 20.0 0.5 -- 0.5 -- 5.0 0.5 -- 2.0 -- 5.0 -- Unit A A A pF pF mA mA mA A A mA mA mA mA A mA mA mA mA A V Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C f = 10 MHz f = 10 MHz f = 10 MHz Ta 50C 50C Ta AVCC = 3.0 V AVCC = 5.0 V AVCC = 3.0 V AVCC = 5.0 V DASTE = 0 VREF = 3.0 V VREF = 5.0 V VREF = 3.0 V VREF = 5.0 V DASTE = 0 Input pull-up Ports 2, 4, MOS current and 5 Input capacitance Current 2 dissipation* NMI All input pins except NMI Normal operation Sleep mode Module standby mode Standby mode Analog During A/D power supply conversion current During A/D and D/A conversion Idle Reference current During A/D conversion During A/D and D/A conversion Idle RAM standby voltage -- -- -- -- -- AICC -- -- -- -- -- AICC -- -- -- -- -- VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. Do not open the pin connections of the AVCC, VREF and AVSS pins while the A/D converter is not in use. Connect the AVCC and VREF pins to the VCC and connect the AVSS pin to the VSS, respectively. 2. Given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up MOS is turned off under conditions that VIH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V. Also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when VIH min = VCC x 0.9 and VIL max = 0.3 V under the condition of VRAM VCC < 2.7 V. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 700 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 3. ICC max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.90 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f = 1.0 (mA) + 0.65 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f ICC max. (when using the sleeve) ICC max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.45 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f Also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 701 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.2 DC Characteristics (3) 1 Conditions: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC* , 1 VSS = AVSS = 0 V* , Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt trigger input voltages Input high voltage Port A, P80 to P82 RES, STBY, NMI, MD2 to MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Ports 1 to 6 P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD2 to MD0 NMI, EXTAL, ports 1 to 7 P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Output high voltage Output low voltage Symbol VT VT - + + - Min VCC x 0.2 -- VCC x 0.9 Typ Max -- -- -- -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.3 Unit V V V V Test Conditions VT - VT VIH VCC x 0.07 -- VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 -- -- -- VCC + 0.3 VCC + 0.3 V V AVCC + 0.3 V VIL -0.3 -0.3 -- -- VCC x 0.1 VCC x 0.2 0.8 V V V VCC < 4.0 V VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V All output pins VOH (except RESO) All output pins VOL (except RESO) Ports 1, 2, and 5 VCC - 0.5 VCC - 1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 V V V V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 5 mA (VCC < 4.0 V) IOL = 10 mA (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V) RESO Input leakage current STBY, RES, NMI, MD2 to MD0 Port 7 |Iin| -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 V A IOL = 1.6 mA Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 V to AVCC - 0.5 V -- -- 1.0 A Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 702 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Item Three-state leakage current Ports 1 to 6 Ports 8 to B RESO -Ip Cin Symbol |ITSI| Min -- -- 10 -- -- 3 ICC* Typ -- -- -- -- -- 28 (3.5 V) 20 (3.5 V) 13 (3.5 V) 0.01 -- 0.2 0.6 0.2 0.6 0.01 0.3 0.5 1.2 2.0 0.01 -- Max 1.0 10.0 300 50 15 66 48 34 5.0 20.0 0.5 -- 0.5 -- 5.0 0.5 -- 2.0 -- 5.0 -- Unit A A A pF pF mA mA mA A A mA mA mA mA A mA mA mA mA A V Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C f = 13 MHz f = 13 MHz f = 13 MHz Ta 50C 50C Ta AVCC = 3.0 V AVCC = 5.0 V AVCC = 3.0 V AVCC = 5.0 V DASTE = 0 VREF = 3.0 V VREF = 5.0 V VREF = 3.0 V VREF = 5.0 V DASTE = 0 Input pull-up Ports 2, 4, MOS current and 5 Input capacitance Current 2 dissipation* NMI All input pins except NMI Normal operation Sleep mode Module standby mode Standby mode Analog During A/D power supply conversion current During A/D and D/A conversion Idle Reference current During A/D conversion During A/D and D/A conversion Idle RAM standby voltage -- -- -- -- -- AICC -- -- -- -- -- AICC -- -- -- -- -- VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. Do not open the pin connections of the AVCC, VREF and AVSS pins while the A/D converter is not in use. Connect the AVCC and VREF pins to the VCC and connect the AVSS pin to the VSS, respectively. 2. Given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up MOS is turned off under conditions that VIH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V. Also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when VIH min = VCC x 0.9 and VIL max = 0.3 V under the condition of VRAM VCC < 3.0 V. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 703 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 3. ICC max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.90 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f = 1.0 (mA) + 0.65 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f ICC max. (when using the sleeve) ICC max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.45 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f Also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. Table 21.3 Permissible Output Currents Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Permissible output low current (total) Ports 1, 2, and 5 Other output pins Total of 20 pins in Ports 1, 2, and 5 Total of all output pins, including the above Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) All output pins Total of all output pins |-IOH| |-IOH| IOL Symbol IOL Min -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 2.0 80 120 2.0 40 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 21.3. 2. When driving a darlington pair, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as shown in figures 21.1 and 21.2. H8/3067 Group 2 k Port Darlington pair Figure 21.1 Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 704 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics H8/3067 Group 600 Ports 1, 2, 5 LED Figure 21.2 Sample LED Circuit Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 705 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.1.3 AC Characteristics Clock timing parameters are listed in table 21.4, control signal timing parameters in table 21.5, and bus timing parameters in table 21.6. Timing parameters of the on-chip supporting modules are listed in table 21.7. Table 21.4 Clock Timing Condition: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition B: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition A Item Clock cycle time Clock pulse low width Clock pulse high width Clock rise time Clock fall time Clock oscillator settling time at reset Clock oscillator settling time in software standby Symbol tcyc tCL tCH tCr tCf tOSC1 Min 100 30 30 -- -- 20 Max 1000 -- -- 20 20 -- Min 76.9 18 18 -- -- 20 B Max 1000 -- -- 15 15 -- Min 50 15 15 -- -- 20 C Max 1000 -- -- 10 10 -- Test Unit Conditions ns ns ns ns ns ms Figure 21.7 Figure 21.11 tOSC2 7 -- 7 -- 7 -- ms Figure 20.1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 706 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.5 Control Signal Timing Condition: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition B: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition A Item RES setup time RES pulse width Mode programming setup time RESO output delay time RESO output pulse width NMI, IRQ setup time NMI, IRQ hold time NMI, IRQ pulse width Symbol tRESS tRESW tMDS tRESD tRESOW tNMIS tNMIH tNMIW Min 200 10 200 -- 132 200 10 200 Max -- -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- Min 200 10 200 -- 132 200 10 200 B Max -- -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- Min 150 10 200 -- 132 150 10 200 C Max -- -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- Unit ns tcyc ns ns tcyc ns ns ns Figure 21.10 Figure 21.9 Test Conditions Figure 21.8 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 707 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.6 Bus Timing Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition B: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition A Item Symbol Min -- 0.5 tcyc - 45 -- -- -- -- 1.0 tcyc - 50 1.5 tcyc - 50 0.5 tcyc - 45 1.0 tcyc - 45 50 0 -- 1.0 tcyc - 50 2.0 tcyc - 50 Max 50 -- 60 60 60 60 -- -- -- -- -- -- 60 Min -- 0.5 tcyc - 35 -- -- -- -- 1.0 tcyc - 40 1.5 tcyc - 40 0.5 tcyc - 29 1.0 tcyc - 35 40 0 -- B Max 40 -- 50 50 50 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 50 Min -- 0.5 tcyc - 20 -- -- -- -- 1.0 tcyc - 25 1.5 tcyc - 25 0.5 tcyc - 20 1.0 tcyc - 20 25 0 -- C Test Max Unit Conditions 25 -- 25 25 25 25 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 21.11, figure 21.12, figure 21.14, figure 21.15, figure 21.17 Condition: Address delay time tAD Address hold time tAH Read strobe delay tRSD time Address strobe delay time tASD Write strobe delay tWSD time Strobe delay time tSD Write strobe pulse tWSW1 width 1 Write strobe pulse tWSW2 width 2 Address setup time 1 Address setup time 2 Read data setup time Read data hold time Write data delay time Write data setup time 1 Write data setup time 2 tAS1 tAS2 tRDS tRDH tWDD tWDS1 tWDS2 1.0 tcyc - -- 40 2.0 tcyc - -- 40 1.0 tcyc - -- 30 2.0 tcyc - -- 30 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 708 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Condition A Item Write data hold time Symbol tWDH Min Max Min B Max Min C Max Test Unit Conditions ns Figure 21.11, figure 21.12, figure 21.14, figure 21.15, figure 21.17 0.5 tcyc -- - 30 -- -- -- -- 2.0 tcyc - 100 3.0 tcyc - 100 1.5 tcyc - 100 2.5 tcyc - 100 0.5 tcyc -- - 25 -- -- -- -- 2.0 tcyc - 80 3.0 tcyc - 80 1.5 tcyc - 80 2.5 tcyc - 80 0.5 tcyc -- - 15 -- -- -- -- Read data access tACC1 time 1 Read data access tACC2 time 2 Read data access tACC3 time 3 Read data access tACC4 time 4 Precharge time 1 Precharge time 2 Wait setup time Wait hold time tPCH1 tPCH2 tWTS tWTH 2.0 tcyc ns - 45 3.0 tcyc ns - 45 1.5 tcyc ns - 45 2.5 tcyc ns - 45 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns 1.0 tcyc -- - 40 0.5 tcyc -- - 40 40 5 40 -- -- -- -- -- -- 60 60 60 1.0 tcyc -- - 30 0.5 tcyc -- - 30 40 5 40 -- -- -- -- -- -- 50 50 50 1.0 tcyc -- - 20 0.5 tcyc -- - 20 25 5 25 -- -- -- -- -- -- 30 30 30 Figure 21.13 Figure 21.16 Bus request setup tBRQS time Bus acknowledge delay time 1 Bus acknowledge delay time 2 Bus-floating time RAS precharge time CAS precharge time Low address hold time RAS delay time 1 RAS delay time 2 tBACD1 tBACD2 tBZD tRP 1.5 tcyc -- - 50 0.5 tcyc -- - 30 0.5 tcyc -- - 30 -- -- 60 60 1.5 tcyc -- - 40 0.5 tcyc -- - 25 0.5 tcyc -- - 25 -- -- 50 50 1.5 tcyc -- - 25 0.5 tcyc -- - 15 0.5 tcyc -- - 15 -- -- 25 30 Figure 21.17 to figure 21.19 tCP tRAH tRAD1 tRAD2 ns ns ns ns Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 709 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Condition A Item CAS delay time 1 CAS delay time 2 WE delay time Symbol tCASD1 tCASD2 tWCD Min -- -- -- Max 60 60 60 Min -- -- -- B Max 50 50 50 Min -- -- -- C Max 25 25 25 Test Unit Conditions ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 21.17 to figure 21.19 CAS pulse width 1 tCAS1 CAS pulse width 2 tCAS2 CAS pulse width 3 tCAS3 RAS access time Address access time CAS access time WE setup time WE hold time Write data setup time tRAC tAA tCAC tWCS tWCH tWDS 1.5 tcyc -- - 50 1.0 tcyc -- - 50 1.0 tcyc -- - 50 -- -- -- 2.5 tcyc - 80 2.0 tcyc - 100 1.5 tcyc - 100 1.5 tcyc -- - 40 1.0 tcyc -- - 40 1.0 tcyc -- - 40 -- -- -- 2.5 tcyc - 70 2.0 tcyc - 80 1.5 tcyc - 80 1.5 tcyc -- - 20 1.0 tcyc -- - 20 1.0 tcyc -- - 20 -- -- -- 2.5 tcyc ns - 40 2.0 tcyc ns - 50 1.5 tcyc ns - 50 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns 0.5 tcyc -- - 45 0.5 tcyc -- - 40 0.5 tcyc -- - 45 0.5 tcyc -- - 30 0.5 tcyc -- - 30 0.5 tcyc -- - 30 0.5 tcyc -- - 30 1.5 tcyc -- - 30 0.5 tcyc -- - 35 0.5 tcyc -- - 28 0.5 tcyc -- - 35 0.5 tcyc -- - 25 0.5 tcyc -- - 25 0.5 tcyc -- - 25 0.5 tcyc -- - 25 1.5 tcyc -- - 25 0.5 tcyc -- - 20 0.5 tcyc -- - 15 0.5 tcyc -- - 20 0.5 tcyc -- - 15 0.5 tcyc -- - 20 0.5 tcyc -- - 15 0.5 tcyc -- - 15 1.5 tcyc -- - 15 WE write data hold tWDH time CAS setup time 1 CAS setup time 2 CAS hold time RAS pulse width tCSR1 tCSR2 tCHR tRAS Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 710 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.7 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules Condition: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition B: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition A Item Ports and TPC Symbol Output data delay tPWD time Input data setup time Input data hold time 16-bit Timer output timer delay time tPRS tPRH tTOCD Min -- 50 50 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 Max 100 -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- Min -- 50 50 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 B Max 100 -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- Min -- 50 50 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 C Max 50 -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns tcyc tcyc ns ns ns tcyc tcyc Figure 21.22 Figure 21.21 Figure 21.22 Figure 21.21 Test Conditions Figure 21.20 Timer input setup tTICS time Timer clock input tTCKS setup time Timer clock pulse width 8-bit timer Single edge Both edges tTCKWH tTCKWL tTOCD tTICS tTCKS tTCKWH tTCKWL Timer output delay time Timer input setup time Timer clock input setup time Timer clock pulse width Single edge Both edges Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 711 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Condition A Item SCI Input clock cycle Symbol AsyntScyc chronous Synchronous tSCKr tSCKf tSCKW tTXD tRXS Min 4 6 1.5 1.5 0.4 -- 100 Max -- -- -- -- 0.6 100 -- Min 4 6 1.5 1.5 0.4 -- 100 B Max -- -- -- -- 0.6 100 -- Min 4 6 1.5 1.5 0.4 -- 100 C Max -- -- -- -- 0.6 100 -- Unit tcyc tcyc tcyc tcyc tScyc ns ns Figure 21.24 Test Conditions Figure 21.23 Input clock rise time Input clock fall time Input clock pulse width Transmit data delay time Receive data setup time (synchronous) Receive data hold time (synchronous) Clock input Clock output tRXH 100 0 -- -- 100 100 -- -- 100 0 -- -- 40 10 -- -- 100 100 -- -- 100 0 -- -- 25 10 -- -- 50 50 -- -- ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 21.27 Figure 21.25, figure 21.26 DMAC TEND delay time 1 TEND delay time 2 DREQ setup time DREQ hold time tTED1 tTED2 tDRQS tDRQH -- -- 40 10 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 712 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics RL H8/3067 Group output pin C = 90 pF: ports 4, 6, 8, A19 to A0, D15 to D8 C = 30 pF: ports 9, A, B, RESO R L = 2.4 k R H = 12 k C RH Input/output timing measurement levels * Low: 0.8 V * High: 2.0 V Figure 21.3 Output Load Circuit Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 713 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.1.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics Table 21.8 lists the A/D conversion characteristics. Table 21.8 A/D Conversion Characteristics Condition: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 10 MHz Condition B: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 13 MHz Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 20 MHz Condition A Item ConverResolution sion time: Conversion time (single 134 states mode) Analog input capacitance Min Typ Max 10 -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 134 20 -- -- 10 5 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.5 8.0 B Min Typ Max 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 134 20 -- -- 10 5 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.5 8.0 C Min Typ Max 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 134 20 10 5 -- -- 3.5 3.5 3.5 0.5 4.0 Unit bits tcyc pF k k k k LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Permissible 13 MHz -- signal-source > 13 MHz -- impedance 4.0 V AVCC -- 5.5 V 2.7 V AVCC -- < 4.0 V Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy -- -- -- -- -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 714 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Condition A Item ConverResolution sion time: Conversion time (single 70 states mode) Analog input capacitance Min Typ Max 10 -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 70 20 -- -- 5 3 B Min Typ Max 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 70 20 -- -- 5 3 C Min Typ Max 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 70 20 5 3 -- -- 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.5 8.0 Unit bits tcyc pF k k k k LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Permissible 13 MHz -- signal-source > 13 MHz -- impedance 4.0 V AVCC -- 5.5 V 2.7 V AVCC -- < 4.0 V Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy -- -- -- -- -- 15.5 -- 15.5 -- 15.5 -- 0.5 16 -- -- 15.5 -- 15.5 -- 15.5 -- 0.5 16 -- -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 715 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.1.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics Table 21.9 lists the D/A conversion characteristics. Table 21.9 D/A Conversion Characteristics Condition: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 10 MHz Condition B: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 13 MHz Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 20 MHz Condition A Item Resolution Conversion time (centering time) Absolute accuracy Min Typ Max 8 -- 8 -- 8 10 B Min Typ Max 8 -- 8 -- 8 10 C Min Typ Max 8 -- 8 -- 8 10 Test Unit Conditions bits s 20 pF capacitive load -- -- 2.0 3.0 -- 2.0 -- -- 2.0 3.0 -- 2.0 -- -- 1.5 2.0 -- 1.5 LSB 2 M resistive load LSB 4 M resistive load Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 716 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.2 Electrical Characteristics of Flash Memory and Flash Memory R Versions Absolute Maximum Ratings 21.2.1 Table 21.10 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 21.10 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage 1 Programming voltage (FWE)* Symbol VCC Vin 1 Value -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75* -55 to +125 2 2 Unit V V V V V V V C C C Input voltage (except for port 7)* Input voltage (port 7) Reference voltage Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Storage temperature Vin Vin VREF AVCC VAN Topr Tstg Wide-range specifications: -40 to +85* Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. Notes: 1. 12 V must not be applied to any pin, as this may cause permanent damage to the device. 2. The operating temperature range when programming and erasing the flash memory is: Ta = 0 to + 75C (regular specifications), Ta = 0 to + 85C (wide-range specifications). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 717 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.2.2 DC Characteristics Tables 21.11 lists the DC characteristics. Table 21.12 lists the permissible output currents. Table 21.11 DC Characteristics (1) 1 Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC* , 1 VSS = AVSS = 0 V* , Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) [Programming/erasing conditions: Ta = 0C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = 0C to +85C (wide-range specifications)] Item Schmitt trigger Port A, input voltages P80 to P82 RES, STBY, NMI, MD2 to MD0, FWE EXTAL Port 7 Ports 1 to 6, P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Input low voltage RES, STBY, FWE, MD2 to MD0 NMI, EXTAL, ports 1 to 7, P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Output high voltage Output low voltage Symbol VT VT - + + - Min 1.0 -- 0.4 VCC - 0.7 Typ Max -- -- -- -- -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.3 Unit V V V V Test Conditions VT - VT Input high voltage VIH VCC x 0.7 2.0 2.0 -- -- -- VCC + 0.3 VCC + 0.3 V V AVCC + 0.3 V VIL -0.3 -- 0.5 V -0.3 -- 0.8 V All output pins VOH All output pins Ports 1, 2, and 5 |Iin| VOL VCC - 0.5 3.5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 1.0 V V V V A IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 10 mA Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 V to AVCC - 0.5 V Input leakage STBY, RES, current NMI, FWE MD2 to MD0 Port 7 -- -- 1.0 A Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 718 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Item Three-state leakage current Input pull-up MOS current Input capacitance Ports 1 to 6 Ports 8 to B Ports 2, 4, and 5 FWE NMI All input pins except NMI, and FWE Current 2 dissipation* Normal operation Sleep mode Module standby mode Standby mode Flash memory programming/ erasing Analog power During A/D supply current conversion During A/D and D/A conversion Idle Reference current During A/D conversion During A/D and D/A conversion Idle RAM standby voltage VRAM AICC AICC 3 ICC* Symbol |ITSI| Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C -Ip Cin 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 300 80 50 15 A pF pF pF -- -- -- -- -- -- 55 100 (5.0 V) 40 73 (5.0 V) 24 51 (5.0 V) 0.01 -- 5.0 20.0 mA mA mA A A mA f = 20 MHz f = 20 MHz f = 20 MHz Ta 50C 50C Ta 0C Ta 85C f = 20 MHz 60 (5.0 110 V) 0.6 0.6 1.5 1.5 -- -- mA mA -- -- -- 0.01 0.5 2.0 5.0 0.8 3.0 A mA mA DASTE = 0 -- 2.0 0.01 -- 5.0 -- A V DASTE = 0 Notes: 1. Do not open the pin connections of the AVCC, VREF and AVSS pins while the A/D converter is not in use. Connect the AVCC and VREF pins to the VCC and connect the AVSS pin to the VSS, respectively. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 719 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 2. Given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up MOS is turned off under conditions that VIH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V. Also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when VIH min = VCC x 0.9 and VIL max = 0.3 V under the condition of VRAM VCC < 2.7 V. 3. ICC max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.90 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f ICC max. (when using the sleeve) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.65 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f ICC max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.45 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f Also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 720 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.11 DC Characteristics (2) 1 Conditions: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC* , 1 VSS = AVSS = 0 V* , Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) [Programming/erasing conditions: VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, Ta = 0 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = 0 to +85C (wide-range specifications)] Item Schmitt trigger Port A, input voltages P80 to P82 STBY, RES, NMI, MD2 to MD0, FWE EXTAL Port 7 Ports 1 to 6 P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Input low voltage STBY, RES, FWE, MD2 to MD0 NMI, EXTAL, Ports 1 to 7 P83, P84, P90 to P95, port B Output high voltage Output low voltage All output pins All output pins Ports 1, 2, and 5 Symbol VT VT - + + - Min VCC x 0.2 -- VCC x 0.9 Typ Max -- -- -- -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.3 Unit V V V V Test Conditions VT - VT Input high voltage VIH VCC x 0.07 -- VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 VCC x 0.7 -- -- -- VCC + 0.3 VCC + 0.3 V V AVCC + 0.3 V VIL -0.3 -- VCC x 0.1 V -0.3 -- VCC x 0.2 0.8 V V V V V V A VCC < 4.0 V VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V IOH = -200 A IOH = -1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 5 mA Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 V to AVCC - 0.5 V VOH VOL VCC - 0.5 VCC - 1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 1.0 Input leakage STBY, RES, current NMI, FWE, MD2 to MD0 Port 7 |Iin| -- -- -- 1.0 A Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 721 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Item Three-state leakage current Input pull-up MOS current Input capacitance Ports 1 to 6 Ports 8 to B Ports 2, 4, and 5 FWE NMI All input pins except NMI, and FWE Current 2 dissipation* Normal operation Sleep mode Module standby mode Standby mode Flash memory programming/ erasing Analog power supply current During A/D conversion During A/D and D/A conversion Idle Reference current During A/D conversion During A/D and D/A conversion Idle RAM standby voltage VRAM AICC AICC 3 ICC* Symbol |ITSI| Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 V to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0 V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C -Ip Cin 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 300 80 50 15 A pF pF pF -- -- -- -- -- -- 28 66 (3.5 V) 20 48 (3.5 V) 13 34 (3.5 V) 0.01 -- 5.0 20.0 mA mA mA A A mA f = 13 MHz f = 13 MHz f = 13 MHz Ta 50C 50C Ta 0C Ta 85C f = 13 MHz AVCC = 3.0 V AVCC = 3.0 V 33 76 (3.5 V) 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 -- -- mA mA -- -- -- 0.01 0.3 1.2 5.0 0.5 2.0 A mA mA DASTE = 0 VREF = 3.0 V VREF = 3.0 V -- 2.0 0.01 -- 5.0 -- A V DASTE = 0 Notes: 1. Do not open the pin connections of the AVCC, VREF and AVSS pins while the A/D converter is not in use. Connect the AVCC and VREF pins to the VCC and connect the AVSS pin to the VSS, respectively. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 722 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 2. Given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up MOS is turned off under conditions that VIH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V. Also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when VIH min = VCC x 0.9 and VIL max = 0.3 V under the condition of VRAM VCC < 3.0 V. 3. ICC max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.90 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f ICC max. (when using the sleeve) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.65 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f ICC max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (mA) + 0.45 (mA/(MHz x V)) x VCC x f Also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. Table 21.12 Permissible Output Currents Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Permissible output low current (total) Ports 1, 2, and 5 Other output pins Sum of 20 pins in ports 1, 2, and 5 Total of all output pins, including the above Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) All output pins Total of all output pins |-IOH| |-IOH| IOL Symbol IOL Min -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 2.0 80 120 2.0 40 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 21.12. 2. When driving a darlington pair, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as shown in figures 21.4 and 21.5. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 723 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics H8/3067 Group 2 k Port Darlington pair Figure 21.4 Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example) H8/3067 Group 600 Ports 1, 2, 5 LED Figure 21.5 Sample LED Circuit Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 724 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.2.3 AC Characteristics Clock timing parameters are listed in table 21.13, control signal timing parameters in table 21.14, and bus timing parameters in table 21.15. Timing parameters of the on-chip supporting modules are listed in table 21.16. Table 21.13 Clock Timing Condition: Condition A: Condition B: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 13 MHz VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 20 MHz Condition A Item Clock cycle time Clock pulse low width Clock pulse high width Clock rise time Clock fall time Clock oscillator settling time at reset Clock oscillator settling time in software standby Symbol tcyc tCL tCH tCr tCf tOSC1 tOSC2 Min 76.9 18 18 -- -- 20 7 Max 1000 -- -- 15 15 -- -- Min 50 15 15 -- -- 20 7 B Max 1000 -- -- 10 10 -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ms ms Figure 21.7 Figure 20.1 Test Conditions Figure 21.11 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 725 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.14 Control Signal Timing Condition: Condition A: Condition B: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 13 MHz VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 20 MHz Condition A Item RES setup time RES pulse width Symbol tRESS tRESW Min 200 20 200 200 10 200 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- Min 150 20 200 150 10 200 B Max -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns tcyc ns ns ns ns Figure 21.10 Test Conditions Figure 21.8 Mode programming setup tMDS time NMI, IRQ setup time NMI, IRQ hold time NMI, IRQ pulse width tNMIS tNMIH tNMIW Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 726 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.15 Bus Timing Condition: Condition A: Condition B: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 13 MHz VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 20 MHz Condition A Item Address delay time Address hold time Read strobe delay time Address strobe delay time Write strobe delay time Strobe delay time Write strobe pulse width 1 Write strobe pulse width 2 Address setup time 1 Address setup time 2 Read data setup time Read data hold time Write data delay time Write data setup time 1 Write data setup time 2 Write data hold time Symbol tAD tAH tRSD tASD tWSD tSD tWSW1 tWSW2 tAS1 tAS2 tRDS tRDH tWDD tWDS1 tWDS2 tWDH Min -- 0.5 tcyc - 35 -- -- -- -- 1.0 tcyc - 40 1.5 tcyc - 40 0.5 tcyc - 29 1.0 tcyc - 35 40 0 -- 1.0 tcyc - 40 2.0 tcyc - 40 0.5 tcyc - 25 Max 40 -- 50 50 50 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 50 -- -- -- Min -- 0.5 tcyc - 20 -- -- -- -- 1.0 tcyc - 25 1.5 tcyc - 25 0.5 tcyc - 20 1.0 tcyc - 20 25 0 -- 1.0 tcyc - 30 2.0 tcyc - 30 0.5 tcyc - 15 B Max 25 -- 25 25 25 25 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figure 21.11, figure 21.12, figure 21.14, figure 21.15, figure 21.17 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 727 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Condition A Item Read data access time 1 Read data access time 2 Read data access time 3 Read data access time 4 Precharge time 1 Precharge time 2 Wait setup time Wait hold time Bus request setup time Bus acknowledge delay time 1 Bus acknowledge delay time 2 Bus-floating time RAS precharge time CAS precharge time Low address hold time RAS delay time 1 RAS delay time 2 CAS delay time 1 CAS delay time 2 WE delay time CAS pulse width 1 CAS pulse width 2 CAS pulse width 3 Symbol tACC1 tACC2 tACC3 tACC4 tPCH1 tPCH2 tWTS tWTH tBRQS tBACD1 tBACD2 tBZD tRP tCP tRAH tRAD1 tRAD2 tCASD1 tCASD2 tWCD tCAS1 tCAS2 tCAS3 Min -- -- -- -- 1.0 tcyc - 30 0.5 tcyc - 30 40 5 40 -- -- -- 1.5 tcyc - 40 0.5 tcyc - 25 0.5 tcyc - 25 -- -- -- -- -- 1.5 tcyc - 40 1.0 tcyc - 40 1.0 tcyc - 40 Max 2.0 tcyc - 80 3.0 tcyc - 80 1.5 tcyc - 80 2.5 tcyc - 80 -- -- -- -- -- 50 50 50 -- -- -- 50 50 50 50 50 -- -- -- Min -- -- -- -- 1.0 tcyc - 20 0.5 tcyc - 20 25 5 25 -- -- -- 1.5 tcyc - 25 0.5 tcyc - 15 0.5 tcyc- 15 -- -- -- -- -- 1.5 tcyc - 20 1.0 tcyc - 20 1.0 tcyc - 20 B Max 2.0 tcyc - 45 3.0 tcyc - 45 1.5 tcyc - 45 2.5 tcyc - 45 -- -- -- -- -- 30 30 30 -- -- -- 25 30 25 25 25 -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 21.13 Figure 21.16 Test Conditions Figure 21.11, figure 21.12, figure 21.14, figure 21.15, figure 21.17 Figure 21.17 to figure 21.19 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 728 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Condition A Item RAS access time Address access time CAS access time WE setup time WE hold time Write data setup time WE write data hold time CAS setup time 1 CAS setup time 2 CAS hold time RAS pulse width Symbol tRAC tAA tCAC tWCS tWCH tWDS tWDH tCSR1 tCSR2 tCHR tRAS Min -- -- -- 0.5 tcyc - 35 0.5 tcyc - 28 0.5 tcyc - 35 0.5 tcyc - 25 0.5 tcyc - 25 0.5 tcyc - 25 0.5 tcyc - 25 1.5 tcyc - 25 Max 2.5 tcyc - 70 2.0 tcyc - 80 1.5 tcyc - 80 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Min -- -- -- 0.5 tcyc - 20 0.5 tcyc - 15 0.5 tcyc - 20 0.5 tcyc - 15 0.5 tcyc - 20 0.5 tcyc - 15 0.5 tcyc - 15 1.5 tcyc - 15 B Max 2.5 tcyc - 40 2.0 tcyc - 50 1.5 tcyc - 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figure 21.17 to figure 21.19 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 729 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.16 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules Condition: Condition A: Condition B: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 13 MHz VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 20 MHz Condition A Item Port/ TPC Output data delay time Input data setup time Input data hold time 16-bit Timer output delay time timer Timer input setup time Timer clock Single edge pulse width Both edges 8-bit timer Timer output delay time Timer input setup time Timer clock Single edge pulse width Both edges SCI Input clock cycle Asynchronous Synchronous tSCKr tSCKf tSCKW tTXD tRXS tRXH Symbol Min tPWD tPRS tPRH tTOCD tTICS tTCKWH tTCKWL tTOCD tTICS tTCKWH tTCKWL L tScyc -- 50 50 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 4 6 1.5 1.5 0.4 -- 100 100 0 Max 100 -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.6 100 -- -- -- Min -- 50 50 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 4 6 1.5 1.5 0.4 -- 100 100 0 B Max 50 -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.6 100 -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns tcyc tcyc ns ns ns tcyc tcyc tcyc tcyc tcyc tcyc tScyc ns ns ns ns Figure 21.24 Figure 21.23 Figure 21.22 Figure 21.21 Figure 21.22 Figure 21.21 Test Conditions Figure 21.20 Timer clock input setup time tTCKS Timer clock input setup time tTCKS Input clock rise time Input clock fall time Input clock pulse width Transmit data delay time Receive data setup time (synchronous) Receive data hold time (synchronous) Clock input Clock output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 730 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Condition A Item DMAC TEND delay time 1 TEND delay time 2 DREQ setup time DREQ hold time Symbol Min tTED1 tTED2 tDRQS tDRQH -- -- 40 10 Max 100 100 -- -- Min -- -- 25 10 B Max 50 50 -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns Test Conditions Figure 21.25, figure 21.26 Figure 21.27 RL H8/3067 Group output pin C = 90 pF: ports 4, 6, 8, A19 to A0, D15 to D8 C = 30 pF: ports 9, A, B R L = 2.4 k R H = 12 k C RH Input/output timing measurement levels * Low: 0.8 V * High: 2.0 V Figure 21.6 Output Load Circuit Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 731 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.2.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics Table 21.17 lists the A/D conversion characteristics. Table 21.17 A/D Conversion Characteristics Condition: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 13 MHz Condition B: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 20 MHz Condition A Item Min Typ 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 134 20 -- -- 10 5 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.5 8.0 Min 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B Typ 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 134 20 10 5 -- -- 3.5 3.5 3.5 0.5 4.0 Unit bits tcyc pF k k k k LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Conversion 10 Resolution time: 134 states Conversion time (single mode) -- Analog input capacitance Permissible signal-source impedance 13 MHz > 13 MHz 4.0 V AVCC 5.5 V 3.0 V AVCC < 4.0 V Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 732 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Condition A Item Min Typ 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 70 20 -- -- 5 3 15.5 15.5 15.5 0.5 16 Min 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B Typ 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 70 20 5 3 -- -- 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.5 8.0 Unit bits tcyc pF k k k k LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Conversion 10 Resolution time: 70 states Conversion time (single mode) -- Analog input capacitance Permissible signal-source impedance 13 MHz > 13 MHz 4.0 V AVCC 5.5 V 3.0 V AVCC < 4.0 V Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 733 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.2.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics Table 21.18 lists the D/A conversion characteristics. Table 21.18 D/A Conversion Characteristics Condition: Ta = -20C to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40C to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition A: VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.0 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 13 MHz Condition B: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10%, VREF = 4.5 to AVCC, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, fmax = 20 MHz Condition A Item Resolution Min 8 Typ 8 -- 2.0 -- Max 8 10 3.0 2.0 Min 8 -- -- -- B Typ 8 -- 1.5 -- Max 8 10 2.0 1.5 Unit bits s LSB LSB 20 pF capacitive load 2 M resistive load 4 M resistive load Test Conditions Conversion time (centering -- time) Absolute accuracy -- -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 734 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 21.19 shows the flash memory characteristics. Table 21.19 Flash Memory Characteristics (1) Conditions: VCC=4.5 to 5.5V, AVCC=4.5 to 5.5V, VSS=AVSS=0V Ta=0 to +75C (Programming/erasing operating temperature range: regular specification) Ta=0 to +85C (Programming/erasing operating temperature range: wide-range specification) Item Programming time*1 *2 *4 Erase time*1 *3 *5 Reprogramming count Programming Wait time after SWE bit setting* 1 Wait time after PSU bit setting* 14 Wait time after P bit setting* * 1 Wait time after P bit clear* 1 Symbol tP tE NWEC x y z N x y z Min -- -- -- 10 50 150 10 10 4 2 4 -- 10 200 5 10 10 20 2 5 Typ 10 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 200 1200 100 -- -- 500 -- -- -- -- -- 403 -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- Unit ms/32 bytes ms/block Times s s s s s s s s Times s s ms s s s s Test Condition Wait time after PSU bit clear*1 Wait time after PV bit setting*1 Wait time after H'FF dummy write*1 Wait time after PV bit clear*1 Erase Maximum programming count*1 *4 Wait time after SWE bit setting*1 Wait time after ESU bit setting*1 Wait time after E bit setting*1 *5 Wait time after E bit clear*1 Wait time after ESU bit clear*1 Wait time after EV bit setting*1 Wait time after H'FF dummy write*1 Wait time after EV bit clear*1 Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. s Maximum erase count*1 *5 N 120 -- 240 Times Make each time setting in accordance with the program/program-verify flowchart or erase/erase-verify flowchart. Programming time per 32 bytes (Shows the total period for which the P-bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR) is set. It does not include the programming verification time.) Block erase time (Shows the total period for which the E-bit in FLMCR is set. It does not include the erase verification time.) To specify the maximum programming time (tP(max)) in the 32-byte programming flowchart, set the maximum value (403) for the maximum programming count (N). The wait time after P bit setting (z) should be changed as follows according to the programming counter value. Programming counter value of 1 to 4 : z = 150 s Programming counter value of 5 to 403 : z = 500 s For the maximum erase time (tE(max)), the following relationship applies between the wait time after E bit setting (z) and the maximum erase count (N): tE(max) = Wait time after E bit setting (z) x maximum erase count (N) To set the maximum erase time, the values of z and N should be set so as to satisfy the above formula. Examples: When z = 5 [ms], N = 240 times When z = 10 [ms], N = 120 times Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 735 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Table 21.19 Flash Memory Characteristics (2) Conditions: VCC=3.0 to 3.6 V, AVCC=3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS=AVSS=0V Ta=0 to +75C (Programming/erasing operating temperature range: regular specification) Ta=0 to +85C (Programming/erasing operating temperature range: wide-range specification) Item 124 Programming time* * * 135 Erase time* * * Symbol tP tE NWEC 1 Min -- -- -- 10 50 150 10 10 4 2 4 -- 10 200 5 10 10 20 2 5 120 Typ 10 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 200 1200 100 -- -- 500 -- -- -- -- -- 403 -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- 240 Unit ms/32 bytes ms/block Times s s s s s s s s Times s s ms s s s s s Times Test Condition Reprogramming count Programming Wait time after SWE bit setting* Wait time after P bit setting*1 *4 Wait time after P bit clear*1 1 Wait time after PSU bit clear* 1 Wait time after PSU bit setting* x y z N x y z N Wait time after PV bit setting*1 Wait time after H'FF dummy write*1 Wait time after PV bit clear* 1 Maximum programming count*1 *4 Erase Wait time after SWE bit setting*1 Wait time after ESU bit setting*1 Wait time after E bit setting*1 *5 Wait time after E bit clear*1 Wait time after ESU bit clear*1 Wait time after EV bit setting*1 Wait time after H'FF dummy write*1 Wait time after EV bit clear*1 Maximum erase count*1 *5 Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make each time setting in accordance with the program/program-verify flowchart or erase/erase-verify flowchart. Programming time per 32 bytes (Shows the total period for which the P-bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR) is set. It does not include the programming verification time.) Block erase time (Shows the total period for which the E-bit in FLMCR is set. It does not include the erase verification time.) To specify the maximum programming time (tP(max)) in the 32-byte programming flowchart, set the max. value (403) for the maximum programming count (N). The wait time after P bit setting (z) should be changed as follows according to the programming counter value. Programming counter value of 1 to 4 : z = 150 s Programming counter value of 5 to 403 : z = 500 s For the maximum erase time (tE(max)), the following relationship applies between the wait time after E bit setting (z) and the maximum erase count (N): tE(max) = Wait time after E bit setting (z) x maximum erase count (N) To set the maximum erase time, the values of z and N should be set so as to satisfy the above formula. Examples: When z = 5 [ms], N = 240 times When z = 10 [ms], N = 120 times Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 736 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.3 Operational Timing This section shows timing diagrams. 21.3.1 Clock Timing Clock timing is shown as follows: * Oscillator settling timing Figure 21.7 shows the oscillator settling timing. VCC STBY tOSC1 RES tOSC1 Figure 21.7 Oscillator Settling Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 737 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.3.2 Control Signal Timing Control signal timing is shown as follows: * Reset input timing Figure 21.8 shows the reset input timing. * Reset output timing* Figure 21.9 shows the reset output timing. * Interrupt input timing Figure 21.10 shows the interrupt input timing for NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0. tRESS RES tMDS MD2 to MD0 tRESW tRESS Figure 21.8 Reset Input Timing tRESD RESO tRESOW tRESD Figure 21.9 Reset Output Timing* Note: * This function is used only in the mask ROM version, and is not provided in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 738 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics tNMIS NMI tNMIS IRQ E tNMIS IRQ L IRQ E : Edge-sensitive IRQ i IRQ L : Level-sensitive IRQ i (i = 0 to 5) tNMIW NMI IRQ j (j = 0 to 5) tNMIH tNMIH Figure 21.10 Interrupt Input Timing 21.3.3 Bus Timing Bus timing is shown as follows: * Basic bus cycle: two-state access Figure 21.11 shows the timing of the external two-state access cycle. * Basic bus cycle: three-state access Figure 21.12 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle. * Basic bus cycle: three-state access with one wait state Figure 21.13 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle with one wait state inserted. * Burst ROM access timing: burst cycle two-state Figure 21.14 shows the timing of the burst cycle two-state access. * Burst ROM access timing: burst cycle three-state Figure 21.15 shows the timing of the burst cycle three-state access. * Bus-release mode timing Figure 21.16 shows the bus-release mode timing. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 739 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics T1 tcyc tCH tAD A23 to A0, CSn tPCH1 tASD AS tAS1 tASD RD (read) tAS1 tACC1 D15 to D0 (read) tPCH1 tASD HWR, LWR (write) tAS1 tWSW1 tWDS1 tSD tAH tRDS tRDH* tACC3 tRSD tPCH2 tACC3 tSD tAH tCf tcyc tCr tCL T2 tWDD D15 to D0 (write) tWDH Note: * Specification from the earliest negation timing of A23 to A0, CSn, and RD. Figure 21.11 Basic Bus Cycle: Two-State Access Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 740 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics T1 A23 to A0, CSn T2 T3 tACC4 AS tACC4 RD (read) tACC2 D15 to D0 (read) tWSD HWR, LWR (write) tAS2 tWDD D15 to D0 (write) tWDS2 tWSW2 tRDS Figure 21.12 Basic Bus Cycle: Three-State Access Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 741 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics T1 A23 to A0, CSn AS T2 TW T3 RD (read) D15 to D0 (read) HWR, LWR (write) D15 to D0 (write) tWTS WAIT tWTH tWTS tWTH Figure 21.13 Basic Bus Cycle: Three-State Access with One Wait State Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 742 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics T1 tAD A23 to A3 CSn tAD T2 T3 T1 T2 A2 to A0 tASD tACC4 tSD tAH tASD tSD tAH AS tAS1 tASD tACC4 tAS1 tRSD RD tAS1 tACC2 tRDS tACC1 tRDS tRDH* D15 to D0 Note: * Specification from the earliest negation timing of A23 to A0, CSn, and RD. Figure 21.14 Burst ROM Access Timing: Two-State Access Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 743 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics T1 tAD A23 to A3 CSn tAD T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 A2 to A0 tASD tACC4 tSD tAH tASD tSD tAH AS tAS1 tASD tACC4 tAS1 tRSD RD tAS1 tACC2 tRDS tACC2 tRDS tRDH* D15 to D0 Note: * Specification from the earliest negation timing of A23 to A0, CSn, and RD. Figure 21.15 Burst ROM Access Timing: Three-State Access tBRQS BREQ tBACD2 tBACD1 BACK tBRQS A23 to A0, AS, RD, HWR, LWR tBZD tBZD Figure 21.16 Bus-Release Mode Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 744 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.3.4 DRAM Interface Bus Timing DRAM interface bus timing is shown as follows: * DRAM bus timing: read and write access Figure 21.17 shows the timing of the read and write access. * DRAM bus timing: CAS before RAS refresh Figure 21.18 shows the timing of the CAS before RAS refresh. * DRAM bus timing: self-refresh Figure 21.19 shows the timing of the self-refresh. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 745 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Tp Tr TC1 TC2 tAD A23 to A0 tAD tAD tAS1 tRP CS5 to CS2 (RAS5 to RAS2) tRAD1 tRAH tRAD2 tASD UCAS, LCAS (read) tCAS1 tCASD2 tCP RD (WE) (read) High tRAC tRDS tRDH* tAA tCAC tCASD1 tCASD2 tCAS2 tCP tASD tWCD D15 to D0 (read) UCAS, LCAS (write) RD (WE) (write) tWCS tWDD D15 to D0 (write) tWDS tWCH tWDH RFSH High Note: * Specification from the earliest negation timing of RAS and CAS. Figure 21.17 DRAM Bus Timing (Read/Write) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 746 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics TRp tRAD1 tRP CS5 to CS2 (RAS5 to RAS2) tRAS tCASD1 tCSR1 UCAS, LCAS tCAS3 tCASD2 tCHR tRAD2 TR1 TR2 RD (WE) (high) tRAD1 tCSR1 tCHR tRAS tRAD2 RFSH Figure 21.18 DRAM Bus Timing (CAS Before RAS Refresh) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 747 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics tCSR2 CS5 to CS2 (RAS5 to RAS2) UCAS, LCAS RD (WE) (high) tCSR2 RFSH Figure 21.19 DRAM Bus Timing (Self-Refresh) 21.3.5 TPC and I/O Port Timing Figure 21.20 shows the TPC and I/O port input/output timing. T1 tPRS Port 1 to B (read) tPWD Port 1 to 6, 8 to B (write) tPRH T2 T3 Figure 21.20 TPC and I/O Port Input/Output Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 748 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.3.6 Timer Input/Output Timing 16-bit timer and 8-bit timer timing is shown as follows: * Timer input/output timing Figure 21.21 shows the timer input/output timing. * Timer external clock input timing Figure 21.22 shows the timer external clock input timing. tTOCD Output compare*1 tTICS Input capture*2 Notes: 1. TIOCA0 to TIOCA2, TIOCB0 to TIOCB2, TMO0, TMO2, TMIO1, TMIO3 2. TIOCA0 to TIOCA2, TIOCB0 to TIOCB2 TMIO1, TMIO3 Figure 21.21 Timer Input/Output Timing tTCKS tTCKS TCLKA to TCLKD tTCKWL tTCKWH Figure 21.22 Timer External Clock Input Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 749 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.3.7 SCI Input/Output Timing SCI timing is shown as follows: * SCI input clock timing Figure 21.23 shows the SCI input clock timing. * SCI input/output timing (synchronous mode) Figure 21.24 shows the SCI input/output timing in synchronous mode. tSCKW SCK0 to SCK2 tScyc tSCKr tSCKf Figure 21.23 SCI Input Clock Timing tScyc SCK0 to SCK2 tTXD TxD0 to TxD2 (transmit data) RxD0 to RxD2 (receive data) tRXS tRXH Figure 21.24 SCI Input/Output Timing in Synchronous Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 750 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics 21.3.8 DMAC Timing DMAC timing is shown as follows. * DMAC TEND output timing for 2 state access Figure 21.25 shows the DMAC TEND output timing for 2 state access. * DMAC TEND output timing for 3 state access Figure 21.26 shows the DMAC TEND output timing for 3 state access. * DMAC DREQ input timing Figure 21.27 shows DMAC DREQ input timing. T1 tTED1 TEND tTED2 T2 Figure 21.25 DMAC TEND Output Timing for 2 State Access T1 tTED1 TEND tTED2 T2 T3 Figure 21.26 DMAC TEND Output Timing for 3 State Access tDRQS DREQ tDRQH Figure 21.27 DMAC DREQ Input Timing Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 751 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Section 21 Electrical Characteristics Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 752 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Appendix A Instruction Set A.1 Instruction List Operand Notation Symbol Rd Rs Rn ERd ERs ERn (EAd) (EAs) PC SP CCR N Z V C disp + - x / ( ), < > Description General destination register General source register General register General destination register (address register or 32-bit register) General source register (address register or 32-bit register) General register (32-bit register) Destination operand Source operand Program counter Stack pointer Condition code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C (carry) flag in CCR Displacement Transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from the state on the left to the state on the right Addition of the operands on both sides Subtraction of the operand on the right from the operand on the left Multiplication of the operands on both sides Division of the operand on the left by the operand on the right Logical AND of the operands on both sides Logical OR of the operands on both sides Exclusive logical OR of the operands on both sides NOT (logical complement) Contents of operand Note: General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L) and 16-bit registers (R0 to R7 and E0 to E7). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 753 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Condition Code Notation Symbol Description Changed according to execution result Undetermined (no guaranteed value) Cleared to 0 Set to 1 Not affected by execution of the instruction Varies depending on conditions, described in notes * 0 1 -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 754 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Table A.1 Instruction Set 1. Data transfer instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code -- Mnemonic MOV.B #xx:8, Rd MOV.B Rs, Rd MOV.B @ERs, Rd MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd MOV.B @ERs+, Rd Operation #xx:8 Rd8 I HN Z V C B B B B 2 2 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 4 6 Rs8 Rd8 @ERs Rd8 @(d:16, ERs) Rd8 @(d:24, ERs) Rd8 2 @ERs Rd8 ERs32+1 ERs32 2 4 6 2 4 @aa:8 Rd8 @aa:16 Rd8 @aa:24 Rd8 Rs8 @ERd Rs8 @(d:16, ERd) Rs8 @(d:24, ERd) 2 ERd321 ERd32 Rs8 @ERd 2 4 6 Rs8 @aa:8 Rs8 @aa:16 Rs8 @aa:24 #xx:16 Rd16 B 8 10 B 6 MOV.B @aa:8, Rd MOV.B @aa:16, Rd MOV.B @aa:24, Rd MOV.B Rs, @ERd MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @ERd B B B B B 4 6 8 4 6 B 8 10 B 6 MOV.B Rs, @aa:8 MOV.B Rs, @aa:16 MOV.B Rs, @aa:24 MOV.W #xx:16, Rd MOV.W Rs, Rd MOV.W @ERs, Rd MOV.W @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.W @(d:24, ERs), Rd B B B W4 W W W 2 2 4 4 6 8 4 2 4 6 Rs16 Rd16 @ERs Rd16 @(d:16, ERs) Rd16 @(d:24, ERs) Rd16 2 @ERs Rd16 ERs32+2 @ERd32 4 @aa:16 Rd16 W 8 10 MOV.W @ERs+, Rd W 6 MOV.W @aa:16, Rd W 6 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 755 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Appendix A Instruction Set Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code -- Mnemonic Operation @aa:24 Rd16 Rs16 @ERd I HN Z V C MOV.W @aa:24, Rd W MOV.W Rs, @ERd W 2 4 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 4 6 MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, W ERd) MOV.W Rs, @(d:24, W ERd) MOV.W Rs, @-ERd W Rs16 @(d:16, ERd) Rs16 @(d:24, ERd) 2 ERd32-2 ERd32 Rs16 @ERd 4 6 Rs16 @aa:16 Rs16 @aa:24 #xx:32 Rd32 8 10 6 MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 MOV.W Rs, @aa:24 MOV.L #xx:32, Rd MOV.L ERs, ERd MOV.L @ERs, ERd W W L L L 6 2 4 6 6 8 6 2 8 10 ERs32 ERd32 @ERs ERd32 MOV.L @(d:16, ERs), L ERd MOV.L @(d:24, ERs), L ERd MOV.L @ERs+, ERd L @(d:16, ERs) ERd32 @(d:24, ERs) ERd32 4 @ERs ERd32 ERs32+4 ERs32 6 8 @aa:16 ERd32 @aa:24 ERd32 ERs32 @ERd 10 14 10 MOV.L @aa:16, ERd L MOV.L @aa:24, ERd L MOV.L ERs, @ERd L 4 6 10 12 8 10 MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, L ERd) MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, L ERd) MOV.L ERs, @-ERd L ERs32 @(d:16, ERd) ERs32 @(d:24, ERd) 4 ERd32-4 ERd32 ERs32 @ERd 6 8 ERs32 @aa:16 ERs32 @aa:24 2 @SP Rn16 SP+2 SP 4 @SP ERn32 SP+4 SP 10 14 10 MOV.L ERs, @aa:16 L MOV.L ERs, @aa:24 L POP.W Rn W 10 12 6 POP.L ERn L 10 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 756 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Appendix A Instruction Set Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) No. of States*1 @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code Mnemonic PUSH.W Rn Operation I HN Z V C PUSH.L ERn L 4 SP-4 SP ERn32 @SP 4 Cannot be used in the H8/3067 Group Cannot be used in the H8/3067 Group W 2 SP-2 SP Rn16 @SP 0 0 6 10 MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16 B Cannot be used in the H8/3067 Group Cannot be used in the H8/3067 Group B 4 2. Arithmetic instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) No. of States*1 @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code Mnemonic ADD.B #xx:8, Rd ADD.B Rs, Rd ADD.W #xx:16, Rd ADD.W Rs, Rd ADD.L #xx:32, ERd Operation Rd8+#xx:8 Rd8 I HN Z V C B B 2 2 2 2 4 2 6 Rd8+Rs8 Rd8 Rd16+#xx:16 Rd16 W4 W L 6 2 Rd16+Rs16 Rd16 ERd32+#xx:32 ERd32 (1) (2) (2) ADD.L ERs, ERd L 2 ERd32+ERs32 ERd32 Rd8+#xx:8 +C Rd8 (1) 2 ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd ADDX.B Rs, Rd ADDS.L #1, ERd ADDS.L #2, ERd ADDS.L #4, ERd INC.B Rd INC.W #1, Rd INC.W #2, Rd B B L L L B W W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (3) (3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rd8+Rs8 +C Rd8 ERd32+1 ERd32 ERd32+2 ERd32 ERd32+4 ERd32 Rd8+1 Rd8 Rd16+1 Rd16 Rd16+2 Rd16 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 757 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn -- Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn -- Appendix A Instruction Set Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code -- Mnemonic INC.L #1, ERd INC.L #2, ERd DAA Rd Operation ERd32+1 ERd32 ERd32+2 ERd32 Rd8 decimal adjust Rd8 Rd8-Rs8 Rd8 Rd16-#xx:16 Rd16 I HN Z V C L L B 2 2 2 * 2 2 2 * SUB.B Rs, Rd SUB.W #xx:16, Rd SUB.W Rs, Rd SUB.L #xx:32, ERd B W4 W L 6 2 2 4 2 6 (1) (1) (2) (2) 2 Rd16-Rs16 Rd16 ERd32-#xx:32 ERd32 SUB.L ERs, ERd L 2 ERd32-ERs32 ERd32 Rd8-#xx:8C Rd8 2 SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd SUBX.B Rs, Rd SUBS.L #1, ERd SUBS.L #2, ERd SUBS.L #4, ERd DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1, Rd DEC.W #2, Rd DEC.L #1, ERd DEC.L #2, ERd DAS.Rd B B L L L B W W L L B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (3) (3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rd8-Rs8C Rd8 ERd32-1 ERd32 ERd32-2 ERd32 ERd32-4 ERd32 Rd8-1 Rd8 Rd16-1 Rd16 Rd16-2 Rd16 ERd32-1 ERd32 ERd32-2 ERd32 Rd8 decimal adjust Rd8 * MULXU. B Rs, Rd B 2 Rd8 x Rs8 Rd16 (unsigned multiplication) Rd16 x Rs16 ERd32 (unsigned multiplication) Rd8 x Rs8 Rd16 (signed multiplication) Rd16 x Rs16 ERd32 (signed multiplication) Rd16 / Rs8 Rd16 (RdH: remainder, RdL: quotient) (unsigned division) * 14 MULXU. W Rs, ERd W 2 22 MULXS. B Rs, Rd B 4 16 MULXS. W Rs, ERd W 4 24 DIVXU. B Rs, Rd B 2 (6) (7) 14 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 758 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Appendix A Instruction Set Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code -- Mnemonic DIVXU. W Rs, ERd Operation I HN Z V C W 2 ERd32 / Rs16 ERd32 (6) (7) (Ed: remainder, Rd: quotient) (unsigned division) Rd16 / Rs8 Rd16 (RdH: remainder, RdL: quotient) (signed division) (8) (7) 22 DIVXS. B Rs, Rd B 4 16 DIVXS. W Rs, ERd W 4 ERd32 / Rs16 ERd32 (8) (7) (Ed: remainder, Rd: quotient) (signed division) 24 CMP.B #xx:8, Rd CMP.B Rs, Rd CMP.W #xx:16, Rd CMP.W Rs, Rd CMP.L #xx:32, ERd CMP.L ERs, ERd NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd EXTU.W Rd B B 2 2 Rd8-#xx:8 Rd8-Rs8 Rd16-#xx:16 2 Rd16-Rs16 ERd32-#xx:32 2 2 2 2 2 ERd32-ERs32 0-Rd8 Rd8 0-Rd16 Rd16 0-ERd32 ERd32 0 ( 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 W4 W L L B W L W 6 -- (1) -- (1) -- (2) -- (2) 0 0 0 0 0 0 EXTU.L ERd L 2 2 EXTS.W Rd W 2 ( 2 EXTS.L ERd L 2 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 759 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Appendix A Instruction Set 3. Logic instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code -- Mnemonic AND.B #xx:8, Rd AND.B Rs, Rd AND.W #xx:16, Rd AND.W Rs, Rd AND.L #xx:32, ERd AND.L ERs, ERd OR.B #xx:8, Rd OR.B Rs, Rd OR.W #xx:16, Rd OR.W Rs, Rd OR.L #xx:32, ERd OR.L ERs, ERd XOR.B #xx:8, Rd XOR.B Rs, Rd XOR.W #xx:16, Rd XOR.W Rs, Rd XOR.L #xx:32, ERd XOR.L ERs, ERd NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd Operation Rd8#xx:8 Rd8 I HN Z V C B B 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 2 Rd8Rs8 Rd8 Rd16#xx:16 Rd16 W4 W L L B B W4 W L L B B W4 W L L B W L 6 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 2 2 2 6 4 2 Rd16Rs16 Rd16 ERd32#xx:32 ERd32 ERd32ERs32 ERd32 Rd8#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8Rs8 Rd8 Rd16#xx:16 Rd16 Rd16Rs16 Rd16 ERd32#xx:32 ERd32 ERd32ERs32 ERd32 Rd8#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8Rs8 Rd8 Rd16#xx:16 Rd16 Rd16Rs16 Rd16 ERd32#xx:32 ERd32 ERd32ERs32 ERd32 Rd8 Rd8 Rd16 Rd16 Rd32 Rd32 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 760 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Appendix A Instruction Set 4. Shift instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code -- Mnemonic SHAL.B Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAR.B Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.L ERd SHLL.B Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLR.B Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.L ERd ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.L ERd ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.L ERd ROTL.B Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTR.B Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.L ERd Operation I HN Z V C B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 C MSB LSB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C MSB LSB C MSB LSB 0 MSB LSB C MSB LSB C MSB LSB C MSB LSB C MSB LSB Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 761 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 0 C Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Appendix A Instruction Set 5. Bit manipulation instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code -- Mnemonic BSET #xx:3, Rd BSET #xx:3, @ERd BSET #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET Rn, Rd BSET Rn, @ERd BSET Rn, @aa:8 BCLR #xx:3, Rd BCLR #xx:3, @ERd BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8 BCLR Rn, Rd BCLR Rn, @ERd BCLR Rn, @aa:8 BNOT #xx:3, Rd Operation (#xx:3 of Rd8) 1 I HN Z V C B B B B B B B B B B B B B 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 (#xx:3 of @ERd) 1 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 1 (Rn8 of Rd8) 1 (Rn8 of @ERd) 1 (Rn8 of @aa:8) 1 (#xx:3 of Rd8) 0 (#xx:3 of @ERd) 0 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 0 (Rn8 of Rd8) 0 (Rn8 of @ERd) 0 (Rn8 of @aa:8) 0 (#xx:3 of Rd8) (#xx:3 of Rd8) BNOT #xx:3, @ERd B 4 (#xx:3 of @ERd) (#xx:3 of @ERd) 4 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) (#xx:3 of @aa:8) (Rn8 of Rd8) (Rn8 of Rd8) 8 BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8 B 8 BNOT Rn, Rd B 2 2 BNOT Rn, @ERd B 4 (Rn8 of @ERd) (Rn8 of @ERd) 4 (Rn8 of @aa:8) (Rn8 of @aa:8) (#xx:3 of Rd8) Z 8 BNOT Rn, @aa:8 B 8 BTST #xx:3, Rd BTST #xx:3, @ERd BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST Rn, Rd BTST Rn, @ERd BTST Rn, @aa:8 BLD #xx:3, Rd B B B B B B B 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 (#xx:3 of @ERd) Z (#xx:3 of @aa:8) Z (Rn8 of @Rd8) Z (Rn8 of @ERd) Z (Rn8 of @aa:8) Z (#xx:3 of Rd8) C Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 762 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Appendix A Instruction Set Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code -- Mnemonic BLD #xx:3, @ERd BLD #xx:3, @aa:8 BILD #xx:3, Rd BILD #xx:3, @ERd BILD #xx:3, @aa:8 BST #xx:3, Rd BST #xx:3, @ERd BST #xx:3, @aa:8 BIST #xx:3, Rd BIST #xx:3, @ERd BIST #xx:3, @aa:8 BAND #xx:3, Rd BAND #xx:3, @ERd BAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BIAND #xx:3, Rd Operation (#xx:3 of @ERd) C I HN Z V C B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 6 2 6 6 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C 4 4 (#xx:3 of @ERd) C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C (#xx:3 of Rd8) 4 4 C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C (#xx:3 of Rd8) 4 4 C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C 4 4 C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C BIAND #xx:3, @ERd B BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 B BOR #xx:3, Rd BOR #xx:3, @ERd BOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BIOR #xx:3, Rd BIOR #xx:3, @ERd BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BXOR #xx:3, Rd BXOR #xx:3, @ERd BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BIXOR #xx:3, Rd B B B B B B B B B B 2 2 2 2 4 4 C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C 4 4 C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C 4 4 C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C 4 4 C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd B BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 B 4 4 C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) C C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 763 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Appendix A Instruction Set 6. Branching instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) Mnemonic BRA d:8 (BT d:8) BRA d:16 (BT d:16) BRN d:8 (BF d:8) BRN d:16 (BF d:16) BHI d:8 BHI d:16 BLS d:8 BLS d:16 BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) Branch Operation Condition If condition Always is true then PC PC+d else Never next; CZ=0 @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 CZ=1 C=0 BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) C=1 BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) BNE d:8 BNE d:16 BEQ d:8 BEQ d:16 BVC d:8 BVC d:16 BVS d:8 BVS d:16 BPL d:8 BPL d:16 BMI d:8 BMI d:16 BGE d:8 BGE d:16 BLT d:8 BLT d:16 BGT d:8 BGT d:16 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 NV = 0 NV = 1 Z (NV) =0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 764 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn -- Appendix A Instruction Set Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) No. of States*1 @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size @(d, ERn) Mnemonic BLE d:8 BLE d:16 Branch Operation Condition @aa Condition Code I HN Z V C 2 4 If condition Z (NV) = 1 is true then PC PC+d else next; PC ERn 8 6 4 6 JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 JMP @@aa:8 BSR d:8 2 4 2 2 4 6 10 8 PC aa:24 PC @aa:8 PC @SP PC PC+d:8 PC @SP PC PC+d:16 PC @SP PC @ERn BSR d:16 4 8 10 JSR @ERn 2 6 JSR @aa:24 4 PC @SP PC @aa:24 2 PC @SP PC @aa:8 2 PC @SP+ 8 10 JSR @@aa:8 8 12 RTS 8 10 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 765 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced 8 @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn -- Appendix A Instruction Set 7. System control instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code -- Mnemonic TRAPA #x:2 Operation I HN Z V C -- 2 PC @SP CCR @SP 1 14 16 RTE -- 10 SLEEP -- Transition to powerdown state 2 LDC #xx:8, CCR LDC Rs, CCR LDC @ERs, CCR LDC @(d:16, ERs), CCR LDC @(d:24, ERs), CCR LDC @ERs+, CCR B B W W 2 2 4 6 #xx:8 CCR Rs8 CCR @ERs CCR @(d:16, ERs) CCR @(d:24, ERs) CCR 4 @ERs CCR ERs32+2 ERs32 6 8 2 4 6 @aa:16 CCR @aa:24 CCR CCR Rd8 CCR @ERd CCR @(d:16, ERd) CCR @(d:24, ERd) 4 ERd322 ERd32 CCR @ERd 6 8 CCR @aa:16 CCR @aa:24 CCR#xx:8 CCR CCR#xx:8 CCR CCR#xx:8 CCR 2 PC PC+2 2 2 6 8 W 10 12 W 8 LDC @aa:16, CCR LDC @aa:24, CCR STC CCR, Rd STC CCR, @ERd STC CCR, @(d:16, ERd) STC CCR, @(d:24, ERd) STC CCR, @ERd W W B W W 8 10 2 6 8 W 10 12 W 8 STC CCR, @aa:16 STC CCR, @aa:24 ANDC #xx:8, CCR ORC #xx:8, CCR XORC #xx:8, CCR NOP W W B B B -- 2 2 2 8 10 2 2 2 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 766 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn Appendix A Instruction Set 8. Block transfer instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) No. of States*1 @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size @(d, ERn) @aa Condition Code Mnemonic EEPMOV. B Operation I HN Z V C -- 4 if R4L 0 8+ repeat @R5 @R6 4n*2 R5+1 R5 R6+1 R6 R4L-1 R4L until R4L=0 else next; 4 if R4 0 repeat @R5 @R6 R5+1 R5 R6+1 R6 R4-1 R4 until R4=0 else next; 8+ 4n*2 EEPMOV. W -- Notes: 1. The number of states is the number of states required for execution when the instruction and its operands are located in on-chip memory. For other cases see section A.3. 2. n is the value set in register R4L or R4. (1) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0. (2) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0. (3) Retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. (4) Set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value. (5) The number of states required for execution of an instruction that transfers data in synchronization with the E clock is variable. (6) Set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. (7) Set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. (8) Set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 767 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Advanced @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn #xx Rn -- A.2 Table A.2 Instruction code: Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 1. 4 ORC ADD SUB Table A.2 Table A.2 (2) (2) CMP SUBX OR.B XOR.B AND.B Table A.2 (2) XORC ANDC LDC Table A.2 Table A.2 (2) (2) MOV ADDX 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Table A.2 (2) Table A.2 (2) 1st byte 2nd byte AH AL BH BL Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 0. 3 LDC AL AH 0 1 2 0 NOP Table A.2 (2) STC Appendix A Instruction Set 1 Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.2 (2) (2) (2) (2) 2 MOV.B Operation Code Maps Operation Code Map (1) 3 BLS BCC RTS BST OR BTST BOR MOV BIOR ADD ADDX CMP SUBX OR XOR AND MOV BIXOR BIAND BILD BXOR BAND BIST BLD XOR AND BSR RTE TRAPA Table A.2 (2) JMP MOV Table A.2 Table A.2 EEPMOV (2) (2) Table A.2 (3) BCS BNE BNQ BVC BPL BMI DIVXU BVS BGE BSR BLT BGT JSR BLE Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 768 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 4 BRA BRN BHI 5 MULXU DIVXU MULXU 6 BSET BNOT BCLR 7 8 9 A B C D E F Table A.2 Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte AH AL BH BL 2 LDC/STC ADD INC ADDS INC INC INC SLEEP Table A.2 Table A.2 (3) (3) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Table A.2 (3) BH AH AL 0 1 01 MOV 0A INC 0B ADDS Operation Code Map (2) 0F SHLL SHAL SHAR ROTL ROTR EXTU EXTU NEG SHLR ROTXL ROTXR NOT DAA MOV SHAL SHAR ROTL ROTR NEG EXTS EXTS 10 SHLL 11 SHLR 12 ROTXL 13 ROTXR 17 NOT 1A DEC DEC DEC SUBS SUB DEC DEC 1B SUBS 1F BHI SUB OR OR SUB XOR XOR BLS BCC BCS DAS BNE AND AND BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI CMP BGE BLT BGT BLE 58 BRA BRN 79 MOV ADD CMP Appendix A Instruction Set Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 769 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 7A MOV ADD CMP Table A.2 Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte AH AL BH BL CH CL DH DL Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 0. Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 1. CL 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Appendix A Instruction Set AH ALBH BLCH LDC STC STC LDC LDC STC 0 1 01406 LDC STC Operation Code Map (3) 01C05 DIVXS OR BTST BOR BTST BIOR BIST BIXOR BIAND BILD BST BXOR BAND BLD XOR AND MULXS MULXS Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 770 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 BTST BOR BTST BIOR BIXOR BIAND BILD BST BIST BXOR BAND BLD 01D05 DIVIXS 01F06 7Cr06 *1 7Cr07 *1 7Dr06 *1 BSET BNOT BCLR 7Dr07 *1 BSET BNOT BCLR 7Eaa6 *2 7Eaa7 *2 7Faa6 *2 BSET BNOT BCLR 7Faa7 *2 BSET BNOT BCLR Notes: 1. r is the register designation field. 2. aa is the absolute address field. Appendix A Instruction Set A.3 Number of States Required for Execution The tables in this section can be used to calculate the number of states required for instruction execution by the H8/300H CPU. Table A.4 indicates the number of instruction fetch, data read/write, and other cycles occurring in each instruction. Table A.3 indicates the number of states required per cycle according to the bus size. The number of states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated from these two tables as follows: Number of states = I x SI + J x SJ + K x SK + L x SL + M x SM + N x SN Examples of Calculation of Number of States Required for Execution Examples: Advanced mode, stack located in external address space, on-chip supporting modules accessed with 8-bit bus width, external devices accessed in three states with one wait state and 16-bit bus width. BSET #0, @FFFFC7:8 From table A.4, I = L = 2 and J = K = M = N = 0 From table A.3, SI = 4 and SL = 3 Number of states = 2 x 4 + 2 x 3 = 14 JSR @@30 From table A.4, I = J = K = 2 and L = M = N = 0 From table A.3, SI = SJ = SK = 4 Number of states = 2 x 4 + 2 x 4 + 2 x 4 = 24 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 771 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Table A.3 Number of States per Cycle Access Conditions On-Chip Supporting Module External Device 8-Bit Bus 2-State Access 4 3-State Access 6 + 2m 16-Bit Bus 2-State Access 2 3-State Access 3+m Execution State (Cycle) Instruction fetch Stack operation Byte data access Word data access Internal operation SI SK SL SM On-Chip 8-Bit Memory Bus 2 6 16-Bit Bus 3 Branch address read SJ 3 6 2 4 3+m 6 + 2m SN 1 Legend m: Number of wait states inserted into external device access Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 772 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Table A.4 Number of Cycles per Instruction Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Instruction Mnemonic ADD ADD.B #xx:8, Rd ADD.B Rs, Rd ADD.W #xx:16, Rd ADD.W Rs, Rd ADD.L #xx:32, ERd ADD.L ERs, ERd ADDS #1/2/4, ERd ADDX #xx:8, Rd ADDX Rs, Rd AND.B #xx:8, Rd AND.B Rs, Rd AND.W #xx:16, Rd AND.W Rs, Rd AND.L #xx:32, ERd AND.L ERs, ERd ANDC #xx:8, CCR BAND #xx:3, Rd BAND #xx:3, @ERd BAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BRA d:8 (BT d:8) BRN d:8 (BF d:8) BHI d:8 BLS d:8 BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) BNE d:8 BEQ d:8 BVC d:8 BVS d:8 BPL d:8 BMI d:8 BGE d:8 BLT d:8 BGT d:8 BLE d:8 ADDS ADDX AND ANDC BAND Bcc Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 773 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Instruction Mnemonic Bcc BRA d:16 (BT d:16) BRN d:16 (BF d:16) BHI d:16 BLS d:16 BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) BNE d:16 BEQ d:16 BVC d:16 BVS d:16 BPL d:16 BMI d:16 BGE d:16 BLT d:16 BGT d:16 BLE d:16 BCLR #xx:3, Rd BCLR #xx:3, @ERd BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8 BCLR Rn, Rd BCLR Rn, @ERd BCLR Rn, @aa:8 BIAND #xx:3, Rd BIAND #xx:3, @ERd BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BILD #xx:3, Rd BILD #xx:3, @ERd BILD #xx:3, @aa:8 BIOR #xx:8, Rd BIOR #xx:8, @ERd BIOR #xx:8, @aa:8 BIST #xx:3, Rd BIST #xx:3, @ERd BIST #xx:3, @aa:8 BIXOR #xx:3, Rd BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BLD #xx:3, Rd BLD #xx:3, @ERd BLD #xx:3, @aa:8 BCLR BIAND BILD BIOR BIST BIXOR BLD Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 774 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 Instruction Mnemonic BNOT BNOT #xx:3, Rd BNOT #xx:3, @ERd BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8 BNOT Rn, Rd BNOT Rn, @ERd BNOT Rn, @aa:8 BOR #xx:3, Rd BOR #xx:3, @ERd BOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET #xx:3, Rd BSET #xx:3, @ERd BSET #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET Rn, Rd BSET Rn, @ERd BSET Rn, @aa:8 BSR d:8 Normal BOR BSET BSR Advanced 2 BSR d:16 Normal 2 Advanced 2 BST BST #xx:3, Rd BST #xx:3, @ERd BST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST #xx:3, Rd BTST #xx:3, @ERd BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST Rn, Rd BTST Rn, @ERd BTST Rn, @aa:8 BXOR #xx:3, Rd BXOR #xx:3, @ERd BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 CMP.B #xx:8, Rd CMP.B Rs, Rd CMP.W #xx:16, Rd CMP.W Rs, Rd CMP.L #xx:32, ERd CMP.L ERs, ERd DAA Rd DAS Rd 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 BTST BXOR CMP DAA DAS Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 775 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2n + 2*1 2n + 2*1 12 20 12 20 Instruction Mnemonic DEC DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1/2, Rd DEC.L #1/2, ERd DIVXS.B Rs, Rd DIVXS.W Rs, ERd DIVXU.B Rs, Rd DIVXU.W Rs, ERd EEPMOV.B EEPMOV.W EXTS.W Rd EXTS.L ERd EXTU.W Rd EXTU.L ERd INC.B Rd INC.W #1/2, Rd INC.L #1/2, ERd JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 JMP @@aa:8 Normal DIVXS DIVXU EEPMOV EXTS EXTU INC JMP Advanced 2 JSR JSR @ERn Normal 2 Advanced 2 JSR @aa:24 Normal 2 Advanced 2 JSR @@aa:8 Normal 2 Advanced 2 LDC LDC #xx:8, CCR LDC Rs, CCR LDC @ERs, CCR LDC @(d:16, ERs), CCR LDC @(d:24, ERs), CCR LDC @ERs+, CCR LDC @aa:16, CCR LDC @aa:24, CCR 1 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 776 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 1 1 1 2 4 1 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 4 Instruction Mnemonic MOV MOV.B #xx:8, Rd MOV.B Rs, Rd MOV.B @ERs, Rd MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd MOV.B @ERs+, Rd MOV.B @aa:8, Rd MOV.B @aa:16, Rd MOV.B @aa:24, Rd MOV.B Rs, @ERd MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @-ERd MOV.B Rs, @aa:8 MOV.B Rs, @aa:16 MOV.B Rs, @aa:24 MOV.W #xx:16, Rd MOV.W Rs, Rd MOV.W @ERs, Rd MOV.W @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.W @(d:24, ERs), Rd MOV.W @ERs+, Rd MOV.W @aa:16, Rd MOV.W @aa:24, Rd MOV.W Rs, @ERd MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.W Rs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.W Rs, @-ERd MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 MOV.W Rs, @aa:24 MOV.L #xx:32, ERd MOV.L ERs, ERd MOV.L @ERs, ERd MOV.L @(d:16, ERs), ERd MOV.L @(d:24, ERs), ERd MOV.L @ERs+, ERd MOV.L @aa:16, ERd MOV.L @aa:24, ERd MOV.L ERs, @ERd MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.L ERs, @-ERd MOV.L ERs, @aa:16 MOV.L ERs, @aa:24 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 777 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N 2 1 1 12 20 12 20 Instruction Mnemonic MOVFPE MOVTPE MULXS MULXU NEG MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd*2 MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16*2 2 MULXS.B Rs, Rd MULXS.W Rs, ERd MULXU.B Rs, Rd MULXU.W Rs, ERd NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd NOP NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd OR.B #xx:8, Rd OR.B Rs, Rd OR.W #xx:16, Rd OR.W Rs, Rd OR.L #xx:32, ERd OR.L ERs, ERd ORC #xx:8, CCR POP.W Rn POP.L ERn PUSH.W Rn PUSH.L ERn ROTL.B Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTR.B Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.L ERd ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.L ERd ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.L ERd RTE 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 NOP NOT OR ORC POP PUSH ROTL 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 ROTR ROTXL ROTXR RTE 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 778 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix A Instruction Set Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation I J K L M N Normal 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 Instruction Mnemonic RTS SHAL RTS SHAL.B Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAR.B Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.L ERd SHLL.B Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLR.B Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.L ERd SLEEP Advanced 2 SHAR SHLL SHLR SLEEP STC 1 STC CCR, Rd 2 STC CCR, @ERd STC CCR, @(d:16, ERd) 3 STC CCR, @(d:24, ERd) 5 2 STC CCR, @-ERd 3 STC CCR, @aa:16 4 STC CCR, @aa:24 SUB.B Rs, Rd SUB.W #xx:16, Rd SUB.W Rs, Rd SUB.L #xx:32, ERd SUB.L ERs, ERd SUBS #1/2/4, ERd SUBX #xx:8, Rd SUBX Rs, Rd TRAPA #x:2 Normal XOR.B #xx:8, Rd XOR.B Rs, Rd XOR.W #xx:16, Rd XOR.W Rs, Rd XOR.L #xx:32, ERd XOR.L ERs, ERd XORC #xx:8, CCR 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 SUB SUBS SUBX TRAPA XOR 4 4 Advanced 2 XORC Notes: 1. n is the value set in register R4L or R4. The source and destination are accessed n + 1 times each. 2. Not available in the H8/3067 Group. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 779 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Appendix B Internal I/O Registers B.1 Address (Low) H'EE000 H'EE001 H'EE002 H'EE003 H'EE004 H'EE005 H'EE006 H'EE007 H'EE008 H'EE009 H'EE00A H'EE00B H'EE00C H'EE00D H'EE00E H'EE00F H'EE010 H'EE011 H'EE012 H'EE013 H'EE014 H'EE015 H'EE016 H'EE017 H'EE018 H'EE019 H'EE01A H'EE01B H'EE01C H'EE01D H'EE01E H'EE01F Addresses Data Bit Names Register Bus Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 P1DDR P2DDR P3DDR P4DDR P5DDR P6DDR -- P8DDR P9DDR PADDR PBDDR -- -- -- -- -- -- MDCR SYSCR BRCR ISCR IER ISR -- IPRA IPRB 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Module Name Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 P11DDR P21DDR P31DDR P41DDR P51DDR P61DDR -- P81DDR P91DDR PA1DDR PB1DDR -- -- -- -- -- -- MDS1 SSOE -- IRQ1SC IRQ1E IRQ1F -- IPRA1 IPRB1 -- DIV1 Bit 0 P10DDR P20DDR P30DDR P40DDR P50DDR P60DDR -- P80DDR P90DDR PA0DDR PB0DDR -- -- -- -- -- -- MDS0 RAME BRLE IRQ0SC IRQ0E IRQ0F -- IPRA0 -- DASTE DIV0 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P53DDR P52DDR -- -- P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR -- -- -- -- -- -- P84DDR P83DDR P82DDR Port 8 Port 9 Port A Port B P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR PA7DDR PA6DDR PA5DDR PA4DDR PA3DDR PA2DDR PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SSBY A23E -- -- -- -- IPRA7 IPRB7 -- -- PSTOP -- -- -- -- -- -- -- STS2 A22E -- -- -- -- IPRA6 IPRB6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- STS1 A21E -- -- -- -- -- -- -- STS0 A20E -- -- -- -- -- -- -- UE -- -- -- -- -- -- -- MDS2 NMIEG -- System control Bus controller Interrupt controller IRQ5SC IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ5E IRQ5F -- IPRA5 IPRB5 -- -- -- IRQ4E IRQ4F -- IPRA4 -- -- -- -- IRQ3E IRQ3F -- IPRA3 IPRB3 -- -- -- IRQ2E IRQ2F -- IPRA2 IPRB2 -- -- DASTCR 8 DIVCR 8 D/A converter MSTCRH 8 MSTCRL 8 ADRCR*1 8 CSCR 8 System MSTPH2 MSTPH1 MSTPH0 control MSTPL0 ADRCTL Bus controller -- MSTPL7 -- -- CS7E -- CS6E MSTPL5 MSTPL4 MSTPL3 MSTPL2 -- -- CS5E -- CS4E -- -- -- -- -- -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 780 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Register Bus Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 ABWCR ASTCR WCRH WCRL BCR -- DRCRA DRCRB 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ABW7 AST7 W71 W31 ICIS1 -- DRAS2 MXC1 CMF ABW6 AST6 W70 W30 ICIS0 -- DRAS1 MXC0 CMIE Address (Low) H'EE020 H'EE021 H'EE022 H'EE023 H'EE024 H'EE025 H'EE026 H'EE027 H'EE028 H'EE029 H'EE02A H'EE02B H'EE02C H'EE02D H'EE02E H'EE02F H'EE030 H'EE031 H'EE032 H'EE033 H'EE034 H'EE035 H'EE036 H'EE037 H'EE038 H'EE039 H'EE03A H'EE03B H'EE03C H'EE03D H'EE03E H'EE03F Bit 5 ABW5 AST5 W61 W21 Bit 4 ABW4 AST4 W60 W20 Bit 3 ABW3 AST3 W51 W11 Bit 2 ABW2 AST2 W50 W10 Bit 1 ABW1 AST1 W41 W01 RDEA -- SRFMD RCW -- Bit 0 ABW0 AST0 W40 W00 WAITE -- RFSHE RLW -- Module Name Bus controller BROME BRSTS1 BRSTS0 -- -- DRAS0 CSEL CKS2 -- -- -- BE -- RDM TPC -- RCYCE -- CKS1 CKS0 DRAM Interface RTMCSR 8 RTCNT RTCOR 8 8 Reserved area (access prohibited) FLMCR*2 8 FWE SWE ESU PSU EV PV E P Flash memory Reserved area (access prohibited) EBR*2 8 EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 Reserved area (access prohibited) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P2PCR -- P4PCR P5PCR 8 8 8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P27PCR -- P41PCR P51PCR -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P20PCR -- P40PCR P50PCR Port 4 Port 5 Port 2 P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR -- -- -- -- -- -- P47PCR P46PCR P45PCR P44PCR P43PCR P42PCR -- -- -- -- P53PCR P52PCR Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 781 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Register Bus Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Address (Low) H'EE040 H'EE041 H'EE042 H'EE043 H'EE044 H'EE045 H'EE046 H'EE047 H'EE048 H'EE049 H'EE04A H'EE04B H'EE04C H'EE04D H'EE04E H'EE04F H'EE050 H'EE051 H'EE052 H'EE053 H'EE054 H'EE055 H'EE056 H'EE057 H'EE058 H'EE059 H'EE05A H'EE05B H'EE05C H'EE05D H'EE05E H'EE05F Bit 5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Module Name Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 782 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Register Bus Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Address (Low) H'EE060 H'EE061 H'EE062 H'EE063 H'EE064 H'EE065 H'EE066 H'EE067 H'EE068 H'EE069 H'EE06A H'EE06B H'EE06C H'EE06D H'EE06E H'EE06F H'EE070 H'EE071 H'EE072 H'EE073 H'EE074 H'EE075 H'EE076 H'EE077 H'EE078 H'EE079 H'EE07A H'EE07B H'EE07C H'EE07D H'EE07E H'EE07F H'EE080 H'EE081 Bit 5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Module Name Reserved area (access prohibited) RAMCR*3 8 -- -- -- -- RAMS RAM2 RAM1 -- Reserved area (access prohibited) Flash memory* FLMSR*3 8 FLER -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Reserved area (access prohibited) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 783 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Bus Width Bit 7 Bit 6 8 8 8 8 Address (Low) H'FFF20 H'FFF21 H'FFF22 H'FFF23 H'FFF24 H'FFF25 H'FFF26 H'FFF27 Register Name MAR0AR MAR0AE MAR0AH MAR0AL Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name DMAC channel 0A ETCR0AH 8 ETCR0AL 8 IOAR0A DTCR0A 8 8 DTE DTE DTSZ DTSZ DTID SAID RPE SAIDE DTIE DTIE DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 Short address mode DTS2A DTS1A DTS0A Full address mode DMAC channel 0B H'FFF28 H'FFF29 H'FFF2A H'FFF2B H'FFF2C H'FFF2D H'FFF2E H'FFF2F MAR0BR MAR0BE MAR0BH MAR0BL 8 8 8 8 ETCR0BH 8 ETCR0BL 8 IOAR0B DTCR0B 8 8 DTE DTME DTSZ -- DTID DAID RPE DAIDE DTIE TMS DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 Short address mode DTS2B DTS1B DTS0B Full address mode DMAC channel 1A H'FFF30 H'FFF31 H'FFF32 H'FFF33 H'FFF34 H'FFF35 H'FFF36 H'FFF37 MAR1AR MAR1AE MAR1AH MAR1AL 8 8 8 8 ETCR1AH 8 ETCR1AL 8 IOAR1A DTCR1A 8 8 DTE DTE DTSZ DTSZ DTID SAID RPE SAIDE DTIE DTIE DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 Short address mode DTS2A DTS1A DTS0A Full address mode DMAC channel 1B H'FFF38 H'FFF39 H'FFF3A H'FFF3B H'FFF3C H'FFF3D H'FFF3E H'FFF3F MAR1BR MAR1BE MAR1BH MAR1BL 8 8 8 8 ETCR1BH 8 ETCR1BL 8 IOAR1B DTCR1B 8 8 DTE DTME DTSZ -- DTID DAID RPE DAIDE DTIE TMS DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 Short address mode DTS2B DTS1B DTS0B Full address mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 784 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Register Bus Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Address (Low) H'FFF40 H'FFF41 H'FFF42 H'FFF43 H'FFF44 H'FFF45 H'FFF46 H'FFF47 H'FFF48 H'FFF49 H'FFF4A H'FFF4B H'FFF4C H'FFF4D H'FFF4E H'FFF4F H'FFF50 H'FFF51 H'FFF52 H'FFF53 H'FFF54 H'FFF55 H'FFF56 H'FFF57 H'FFF58 H'FFF59 H'FFF5A H'FFF5B H'FFF5C H'FFF5D H'FFF5E H'FFF5F Bit 5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bit 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Module Name Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 785 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Register Bus Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 TSTR TSNC TMDR TOLR TISRA TISRB TISRC 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- MDF -- IMIEA2 IMIEB2 OVIE2 Address (Low) H'FFF60 H'FFF61 H'FFF62 H'FFF63 H'FFF64 H'FFF65 H'FFF66 H'FFF67 H'FFF68 H'FFF69 H'FFF6A H'FFF6B H'FFF6C H'FFF6D H'FFF6E H'FFF6F H'FFF70 H'FFF71 H'FFF72 H'FFF73 H'FFF74 H'FFF75 H'FFF76 H'FFF77 H'FFF78 H'FFF79 H'FFF7A H'FFF7B H'FFF7C H'FFF7D H'FFF7E H'FFF7F Bit 5 -- -- FDIR TOB2 IMIEA1 IMIEB1 OVIE1 Bit 4 -- -- -- TOA2 IMIEA0 IMIEB0 OVIE0 Bit 3 -- -- -- TOB1 -- -- -- Bit 2 STR2 SYNC2 PWM2 TOA1 IMFA2 IMFB2 OVF2 Bit 1 STR1 SYNC1 PWM1 TOB0 IMFA1 IMFB1 OVF1 Bit 0 STR0 SYNC0 PWM0 TOA0 IMFA0 IMFB0 OVF0 Module Name 16-bit timer, (all channels) TCR0 TIOR0 8 8 -- -- CCLR1 IOB2 CCLR0 IOB1 CKEG1 IOB0 CKEG0 -- TPSC2 IOA2 TPSC1 IOA1 TPSC0 IOA0 16-bit timer channel 0 TCNT0H 16 TCNT0L GRA0H GRA0L GRB0H GRB0L TCR1 TIOR1 8 8 -- -- CCLR1 IOB2 CCLR0 IOB1 CKEG1 IOB0 CKEG0 -- TPSC2 IOA2 TPSC1 IOA1 TPSC0 IOA0 16-bit timer channel 1 16 16 TCNT1H 16 TCNT1L GRA1H GRA1L GRB1H GRB1L TCR2 TIOR2 8 8 -- -- CCLR1 IOB2 CCLR0 IOB1 CKEG1 IOB0 CKEG0 -- TPSC2 IOA2 TPSC1 IOA1 TPSC0 IOA0 16-bit timer channel 2 16 16 TCNT2H 16 TCNT2L GRA2H GRA2L GRB2H GRB2L 16 16 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 786 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Register Bus Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 TCR0 TCR1 TCSR0 TCSR1 TCORA0 TCORA1 TCORB0 TCORB1 TCNT0 TCNT1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 -- -- 8 8 -- WRST CMIEB CMIEB CMFB CMFB -- RSTOE CMIEA CMIEA CMFA CMFA -- -- OVIE OVIE OVF OVF -- -- CCLR1 CCLR1 -- ICE -- -- CCLR0 CCLR0 OIS3 OIS3 -- -- CKS2 CKS2 OIS2 OIS2 -- -- CKS1 CKS1 OS1 OS1 -- -- CKS0 CKS0 OS0 OS0 8-bit timer channels 2 and 3 OVF -- -- WT/IT -- -- TME -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CKS2 -- -- CKS1 -- -- CKS0 WDT CMIEB CMIEB CMFB CMFB CMIEA CMIEA CMFA CMFA Address (Low) H'FFF80 H'FFF81 H'FFF82 H'FFF83 H'FFF84 H'FFF85 H'FFF86 H'FFF87 H'FFF88 H'FFF89 Bit 5 OVIE OVIE OVF OVF Bit 4 CCLR1 CCLR1 ADTE ICE Bit 3 CCLR0 CCLR0 OIS3 OIS3 Bit 2 CKS2 CKS2 OIS2 OIS2 Bit 1 CKS1 CKS1 OS1 OS1 Bit 0 CKS0 CKS0 OS0 OS0 Module Name 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 H'FFF8A -- H'FFF8B -- H'FFF8C TCSR*4 H'FFF8D TCNT*4 H'FFF8E -- H'FFF8F RSTCSR* 8 4 H'FFF90 H'FFF91 H'FFF92 H'FFF93 H'FFF94 H'FFF95 H'FFF96 H'FFF97 H'FFF98 H'FFF99 TCR2 TCR3 TCSR2 TCSR3 TCORA2 TCORA3 TCORB2 TCORB3 TCNT2 TCNT3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FFF9A -- H'FFF9B -- H'FFF9C DADR0 H'FFF9D DADR1 H'FFF9E DACR H'FFF9F -- 8 8 8 8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- D/A converter DAOE1 -- DAOE0 -- DAE -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 787 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Address Register Bus (Low) Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 H'FFFA0 TPMR H'FFFA1 TPCR H'FFFA2 NDERB H'FFFA3 NDERA 5 H'FFFA4 NDRB* H'FFFA5 NDRA* H'FFFA6 NDRB* H'FFFA7 NDRA* H'FFFA8 H'FFFA9 H'FFFAA H'FFFAB H'FFFAC H'FFFAD H'FFFAE H'FFFAF H'FFFB0 SMR H'FFFB1 BRR H'FFFB2 SCR H'FFFB3 TDR H'FFFB4 SSR H'FFFB5 RDR H'FFFB6 SCMR H'FFFB8 SMR H'FFFB9 BRR H'FFFBA SCR H'FFFBB TDR H'FFFBC SSR H'FFFBD RDR H'FFFBE SCMR 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 -- -- -- -- SDIR SINV -- SMIF TDRE RDRF ORER FER/ERS PER TEND MPB MPBT TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 -- C/A -- CHR -- PE -- O/E SDIR STOP SINV MP -- CKS1 SMIF CKS0 SCI channel 1 TDRE RDRF ORER FER/ERS PER TEND MPB MPBT TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 C/A CHR PE O/E STOP MP CKS1 CKS0 SCI channel 0 5 Bit 5 -- Bit 4 -- Bit 3 G3NOV Bit 2 G2NOV Bit 1 G1NOV Bit 0 G0NOV NDER8 NDER0 NDER8 -- NDER0 -- -- NDER8 -- NDER0 Module Name TPC 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 -- -- G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 NDER7 NDER6 NDER5 NDER4 NDER3 NDER2 -- NDER2 -- -- -- NDER2 NDER1 -- NDER1 -- -- -- NDER1 NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 -- NDER7 NDER7 -- -- -- -- NDER6 NDER6 -- -- -- -- NDER5 NDER5 -- -- -- -- NDER4 NDER4 -- -- -- -- NDER3 -- -- -- NDER3 5 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 5 H'FFFB7 Reserved area (access prohibited) H'FFFBF Reserved area (access prohibited) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 788 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Register Bus Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 SMR BRR SCR TDR SSR RDR SCMR 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 -- -- -- -- SDIR SINV -- SMIF TDRE RDRF ORER FER/ER S Address (Low) H'FFFC0 H'FFFC1 H'FFFC2 H'FFFC3 H'FFFC4 H'FFFC5 H'FFFC6 H'FFFC7 H'FFFC8 H'FFFC9 H'FFFCA H'FFFCB H'FFFCC H'FFFCD H'FFFCE H'FFFCF H'FFFD0 H'FFFD1 H'FFFD2 H'FFFD3 H'FFFD4 H'FFFD5 H'FFFD6 H'FFFD7 H'FFFD8 H'FFFD9 H'FFFDA H'FFFDB H'FFFDC H'FFFDD H'FFFDE H'FFFDF Bit 5 PE Bit 4 O/E Bit 3 STOP Bit 2 MP Bit 1 CKS1 Bit 0 CKS0 Module Name SCI channel 2 C/A CHR TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 PER TEND MPB MPBT Reserved area (access prohibited) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P1DR P2DR P3DR P4DR P5DR P6DR P7DR P8DR P9DR PADR PBDR -- -- -- -- -- 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P17 P27 P37 P47 -- P67 P77 -- -- PA7 PB7 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P16 P26 P36 P46 -- P66 P76 -- -- PA6 PB6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P15 P25 P35 P45 -- P65 P75 -- P95 PA5 PB5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P14 P24 P34 P44 -- P64 P74 P84 P94 PA4 PB4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P13 P23 P33 P43 P53 P63 P73 P83 P93 PA3 PB3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P12 P22 P32 P42 P52 P62 P72 P82 P92 PA2 PB2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P11 P21 P31 P41 P51 P61 P71 P81 P91 PA1 PB1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- P10 P20 P30 P40 P50 P60 P70 P80 P90 PA0 PB0 -- -- -- -- -- Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Port6 Port7 Port8 Port9 PortA PortB Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 789 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers Data Bit Names Register Bus Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 ADDRAH 8 ADDRAL 8 ADDRBH 8 ADDRBL 8 ADDRCH 8 ADDRCL 8 ADDRDH 8 ADDRDL 8 ADCSR ADCR 8 8 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 ADF TRGE AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 ADIE -- Address (Low) H'FFFE0 H'FFFE1 H'FFFE2 H'FFFE3 H'FFFE4 H'FFFE5 H'FFFE6 H'FFFE7 H'FFFE8 H'FFFE9 Bit 5 AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- ADST -- Bit 4 AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- SCAN -- Bit 3 AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- CKS -- Bit 2 AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- CH2 -- Bit 1 AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- CH1 -- Bit 0 AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- CH0 -- Module Name A/D converter Notes: 1. The ADRCR register is provided only in the flash memory R version and mask ROM versions; it is not present in the flash memory version. 2. The FLMCR and EBR registers are used only in the flash memory and flash memory R versions, and are not provided in the mask ROM versions. 3. The RAMCR and FLMCR registers are used only in the flash memory and flash memory R versions, and are not provided in the mask ROM versions. 4. For write access to TCSR, TCNT, and RSTCSR, see section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 5. The address depends on the output trigger setting. Legend WDT: Watchdog timer TPC: Programmable timing pattern controller SCI: Serial communication interface Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 790 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers B.2 Functions Register abbreviation Register name TIERTimer Interrupt Enable Register H' 90 Address to which register is mapped Name of on-chip supporting module FRT Bit numbers Bit 7 ICIAE Initial value 6 ICIBE 0 R/W 5 ICICE 0 R/W 4 3 2 1 OVIE 1 R/W 0 1 Names of the bits. Dashes (--) indicate reserved bits. Initial bit values R/W: OCIDE OCIAE OCIBE 0 R/W 0 R/W 1 R/W 0 R/W Possible types of access R W Read only Write only Timer overflow interrupt enable 0 1 Interrupt requested by OVF flag is disabled Interrupt requested by OVF flag is enabled R/W Read and write Output compare interrupt B enable 0 1 Interrupt requested by OCFB flag is disabled Interrupt requested by OCFB flag is enabled Full name of bit Output compare interrupt A enable 0 1 Interrupt requested by OCFA flag is disabled Interrupt requested by OCFA flag is enabled Descriptions of bit settings Input capture interrupt D enable 0 1 Interrupt requested by ICFD flag is disabled Interrupt requested by ICFD flag is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 791 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers P1DDR--Port 1 Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 H'EE000 3 2 1 Port 1 0 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Initial value Read/Write Initial value Read/Write 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7 Port 1 input/output select 0 1 Generic input Generic output P2DDR--Port 2 Data Direction Register 7 6 5 4 H'EE001 3 2 1 Port 2 0 Bit P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Initial value Read/Write Initial value Read/Write 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7 Port 2 input/output select 0 1 Generic input Generic output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 792 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers P3DDR--Port 3 Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 H'EE002 2 1 Port 3 0 P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Initial value Read/Write 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W Port 3 input/output select 0 1 Generic input Generic output P4DDR--Port 4 Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 H'EE003 2 1 Port 4 0 P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR Initial value Read/Write 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W Port 4 input/output select 0 1 Generic input Generic output P5DDR--Port 5 Data Direction Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write Initial value Read/Write 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 1 1 H'EE004 3 2 1 Port 5 0 P53DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W 1 0 W Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7 Port 5 input/output select 0 1 Generic input pin Generic output pin Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 793 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers P6DDR--Port 6 Data Direction Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 5 4 3 H'EE005 2 1 Port 6 0 P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W Port 6 input/output select 0 1 Generic input Generic output P8DDR--Port 8 Data Direction Register 7 Initial value Read/Write Initial value Read/Write 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 H'EE007 3 2 1 Port 8 0 Bit P84DDR P83DDR P82DDR P81DDR P80DDR 1 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7 Port 8 input/output select 0 1 Generic input Generic output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 794 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers P9DDR--Port 9 Data Direction Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 4 3 H'EE008 2 1 Port 9 0 P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W Port 9 input/output select 0 1 Generic input Generic output PADDR--Port A Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 H'EE009 2 1 Port A 0 PA7DDR PA6DDR PA5DDR PA4DDR PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR Initial value Read/Write Initial value Read/Write 1 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W Modes 3, 4 Modes 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 Port A input/output select 0 1 Generic input Generic output PBDDR--Port B Data Direction Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 H'EE00A 2 1 Port B 0 PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR Initial value Read/Write 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W Port B input/output select 0 1 Generic input Generic output Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 795 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers MDCR--Mode Control Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 0 4 0 3 0 H'EE011 2 MDS2 * R 1 MDS1 * R System control 0 MDS0 * R Bit Mode select 2 to 0 Bit 2 MD2 Bit 1 MD1 0 0 1 Bit 0 MD0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Note: * Determined by the state of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0). Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Operating Mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 796 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers SYSCR--System Control Register 7 SSBY Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 UE 1 R/W 2 NMIEG 0 R/W H'EE012 1 SSOE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W System control Bit RAM enable 0 1 On-chip RAM is disabled On-chip RAM is enabled Software standby output port enable In software standby mode, all address bus and bus control signals are highimpedance In software standby mode, address bus retains output state and bus control signals are fixed high 0 1 NMI edge select An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI 0 An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI 1 User bit enable CCR bit 6 (UI) is used as an interrupt mask bit 0 CCR bit 6 (UI) is used as a user bit 1 Standby timer select 2 to 0 Bit 6 STS2 0 1 0 1 1 Bit 5 STS1 0 Bit 4 STS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Standby Timer Waiting Time = 8,192 states Waiting Time = 16,384 states Waiting Time = 32,768 states Waiting Time = 65,536 states Waiting Time = 131,072 states Waiting Time = 26,2144 states Waiting Time = 1,024 states Illegal setting Software standby SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode 0 SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 797 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers BRCR--Bus Release Control Register Bit 7 A23E Modes 1, 2, 6, 7 Modes 3, 4 Mode 5 Initial value Read/Write Initial value Read/Write Initial value Read/Write 1 1 R/W 1 R/W 6 A22E 1 1 R/W 1 R/W 5 A21E 1 1 R/W 1 R/W 4 A20E 1 0 1 R/W H'EE013 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 Bus controller 1 1 1 1 0 BRLE 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Address 23 to 20 enable 0 1 Address output Other input/output Bus release enable 0 The bus cannot be released to an external device The bus can be released to an external device 1 ISCR--IRQ Sense Control Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 4 3 H'EE014 2 Interrupt Controller 1 0 Bit IRQ5SC IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W IRQ5 to IRQ0 sense control 0 1 Interrupts are requested when IRQ5 to IRQ0 are low Interrupts are requested by falling-edge input at IRQ5 to IRQ0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 798 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers IER--IRQ Enable Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 IRQ5E 0 R/W 4 IRQ4E 0 R/W H'EE015 3 IRQ3E 0 R/W 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W Interrupt Controller 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W Bit IRQ5 to IRQ0 enable 0 1 IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts are disabled IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts are enabled ISR--IRQ Status Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 0 6 0 5 IRQ5F 0 R/(W)* 4 IRQ4F 0 R/(W)* 3 IRQ3F 0 R/(W)* H'EE016 2 IRQ2F 0 R/(W)* 1 Interrupt Controller 0 IRQ0F 0 R/(W)* IRQ1F 0 R/(W)* IRQ5 to IRQ0 flags Bits 5 to 0 IRQ5F to IRQ0F Setting and Clearing Conditions [Clearing conditions] * Read IRQnF when IRQnF = 1, then write 0 in IRQnF. 0 * IRQnSC = 0, IRQn input is high, and interrupt exception handling is being carried out. * IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn interrupt exception handling is being carried out. [Setting conditions] 1 * IRQnSC = 0 and IRQn input is low. * IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn input changes from high to low. (n = 5 to 0) Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 799 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers IPRA--Interrupt Priority Register A Bit 7 IPRA7 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 IPRA6 0 R/W 5 IPRA5 0 R/W 4 IPRA4 0 R/W H'EE018 3 IPRA3 0 R/W 2 IPRA2 0 R/W 1 IPRA1 0 R/W Interrupt Controller 0 IPRA0 0 R/W Priority level A7 to A0 0 1 Priority level 0 (low priority) Priority level 1 (high priority) * Interrupt sources controlled by each bit Bit IPRA Bit 7 IPRA7 IRQ0 Interrupt source Bit 6 IPRA6 IRQ1 Bit 5 IPRA5 IRQ2, IRQ3 Bit 4 IPRA4 IRQ4, IRQ5 Bit 3 IPRA3 WDT, DRAM Bit 2 IPRA2 16-bit timer Bit 1 IPRA1 16-bit timer Bit 0 IPRA0 16-bit timer interface, channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 A/D converter IPRB--Interrupt Priority Register B 7 IPRB7 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 IPRB6 0 R/W 5 IPRB5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 H'EE019 2 IPRB2 0 R/W 1 IPRB1 0 R/W Interrupt Controller 0 0 R/W Bit IPRB3 0 R/W Priority level B7 to B5, B3 to B1 0 1 Priority level 0 (low priority) Priority level 1 (high priority) * Interrupt sources controlled by each bit Bit IPRB Bit 7 IPRB7 Bit 6 IPRB6 Bit 5 IPRB5 DMAC Bit 4 Bit 3 IPRB3 SCI Bit 2 IPRB2 SCI Bit 1 IPRB1 SCI Bit 0 8-bit timer 8-bit timer Interrupt channels channels source 0 and 1 2 and 3 channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 800 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers DASTCR--D/A Standby Control Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 H'EE01A 2 1 1 1 D/A 0 DASTE 0 R/W D/A standby enable 0 1 D/A output is disabled in software standby mode D/A output is enabled in software standby mode (Initial value) DIVCR--Division Control Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 H'EE01B 2 1 1 DIV1 0 R/W System control 0 DIV0 0 R/W Divide 1 and 0 Bit 1 DIV1 0 Bit 0 DIV0 0 1 1 0 1 1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 (Initial value) Frequency Division Ratio Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 801 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers MSTCRH--Module Standby Control Register H 7 PSTOP Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 H'EE01C 2 1 System control 0 Bit MSTPH2 MSTPH1 MSTPH0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Module standby H2 to H0 Selection bits for placing modules in standby state. Reserved bits clock stop Enables or disables o clock output. MSTCRL--Module Standby Control Register L 4 H'EE01D 3 2 System control 1 0 R/W 0 MSTPL0 0 R/W Bit 7 MSTPL7 6 0 R/W 5 MSTPL5 MSTPL4 MSTPL3 MSTPL2 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W Module standby L7, L5 to L2, L0 Selection bits for placing modules in standby state. Reserved bits Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 802 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ADRCR--Address Control Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 Reserved bits 3 1 H'EE01E 2 1 Bus controller 1 1 0 ADRCTL 1 R/W Address control Selects address update mode 1 or address update mode 2. ADRCTL 0 1 Description Address update mode 2 is selected Address update mode 1 is selected (Initial value) CSCR--Chip Select Control Register Bit 7 CS7E Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 CS6E 0 R/W 5 CS5E 0 R/W 4 CS4E 0 R/W H'EE01F 3 1 2 1 Bus controller 1 1 0 1 Chip select 7 to 4 enable Bit n CSnE 0 1 (n = 7 to 4) Output of chip select signal CSn is disabled (Initial value) Output of chip select signal CSn is enabled Description Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 803 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ABWCR--Bus Width Control Register Bit 7 ABW7 Modes 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 Initial value Initial value Modes 2, 4 Read/Write 1 0 R/W 6 ABW6 1 0 R/W 5 ABW5 1 0 R/W H'EE020 4 ABW4 1 0 R/W 3 ABW3 1 0 R/W 2 ABW2 1 0 R/W Bus controller 1 ABW1 1 0 R/W 0 ABW0 1 0 R/W Area 7 to 0 bus width control Bits 7 to 0 ABW7 to ABW0 0 1 Areas 7 to 0 are 16-bit access areas Areas 7 to 0 are 8-bit access areas Bus Width of Access Area ASTCR--Access State Control Register 7 AST7 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 6 AST6 1 R/W 5 AST5 1 R/W 4 AST4 1 R/W H'EE021 3 AST3 1 R/W 2 AST2 1 R/W 1 AST1 1 R/W Bus controller 0 AST0 1 R/W Bit Area 7 to 0 access state control Bits 7 to 0 AST7 to AST0 0 1 Areas 7 to 0 are two-state access areas Areas 7 to 0 are three-state access areas Number of States in Access Area Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 804 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers WCRH--Wait Control Register H Bit 7 W71 6 W70 1 R/W 5 W61 1 R/W 4 W60 1 R/W 3 W51 1 R/W 2 W50 1 R/W H'EE022 1 W41 1 R/W 0 W40 1 R/W Bus controller Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W Area 4 wait control 1 and 0 0 No program wait is inserted 0 1 1 program wait state is inserted 1 0 1 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted Area 5 wait control 1 and 0 0 No program wait is inserted 0 1 1 program wait state is inserted 1 0 1 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted Area 6 wait control 1 and 0 0 No program wait is inserted 0 1 1 program wait state is inserted 1 0 1 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted Area 7 wait control 1 and 0 0 No program wait is inserted 0 1 1 program wait state is inserted 1 0 1 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 805 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers WCRL--Wait Control Register L Bit 7 W31 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 6 W30 1 R/W 5 W21 1 R/W 4 W20 1 R/W 3 W11 1 R/W H'EE023 2 W10 1 R/W 1 W01 1 R/W 0 W00 1 R/W Bus controller Area 0 wait control 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 No program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted Area 1 wait control 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 No program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted Area 2 wait control 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 No program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted Area 3 wait control 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 No program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 806 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers BCR--Bus Control Register Bit 7 ICIS1 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 6 ICIS0 1 R/W 5 4 3 2 1 H'EE024 1 RDEA 1 R/W 0 WAITE 0 R/W Bus controller BROME BRSTS1 BRSTS0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Wait pin enable 0 1 WAIT pin wait input is disabled WAIT pin wait input is enabled Area division unit select 0 Area divisions are as follows: Area 0: 2 MB Area 1: 2 MB Area 2: 8 MB Area 3: 2 MB 1 Area 4: 1.93 MB Area 5: 4 kB Area 6: 23.75 kB Area 7: 22 B Areas 0 to 7 are the same size (2 MB) Burst cycle select 0 0 1 Max. 4 words in burst access Max. 8 words in burst access Burst cycle select 1 0 1 Burst access cycle comprises 2 states Burst access cycle comprises 3 states Burst ROM enable 0 1 Area 0 is a basic bus interface area Area 0 is a burst ROM interface area Idle cycle insertion 0 0 1 No idle cycle is inserted in case of consecutive external read and write cycles Idle cycle is inserted in case of consecutive external read and write cycles Idle cycle insertion 1 0 1 No idle cycle is inserted in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas Idle cycle is inserted in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 807 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers DRCRA--DRAM Control Register A Bit 7 6 5 4 1 3 BE 0 R/W H'EE026 2 1 0 DRAM interface DRAS2 DRAS1 DRAS0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W RDM SRFMD RFSHE 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Refresh pin enable 0 1 RFSH pin refresh signal output is disabled RFSH pin refresh signal output is enabled Self-refresh mode 0 DRAM self-refreshing is disabled in software standby mode 1 DRAM self-refreshing is enabled in software standby mode RAS down mode 0 1 DRAM interface: RAS up mode selected DRAM interface: RAS down mode selected Burst access enable 0 1 Burst disabled (always full access) DRAM space access performed in fast page mode DRAM area select DRAS2 DRAS1 DRAS0 0 0 0 1 Area 5 Normal Normal Area 4 Normal Normal Area 3 Normal Normal Area 2 Normal DRAM space (CS2) 1 0 Normal Normal DRAM space DRAM space (CS3) 1 1 0 0 Normal Normal Normal (CS2) DRAM space(CS2)* (CS3) (CS2) DRAM space DRAM space DRAM space (CS4) 1 DRAM space DRAM space DRAM space DRAM space (CS5) (CS4) (CS3) (CS2) 1 0 1 DRAM space(CS4)* DRAM space(CS2)* DRAM space(CS2)* Note: * A single CSn pin serves as a common RAS output pin for a number of areas. Unused CSn pins can be used as input/output ports. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 808 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers DRCRB--DRAM Control Register B Bit 7 MXC1 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 MXC0 0 R/W 5 4 3 1 2 TPC 0 R/W CSEL RCYCE 0 R/W 0 R/W H'EE027 1 RCW 0 R/W 0 RLW 0 R/W DRAM interface Refresh cycle wait control 0 1 Wait state (TRW) insertion is disabled 1 wait state (TRW) is inserted RAS-CAS wait 0 1 Wait state (Trw) insertion is disabled 1 wait state (Trw) is inserted TP cycle control 0 1 1-state precharge cycle is inserted 2-state precharge cycle is inserted Refresh cycle enable 0 1 Refresh cycles are disabled DRAM refresh cycles are enabled CAS output pin select 0 1 PB4 and PB5 selected as UCAS and LCAS output pins HWR and LWR selected as UCAS and LCAS output pins Multiplex control 1 and 0 MXC1 0 MXC0 0 Description Column address: 8 bits Compared address: Modes 1, 2 8-bit access space 16-bit access space Modes 3, 4, 5 8-bit access space 16-bit access space A19 to A8 A19 to A9 A23 to A8 A23 to A9 1 Column address: 9 bits Compared address: Modes 1, 2 8-bit access space Modes 3, 4, 5 16-bit access space 8-bit access space 16-bit access space A19 to A9 A19 to A10 A23 to A9 A23 to A10 1 0 Column address: 10 bits Compared address: Modes 1, 2 8-bit access space 16-bit access space Modes 3, 4, 5 8-bit access space 16-bit access space Illegal setting A19 to A10 A19 to A11 A23 to A10 A23 to A11 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 809 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers RTMCSR--Refresh Timer Control/Status Register Bit 7 CMF Initial value Read/Write 0 R/(W)* 6 CMIE 0 R/W 5 CKS2 0 R/W 4 CKS1 0 R/W 3 CKS0 0 R/W 2 1 H'EE028 1 1 0 1 DRAM interface Refresh counter clock select CKS2 0 CKS1 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Compare match interrupt enable 0 1 The CMI interrupt requested by the CMF flag is disabled The CMI interrupt requested by the CMF flag is enabled Description Count operation halted /2 used as counter clock /8 used as counter clock /32 used as counter clock /128 used as counter clock /512 used as counter clock /2048 used as counter clock /4096 used as counter clock Compare match flag 0 [Clearing conditions] * Cleared by a reset and in standby mode * Cleared by reading CMF when CMF = 1, then writing 0 in CMF 1 [Setting condition] When RTCNT = RTCOR Note: Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 810 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers RTCNT--Refresh Timer Counter Bit 7 6 5 4 3 H'EE029 2 1 DRAM interface 0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Incremented by internal clock selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR RTCOR--Refresh Time Constant Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 H'EE02A 2 1 DRAM interface 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W RTCNT compare match period Note: Only byte access can be used on this register. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 811 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers FLMCR-Flash Memory Control Register Bit 7 FWE Modes 1 to 4, and 6 Modes 5 and 7 Initial value Read/Write Initial value Read/Write 0 R 1/0 R 6 SWE 0 R 0 R/W 5 ESU 0 R 0 R/W 4 PSU 0 R 0 R/W 3 EV 0 R 0 R/W H'EE030 2 PV 0 R 0 R/W 1 E 0 R 0 R/W 0 P 0 R 0 R/W Flash Memory Program mode 0 1 Program mode cleared (Initial value) Transition to program mode [Setting condition] When FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and PSU = 1 Erase mode 0 1 Erase mode cleared (Initial value) Transition to erase mode [Setting condition] When FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU = 1 Program-verify mode 0 1 Program-verify mode cleared (Initial value) Transition to program-verify mode [Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1 Erase-verify mode 0 1 Erase-verify mode cleared (Initial value) Transition to erase-verify mode [Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1 Program setup 0 1 Program setup cleared (Initial value) Program setup [Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1 Erase setup bit 0 1 Erase setup cleared (Initial value) Erase setup [Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1 Software write enable bit 0 1 Write/erase disabled (Initial value) Write/erase enabled [Setting condition] When FWE = 1 Flash write enable bit 0 1 When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware protection state) When a high level is input to the FWE pin Note: This register is used only in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Reading the corresponding address in a mask ROM version will always return 1s, and writes to this address are disabled. Fix the FWE pin low in mode 6. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 812 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers EBR-Erase Block Register 7 EB7 0 R 0 R/W 6 EB6 0 R 0 R/W 5 EB5 0 R 0 R/W 4 EB4 0 R 0 R/W H'EE032 3 EB3 0 R 0 R/W 2 Flash Memory 1 EB1 0 R 0 R/W 0 EB0 0 R 0 R/W Bit EBR Modes 1 to 4, and 6 Modes 5 and 7 Initial value Read/Write Initial value Read/Write EB2 0 R 0 R/W Block 7 to 0 0 1 Block EB7 to EB0 is not selected (Initial value) Block EB7 to EB0 is selected Note: When not erasing flash memory, EBR should be cleared to H'00. Note: This register is used only in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Reading the corresponding address in a mask ROM version will always return 1s, and writes to this address are disabled. P2PCR--Port 2 Input Pull-Up Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 H'EE03C 2 1 Port 2 0 P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Port 2 input pull-up control 7 to 0 0 1 Input pull-up transistor is off Input pull-up transistor is on Note: Valid when the corresponding P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 813 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers P4PCR--Port 4 Input Pull-Up Control Register 7 6 5 4 3 H'EE03E 2 1 Port 4 0 Bit P47PCR P46PCR P45PCR P44PCR P43PCR P42PCR P41PCR P40PCR Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Port 4 input pull-up control 7 to 0 0 1 Input pull-up transistor is off Input pull-up transistor is on Note: Valid when the corresponding P4DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). P5PCR--Port 5 Input Pull-Up Control Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 H'EE03F 2 1 Port 5 0 Bit P53PCR P52PCR P51PCR P50PCR 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Port 5 input pull-up control 3 to 0 0 1 Input pull-up transistor is off Input pull-up transistor is on Note: Valid when the corresponding P5DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 814 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers RAM Control Register RAMCR H'EE077 Flash Memory Bit 7 6 -- 1 1 5 -- 1 1 4 -- 1 1 3 RAMS 0 R 0 R/W* 2 RAM2 0 R 0 R/W* 1 RAM1 0 R 0 R/W* 0 -- 1 1 Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7 Initial value R/W Initial value R/W 1 1 Reserved bits RAM select, RAM2, RAM1 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 RAM Area H'FFF000 to H'FFF3FF H'000000 to H'0003FF H'000400 to H'0007FF H'000800 to H'000BFF H'000C00 to H'000FFF RAM Emulation Status No emulation Mapping RAM RAMS RAM2 RAM1 0 1 0/1 0 0/1 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * In mode 6 (single-chip normal mode), flash memory emulation by RAM is not supported; these bits can be modified, but must not be set to 1. Note: This register is used only in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Reading the corresponding address in a mask ROM version will always return 1s, and writes to this address are disabled. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 815 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers FLMSR-Flash Memory Status Register Bit 7 FLER Initial value R/W 0 R 6 1 5 1 4 1 H'EE07D 3 1 2 1 Flash Memory 1 1 0 1 Reserved bits RAM select, RAM2, RAM1 Bit 7 FLER 0 Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled (Initial value) [Clearing condition] WDT reset, reset via the RES pin or hardware standby mode An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing, and error protection*1 is enabled [Setting conditions] 1. Flash memory was read*2 while being programmed or erased (including vector or instruction fetch, but not including reading of a RAM area overlapped onto flash memory). 2. A hardware exception-handling sequence (other than a reset, invalid instruction, trap instruction, or zero-divide exception) was executed just before programming or erasing.*3 3. The SLEEP instruction (including software standby mode) was executed during programming or erasing. Description 1 Notes 1. See 18.6.3, Error Protection, for details. 2. The read value in this case is undefined. 3. Before stack and vector read by exception handling. Note: This register is used only in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Reading the corresponding address in a mask ROM version will always return 1s, and writes to this address are disabled. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 816 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers MAR0A R/E/H/L--Memory Address Register 0A R/E/H/L H'FFF20 H'FFF21 H'FFF22 H'FFF23 22 21 20 19 18 DMAC0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 17 16 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MAR0AE MAR0AR Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MAR0AH MAR0AL Source or destination address Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 817 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ETCR0A H/L--Execute Transfer Count Register 0A H/L * Short address mode I/O mode and idle mode Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 H'FFF24 H'FFF25 DMAC0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Transfer counter Repeat mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR0AH Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR0AL Transfer counter Initial count * Full address mode Normal mode Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Transfer counter Block transfer mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR0AH Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR0AL Block size counter Initial block size Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 818 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers IOAR0A--I/O Address Register 0A 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFF26 2 1 DMAC0 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Short address mode : source or destination address Full address mode : not used Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 819 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers DTCR0A--Data Transfer Control Register 0A * Short address mode Bit 7 DTE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 DTSZ 0 R/W 5 DTID 0 R/W 4 RPE 0 R/W 3 DTIE 0 R/W 2 DTS2 0 R/W 1 DTS1 0 R/W 0 DTS0 0 R/W H'FFF27 DMAC0 Data transfer select Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Data Transfer Activation Source Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 0 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 A/D converter conversion end interrupt SCI0 transmit-data-empty interrupt SCI0 receive-data-full interrupt Transfer in full address mode Transfer in full address mode Data transfer interrupt enable Interrupt requested by 0 DTE bit is disabled Interrupt requested by 1 DTE bit is enabled Repeat enable RPE DTIE Description 0 0 I/O mode 1 0 Repeat mode 1 1 Idle mode Data transfer increment/decrement 0 1 Incremented: If DTSZ = 0, MAR is incremented by 1 after each transfer If DTSZ = 1, MAR is incremented by 2 after each transfer Decremented: If DTSZ = 0, MAR is decremented by 1 after each transfer If DTSZ = 1, MAR is decremented by 2 after each transfer Data transfer size 0 1 0 1 Byte-size transfer Word-size transfer Data transfer enable Data transfer is disabled Data transfer is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 820 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers DTCR0A--Data Transfer Control Register 0A (cont) * Full address mode Bit 7 DTE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 DTSZ 0 R/W 5 SAID 0 R/W 4 SAIDE 0 R/W 3 DTIE 0 R/W 2 DTS2A 0 R/W 1 DTS1A 0 R/W 0 DTS0A 0 R/W H'FFF27 DMAC0 Data transfer select 0A 0 1 Set both bits to 1 Data transfer interrupt enable 0 1 Interrupt requested by DTE bit is disabled Interrupt requested by DTE bit is enabled Normal mode Block transfer mode Data transfer select 2A and 1A Source address increment/decrement (bit 5) Source address increment/decrement enable (bit 4) Bit 4 Bit 5 Increment/Decrement Enable SAID SAIDE 0 MARA is held fixed 0 Incremented: If DTSZ = 0, MARA is incremented by 1 after each transfer 1 If DTSZ = 1, MARA is incremented by 2 after each transfer 0 MARA is held fixed 1 Decremented: If DTSZ = 0, MARA is decremented by 1 after each transfer 1 If DTSZ = 1, MARA is decremented by 2 after each transfer Data transfer size 0 1 Byte-size transfer Word-size transfer Data transfer enable 0 1 Data transfer is disabled Data transfer is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 821 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers MAR0B R/E/H/L--Memory Address Register 0B R/E/H/L H'FFF28 H'FFF29 H'FFF2A H'FFF2B 22 21 20 19 18 DMAC0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 17 16 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MAR0BE MAR0BR Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MAR0BH MAR0BL Source or destination address Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 822 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ETCR0B H/L--Execute Transfer Count Register 0B H/L * Short address mode I/O mode and idle mode Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 H'FFF2C, H'FFF2D DMAC0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Transfer counter Repeat mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write : Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR0BH Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR0BL Transfer counter Initial count * Full address mode Normal mode Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Not used Block transfer mode Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Block transfer counter Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 823 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers IOAR0B--I/O Address Register 0B 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFF2E 2 1 DMAC0 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Short address mode : source or destination address Full address mode : not used Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 824 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers DTCR0B--Data Transfer Control Register 0B * Short address mode Bit 7 DTE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 DTSZ 0 R/W 5 DTID 0 R/W 4 RPE 0 R/W 3 DTIE 0 R/W 2 DTS2 0 R/W 1 DTS1 0 R/W 0 DTS0 0 R/W H'FFF2F DMAC0 Data transfer select Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Data Transfer Activation Source Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 0 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 A/D converter conversion end interrupt SCI0 transmit-data-empty interrupt SCI0 receive-data-full interrupt Falling edge of DREQ input Low level of DREQ input 1 Data transfer interrupt enable 0 1 Repeat enable Description RPE DTIE 0 0 I/O mode 1 0 Repeat mode 1 1 Idle mode Data transfer increment/decrement 0 1 Incremented: If DTSZ = 0, MAR is incremented by 1 after each transfer If DTSZ = 1, MAR is incremented by 2 after each transfer Decremented: If DTSZ = 0, MAR is decremented by 1 after each transfer If DTSZ = 1, MAR is decremented by 2 after each transfer Interrupt requested by DTE bit is disabled Interrupt requested by DTE bit is enabled Data transfer size 0 1 0 1 Byte-size transfer Word-size transfer Data transfer enable Data transfer is disabled Data transfer is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 825 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers DTCR0B--Data Transfer Control Register 0B (cont) * Full address mode Bit 7 DTME Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 DAID 0 R/W 4 DAIDE 0 R/W 3 TMS 0 R/W 2 DTS2B 0 R/W 1 DTS1B 0 R/W 0 DTS0B 0 R/W H'FFF2F DMAC0 Data transfer master enable 0 1 Data transfer is disabled Data transfer is enabled Data transfer select 2B to 0B Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DTS2B DTS1B DTS0B 0 0 Not available 1 0 Auto-request (cycle-steal mode) Not available Not available Not available Falling edge input of DREQ Low level input at DREQ Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 A/D converter conversion end interrupt Not available Not available Falling edge input of DREQ Not available Data Transfer Activation Source Normal Mode Block Transfer Mode Auto-request (burst mode) Compare match/input capture A interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Transfer mode select 0 1 Destination address increment/decrement (bit 5) Destination address increment/decrement enable (bit 4) Bit 5 Bit 4 Increment/Decrement Enable DAID DAIDE 0 MARB is held fixed 0 Incremented: If DTSZ = 0, MARB is incremented by 1 after each transfer 1 If DTSZ = 1, MARB is incremented by 2 after each transfer 0 MARB is held fixed 1 Decremented: If DTSZ = 0, MARB is decremented by 1 after each transfer 1 If DTSZ = 1, MARB is decremented by 2 after each transfer Destination is the block area in block transfer mode Source is the block area in block transfer mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 826 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers MAR1A R/E/H/L--Memory Address Register 1A R/E/H/L H'FFF30 H'FFF31 H'FFF32 H'FFF33 22 21 20 19 18 DMAC1 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 17 16 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MAR1AE MAR1AR Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MAR1AH MAR1AL Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0. ETCR1A H/L--Execute Transfer Count Register 1A H/L Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 H'FFF34 H'FFF35 5 4 3 2 DMAC1 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR1AH Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR1AL Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 827 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers IOAR1A--I/O Address Register 1A 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFF36 2 1 DMAC1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0. DTCR1A--Data Transfer Control Register 1A * Short address mode Bit 7 DTE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 DTSZ 0 R/W 5 DTID 0 R/W 4 RPE 0 R/W 3 DTIE 0 R/W H'FFF37 DMAC1 2 DTS2 0 R/W 1 DTS1 0 R/W 0 DTS0 0 R/W * Full address mode Bit 7 DTE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 DTSZ 0 R/W 5 SAID 0 R/W 4 SAIDE 0 R/W 3 DTIE 0 R/W 2 DTS2A 0 R/W 1 DTS1A 0 R/W 0 DTS0A 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 828 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers MAR1B R/E/H/L--Memory Address Register 1B R/E/H/L H'FFF38 H'FFF39 H'FFF3A H'FFF3B 22 21 20 19 18 DMAC1 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 17 16 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MAR1BE MAR1BR Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MAR1BH MAR1BL Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0. ETCR1B H/L--Execute Transfer Count Register 1B H/L Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 H'FFF3C H'FFF3D 5 4 3 2 DMAC1 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR1BH Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ETCR1BL Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 829 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers IOAR1B--I/O Address Register 1B Bit 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFF3E 2 1 DMAC1 0 Initial value Read/Write R/W R/W R/W Undetermined R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0. DTCR1B--Data Transfer Control Register 1B * Short address mode Bit 7 DTE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 DTSZ 0 R/W 5 DTID 0 R/W 4 RPE 0 R/W 3 DTIE 0 R/W H'FFF3F DMAC1 2 DTS2 0 R/W 1 DTS1 0 R/W 0 DTS0 0 R/W * Full address mode Bit 7 DTME Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 DAID 0 R/W 4 DAIDE 0 R/W 3 TMS 0 R/W 2 DTS2B 0 R/W 1 DTS1B 0 R/W 0 DTS0B 0 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 830 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TSTR--Timer Start Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 H'FFF60 3 1 2 16-bit timer (all channels) 1 STR1 0 R/W 0 STR0 0 R/W STR2 0 R/W Reserved bits Counter start 0 0 1 Counter start 1 0 1 Counter start 2 0 1 TCNT2 is halted TCNT2 is counting (Initial value) TCNT1 is halted TCNT1 is counting (Initial value) TCNT0 is halted TCNT0 is counting (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 831 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TSNC--Timer Synchro Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 H'FFF61 3 1 2 16-bit timer (all channels) 1 0 SYNC2 SYNC1 SYNC0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Reserved bits Timer synchronization 0 0 Channel 0 timer counter (TCNT0) operates independently (TCNT0 presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels) (Initial value) Channel 0 operates synchronously TCNT0 synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible 1 Timer synchronization 1 0 Channel 1 timer counter (TCNT1) operates independently (TCNT1 presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels) (Initial value) Channel 1 operates synchronously TCNT1 synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible 1 Timer synchronization 2 0 Channel 2 timer counter (TCNT2) operates independently (TCNT2 presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels) (Initial value) Channel 2 operates synchronously TCNT2 synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 832 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TMDR--Timer Mode Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 MDF 0 R/W 5 FDIR 0 R/W H'FFF62 4 1 3 1 16-bit timer (all channels) 2 PWM2 0 R/W 1 PWM1 0 R/W 0 PWM0 0 R/W PWM mode 0 0 1 Channel 0 operates normally (Initial value) Channel 0 operates in PWM mode PWM mode 1 0 1 Channel 1 operates normally (Initial value) Channel 1 operates in PWM mode PWM mode 2 0 1 Channel 2 operates normally (Initial value) Channel 2 operates in PWM mode Flag direction 0 1 OVF is set to 1 in TISRC when TCNT2 overflows or underflows (Initial value) OVF is set to 1 in TISRC when TCNT2 overflows Phase counting mode flag 0 1 Channel 2 operates normally (Initial value) Channel 2 operates in phase counting mode Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 833 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TOLR--Timer Output Level Setting Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 TOB2 0 W 4 TOA2 0 W H'FFF63 3 TOB1 0 W 16-bit timer (all channels) 2 TOA1 0 W 1 TOB0 0 W 0 TOA0 0 W Output level setting A0 0 1 TIOCA0 is 0 TIOCA0 is 1 (Initial value) Output level setting B0 0 1 TIOCB0 is 0 TIOCB0 is 1 (Initial value) Output level setting A1 0 1 TIOCA1 is 0 TIOCA1 is 1 (Initial value) Output level setting B1 0 1 TIOCB1 is 0 TIOCB1 is 1 (Initial value) Output level setting A2 0 1 TIOCA2 is 0 TIOCA2 is 1 (Initial value) Output level setting B2 0 1 TIOCB2 is 0 TIOCB2 is 1 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 834 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TISRA--Timer Interrupt Status Register A Bit: 7 Initial value: Read/Write: 1 6 5 4 H'FFF64 3 1 2 1 16-bit timer (all channels) 0 IMIEA2 IMIEA1 IMIEA0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W IMFA2 IMFA1 IMFA0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* Input capture/compare match flag A0 [Clearing conditions] 0 Read IMFA0 when IMFA0=1, then write 0 in IMFA0 DMAC activated by IMIA0 interrupt. [Setting conditions] TCNT0=GRA0 when GRA0 functions as an output compare register. 1 TCNT0 value is transferred to GRA0 by an input capture signal when GRA0 functions as an input capture register. Input capture/compare match flag A1 [Clearing conditions] 0 Read IMFA1 when IMFA1=1, then write 0 in IMFA1 DMAC activated by IMIA1 interrupt. [Setting conditions] TCNT1=GRA1 when GRA1 functions as an output compare register. 1 TCNT1 value is transferred to GRA1 by an input capture signal when GRA1 functions as an input capture register. Input capture/compare match flag A2 [Clearing conditions] 0 Read IMFA2 when IMFA2=1, then write 0 in IMFA2 DMAC activated by IMIA2 interrupt. [Setting conditions] TCNT2=GRA2 when GRA2 functions as an output compare register. 1 TCNT2 value is transferred to GRA2 by an input capture signal when GRA2 functions as an input capture register. Input capture/compare match interrupt enable A0 0 IMIA0 interrupt requested by IMFA0 flag is disabled 1 IMIA0 interrupt requested by IMFA0 is enabled (Initial value) (Initial value) (Initial value) (Initial value) (Initial value) Input capture/compare match interrupt enable A1 0 IMIA1 interrupt requested by IMFA1 flag is disabled 1 IMIA1 interrupt requested by IMFA1 is enabled Input capture/compare match interrupt enable A2 0 IMIA2 interrupt requested by IMFA2 flag is disabled 1 IMIA2 interrupt requested by IMFA2 is enabled (Initial value) Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 835 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TISRB--Timer Interrupt Status Register B Bit: 7 Initial value: Read/Write: 1 6 5 4 H'FFF65 3 1 2 1 16-bit timer (all channels) 0 IMIEB2 IMIEB1 IMIEB0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W IMFB2 IMFB1 IMFB0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* Input capture/compare match flag B0 [Clearing condition] Read IMFB0 when IMFB0=1, then write 0 in IMFB0. (Initial value) 0 [Setting conditions] TCNT0=GRB0 when GRB0 functions as an output compare register. 1 TCNT0 value is transferred to GRB0 by an input capture signal when GRB0 functions as an input capture register. Input capture/compare match flag B1 [Clearing condition] Read IMFB1 when IMFB1=1, then write 0 in IMFB1. [Setting conditions] TCNT1=GRB1 when GRB1 functions as an output compare register. 1 TCNT1 value is transferred to GRB1 by an input capture signal when GRB1 functions as an input capture register. Input capture/compare match flag B2 [Clearing condition] Read IMFB2 when IMFB2=1, then write 0 in IMFB2. [Setting conditions] TCNT2=GRB2 when GRB2 functions as an output compare register. 1 TCNT2 value is transferred to GRB2 by an input capture signal when GRB2 functions as an input capture register. Input capture/compare match interrupt enable B0 0 IMIB0 interrupt requested by IMFB0 flag is disabled 1 IMIB0 interrupt requested by IMFB0 is enabled (Initial value) (Initial value) (Initial value) 0 0 (Initial value) Input capture/compare match interrupt enable B1 0 IMIB1 interrupt requested by IMFB1 flag is disabled 1 IMIB1 interrupt requested by IMFB1 is enabled Input capture/compare match interrupt enable B2 0 IMIB2 interrupt requested by IMFB2 flag is disabled 1 IMIB2 interrupt requested by IMFB2 is enabled (Initial value) Note : * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 836 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TISRC--Timer Interrupt Status Register C Bit: 7 Initial value: Read/Write: 1 6 5 4 H'FFF66 3 1 2 16-bit timer (all channels) 1 0 OVIE2 OVIE1 OVIE0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W OVF2 OVF1 OVF0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* Overflow flag 0 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read OVF0 when OVF0 = 1, then write 0 in OVF0. [Setting condition] TCNT0 overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000. (Initial value) Overflow flag 1 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read OVF1 when OVF1 = 1, then write 0 in OVF1. [Setting condition] TCNT1 overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000. (Initial value) Overflow flag 2 0 [Clearing condition] Read OVF2 when OVF2 = 1, then write 0 in OVF2. (Initial value) 1 [Setting condition] TCNT2 overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000, or underflowed from H'0000 to H'FFFF. Overflow interrupt enable 0 OVI0 interrupt requested by OVF0 flag is disabled 0 1 OVI0 interrupt requested by OVF0 flag is enabled (Initial value) Overflow interrupt enable 1 OVI1 interrupt requested by OVF1 flag is disabled 0 1 OVI1 interrupt requested by OVF1 flag is enabled (Initial value) Overflow interrupt enable 2 OVI2 interrupt requested by OVF2 flag is disabled 0 1 OVI2 interrupt requested by OVF2 flag is enabled (Initial value) Note : * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 837 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCR0--Timer Control Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 CCLR1 0 R/W 5 CCLR0 0 R/W 4 CKEG1 0 R/W H'FFF68 3 CKEG0 0 R/W 2 TPSC2 0 R/W 16-bit timer channel 0 1 TPSC1 0 R/W 0 TPSC0 0 R/W Bit Timer prescaler 2 to 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 2 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 TCNT Clock Source Internal clock : Internal clock : / 2 Internal clock : / 4 Internal clock : / 8 External clock A : TCLKA input External clock B : TCLKB input External clock C : TCLKC input External clock D : TCLKD input (Initial value) 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Clock edge 1 and 0 Bit 3 Bit 4 CKEG1 CKEG0 Counted Edges of External Clock Rising edges counted Falling edges counted Both edges counted (Initial value) 0 0 1 0 1 -- Counter clear 1 and 0 Bit 5 Bit 6 CCLR1 CCLR0 TCNT clear Sources (Initial value) TCNT is not cleared TCNT is cleared by GRA compare match or input capture TCNT is cleared by GRB compare match or input capture Synchronous clear : TCNT is cleared in synchronization with other synchronized timers 0 1 0 1 0 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 838 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TIOR0--Timer I/O Control Register 0 7 Initial value: Read/Write: 1 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W 4 IOB0 0 R/W H'FFF69 3 1 2 IOA2 0 R/W 1 IOA1 0 R/W 16-bit timer channel 0 0 IOA0 0 R/W Bit: I/O control A2 to A0 Bit 2 Bit 1 IOA2 IOA1 0 0 1 Bit 0 IOA0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 GRA Functions GRA is an output compare register No output at compare match (Initial value) 0 output at GRA compare match 1 output at GRA compare match Output toggles at GRA compare match (channel 2 only: 1 output) GRA captures rising edges of input GRA captures falling edges of input GRA captures both edges of input 0 1 1 GRA is an input capture register I/O control B2 to B0 Bit 6 Bit 5 IOB2 IOB1 0 0 1 Bit 4 IOB0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 GRB Functions GRB is an output compare register No output at compare match (Initial value) 0 output at GRB compare match 1 output at GRB compare match Output toggles at GRB compare match (channel 2 only: 1 output) GRB captures rising edges of input GRB captures falling edges of input GRB captures both edges of input 0 1 1 GRB is an input capture register Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 839 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCNT0 H/L--Timer Counter 0 H/L 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 H'FFF6A, H'FFF6B 8 7 6 5 16-bit timer channel 0 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Up - counter GRA0 H/L--General Register A0 H/L 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 H'FFF6C, H'FFF6D 8 7 6 5 16-bit timer channel 0 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Output compare or input capture register GRB0 H/L--General Register B0 H/L 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 H'FFF6E, H'FFF6F 8 7 6 5 16-bit timer channel 0 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Output compare or input capture register Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 840 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCR1 Timer Control Register 1 Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 5 H'FFF70 4 3 2 16-bit timer channel 1 1 0 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W * Bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. TIOR1--Timer I/O Control Register 1 H'FFF71 16-bit timer channel 1 Bit 7 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W 4 IOB0 0 R/W 3 1 2 IOA2 0 R/W 1 IOA1 0 R/W 0 IOA0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write 1 * Bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. TCNT1 H/L--Timer Counter 1 H/L Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 H'FFF72, H'FFF73 8 7 6 5 16-bit timer channel 1 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W * Bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 841 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers GRA1 H/L--General Register A1 H/L Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 H'FFF74, H'FFF75 8 7 6 5 16-bit timer channel 1 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W * Bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. GRB1 H/L--General Register B1 H/L Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 H'FFF76, H'FFF77 8 7 6 5 16-bit timer channel 1 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W * Bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. TCR2 Timer Control Register 2 Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 5 H'FFF78 4 3 2 16-bit timer channel 2 1 0 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W * Bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. Note : When phase counting mode is selected in channel 2, the settings of bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 and TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR2 are ignored. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 842 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TIOR2--Timer I/O Control Register 2 Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 IOB2 0 R/W 5 IOB1 0 R/W H'FFF79 4 IOB0 0 R/W 3 1 2 IOA2 0 R/W 16-bit timer channel 2 1 IOA1 0 R/W 0 IOA0 0 R/W * Bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. TCNT2 H/L--Timer Counter 2 H/L 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 H'FFF7A, H'FFF7B 8 7 6 5 16-bit timer channel 2 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Phase counting mode : Other mode : up / down counter up - counter GRA2 H/L--General Register A2 H/L Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 H'FFF7C, H'FFF7D 8 7 6 5 16-bit timer channel 2 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W * Bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 843 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers GRB2 H/L--General Register B2 H/L Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 H'FFF7E, H'FFF7F 8 7 6 5 16-bit timer channel 2 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W * Bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 844 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCR0--Timer Control Register 0 TCR1--Timer Control Register 1 Bit 7 CMIEB Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 CMIEA 0 R/W 5 OVIE 0 R/W 4 CCLR1 0 R/W 3 CCLR0 0 R/W H'FFF80 H'FFF81 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 8-bit timer channel 0 8-bit timer channel 1 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock select 2 to 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 Clock input is disabled Internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8 Internal clock, counted on rising edge of /64 Internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8192 Channel 0: Count on TCNT1 overflow signal* Channel 1: Count on TCNT0 compare match A* External clock, counted on falling edge External clock, counted on rising edge External clock, counted on both rising and falling edges 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 Notes: * If the clock input of channel 0 is the TCNT1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the TCNT0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. Do not use this setting. Counter clear 1 and 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Clearing is disabled Cleared by compare match A Cleared by compare match B/input capture B Cleared by input capture B Timer overflow interrupt enable 0 1 OVI interrupt requested by OVF is disabled OVI interrupt requested by OVF is enabled Compare match interrupt enable A 0 1 CMIA interrupt requested by CMFA is disabled CMIA interrupt requested by CMFA is enabled Compare match interrupt enable B 0 1 CMIB interrupt requested by CMFB is disabled CMIB interrupt requested by CMFB is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 845 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCSR0--Timer Control/Status Register 0 Bit 7 CMFB Initial value Read/Write 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ADTE 0 R/W 3 OIS3 0 R/W H'FFF82 2 OIS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W 8-bit timer channel 0 Output select A1 and A0 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description OS1 OS0 0 0 1 0 No change at compare match A 0 output at compare match A 1 output at compare match A Output toggles at compare match A 1 1 Output/input capture edge select B3 and B2 ICE in Bit 3 TCSR1 OIS3 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Bit 2 OIS2 Description No change at compare match B 0 output at compare match B 1 output at compare match B Output toggles at compare match B TCORB input capture on rising edge TCORB input capture on falling edge TCORB input capture on both rising and falling edges 0 1 0 A/D trigger enable (TCSR0 only) TRGE* Bit 4 ADTE Description A/D converter start requests by compare match 0 0 1 1 0 1 A or an external trigger are disabled A/D converter start requests by compare match A or an external trigger are enabled A/D converter start requests by an external trigger are enabled A/D converter start requests by compare match A are enabled Note: * TRGE is bit 7 of the A/D control register (ADCR). Timer overflow flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF. [Setting condition] TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00. Compare match flag A 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA. [Setting condition] TCNT = TCORA Compare match/input capture flag B 0 [Clearing condition] Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB. [Setting conditions] TCNT = TCORB The TCNT value is transferred to TCORB by an input capture signal when TCORB functions as an input capture register. 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 846 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCSR1--Timer Control/Status Register 1 Bit 7 CMFB Initial value Read/Write 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ICE 0 R/W 3 OIS3 0 R/W H'FFF83 2 OIS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W 8-bit timer channel 1 Output select A1 and A0 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description OS1 OS0 0 0 1 0 No change at compare match A 0 output at compare match A 1 output at compare match A Output toggles at compare match A 1 1 Output/input capture edge select B3 and B2 ICE in Bit 3 TCSR1 OIS3 Bit 2 OIS2 Description No change at compare match B 0 output at compare match B 1 output at compare match B Output toggles at compare match B TCORB input capture on rising edge TCORB input capture on falling edge TCORB input capture on both rising and falling edges 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Input capture enable 0 1 1 0 1 TCORB is a compare match register TCORB is an input capture register Timer overflow flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF. [Setting condition] TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00. Compare match/input capture flag A 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA. [Setting condition] TCNT = TCORA Compare match/input capture flag B 0 [Clearing condition] Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB. [Setting conditions] TCNT = TCORB The TCNT value is transferred to TCORB by an input capture signal when TCORB functions as an input capture register. 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 847 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCORA0--Time Constant Register A0 TCORA1--Time Constant Register A1 TCORA0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 H'FFF84 H'FFF85 8-bit timer channel 0 8-bit timer channel 1 TCORA1 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORB0--Time Constant Register B0 TCORB1--Time Constant Register B1 TCORB0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 H'FFF86 H'FFF87 8-bit timer channel 0 8-bit timer channel 1 TCORB1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCNT0--Timer Counter 0 TCNT1--Timer Counter 1 TCNT0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 H'FFF88 H'FFF89 8-bit timer channel 0 8-bit timer channel 1 TCNT1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 848 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCSR--Timer Control/Status Register 7 OVF Initial value Read/Write 0 R/(W)* 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 1 3 1 H'FFF8C 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W WDT 0 CKS0 0 R/W Bit Clock select 2 to 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Timer enable Timer disabled 0 * TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted Timer enabled 1 * TCNT is counting 1 0 1 Description /2 /32 /64 /128 /256 /512 /2048 /4096 Timer mode select 0 Interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts Watchdog timer: generates a reset signal 1 Overflow flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF [Setting condition] TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00 Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 849 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCNT--Timer Counter 7 6 5 4 H'FFF8D (read), H'FFF8C (write) 3 2 1 WDT 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W Count value RSTCSR--Reset Control/Status Register 7 WRST Initial value Read/Write 0 R/(W)* 6 RSTOE 0 R/W 5 1 4 H'FFF8F (read), H'FFF8E (write) 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 WDT Bit 1 1 Reset output enable 0 1 External output of reset signal is disabled External output of reset signal is enabled Watchdog timer reset 0 [Clearing conditions] Reset signal at RES pin Read WRST when WRST = 1, then write 0 in WRST [Setting condition] 1 TCNT overflow generates a reset signal Note: * Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 850 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCR2--Timer Control Register 2 TCR3--Timer Control Register 3 Bit 7 CMIEB Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 CMIEA 0 R/W 5 OVIE 0 R/W 4 CCLR1 0 R/W 3 CCLR0 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W H'FFF90 H'FFF91 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 CKS0 0 R/W Clock select 2 to 0 CSK2 CSK1 CSK0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 Description Clock input is disabled Internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8 Internal clock, counted on rising edge of /64 Internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8192 Channel 2: Count on TCNT3 overflow signal* Channel 3: Count on TCNT2 compare match A* External clock, counted on falling edge External clock, counted on rising edge External clock, counted on both rising and falling edges 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Note: * If the clock input of channel 2 is the TCNT3 overflow signal and that of channel 3 is the TCNT2 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. Do not use this setting. Counter clear 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 Clearing is disabled Cleared by compare match A Cleared by compare match B/input capture B Cleared by input capture B 1 Timer overflow interrupt enable 0 1 OVI interrupt requested by OVF is disabled OVI interrupt requested by OVF is enabled Compare match interrupt enable A 0 1 CMIA interrupt requested by CMFA is disabled CMIA interrupt requested by CMFA is enabled Compare match interrupt enable B 0 1 CMIB interrupt requested by CMFB is disabled CMIB interrupt requested by CMFB is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 851 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCSR2--Timer Control/Status Register 2 TCSR3--Timer Control/Status Register 3 TCSR2 Bit 7 CMFB Initial value Read/Write TCSR3 Bit 0 R/(W)* 7 CMFB Initial value Read/Write 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 1 4 ICE 0 R/W 3 OIS3 0 R/W 3 OIS3 0 R/W H'FFF92 H'FFF93 2 OIS2 0 R/W 2 OIS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 0 OS0 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W Output select A1 and A0 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description OS1 OS0 0 0 1 0 No change at compare match A 0 output at compare match A 1 output at compare match A Output toggles at compare match A 1 1 Output/input capture edge select B3 and B2 ICE in Bit 3 TCSR3 OIS3 Bit 3 OIS2 Description No change at compare match B 0 output at compare match B 1 output at compare match B Output toggles at compare match B TCORB input capture on rising edge TCORB input capture on falling edge TCORB input capture on both rising and falling edges 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 Input capture enable (TCSR3 only) 0 1 TCORB is a compare match register TCORB is an input capture register Timer overflow flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF. [Setting condition] TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00. Compare match/input capture flag A 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA. [Setting condition] TCNT = TCORA Compare match/input capture flag B 0 [Clearing condition] Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB. [Setting conditions] TCNT = TCORB The TCNT value is transferred to TCORB by an input capture signal when TCORB functions as an input capture register. 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 852 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TCORA2--Time Constant Register A2 TCORA3--Time Constant Register A3 TCORA2 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 H'FFF94 H'FFF95 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 TCORA3 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORB2--Time Constant Register B2 TCORB3--Time Constant Register B3 TCORB2 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 H'FFF96 H'FFF97 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 TCORB3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCNT2--Timer Counter 2 TCNT3--Timer Counter 3 TCNT2 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 H'FFF98 H'FFF99 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 TCNT3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 853 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers DADR0--D/A Data Register 0 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFF9C 2 1 D/A 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W D/A conversion data DADR1--D/A Data Register 1 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFF9D 2 1 D/A 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W D/A conversion data Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 854 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers DACR--D/A Control Register 7 DAOE1 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 DAOE0 0 R/W 5 DAE 0 R/W 4 1 3 1 H'FFF9E 2 1 1 1 D/A 0 1 Bit D/A enable Bit 7 DAOE1 0 Bit 6 DAOE0 0 Bit 5 Description DAE D/A conversion is disabled in channels 0 and 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channel 0 0 1 0 D/A conversion is disabled in channel 1 0 1 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 D/A conversion is disabled in channel 0 D/A conversion is enabled in channel 1 1 0 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 1 0 0 1 1 D/A output enable 0 0 1 DA0 analog output is disabled Channel-0 D/A conversion and DA0 analog output are enabled D/A output enable 1 0 1 DA1 analog output is disabled Channel-1 D/A conversion and DA1 analog output are enabled Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 855 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TPMR--TPC Output Mode Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 G3NOV 0 R/W 2 G2NOV 0 R/W 1 G1NOV 0 R/W H'FFFA0 0 G0NOV 0 R/W TPC Group 0 non-overlap 0 Normal TPC output in group 0. Output values change at compare match A in the selected 16-bit timer channel Non-overlapping TPC output in group 0, controlled by compare match A and B in the selected 16-bit timer channel 1 Group 1 non-overlap 0 1 Normal TPC output in group 1. Output values change at compare match A in the selected 16-bit timer channel Non-overlapping TPC output in group 1, controlled by compare match A and B in the selected 16-bit timer channel Group 2 non-overlap 0 1 Normal TPC output in group 2. Output values change at compare match A in the selected 16-bit timer channel Non-overlapping TPC output in group 2, controlled by compare match A and B in the selected 16-bit timer channel Group 3 non-overlap 0 1 Normal TPC output in group 3. Output values change at compare match A in the selected 16-bit timer channel Non-overlapping TPC output in group 3, controlled by compare match A and B in the selected 16-bit timer channel Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 856 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TPCR--TPC Output Control Register Bit 7 G3CMS1 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 6 G3CMS0 1 R/W 5 G2CMS1 1 R/W 4 G2CMS0 1 R/W 3 G1CMS1 1 R/W 2 G1CMS0 1 R/W 1 G0CMS1 1 R/W H'FFFA1 0 G0CMS0 1 R/W TPC Group 0 compare match select 1 and 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 0 0 1 1 0 1 16-Bit Timer Channel Selected as Output Trigger TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 TPC output group 0 (TP3 to TP0) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 Group 1 compare match select 1 and 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Group 2 compare match select 1 and 0 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 1 0 1 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 0 1 16-Bit Timer Channel Selected as Output Trigger TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 16-Bit Timer Channel Selected as Output Trigger TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 TPC output group 1 (TP7 to TP4) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 Group 3 compare match select 1 and 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 0 1 0 1 G3CMS1 G3CMS0 0 1 16-Bit Timer Channel Selected as Output Trigger TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 857 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers NDERB--Next Data Enable Register B 7 NDER15 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 NDER14 0 R/W 5 NDER13 0 R/W 4 NDER12 0 R/W 3 NDER11 0 R/W H'FFFA2 2 NDER10 0 R/W 1 NDER9 0 R/W TPC 0 NDER8 0 R/W Bit Next data enable 15 to 8 Bits 7 to 0 NDER15 to NDER8 0 Description TPC outputs TP15 to TP8 are disabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are not transferred to PB7 to PB0) TPC outputs TP15 to TP8 are enabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are transferred to PB7 to PB0) 1 NDERA--Next Data Enable Register A 7 NDER7 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 NDER6 0 R/W 5 NDER5 0 R/W 4 NDER4 0 R/W 3 NDER3 0 R/W H'FFFA3 2 NDER2 0 R/W 1 NDER1 0 R/W TPC 0 NDER0 0 R/W Bit Next data enable 7 to 0 Bits 7 to 0 NDER7 to NDER0 0 Description TPC outputs TP7 to TP0 are disabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are not transferred to PA7 to PA0) TPC outputs TP7 to TP0 are enabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are transferred to PA7 to PA0) 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 858 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers NDRB--Next Data Register B * Same trigger for TPC output groups 2 and 3 Address H'FFFA4 Bit 7 NDR15 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 NDR14 0 R/W 5 NDR13 0 R/W 4 NDR12 0 R/W 3 NDR11 0 R/W 2 NDR10 0 R/W 1 NDR9 0 R/W 0 NDR8 0 R/W H'FFFA4/H'FFFA6 TPC Store the next output data for TPC output group 3 Store the next output data for TPC output group 2 Address H'FFFA6 Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 * Different triggers for TPC output groups 2 and 3 Address H'FFFA4 Bit 7 NDR15 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 NDR14 0 R/W 5 NDR13 0 R/W 4 NDR12 0 R/W 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Store the next output data for TPC output group 3 Address H'FFFA6 Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 NDR11 0 R/W 2 NDR10 0 R/W 1 NDR9 0 R/W 0 NDR8 0 R/W Store the next output data for TPC output group 2 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 859 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers NDRA--Next Data Register A * Same trigger for TPC output groups 0 and 1 Address H'FFFA5 Bit 7 NDR7 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 NDR6 0 R/W 5 NDR5 0 R/W 4 NDR4 0 R/W 3 NDR3 0 R/W 2 NDR2 0 R/W 1 NDR1 0 R/W 0 NDR0 0 R/W H'FFFA5/H'FFFA7 TPC Store the next output data for TPC output group 1 Store the next output data for TPC output group 0 Address H'FFFA7 Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 * Different triggers for TPC output groups 0 and 1 Address H'FFFA5 Bit 7 NDR7 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 NDR6 0 R/W 5 NDR5 0 R/W 4 NDR4 0 R/W 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Store the next output data for TPC output group 1 Address H'FFFA7 Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 NDR3 0 R/W 2 NDR2 0 R/W 1 NDR1 0 R/W 0 NDR0 0 R/W Store the next output data for TPC output group 0 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 860 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers SMR--Serial Mode Register Bit 7 C/A Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W H'FFFB0 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W SCI0 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock select 1 and 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS1 CKS0 Clock Source clock /4 clock /16 clock /64 clock 0 0 1 0 1 1 Multiprocessor mode 0 1 Multiprocessor function disabled Multiprocessor format selected Stop bit length 0 1 Parity mode 0 1 Parity enable 0 1 Character length 0 1 8-bit data 7-bit data Parity bit is not added or checked Parity bit is added and checked Even parity Odd parity One stop bit Two stop bits Communication mode (for serial communication interface) 0 1 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode GSM mode (for smart card interface) 0 1 TEND flag is set 12.5 etu* after start bit TEND flag is set 11.0 etu* after start bit Note: * etu: Elementary time unit (time required to transmit one bit) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 861 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers BRR--Bit Rate Register 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFFB1 2 1 SCI0 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W Serial communication bit rate setting Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 862 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers SCR--Serial Control Register Bit 7 TIE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W H'FFFB2 0 CKE0 0 R/W SCI0 Receive enable 0 1 Receiving is disabled Receiving is enabled Transmit enable 0 1 Transmitting is disabled Transmitting is enabled Clock enable 1 and 0 (for serial communication interface) Bit 1 Bit 0 Description CKE1 CKE0 Internal clock, SCK pin Asynchronous mode available for generic I/O 0 Internal clock, SCK pin Synchronous mode used for serial clock output 0 Internal clock, SCK pin Asynchronous mode used for clock output 1 Internal clock, SCK pin Synchronous mode used for serial clock output External clock, SCK pin Asynchronous mode used for clock input 0 External clock, SCK pin Synchronous mode used for serial clock input 1 External clock, SCK pin Asynchronous mode used for clock input 1 External clock, SCK pin Synchronous mode used for serial clock input Clock enable 1 and 0 (for smart card interface) SMR Bit 1 Bit 0 Description GM CKE1 CKE0 SCK pin available for generic I/O 0 0 0 SCK pin used for clock output 1 SCK pin output fixed low 0 0 SCK pin used for clock output 1 1 SCK pin output fixed high 0 1 SCK pin used for clock output 1 Transmit-end interrupt enable 0 1 Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are disabled Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are enabled Multiprocessor interrupt enable 0 1 Receive interrupt enable 0 1 Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are disabled Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are enabled Multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) Multiprocessor interrupts are enabled Transmit interrupt enable 0 1 Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 863 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TDR--Transmit Data Register 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFFB3 2 1 SCI0 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W Serial transmit data Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 864 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers SSR--Serial Status Register Bit 7 TDRE Initial value Read/Write 1 R/(W)* 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* 4 FER/ERS 0 R/(W)* 3 PER 0 R/(W)* 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R H'FFFB4 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor bit transfer SCI0 0 Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 1 Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1 Multiprocessor bit Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1 Transmit end (for serial communication interface) 0 [Clearing conditions] Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE. The DMAC writes data in TDR. [Setting conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode TE is cleared to 0 in SCR. TDRE is 1 when last bit of 1-byte serial character is transmitted. 0 1 Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0 1 Transmit end (for smart card interface) 0 [Clearing conditions] Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE. The DMAC writes data in TDR. [Setting conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode TE is cleared to 0 in SCR and FER/ERS is cleared to 0. TDRE is 1 and FER/ERS is 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu* (when GM = 0) or 1.0 etu (when GM = 1) after 1-byte serial character is transmitted. 1 Note: * etu: Elementary time unit (time required to transmit one bit) Parity error 0 1 [Clearing conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode Read PER when PER = 1, then write 0 in PER. [Setting condition] Parity error (parity of receive data does not match parity setting of O/E bit in SMR) Framing error (for serial communication interface) 0 1 [Clearing conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode Read FER when FER = 1, then write 0 in FER. [Setting condition] Framing error (stop bit is 0) [Clearing conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode Read ERS when ERS = 1, then write 0 in ERS. [Setting condition] A low error signal is received. Error signal status (for smart card interface) 0 1 Overrun error 0 1 [Clearing conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode Read ORER when ORER = 1, then write 0 in ORER. [Setting condition] Overrun error (reception of the next serial data ends when RDRF = 1) Receive data register full 0 1 [Clearing conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode Read RDRF when RDRF = 1, then write 0 in RDRF. The DMAC reads data from RDR. [Setting condition] Serial data is received normally and transferred from RSR to RDR. Transmit data register empty 0 1 [Clearing conditions] Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE. The DMAC writes data in TDR. [Setting conditions] Reset or transition to standby mode TE is 0 in SCR. Data is transferred from TDR to TSR, enabling new data to be written in TDR Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 865 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers RDR--Receive Data Register 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFFB5 2 1 SCI0 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R Serial receive data Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 866 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers SCMR--Smart Card Mode Register Bit 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 SDIR 0 R/W 2 SINV 0 R/W 1 1 0 SMIF 0 R/W H'FFFB6 SCI0 Smart card interface mode select 0 1 Smart card interface function is disabled Smart card interface function is enabled (Initial value) Smart card data invert Unmodified TDR contents are transmitted 0 Receive data is stored unmodified in RDR Inverted 1/0 logic levels of TDR contents are transmitted 1/0 logic levels of received data are inverted before storage in RDR (Initial value) 1 Smart card data transfer direction TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first 0 Receive data is stored LSB-first in RDR TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first Receive data is stored MSB-first in RDR (Initial value) 1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 867 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers SMR--Serial Mode Register 7 C/A Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W H'FFFB8 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W SCI1 0 CKS0 0 R/W Bit Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. BRR--Bit Rate Register 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFFB9 2 1 SCI1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. SCR--Serial Control Register 7 TIE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W H'FFFBA 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W SCI1 0 CKE0 0 R/W Bit Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 868 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers TDR--Transmit Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFFBB 2 1 SCI1 0 Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. SSR--Serial Status Register 7 TDRE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/(W)* 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* 4 FER/ERS 0 R/(W)* 3 PER 0 R/(W)* H'FFFBC 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R SCI1 0 MPBT 0 R/W Bit Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. RDR--Receive Data Register 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFFBD 2 1 SCI1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 869 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers SCMR--Smart Card Mode Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 SDIR 0 R/W H'FFFBE 2 SINV 0 R/W 1 1 SCI1 0 SMIF 0 R/W Bit Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. SMR--Serial Mode Register 7 C/A Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W H'FFFC0 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W SCI2 0 CKS0 0 R/W Bit Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. BRR--Bit Rate Register 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFFC1 2 1 SCI2 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 870 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers SCR--Serial Control Register 7 TIE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W H'FFFC2 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W SCI2 0 CKE0 0 R/W Bit Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. TDR--Transmit Data Register 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFFC3 2 1 SCI2 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W 1 R/W Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. SSR--Serial Status Register 7 TDRE Initial value Read/Write 1 R/(W)* 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* 4 FER/ERS 0 R/(W)* 3 PER 0 R/(W)* H'FFFC4 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R SCI2 0 MPBT 0 R/W Bit Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 871 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers RDR--Receive Data Register 7 6 5 4 3 H'FFFC5 2 1 SCI2 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. SCMR--Smart Card Mode Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 SDIR 0 R/W H'FFFC6 2 SINV 0 R/W 1 1 SCI2 0 SMIF 0 R/W Bit Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0. P1DR--Port 1 Data Register 7 P17 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 P16 0 R/W 5 P15 0 R/W 4 P14 0 R/W 3 P13 0 R/W H'FFFD0 2 P12 0 R/W 1 P11 0 R/W Port 1 0 P10 0 R/W Bit Data for port 1 pins Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 872 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers P2DR--Port 2 Data Register 7 P27 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 P26 0 R/W 5 P25 0 R/W 4 P24 0 R/W 3 P23 0 R/W H'FFFD1 2 P22 0 R/W 1 P21 0 R/W Port 2 0 P20 0 R/W Bit Data for port 2 pins P3DR--Port 3 Data Register 7 P37 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 P36 0 R/W 5 P35 0 R/W 4 P34 0 R/W 3 P33 0 R/W H'FFFD2 2 P32 0 R/W 1 P31 0 R/W Port 3 0 P30 0 R/W Bit Data for port 3 pins P4DR--Port 4 Data Register 7 P47 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 P46 0 R/W 5 P45 0 R/W 4 P44 0 R/W 3 P43 0 R/W H'FFFD3 2 P42 0 R/W 1 P41 0 R/W Port 4 0 P40 0 R/W Bit Data for port 4 pins Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 873 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers P5DR--Port 5 Data Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 P53 0 R/W H'FFFD4 2 P52 0 R/W 1 P51 0 R/W Port 5 0 P50 0 R/W Bit Data for port 5 pins P6DR--Port 6 Data Register 7 P67 Initial value Read/Write 1 R 6 P66 0 R/W 5 P65 0 R/W 4 P64 0 R/W 3 P63 0 R/W H'FFFD5 2 P62 0 R/W 1 P61 0 R/W Port 6 0 P60 0 R/W Bit Data for port 6 pins P7DR--Port 7 Data Register 7 P77 Initial value Read/Write * R 6 P76 * R 5 P75 * R 4 P74 * R 3 P73 * R H'FFFD6 2 P72 * R 1 P71 * R Port 7 0 P70 * R Bit Data for port 7 pins Note: * Determined by pins P77 to P70. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 874 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers P8DR--Port 8 Data Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 1 4 P84 0 R/W 3 P83 0 R/W H'FFFD7 2 P82 0 R/W 1 P81 0 R/W Port 8 0 P80 0 R/W Bit Data for port 8 pins P9DR--Port 9 Data Register 7 Initial value Read/Write 1 6 1 5 P95 0 R/W 4 P94 0 R/W 3 P93 0 R/W H'FFFD8 2 P92 0 R/W 1 P91 0 R/W Port 9 0 P90 0 R/W Bit Data for port 9 pins PADR--Port A Data Register 7 PA7 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 PA6 0 R/W 5 PA5 0 R/W 4 PA4 0 R/W 3 PA3 0 R/W H'FFFD9 2 PA2 0 R/W 1 PA1 0 R/W Port A 0 PA0 0 R/W Bit Data for port A pins Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 875 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers PBDR--Port B Data Register 7 PB7 Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 PB6 0 R/W 5 PB5 0 R/W 4 PB4 0 R/W 3 PB3 0 R/W H'FFFDA 2 PB2 0 R/W 1 PB1 0 R/W Port B 0 PB0 0 R/W Bit Data for port B pins ADDRA H/L--A/D Data Register A H/L 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 H'FFFE0, H'FFFE1 5 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R A/D Bit AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R ADDRAH ADDRAL A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result ADDRB H/L--A/D Data Register B H/L Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 H'FFFE2, H'FFFE3 5 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R A/D AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R ADDRBH ADDRBL A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 876 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ADDRC H/L--A/D Data Register C H/L 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 H'FFFE4, H'FFFE5 5 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R A/D Bit AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R ADDRCH ADDRCL A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result ADDRD H/L--A/D Data Register D H/L 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 H'FFFE6, H'FFFE7 5 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R A/D Bit AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R ADDRDH ADDRDL A/D conversion data 10-bit data giving an A/D conversion result ADCR--A/D Control Register Bit 7 TRGE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 H'FFFE9 2 1 1 1 0 0 R/W A/D Trigger Enable 0 1 A/D conversion start by external trigger or 8-bit timer compare match is disabled A/D conversion is started by falling edge of external trigger signal (ADTRG) or 8-bit timer compare match Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 877 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ADCSR--A/D Control/Status Register Bit 7 ADF Initial value Read/Write 0 R/(W)* 6 ADIE 0 R/W 5 ADST 0 R/W 4 SCAN 0 R/W 3 CKS 0 R/W 2 CH2 0 R/W 1 CH1 0 R/W H'FFFE8 0 CH0 0 R/W A/D Channel select 2 to 0 Clock select Conversion time = Group Selection Channel Selection Description 0 134 states (maximum) CH2 CH1 CH0 Single Mode Scan Mode AN0 0 AN0 Conversion time = 1 0 1 AN1 AN0, AN1 70 states (maximum) 0 0 AN2 AN0 to AN2 1 1 AN3 AN0 to AN3 0 AN4 AN4 0 Scan mode 1 AN5 AN4, AN5 1 Single mode 0 0 AN6 AN4 to AN6 1 1 Scan mode 1 AN7 AN4 to AN7 A/D start 0 A/D conversion is stopped Single mode: A/D conversion starts; ADST is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends 1 Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected channels ADST is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a transition to standby mode A/D interrupt enable 0 1 A/D end flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] Read ADF when ADF = 1, then write 0 in ADF The DMAC is activated by an ADI interrupt [Setting conditions] Single mode: A/D conversion ends Scan mode: A/D conversion ends in all selected channels A/D end interrupt request is disabled A/D end interrupt request is enabled Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 878 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram Software standby SSOE Internal data bus (upper) Mode 1 to 4 Reset R Q P1 n DDR C WP1D Reset D Mode 6/7 R P1n Q P1 nDR C WP1 D Mode 1 to 5 RP1 WP1D: Write to P1DDR WP1: Write to port 1 RP1: Read port 1 SSOE: Software standby output port enable n = 0 to 7 Figure C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 879 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Internal address bus Hardware standby External bus released Mode 6/7 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.2 Port 2 Block Diagram Software standby Reset Internal data bus (upper) SSOE R Q P2 n PCR C RP2P Mode 6/7 Hardware standby External bus released Reset Mode 1 to 4 R Q P2n DDR C WP2D Reset Mode 6/7 R Q P2 nDR C WP2 D D WP2P D P2n Mode 1 to 5 RP2 WP2P: Write to P2PCR RP2P: Read P2PCR WP2D: Write to P2DDR WP2: Write to port 2 RP2: Read port 2 SSOE: Software standby output port enable n = 0 to 7 Figure C.2 Port 2 Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 880 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Internal address bus Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.3 Port 3 Block Diagram Internal data bus (upper) Reset Hardware standby External bus released R Mode 6/7 Q Write to external address P3 n DDR C WP3D Reset R Mode 6/7 P3n Q P3 nDR C WP3 D D Mode 1 to 5 RP3 Read external address WP3D: Write to P3DDR WP3: Write to port 3 RP3: Read port 3 n = 0 to 7 Figure C.3 Port 3 Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 881 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Internal data bus (lower) Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.4 Port 4 Block Diagram 8-bit bus 16-bit bus mode mode Mode 6/7 Mode 1 to 5 Reset Internal data bus (upper) Internal data bus (lower) R Q P4 n PCR RP4P Hardware standby Write to external address External bus release Q P4 n DDR C WP4D Reset R P4n Q P4n DR C WP4 D C WP4P Reset R D D RP4 Read external address WP4P: Write to P4PCR RP4P: Read P4PCR WP4D: Write to P4DDR WP4: Write to port 4 RP4: Read port 4 n = 0 to 7 Figure C.4 Port 4 Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 882 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.5 Port 5 Block Diagram Software standby SSOE Reset Q P5 n PCR RP5P C WP5P Mode 1 to 4 D Internal data bus (upper) R Hardware standby External bus released Mode 6/7 Reset R Q P5 n DDR C WP5D Reset R Q P5n DR C D D Mode 6/7 P5n Mode 1 to 5 WP5 RP5 WP5P: Write to P5PCR RP5P: Read P5PCR WP5D: Write to P5DDR WP5: Write to port 5 RP5: Read port 5 SSOE: Software standby output port enable n = 0 to 3 Figure C.5 Port 5 Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 883 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Internal address bus Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.6 Port 6 Block Diagrams Reset Hardware standby Q P60 DDR C WP6D D Internal data bus R Bus controller WAIT input enable Mode 6/7 Reset R P60 Q P60 DR C WP6 D RP6 Bus controller WAIT input WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 Figure C.6 (a) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P60) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 884 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset Internal data bus R Hardware standby Mode 6/7 Q P6 1 DDR C WP6D Reset R P61 Q P61 DR C WP6 D D Bus controller Bus release enable RP6 BREQ input WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 Figure C.6 (b) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P61) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 885 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset Hardware standby Q P6 2 DDR C WP6D Reset R P62 Q P62 DR C Mode 6/7 WP6 D Bus controller Bus release enable BACK output R D Internal data bus RP6 WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 Figure C.6 (c) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P62) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 886 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams SSOE Software standby Mode 6/7 Hardware standby External bus released Reset R Q P6 3 DDR C WP6D Reset R Mode 6/7 D Internal data bus Mode 6/7 P63 Q Mode 1 to 5 P6 3DR C WP6 D Bus controller AS output RP6 WP6D: WP6: RP6: SSOE: Write to P6DDR Write to port 6 Read port 6 Software standby output port enable Figure C.6 (d) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P63) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 887 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams SSOE Software standby Mode 6/7 Hardware standby External bus released Reset R Q P6 4 DDR C WP6D Reset R Mode 6/7 D Internal data bus Mode 6/7 P64 Mode 1 to 5 Q P6 4DR C WP6 D Bus controller WE output enable RD output WE output RP6 WP6D: WP6: RP6: SSOE: Write to P6DDR Write to port 6 Read port 6 Software standby output port enable Figure C.6 (e) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P64) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 888 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams SSOE Software standby Mode 6/7 Hardware standby External bus released Reset R Q P6 n DDR C WP6D Reset R Mode 6/7 D Internal data bus Mode 6/7 P6n Mode 1 to 5 Q P6 nDR C WP6 D Bus controller CAS output enable HWR output LWR output UCAS output LCAS output RP6 WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 SSOE: Software standby output port enable n = 5 and 6 Figure C.6 (f) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pins P65 and P66) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 889 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Hardware standby output enable Internal data bus P67 output RP6 RP6: Read port 6 Figure C.6 (g) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P67) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 890 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.7 Port 7 Block Diagrams RP7 P7 n Internal data bus A/D converter Analog input RP7: Read port 7 n = 0 to 5 Input enable Channel select signal Figure C.7 (a) Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P70 to P75) RP7 P7 n Internal data bus A/D converter Analog input Input enable Channel select signal D/A converter Output enable Analog output RP7: Read port 7 n = 6 and 7 Figure C.7 (b) Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P76 and P77) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 891 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.8 Port 8 Block Diagrams Hardware standby Q P8 0 DDR C D WP8D Reset R P80 Q P80 DR C Mode 6/7 WP8 D Internal data bus SSOE Software standby External bus released Reset R Bus controller Self-refresh output enable RFSH output enable RFSH output RP8 Interrupt controller WP8D: WP8: RP8: SSOE: Write to P8DDR Write to port 8 Read port 8 Software standby output port enable IRQ 0 input Figure C.8 (a) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P80) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 892 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams SSOE Software standby External bus release Reset R Hardware standby Q P8 1 DDR C WP8D Mode 6/7 P8n Mode 1 to 5 Q P81 DR C WP8 CS3 output RAS3 output RAS3 output enable Area 3 DRAM connection enable Bus controller Reset R D D Internal data bus RP8 Interrupt controller IRQ1 input WP8D: WP8: RP8: SSOE: Write to P8DDR Write to port 8 Read port 8 Software standby output port enable Figure C.8 (b) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P81) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 893 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams SSOE Software standby External bus release Reset Hardware standby R Q P8 2 DDR C WP8D Reset Mode 6/7 P82 Mode 1 to 5 Q P82 DR C WP8 CS2 output RAS2 output RAS2 output enable Bus controller R D D RP8 Interrupt controller Internal data bus IRQ2 input WP8D: WP8: RP8: SSOE: Write to P8DDR Write to port 8 Read port 8 Software standby output port enable Figure C.8 (c) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P82) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 894 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Mode 6/7 Software standby SSOE External bus release Reset R Q D P83DDR C WP8D CS1 output Reset Mode 6/7 P83 Mode 1 to 5 R Q D P83DR C WP8 Internal data bus Hardware standby Bus controller RP8 Interrupt controller IRQ3 input A/D converter ADTRG input WP8D: WP8: RP8: SSOE: Write to P8DDR Write to port 8 Read port 8 Software standby output port enable Figure C.8 (d) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P83) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 895 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset Mode 1 to 4 Mode 6/7 Software standby S Q R D Internal data bus SSOE External bus release Hardware standby P8 4 DDR C WP8D Reset R Bus controller CS 0 output Mode 6/7 P84 Mode 1 to 5 Q P84 DR C WP8 D RP8 WP8D: WP8: RP8: SSOE: Write to P8DDR Write to port 8 Read port 8 Software standby output port enable Figure C.8 (e) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P84) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 896 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.9 Port 9 Block Diagrams Reset Q P9 0 DDR C WP9D Reset R P90 Q P90 DR C WP9 D D SCI Output enable Serial transmit data Guard time RP9 WP9D: Write to P9DDR WP9: Write to port 9 RP9: Read port 9 Figure C.9 (a) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P90) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 897 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Internal data bus Hardware standby R Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset Q P9 1 DDR C D WP9D Reset R P91 Q P91 DR C WP9 D Internal data bus SCI Output enable Serial transmit data Guard time Hardware standby R RP9 WP9D: Write to P9DDR WP9: Write to port 9 RP9: Read port 9 Figure C.9 (b) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P91) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 898 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset R Hardware standby Q P9 2 DDR C WP9D Reset R P9 2 D Internal data bus SCI Input enable Q P9 2 DR C WP9 D RP9 Serial receive data WP9D: Write to P9DDR WP9: Write to port 9 RP9: Read port 9 Figure C.9 (c) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P92) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 899 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset R Q D P93DDR C WP9D Reset P93 R Q D P93DR C WP9 Hardware standby Internal data bus SCI Input enable RP9 Serial receive data WP9D: Write to P9DDR WP9: Write to port 9 RP9: Read port 9 Figure C.9 (d) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P93) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 900 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset R Hardware standby Q P9 4DDR C WP9D Reset R P9 4 Q P9 4 DR C WP9 Clock output enable Clock output D D Internal data bus SCI Clock input enable RP9 Clock input WP9D: Write to P9DDR WP9: Write to port 9 RP9: Read port 9 Interrupt controller IRQ 4 input Figure C.9 (e) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P94) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 901 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset Hardware standby R Q D P95DDR C WP9D Reset P95 R Q D P95DR C WP9 Internal data bus SCI Clock input enable Clock output enable Clock output RP9 Clock input Interrupt controller IRQ5 input WP9D : Write to P9DDR WP9 : Write to port 9 RP9 : Read port 9 Figure C.9 (f) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P95) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 902 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.10 Port A Block Diagrams Reset Hardware standby Q PA n DDR C WPAD Reset R R D Internal data bus TPC PA n Q PA n DR C D TPC output enable Next data WPA Output trigger DMA controller Output enable Transfer end output RPA 16-bit timer Counter clock input 8-bit timer Counter clock input WPAD: Write to PADDR WPA: Write to port A RPA: Read port A n = 0 and 1 Figure C.10 (a) Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA0, PA1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 903 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset Hardware standby Q PA n DDR C WPAD Reset R PA n Q PAn DR C D R D Internal data bus TPC TPC output enable Next data WPA Output trigger 16-bit timer Output enable Compare match output RPA Input capture Counter clock input 8-bit timer Counter clock input WPAD: Write to PADDR WPA: Write to port A RPA: Read port A n = 2 and 3 Figure C.10 (b) Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA2, PA3) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 904 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Software standby Bus released SSOE Hardware standby Q R D PAnDDR C WPAD Reset R Internal address bus Internal data bus Address output enable Mode 3/4 Reset TPC PA n TPC output enable D Next data Q PAnDR C WPA Output trigger 16-bit timer Output enable Compare match output PRA Input capture WPAD: Write to PADDR WPA: Write to port A RPA: Read port A SSOE: Software standby output port enable n = 4 to 7 Note: The PA7 address output enable setting is fixed at 1 in modes 3 and 4. Figure C.10 (c) Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA4 to PA7) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 905 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.11 Port B Block Diagrams Software standby SSOE Hardware standby Q PB n DDR C Bus released WPBD R D Internal data bus Reset Bus controller CS7 output CS output enable TPC TPC output enable Reset PB Mode 1 to 5 n R Q PB n DR C D Next data WPB Output trigger 8-bit timer Output enable Compare match output RPB WPBD: WPB: RPB: SSOE: Write to PBDDR Write to port B Read port B Software standby output port enable Figure C.11 (a) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB0) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 906 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams SSOE Hardware standby Software standby Reset R Q D PBnDDR C WPBD Reset R Q D PBnDR C WPB Internal data bus Bus controller CS6 output Bus released Mode 1 to 5 PBn CS output enable TPC TPC output enable Next data Output trigger 8-bit timer Output enable Compare match output RPB TMO2 TMO3 input DMAC DREQ0 DREQ1 input WPBD: WPB: RPB: SSOE: Write to PBDDR Write to port B Read port B Software standby output port enable Figure C.11 (b) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB1) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 907 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams SSOE Software standby External bus release Reset Hardware standby R Q D PB2DDR C WPBD Internal data bus Bus controller RAS5 output enable Area 5 DRAM connection output enable RAS5 output PB2 Mode 6/7 Reset R Q D PB2DR C CS5 output CS5 output enable TPC TPC output enable Next data WPB Output trigger 8-bit timer Output enable Compare match output RPB WPBD: WPB: RPB: SSOE: Write to PBDDR Write to port B Read port B Software standby output port enable Figure C.11 (c) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB2) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 908 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams SSOE Software standby External bus release Reset Hardware standby R Q D PB2DDR C WPBD Internal data bus Bus controller RAS5 output enable Area 5 DRAM connection output enable RAS5 output PB2 Mode 6/7 Reset R Q D PB2DR C CS5 output CS5 output enable TPC TPC output enable Next data WPB Output trigger 8-bit timer Output enable Compare match output RPB TMIO3 input DMAC DREQ1 input WPBD: WPB: RPB: SSOE: Write to PBDDR Write to port B Read port B Software standby output port enable Figure C.11 (d) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB3) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 909 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Hardware standby External bus release SSOE Software standby R Q PB 4 DDR C WPBD Reset R PB4 Q PB 4 DR C D D Internal data bus WPB Reset TPC TPC output enable Next data Output trigger Bus controller Output enable CAS output RPB WPBD: WPB: RPB: SSOE: Write to PBDDR Write to port B Read port B Software standby output port enable Note: In modes 6 and 7, CAS output enable is fixed at 0. Figure C.11 (e) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB4) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 910 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams External bus release Software standby SSOE Hardware standby Reset R Q D PB5DDR C WPBD Reset R Q D PB5DR C WPB Internal data bus SCI Clock input enable TPC TPC output enable Next data Output trigger Bus controller CAS output enable CAS output SCI Clock output enable Clock output Clock input PB5 RPB WPBD: WPB: RPB: SSOE: Note: In modes 6 and 7, CAS output enable is fixed at 0. Write to PBDDR Write to port B Read port B Software standby output port enable Figure C.11 (f) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB5) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 911 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset Hardware standby Q R PB 6 DDR C WPBD Reset R PB6 Q PB6 DR C D TPC output enable Next data D Internal data bus WPB TPC Output trigger SCI Output enable Serial transmit data Guard time RPB WPBD: Write to PBDDR WPB: Write to port B RPB: Read port B Figure C.11 (g) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB6) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 912 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Reset R Hardware standby Q PB 7 DDR C WPBD Reset R PB7 Q PB7 DR C D D Internal data bus WPB SCI Input enable TPC TPC output enable Next data Output trigger RPB SCI WPBD: Write to PBDDR WPB: Write to port B RPB: Read port B Serial receive data Figure C.11 (h) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB7) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 913 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States Appendix D Pin States D.1 Port States in Each Mode Port States Bus-Released Mode T* T 17 Table D.1 Hardware Pin Standby Software Standby Name Mode Reset Mode Mode 17 RESO * Program Execution Mode T* 17 T* 17 T* T 17 T (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) Keep (DDR = 0) Keep (DDR=1, SSOE=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=1) Keep Keep (SSOE = 0) T (SSOE = 1) Keep (DDR = 0) Keep (DDR=1,SSOE=0) T (DDR=1,SSOE=1) Keep Keep T Keep Keep T Keep P17 to 1 to 4 L P10 A7 to A0 5 T T T (DDR=0) Input port (DDR=1) A7 to A0 6, 7 T T T -- T I/O port A15 to A8 P27 to 1 to 4 L P20 5 T T T (DDR=0) Input port (DDR=1) A15 to A8 6, 7 T T T T T T T -- T -- Keep T -- I/O port D15 to D8 I/O port I/O port D7 to D0 I/O port P37 to 1 to 5 T P30 6, 7 T P47 to 1, 3, 5 T P40 2, 4 T 6, 7 T Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 914 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States Hardware Pin Standby Software Standby Name Mode Reset Mode Mode P53 to 1 to 4 L P50 T (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) Keep (DDR=0) Keep (DDR=1, SSOE=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=1) Keep Keep Keep Keep (BRLE=0) Keep (BRLE=1) T Keep (BRLE=0) Keep (BRLE=1) H Keep (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) H Keep (PSTOP=0) H (PSTOP=1) Keep T Bus-Released Mode T Program Execution Mode A19 to A16 5 T T T (DDR=0) Input port (DDR=1) A19 to A16 6, 7 P60 T T T T T -- Keep -- T I/O port I/O port WAIT I/O port I/O port BREQ 1 to 5 T 6, 7 T P61 1 to 5 T 6, 7 P62 T T T -- L I/O port (BRLE=0) I/O port (BRLE=1) BACK I/O port AS, RD, HWR, LWR 1 to 5 T 6, 7 T T T -- T P66 to 1 to 5 H P63 6, 7 P67 T T -- (PSTOP=0) (PSTOP=1) Keep T I/O port (PSTOP=0) (PSTOP=1) Input port Input port 1 to 7 Clock T output P77 to 1 to 7 T P70 T Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 915 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States Hardware Pin Standby Software Standby Name Mode Reset Mode Mode P80 1 to 5 T T Bus-Released Mode Program Execution Mode (RFSHE=0) I/O port (RFSHE=1) RFSH When DRAM space When DRAM space 1 1 is not selected* is selected* (RFSHE=0) (RFSHE=0) Keep Keep (RFSHE=1) (RFSHE=1) Illegal setting Illegal setting When DRAM space When DRAM space 2 2 is selected* is selected* (RFSHE=0) (RFSHE=0) Keep Keep (RFSHE=1, (RFSHE=1) SRFMD=0, SSOE=0) T T (RFSHE=1, SRFMD=0, SSOE=1) H (RFSHE=1, SRFMD=1) RFSH Keep When DRAM space 3 is selected* (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) H When DRAM space 4 is selected* Keep 51 Otherwise* * (DDR=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=1) H Keep -- When DRAM space 3 is selected* T When DRAM space 4 is selected* Keep 1 Otherwise* (DDR=0) Keep (DDR=1) T 6, 7 P81 T T T I/O port When DRAM space is selected and RAS3 is output RAS3 When DRAM space is selected and RAS3 is not output I/O port Otherwise (DDR=0) Input port (DDR=1) CS3 1 to 5 T 6, 7 T T -- I/O port Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 916 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States Hardware Pin Standby Software Standby Name Mode Reset Mode Mode P82 1 to 5 T T RAS2 output* (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) H 1 Otherwise* (DDR=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=1) H 2 Bus-Released Mode RAS2 output* T 1 Otherwise* (DDR=0) Keep (DDR=1) T 2 Program Execution Mode RAS2 output RAS2 Otherwise (DDR=0) I/O port (DDR=1) CS2 6, 7 P83 T T T Keep (DDR=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=1) H Keep (DDR=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=1) H (DDR=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=0) T (DDR=1, SSOE=1) H Keep Keep Keep Keep -- (DDR=0) Keep (DDR=1) T I/O port (DDR=0) Input port (DDR=1) CS1 1 to 5 T 6, 7 P84 T T T -- (DDR = 0) Keep (DDR = 1) T I/O port (DDR = 0) Input port (DDR = 1) CS0 1 to 4 H 5 T T (DDR=0) Keep (DDR=1) T (DDR=0) Input port (DDR=1) CS0 6, 7 T T T T T -- Keep Keep Keep I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port P95 to 1 to 7 T P90 PA3 to 1 to 7 T PA0 PA6 to 1, 2, 6, T PA4 7 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 917 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States Hardware Pin Standby Software Standby Name Mode Reset Mode Mode PA6 to 3 to 5 T PA4 T Address output* (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) Keep 6 Otherwise* Keep Keep (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) Keep When A20E = 0 SSOE = 0 T SSOE = 1 Keep When A20E = 1 Keep Keep CS output* (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) H 8 Otherwise* Keep Keep RAS5 output* (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) H 10 CS output* (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) H 11 Otherwise* Keep Keep 9 7 5 Bus-Released Mode 5 Address output* T 6 Otherwise* Keep Program Execution Mode Address output A23 to A21 Otherwise I/O port PA7 1, 2 3, 4 T L T T Keep T I/O port A20 5 L T When A20E = 0 T When A20E = 1 Keep When A20E = 0 A20 When A20E = 1 I/O port 6, 7 T T T -- CS output* T 8 Otherwise* Keep 7 I/O port CS output CS7 to CS6 Otherwise I/O port PB1 to 1 to 5 T PB0 6, 7 PB2 T T T -- RAS5 output* T 10 CS output* T 11 Otherwise* Keep 9 I/O port RAS5 output RAS5 CS output CS5 Otherwise I/O port 1 to 5 T 6, 7 T T -- I/O port Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 918 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States Hardware Pin Standby Software Standby Name Mode Reset Mode Mode PB3 1 to 5 T T RAS4 output* (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) H 13 CS output* (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) H 14 Otherwise* Keep Keep CAS output (SSOE=0) T (SSOE=1) H 16 Otherwise* Keep Keep Keep *15 12 Bus-Released Mode RAS4 output* T 13 CS output* T 14 Otherwise* Keep 12 Program Execution Mode RAS4 output RAS4 CS output CS4 Otherwise I/O port 6, 7 T T T -- CAS output T 16 Otherwise* Keep *15 I/O port CAS output UCAS, LCAS Otherwise I/O port PB5 to 1 to 5 T PB4 6, 7 T T T -- Keep I/O port I/O port PB7 to 1 to 7 T PB6 Legend H: High L: Low T: High-impedance state Keep: Input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state. DDR: Data direction register Notes: 1. When bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) are all cleared to 0. 2. When any of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, or DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is set to 1. 3. When the setting of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is 010, 100, or 101. 4. When the setting of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is other than 010, 100, 101, or 000. 5. When bit A23E, A22E, or A21E, respectively, in BRCR (bus release control register) is cleared to 0. 6 When bit A23E, A22E, or A21E, respectively, in BRCR (bus release control register) is set to 1. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 919 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States 7. When bit CS7E or CS6E, respectively, in CSCR (chip select control register) is set to 1. 8. When bit CS7E or CS6E, respectively, in CSCR (chip select control register) is cleared to 0. 9. When the setting of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is 101. 10. When the setting of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is other than 101, and bit CS5E in CSCR (chip select control register) is set to 1. 11. When the setting of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is other than 101, and bit CS5E in CSCR (chip select control register) is cleared to 0. 12. When the setting of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is 100, 101, or 110. 13. When the setting of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is other than 100, 101, or 110, and bit CS4E in CSCR (chip select control register) is set to 1. 14. When the setting of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is other than 100, 101, or 110, and bit CS4E in CSCR (chip select control register) is cleared to 0. 15. When any of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, or DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is set to 1, and bit CSEL in DRCRB (DRAM control register B) is cleared to 0. 16. When any of bits DRAS2, DRAS1, or DRAS0 in DRCRA (DRAM control register A) is set to 1, and bit CSEL in DRCRB (DRAM control register B) is set to 1; or, when bits DRAS2, DRAS1, and DRAS0 are all cleared to 0. 17. RESO output is a mask ROM version function. A low level is output only in the case of a reset due to WDT overflow. There is no bus-released state in modes 6 and 7. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 920 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States D.2 Pin States at Reset Modes 1 and 2: Figure D.1 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during an external memory access in mode 1 or 2. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. AS, RD, HWR, LWR, and CS0 go high, and D15 to D0 go to the high-impedance state. The address bus is initialized to the low output level 2.5 clock cycles after the low level of RES is sampled. Clock pin P67/ goes to the output state at the next rise of after RES goes low. Access to external memory T1 P67/ RES Internal reset signal A19 to A0 CS0 AS, RD (read) HWR, LWR (write) D15 to D0 (write) I/O port, CS7 to CS1 High impedance High impedance H'00000 T2 T3 Figure D.1 Reset during Memory Access (Modes 1 and 2) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 921 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States Modes 3 and 4: Figure D.2 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during an external memory access in mode 3 or 4. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. AS, RD, HWR, LWR, and CS0 go high, and D15 to D0 go to the high-impedance state. The address bus is initialized to the low output level 2.5 clock cycles after the low level of RES is sampled. However, when PA4 to PA6 are used as address bus pins, or when P83 to P81 and PB0 to PB3 are used as CS output pins, they go to the high-impedance state at the same time as RES goes low. Clock pin P67/ goes to the output state at the next rise of after RES goes low. Access to external memory T1 P67/ RES Internal reset signal A20 to A0 CS0 AS, RD (read) HWR, LWR (write) D15 to D0 (write) I/O port, PA4/A23 to PA6/A21, CS7 to CS1 High impedance H'000000 T2 T3 High impedance Figure D.2 Reset during Memory Access (Modes 3 and 4) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 922 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States Mode 5: Figure D.3 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during an external memory access in mode 5. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. AS, RD, HWR, and LWR go high, and the address bus and D15 to D0 go to the high-impedance state. Clock pin P67/ goes to the output state at the next rise of after RES goes low. Access to external memory T1 P67/ RES Internal reset signal A23 to A0 AS, RD (read) HWR, LWR (write) D15 to D0 (write) I/O port, CS7 to CS1 High impedance High impedance High impedance T2 T3 Figure D.3 Reset during Memory Access (Mode 5) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 923 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix D Pin States Modes 6 and 7: Figure D.4 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during an operation in mode 6 or 7. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. Clock pin P67/ goes to the output state at the next rise of after RES goes low. P67/ RES Internal reset signal I/O port High impedance Figure D.4 Reset during Operation (Modes 6 and 7) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 924 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode 1. To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit set to 1 in SYSCR, drive the RES signal low 10 system clock cycles before the STBY signal goes low, as shown below. RES must remain low until STBY goes low (minimum delay from STBY low to RES high: 0 ns). STBY t1 10tcyc RES t2 0 ns 2. To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit cleared to 0 in SYSCR, RES does not have to be driven low as in (1). Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode: Drive the RES signal low approximately 100 ns before STBY goes high. STBY t 100 ns RES tOSC Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 925 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix F Product Code Lineup Appendix F Product Code Lineup Product Type H8/3067 On-chip flash memory Product Code 5 VR HD64F3067RF HD64F3067RTE HD64F3067RFP 3 VR HD64F3067RVF Mark Code HD64F3067RF HD64F3067RTE HD64F3067RFP HD64F3067RVF Package (Package Code) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) HD64F3067RVTE HD64F3067RVTE HD64F3067RVFP HD64F3067RVFP On-chip mask ROM 5V HD6433067F HD6433067TE HD6433067FP 3V HD6433067VF HD6433067VTE HD6433067VFP HD6433067(***)F HD6433067(***)TE HD6433067(***)FP HD6433067(***)VF HD6433067(***)VTE 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) HD6433067(***)VFP 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 926 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix F Product Code Lineup Product Type H8/3066 On-chip mask ROM 5V Product Code HD6433066F HD6433066TE HD6433066FP 3V HD6433066VF HD6433066VTE HD6433066VFP H8/3065 On-chip mask ROM 5V HD6433065F HD6433065TE HD6433065FP 3V HD6433065VF HD6433065VTE HD6433065VFP Mark Code HD6433066(***)F HD6433066(***)TE HD6433066(***)FP HD6433066(***)VF Package (Package Code) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) HD6433066(***)VTE 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) HD6433066(***)VFP 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) HD6433065(***)F HD6433065(***)TE HD6433065(***)FP HD6433065(***)VF 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100KA-A) HD6433065(***)VTE 100-pin TQFP (PTQP0100KA-A) HD6433065(***)VFP 100-pin QFP (PRQP0100JE-B) Note: For mask ROM versions, (***) is the ROM code. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 927 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix G Package Dimensions Appendix G Package Dimensions Figures G.1 show the PRQP0100KA-A package dimensions of the H8/3067 Group. Figure G.2 shows the PTQP0100KA-A package dimensions. Figure G.3 shows the PRQP0100JE-B package dimensions. JEITA Package Code P-QFP100-14x14-0.50 RENESAS Code PRQP0100KA-A Previous Code FP-100B/FP-100BV MASS[Typ.] 1.2g HD *1 D 75 51 76 50 bp b1 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH 2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. c1 *2 E HE c Terminal cross section ZE 100 26 Reference Symbol Dimension in Millimeters 1 ZD 25 F A1 L L1 Detail F e y *3 b p x M D E A2 HD HE A A1 bp b1 c c1 e x y ZD ZE L L1 Nom Max 14 14 2.70 15.7 16.0 16.3 15.7 16.0 16.3 3.05 0.00 0.12 0.25 0.17 0.22 0.27 0.20 0.12 0.17 0.22 0.15 0 8 0.5 0.08 0.10 1.0 1.0 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 Min A A2 Figure G.1 Package Dimensions (PRQP0100KA-A) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 928 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 c Appendix G Package Dimensions JEITA Package Code P-TQFP100-14x14-0.50 RENESAS Code PTQP0100KA-A Previous Code TFP-100B/TFP-100BV MASS[Typ.] 0.5g HD *1 D 75 51 76 50 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH 2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. bp b1 c1 *2 E HE c Terminal cross section ZE Reference Symbol Dimension in Millimeters 100 26 A2 1 ZD Index mark 25 F A1 L L1 Detail F e y * bp 3 x M D E A2 HD HE A A1 bp b1 c c1 e x y ZD ZE L L1 Nom Max 14 14 1.00 15.8 16.0 16.2 15.8 16.0 16.2 1.20 0.00 0.10 0.20 0.17 0.22 0.27 0.20 0.12 0.17 0.22 0.15 0 8 0.5 0.08 0.10 1.00 1.00 0.4 0.5 0.6 1.0 Min Figure G.2 Package Dimensions (PTQP0100KA-A) A Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 929 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 c Appendix G Package Dimensions JEITA Package Code P-QFP100-14x20-0.65 RENESAS Code PRQP0100JE-B Previous Code FP-100A/FP-100AV MASS[Typ.] 1.7g HD *1 D 80 51 81 50 bp b1 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH 2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. c1 ZE *2 E HE Terminal cross section c 100 31 Reference Symbol Dimension in Millimeters 1 ZD 30 F A1 L L1 Detail F e y *3 b p x M D E A2 HD HE A A1 bp b1 c c1 e x y ZD ZE L L1 Nom Max 20 14 2.70 24.4 24.8 25.2 18.4 18.8 19.2 3.10 0.00 0.20 0.30 0.24 0.32 0.40 0.30 0.12 0.17 0.22 0.15 0 10 0.65 0.13 0.15 0.58 0.83 1.0 1.2 1.4 2.4 Min A A2 Figure G.3 Package Dimensions (PRQP0100JE-B) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 930 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 c Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications H.1 Differences between H8/3067 and H8/3062 Group, H8/3048 Group, H8/3007 and H8/3006, and H8/3002 H8/3067, H8/3062 Group 16 MB ROM enabled expanded mode H8/3048 Group 1 MB ROM enabled expanded mode H8/3006, 3007 H8/3002 Item 1 Operating Mode 5 mode Mode 6 64 KB single-chip mode 16 MB ROM enabled expanded mode 30 36 30 2 Interrupt Internal interrupt 36 (H8/3067) controller sources 27 (H8/3062) Bus Burst ROM controller interface Yes (H8/3067) No (H8/3062) 3 No Yes No Idle cycle Yes insertion function Wait mode Wait state number setting Address output method 2 modes Per area No 4 modes Yes 2 modes No 4 modes Common to all areas Fixed Common Per area to all areas Fixed Choice of address update Fixed mode (mask ROM and flash memory R versions only) Area 2/3/4/5 (H8/3067 only) Area 3 No No 8 bit/9 bit 4 DRAM interface Connectable areas Area 2/3/4/5 Yes Yes 8 bit/9 bit/10 bit Area 3 No No 8 bit/9 bit Precharge cycle Yes (H8/3067 only) insertion function Fast page mode Yes (H8/3067 only) Address shift amount 8 bit/9 bit/10 bit (H8/3067 only) Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 931 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications H8/3067, H8/3062 Group 16-bit timers 16 bits x 3 6 pins 6 8-bit timers H8/3048 Group ITU Item 5 Timer functions Number of channels Pulse output Input capture External clock Internal clock Complementary PWM function Resetsynchronous PWM function H8/3006, 3007 16-bit timers 16 bits x 3 6 pins 6 8-bit timers H8/3002 ITU 8 bits x 4 16 bits x 5 (16 bits x 2) 4 pins (2 pins) 2 12 pins 10 8 bits x 4 16 bits x 5 (16 bits x 2) 4 pins (2 pins) 2 12 pins 10 4 systems (selectable) , /2, /4, /8 Yes Yes 4 systems 4 systems (selectable) (fixed) , /2, /4, /8 No No /8, /64, /8192 No No 4 systems 4 systems 4 systems (selectable) (selectable) (fixed) , /2, /4, /8 Yes Yes , /2, /4, /8 No No /8, /64, /8192 No No Buffer operation No Output initialization function PWM output Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No 3 4 (2) 5 3 4 (2) 5 4 channels DMAC activation 3 channels No (H8/3067 only) A/D conversion activation No Yes 8 sources 4 channels 3 channels No No 3 sources x5 4 kinds, ITU base Yes No 3 sources x3 Yes 8 sources No 3 sources x5 4 kinds, ITU base Yes Interrupt sources 3 sources x3 6 7 TPC WDT Time base Reset signal external output function Number of channels Smart card interface 3 kinds, 16-bit timer base Yes (except products with on-chip flash memory) 3 channels (H8/3067) 2 channels (H8/3062) Supported on all channels 3 kinds, 16-bit timer base Yes 8 SCI 2 channels 3 channels 2 channels Supported on SCI0 only Supported on all channels No Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 932 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications H8/3067, H8/3062 Group H8/3048 Group External trigger Item 9 10 H8/3006, 3007 External trigger/8-bit timer compare match H8/3002 External trigger A/D Conversion start External trigger/8-bit converter trigger input timer compare match Pin control pin /input port multiplexing output only /input port multiplexing output only A20 in 16 MB A20 / I/O port multiplexing A20 output ROM enabled expanded mode High-level output/highAddress bus, impedance selectable AS, RD, HWR, LWR, CS7-CS0, (RFSH: H8/3067 only) RFSH in software standby state CS7-CS0 in bus- High-impedance released state 11 Flash memory functions Program/erase voltage 12 V application unnecessary. Single-power-supply programming. 8 blocks High-level High-level output/highoutput impedance selectable (except CS0) Low-level output (CS0) High-level output 12 V application from off-chip 16 blocks High-impedance High-level output (except CS0) Low-level output (CS0) High-level output Block divisions Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 933 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications H.2 Comparison of Pin Functions of 100-Pin Package Products (PRQP0100KA-A, PTQP0100KA-A) Pin Arrangement of Each Product (PRQP0100KA-A, PTQP0100KA-A) ROMless Products H8/3006, 3007 Vcc PB0/TP8/TMO0/ CS7 H8/3002 Vcc PB0/TP8/ TIOCA3 Table H.1 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 On-chip-ROM Products H8/3067 Group H8/3062 Group H8/3048 Group H8/3042 Group Vcc PB0/TP8/TMO0/ CS7 Vcc PB0/TP8/TMO0/ CS7 Vcc PB0/TP8/ TIOCA3 Vcc PB0/TP8/ TIOCA3 PB1/TP9/ TIOCB3 PB2/TP10/ TIOCA4 PB3/TP11/ TIOCB4 PB4/TP12/ TOCXA4 PB5/TP13/ TOCXB4 PB6/TP14/ DREQ0 PB1/TP9/TMIO1/ PB1/TP9/TMIO1/ PB1/TP9/ DREQ0/CS6 CS6 TIOCB3 PB2/TP10/TMO2/ PB2/TP10/TMO2/ PB2/TP10/ CS5 CS5 TIOCA4 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/DREQ1/ CS4 PB4/TP12/ UCAS PB5/TP13/ LCAS/SCK2 PB6/TP14/TxD2 PB7/TP15/RxD2 RESO/FWE* Vss P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/SCK0/IRQ4 P95/SCK1/IRQ5 P40/D0 P41/D1 P42/D2 P43/D3 Vss P44/D4 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/CS4 PB4/TP12 PB5/TP13 PB6/TP14 PB7/TP15 RESO/FWE* Vss P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/SCK0/IRQ4 P95/SCK1/IRQ5 P40/D0 P41/D1 P42/D2 P43/D3 Vss P44/D4 PB3/TP11/ TIOCB4 PB4/TP12/ TOCXA4 PB5/TP13/ TOCXB4 PB6/TP14/ DREQ0/CS7 PB1/TP9/TMIO1/ PB1/TP9/ DREQ0/CS6 TIOCB3 PB2/TP10/TMO2/ PB2/TP10/ CS5 TIOCA4 PB3/TP11/ TMIO3/DREQ1/ CS4 PB4/TP12/ UCAS PB5/TP13/ LCAS/SCK2 PB6/TP14/TxD2 PB7/TP15/RxD2 RESO Vss P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/SCK0/IRQ4 P95/SCK1/IRQ5 P40/D0 P41/D1 P42/D2 P43/D3 Vss P44/D4 PB3/TP11/ TIOCB4 PB4/TP12/ TOCXA4 PB5/TP13/ TOCXB4 PB6/TP14/ DREQ0 PB7/TP15/ DREQ1/ADTRG RESO Vss P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/SCK0/IRQ4 P95/SCK1/IRQ5 P40/D0 P41/D1 P42/D2 P43/D3 Vss P44/D4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PB7/TP15/ PB7/TP15/ DREQ1/ADTRG DREQ1/ADTRG RESO/VPP* Vss P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/SCK0/IRQ4 P95/SCK1/IRQ5 P40/D0 P41/D1 P42/D2 P43/D3 Vss P44/D4 RESO Vss P90/TxD0 P91/TxD1 P92/RxD0 P93/RxD1 P94/SCK0/IRQ4 P95/SCK1/IRQ5 P40/D0 P41/D1 P42/D2 P43/D3 Vss P44/D4 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 934 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications Pin No. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 On-chip-ROM Products H8/3067 Group H8/3062 Group H8/3048 Group H8/3042 Group P45/D5 P46/D6 P47/D7 P30/D8 P31/D9 P32/D10 P33/D11 P34/D12 P35/D13 P36/D14 P37/D15 Vcc P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 Vss P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 P27/A15 P50/A16 P51/A17 P52/A18 P53/A19 P45/D5 P46/D6 P47/D7 P30/D8 P31/D9 P32/D10 P33/D11 P34/D12 P35/D13 P36/D14 P37/D15 Vcc P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 Vss P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 P27/A15 P50/A16 P51/A17 P52/A18 P53/A19 P45/D5 P46/D6 P47/D7 P30/D8 P31/D9 P32/D10 P33/D11 P34/D12 P35/D13 P36/D14 P37/D15 Vcc P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 Vss P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 P27/A15 P50/A16 P51/A17 P52/A18 P53/A19 P45/D5 P46/D6 P47/D7 P30/D8 P31/D9 P32/D10 P33/D11 P34/D12 P35/D13 P36/D14 P37/D15 Vcc P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 Vss P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13 P26/A14 P27/A15 P50/A16 P51/A17 P52/A18 P53/A19 ROMless Products H8/3006, 3007 P45/D5 P46/D6 P47/D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Vcc A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Vss A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 H8/3002 P45/D5 P46/D6 P47/D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Vcc A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Vss A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 935 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications Pin No. 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 On-chip-ROM Products H8/3067 Group H8/3062 Group H8/3048 Group H8/3042 Group Vss P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK P67/ STBY RES NMI Vss EXTAL XTAL Vcc P63/AS P64/RD P65/HWR P66/LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVcc VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK P67/ STBY RES NMI Vss EXTAL XTAL Vcc P63/AS P64/RD P65/HWR P66/LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVcc VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK STBY RES NMI Vss EXTAL XTAL Vcc P63/AS P64/RD P65/HWR P66/LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVcc VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK STBY RES NMI Vss EXTAL XTAL Vcc P63/AS P64/RD P65/HWR P66/LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVcc VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVss ROMless Products H8/3006, 3007 Vss P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK P67/ STBY RES NMI Vss EXTAL XTAL Vcc AS RD HWR LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVcc VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6/DA0 P77/AN7/DA1 AVss H8/3002 Vss P60/WAIT P61/BREQ P62/BACK STBY RES NMI Vss EXTAL XTAL Vcc AS RD HWR LWR MD0 MD1 MD2 AVcc VREF P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76/AN6 P77/AN7 AVss P80/RFSH/IRQ0 P80/IRQ0 P81/CS3/IRQ1 P81/CS3/IRQ1 P80/RFSH/IRQ0 P80/RFSH/IRQ0 P81/CS3/IRQ1 P81/CS3/IRQ1 P80/RFSH/IRQ0 P80/RFSH/IRQ0 P81/CS3/IRQ1 P81/CS3/IRQ1 Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 936 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications Pin No. 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 On-chip-ROM Products H8/3067 Group H8/3062 Group H8/3048 Group H8/3042 Group P82/CS2/IRQ2 P83/CS1/IRQ3/ ADTRG P84/CS0 Vss PA0/TP0/ TEND0/TCLKA PA1/TP1/ TEND1/TCLKB P82/CS2/IRQ2 P83/CS1/IRQ3/ ADTRG P84/CS0 Vss P82/CS2/IRQ2 P83/CS1/IRQ3 P84/CS0 Vss P82/CS2/IRQ2 P83/CS1/IRQ3 P84/CS0 Vss PA0/TP0/ TEND0/TCLKA PA1/TP1/ TEND1/TCLKB ROMless Products H8/3006, 3007 P82/CS2/IRQ2 P83/CS1/IRQ3/ ADTRG P84/CS0 Vss PA0/TP0/ TEND0/TCLKA PA1/TP1/ TEND1/TCLKB H8/3002 P82/CS2/IRQ2 P83/CS1/IRQ3 P84/CS0 Vss PA0/TP0/ TEND0/TCLKA PA1/TP1/ TEND1/TCLKB PA0/TP0/TCLKA PA0/TP0/ TEND0/TCLKA PA1/TP1/TCLKB PA1/TP1/ TEND1/TCLKB PA2/TP2/ PA2/TP2/ PA2/TP2/ PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/TCLKC TIOCA0/TCLKC TIOCA0/TCLKC TIOCA0/TCLKC PA3/TP3/ PA3/TP3/ PA3/TP3/ PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/TCLKD TIOCB0/TCLKD TIOCB0/TCLKD TIOCB0/TCLKD PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/A22 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/A21 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2/A20 PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/A22 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/A21 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2/A20 PA4/TP4/ PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/CS6/A23 TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/ PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/CS5/A22 TIOCB1/A22 PA6/TP6/ PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/CS4/A21 TIOCA2/A21 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2/A20 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2/A20 PA2/TP2/ PA2/TP2/ TIOCA0/TCLKC TIOCA0/TCLKC PA3/TP3/ PA3/TP3/ TIOCB0/TCLKD TIOCB0/TCLKD PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/A22 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/A21 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2/A20 PA4/TP4/ TIOCA1/A23 PA5/TP5/ TIOCB1/A22 PA6/TP6/ TIOCA2/A21 PA7/TP7/ TIOCB2/A20 Note: * Functions as RESO in the mask ROM versions, and as FWE in the flash memory and flash memory R versions. Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 937 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Appendix H Comparison of H8/300H Series Product Specifications Rev. 4.00 Jan 26, 2006 page 938 of 938 REJ09B0276-0400 Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer Hardware Manual H8/3067 Group Publication Date: 1st Edition, March 1998 Rev.4.00, January 26, 2006 Published by: Sales Strategic Planning Div. Renesas Technology Corp. Edited by: Customer Support Department Global Strategic Communication Div. Renesas Solutions Corp. 2006. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan RENESAS SALES OFFICES Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information. Renesas Technology America, Inc. 450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K. Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900 Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Unit 205, AZIA Center, No.133 Yincheng Rd (n), Pudong District, Shanghai 200120, China Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7898 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd. 7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, 1 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2730-6071 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd. 10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 2713-2999 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd. 1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001 Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd. Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145 http://www.renesas.com Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jalan Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510 Colophon 5.0 H8/3067 Group Hardware Manual |
Price & Availability of H83065
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |